1. SOLICITATION NO.2. TYPE OF SOLICITATION3. DATE ...
1. SOLICITATION NO.2. TYPE OF SOLICITATION3. DATE ISSUEDPAGE OF PAGES4. CONTRACT NO.5. REQUISITION/PURCHASE REQUEST NO.6. PROJECT NO.7. ISSUED BYCODE8. ADDRESS OFFER TOA. NAMEB. TELEPHONE NO. (Include area code) (NO COLLECT CALLS)10. THE GOVERNMENT REQUIRES PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK DESCRIBED IN THESE DOCUMENTS (Title, identifying no., date):12A. THE CONTRACTOR MUST FURNISH ANY REQUIRED PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS? (If "YES," indicate within how many calendar days after award in Item 12B.)12B. CALENDAR DAYS13. ADDITIONAL SOLICITATION REQUIREMENTS:STANDARD FORM 1442 (REV. 4-85)STANDARD FORM 1442Prescribed by GSA YFAR (48 CFR) 52.236-1(d)NSN 7540-01-155-3212SOLICITATION, OFFERAND AWARD(Construction, Alteration, or Repair)SOLICITATION, OFFERAND AWARD(Construction, Alteration, or Repair)SOLICITATIONSOLICITATIONIMPORTANT - The "offer" section on the reverse must be fully completed by offeror.9. FOR INFORMATION CALL:NOTE: In sealed bid solicitations "offer" and "offeror" mean "bid" and "bidder".SEALED BID (IFB)NEGOTIATED (RFP)11. The Contractor shall begin performance within ____________ calendar days and complete it within ____________calendar days after receivingaward,notice to proceed. This performance period ismandatory,negotiable. (See _____________________________.)YESNOA.Sealed offers in original and ___________________copies to perform the work required are due at the place specified in Item 8 by _____________(hour) local time _____________________ (date). If this is a sealed bid solicitation, offers must be publicly opened at that time. Sealedenvelopes containing offers shall be marked to show the offeror's name and address, the solicitation number, the date and time offers are dueB.An offer guaranteeis,is not required.C.All offers are subject to the (1) work requirements, and (2) other provisions and clauses incorporated in the solicitation in full text or by reference .D.Offers providing less than _______________________ calendar days for Government acceptance after the date offers are due will not beconsidered and will be rejected. 1 804VA245-13-B-0020X12-07-2012613-13-1-653-0001613-11-107Department of Veterans AffairsVAMC (613)VISN 5 Contract Satellite Office510 Butler Avenue, Building 308BMartinsburg WV 25405Same as Block 7This is a 100% SDVOSB Set-AsideNAICS 236220 Size Standard $33.5M52.232-18 AVAILABILITY OF FUNDS Kathryn Leatherman304-263-0811 ext. 2083Base Bid - Bid Item No, 1: Furnish all labor, tools, materials, equipment and supervision required to perform work associated with 411A Renovation Project #613-11-107 at the VA Medical Center, 510 Butler Avenue, Martinsburg,WV 25405. Work includes but is not limited to general construction, alterations, mechanical and electrical work,structural modifications, necessary removal of existing construction and certain other items in accordancewith the drawings and specifications. Completion time: 180 daysA single award will be made on Item No. 1, but in the event the offer exceeds the funds available, a single award willbe made on Item No. 2, Item No. 3 or Item No. 4, in that order, based on available funding. Offerors should quote aprice on each item listed.Bid Item No. 2 - Deductive Bid Alternate #1: All work as noted in Base Bid except replace groundwater source heat pumpwith split system air conditioning unit with a supplemental steam coil. Completion time: 168 daysBid Item No. 3 - Deductive Bid Alternate #2: All work as noted in Base Bid except replace radiant floor system and allcomponents including: geothermal electric water heater, pump and air seperator, with 19mm (3/4") plywood subfloor. Completion time: 175 daysBid Item No. 4 - Deductive Bid Alternate #3: All work as noted in Base Bid except delete the replacement of the existingporch, porch roof, railings, stairs, roof, gutters and downspouts at west end of building with new. Completion time:175 daysBid Item No. 5 - Deductive Bid Alternate #4: All work as noted in Base Bid except delete new opening in south wall andinstall a new window in Storage Room 411A-14. Completion time: 180 daysAward will be made to the responsive/responsible bidder whose bid, conforming to the invitation, will be mostadvantageous to the Government, considering only bid price. Award shall not be made until all required approvalshave been obtained and the award otherwise conforms with FAR 14.103-2.A pre-bid site visit is scheduled for Thursday, December 13, 2012 at 1:00PM. Attendance to the site visit is urged andexpected.Normal work hours are Monday through Friday, 8:00AM - 4:30PM local time excluding weekends and National holidays (NewYear's Day, Martin Luther King Day, President's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Columbus Day, Veteran'sDay, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day) and any other day specifically designated by the President of the United States.10TBDXX52.211-10X15 13:00PM01-08-2013X120PART I - THE SCHEDULE 1SECTION A - SOLICITATION/CONTRACT FORM 804SF 1442 SOLICITATION, OFFER, AND AWARD (Construction, Alteration, or Repair)14. NAME AND ADDRESS OF OFFEROR15. TELEPHONE NO.16. REMITTANCE ADDRESSCODEFACILITY CODE17. The offeror agrees to perform the work required at the prices specified below in strict accordance with the terms of the solicitation, if this offer isaccepted by the Government in writing within __________ calendar days after the date offers are due.AMOUNTS18. The offeror agrees to furnish any required performance and payment bonds.19. ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF AMENDMENTSAMENDMENT NO.DATE20A. NAME AND TITLE OF PERSON AUTHORIZED TO SIGN OFFER20B. SIGNATURE20C. OFFER DATE21. ITEMS ACCEPTED:22. AMOUNT23. ACCOUNTING AND APPROPRIATION DATA24. SUBMIT INVOICES TO ADDRESS SHOWN INITEM25. OTHER THAN FULL AND OPEN COMPETITION PURSUANT TO10 U.S.C. 2304(c)( )41 U.S.C. 253(c) ( )26. ADMINISTERED BYCODE27. PAYMENT WILL BE MADE BYPHONE:FAX:28. NEGOTIATED AGREEMENT29. AWARDYourContractor agreesoffer on this solicitation, is hereby accepted as to the items listed. Thisto furnish and deliver all items or perform all work, requisitions identifiedaward consummates the contract. which consists of (a) the Governmenton this form and any continuation sheets for the consideration stated insolicitation and your offer, and (b) this contract award. No further cont-this contract. The rights and obligations of the parties to this contractractual document is necessary.shall be governed by (a) this contract award, (b) the solicitation, and (c)the clauses, representations, certifications, and specifications incorporatedby reference in or attached to this contract.30A. NAME AND TITLE OF CONTRACTOR OR PERSON AUTHORIZED31A. NAME OF CONTRACTING OFFICERTO SIGN30B. SIGNATURE30C. DATE31B. UNITED STATES OF AMERICABYOFFERAWARDSTANDARD FORM 1442(REV. 4-85)BACK(Include ZIP Code)(Include area code)(Include only if different than Item 14)(Insert any number equal to or greater thanthe minimum requirement stated in Item 13D. Failure to insert any number means the offeror accepts the minimum in Item 13D.)(The offeror acknowledges receipt of amendments to the solicitation - give number and date of each)(Type or print)(4 copies unless otherwise specified) X 38 U.S.C 8127(C)(Type or print)(Type or print)(Contractor is required to sign thisdocument and return _______ copies to issuing office.)(Contractor is not required to sign this document.)(Must be fully completed by offeror)(To be completed by Government)CONTRACTING OFFICER WILL COMPLETE ITEM 28 OR 29 AS APPLICABLEBase Bid: $_____________________Bid Item No. 2: $________________________Bid Item No. 3: $________________________Bid Item No. 4: $______________________Department of Veterans AffairsVAMC (613)VISN 5 Contract Satellite Office510 Butler Avenue, Building 308BMartinsburg WV 25405Department of Veterans AffairsVAFSCAttn: East TeamPo Box 149971Austin TX 78714Kathryn C. LeathermanContract SpecialistTable of Contents TOC \o "1-4" \f \h \z \u \x PART I - THE SCHEDULE PAGEREF _Toc342659341 \h 1SECTION A - SOLICITATION/CONTRACT FORM PAGEREF _Toc342659342 \h 1SF 1442 SOLICITATION, OFFER, AND AWARD (Construction, Alteration, or Repair) PAGEREF _Toc342659343 \h 1INFORMATION REGARDING BIDDING MATERIAL, BID GUARANTEE AND BONDS PAGEREF _Toc342659344 \h 13A.1 52.214-3 AMENDMENTS TO INVITATIONS FOR BIDS (DEC 1989) PAGEREF _Toc342659345 \h 16A.2 52.214-4 FALSE STATEMENTS IN BIDS (APR 1984) PAGEREF _Toc342659346 \h 17A.3 52.214-5 SUBMISSION OF BIDS (MAR 1997) PAGEREF _Toc342659347 \h 17A.4 52.214-6 EXPLANATION TO PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS (APR 1984) PAGEREF _Toc342659348 \h 17A.5 52.214-7 LATE SUBMISSIONS, MODIFICATIONS, AND WITHDRAWALS OF BIDS (NOV 1999) PAGEREF _Toc342659349 \h 18A.6 52.214-18 PREPARATION OF BIDS--CONSTRUCTION (APR 1984) PAGEREF _Toc342659350 \h 18A.7 52.214-19 CONTRACT AWARD--SEALED BIDDING--CONSTRUCTION (AUG 1996) PAGEREF _Toc342659351 \h 19A.8 52.214-26 AUDIT AND RECORDS--SEALED BIDDING (OCT 2010) PAGEREF _Toc342659352 \h 19A.9 52.214-27 PRICE REDUCTION FOR DEFECTIVE CERTIFIED COST OR PRICING DATA--MODIFICATIONS-- SEALED BIDDING (AUG 2011) PAGEREF _Toc342659353 \h 20A.10 52.214-28 SUBCONTRACTOR CERTIFIED COST OR PRICING DATA-- MODIFICATIONS--SEALED BIDDING (OCT 2010) PAGEREF _Toc342659354 \h 22A.11 52.214-34 SUBMISSION OF OFFERS IN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE (APR 1991) PAGEREF _Toc342659355 \h 22A.12 52.214-35 SUBMISSION OF OFFERS IN U.S. CURRENCY (APR 1991) PAGEREF _Toc342659356 \h 22A.13 52.216-1 TYPE OF CONTRACT (APR 1984) PAGEREF _Toc342659357 \h 22A.14 52.222-5 DAVIS-BACON ACT--SECONDARY SITE OF THE WORK (JUL 2005) PAGEREF _Toc342659358 \h 23A.15 52.222-23 NOTICE OF REQUIREMENT FOR AFFIRMATIVE ACTION TO ENSURE EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY FOR CONSTRUCTION (FEB 1999) PAGEREF _Toc342659359 \h 23A.16 52.225-10 NOTICE OF BUY AMERICAN ACT REQUIREMENT -- CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS (FEB 2009) PAGEREF _Toc342659360 \h 24A.17 52.228-1 BID GUARANTEE (SEP 1996) PAGEREF _Toc342659361 \h 25A.18 52.233-2 SERVICE OF PROTEST (SEP 2006) PAGEREF _Toc342659362 \h 25A.19 52.236-27 SITE VISIT (CONSTRUCTION) (FEB 1995) ALTERNATE I (FEB 1995) PAGEREF _Toc342659363 \h 26A.20 852.211-72 TECHNICAL INDUSTRY STANDARDS (JAN 2008) PAGEREF _Toc342659364 \h 26A.21 VAAR 852.214-70 CAUTION TO BIDDERS--BID ENVELOPES (JAN 2008) PAGEREF _Toc342659365 \h 27A.22 VAAR 852.228-72 ASSISTING SERVICE-DISABLED VETERAN-OWNED AND VETERAN-OWNED SMALL BUSINESSES IN OBTAINING BONDS (DEC 2009) PAGEREF _Toc342659366 \h 27A.23 VAAR 852.233-70 PROTEST CONTENT/ALTERNATIVE DISPUTE RESOLUTION (JAN 2008) PAGEREF _Toc342659367 \h 27A.24 VAAR 852.233-71 ALTERNATE PROTEST PROCEDURE (JAN 1998) PAGEREF _Toc342659368 \h 28A.25 VAAR 852.270-1 REPRESENTATIVES OF CONTRACTING OFFICERS (JAN 2008) PAGEREF _Toc342659369 \h 28REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS PAGEREF _Toc342659370 \h 293.1 52.204-8 ANNUAL REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS (MAY 2012) PAGEREF _Toc342659371 \h 293.2 52.209-7 INFORMATION REGARDING RESPONSIBILITY MATTERS (FEB 2012) PAGEREF _Toc342659372 \h 323.3 52.225-20 PROHIBITION ON CONDUCTING RESTRICTED BUSINESS OPERATIONS IN SUDAN--CERTIFICATION (AUG 2009) PAGEREF _Toc342659373 \h 33GENERAL CONDITIONS PAGEREF _Toc342659374 \h 354.1 52.204-7 CENTRAL CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION (AUG 2012) PAGEREF _Toc342659375 \h 354.2 52.209-9 UPDATES OF PUBLICLY AVAILABLE INFORMATION REGARDING RESPONSIBILITY MATTERS (FEB 2012) PAGEREF _Toc342659376 \h 374.3 52.211-2 AVAILABILITY OF SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS, AND DATA ITEM DESCRIPTIONS LISTED IN THE ACQUISITION STREAMLINING AND STANDARDIZATION INFORMATION SYSTEM (ASSIST) (JAN 2006) PAGEREF _Toc342659377 \h 384.4 52.211-10 COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION, AND COMPLETION OF WORK (APR 1984) ALTERNATE I (APR 1984) PAGEREF _Toc342659378 \h 384.5 52.219-28 POST-AWARD SMALL BUSINESS PROGRAM REREPRESENTATION (APR 2012) PAGEREF _Toc342659379 \h 384.6 52.222-40 NOTIFICATION OF EMPLOYEE RIGHTS UNDER THE NATIONAL LABOR RELATIONS ACT (DEC 2010) PAGEREF _Toc342659380 \h 404.7 52.223-15 ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN ENERGY-CONSUMING PRODUCTS (DEC 2007) PAGEREF _Toc342659381 \h 414.8 52.225-9 BUY AMERICAN ACT--CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS (SEP 2010) PAGEREF _Toc342659382 \h 424.9 52.228-5 INSURANCE - WORK ON A GOVERNMENT INSTALLATION (JAN 1997) PAGEREF _Toc342659383 \h 454.10 SUPPLEMENTAL INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS PAGEREF _Toc342659384 \h 454.11 VAAR 852.203-70 COMMERCIAL ADVERTISING (JAN 2008) PAGEREF _Toc342659385 \h 464.12 852.211-75 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS (JAN 2008) PAGEREF _Toc342659386 \h 464.13 VAAR 852.219-10 VA NOTICE OF TOTAL SERVICE-DISABLED VETERAN-OWNED SMALL BUSINESS SET-ASIDE (DEC 2009) PAGEREF _Toc342659387 \h 464.14 VAAR 852.228-70 BOND PREMIUM ADJUSTMENT (JAN 2008) PAGEREF _Toc342659388 \h 474.15 VAAR 852.236-71 SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR CONSTRUCTION (JUL 2002) PAGEREF _Toc342659389 \h 474.16 VAAR 852.236-74 INSPECTION OF CONSTRUCTION (JUL 2002) PAGEREF _Toc342659390 \h 484.17 VAAR 852.236-76 CORRESPONDENCE (APR 1984) PAGEREF _Toc342659391 \h 484.18 VAAR 852.236-77 REFERENCE TO "STANDARDS" (JUL 2002) PAGEREF _Toc342659392 \h 484.19 VAAR 852.236-78 GOVERNMENT SUPERVISION (APR 1984) PAGEREF _Toc342659393 \h 484.20 VAAR 852.236-79 DAILY REPORT OF WORKERS AND MATERIAL (APR 1984) PAGEREF _Toc342659394 \h 494.21 VAAR 852.236-80 SUBCONTRACTS AND WORK COORDINATION (APR 1984) PAGEREF _Toc342659395 \h 494.22 VAAR 852.236-82 PAYMENTS UNDER FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS (WITHOUT NAS) (APR 1984) PAGEREF _Toc342659396 \h 494.23 VAAR 852.236-84 SCHEDULE OF WORK PROGRESS (NOV 1984) PAGEREF _Toc342659397 \h 524.24 VAAR 852.236-85 SUPPLEMENTARY LABOR STANDARDS PROVISIONS (APR 1984) PAGEREF _Toc342659398 \h 524.25 VAAR 852.236-86 WORKER'S COMPENSATION (JAN 2008) PAGEREF _Toc342659399 \h 534.26 VAAR 852.236-87 ACCIDENT PREVENTION (SEP 1993) PAGEREF _Toc342659400 \h 534.27 VAAR 852.236-88 CONTRACT CHANGES--SUPPLEMENT (JUL 2002) PAGEREF _Toc342659401 \h 534.28 VAAR 852.236-89 BUY AMERICAN ACT (JAN 2008) PAGEREF _Toc342659402 \h 554.29 VAAR 852.236-91 SPECIAL NOTES (JUL 2002) PAGEREF _Toc342659403 \h 554.30 VAAR 852.246-74 SPECIAL WARRANTIES (JAN 2008) PAGEREF _Toc342659404 \h 564.31 VAAR 852.273-76 ELECTRONIC INVOICE SUBMISSION (Interim - October 2008) PAGEREF _Toc342659405 \h 564.32 IT CONTRACT SECURITY PAGEREF _Toc342659406 \h 574.33 52.252-2 CLAUSES INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE (FEB 1998) PAGEREF _Toc342659407 \h 66SECTION 01 00 00GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PAGEREF _Toc342659408 \h 68SECTION 01 32 16.15Project SCHEDULES PAGEREF _Toc342659409 \h 100SECTION 01 33 23SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES PAGEREF _Toc342659410 \h 107SECTION 01 42 19REFERENCE STANDARDS PAGEREF _Toc342659411 \h 111SECTION 01 45 29TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PAGEREF _Toc342659412 \h 116SECTION 01 57 19TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS PAGEREF _Toc342659413 \h 119SECTION 01 58 16TEMPORARY INTERIOR SIGNAGE PAGEREF _Toc342659414 \h 125SECTION 01 74 19CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PAGEREF _Toc342659415 \h 126SECTION 01 81 11 PAGEREF _Toc342659416 \h 131SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS PAGEREF _Toc342659417 \h 131SECTION 02 41 00DEMOLITION PAGEREF _Toc342659418 \h 141SECTION 02 82 11TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT PAGEREF _Toc342659419 \h 143SECTION 02 82 13.19ASBESTOS FLOOR TILE AND MASTIC ABATEMENT PAGEREF _Toc342659420 \h 202SECTION 02 83 33.13LEAD-BASED PAINT REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL PAGEREF _Toc342659421 \h 252SECTION 03 30 00CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PAGEREF _Toc342659422 \h 261SECTION 05 50 00METAL FABRICATIONS PAGEREF _Toc342659423 \h 279SECTION 06 10 00ROUGH CARPENTRY PAGEREF _Toc342659424 \h 287SECTION 06 20 00FINISH CARPENTRY PAGEREF _Toc342659425 \h 293SECTION 07 21 13THERMAL INSULATION PAGEREF _Toc342659426 \h 303SECTION 07 31 13ASPHALT SHINGLES PAGEREF _Toc342659427 \h 307SECTION 07 46 00 PAGEREF _Toc342659428 \h 310SIDING PAGEREF _Toc342659429 \h 310SECTION 07 60 00FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PAGEREF _Toc342659430 \h 313SECTION 07 84 00FIRESTOPPING PAGEREF _Toc342659431 \h 323SECTION 07 92 00JOINT SEALANTS PAGEREF _Toc342659432 \h 326SECTION 08 11 13HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PAGEREF _Toc342659433 \h 333SECTION 08 14 00Interior WOOD DOORS PAGEREF _Toc342659434 \h 337SECTION 08 31 13ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PAGEREF _Toc342659435 \h 342SECTION 08 51 13ALUMINUM WINDOWS PAGEREF _Toc342659436 \h 345SECTION 08 71 00DOOR HARDWARE PAGEREF _Toc342659437 \h 352SECTION 08 80 00GLAZING PAGEREF _Toc342659438 \h 365SECTION 08 90 00LOUVERS AND VENTS PAGEREF _Toc342659439 \h 372SECTION 09 06 00SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES PAGEREF _Toc342659440 \h 376SECTION 09 22 16NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PAGEREF _Toc342659441 \h 380SECTION 09 29 00GYPSUM BOARD PAGEREF _Toc342659442 \h 385SECTION 09 30 13CERAMIC/PORCELAIN TILING PAGEREF _Toc342659443 \h 391SECTION 09 51 00ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PAGEREF _Toc342659444 \h 401SECTION 09 65 13RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PAGEREF _Toc342659445 \h 407SECTION 09 65 19RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PAGEREF _Toc342659446 \h 411SECTION 09 68 00CARPETING PAGEREF _Toc342659447 \h 416SECTION 09 91 00PAINTING PAGEREF _Toc342659448 \h 421SECTION 10 28 00TOILET ACCESSORIES PAGEREF _Toc342659449 \h 435SECTION 10 44 13FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS PAGEREF _Toc342659450 \h 441SECTION 21 05 11 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PAGEREF _Toc342659451 \h 443SECTION 21 13 13 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS (DRY-PIPE SYSTEM) PAGEREF _Toc342659453 \h 448SECTION 22 05 11 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PAGEREF _Toc342659455 \h 453SECTION 22 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PAGEREF _Toc342659457 \h 468SECTION 22 05 23 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PAGEREF _Toc342659459 \h 471SECTION 22 07 11 PLUMBING INSULATION PAGEREF _Toc342659461 \h 475SECTION 22 11 00 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PAGEREF _Toc342659463 \h 490SECTION 22 14 00 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PAGEREF _Toc342659465 \h 508SECTION 22 33 00 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PAGEREF _Toc342659467 \h 515SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES PAGEREF _Toc342659469 \h 520SECTION 23 05 11 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION PAGEREF _Toc342659471 \h 525SECTION 23 05 12 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION EQUIPMENT PAGEREF _Toc342659473 \h 547SECTION 23 05 41 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PAGEREF _Toc342659475 \h 551SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PAGEREF _Toc342659477 \h 559SECTION 23 07 11 HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION PAGEREF _Toc342659479 \h 566SECTION 23 09 23 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC PAGEREF _Toc342659481 \h 588SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING PAGEREF _Toc342659483 \h 614SECTION 23 21 23 HYDRONIC PUMPS PAGEREF _Toc342659485 \h 630SECTION 23 22 13 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING PAGEREF _Toc342659487 \h 634SECTION 23 22 23 STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS PAGEREF _Toc342659489 \h 644SECTION 23?23?00 REFRIGERANT PIPING PAGEREF _Toc342659491 \h 653SECTION 23 25 00 HVAC WATER TREATMENT PAGEREF _Toc342659493 \h 660SECTION 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PAGEREF _Toc342659495 \h 663SECTION 23 34 00 HVAC FANS PAGEREF _Toc342659497 \h 674SECTION 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PAGEREF _Toc342659499 \h 679SECTION 23 40 00 HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES PAGEREF _Toc342659501 \h 682SECTION 23 72 00 AIR-to-air ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT PAGEREF _Toc342659503 \h 686SECTION 23?81?00 DECENTRALIZED UNITARY HVAC EQUIPMENT PAGEREF _Toc342659505 \h 690SECTION 23 81 43 AIR-SOURCE UNITARY Heat pumps PAGEREF _Toc342659507 \h 699SECTION 23 81 46 WATER-SOURCE UNITARY Heat pumps PAGEREF _Toc342659509 \h 705SECTION 23 82 00 CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS PAGEREF _Toc342659511 \h 713SECTION 23 82 16 AIR COILS PAGEREF _Toc342659512 \h 715SECTION 23 84 00 HUMIDITY CONTROL EQUIPMENT PAGEREF _Toc342659514 \h 718SECTION 26 05 11 REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS PAGEREF _Toc342659516 \h 726SECTION 26 05 21 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) PAGEREF _Toc342659518 \h 733SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PAGEREF _Toc342659520 \h 738SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PAGEREF _Toc342659522 \h 744SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROLS PAGEREF _Toc342659524 \h 753SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS PAGEREF _Toc342659526 \h 757SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PAGEREF _Toc342659528 \h 761SECTION 26 29 11 MOTOR STARTERS PAGEREF _Toc342659530 \h 765SECTION 26 29 21 DISCONNECT SWITCHES PAGEREF _Toc342659532 \h 771SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING PAGEREF _Toc342659534 \h 774SECTION 27 05 11 REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS PAGEREF _Toc342659536 \h 784SECTION 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PAGEREF _Toc342659538 \h 788SECTION 27 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PAGEREF _Toc342659540 \h 795SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PAGEREF _Toc342659542 \h 804SECTION 00 01 15LIST OF DRAWING SHEETSThe drawings listed below accompanying this specification form a part of the contract. GENERALG001COVER SHEETG002BUILDING & GENERAL INFORMATIONSTRUCTURALS001STRUCTURAL NOTESS101CRAWLSPACE FRAMING PLANS102FIRST FLOOR FRAMING PLANS103ROOF FRAMING PLANS501SECTIONS AND DETAILSS502SECTIONS AND DETAILSS503SECTIONS AND DETAILSARCHITECTURALAD100FIRST FLOOR - DEMOLITION PLANA100FIRST FLOOR - NEW WORK PLANA200FIRST FLOOR - REFLECTED CEILING PLANA300EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS & BUILDING SECTIONSA301STAIR & PORCH DETAILS (ALTERNATE #1)A400INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND MILLWORK DETAILSA500DETAILS, PARTITION TYPES, DOOR & WINDOW SCHEDULEAI100FIRST FLOOR - FINISH PLANMECHANICALMH001MECHANICAL COVER SHEETMH101MECHANICAL DEMOLITION - HVACMH-102MECHANICAL NEW WORK - HVACMH-103MECHANICAL NEW WORK – HVAC (ALTERNATE #1)MH-104MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEMATICSMH-105MECHANICAL NEW WORK - RADIANT FLOOR LAYOUTMH-106MECHANICAL NEW WORK - RADIANT FLOOR ZONINGMH-107MECHANICAL NEW WORK - GEOTHERMAL SITE PLANMH-201MECHANICAL SCHEDULESMH-301MECHANICAL DETAILSMH-302MECHANICAL DETAILSMH-401AUTOMATIC CONTROLSPLUMBINGPL101PLUMBING DEMOLITIONPL102PLUMBING NEW WORKPL201PLUMBING DETAILS AND SCHEDULESELECTRICALES001ELECTRICAL LEGEND, CONVENTIONS AND ABBREVIATIONSES101ELECTRICAL NEW WORK - LIGHTINGES201ELECTRICAL NEW WORK - POWER, COMM, FIRE ALARMES301SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS & PANELBOARD SCHEDULESES401ELECTRICAL DETAILS END INFORMATION REGARDING BIDDING MATERIAL, BID GUARANTEE AND BONDS (a) Bidding materials may be obtained at . (b) Subcontractors, material firms and others interested in preparing subbids may view the interested parties list at to obtain a list of organizations, such as Builders Exchanges, Chambers of Commerce, Contractors and others, who have received bidding materials. (c) A bid guarantee is required in an amount not less than 20 percent of the bid price but shall not exceed $3,000,000. Failure to furnish the required bid guarantee in the proper form and amount, by the time set for opening of bids, will require rejection of the bid in all cases except those listed in FAR 28.101-4, and may be cause for rejection even then.(d) If the contract will exceed $100,000.00 the bidder to whom award is made will be required to furnish two bonds, a Payment Bond, SF 25A, and a Performance Bond, SF 25, each in the penal sum as noted in the General Conditions of the Specification. Copies of SFs 25 and 25A may be obtained upon application to the issuing office. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Base Bid - Bid Item No. 1, GENERAL CONSTRUCTION: Work includes general construction, alterations, mechanical and electrical work, structural modifications, necessary removal of existing construction and certain other items. Bid Item No. 2 - Deductive Bid Alternate No. 1: All work in the Base Bid except Replace groundwater source heat pump with split system air conditioning unit with a supplemental steam coil. Bid Item No. 3 - Deductive Bid Alternate No. 2: All work in the Base Bid except Replace radiant floor system and all components including: geothermal electric water heater, pump, and air separator, with 19 mm (3/4 inch) plywood subfloor.Bid Item No. 4 - Deductive Bid Alternate No. 3: All work as noted in the Base Bid except Delete the replacement of the existing porch, porch roof, railings, stairs, roof, gutters, and downspouts at west end of building with new. Bid Item No. 5 - Deductive Bid Alternate No. 4: All work as noted in the Base Bid except delete new opening in south wall and install a new window in Storage Room 411A-14. Cost Range: $500,000.00 to $1,000,000.00 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED WITH BID PACKAGE:Completed 1442 – pages 1 & 2Offer Guarantee/Bid BondRepresentations and CertificationsINSTRUCTIONS, CONDITIONS AND OTHER STATEMENTS TO BIDDERS/OFFERORS PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE – PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE: Upon receipt of Notice of Award and prior to attending the pre-construction conference, the successful bidder shall have completed steps #1 and #2 of the enclosed Security Requirements document. This process includes completion and submission of Security Requirements Form #1 (Background Investigation Request Worksheet) to the VHA Service Center Personnel Security Office. Each contract employee is required to undergo a Special Agreement Check (SAC) background investigation which equates to being fingerprinted. Contract employees shall complete Security Requirements Form #2 (VHA Special Agreement Checks Memorandum) and follow instructions outlined in step #2 of the attached Security Requirements document to complete fingerprinting process. Upon successful completion of fingerprinting, all contract employees will be required to obtain a non-Personal Identity Verification (non-PIV) badge (see step #3 of attached Security Requirements document. Contractor staff working on site will be required to wear the badges at all times while on site. Contractor will be required to immediately notify the Contracting Officer of any changes in staff performing work on site. Upon completion of the contract all identification badges must be returned to the Contracting Officer before final payment can be made. METRIC PRODUCTS: If a product is manufactured to metric dimensions and those dimensions exceed the tolerances specified in the inch-pound units, a request should be made to the Contracting Officer to determine if the product is acceptable. The Contracting Officer, in concert with the Contracting Officer Technical Representative (COTR), will accept or reject the product.INVOICING: The Department of Veterans Affairs (VA Financial Service Center (FSC)) is the designated agency office for invoice receipt in accordance with the Prompt Payment Act (5 CFR Part 1315). FSC or its designated representative may contact the vendor to provide specific instructions for electronic submission of invoices. The vendor will be responsible for any associated expenses. FSC may utilize third-party contractors to facilitate invoice processing. Prior to contact by FSC or its designated representative for electronic invoicing submission, the vendor shall continue to submit all invoices to FSC at the following mailing address: Department of Veterans Affairs, Financial Services Center, P.O. Box 149971, Austin, TX 78714-8971.SAMS, VETBIZ AND VETS100 REGISTRATION: Contractor MUST be registered in the System for Award Management (SAMS), VetBiz and the VETS100 database before contract award. SAMS can be accessed at portal/public/SAM, VetBiz can be accessed at and VETS100 can be accessed at SDVOSB/VOSB Firms currently verified in the Veterans Information Pages (VIP) at or SDVOSB/VOSB Firms currently listed, pending verification in VIP are eligible to submit bids/offers.SDVOSB Firms that submit bids/offers on SDVOSB/VOSB set-asides that are not listed on VIP will be deemed nonresponsive (IFB) or technically unacceptable (RFP/RFQ).Limitations on Subcontracting – Monitoring and ComplianceThis solicitation includes VAAR clause 852.219-10 VA Notice of Total Service-Disabled Veteran-Owned Small Business Set-Aside and FAR clause 52.219-14 Limitations of Subcontracting. Accordingly, any contract resulting from this solicitation will include this clause.The contractor is advised in performing contract administration functions, the CO may use the services of a support contractor(s) retained by VA to assist in assessing the contractor’s compliance with the limitations on subcontracting or percentage of work performance requirements specified in the clause. To that end, the support contractor(s) may require access to contractor’s offices where the contractor’s business records or other proprietary data are retained and to review such business records regarding the contractor’s compliance with this requirement. All support contractors conducting this review on behalf of VA will be required to sign an “Information Protection and Non-Disclosure and Disclosure of Conflicts of Interest Agreement” to ensure the contractor’s business records or other proprietary data reviewed or obtained in the course of assisting the CO in assessing the contractor for compliance are protected to ensure information or data is not improperly disclosed or other impropriety occurs. Furthermore, if VA determines any services the support contractor (s) wil perform in assessing compliance are advisory and assistance services as defined in FAR 2.101, Definitions, the support contractor(s) must also enter into an agreement with the contractor to protect proprietary information as required by FAR 9.505-4, Obtaining access to proprietary information, paragraph (b). The contractor is required to cooperate fully and make available any records as may be required to enable the CO to assess the contractor’s compliance with the limitations on subcontracting or percentage of work performance requirement.GENDER: Wherever the masculine gender is used in the solicitation and contract documents, it shall be considered to include both masculine and feminine. A.1 52.214-3 AMENDMENTS TO INVITATIONS FOR BIDS (DEC 1989) (a) If this solicitation is amended, then all terms and conditions which are not modified remain unchanged. (b) Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of any amendment to this solicitation (1) by signing and returning the amendment, (2) by identifying the amendment number and date in the space provided for this purpose on the form for submitting a bid, (3) by letter or telegram, or (4) by facsimile, if facsimile bids are authorized in the solicitation. The Government must receive the acknowledgment by the time and at the place specified for receipt of bids.(End of Provision)A.2 52.214-4 FALSE STATEMENTS IN BIDS (APR 1984) Bidders must provide full, accurate, and complete information as required by this solicitation and its attachments. The penalty for making false statements in bids is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. 1001.(End of Provision)A.3 52.214-5 SUBMISSION OF BIDS (MAR 1997) (a) Bids and bid modifications shall be submitted in sealed envelopes or packages (unless submitted by electronic means) (1) addressed to the office specified in the solicitation, and (2) showing the time and date specified for receipt, the solicitation number, and the name and address of the bidder. (b) Bidders using commercial carrier services shall ensure that the bid is addressed and marked on the outermost envelope or wrapper as prescribed in subparagraphs (a) (1) and (2) of this provision when delivered to the office specified in the solicitation. (c) Telegraphic bids will not be considered unless authorized by the solicitation; however, bids may be modified or withdrawn by written or telegraphic notice. (d) Facsimile bids, modifications, or withdrawals, will not be considered unless authorized by the solicitation; or (e) Bids submitted by electronic commerce shall be considered only if the electronic commerce method was specifically stipulated or permitted by the solicitation.(End of Provision)A.4 52.214-6 EXPLANATION TO PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS (APR 1984) Any prospective bidder desiring an explanation or interpretation of the solicitation, drawings, specifications, etc., must request it in writing soon enough to allow a reply to reach all prospective bidders before the submission of their bids. Oral explanations or instructions given before the award of a contract will not be binding. Any information given a prospective bidder concerning a solicitation will be furnished promptly to all other prospective bidders as an amendment to the solicitation, if that information is necessary in submitting bids or if the lack of it would be prejudicial to other prospective bidders.(End of Provision)A.5 52.214-7 LATE SUBMISSIONS, MODIFICATIONS, AND WITHDRAWALS OF BIDS (NOV 1999) (a) Bidders are responsible for submitting bids, and any modifications or withdrawals, so as to reach the Government office designated in the invitation for bids (IFB) by the time specified in the IFB. If no time is specified in the IFB, the time for receipt is 4:30 p.m., local time, for the designated Government office on the date that bids are due. (b)(1) Any bid, modification, or withdrawal received at the Government office designated in the IFB after the exact time specified for receipt of bids is ``late'' and will not be considered unless it is received before award is made, the Contracting Officer determines that accepting the late bid would not unduly delay the acquisition; and-- (i) If it was transmitted through an electronic commerce method authorized by the IFB, it was received at the initial point of entry to the Government infrastructure not later than 5:00 p.m. one working day prior to the date specified for receipt of bids; or (ii) There is acceptable evidence to establish that it was received at the Government installation designated for receipt of bids and was under the Government's control prior to the time set for receipt of bids. (2) However, a late modification of an otherwise successful bid that makes its terms more favorable to the Government, will be considered at any time it is received and may be accepted. (c) Acceptable evidence to establish the time of receipt at the Government installation includes the time/date stamp of that installation on the bid wrapper, other documentary evidence of receipt maintained by the installation, or oral testimony or statements of Government personnel. (d) If an emergency or unanticipated event interrupts normal Government processes so that bids cannot be received at the Government office designated for receipt of bids by the exact time specified in the IFB and urgent Government requirements preclude amendment of the IFB, the time specified for receipt of bids will be deemed to be extended to the same time of day specified in the solicitation on the first work day on which normal Government processes resume. (e) Bids may be withdrawn by written notice received at any time before the exact time set for receipt of bids. If the IFB authorizes facsimile bids, bids may be withdrawn via facsimile received at any time before the exact time set for receipt of bids, subject to the conditions specified in the provision at 52.214-31, Facsimile Bids. A bid may be withdrawn in person by a bidder or its authorized representative if, before the exact time set for receipt of bids, the identity of the person requesting withdrawal is established and the person signs a receipt for the bid.(End of Provision)A.6 52.214-18 PREPARATION OF BIDS--CONSTRUCTION (APR 1984) (a) Bids must be-- (1) Submitted on the forms furnished by the Government or on copies of those forms, and (2) Manually signed. The person signing a bid must initial each erasure or change appearing on any bid form. (b) The bid form may require bidders to submit bid prices for one or more items on various bases, including-- (1) Lump sum bidding; (2) Alternate prices; (3) Units of construction; or (4) Any combination of subparagraphs (1) through (3) above. (c) If the solicitation requires bidding on all items, failure to do so will disqualify the bid. If bidding on all items is not required, bidders should insert the words "no bid" in the space provided for any item on which no price is submitted. (d) Alternate bids will not be considered unless this solicitation authorizes their submission.(End of Provision)A.7 52.214-19 CONTRACT AWARD--SEALED BIDDING--CONSTRUCTION (AUG 1996) (a) The Government will evaluate bids in response to this solicitation without discussions and will award a contract to the responsible bidder whose bid, conforming to the solicitation, will be most advantageous to the Government, considering only price and the price-related factors specified elsewhere in the solicitation. (b) The Government may reject any or all bids, and waive informalities or minor irregularities in bids received. (c) The Government may accept any item or combination of items, unless doing so is precluded by a restrictive limitation in the solicitation or the bid. (d) The Government may reject a bid as nonresponsive if the prices bid are materially unbalanced between line items or subline items. A bid is materially unbalanced when it is based on prices significantly less than cost for some work and prices which are significantly overstated in relation to cost for other work, and if there is a reasonable doubt that the bid will result in the lowest overall cost to the Government even though it may be the low evaluated bid, or if it is so unbalanced as to be tantamount to allowing an advance payment.(End of Provision)A.8 52.214-26 AUDIT AND RECORDS--SEALED BIDDING (OCT 2010) (a) As used in this clause, "records" includes books, documents, accounting procedures and practices, and other data, regardless of type and regardless of whether such items are in written form, in the form of computer data, or in any other form. (b) Certified cost or pricing data. If the Contractor has been required to submit certified cost or pricing data in connection with the pricing of any modification to this contract, the Contracting Officer, or an authorized representative of the Contracting Officer, in order to evaluate the accuracy, completeness, and currency of the certified cost or pricing data, shall have the right to examine and audit all of the Contractor's records, including computations and projections, related to-- (1) The proposal for the modification; (2) The discussions conducted on the proposal(s), including those related to negotiating; (3) Pricing of the modification; or (4) Performance of the modification. (c) Comptroller General. In the case of pricing any modification, the Comptroller General of the United States, or an authorized representative, shall have the same rights as specified in paragraph (b) of this clause and also the right to interview any current employee regarding such transactions. (d) Availability. The Contractor shall make available at its office at all reasonable times the materials described in paragraph (b) of this clause, for examination, audit, or reproduction, until 3 years after final payment under this contract, or for any other period specified in Subpart 4.7 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR). FAR Subpart 4.7, Contractor Records Retention, in effect on the date of this contract, is incorporated by reference in its entirety and made a part of this contract. (1) If this contract is completely or partially terminated, the records relating to the work terminated shall be made available for 3 years after any resulting final termination settlement. (2) Records pertaining to appeals under the Disputes clause or to litigation or the settlement of claims arising under or relating to the performance of this contract shall be made available until disposition of such appeals, litigation, or claims. (e) The Contractor shall insert a clause containing all the provisions of this clause, including this paragraph (e), in all subcontracts expected to exceed the threshold in FAR 15.403-4(a)(1) for submission of certified cost or pricing data.(End of Clause)A.9 52.214-27 PRICE REDUCTION FOR DEFECTIVE CERTIFIED COST OR PRICING DATA--MODIFICATIONS-- SEALED BIDDING (AUG 2011) (a) This clause shall become operative only for any modification to this contract involving aggregate increases and/or decreases in costs, plus applicable profits, expected to exceed the threshold for the submission of certified cost or pricing data at FAR 15.403-4(a)(1), except that this clause does not apply to a modification if an exception under FAR 15.403-1(b) applies. (b) If any price, including profit, negotiated in connection with any modification under this clause, was increased by any significant amount because (1) the Contractor or a subcontractor furnished certified cost or pricing data that were not complete, accurate, and current as certified in its Certificate of Current Cost or Pricing Data, (2) a subcontractor or prospective subcontractor furnished the Contractor certified cost or pricing data that were not complete, accurate, and current as certified in the Contractor's Certificate of Current Cost or Pricing Data, or (3) any of these parties furnished data of any description that were not accurate, the price shall be reduced accordingly and the contract shall be modified to reflect the reduction. This right to a price reduction is limited to that resulting from defects in data relating to modifications for which this clause becomes operative under paragraph (a) of this clause. (c) Any reduction in the contract price under paragraph (b) of this clause due to defective data from a prospective subcontractor that was not subsequently awarded the subcontract shall be limited to the amount, plus applicable overhead and profit markup, by which (1) the actual subcontract or (2) the actual cost to the Contractor, if there was no subcontract, was less than the prospective subcontract cost estimate submitted by the Contractor; provided, that the actual subcontract price was not itself affected by defective certified cost or pricing data. (d)(1) If the Contracting Officer determines under paragraph (b) of this clause that a price or cost reduction should be made, the Contractor agrees not to raise the following matters as a defense: (i) The Contractor or subcontractor was a sole source supplier or otherwise was in a superior bargaining position and thus the price of the contract would not have been modified even if accurate, complete, and current certified cost or pricing data had been submitted. (ii) The Contracting Officer should have known that the certified cost or pricing data in issue were defective even though the Contractor or subcontractor took no affirmative action to bring the character of the data to the attention of the Contracting Officer. (iii) The contract was based on an agreement about the total cost of the contract and there was no agreement about the cost of each item procured under the contract. (iv) The Contractor or subcontractor did not submit a Certificate of Current Cost or Pricing Data. (2)(i) Except as prohibited by subdivision (d)(2)(ii) of this clause, an offset in an amount determined appropriate by the Contracting Officer based upon the facts shall be allowed against the amount of a contract price reduction if- (A) The Contractor certifies to the Contracting Officer that, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge and belief, the Contractor is entitled to the offset in the amount requested; and (B) The Contractor proves that the certified cost or pricing data were available before the date of agreement on the price of the contract (or price of the modification) and that the data were not submitted before such date. (ii) An offset shall not be allowed if- (A) The understated data was known by the Contractor to be understated when the Certificate of Current Cost or Pricing Data was signed; or (B) The Government proves that the facts demonstrate that the contract price would not have increased in the amount to be offset even if the available data had been submitted before the date of agreement on price. (e) If any reduction in the contract price under this clause reduces the price of items for which payment was made prior to the date of the modification reflecting the price reduction, the Contractor shall be liable to and shall pay the United States at the time such overpayment is repaid- (1) Interest compounded daily, as required by 26 U.S.C. 6622, on the amount of such overpayment to be computed from the date(s) of overpayment to the Contractor to the date the Government is repaid by the Contractor at the applicable underpayment rate effective for each quarter prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury under 26 U.S.C. 6621(a)(2); and (2) A penalty equal to the amount of the overpayment, if the Contractor or subcontractor knowingly submitted certified cost or pricing data which were incomplete, inaccurate, or noncurrent.(End of Clause)A.10 52.214-28 SUBCONTRACTOR CERTIFIED COST OR PRICING DATA-- MODIFICATIONS--SEALED BIDDING (OCT 2010) (a) The requirements of paragraphs (b) and (c) of this clause shall- (1) Become operative only for any modification to this contract involving aggregate increases and/or decreases in costs, plus applicable profits, expected to exceed the threshold for submission of certified cost or pricing data at FAR 15.403-4(a)(1); and (2) Be limited to such modifications. (b) Before awarding any subcontract expected to exceed the threshold for submission of certified cost or pricing data at FAR 15.403-4(a)(1), on the date of agreement on price or the date of award, whichever is later, or before pricing any subcontract modifications involving aggregate increases and/or decreases in costs, plus applicable profits, expected to exceed the threshold for submission of certified cost or pricing data at FAR 15.403-4(a)(1), the Contractor shall require the subcontractor to submit certified cost or pricing data (actually or by specific identification in writing), as part of the subcontractor's proposal in accordance with FAR 15.408, Table 15-2 (to include any information reasonably required to explain the subcontractor's estimating process such as the judgmental factors applied and the mathematical or other methods used in the estimate, including those used in projecting from known data, and the nature and amount of any contingencies included in the price), unless an exception under FAR 15.403-1(b) applies. (c) The Contractor shall require the subcontractor to certify in substantially the form prescribed in FAR subsection 15.406-2 that, to the best of its knowledge and belief, the data submitted under paragraph (b) of this clause were accurate, complete, and current as of the date of agreement on the negotiated price of the subcontract or subcontract modification. (d) The Contractor shall insert the substance of this clause, including this paragraph (d), in each subcontract that, when entered into, exceeds the threshold for submission of certified cost or pricing data at FAR 15.403-4(a)(1).(End of Clause)A.11 52.214-34 SUBMISSION OF OFFERS IN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE (APR 1991) Offers submitted in response to this solicitation shall be in the English language. Offers received in other than English shall be rejected.(End of Provision)A.12 52.214-35 SUBMISSION OF OFFERS IN U.S. CURRENCY (APR 1991) Offers submitted in response to this solicitation shall be in terms of U.S. dollars. Offers received in other than U.S. dollars shall be rejected.(End of Provision)A.13 52.216-1 TYPE OF CONTRACT (APR 1984) The Government contemplates award of a Firm Fixed Price contract resulting from this solicitation.(End of Provision)A.14 52.222-5 DAVIS-BACON ACT--SECONDARY SITE OF THE WORK (JUL 2005) (a)(1) The offeror shall notify the Government if the offeror intends to perform work at any secondary site of the work, as defined in paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of the FAR clause at 52.222-6, Davis-Bacon Act, of this solicitation. (2) If the offeror is unsure if a planned work site satisfies the criteria for a secondary site of the work, the offeror shall request a determination from the Contracting Officer. (b)(1) If the wage determination provided by the Government for work at the primary site of the work is not applicable to the secondary site of the work, the offeror shall request a wage determination from the Contracting Officer. (2) The due date for receipt of offers will not be extended as a result of an offeror's request for a wage determination for a secondary site of the work.(End of Provision)A.15 52.222-23 NOTICE OF REQUIREMENT FOR AFFIRMATIVE ACTION TO ENSURE EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY FOR CONSTRUCTION (FEB 1999) (a) The offeror's attention is called to the Equal Opportunity clause and the Affirmative Action Compliance Requirements for Construction clause of this solicitation. (b) The goals for minority and female participation, expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate workforce in each trade on all construction work in the covered area, are as follows:Goals for minority participation for each tradeGoals for female participation for each trade25.2 %6.9 % These goals are applicable to all the Contractor's construction work performed in the covered area. If the Contractor performs construction work in a geographical area located outside of the covered area, the Contractor shall apply the goals established for the geographical area where the work is actually performed. Goals are published periodically in the Federal Register in notice form, and these notices may be obtained from any Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs office. (c) The Contractor's compliance with Executive Order 11246, as amended, and the regulations in 41 CFR 60-4 shall be based on (1) its implementation of the Equal Opportunity clause, (2) specific affirmative action obligations required by the clause entitled "Affirmative Action Compliance Requirements for Construction," and (3) its efforts to meet the goals. The hours of minority and female employment and training must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the contract, and in each trade. The Contractor shall make a good faith effort to employ minorities and women evenly on each of its projects. The transfer of minority or female employees or trainees from Contractor to Contractor, or from project to project, for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's goals shall be a violation of the contract, Executive Order 11246, as amended, and the regulations in 41 CFR 60-4. Compliance with the goals will be measured against the total work hours performed. (d) The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Deputy Assistant Secretary for Federal Contract Compliance, U.S. Department of Labor, within 10 working days following award of any construction subcontract in excess of $10,000 at any tier for construction work under the contract resulting from this solicitation. The notification shall list the-- (1) Name, address, and telephone number of the subcontractor; (2) Employer's identification number of the subcontractor; (3) Estimated dollar amount of the subcontract; (4) Estimated starting and completion dates of the subcontract; and (5) Geographical area in which the subcontract is to be performed. (e) As used in this Notice, and in any contract resulting from this solicitation, the "covered area" isMartinsburg, WV(End of Provision)A.16 52.225-10 NOTICE OF BUY AMERICAN ACT REQUIREMENT -- CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS (FEB 2009) (a) Definitions. "Commercially available off-the-shelf (COTS) item," "construction material," "domestic construction material," and "foreign construction material," as used in this provision, are defined in the clause of this solicitation entitled "Buy American Act--Construction Materials" (Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) clause 52.225-9). (b) Requests for determinations of inapplicability. An offeror requesting a determination regarding the inapplicability of the Buy American Act should submit the request to the Contracting Officer in time to allow a determination before submission of offers. The offeror shall include the information and applicable supporting data required by paragraphs (c) and (d) of the clause at FAR 52.225-9 in the request. If an offeror has not requested a determination regarding the inapplicability of the Buy American Act before submitting its offer, or has not received a response to a previous request, the offeror shall include the information and supporting data in the offer. (c) Evaluation of offers. (1) The Government will evaluate an offer requesting exception to the requirements of the Buy American Act, based on claimed unreasonable cost of domestic construction material, by adding to the offered price the appropriate percentage of the cost of such foreign construction material, as specified in paragraph (b)(3)(i) of the clause at FAR 52.225-9. (2) If evaluation results in a tie between an offeror that requested the substitution of foreign construction material based on unreasonable cost and an offeror that did not request an exception, the Contracting Officer will award to the offeror that did not request an exception based on unreasonable cost. (d) Alternate offers. (1) When an offer includes foreign solicitation in paragraph (b)(2) of the clause at FAR 52.225-9, the offeror also may submit an alternate offer based on use of equivalent domestic construction material. (2) If an alternate offer is submitted, the offeror shall submit a separate Standard Form 1442 for the alternate offer, and a separate price comparison table prepared in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of the clause at FAR 52.225-9 for the offer that is based on the use of any foreign construction material for which the Government has not yet determined an exception applies. (3) If the Government determines that a particular exception requested in accordance with paragraph (c) of the clause at FAR 52.225-9 does not apply, the Government will evaluate only those offers based on use of the equivalent domestic construction material, and the offeror shall be required to furnish such domestic construction material. An offer based on use of the foreign construction material for which an exception was requested-- (i) Will be rejected as nonresponsive if this acquisition is conducted by sealed bidding; or (ii) May be accepted if revised during negotiations.(End of Provision)A.17 52.228-1 BID GUARANTEE (SEP 1996) (a) Failure to furnish a bid guarantee in the proper form and amount, by the time set for opening of bids, may be cause for rejection of the bid. (b) The bidder shall furnish a bid guarantee in the form of a firm commitment, e.g., bid bond supported by good and sufficient surety or sureties acceptable to the Government, postal money order, certified check, cashier's check, irrevocable letter of credit, or, under Treasury Department regulations, certain bonds or notes of the United States. The Contracting Officer will return bid guarantees, other than bid bonds, (1) to unsuccessful bidders as soon as practicable after the opening of bids, and (2) to the successful bidder upon execution of contractual documents and bonds (including any necessary coinsurance or reinsurance agreements), as required by the bid as accepted.- (c) The amount of the bid guarantee shall be 20 percent of the bid price or $3,000,000.00, whichever is less.- (d) If the successful bidder, upon acceptance of its bid by the Government within the period specified for acceptance, fails to execute all contractual documents or furnish executed bond(s) within 10 days after receipt of the forms by the bidder, the Contracting Officer may terminate the contract for default. (e) In the event the contract is terminated for default, the bidder is liable for any cost of acquiring the work that exceeds the amount of its bid, and the bid guarantee is available to offset the difference.(End of Provision)A.18 52.233-2 SERVICE OF PROTEST (SEP 2006) Protests, as defined in section 33.101 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation, that are filed directly with an agency, and copies of any protests that are filed with the Government Accountability Office (GAO), shall be served on the Contracting Officer (addressed as follows) by obtaining written and dated acknowledgment of receipt from: Hand-Carried Address: Department of Veterans Affairs VAMC (613) Kathryn Leatherman, Contract Specialist 510 Butler Ave, Building 308B Martinsburg WV 25405 Mailing Address: Department of Veterans Affairs VAMC (613) Kathryn Leatherman, Contract Specialist) 510 Butler Ave, Building 308B Martinsburg WV 25405 (b) The copy of any protest shall be received in the office designated above within one day of filing a protest with the GAO.(End of Provision)A.19 52.236-27 SITE VISIT (CONSTRUCTION) (FEB 1995) ALTERNATE I (FEB 1995) (a) The clauses at 52.236-2, Differing Site Conditions, and 52.236-3, Site Investigations and Conditions Affecting the Work, will be included in any contract awarded as a result of this solicitation. Accordingly, offerors or quoters are urged and expected to inspect the site where the work will be performed. (b) An organized site visit has been scheduled for- Thursday, December 13, 2012 at 1:00PM (c) Participants will meet at- 510 Butler Avenue, Bldg. 308B, Martinsburg, WV 25405(End of Provision)A.20 852.211-72 TECHNICAL INDUSTRY STANDARDS (JAN 2008) The supplies or equipment required by this invitation for bid or request for proposal must conform to the standards of the OSHA, NFPA and the drawings and specifications as to all requirements. The successful bidder or offeror will be required to submit proof that the item(s) he/she furnishes conforms to this requirement. This proof may be in the form of a label or seal affixed to the equipment or supplies, warranting that they have been tested in accordance with and conform to the specified standards. Proof may also be furnished in the form of a certificate from one of the above listed organizations certifying that the item(s) furnished have been tested in accordance with and conform to the specified standards.(End of Provision)A.21 VAAR 852.214-70 CAUTION TO BIDDERS--BID ENVELOPES (JAN 2008) It is the responsibility of each bidder to take all necessary precautions, including the use of proper mailing cover, to insure that the bid price cannot be ascertained by anyone prior to bid opening. If a bid envelope is furnished with this invitation, the bidder is requested to use this envelope in submitting the bid. The bidder may, however, use any suitable envelope, identified by the invitation number and bid opening time and date. If an Optional Form (OF) 17, Sealed Bid Label, is furnished with this invitation in lieu of a bid envelope, the bidder is advised to complete and affix the OF 17 to the lower left corner of the envelope used in submitting the bid.(End of Provision)A.22 VAAR 852.228-72 ASSISTING SERVICE-DISABLED VETERAN-OWNED AND VETERAN-OWNED SMALL BUSINESSES IN OBTAINING BONDS (DEC 2009) Prime contractors are encouraged to assist service-disabled veteran-owned and veteran-owned small business potential subcontractors in obtaining bonding, when required. Mentor firms are encouraged to assist protégé firms under VA's Mentor-Protégé Program in obtaining acceptable bid, payment, and performance bonds, when required, as a prime contractor under a solicitation or contract and in obtaining any required bonds under subcontracts.(End of Clause)A.23 VAAR 852.233-70 PROTEST CONTENT/ALTERNATIVE DISPUTE RESOLUTION (JAN 2008) (a) Any protest filed by an interested party shall: (1) Include the name, address, fax number, and telephone number of the protester; (2) Identify the solicitation and/or contract number; (3) Include an original signed by the protester or the protester's representative and at least one copy; (4) Set forth a detailed statement of the legal and factual grounds of the protest, including a description of resulting prejudice to the protester, and provide copies of relevant documents; (5) Specifically request a ruling of the individual upon whom the protest is served; (6) State the form of relief requested; and (7) Provide all information establishing the timeliness of the protest. (b) Failure to comply with the above may result in dismissal of the protest without further consideration. (c) Bidders/offerors and contracting officers are encouraged to use alternative dispute resolution (ADR) procedures to resolve protests at any stage in the protest process. If ADR is used, the Department of Veterans Affairs will not furnish any documentation in an ADR proceeding beyond what is allowed by the Federal Acquisition Regulation.(End of Provision)A.24 VAAR 852.233-71 ALTERNATE PROTEST PROCEDURE (JAN 1998) As an alternative to filing a protest with the contracting officer, an interested party may file a protest with the Deputy Assistant Secretary for Acquisition and Materiel Management, Acquisition Administration Team, Department of Veterans Affairs, 810 Vermont Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20420, or for solicitations issued by the Office of Construction and Facilities Management, the Director, Office of Construction and Facilities Management, 810 Vermont Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20420. The protest will not be considered if the interested party has a protest on the same or similar issues pending with the contracting officer.(End of Provision) PLEASE NOTE: The correct mailing information for filing alternate protests is as follows:Deputy Assistant Secretary for Acquisition and Logistics,Risk Management Team, Department of Veterans Affairs810 Vermont Avenue, N.W.Washington, DC 20420 Or for solicitations issued by the Office of Construction and Facilities Management:Director, Office of Construction and Facilities Management811 Vermont Avenue, N.W.Washington, DC 20420A.25 VAAR 852.270-1 REPRESENTATIVES OF CONTRACTING OFFICERS (JAN 2008) The contracting officer reserves the right to designate representatives to act for him/her in furnishing technical guidance and advice or generally monitor the work to be performed under this contract. Such designation will be in writing and will define the scope and limitation of the designee's authority. A copy of the designation shall be furnished to the contractor.(End of Provision)REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS3.1 52.204-8 ANNUAL REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS (MAY 2012) (a)(1) The North American Industry Classification System (NAICS) code for this acquisition is 236220. (2) The small business size standard is $33.5 Million. (3) The small business size standard for a concern which submits an offer in its own name, other than on a construction or service contract, but which proposes to furnish a product which it did not itself manufacture, is 500 employees. (b)(1) If the clause at 52.204-7, Central Contractor Registration, is included in this solicitation, paragraph (d) of this provision applies. (2) If the clause at 52.204-7 is not included in this solicitation, and the offeror is currently registered in CCR, and has completed the ORCA electronically, the offeror may choose to use paragraph (d) of this provision instead of completing the corresponding individual representations and certifications in the solicitation. The offeror shall indicate which option applies by checking one of the following boxes: [ ] (i) Paragraph (d) applies. [ ] (ii) Paragraph (d) does not apply and the offeror has completed the individual representations and certifications in the solicitation. (c)(1) The following representations or certifications in ORCA are applicable to this solicitation as indicated: (i) 52.203-2, Certificate of Independent Price Determination. This provision applies to solicitations when a firm-fixed-price contract or fixed-price contract with economic price adjustment is contemplated, unless-- (A) The acquisition is to be made under the simplified acquisition procedures in Part 13; (B) The solicitation is a request for technical proposals under two-step sealed bidding procedures; or (C) The solicitation is for utility services for which rates are set by law or regulation. (ii) 52.203-11, Certification and Disclosure Regarding Payments to Influence Certain Federal Transactions. This provision applies to solicitations expected to exceed $150,000. (iii) 52.204-3, Taxpayer Identification. This provision applies to solicitations that do not include the clause at 52.204-7, Central Contractor Registration. (iv) 52.204-5, Women-Owned Business (Other Than Small Business). This provision applies to solicitations that-- (A) Are not set aside for small business concerns; (B) Exceed the simplified acquisition threshold; and (C) Are for contracts that will be performed in the United States or its outlying areas. (v) 52.209-2, Prohibition on Contracting with Inverted Domestic Corporations--Representation. This provision applies to solicitations using funds appropriated in fiscal years 2008, 2009, 2010, or 2012. (vi) 52.209-5, Certification Regarding Responsibility Matters. This provision applies to solicitations where the contract value is expected to exceed the simplified acquisition threshold. (vii) 52.214-14, Place of Performance--Sealed Bidding. This provision applies to invitations for bids except those in which the place of performance is specified by the Government. (viii) 52.215-6, Place of Performance. This provision applies to solicitations unless the place of performance is specified by the Government. (ix) 52.219-1, Small Business Program Representations (Basic & Alternate I). This provision applies to solicitations when the contract will be performed in the United States or its outlying areas. (A) The basic provision applies when the solicitations are issued by other than DoD, NASA, and the Coast Guard. (B) The provision with its Alternate I applies to solicitations issued by DoD, NASA, or the Coast Guard. (x) 52.219-2, Equal Low Bids. This provision applies to solicitations when contracting by sealed bidding and the contract will be performed in the United States or its outlying areas. (xi) 52.222-22, Previous Contracts and Compliance Reports. This provision applies to solicitations that include the clause at 52.222-26, Equal Opportunity. (xii) 52.222-25, Affirmative Action Compliance. This provision applies to solicitations, other than those for construction, when the solicitation includes the clause at 52.222-26, Equal Opportunity. (xiii) 52.222-38, Compliance with Veterans' Employment Reporting Requirements. This provision applies to solicitations when it is anticipated the contract award will exceed the simplified acquisition threshold and the contract is not for acquisition of commercial items. (xiv) 52.223-1, Biobased Product Certification. This provision applies to solicitations that require the delivery or specify the use of USDA-designated items; or include the clause at 52.223-2, Affirmative Procurement of Biobased Products Under Service and Construction Contracts. (xv) 52.223-4, Recovered Material Certification. This provision applies to solicitations that are for, or specify the use of, EPA-designated items. (xvi) 52.225-2, Buy American Act Certificate. This provision applies to solicitations containing the clause at 52.225-1. (xvii) 52.225-4, Buy American Act--Free Trade Agreements--Israeli Trade Act Certificate. (Basic, Alternates I, II, and III.) This provision applies to solicitations containing the clause at 52.225-3. (A) If the acquisition value is less than $25,000, the basic provision applies. (B) If the acquisition value is $25,000 or more but is less than $50,000, the provision with its Alternate I applies. (C) If the acquisition value is $50,000 or more but is less than $77,494, the provision with its Alternate II applies. (D) If the acquisition value is $77,494 or more but is less than $100,000, the provision with its Alternate III applies. (xviii) 52.225-6, Trade Agreements Certificate. This provision applies to solicitations containing the clause at 52.225-5. (xix) 52.225-20, Prohibition on Conducting Restricted Business Operations in Sudan--Certification. This provision applies to all solicitations. (xx) 52.225-25, Prohibition on Contracting with Entities Engaging in Sanctioned Activities Relating to Iran--Representation and Certification. This provision applies to all solicitations. (xxi) 52.226-2, Historically Black College or University and Minority Institution Representation. This provision applies to-- (A) Solicitations for research, studies, supplies, or services of the type normally acquired from higher educational institutions; and (B) For DoD, NASA, and Coast Guard acquisitions, solicitations that contain the clause at 52.219-23, Notice of Price Evaluation Adjustment for Small Disadvantaged Business Concerns. (2) The following certifications are applicable as indicated by the Contracting Officer: [](i) 52.219-22, Small Disadvantaged Business Status. [](A) Basic. [](B) Alternate I. [](ii) 52.222-18, Certification Regarding Knowledge of Child Labor for Listed End Products. [](iii) 52.222-48, Exemption from Application of the Service Contract Act to Contracts for Maintenance, Calibration, or Repair of Certain Equipment Certification. [](iv) 52.222-52 Exemption from Application of the Service Contract Act to Contracts for Certain Services--Certification. [](v) 52.223-9, with its Alternate I, Estimate of Percentage of Recovered Material Content for EPA-Designated Products (Alternate I only). [](vi) 52.227-6, Royalty Information. [](A) Basic. [](B) Alternate I. [](vii) 52.227-15, Representation of Limited Rights Data and Restricted Computer Software. (d) The offeror has completed the annual representations and certifications electronically via the Online Representations and Certifications Application (ORCA) website accessed through . After reviewing the ORCA database information, the offeror verifies by submission of the offer that the representations and certifications currently posted electronically that apply to this solicitation as indicated in paragraph (c) of this provision have been entered or updated within the last 12 months, are current, accurate, complete, and applicable to this solicitation (including the business size standard applicable to the NAICS code referenced for this solicitation), as of the date of this offer and are incorporated in this offer by reference (see FAR 4.1201); except for the changes identified below [offeror to insert changes, identifying change by clause number, title, date]. These amended representation(s) and/or certification(s) are also incorporated in this offer and are current, accurate, and complete as of the date of this offer.------------------------------------------------------------------------FAR Clause #TitleDateChange---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Any changes provided by the offeror are applicable to this solicitation only, and do not result in an update to the representations and certifications posted on ORCA.(End of Provision)3.2 52.209-7 INFORMATION REGARDING RESPONSIBILITY MATTERS (FEB 2012) (a) Definitions. As used in this provision-- "Administrative proceeding" means a non-judicial process that is adjudicatory in nature in order to make a determination of fault or liability (e.g., Securities and Exchange Commission Administrative Proceedings, Civilian Board of Contract Appeals Proceedings, and Armed Services Board of Contract Appeals Proceedings). This includes administrative proceedings at the Federal and State level but only in connection with performance of a Federal contract or grant. It does not include agency actions such as contract audits, site visits, corrective plans, or inspection of deliverables. "Federal contracts and grants with total value greater than $10,000,000" means-- (1) The total value of all current, active contracts and grants, including all priced options; and (2) The total value of all current, active orders including all priced options under indefinite-delivery, indefinite-quantity, 8(a), or requirements contracts (including task and delivery and multiple-award Schedules). "Principal" means an officer, director, owner, partner, or a person having primary management or supervisory responsibilities within a business entity (e.g., general manager; plant manager; head of a division or business segment; and similar positions). (b) The offeror [ ] has [ ] does not have current active Federal contracts and grants with total value greater than $10,000,000. (c) If the offeror checked "has" in paragraph (b) of this provision, the offeror represents, by submission of this offer, that the information it has entered in the Federal Awardee Performance and Integrity Information System (FAPIIS) is current, accurate, and complete as of the date of submission of this offer with regard to the following information: (1) Whether the offeror, and/or any of its principals, has or has not, within the last five years, in connection with the award to or performance by the offeror of a Federal contract or grant, been the subject of a proceeding, at the Federal or State level that resulted in any of the following dispositions: (i) In a criminal proceeding, a conviction. (ii) In a civil proceeding, a finding of fault and liability that results in the payment of a monetary fine, penalty, reimbursement, restitution, or damages of $5,000 or more. (iii) In an administrative proceeding, a finding of fault and liability that results in-- (A) The payment of a monetary fine or penalty of $5,000 or more; or (B) The payment of a reimbursement, restitution, or damages in excess of $100,000. (iv) In a criminal, civil, or administrative proceeding, a disposition of the matter by consent or compromise with an acknowledgment of fault by the Contractor if the proceeding could have led to any of the outcomes specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(i), (c)(1)(ii), or (c)(1)(iii) of this provision. (2) If the offeror has been involved in the last five years in any of the occurrences listed in (c)(1) of this provision, whether the offeror has provided the requested information with regard to each occurrence. (d) The offeror shall post the information in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (c)(1)(iv) of this provision in FAPIIS as required through maintaining an active registration in the Central Contractor Registration database via (see 52.204-7).(End of Provision)3.3 52.225-20 PROHIBITION ON CONDUCTING RESTRICTED BUSINESS OPERATIONS IN SUDAN--CERTIFICATION (AUG 2009) (a) Definitions. As used in this provision-- "Business operations" means engaging in commerce in any form, including by acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing, or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, or any other apparatus of business or commerce. "Marginalized populations of Sudan" means-- (1) Adversely affected groups in regions authorized to receive assistance under section 8(c) of the Darfur Peace and Accountability Act (Pub. L. 109-344) (50 U.S.C. 1701 note); and (2) Marginalized areas in Northern Sudan described in section 4(9) of such Act. "Restricted business operations" means business operations in Sudan that include power production activities, mineral extraction activities, oil-related activities, or the production of military equipment, as those terms are defined in the Sudan Accountability and Divestment Act of 2007 (Pub. L. 110-174). Restricted business operations do not include business operations that the person (as that term is defined in Section 2 of the Sudan Accountability and Divestment Act of 2007) conducting the business can demonstrate- (1) Are conducted under contract directly and exclusively with the regional government of southern Sudan; (2) Are conducted pursuant to specific authorization from the Office of Foreign Assets Control in the Department of the Treasury, or are expressly exempted under Federal law from the requirement to be conducted under such authorization; (3) Consist of providing goods or services to marginalized populations of Sudan; (4) Consist of providing goods or services to an internationally recognized peacekeeping force or humanitarian organization; (5) Consist of providing goods or services that are used only to promote health or education; or (6) Have been voluntarily suspended. (b) Certification. By submission of its offer, the offeror certifies that the offeror does not conduct any restricted business operations in Sudan.(End of Provision)FAR NumberTitleDate52.225-25PROHIBITION ON CONTRACTING WITH ENTITIES ENGAGING IN SANCTIONED ACTIVITIES RELATING TO IRAN-- REPRESENTATION AND CERTIFICATIONNOV 2011GENERAL CONDITIONS4.1 52.204-7 CENTRAL CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION (AUG 2012) (a) Definitions. As used in this clause-- "Central Contractor Registration (CCR) database" means the primary Government repository for Contractor information required for the conduct of business with the Government. "Data Universal Numbering System (DUNS) number" means the 9-digit number assigned by Dun and Bradstreet, Inc. (D&B) to identify unique business entities. "Data Universal Numbering System +4 (DUNS+4) number" means the DUNS number assigned by D&B plus a 4-character suffix that may be assigned by a business concern. (D&B has no affiliation with this 4-character suffix.) This 4-character suffix may be assigned at thediscretion of the business concern to establish additional CCR records for identifying alternative Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT) accounts (see the FAR at Subpart 32.11) for the same concern. "Registered in the CCR database" means that-- (1) The Contractor has entered all mandatory information, including the DUNS number or the DUNS+4 number, as well as data required by the Federal Funding Accountability and Transparency Act of 2006 (see subpart 4.14), into the CCR database; and (2) The Government has validated all mandatory data fields, to include validation of the Taxpayer Identification Number (TIN) with the Internal Revenue Service (IRS), and has marked the record "Active". The Contractor will be required to provide consent for TIN validation to the Government as a part of the CCR registration process. (b)(1) By submission of an offer, the offeror acknowledges the requirement that a prospective awardee shall be registered in the CCR database prior to award, during performance, and through final payment of any contract, basic agreement, basic ordering agreement, or blanket purchasing agreement resulting from this solicitation. (2) The offeror shall enter, in the block with its name and address on the cover page of its offer, the annotation "DUNS" or "DUNS +4" followed by the DUNS or DUNS +4 number that identifies the offeror's name and address exactly as stated in the offer. The DUNS number will be used by the Contracting Officer to verify that the offeror is registered in the CCR database. (c) If the offeror does not have a DUNS number, it should contact Dun and Bradstreet directly to obtain one. (1) An offeror may obtain a DUNS number-- (i) Via the Internet at or if the offeror does not have internet access, it may call Dun and Bradstreet at 1-866-705-5711 if located within the United States; or (ii) If located outside the United States, by contacting the local Dun and Bradstreet office. The offeror should indicate that it is an offeror for a U.S. Government contract when contacting the local Dun and Bradstreet office. (2) The offeror should be prepared to provide the following information: (i) Company legal business. (ii) Tradestyle, doing business, or other name by which your entity is commonly recognized. (iii) Company Physical Street Address, City, State, and Zip Code. (iv) Company Mailing Address, City, State and Zip Code (if separate from physical). (v) Company Telephone Number. (vi) Date the company was started. (vii) Number of employees at your location. (viii) Chief executive officer/key manager. (ix) Line of business (industry). (x) Company Headquarters name and address (reporting relationship within your entity). (d) If the Offeror does not become registered in the CCR database in the time prescribed by the Contracting Officer, the Contracting Officer will proceed to award to the next otherwise successful registered Offeror. (e) Processing time, which normally takes 48 hours, should be taken into consideration when registering. Offerors who are not registered should consider applying for registration immediately upon receipt of this solicitation. (f) The Contractor is responsible for the accuracy and completeness of the data within the CCR database, and for any liability resulting from the Government's reliance on inaccurate or incomplete data. To remain registered in the CCR database after the initial registration, the Contractor is required to review and update on an annual basis from the date of initial registration or subsequent updates its information in the CCR database to ensure it is current, accurate and complete. Updating information in the CCR does not alter the terms and conditions of this contract and is not a substitute for a properly executed contractual document. (g)(1)(i) If a Contractor has legally changed its business name, "doing business as" name, or division name (whichever is shown on the contract), or has transferred the assets used in performing the contract, but has not completed the necessary requirements regarding novation and change-of-name agreements in Subpart 42.12, the Contractor shall provide the responsible Contracting Officer a minimum of one business day's written notification of its intention to (A) change the name in the CCR database; (B) comply with the requirements of Subpart 42.12 of the FAR; and (C) agree in writing to the timeline and procedures specified by the responsible Contracting Officer. The Contractor must provide with the notification sufficient documentation to support the legally changed name. (ii) If the Contractor fails to comply with the requirements of paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this clause, or fails to perform the agreement at paragraph (g)(1)(i)(C) of this clause, and, in the absence of a properly executed novation or change-of-name agreement, the CCR information that shows the Contractor to be other than the Contractor indicated in the contract will be considered to be incorrect information within the meaning of the "Suspension of Payment" paragraph of the electronic funds transfer (EFT) clause of this contract. (2) The Contractor shall not change the name or address for EFT payments or manual payments, as appropriate, in the CCR record to reflect an assignee for the purpose of assignment of claims (see FAR Subpart 32.8, Assignment of Claims). Assignees shall be separately registered in the CCR database. Information provided to the Contractor's CCR record that indicates payments, including those made by EFT, to an ultimate recipient other than that Contractor will be considered to be incorrect information within the meaning of the "Suspension of payment" paragraph of the EFT clause of this contract. (h) Offerors and Contractors may obtain information on registration and annual confirmation requirements via CCR accessed through or by calling 1-888-227-2423, or 269-961-5757.(End of Clause)4.2 52.209-9 UPDATES OF PUBLICLY AVAILABLE INFORMATION REGARDING RESPONSIBILITY MATTERS (FEB 2012) (a) The Contractor shall update the information in the Federal Awardee Performance and Integrity Information System (FAPIIS) on a semi-annual basis, throughout the life of the contract, by posting the required information in the Central Contractor Registration database via . (b) As required by section 3010 of the Supplemental Appropriations Act, 2010 (Pub. L. 111-212), all information posted in FAPIIS on or after April 15, 2011, except past performance reviews, will be publicly available. FAPIIS consists of two segments-- (1) The non-public segment, into which Government officials and the Contractor post information, which can only be viewed by-- (i) Government personnel and authorized users performing business on behalf of the Government; or (ii) The Contractor, when viewing data on itself; and (2) The publicly-available segment, to which all data in the non-public segment of FAPIS is automatically transferred after a waiting period of 14 calendar days, except for-- (i) Past performance reviews required by subpart 42.15; (ii) Information that was entered prior to April 15, 2011; or (iii) Information that is withdrawn during the 14-calendar-day waiting period by the Government official who posted it in accordance with paragraph (c)(1) of this clause. (c) The Contractor will receive notification when the Government posts new information to the Contractor's record. (1) If the Contractor asserts in writing within 7 calendar days, to the Government official who posted the information, that some of the information posted to the nonpublic segment of FAPIIS is covered by a disclosure exemption under the Freedom of Information Act, the Government official who posted the information must within 7 calendar days remove the posting from FAPIIS and resolve the issue in accordance with agency Freedom of Information procedures, prior to reposting the releasable information. The contractor must cite 52.209-9 and request removal within 7 calendar days of the posting to FAPIIS. (2) The Contractor will also have an opportunity to post comments regarding information that has been posted by the Government. The comments will be retained as long as the associated information is retained, i.e., for a total period of 6 years. Contractor comments will remain a part of the record unless the Contractor revises them. (3) As required by section 3010 of Pub. L. 111-212, all information posted in FAPIIS on or after April 15, 2011, except past performance reviews, will be publicly available. (d) Public requests for system information posted prior to April 15, 2011, will be handled under Freedom of Information Act procedures, including, where appropriate, procedures promulgated under E.O. 12600. (End of Clause)4.3 52.211-2 AVAILABILITY OF SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS, AND DATA ITEM DESCRIPTIONS LISTED IN THE ACQUISITION STREAMLINING AND STANDARDIZATION INFORMATION SYSTEM (ASSIST) (JAN 2006) (a) Most unclassified Defense specifications and standards may be downloaded from the following ASSIST websites: (1) ASSIST (); (2) Quick Search (); (3) (). (b) Documents not available from ASSIST may be ordered from the Department of Defense Single Stock Point (DoDSSP) by- (1) Using the ASSIST Shopping Wizard (); (2) Phoning the DoDSSP Customer Service Desk (215) 697-2179, Mon-Fri, 0730 to 1600 EST; or (3) Ordering from DoDSSP, Building 4, Section D, 700 Robbins Avenue, Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Telephone (215) 697-2667/2179, Facsimile (215) 697-1462.(End of Provision)4.4 52.211-10 COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION, AND COMPLETION OF WORK (APR 1984) ALTERNATE I (APR 1984) The Contractor shall be required to (a) commence work under this contract within 10 calendar days after the date the Contractor receives the notice to proceed, (b) prosecute the work diligently, and (c) complete the entire work ready for use not later than TBD . The time stated for completion shall include final cleanup of the premises. The completion date is based on the assumption that the successful offeror will receive the notice to proceed by 02-28-2013. The completion date will be extended by the number of calendar days after the above date that the Contractor receives the notice to proceed, except to the extent that the delay in issuance of the notice to proceed results from the failure of the Contractor to execute the contract and give the required performance and payment bonds within the time specified in the offer.(End of Clause)4.5 52.219-28 POST-AWARD SMALL BUSINESS PROGRAM REREPRESENTATION (APR 2012) (a) Definitions. As used in this clause- Long-term contract means a contract of more than five years in duration, including options. However, the term does not include contracts that exceed five years in duration because the period of performance has been extended for a cumulative period not to exceed six months under the clause at 52.217-8, Option to Extend Services, or other appropriate authority. Small business concern means a concern, including its affiliates, that is independently owned and operated, not dominant in the field of operation in which it is bidding on Government contracts, and qualified as a small business under the criteria in 13 CFR part 121 and the size standard in paragraph (c) of this clause. Such a concern is "not dominant in its field of operation" when it does not exercise a controlling or major influence on a national basis in a kind of business activity in which a number of business concerns are primarily engaged. In determining whether dominance exists, consideration shall be given to all appropriate factors, including volume of business, number of employees, financial resources, competitive status or position, ownership or control of materials, processes, patents, license agreements, facilities, sales territory, and nature of business activity. (b) If the Contractor represented that it was a small business concern prior to award of this contract, the Contractor shall rerepresent its size status according to paragraph (e) of this clause or, if applicable, paragraph (g) of this clause, upon the occurrence of any of the following: (1) Within 30 days after execution of a novation agreement or within 30 days after modification of the contract to include this clause, if the novation agreement was executed prior to inclusion of this clause in the contract. (2) Within 30 days after a merger or acquisition that does not require a novation or within 30 days after modification of the contract to include this clause, if the merger or acquisition occurred prior to inclusion of this clause in the contract. (3) For long-term contracts- (i) Within 60 to 120 days prior to the end of the fifth year of the contract; and (ii) Within 60 to 120 days prior to the date specified in the contract for exercising any option thereafter. (c) The Contractor shall rerepresent its size status in accordance with the size standard in effect at the time of this rerepresentation that corresponds to the North American Industry Classification System (NAICS) code assigned to this contract. The small business size standard corresponding to this NAICS code can be found at . (d) The small business size standard for a Contractor providing a product which it does not manufacture itself, for a contract other than a construction or service contract, is 500 employees. (e) Except as provided in paragraph (g) of this clause, the Contractor shall make the rerepresentation required by paragraph (b) of this clause by validating or updating all its representations in the Online Representations and Certifications Application and its data in the Central Contractor Registration, as necessary, to ensure that they reflect the Contractor's current status. The Contractor shall notify the contracting office in writing within the timeframes specified in paragraph (b) of this clause that the data have been validated or updated, and provide the date of the validation or update. (f) If the Contractor represented that it was other than a small business concern prior to award of this contract, the Contractor may, but is not required to, take the actions required by paragraphs (e) or (g) of this clause. (g) If the Contractor does not have representations and certifications in ORCA, or does not have a representation in ORCA for the NAICS code applicable to this contract, the Contractor is required to complete the following rerepresentation and submit it to the contracting office, along with the contract number and the date on which the rerepresentation was completed: The Contractor represents that it [ ] is, [ ] is not a small business concern under NAICS Code 236220 assigned to contract number .[Contractor to sign and date and insert authorized signer's name and title].(End of Clause)4.6 52.222-40 NOTIFICATION OF EMPLOYEE RIGHTS UNDER THE NATIONAL LABOR RELATIONS ACT (DEC 2010) (a) During the term of this contract, the Contractor shall post an employee notice, of such size and in such form, and containing such content as prescribed by the Secretary of Labor, in conspicuous places in and about its plants and offices where employees covered by the National Labor Relations Act engage in activities relating to the performance of the contract, including all places where notices to employees are customarily posted both physically and electronically, in the languages employees speak, in accordance with 29 CFR 471.2(d) and (f). (1) Physical posting of the employee notice shall be in conspicuous places in and about the Contractor's plants and offices so that the notice is prominent and readily seen by employees who are covered by the National Labor Relations Act and engage in activities related to the performance of the contract. (2) If the Contractor customarily posts notices to employees electronically, then the Contractor shall also post the required notice electronically by displaying prominently, on any Web site that is maintained by the Contractor and is customarily used for notices to employees about terms and conditions of employment, a link to the Department of Labor's Web site that contains the full text of the poster. The link to the Department's Web site, as referenced in (b)(3) of this section, must read, "Important Notice about Employee Rights to Organize and Bargain Collectively with Their Employers." (b) This required employee notice, printed by the Department of Labor, may be- (1) Obtained from the Division of Interpretations and Standards, Office of Labor-Management Standards, U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW., Room N-5609, Washington, DC 20210, (202) 693-0123, or from any field office of the Office of Labor-Management Standards or Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs; (2) Provided by the Federal contracting agency if requested; (3) Downloaded from the Office of Labor-Management Standards Web site at ; or (4) Reproduced and used as exact duplicate copies of the Department of Labor's official poster. (c) The required text of the employee notice referred to in this clause is located at Appendix A, Subpart A, 29 CFR Part 471. (d) The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of the employee notice and related rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor. (e) In the event that the Contractor does not comply with the requirements set forth in paragraphs (a) through (d) of this clause, this contract may be terminated or suspended in whole or in part, and the Contractor may be suspended or debarred in accordance with 29 CFR 471.14 and subpart 9.4. Such other sanctions or remedies may be imposed as are provided by 29 CFR part 471, which implements Executive Order 13496 or as otherwise provided by law. (f) Subcontracts. (1) The Contractor shall include the substance of this clause, including this paragraph (f), in every subcontract that exceeds $10,000 and will be performed wholly or partially in the United States, unless exempted by the rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to section 3 of Executive Order 13496 of January 30, 2009, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor. (2) The Contractor shall not procure supplies or services in a way designed to avoid the applicability of Executive Order 13496 or this clause. (3) The Contractor shall take such action with respect to any such subcontract as may be directed by the Secretary of Labor as a means of enforcing such provisions, including the imposition of sanctions for noncompliance. (4) However, if the Contractor becomes involved in litigation with a subcontractor, or is threatened with such involvement, as a result of such direction, the Contractor may request the United States, through the Secretary of Labor, to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States.(End of Clause)4.7 52.223-15 ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN ENERGY-CONSUMING PRODUCTS (DEC 2007) (a) Definition. As used in this clause--"Energy-efficient product"-- (1) Means a product that-- (i) Meets Department of Energy and Environmental Protection Agency criteria for use of the Energy Star trademark label; or (ii) Is in the upper 25 percent of efficiency for all similar products as designated by the Department of Energy's Federal Energy Management Program. (2) The term "product" does not include any energy-consuming product or system designed or procured for combat or combat-related missions (42 U.S.C. 8259b). (b) The Contractor shall ensure that energy-consuming products are energy efficient products (i.e., ENERGY STAR? products or FEMP-designated products) at the time of contract award, for products that are-- (1) Delivered; (2) Acquired by the Contractor for use in performing services at a Federally-controlled facility; (3) Furnished by the Contractor for use by the Government; or (4) Specified in the design of a building or work, or incorporated during its construction, renovation, or maintenance. (c) The requirements of paragraph (b) apply to the Contractor (including any subcontractor) unless-- (1) The energy-consuming product is not listed in the ENERGY STAR? Program or FEMP; or (2) Otherwise approved in writing by the Contracting Officer. (d) Information about these products is available for-- (1) ENERGY STAR? at ; and (2) FEMP at (End of Clause)4.8 52.225-9 BUY AMERICAN ACT--CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS (SEP 2010) (a) Definitions. As used in this clause-- "Commercially available off-the-shelf (COTS) item"-- (1) Means any item of supply (including construction material) that is-- (i) A commercial item (as defined in paragraph (1) of the definition at FAR 2.101); (ii) Sold in substantial quantities in the commercial marketplace; and (iii) Offered to the Government, under a contract or subcontract at any tier, without modification, in the same form in which it is sold in the commercial marketplace; and (2) Does not include bulk cargo, as defined in section 3 of the Shipping Act of 1984 (46 U.S.C. App. 1702), such as agricultural products and petroleum products. "Component" means any article, material, or supply incorporated directly into construction material. "Construction material" means an article, material, or supply brought to the construction site by the Contractor or a subcontractor for incorporation into the building or work. The term also includes an item brought to the site preassembled from articles, materials, or supplies. However, emergency life safety systems, such as emergency lighting, fire alarm, and audio evacuation systems, that are discrete systems incorporated into a public building or work and that are produced as complete systems, are evaluated as a single and distinct construction material regardless of when or how the individual parts or components of those systems are delivered to the construction site. Materials purchased directly by the Government are supplies, not construction material. "Cost of components" means-- (1) For components purchased by the Contractor, the acquisition cost, including transportation costs to the place of incorporation into the end product (whether or not such costs are paid to a domestic firm), and any applicable duty (whether or not a duty-free entry certificate is issued); or (2) For components manufactured by the Contractor, all costs associated with the manufacture of the component, including transportation costs as described in paragraph (1) of this definition, plus allocable overhead costs, but excluding profit. Cost of components does not include any costs associated with the manufacture of the construction material. "Domestic construction material" means-- (1) An unmanufactured construction material mined or produced in the United States; (2) A construction material manufactured in the United States, if-- (i) The cost of its components mined, produced, or manufactured in the United States exceeds 50 percent of the cost of all its components. Components of foreign origin of the same class or kind for which nonavailability determinations have been made are treated as domestic; or (ii) The construction material is a COTS item. "Foreign construction material" means a construction material other than a domestic construction material. "United States" means the 50 States, the District of Columbia, and outlying areas. (b) Domestic preference. (1) This clause implements the Buy American Act (41 U.S.C. 10a-10d) by providing a preference for domestic construction material. In accordance with 41 U.S.C. 431, the component test of the Buy American Act is waived for construction material that is a COTS item (See FAR 12.505(a)(2)). The Contractor shall use only domestic construction material in performing this contract, except as provided in paragraphs (b)(2) and (b)(3) of this clause. (2) This requirement does not apply to information technology that is a commercial item or to the construction materials or components listed by the Government as follows:Lead, glass (3) The Contracting Officer may add other foreign construction material to the list in paragraph (b)(2) of this clause if the Government determines that-- (i) The cost of domestic construction material would be unreasonable. The cost of a particular domestic construction material subject to the requirements of the Buy American Act is unreasonable when the cost of such material exceeds the cost of foreign material by more than 6 percent; (ii) The application of the restriction of the Buy American Act to a particular construction material would be impracticable or inconsistent with the public interest; or (iii) The construction material is not mined, produced, or manufactured in the United States in sufficient and reasonably available commercial quantities of a satisfactory quality. (c) Request for determination of inapplicability of the Buy American Act. (1)(i) Any Contractor request to use foreign construction material in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this clause shall include adequate information for Government evaluation of the request, including-- (A) A description of the foreign and domestic construction materials; (B) Unit of measure; (C) Quantity; (D) Price; (E) Time of delivery or availability; (F) Location of the construction project; (G) Name and address of the proposed supplier; and (H) A detailed justification of the reason for use of foreign construction materials cited in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this clause. (ii) A request based on unreasonable cost shall include a reasonable survey of the market and a completed price comparison table in the format in paragraph (d) of this clause. (iii) The price of construction material shall include all delivery costs to the construction site and any applicable duty (whether or not a duty-free certificate may be issued). (iv) Any Contractor request for a determination submitted after contract award shall explain why the Contractor could not reasonably foresee the need for such determination and could not have requested the determination before contract award. If the Contractor does not submit a satisfactory explanation, the Contracting Officer need not make a determination. (2) If the Government determines after contract award that an exception to the Buy American Act applies and the Contracting Officer and the Contractor negotiate adequate consideration, the Contracting Officer will modify the contract to allow use of the foreign construction material. However, when the basis for the exception is the unreasonable price of a domestic construction material, adequate consideration is not less than the differential established in paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this clause. (3) Unless the Government determines that an exception to the Buy American Act applies, use of foreign construction material is noncompliant with the Buy American Act. (d) Data. To permit evaluation of requests under paragraph (c) of this clause based on unreasonable cost, the Contractor shall include the following information and any applicable supporting data based on the survey of suppliers:FOREIGN AND DOMESTIC CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS PRICE COMPARISONConstruction Material DescriptionUnit of MeasureQuantityPrice (Dollars)*Item 1:Foreign Construction MaterialDomestic Construction MaterialItem 2:Foreign Construction MaterialDomestic Construction Material[List name, address, telephone number, and contact for suppliers surveyed Attach copy of response; if oral, attach summary.][Include other applicable supporting information.][*Include all delivery costs to the construction site and any applicable duty (whether or not a duty-free entry certificate is issued).](End of Clause)4.9 52.228-5 INSURANCE - WORK ON A GOVERNMENT INSTALLATION (JAN 1997) (a) The Contractor shall, at its own expense, provide and maintain during the entire performance of this contract, at least the kinds and minimum amounts of insurance required in the Schedule or elsewhere in the contract. (b) Before commencing work under this contract, the Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer in writing that the required insurance has been obtained. The policies evidencing required insurance shall contain an endorsement to the effect that any cancellation or any material change adversely affecting the Government's interest shall not be effective-- (1) For such period as the laws of the State in which this contract is to be performed prescribe; or (2) Until 30 days after the insurer or the Contractor gives written notice to the Contracting Officer, whichever period is longer. (c) The Contractor shall insert the substance of this clause, including this paragraph (c), in subcontracts under this contract that require work on a Government installation and shall require subcontractors to provide and maintain the insurance required in the Schedule or elsewhere in the contract. The Contractor shall maintain a copy of all subcontractors' proofs of required insurance, and shall make copies available to the Contracting Officer upon request.(End of Clause)4.10 SUPPLEMENTAL INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS In accordance with FAR 28.307-2 and FAR 52.228-5, the following minimum coverage shall apply to this contract: (a) Workers' compensation and employers liability: Contractors are required to comply with applicable Federal and State workers' compensation and occupational disease statutes. If occupational diseases are not compensable under those statutes, they shall be covered under the employer's liability section of the insurance policy, except when contract operations are so commingled with a Contractor's commercial operations that it would not be practical to require this coverage. Employer's liability coverage of at least $100,000 is required, except in States with exclusive or monopolistic funds that do not permit workers' compensation to be written by private carriers. (b) General Liability: $500,000.00 per occurrences. (c) Automobile liability: $200,000.00 per person; $500,000.00 per occurrence and $20,000.00 property damage. (d) The successful bidder must present to the Contracting Officer, prior to award, evidence of general liability insurance without any exclusionary clauses for asbestos that would void the general liability coverage. (End of Clause)4.11 VAAR 852.203-70 COMMERCIAL ADVERTISING (JAN 2008) The bidder or offeror agrees that if a contract is awarded to him/her, as a result of this solicitation, he/she will not advertise the award of the contract in his/her commercial advertising in such a manner as to state or imply that the Department of Veterans Affairs endorses a product, project or commercial line of endeavor.(End of Clause)4.12 852.211-75 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS (JAN 2008) The products offered under this solicitation shall be type , grade , in accordance with No. , dated and amendment dated , except for paragraphs and which are amended as follows:(End of Clause)4.13 VAAR 852.219-10 VA NOTICE OF TOTAL SERVICE-DISABLED VETERAN-OWNED SMALL BUSINESS SET-ASIDE (DEC 2009) (a) Definition. For the Department of Veterans Affairs, "Service-disabled veteran-owned small business concern": (1) Means a small business concern: (i) Not less than 51 percent of which is owned by one or more service-disabled veterans or, in the case of any publicly owned business, not less than 51 percent of the stock of which is owned by one or more service-disabled veterans (or eligible surviving spouses); (ii) The management and daily business operations of which are controlled by one or more service-disabled veterans (or eligible surviving spouses) or, in the case of a service-disabled veteran with permanent and severe disability, the spouse or permanent caregiver of such veteran; (iii) The business meets Federal small business size standards for the applicable North American Industry Classification System (NAICS) code identified in the solicitation document; and (iv) The business has been verified for ownership and control and is so listed in the Vendor Information Pages database, (). (2) "Service-disabled veteran" means a veteran, as defined in 38 U.S.C. 101(2), with a disability that is service-connected, as defined in 38 U.S.C. 101(16). (b) General. (1) Offers are solicited only from service-disabled veteran-owned small business concerns. Offers received from concerns that are not service-disabled veteran-owned small business concerns shall not be considered. (2) Any award resulting from this solicitation shall be made to a service-disabled veteran-owned small business concern. (c) Agreement. A service-disabled veteran-owned small business concern agrees that in the performance of the contract, in the case of a contract for: (1) Services (except construction), at least 50 percent of the cost of personnel for contract performance will be spent for employees of the concern or employees of other eligible service-disabled veteran-owned small business concerns; (2) Supplies (other than acquisition from a nonmanufacturer of the supplies), at least 50 percent of the cost of manufacturing, excluding the cost of materials, will be performed by the concern or other eligible service-disabled veteran-owned small business concerns; (3) General construction, at least 15 percent of the cost of the contract performance incurred for personnel will be spent on the concern's employees or the employees of other eligible service-disabled veteran-owned small business concerns; or (4) Construction by special trade contractors, at least 25 percent of the cost of the contract performance incurred for personnel will be spent on the concern's employees or the employees of other eligible service-disabled veteran-owned small business concerns. (d) A joint venture may be considered a service-disabled veteran owned small business concern if-- (1) At least one member of the joint venture is a service-disabled veteran-owned small business concern, and makes the following representations: That it is a service-disabled veteran-owned small business concern, and that it is a small business concern under the North American Industry Classification Systems (NAICS) code assigned to the procurement; (2) Each other concern is small under the size standard corresponding to the NAICS code assigned to the procurement; and (3) The joint venture meets the requirements of paragraph 7 of the explanation of Affiliates in 19.101 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation. (4) The joint venture meets the requirements of 13 CFR 125.15(b). (e) Any service-disabled veteran-owned small business concern (non-manufacturer) must meet the requirements in 19.102(f) of the Federal Acquisition Regulation to receive a benefit under this program.(End of Clause)4.14 VAAR 852.228-70 BOND PREMIUM ADJUSTMENT (JAN 2008) When net changes in original contract price affect the premium of a Corporate Surety Bond by $5 or more, the Government, in determining the basis for final settlement, will provide for bond premium adjustment computed at the rate shown in the bond.(End of Clause)4.15 VAAR 852.236-71 SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR CONSTRUCTION (JUL 2002) The clause entitled "Specifications and Drawings for Construction" in FAR 52.236-21 is supplemented as follows: (a) The contracting officer's interpretation of the drawings and specifications will be final, subject to the disputes clause. (b) Large scale drawings supersede small scale drawings. (c) Dimensions govern in all cases. Scaling of drawings may be done only for general location and general size of items. (d) Dimensions shown of existing work and all dimensions required for work that is to connect with existing work shall be verified by the contractor by actual measurement of the existing work. Any work at variance with that specified or shown in the drawings shall not be performed by the contractor until approved in writing by the contracting officer.(End of Clause)4.16 VAAR 852.236-74 INSPECTION OF CONSTRUCTION (JUL 2002) The clause entitled "Inspection of Construction" in FAR 52.246-12 is supplemented as follows: (a) Inspection of materials and articles furnished under this contract will be made at the site by the resident engineer, unless otherwise provided for in the specifications. (b) Final inspection will not be made until the contract work is ready for beneficial use or occupancy. The contractor shall notify the contracting officer, through the resident engineer, fifteen (15) days prior to the date on which the work will be ready for final inspection.(End of Clause)4.17 VAAR 852.236-76 CORRESPONDENCE (APR 1984) All correspondence relative to this contract shall bear Specification Number, Project Number, Department of Veterans Affairs Contract Number, title of project and name of facility.(End of Clause)4.18 VAAR 852.236-77 REFERENCE TO "STANDARDS" (JUL 2002) Any materials, equipment, or workmanship specified by references to number, symbol, or title of any specific Federal, Industry or Government Agency Standard Specification shall comply with all applicable provisions of such standard specifications, except as limited to type, class or grade, or modified in contract specifications. Reference to "Standards" referred to in the contract specifications, except as modified, shall have full force and effect as though printed in detail in specifications.(End of Clause)4.19 VAAR 852.236-78 GOVERNMENT SUPERVISION (APR 1984) (a) The work will be under the direction of the Department of Veterans Affairs contracting officer, who may designate another VA employee to act as resident engineer at the construction site. (b) Except as provided below, the resident engineer's directions will not conflict with or change contract requirements. (c) Within the limits of any specific authority delegated by the contracting officer, the resident engineer may, by written direction, make changes in the work. The contractor shall be advised of the extent of such authority prior to execution of any work under the contract.(End of Clause)4.20 VAAR 852.236-79 DAILY REPORT OF WORKERS AND MATERIAL (APR 1984) The contractor shall furnish to the resident engineer each day a consolidated report for the preceding work day in which is shown the number of laborers, mechanics, foremen/forewomen and pieces of heavy equipment used or employed by the contractor and subcontractors. The report shall bear the name of the firm, the branch of work which they perform such as concrete, plastering, masonry, plumbing, sheet metal work, etc. The report shall give a breakdown of employees by crafts, location where employed, and work performed. The report shall also list materials delivered to the site on the date covered by the report.(End of Clause)4.21 VAAR 852.236-80 SUBCONTRACTS AND WORK COORDINATION (APR 1984) (a) Nothing contained in this contract shall be construed as creating any contractual relationship between any subcontractor and the Government. Divisions or sections of specifications are not intended to control the contractor in dividing work among subcontractors, or to limit work performed by any trade. (b) The contractor shall be responsible to the Government for acts and omissions of his/her own employees, and of the subcontractors and their employees. The contractor shall also be responsible for coordination of the work of the trades, subcontractors, and material suppliers. (c) The Government or its representatives will not undertake to settle any differences between the contractor and subcontractors or between subcontractors. (d) The Government reserves the right to refuse to permit employment on the work or require dismissal from the work of any subcontractor who, by reason of previous unsatisfactory work on Department of Veterans Affairs projects or for any other reason, is considered by the contracting officer to be incompetent or otherwise objectionable.(End of Clause)4.22 VAAR 852.236-82 PAYMENTS UNDER FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS (WITHOUT NAS) (APR 1984) (a) Retainage: (1) The contracting officer may retain funds: (i) Where performance under the contract has been determined to be deficient or the contractor has performed in an unsatisfactory manner in the past; or (ii) As the contract nears completion, to ensure that deficiencies will be corrected and that completion is timely. (2) Examples of deficient performance justifying a retention of funds include, but are not restricted to, the following: (i) Unsatisfactory progress as determined by the contracting officer; (ii) Failure to meet schedule in Schedule of Work Progress; (iii) Failure to present submittals in a timely manner; or (iv) Failure to comply in good faith with approved subcontracting plans, certifications, or contract requirements. (3) Any level of retention shall not exceed 10 percent either where there is determined to be unsatisfactory performance, or when the retainage is to ensure satisfactory completion. Retained amounts shall be paid promptly upon completion of all contract requirements, but nothing contained in this subparagraph shall be construed as limiting the contracting officer's right to withhold funds under other provisions of the contract or in accordance with the general law and regulations regarding the administration of Government contracts. (b) The contractor shall submit a schedule of cost to the contracting officer for approval within 30 calendar days after date of receipt of notice to proceed. Such schedule will be signed and submitted in triplicate. The approved cost schedule will be one of the bases for determining progress payments to the contractor for work completed. This schedule shall show cost by the branches of work for each building or unit of the contract, as instructed by the resident engineer. (1) The branches shall be subdivided into as many sub-branches as are necessary to cover all component parts of the contract work. (2) Costs as shown on this schedule must be true costs and, should the resident engineer so desire, he/she may require the contractor to submit the original estimate sheets or other information to substantiate the detailed makeup of the schedule. (3) The sum of the sub-branches, as applied to each branch, shall equal the total cost of such branch. The total cost of all branches shall equal the contract price. (4) Insurance and similar items shall be prorated and included in the cost of each branch of the work. (5) The cost schedule shall include separate cost information for the systems listed in the table in this paragraph (b)(5). The percentages listed below are proportions of the cost listed in the contractor's cost schedule and identify, for payment purposes, the value of the work to adjust, correct and test systems after the material has been installed. Payment of the listed percentages will be made only after the contractor has demonstrated that each of the systems is substantially complete and operates as required by the contract.VALUE OF ADJUSTING, CORRECTING, AND TESTING SYSTEMSystemPercentPneumatic tube system10Incinerators (medical waste and trash)5Sewage treatment plant equipment5Water treatment plant equipment5Washers (dish, cage, glass, etc.)5Sterilizing equipment5Water distilling equipment5Prefab temperature rooms (cold, constant temperature)5Entire air-conditioning system (Specified under 600 Sections)5Entire boiler plant system (Specified under 700 Sections)5General supply conveyors10Food service conveyors10Pneumatic soiled linen and trash system10Elevators and dumbwaiters10Materials transport system10Engine-generator system5Primary switchgear5Secondary switchgear5Fire alarm system5Nurse call system5Intercom system5Radio system5TV (entertainment) system5 (c) In addition to this cost schedule, the contractor shall submit such unit costs as may be specifically requested. The unit costs shall be those used by the contractor in preparing his/her bid and will not be binding as pertaining to any contract changes. (d) The contracting officer will consider for monthly progress payments material and/or equipment procured by the contractor and stored on the construction site, as space is available, or at a local approved location off the site, under such terms and conditions as such officer approves, including but not limited to the following: (1) The material or equipment is in accordance with the contract requirements and/or approved samples and shop drawings. (2) Only those materials and/or equipment as are approved by the resident engineer for storage will be included. (3) Such materials and/or equipment will be stored separately and will be readily available for inspection and inventory by the resident engineer. (4) Such materials and/or equipment will be protected against weather, theft and other hazards and will not be subjected to deterioration. (5) All of the other terms, provisions, conditions and covenants contained in the contract shall be and remain in full force and effect as therein provided. (6) A supplemental agreement will be executed between the Government and the contractor with the consent of the contractor's surety for off-site storage. (e) The contractor, prior to receiving a progress or final payment under this contract, shall submit to the contracting officer a certification that the contractor has made payment from proceeds of prior payments, or that timely payment will be made from the proceeds of the progress or final payment then due, to subcontractors and suppliers in accordance with the contractual arrangements with them. (f) The Government reserves the right to withhold payment until samples, shop drawings, engineer's certificates, additional bonds, payrolls, weekly statements of compliance, proof of title, nondiscrimination compliance reports, or any other things required by this contract, have been submitted to the satisfaction of the contracting officer.(End of Clause)4.23 VAAR 852.236-84 SCHEDULE OF WORK PROGRESS (NOV 1984) (a) The contractor shall submit with the schedule of costs, a progress schedule that indicates the anticipated installation of work versus the elapsed contract time, for the approval of the contracting officer. The progress schedule time shall be represented in the form of a bar graph with the contract time plotted along the horizontal axis. The starting date of the schedule shall be the date the contractor receives the "Notice to Proceed." The ending date shall be the original contract completion date. At a minimum, both dates shall be indicated on the progress schedule. The specific item of work, i.e., "Excavation", "Floor Tile", "Finish Carpentry", etc., should be plotted along the vertical axis and indicated by a line or bar at which time(s) during the contract this work is scheduled to take place. The schedule shall be submitted in triplicate and signed by the contractor. (b) The actual percent completion will be based on the value of installed work divided by the current contract amount. The actual completion percentage will be indicated on the monthly progress report. (c) The progress schedule will be revised when individual or cumulative time extensions of 15 calendar days or more are granted for any reason. The revised schedule should indicate the new contract completion date and should reflect any changes to the installation time(s) of the items of work affected. (d) The revised progress schedule will be used for reporting future scheduled percentage completion.(End of Clause)4.24 VAAR 852.236-85 SUPPLEMENTARY LABOR STANDARDS PROVISIONS (APR 1984) (a) The wage determination decision of the Secretary of Labor is set forth in section GR, General Requirements, of this contract. It is the result of a study of wage conditions in the locality and establishes the minimum hourly rates of wages and fringe benefits for the described classes of labor in accordance with applicable law. No increase in the contract price will be allowed or authorized because of payment of wage rates in excess of those listed. (b) The contractor shall submit the required copies of payrolls to the contracting officer through the resident engineer or engineer officer, when acting in that capacity. Department of Labor Form WH- 347, Payroll, available from the Superintendent of Documents, Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402, may be used for this purpose. If, however, the contractor or subcontractor elects to use an individually composed payroll form, it shall contain the same information shown on Form WH-347, and in addition be accompanied by Department of Labor Form WH-348, Statement of Compliance, or any other form containing the exact wording of this form.(End of Clause)4.25 VAAR 852.236-86 WORKER'S COMPENSATION (JAN 2008) Public Law 107-217 (40 U.S.C. 3172) authorizes the constituted authority of States to apply their workers compensation laws to all lands and premises owned or held by the United States.(End of Clause)4.26 VAAR 852.236-87 ACCIDENT PREVENTION (SEP 1993) The Resident Engineer on all assigned construction projects, or other Department of Veterans Affairs employee if designated in writing by the Contracting Officer, shall serve as Safety Officer and as such has authority, on behalf of the Contracting Officer, to monitor and enforce Contractor compliance with FAR 52.236-13, Accident Prevention. However, only the Contracting Officer may issue an order to stop all or part of the work while requiring satisfactory or corrective action to be taken by the Contractor.(End of Clause)4.27 VAAR 852.236-88 CONTRACT CHANGES--SUPPLEMENT (JUL 2002) (a) Paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(4) apply to proposed contract changes costing over $500,000. (1) When requested by the contracting officer, the contractor shall submit proposals for changes in work to the resident engineer. Proposals, to be submitted as expeditiously as possible but within 30 calendar days after receipt of request, shall be in legible form, original and two copies, with an itemized breakdown that will include material, quantities, unit prices, labor costs (separated into trades), construction equipment, etc. (Labor costs are to be identified with specific material placed or operation performed.) The contractor must obtain and furnish with a proposal an itemized breakdown as described above, signed by each subcontractor participating in the change regardless of tier. When certified cost or pricing data are required under FAR Subpart 15.403, the cost or pricing data shall be submitted in accordance with FAR 15.403-5. (2) When the necessity to proceed with a change does not allow sufficient time to negotiate a modification or because of failure to reach an agreement, the contracting officer may issue a change order instructing the contractor to proceed on the basis of a tentative price based on the best estimate available at the time, with the firm price to be determined later. Furthermore, when the change order is issued, the contractor shall submit a proposal, which includes the information required by paragraph (a)(1), for cost of changes in work within 30 calendar days. (3) The contracting officer will consider issuing a settlement by determination to the contract if the contractor's proposal required by paragraphs (a)(1) or (a)(2) of this clause is not received within 30 calendar days or if agreement has not been reached. (4) Bond premium adjustment, consequent upon changes ordered, will be made as elsewhere specified at the time of final settlement under the contract and will not be included in the individual change. (b) Paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(11) apply to proposed contract changes costing $500,000 or less: (1) When requested by the contracting officer, the contractor shall submit proposals for changes in work to the resident engineer. Proposals, to be submitted as expeditiously as possible but within 30 calendar days after receipt of request, shall be in legible form, original and two copies, with an itemized breakdown that will include material, quantities, unit prices, labor costs (separated into trades), construction equipment, etc. (Labor costs are to be identified with specific material placed or operation performed.) The contractor must obtain and furnish with a proposal an itemized breakdown as described above, signed by each subcontractor participating in the change regardless of tier. When certified cost or pricing data or information other than cost or pricing data are required under FAR 15.403, the data shall be submitted in accordance with FAR 15.403-5. No itemized breakdown will be required for proposals amounting to less than $1,000. (2) When the necessity to proceed with a change does not allow sufficient time to negotiate a modification or because of failure to reach an agreement, the contracting officer may issue a change order instructing the contractor to proceed on the basis of a tentative price based on the best estimate available at the time, with the firm price to be determined later. Furthermore, when the change order is issued, the contractor shall submit within 30 calendar days, a proposal that includes the information required by paragraph (b)(1) for the cost of the changes in work. (3) The contracting officer will consider issuing a settlement by determination to the contract if the contractor's proposal required by paragraphs (b)(1) or (b)(2) of this clause is not received within 30 calendar days, or if agreement has not been reached. (4) Allowances not to exceed 10 percent each for overhead and profit for the party performing the work will be based on the value of labor, material, and use of construction equipment required to accomplish the change. As the value of the change increases, a declining scale will be used in negotiating the percentage of overhead and profit. Allowable percentages on changes will not exceed the following: 10 percent overhead and 10 percent profit on the first $20,000; 7-1/2 percent overhead and 7-1/2 percent profit on the next $30,000; 5 percent overhead and 5 percent profit on balance over $50,000. Profit shall be computed by multiplying the profit percentage by the sum of the direct costs and computed overhead costs. (5) The prime contractor's or upper-tier subcontractor's fee on work performed by lower-tier subcontractors will be based on the net increased cost to the prime contractor or upper-tier subcontractor, as applicable. Allowable fee on changes will not exceed the following: 10 percent fee on the first $20,000; 7-1/2 percent fee on the next $30,000; and 5 percent fee on balance over $50,000. (6) Not more than four percentages, none of which exceed the percentages shown above, will be allowed regardless of the number of tiers of subcontractors. (7) Where the contractor's or subcontractor's portion of a change involves credit items, such items must be deducted prior to adding overhead and profit for the party performing the work. The contractor's fee is limited to the net increase to contractor of subcontractors' portions cost computed in accordance herewith. (8) Where a change involves credit items only, a proper measure of the amount of downward adjustment in the contract price is the reasonable cost to the contractor if he/she had performed the deleted work. A reasonable allowance for overhead and profit are properly includable as part of the downward adjustment for a deductive change. The amount of such allowance is subject to negotiation. (9) Cost of Federal Old Age Benefit (Social Security) tax and of Worker's Compensation and Public Liability insurance appertaining to changes are allowable. While no percentage will be allowed thereon for overhead or profit, prime contractor's fee will be allowed on such items in subcontractors' proposals. (10) Overhead and contractor's fee percentages shall be considered to include insurance other than mentioned herein, field and office supervisors and assistants, security police, use of small tools, incidental job burdens, and general home office expenses and no separate allowance will be made therefore. Assistants to office supervisors include all clerical, stenographic and general office help. Incidental job burdens include, but are not necessarily limited to, office equipment and supplies, temporary toilets, telephone and conformance to OSHA requirements. Items such as, but not necessarily limited to, review and coordination, estimating and expediting relative to contract changes are associated with field and office supervision and are considered to be included in the contractor's overhead and/or fee percentage. (11) Bond premium adjustment, consequent upon changes ordered, will be made as elsewhere specified at the time of final settlement under the contract and will not be included in the individual change.(End of Clause)4.28 VAAR 852.236-89 BUY AMERICAN ACT (JAN 2008) (a) Reference is made to the clause entitled "Buy American Act--Construction Materials," FAR 52.225-9. (b) Notwithstanding a bidder's right to offer identifiable foreign construction material in its bid pursuant to FAR 52.225-9, VA does not anticipate accepting an offer that includes foreign construction material. (c) If a bidder chooses to submit a bid that includes foreign construction material, that bidder must provide a listing of the specific foreign construction material he/she intends to use and a price for said material. Bidders must include bid prices for comparable domestic construction material. If VA determines not to accept foreign construction material and no comparable domestic construction material is provided, the entire bid will be rejected. (d) Any foreign construction material proposed after award will be rejected unless the bidder proves to VA's satisfaction: (1) it was impossible to request the exemption prior to award, and (2) said domestic construction material is no longer available, or (3) where the price has escalated so dramatically after the contract has been awarded that it would be unconscionable to require performance at that price. The determinations required by (1), (2), and (3) of this paragraph shall be made in accordance with Subpart 825.2 and FAR 25.2. (e) By signing this bid, the bidder declares that all articles, materials and supplies for use on the project shall be domestic unless specifically set forth on the Bid Form or addendum thereto.(End of Clause)4.29 VAAR 852.236-91 SPECIAL NOTES (JUL 2002) (a) Signing of the bid shall be deemed to be a representation by the bidder that: (1) Bidder is a construction contractor who owns, operates, or maintains a place of business, regularly engaged in construction, alteration, or repair of buildings, structures, and communications facilities, or other engineering projects, including furnishing and installing of necessary equipment; or (2) If newly entering into a construction activity, bidder has made all necessary arrangements for personnel, construction equipment, and required licenses to perform construction work; and (3) Upon request, prior to award, bidder will promptly furnish to the Government a statement of facts in detail as to bidder's previous experience (including recent and current contracts), organization (including company officers), technical qualifications, financial resources and facilities available to perform the contemplated work. (b) Unless otherwise provided in this contract, where the use of optional materials or construction is permitted, the same standard of workmanship, fabrication and installation shall be required irrespective of which option is selected. The contractor shall make any change or adjustment in connecting work or otherwise necessitated by the use of such optional material or construction, without additional cost to the Government. (c) When approval is given for a system component having functional or physical characteristics different from those indicated or specified, it is the responsibility of the contractor to furnish and install related components with characteristics and capacities compatible with the approved substitute component as required for systems to function as noted on drawings and specifications. There shall be no additional cost to the Government. (d) In some instances it may have been impracticable to detail all items in specifications or on drawings because of variances in manufacturers' methods of achieving specified results. In such instances the contractor will be required to furnish all labor, materials, drawings, services and connections necessary to produce systems or equipment which are completely installed, functional, and ready for operation by facility personnel in accordance with their intended use. (e) Claims by the contractor for delay attributed to unusually severe weather must be supported by climatological data covering the period and the same period for the 10 preceding years. When the weather in question exceeds in intensity or frequency the 10-year average, the excess experienced shall be considered "unusually severe." Comparison shall be on a monthly basis. Whether or not unusually severe weather in fact delays the work will depend upon the effect of weather on the branches of work being performed during the time under consideration.(End of Clause)4.30 VAAR 852.246-74 SPECIAL WARRANTIES (JAN 2008) The clause entitled "Warranty of Construction" in FAR 52.246-21 is supplemented as follows: Any special warranties that may be required under the contract shall be subject to the elections set forth in the FAR clause at 52.246-21, Warranty of Construction, unless otherwise provided for in such special warranties.(End of Clause)4.31 VAAR 852.273-76 ELECTRONIC INVOICE SUBMISSION (Interim - October 2008) (a) To improve the timeliness of payments and lower overall administrative costs, VA strongly encourages contractors to submit invoices using its electronic invoicing system. At present, electronic submission is voluntary and any nominal registration fees will be the responsibility of the contractor. VA intends to mandate electronic invoice submission, subject to completion of the federal rulemaking process. At present, VA is using a 3rd party agent to contact contractors regarding this service. During the voluntary period, contractors interested in registering for the electronic system should contact the VA's Financial Services Center at .(End of Clause)4.32 IT CONTRACT SECURITY VA INFORMATION AND INFORMATION SYSTEM SECURITY/PRIVACY 1. GENERAL Contractors, contractor personnel, subcontractors, and subcontractor personnel shall be subject to the same Federal laws, regulations, standards, and VA Directives and Handbooks as VA and VA personnel regarding information and information system security. 2. ACCESS TO VA INFORMATION AND VA INFORMATION SYSTEMS a. A contractor/subcontractor shall request logical (technical) or physical access to VA information and VA information systems for their employees, subcontractors, and affiliates only to the extent necessary to perform the services specified in the contract, agreement, or task order. b. All contractors, subcontractors, and third-party servicers and associates working with VA information are subject to the same investigative requirements as those of VA appointees or employees who have access to the same types of information. The level and process of background security investigations for contractors must be in accordance with VA Directive and Handbook 0710, Personnel Suitability and Security Program. The Office for Operations, Security, and Preparedness is responsible for these policies and procedures. c. Contract personnel who require access to national security programs must have a valid security clearance. National Industrial Security Program (NISP) was established by Executive Order 12829 to ensure that cleared U.S. defense industry contract personnel safeguard the classified information in their possession while performing work on contracts, programs, bids, or research and development efforts. The Department of Veterans Affairs does not have a Memorandum of Agreement with Defense Security Service (DSS). Verification of a Security Clearance must be processed through the Special Security Officer located in the Planning and National Security Service within the Office of Operations, Security, and Preparedness. d. Custom software development and outsourced operations must be located in the U.S. to the maximum extent practical. If such services are proposed to be performed abroad and are not disallowed by other VA policy or mandates, the contractor/subcontractor must state where all non-U.S. services are provided and detail a security plan, deemed to be acceptable by VA, specifically to address mitigation of the resulting problems of communication, control, data protection, and so forth. Location within the U.S. may be an evaluation factor. e. The contractor or subcontractor must notify the Contracting Officer immediately when an employee working on a VA system or with access to VA information is reassigned or leaves the contractor or subcontractor's employ. The Contracting Officer must also be notified immediately by the contractor or subcontractor prior to an unfriendly termination. 3. VA INFORMATION CUSTODIAL LANGUAGE a. Information made available to the contractor or subcontractor by VA for the performance or administration of this contract or information developed by the contractor/subcontractor in performance or administration of the contract shall be used only for those purposes and shall not be used in any other way without the prior written agreement of the VA. This clause expressly limits the contractor/subcontractor's rights to use data as described in Rights in Data - General, FAR 52.227-14(d) (1). b. VA information should not be co-mingled, if possible, with any other data on the contractors/subcontractor's information systems or media storage systems in order to ensure VA requirements related to data protection and media sanitization can be met. If co-mingling must be allowed to meet the requirements of the business need, the contractor must ensure that VA's information is returned to the VA or destroyed in accordance with VA's sanitization requirements. VA reserves the right to conduct on site inspections of contractor and subcontractor IT resources to ensure data security controls, separation of data and job duties, and destruction/media sanitization procedures are in compliance with VA directive requirements. c. Prior to termination or completion of this contract, contractor/ subcontractor must not destroy information received from VA, or gathered/ created by the contractor in the course of performing this contract without prior written approval by the VA. Any data destruction done on behalf of VA by a contractor/subcontractor must be done in accordance with National Archives and Records Administration (NARA) requirements as outlined in VA Directive 6300, Records and Information Management and its Handbook 6300.1 Records Management Procedures, applicable VA Records Control Schedules, and VA Handbook 6500.1, Electronic Media Sanitization. Self-certification by the contractor that the data destruction requirements above have been met must be sent to the VA Contracting Officer within 30 days of termination of the contract. d. The contractor/subcontractor must receive, gather, store, back up, maintain, use, disclose and dispose of VA information only in compliance with the terms of the contract and applicable Federal and VA information confidentiality and security laws, regulations and policies. If Federal or VA information confidentiality and security laws, regulations and policies become applicable to the VA information or information systems after execution of the contract, or if NIST issues or updates applicable FIPS or Special Publications (SP) after execution of this contract, the parties agree to negotiate in good faith to implement the information confidentiality and security laws, regulations and policies in this contract. e. The contractor/subcontractor shall not make copies of VA information except as authorized and necessary to perform the terms of the agreement or to preserve electronic information stored on contractor/subcontractor electronic storage media for restoration in case any electronic equipment or data used by the contractor/subcontractor needs to be restored to an operating state. If copies are made for restoration purposes, after the restoration is complete, the copies must be appropriately destroyed. f. If VA determines that the contractor has violated any of the information confidentiality, privacy, and security provisions of the contract, it shall be sufficient grounds for VA to withhold payment to the contractor or third party or terminate the contract for default or terminate for cause under Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) part 12. g. If a VHA contract is terminated for cause, the associated BAA must also be terminated and appropriate actions taken in accordance with VHA Handbook 1600.01, Business Associate Agreements. Absent an agreement to use or disclose protected health information, there is no business associate relationship. h. The contractor/subcontractor must store, transport, or transmit VA sensitive information in an encrypted form, using VA-approved encryption tools that are, at a minimum, FIPS 140-2 validated. i. The contractor/subcontractor's firewall and Web services security controls, if applicable, shall meet or exceed VA's minimum requirements. VA Configuration Guidelines are available upon request. j. Except for uses and disclosures of VA information authorized by this contract for performance of the contract, the contractor/subcontractor may use and disclose VA information only in two other situations: (i) in response to a qualifying order of a court of competent jurisdiction, or (ii) with VA's prior written approval. The contractor/subcontractor must refer all requests for, demands for production of, or inquiries about, VA information and information systems to the VA contracting officer for response. k. Notwithstanding the provision above, the contractor/subcontractor shall not release VA records protected by Title 38 U.S.C. 5705, confidentiality of medical quality assurance records and/or Title 38 U.S.C. 7332, confidentiality of certain health records pertaining to drug addiction, sickle cell anemia, alcoholism or alcohol abuse, or infection with human immunodeficiency virus. If the contractor/subcontractor is in receipt of a court order or other requests for the above mentioned information, that contractor/subcontractor shall immediately refer such court orders or other requests to the VA contracting officer for response. l. For service that involves the storage, generating, transmitting, or exchanging of VA sensitive information but does not require C&A or an MOU-ISA for system interconnection, the contractor/subcontractor must complete a Contractor Security Control Assessment (CSCA) on a yearly basis and provide it to the COTR. 4. INFORMATION SYSTEM DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT a. Information systems that are designed or developed for or on behalf of VA at non-VA facilities shall comply with all VA directives developed in accordance with FISMA, HIPAA, NIST, and related VA security and privacy control requirements for Federal information systems. This includes standards for the protection of electronic PHI, outlined in 45 C.F.R. Part 164, Subpart C, information and system security categorization level designations in accordance with FIPS 199 and FIPS 200 with implementation of all baseline security controls commensurate with the FIPS 199 system security categorization (reference Appendix D of VA Handbook 6500, VA Information Security Program). During the development cycle a Privacy Impact Assessment (PIA) must be completed, provided to the COTR, and approved by the VA Privacy Service in accordance with Directive 6507, VA Privacy Impact Assessment. b. The contractor/subcontractor shall certify to the COTR that applications are fully functional and operate correctly as intended on systems using the VA Federal Desktop Core Configuration (FDCC), and the common security configuration guidelines provided by NIST or the VA. This includes Internet Explorer 7 configured to operate on Windows XP and Vista (in Protected Mode on Vista) and future versions, as required. c. The standard installation, operation, maintenance, updating, and patching of software shall not alter the configuration settings from the VA approved and FDCC configuration. Information technology staff must also use the Windows Installer Service for installation to the default "program files" directory and silently install and uninstall. d. Applications designed for normal end users shall run in the standard user context without elevated system administration privileges. e. The security controls must be designed, developed, approved by VA, and implemented in accordance with the provisions of VA security system development life cycle as outlined in NIST Special Publication 800-37, Guide for Applying the Risk Management Framework to Federal Information Systems, VA Handbook 6500, Information Security Program and VA Handbook 6500.5, Incorporating Security and Privacy in System Development Lifecycle. f. The contractor/subcontractor is required to design, develop, or operate a System of Records Notice (SOR) on individuals to accomplish an agency function subject to the Privacy Act of 1974, (as amended), Public Law 93-579, December 31, 1974 (5 U.S.C. 552a) and applicable agency regulations. Violation of the Privacy Act may involve the imposition of criminal and civil penalties. g. The contractor/subcontractor agrees to: (1) Comply with the Privacy Act of 1974 (the Act) and the agency rules and regulations issued under the Act in the design, development, or operation of any system of records on individuals to accomplish an agency function when the contract specifically identifies: (a) The Systems of Records (SOR); and (b) The design, development, or operation work that the contractor/ subcontractor is to perform; (1) Include the Privacy Act notification contained in this contract in every solicitation and resulting subcontract and in every subcontract awarded without a solicitation, when the work statement in the proposed subcontract requires the redesign, development, or operation of a SOR on individuals that is subject to the Privacy Act; and (2) Include this Privacy Act clause, including this subparagraph (3), in all subcontracts awarded under this contract which requires the design, development, or operation of such a SOR. h. In the event of violations of the Act, a civil action may be brought against the agency involved when the violation concerns the design, development, or operation of a SOR on individuals to accomplish an agency function, and criminal penalties may be imposed upon the officers or employees of the agency when the violation concerns the operation of a SOR on individuals to accomplish an agency function. For purposes of the Act, when the contract is for the operation of a SOR on individuals to accomplish an agency function, the contractor/subcontractor is considered to be an employee of the agency. (1) "Operation of a System of Records" means performance of any of the activities associated with maintaining the SOR, including the collection, use, maintenance, and dissemination of records. (2) "Record" means any item, collection, or grouping of information about an individual that is maintained by an agency, including, but not limited to, education, financial transactions, medical history, and criminal or employment history and contains the person's name, or identifying number, symbol, or any other identifying particular assigned to the individual, such as a fingerprint or voiceprint, or a photograph. (3) "System of Records" means a group of any records under the control of any agency from which information is retrieved by the name of the individual or by some identifying number, symbol, or other identifying particular assigned to the individual. i. The vendor shall ensure the security of all procured or developed systems and technologies, including their subcomponents (hereinafter referred to as "Systems"), throughout the life of this contract and any extension, warranty, or maintenance periods. This includes, but is not limited to workarounds, patches, hotfixes, upgrades, and any physical components (hereafter referred to as Security Fixes) which may be necessary to fix all security vulnerabilities published or known to the vendor anywhere in the Systems, including Operating Systems and firmware. The vendor shall ensure that Security Fixes shall not negatively impact the Systems. j. The vendor shall notify VA within 24 hours of the discovery or disclosure of successful exploits of the vulnerability which can compromise the security of the Systems (including the confidentiality or integrity of its data and operations, or the availability of the system). Such issues shall be remediated as quickly as is practical, but in no event longer than days. k. When the Security Fixes involve installing third party patches (such as Microsoft OS patches or Adobe Acrobat), the vendor will provide written notice to the VA that the patch has been validated as not affecting the Systems within 10 working days. When the vendor is responsible for operations or maintenance of the Systems, they shall apply the Security Fixes within days. l. All other vulnerabilities shall be remediated as specified in this paragraph in a timely manner based on risk, but within 60 days of discovery or disclosure. Exceptions to this paragraph (e.g. for the convenience of VA) shall only be granted with approval of the contracting officer and the VA Assistant Secretary for Office of Information and Technology. 5. INFORMATION SYSTEM HOSTING, OPERATION, MAINTENANCE, OR USE a. For information systems that are hosted, operated, maintained, or used on behalf of VA at non-VA facilities, contractors/subcontractors are fully responsible and accountable for ensuring compliance with all HIPAA, Privacy Act, FISMA, NIST, FIPS, and VA security and privacy directives and handbooks. This includes conducting compliant risk assessments, routine vulnerablity scanning, system patching and change management procedures, and the completion of an acceptable contingency plan for each system. The contractor's security control procedures must be equivalent, to those procedures used to secure VA systems. A Privacy Impact Assessment (PIA) must also be provided to the COTR and approved by VA Privacy Service prior to operational approval. All external Internet connections to VA's network involving VA information must be reviewed and approved by VA prior to implementation. b. Adequate security controls for collecting, processing, transmitting, and storing of Personally Identifiable Information (PII), as determined by the VA Privacy Service, must be in place, tested, and approved by VA prior to hosting, operation, maintenance, or use of the information system, or systems by or on behalf of VA. These security controls are to be assessed and stated within the PIA and if these controls are determined not to be in place, or inadequate, a Plan of Action and Milestones (POA&M) must be submitted and approved prior to the collection of PII. c. Outsourcing (contractor facility, contractor equipment or contractor staff) of systems or network operations, telecommunications services, or other managed services requires certification and accreditation (authorization) (C&A) of the contractor's systems in accordance with VA Handbook 6500.3, Certification and Accreditation and/or the VA OCS Certification Program Office. Government- owned (government facility or government equipment) contractor-operated systems, third party or business partner networks require memorandums of understanding and interconnection agreements (MOU-ISA) which detail what data types are shared, who has access, and the appropriate level of security controls for all systems connected to VA networks. d. The contractor/subcontractor's system must adhere to all FISMA, FIPS, and NIST standards related to the annual FISMA security controls assessment and review and update the PIA. Any deficiencies noted during this assessment must be provided to the VA contracting officer and the ISO for entry into VA's POA&M management process. The contractor/subcontractor must use VA's POA&M process to document planned remedial actions to address any deficiencies in information security policies, procedures, and practices, and the completion of those activities. Security deficiencies must be corrected within the timeframes approved by the government. Contractor/subcontractor procedures are subject to periodic, unannounced assessments by VA officials, including the VA Office of Inspector General. The physical security aspects associated with contractor/ subcontractor activities must also be subject to such assessments. If major changes to the system occur that may affect the privacy or security of the data or the system, the C&A of the system may need to be reviewed, retested and re- authorized per VA Handbook 6500.3. This may require reviewing and updating all of the documentation (PIA, System Security Plan, Contingency Plan). The Certification Program Office can provide guidance on whether a new C&A would be necessary. e. The contractor/subcontractor must conduct an annual self assessment on all systems and outsourced services as required. Both hard copy and electronic copies of the assessment must be provided to the COTR. The government reserves the right to conduct such an assessment using government personnel or another contractor/subcontractor. The contractor/subcontractor must take appropriate and timely action (this can be specified in the contract) to correct or mitigate any weaknesses discovered during such testing, generally at no additional cost. f. VA prohibits the installation and use of personally-owned or contractor/ subcontractor-owned equipment or software on VA's network. If non-VA owned equipment must be used to fulfill the requirements of a contract, it must be stated in the service agreement, SOW or contract. All of the security controls required for government furnished equipment (GFE) must be utilized in approved other equipment (OE) and must be funded by the owner of the equipment. All remote systems must be equipped with, and use, a VA-approved antivirus (AV) software and a personal (host-based or enclave based) firewall that is configured with a VA-approved configuration. Software must be kept current, including all critical updates and patches. Owners of approved OE are responsible for providing and maintaining the anti-viral software and the firewall on the non-VA owned OE. g. All electronic storage media used on non-VA leased or non-VA owned IT equipment that is used to store, process, or access VA information must be handled in adherence with VA Handbook 6500.1, Electronic Media Sanitization upon: (i) completion or termination of the contract or (ii) disposal or return of the IT equipment by the contractor/subcontractor or any person acting on behalf of the contractor/subcontractor, whichever is earlier. Media (hard drives, optical disks, CDs, back-up tapes, etc.) used by the contractors/ subcontractors that contain VA information must be returned to the VA for sanitization or destruction or the contractor/subcontractor must self-certify that the media has been disposed of per 6500.1 requirements. This must be completed within 30 days of termination of the contract. h. Bio-Medical devices and other equipment or systems containing media (hard drives, optical disks, etc.) with VA sensitive information must not be returned to the vendor at the end of lease, for trade-in, or other purposes. The options are: (1) Vendor must accept the system without the drive; (2) VA's initial medical device purchase includes a spare drive which must be installed in place of the original drive at time of turn-in; or (3) VA must reimburse the company for media at a reasonable open market replacement cost at time of purchase. (4) Due to the highly specialized and sometimes proprietary hardware and software associated with medical equipment/systems, if it is not possible for the VA to retain the hard drive, then; (a) The equipment vendor must have an existing BAA if the device being traded in has sensitive information stored on it and hard drive(s) from the system are being returned physically intact; and (b) Any fixed hard drive on the device must be non-destructively sanitized to the greatest extent possible without negatively impacting system operation. Selective clearing down to patient data folder level is recommended using VA approved and validated overwriting technologies/methods/tools. Applicable media sanitization specifications need to be pre-approved and described in the purchase order or contract. (c) A statement needs to be signed by the Director (System Owner) that states that the drive could not be removed and that (a) and (b) controls above are in place and completed. The ISO needs to maintain the documentation. 6. SECURITY INCIDENT INVESTIGATION a. The term "security incident" means an event that has, or could have, resulted in unauthorized access to, loss or damage to VA assets, or sensitive information, or an action that breaches VA security procedures. The contractor/ subcontractor shall immediately notify the COTR and simultaneously, the designated ISO and Privacy Officer for the contract of any known or suspected security/privacy incidents, or any unauthorized disclosure of sensitive information, including that contained in system(s) to which the contractor/ subcontractor has access. b. To the extent known by the contractor/subcontractor, the contractor/ subcontractor's notice to VA shall identify the information involved, the circumstances surrounding the incident (including to whom, how, when, and where the VA information or assets were placed at risk or compromised), and any other information that the contractor/subcontractor considers relevant. c. With respect to unsecured protected health information, the business associate is deemed to have discovered a data breach when the business associate knew or should have known of a breach of such information. Upon discovery, the business associate must notify the covered entity of the breach. Notifications need to be made in accordance with the executed business associate agreement. d. In instances of theft or break-in or other criminal activity, the contractor/subcontractor must concurrently report the incident to the appropriate law enforcement entity (or entities) of jurisdiction, including the VA OIG and Security and Law Enforcement. The contractor, its employees, and its subcontractors and their employees shall cooperate with VA and any law enforcement authority responsible for the investigation and prosecution of any possible criminal law violation(s) associated with any incident. The contractor/subcontractor shall cooperate with VA in any civil litigation to recover VA information, obtain monetary or other compensation from a third party for damages arising from any incident, or obtain injunctive relief against any third party arising from, or related to, the incident. 7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DATA BREACH a. Consistent with the requirements of 38 U.S.C. 5725, a contract may require access to sensitive personal information. If so, the contractor is liable to VA for liquidated damages in the event of a data breach or privacy incident involving any SPI the contractor/subcontractor processes or maintains under this contract. b. The contractor/subcontractor shall provide notice to VA of a "security incident" as set forth in the Security Incident Investigation section above. Upon such notification, VA must secure from a non-Department entity or the VA Office of Inspector General an independent risk analysis of the data breach to determine the level of risk associated with the data breach for the potential misuse of any sensitive personal information involved in the data breach. The term 'data breach' means the loss, theft, or other unauthorized access, or any access other than that incidental to the scope of employment, to data containing sensitive personal information, in electronic or printed form, that results in the potential compromise of the confidentiality or integrity of the data. Contractor shall fully cooperate with the entity performing the risk analysis. Failure to cooperate may be deemed a material breach and grounds for contract termination. c. Each risk analysis shall address all relevant information concerning the data breach, including the following: (1) Nature of the event (loss, theft, unauthorized access); (2) Description of the event, including: (a) date of occurrence; (b) data elements involved, including any PII, such as full name, social security number, date of birth, home address, account number, disability code; (3) Number of individuals affected or potentially affected; (4) Names of individuals or groups affected or potentially affected; (5) Ease of logical data access to the lost, stolen or improperly accessed data in light of the degree of protection for the data, e.g., unencrypted, plain text; (6) Amount of time the data has been out of VA control; (7) The likelihood that the sensitive personal information will or has been compromised (made accessible to and usable by unauthorized persons); (8) Known misuses of data containing sensitive personal information, if any; (9) Assessment of the potential harm to the affected individuals; (10) Data breach analysis as outlined in 6500.2 Handbook, Management of Security and Privacy Incidents, as appropriate; and (11) Whether credit protection services may assist record subjects in avoiding or mitigating the results of identity theft based on the sensitive personal information that may have been compromised. d. Based on the determinations of the independent risk analysis, the contractor shall be responsible for paying to the VA liquidated damages in the amount of per affected individual to cover the cost of providing credit protection services to affected individuals consisting of the following: (1) Notification; (2) One year of credit monitoring services consisting of automatic daily monitoring of at least 3 relevant credit bureau reports; (3) Data breach analysis; (4) Fraud resolution services, including writing dispute letters, initiating fraud alerts and credit freezes, to assist affected individuals to bring matters to resolution; (5) One year of identity theft insurance with $20,000.00 coverage at $0 deductible; and (6) Necessary legal expenses the subjects may incur to repair falsified or damaged credit records, histories, or financial affairs. 8. SECURITY CONTROLS COMPLIANCE TESTING On a periodic basis, VA, including the Office of Inspector General, reserves the right to evaluate any or all of the security controls and privacy practices implemented by the contractor under the clauses contained within the contract. With 10 working-day's notice, at the request of the government, the contractor must fully cooperate and assist in a government-sponsored security controls assessment at each location wherein VA information is processed or stored, or information systems are developed, operated, maintained, or used on behalf of VA, including those initiated by the Office of Inspector General. The government may conduct a security control assessment on shorter notice (to include unannounced assessments) as determined by VA in the event of a security incident or at any other time. 9. TRAINING a. All contractor employees and subcontractor employees requiring access to VA information and VA information systems shall complete the following before being granted access to VA information and its systems: (1) Sign and acknowledge (either manually or electronically) understanding of and responsibilities for compliance with the Contractor Rules of Behavior, Appendix E relating to access to VA information and information systems; (2) Successfully complete the VA Cyber Security Awareness and Rules of Behavior training and annually complete required security training; (3) Successfully complete the appropriate VA privacy training and annually complete required privacy training; and (4) Successfully complete any additional cyber security or privacy training, as required for VA personnel with equivalent information system access [to be defined by the VA program official and provided to the contracting officer for inclusion in the solicitation document - e.g., any role-based information security training required in accordance with NIST Special Publication 800-16, Information Technology Security Training Requirements.] b. The contractor shall provide to the contracting officer and/or the COTR a copy of the training certificates and certification of signing the Contractor Rules of Behavior for each applicable employee within 1 week of the initiation of the contract and annually thereafter, as required. c. Failure to complete the mandatory annual training and sign the Rules of Behavior annually, within the timeframe required, is grounds for suspension or termination of all physical or electronic access privileges and removal from work on the contract until such time as the training and documents are complete. (End of Clause)4.33 52.252-2 CLAUSES INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE (FEB 1998) This contract incorporates one or more clauses by reference, with the same force and effect as if they were given in full text. Upon request, the Contracting Officer will make their full text available. Also, the full text of a clause may be accessed electronically at this/these address(es): (End of Clause)FAR NumberTitleDate52.202-1DEFINITIONSJAN 201252.203-3GRATUITIESAPR 198452.203-5COVENANT AGAINST CONTINGENT FEESAPR 198452.203-6RESTRICTIONS ON SUBCONTRACTOR SALES TO THE GOVERNMENTSEP 200652.203-7ANTI-KICKBACK PROCEDURESOCT 201052.203-8CANCELLATION, RESCISSION, AND RECOVERY OF FUNDS FOR ILLEGAL OR IMPROPER ACTIVITYJAN 199752.203-10PRICE OR FEE ADJUSTMENT FOR ILLEGAL OR IMPROPER ACTIVITYJAN 199752.203-12LIMITATION ON PAYMENTS TO INFLUENCE CERTAIN FEDERAL TRANSACTIONSOCT 201052.204-4PRINTED OR COPIED DOUBLE-SIDED ON RECYCLED PAPERMAY 201152.204-9PERSONAL IDENTITY VERIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR PERSONNELJAN 201152.204-10REPORTING EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION AND FIRST-TIER SUBCONTRACT AWARDSAUG 201252.209-6PROTECTING THE GOVERNMENT'S INTEREST WHEN SUBCONTRACTING WITH CONTRACTORS DEBARRED, SUSPENDED, OR PROPOSED FOR DEBARMENTDEC 201052.219-8UTILIZATION OF SMALL BUSINESS CONCERNSJAN 201152.222-1NOTICE TO THE GOVERNMENT OF LABOR DISPUTESFEB 199752.222-3CONVICT LABORJUN 200352.222-4CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT-OVERTIME COMPENSATIONJUL 200552.222-6DAVIS-BACON ACTJUL 200552.222-7WITHHOLDING OF FUNDSFEB 198852.222-8PAYROLLS AND BASIC RECORDSJUN 201052.222-9APPRENTICES AND TRAINEESJUL 200552.222-10COMPLIANCE WITH COPELAND ACT REQUIREMENTSFEB 198852.222-11SUBCONTRACTS (LABOR STANDARDS)JUL 200552.222-12CONTRACT TERMINATION - DEBARMENTFEB 198852.222-13COMPLIANCE WITH DAVIS-BACON AND RELATED ACT REGULATIONSFEB 198852.222-14DISPUTES CONCERNING LABOR STANDARDSFEB 198852.222-15CERTIFICATION OF ELIGIBILITYFEB 198852.222-21PROHIBITION OF SEGREGATED FACILITIESFEB 199952.222-26EQUAL OPPORTUNITYMAR 200752.222-27AFFIRMATIVE ACTION COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTIONFEB 199952.222-35EQUAL OPPORTUNITY FOR VETERANSSEP 201052.222-36AFFIRMATIVE ACTION FOR WORKERS WITH DISABILITIESOCT 201052.222-37EMPLOYMENT REPORTS ON VETERANSSEP 201052.222-50COMBATING TRAFFICKING IN PERSONSFEB 200952.222-54EMPLOYMENT ELIGIBILITY VERIFICATIONJUL 201252.223-2AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT OF BIOBASED PRODUCTS UNDER SERVICE AND CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTSJUL 201252.223-3HAZARDOUS MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION AND MATERIAL SAFETY DATA ALTERNATE I (JUL 1995)JAN 199752.223-5POLLUTION PREVENTION AND RIGHT-TO-KNOW INFORMATION ALTERNATE I (MAY 2011)MAY 201152.223-6DRUG-FREE WORKPLACEMAY 200152.223-18ENCOURAGING CONTRACTOR POLICIES TO BAN TEXT MESSAGING WHILE DRIVINGAUG 201152.225-13RESTRICTIONS ON CERTAIN FOREIGN PURCHASESJUN 200852.227-1AUTHORIZATION AND CONSENTDEC 200752.227-2NOTICE AND ASSISTANCE REGARDING PATENT AND COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENTDEC 200752.227-4PATENT INDEMNITY--CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTSDEC 200752.228-2ADDITIONAL BOND SECURITYOCT 199752.228-11PLEDGES OF ASSETSJAN 201252.228-12PROSPECTIVE SUBCONTRACTOR REQUESTS FOR BONDSOCT 199552.228-14IRREVOCABLE LETTER OF CREDITDEC 199952.228-15PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS-- CONSTRUCTIONOCT 201052.229-3FEDERAL, STATE, AND LOCAL TAXESAPR 200352.232-5PAYMENTS UNDER FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTSSEP 200252.232-17INTERESTOCT 201052.232-18AVAILABILITY OF FUNDSAPR 198452.232-23ASSIGNMENT OF CLAIMSJAN 198652.232-27PROMPT PAYMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTSOCT 200852.232-34PAYMENT BY ELECTRONIC FUNDS TRANSFER-- OTHER THAN CENTRAL CONTRACTOR REGISTRATIONMAY 199952.232-38SUBMISSION OF ELECTRONIC FUNDS TRANSFER INFORMATION WITH OFFERMAY 199952.233-1DISPUTES ALTERNATE I (DEC 1991)JUL 200252.233-3PROTEST AFTER AWARDAUG 199652.233-4APPLICABLE LAW FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT CLAIMOCT 200452.236-2DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONSAPR 198452.236-3SITE INVESTIGATION AND CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE WORKAPR 198452.236-5MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIPAPR 198452.236-6SUPERINTENDENCE BY THE CONTRACTORAPR 198452.236-7PERMITS AND RESPONSIBILITIESNOV 199152.236-8OTHER CONTRACTSAPR 198452.236-9PROTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, UTILITIES, AND IMPROVEMENTSAPR 198452.236-10OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREASAPR 198452.236-11USE AND POSSESSION PRIOR TO COMPLETIONAPR 198452.236-12CLEANING UPAPR 198452.236-13ACCIDENT PREVENTION ALTERNATE I (APR 1984)NOV 199152.236-14AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICESAPR 198452.236-17LAYOUT OF WORKAPR 1984FAR NumberTitleDate52.236-26PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCEFEB 199552.242-13BANKRUPTCYJUL 199552.242-14SUSPENSION OF WORKAPR 198452.243-4CHANGESJUN 200752.244-6SUBCONTRACTS FOR COMMERCIAL ITEMSDEC 201052.246-12INSPECTION OF CONSTRUCTIONAUG 199652.246-21WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTIONMAR 199452.248-3VALUE ENGINEERING--CONSTRUCTIONOCT 201052.249-2TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE OF THE GOVERNMENT (FIXED PRICE) ALTERNATE I (SEPT 1996)APR 201252.249-10DEFAULT (FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION)APR 198452.253-1COMPUTER GENERATED FORMSJAN 1991SECTION 01 00 00GENERAL REQUIREMENTS1.1 GENERAL INTENTION A.Contractor shall completely prepare site for building operations, including demolition and removal of existing structures, and furnish labor and materials and perform work for "RENOVATION OF BUILDING 411A" as required by drawings and specifications. B.Visits to the site by Bidders may be made only by appointment with the Contracting Officer. C.Offices of Oudens Knoop Knoop + Sachs Architects, as ArchitectEngineers, will render certain technical services during construction. Such services shall be considered as advisory to the Government and shall not be construed as expressing or implying a contractual act of the Government without affirmations by Contracting Officer or his duly authorized representative. D.Before placement and installation of work subject to tests by testing laboratory retained by Department of Veterans Affairs, the Contractor shall notify the COTR in sufficient time to enable testing laboratory personnel to be present at the site in time for proper taking and testing of specimens and field inspection. Such prior notice shall be not less than three work days unless otherwise designated by the COTR.E.All employees of general contractor and subcontractors shall comply with VA security management program and obtain permission of the VA police, be identified by project and employer, and restricted from unauthorized access. F.Prior to commencing work, general contractor shall provide proof that a OSHA certified “competent person” (CP) (29 CFR 1926.20(b)(2) will maintain a presence at the work site whenever the general or subcontractors are present.G.Training:1.All employees of general contractor or subcontractors shall have the 10-hour and all supervisors, foremen and superintendents of the general contractor or subcontractors shall have the 30-hour OSHA certified Construction Safety course and other relevant competency training, as determined by VA CP with input from the ICRA team. 2.Submit training records of all such employees for approval before the start of work.1.2 STATEMENT OF BID ITEM(S) A.Base Bid - Bid Item No. 1, GENERAL CONSTRUCTION: Work includes general construction, alterations, mechanical and electrical work, structural modifications, necessary removal of existing construction and certain other items. B.Bid Item No. 2 - Deductive Bid Alternate No. 1: All work in the Base Bid except Replace groundwater source heat pump with split system air conditioning unit with a supplemental steam coil. C.Bid Item No. 3 - Deductive Bid Alternate No. 2: All work in the Base Bid except Replace radiant floor system and all components including: geothermal electric water heater, pump, and air separator, with 19 mm (3/4 inch) plywood subfloor.D.Bid Item No. 4 - Deductive Bid Alternate No. 3: All work as noted in the Base Bid except Delete the replacement of the existing porch, porch roof, railings, stairs, roof, gutters, and downspouts at west end of building with new. E.Bid Item No. 5 - Deductive Bid Alternate No. 4: All work as noted in the Base Bid except delete new opening in south wall and install a new window in Storage Room 411A-14.1.3 SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR CONTRACTORA.Specifications and drawings will be made available electronically.B.Contractor’s Use of A/E’s CAD Files:1.General: At Contractor's written request, copies of A/E's CAD files may be provided to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with this Project. Such files will be provided on a Compact Disk (CD).2.The Contractor shall pay the cost of preparing and delivering Electronic Files for the Contractor's use. Such costs shall not be the basis for a change to the Contract Sum.3.The following conditions shall govern the use of Electronic Files of architectural and engineering Instruments of Service including construction documents prepared by the Architect-Engineer and/or its consultants (the “Electronic Files”).a.The Contractor assumes full responsibility for the utilization of the Electronic Files furnished including but not limited to the accuracy, format, completeness and content thereof. The Electronic Files, prepared as Instruments of Service, represent the status of the documents compromising the Electronic Files as of the date of transfer to the Contractor. Subsequent changes to the original file may render the transferred copy obsolete. Additionally, data stored on electronic media can deteriorate undetected or be modified without the A/E’s knowledge. Therefore the Electronic Files are provided without warranty or obligation on the part of the A/E as to accuracy of information contained in the files. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to identify and make all required updates, revisions and/or corrections.b.The Contractor agrees to indemnify, and hold the A/E and/or its principals, employees agents and consultants (“Indemnities”) harmless from any and all claims, losses, damages, costs (including but not limited to reasonable attorneys’ fees and professional and administrative time at regular hourly rates) arising out of or in connection with the use of the Electronic Files.c.Electronic files will be provided to the Contractor as stated elsewhere in this document. Additional Electronic Files requested at any other time and for any other purpose, including use by the Construction Contractor, will be provided subject to the terms and conditions stated above at a fee payable to the A/E that represents the actual cost to the A/E for preparation of such files.4.The Contractor shall return the CD and all copies of any portions of the CD, upon Substantial Completion of the Project, to the A/E.1.4 construction security requirementsA.Security Plan:1.The security plan defines both physical and administrative security procedures that will remain effective for the entire duration of the project.2.The General Contractor is responsible for assuring that all sub-contractors working on the project and their employees also comply with these regulations.B.Security Procedures:1.General Contractor’s employees shall not enter the project site without appropriate badge. Contractors must obtain ID badges in accordance with Medical Center Memorandum (MCM) 05-04 “Personnel Suitability and Security Procedures. They may also be subject to inspection of their personal effects when entering or leaving the project site.Step 1: (Upon notice of award)Contractor will complete Contract Security Services Request (Form #1), listing all employees that will be performing work under the contract. Contract Security Verification Request Supplemental (Form #1b) may be filled out and attached if Form #1 does not provide enough space. Once completed, this form shall be submitted to the VHA Service Center (VSC) Personnel Security Office via password protected or encrypted email to VSCSecurity@ or faxed to (216)447-8020.NOTE: In this form, line F will either be “construction” or the Scope of Work may be used, and line G will be low 99.9% of the time unless the contractor will have access to sensitive information.Step 2: (Upon notice of award, same time as Step 1)Within five business days of Contractor receiving Notice of Award, each contract employee listed on Form #1 must take the Contractor/Employee Fingerprinting request (Form #2) and two forms of ID to their nearest VA facility to have their fingerprints submitted and the bottom portion of Form #2 completed by the fingerprinting official. Fingerprint appointments should be made through the COTR or the local VA facility. Completed SAC forms shall be faxed or mailed directly to the VSC Personnel Security Office the same day the contractor employee is fingerprinted.VHA Service Center (VSC)6100 Oak Tree Blvd #500Independence, OH 44131Fax: (216)447-8025VSCSecurity@ Contractor shall inform the COTR/CO when fingerprinting has been completed for each contract employee.Step 3: (As soon as possible)Each individual working on the contract or the contractor POC shall complete the VHA Service Center PIV Sponsorship (Form #3) for each employee, in its entirety, and return to VSC Security Office as soon as possible, either via fax, encrypted email or password protected documents. Upon receipt of this form and final results of fingerprinting confirmation, the VHA Security Service Center will send an email notification to the Contractor’s POC and the CO authorizing contract employees to proceed with obtaining their required non-PIV security badge. Upon receipt of this confirmation, notify COTR so they may schedule an appointment for PIV badging.1. Only the individual whose name appears on the badge can pick up that badge from the badging office.2.For working outside the “regular hours” as defined in the contract, The General Contractor shall give 3 days notice to the Contracting Officer so that security arrangements can be provided for the employees. This notice is separate from any notices required for utility shutdown described later in this section.3.Contractor is solely responsible for keeping the job site secure at all times, even during working hours. The job site shall be secured in such a manner to prohibit patients, staff and unauthorized personnel from entering the work site.4.No photography of VA premises is allowed without written permission of the Contracting Officer.5.VA reserves the right to close down or shut down the project site and order General Contractor’s employees off the premises in the event of a national emergency. The General Contractor may return to the site only with the written approval of the Contracting Officer.C.Guards: (Not Used)D.Key Control:1.The General Contractor shall provide duplicate keys and lock combinations to the COTR for the purpose of security inspections of every area of project including tool boxes and parked machines and take any emergency action.2.The General Contractor shall turn over all permanent lock cylinders to the VA locksmith for permanent installation. See Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE and coordinate.E.Document Control:1.Before starting any work, the General Contractor/Sub Contractors shall submit an electronic security memorandum describing the approach to following goals and maintaining confidentiality of “sensitive information”.2.The General Contractor is responsible for safekeeping of all drawings, project manual and other project information. This information shall be shared only with those with a specific need to accomplish the project.4.Certain documents, sketches, videos or photographs and drawings may be marked “Law Enforcement Sensitive” or “Sensitive But Unclassified” (SBU). Secure such information in separate containers and limit the access to only those who will need it for the project. Return the information to the Contracting Officer upon request.5.These security documents shall not be removed or transmitted from the project site without the written approval of Contracting Officer.6.All paper waste or electronic media such as CD’s and diskettes shall be shredded and destroyed in a manner acceptable to the VA.7.Notify Contracting Officer and Site Security Officer immediately when there is a loss or compromise of “sensitive information”.8.All electronic information shall be stored in specified location following VA standards and procedures using an Engineering Document Management Software (EDMS).a.Security, access and maintenance of all project drawings, both scanned and electronic shall be performed and tracked through the EDMS system.b.“Sensitive information” including drawings and other documents may be attached to e-mail provided all VA encryption procedures are followed.F.Motor Vehicle Restrictions1.Vehicle authorization request shall be required for any vehicle entering the site and such request shall be submitted 24 hours before the date and time of access. Access shall be restricted to picking up and dropping off materials and supplies.2.Separate permits shall be issued for General Contractor and its employees for parking in designated areas only.1.5 FIRE SAFETYA.Applicable Publications: Publications listed below form part of this Article to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designations only. 1.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):E84-2008Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials2.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):10-2006Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers30-2007Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code51B-2003Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting and Other Hot Work70-2007National Electrical Code241-2004Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations3.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):29 CFR 1926Safety and Health Regulations for ConstructionFire Safety Plan: Establish and maintain a fire protection program in accordance with 29 CFR 1926. Prior to start of work, prepare a plan detailing project-specific fire safety measures, including periodic status reports, and submit to Contracting Officer for review for compliance with contract requirements in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES Prior to any worker for the contractor or subcontractors beginning work, they shall undergo a safety briefing provided by the general contractor’s competent person per OSHA requirements. This briefing shall include information on the construction limits, VAMC safety guidelines, means of egress, break areas, work hours, locations of restrooms, use of VAMC equipment, etc. Documentation shall be provided to the COTR that individuals have undergone contractor’s safety briefing.C.Site and Building Access: Maintain free and unobstructed access to facility emergency services and for fire, police and other emergency response forces in accordance with NFPA 241.D.Separate temporary facilities, such as trailers, storage sheds, and dumpsters, from existing buildings and new construction by distances in accordance with NFPA 241. For small facilities with less than 6 m (20 feet) exposing overall length, separate by 3m (10 feet).E.Temporary Construction Partitions: 1.Install and maintain temporary construction partitions to provide smoke-tight separations between construction areas and adjoining areas. Construct partitions of gypsum board on both sides of metal steel studs. Extend the partitions through suspended ceilings to deck or roof. Seal joints and penetrations. At door openings, install Class C, ? hour fire/smoke rated doors with self-closing devices.2.Close openings in smoke barriers and fire-rated construction to maintain fire ratings. Seal penetrations with listed through-penetration firestop materials in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.3.Coordinate location and construction requirements with COTR and obtain permit from the on-site VA Fire Department.F.Temporary Heating and Electrical: Install, use and maintain installations in accordance with 29 CFR 1926, NFPA 241 and NFPA 70.G.Means of Egress: Do not block exiting for occupied buildings, including paths from exits to roads. Minimize disruptions and coordinate with COTR and Facility Safety Officer.H.Egress Routes for Construction Workers: Maintain free and unobstructed egress. Inspect daily. Report findings and corrective actions weekly to COTR and Facility Safety Officer.I.Fire Extinguishers: Provide and maintain extinguishers in construction areas and temporary storage areas in accordance with 29 CFR 1926, NFPA 241 and NFPA 10. J.Flammable and Combustible Liquids: Store, dispense and use liquids in accordance with 29 CFR 1926, NFPA 241 and NFPA 30. K.Sprinklers: Install, test and activate new automatic sprinklers prior to removing existing sprinklers.L.Existing Fire Protection: Do not impair automatic sprinklers, smoke and heat detection, and fire alarm systems, except for portions immediately under construction, and temporarily for connections. Provide fire watch for impairments more than 4 hours in a 24-hour period. Request interruptions in accordance with Article, OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS, and coordinate with Engineer. All existing or temporary fire protection systems (fire alarms, sprinklers) located in construction areas shall be tested as coordinated with the medical center. Parameters for the testing and results of any tests performed shall be recorded by the medical center and copies provided to the COTR.M.Smoke Detectors: Prevent accidental operation. Remove temporary covers at end of work operations each day. Coordinate with COTR and Facility Safety Officer.N.Hot Work: Perform and safeguard hot work operations in accordance with NFPA 241 and NFPA 51B. Coordinate with COTR. Obtain permits from VA Fire Department at least 24 hours in advance. O.Fire Hazard Prevention and Safety Inspections: Inspect entire construction areas weekly. Coordinate with, and report findings and corrective actions weekly to COTR.P.Smoking: Smoking is prohibited in and adjacent to construction areas inside existing buildings and additions under construction. In separate and detached buildings under construction, smoking is prohibited except in designated smoking rest areas.Q.Dispose of waste and debris in accordance with NFPA 241. Remove from building daily.R.Perform other construction, alteration and demolition operations in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1.6 OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS A.The Contractor shall confine all operations (including storage of materials) on Government premises to areas authorized or approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall hold and save the Government, its officers and agents, free and harmless from liability of any nature occasioned by the Contractor's performance.B.Temporary buildings (e.g., storage sheds, shops, offices) and utilities may be erected by the Contractor only with the approval of the Contracting Officer and shall be built with labor and materials furnished by the Contractor without expense to the Government. The temporary buildings and utilities shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall be removed by the Contractor at its expense upon completion of the work. With the written consent of the Contracting Officer, the buildings and utilities may be abandoned and need not be removed. C.The Contractor shall, under regulations prescribed by the Contracting Officer, use only established roadways, or use temporary roadways constructed by the Contractor when and as authorized by the Contracting Officer. When materials are transported in prosecuting the work, vehicles shall not be loaded beyond the loading capacity recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or prescribed by any Federal, State, or local law or regulation. When it is necessary to cross curbs or sidewalks, the Contractor shall protect them from damage. The Contractor shall repair or pay for the repair of any damaged curbs, sidewalks, or roads. D.Working space and space available for storing materials shall be as determined by the COTR E.Workers are subject to rules of Medical Center applicable to their conduct. F.Execute work so as to interfere as little as possible with normal functioning of Medical Center as a whole, including operations of utility services, fire protection systems and any existing equipment, and with work being done by others. 1.Do not store materials and equipment in other than assigned areas. 2.Schedule delivery of materials and equipment to immediate construction working areas within buildings in use by Department of Veterans Affairs in quantities that can be stored within the designated areas. Provide unobstructed access to Medical Center areas required to remain in operation. 3.Where access by Medical Center personnel to vacated portions of buildings is not required, storage of Contractor's materials and equipment will be permitted subject to fire and safety requirements.G.Building No. 411A will be vacated by Government prior to date of receipt of Notice to Proceed and turned over to Contractor. H.When building is turned over to Contractor, Contractor shall accept entire responsibility therefore. 1.Contractor shall maintain a minimum temperature of 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) at all times, except as otherwise specified. 2.Contractor shall maintain in operating condition existing fire protection and alarm equipment. In connection with fire alarm equipment, Contractor shall make arrangements for preinspection of site with Fire Department or Company (Department of Veterans Affairs or municipal) whichever will be required to respond to an alarm from Contractor's employee or watchman. I.Utilities Services: Maintain existing utility services for Medical Center at all times. Provide temporary facilities, labor, materials, equipment, connections, and utilities to assure uninterrupted services. Where necessary to cut existing water, steam, gases, sewer or air pipes, or conduits, wires, cables, etc. of utility services or of fire protection systems and communications systems (including telephone), they shall be cut and capped at suitable places where shown; or, in absence of such indication, where directed by COTR. 1.No utility service such as water, gas, steam, sewers or electricity, or fire protection systems and communications systems may be interrupted without prior approval of COTR. Electrical work shall be accomplished with all affected circuits or equipment de-energized. When an electrical outage cannot be accomplished, work on any energized circuits or equipment shall not commence without the Medical Center Director’s prior knowledge and written approval. Refer to specification Sections 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS and 27 05 11 REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS and Division 28, ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY for additional requirements.2.Contractor shall submit a request to interrupt any such services to COTR, in writing, 48 hours in advance of proposed interruption. Request shall state reason, date, exact time of, and approximate duration of such interruption. 3.Contractor will be advised (in writing) of approval of request, or of which other date and/or time such interruption will cause least inconvenience to operations of Medical Center. Interruption time approved by Medical Center may occur at other than Contractor's normal working hours. 4.Major interruptions of any system must be requested, in writing, at least 15 calendar days prior to the desired time and shall be performed as directed by the COTR. 5.In case of a contract construction emergency, service will be interrupted on approval of COTR. Such approval will be confirmed in writing as soon as practical.J.Abandoned Lines: All service lines such as wires, cables, conduits, ducts, pipes and the like, and their hangers or supports, which are to be abandoned shall be entirely removed, shall be capped or plugged at the nearest main. The lines shall not be capped in finished areas. Openings left by removal of such items shall be filled immediately. They shall be filled in a manner that maintains fire ratings, smoke separations, and other required separations intact. Openings in finished areas shall be patched to match material, finish and color of adjacent areas.K.To minimize interference of construction activities with flow of Medical Center traffic, comply with the following: 1.Keep roads, walks and entrances to grounds, to parking and to occupied areas of buildings clear of construction materials, debris and standing construction equipment and vehicles. Wherever excavation for new utility lines cross existing roads, at least one lane must be open to traffic at all times. 2.Method and scheduling of required cutting, altering and removal of existing roads, walks and entrances must be approved by the COTR. L.Coordinate the work for this contract with other construction operations as directed by COTR. This includes the scheduling of traffic and the use of roadways, as specified in Article, USE OF ROADWAYS. M.No materials or supplies shall be delivered to any of the employee loading docks. If they get delivered to any of the docks, they can be sent away with no responsibility to the VA.? These items shall only be delivered to the contractor's staging and lay-down area such as a job site trailer.? The contractor must be available to accept delivery. VA staff will not sign for contractor's supplies and materials.N.Contractor shall hold biweekly construction meetings on-site at a location to be determined by the COTR.? Contractor shall provide computer generated minutes of all meetings and shall distribute minutes to all participants within two (2) working days after said meeting. Electronic submission of minutes is required in addition to one hard copy to the COTR. Daily logs shall be electronically submitted on a daily basis to the COTR for all construction personnel, all materials brought on-site that day, work performed on that day, the weather for the day including temperature, precipitation (form and amounts) sunny, cloudy, windy or calm as well as any contacts made that day.? Sample log may be provided, if requested, in electronic format to the contractor for his distribution and use.? 1.7 ALTERATIONS A.Survey: Before any work is started in existing space, the Contractor shall make a thorough survey with the COTR areas of buildings in which alterations occur and areas which are anticipated routes of access, and furnish a report, signed by both, to the Contracting Officer. This report shall list by rooms and spaces:1.Existing condition and types of resilient flooring, doors, windows, walls and other surfaces not required to be altered throughout affected areas. 2.Existence and conditions of items such as plumbing fixtures and accessories, electrical fixtures, equipment, venetian blinds, shades, etc., required by drawings to be either reused or relocated, or both.3.Shall note any discrepancies between drawings and existing conditions at site. 4.Shall designate areas for working space, materials storage and routes of access to areas within buildings where alterations occur and which have been agreed upon by Contractor and COTR. B.Any items required by drawings to be either reused or relocated or both, found during this survey to be nonexistent, or in opinion of COTR to be in such condition that their use is impossible or impractical, shall be furnished and/or replaced by Contractor with new items in accordance with specifications which will be furnished by Government. Provided the contract work is changed by reason of this subparagraph B, the contract will be modified accordingly, under provisions of clause entitled "DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS" (FAR 52.2362) and "CHANGES" (FAR 52.2434 and VAAR 852.23688). C.ReSurvey: Thirty days before expected partial or final inspection date, the Contractor and COTR together shall make a thorough resurvey of the areas of buildings involved. They shall furnish a report on conditions then existing, of resilient flooring, doors, windows, walls and other surfaces as compared with conditions of same as noted in first condition survey report: 1.Resurvey report shall also list any damage caused by Contractor to such flooring and other surfaces, despite protection measures; and, will form basis for determining extent of repair work required of Contractor to restore damage caused by Contractor's workmen in executing work of this contract. D.Protection: Provide the following protective measures: 1.Wherever existing roof surfaces are disturbed they shall be protected against water infiltration. In case of leaks, they shall be repaired immediately upon discovery. 2.Temporary protection against damage for portions of existing structures and grounds where work is to be done, materials handled and equipment moved and/or relocated. 3.Protection of interior of existing structures at all times, from damage, dust and weather inclemency. Wherever work is performed, floor surfaces that are to remain in place shall be adequately protected prior to starting work, and this protection shall be maintained intact until all work in the area is completed. 1.8 INFECTION PREVENTION MEASURESA.Implement the requirements of VAMC’s Infection Control Risk Assessment (ICRA) team. ICRA Group may monitor dust in the vicinity of the construction work and require the Contractor to take corrective action immediately if the safe levels are exceeded.B.Establish and maintain a dust control program as part of the contractor’s infection preventive measures in accordance with the guidelines provided by ICRA Group and as specified here. Prior to start of work, prepare a plan detailing project-specific dust protection measures, including periodic status reports, and submit to Project Engineer for review for compliance with contract requirements in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. 1.All personnel involved in the construction or renovation activity shall be educated and trained in infection prevention measures established by the medical center.C.Medical center Infection Control personnel may monitor for airborne disease (e.g. aspergillosis) as appropriate during construction. A baseline of conditions may be established by the medical center prior to the start of work and periodically during the construction stage to determine impact of construction activities on indoor air quality. In addition:1. In areas where negative pressure differential is required the contractor shall provide a manometer capable of indicating pressure differential located at the entrance to the project site. Contractor shall take twice daily readings (morning and afternoon). Contractor shall record readings in log book to be kept adjacent to the manometer and shall submit the readings to the COTR on a weekly basis.2.The VAMC Infection Control personnel shall review pressure differential monitoring documentation to verify that pressure differentials in the construction zone and in the patient-care rooms are appropriate for their settings. The requirement for negative air pressure in the construction zone shall depend on the location and type of activity. Upon notification, the contractor shall implement corrective measures to restore proper pressure differentials as needed.3.In case of any problem, the medical center, along with assistance from the contractor, shall conduct an environmental assessment to find and eliminate the source.D.In general, following preventive measures shall be adopted during construction to keep down dust and prevent mold. 1.Dampen debris to keep down dust and provide temporary construction partitions in existing structures where directed by COTR. Blank off ducts and diffusers to prevent circulation of dust into occupied areas during construction. Contractor shall use sweeping compound when performing cleaning activities.2.Do not perform dust producing tasks within occupied areas without the approval of the COTR. For construction in any areas that will remain jointly occupied by the medical Center and Contractor’s workers, the Contractor shall:a.Provide dust proof one-hour fire-rated temporary drywall construction barriers to completely separate construction from the operational areas in order to contain dirt debris and dust. Barriers shall be sealed and made presentable on occupied side. Install a self-closing rated door in a metal frame, commensurate with the partition, to allow worker access. Maintain negative air at all times. b.HEPA filtration is required where the exhaust dust may reenter the breathing zone. Contractor shall verify that construction exhaust to exterior is not reintroduced to the medical center through intake vents, or building openings. Install HEPA (High Efficiency Particulate Accumulator) filter vacuum system rated at 95% capture of 0.3 microns including pollen, mold spores and dust particles. Insure continuous negative air pressures occurring within the work area. HEPA filters should have ASHRAE 85 or other prefilter to extend the useful life of the HEPA. Provide both primary and secondary filtrations units. Exhaust hoses shall be heavy duty, flexible steel reinforced and exhausted so that dust is not reintroduced to the medical center.c.Adhesive Walk-off/Carpet Walk-off Mats, minimum 600mm x 900mm (24” x 36”), shall be used at all interior transitions from the construction area to occupied medical center area. These mats shall be changed as often as required to maintain clean work areas directly outside construction area at all times.d.Vacuum and wet mop all transition areas from construction to occupied areas at the end of each workday. Vacuum shall utilize HEPA filtration. Maintain surrounding area frequently. Remove debris as they are created. Transport these outside the construction area in containers with tightly fitting lids.e.The contractor shall not haul debris through patient-care areas without prior approval of the COTR and the Medical Center. When approved, debris shall be hauled in enclosed dust proof containers or wrapped in plastic and sealed with duct tape. No sharp objects should be allowed to cut through the plastic. Wipe down the exterior of the containers with a damp rag to remove dust. All equipment, tools, material, etc. transported through occupied areas shall be made free from dust and moisture by vacuuming and wipe down. f.Using a HEPA vacuum, clean inside the barrier and vacuum ceiling tile prior to replacement. Any ceiling access panels opened for investigation beyond sealed areas shall be sealed immediately when unattended.g.There shall be no standing water during construction. This includes water in equipment drip pans and open containers within the construction areas. All accidental spills must be cleaned up and dried within 12 hours. Remove and dispose of porous materials that remain damp for more than 72 hours.At completion, remove construction barriers and ceiling protection carefully, outside of normal work hours. Vacuum and clean all surfaces free of dust after the removal.E.Final Cleanup:1.Upon completion of project, or as work progresses, remove all construction debris from above ceiling, vertical shafts and utility chases that have been part of the construction.2.Perform HEPA vacuum cleaning of all surfaces in the construction area. This includes walls, ceilings, cabinets, furniture (built-in or free standing), partitions, flooring, etc.3.All new air ducts shall be cleaned prior to final inspection. F. Tuberculosis Risk Assessment1. Martinsburg VAMC conducts a yearly TB risk assessment for the entire facility. The results of this assessment are extremely low risk. The results of this risk assessment are available to contractors upon request.1.9 DISPOSAL AND RETENTIONA.Materials and equipment accruing from work removed and from demolition shall be disposed of as follows: 1.Reserved items which are to remain property of the Government are identified by attached tags or noted on drawings or in specifications as items to be stored. Items that remain property of the Government shall be removed or dislodged from present locations in such a manner as to prevent damage which would be detrimental to reinstallation and reuse. Store such items where directed by COTR. 2.Items not reserved shall become property of the Contractor and be removed by Contractor from Medical Center.3.Items of portable equipment and furnishings located in rooms and spaces in which work is to be done under this contract shall remain the property of the Government. When rooms and spaces are vacated by the Department of Veterans Affairs during the alteration period, such items which are NOT required by drawings and specifications to be either relocated or reused will be removed by the Government in advance of work to avoid interfering with Contractor's operation. 1.10 PROTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, UTILITIES, AND IMPROVEMENTS A.The Contractor shall preserve and protect all structures, equipment, and vegetation (such as trees, shrubs, and grass) on or adjacent to the work site, which are not to be removed and which do not unreasonably interfere with the work required under this contract. The Contractor shall only remove trees when specifically authorized to do so, and shall avoid damaging vegetation that will remain in place. If any limbs or branches of trees are broken during contract performance, or by the careless operation of equipment, or by workmen, the Contractor shall trim those limbs or branches with a clean cut and paint the cut with a treepruning compound as directed by the Contracting Officer. B.The Contractor shall protect from damage all existing improvements and utilities at or near the work site and on adjacent property of a third party, the locations of which are made known to or should be known by the Contractor. The Contractor shall repair any damage to those facilities, including those that are the property of a third party, resulting from failure to comply with the requirements of this contract or failure to exercise reasonable care in performing the work. If the Contractor fails or refuses to repair the damage promptly, the Contracting Officer may have the necessary work performed and charge the cost to the Contractor.(FAR 52.2369)1.11 RESTORATION A.Remove, cut, alter, replace, patch and repair existing work as necessary to install new work. Except as otherwise shown or specified, do not cut, alter or remove any structural work, and do not disturb any ducts, plumbing, steam, gas, or electric work without approval of the COTR. Existing work to be altered or extended and that is found to be defective in any way, shall be reported to the COTR before it is disturbed. Materials and workmanship used in restoring work, shall conform in type and quality to that of original existing construction, except as otherwise shown or specified. B.Upon completion of contract, deliver work complete and undamaged. Existing work (walls, ceilings, partitions, floors, mechanical and electrical work, lawns, paving, roads, walks, etc.) disturbed or removed as a result of performing required new work, shall be patched, repaired, reinstalled, or replaced with new work, and refinished and left in as good condition as existed before commencing work. C.At Contractor's own expense, Contractor shall immediately restore to service and repair any damage caused by Contractor's workers to existing piping and conduits, wires, cables, etc., of utility services or of fire protection systems and communications systems (including telephone) which are indicated on drawings and which are not scheduled for discontinuance or abandonment. D.Expense of repairs to such utilities and systems not shown on drawings or locations of which are unknown will be covered by adjustment to contract time and price in accordance with clause entitled "CHANGES" (FAR 52.2434 and VAAR 852.23688) and "DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS" (FAR 52.2362). 1.12 As-Built DrawingsA.The contractor shall maintain two full size sets of as-built drawings which will be kept current during construction of the project, to include all contract changes, modifications and clarifications.B.All variations shall be shown in the same general detail as used in the contract drawings. To insure compliance, as-built drawings shall be made available for the COTR's review, as often as requested.C.Contractor shall deliver two approved completed sets of as-built drawings to the COTR within 15 calendar days after each completed phase and after the acceptance of the project by the COTR.D.Paragraphs A, B, & C shall also apply to all shop drawings.1.13 USE OF ROADWAYSA.For hauling, use only established public roads and roads on Medical Center property and, when authorized by the COTR, such temporary roads which are necessary in the performance of contract work. Temporary roads shall be constructed by the Contractor at Contractor's expense. When necessary to cross curbing, sidewalks, or similar construction, they must be protected by wellconstructed bridges.1.14 TEMPORARY USE OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A.Use of new installed mechanical and electrical equipment to provide heat, ventilation, plumbing, light and power will be permitted subject to compliance with the following provisions: 1.Permission to use each unit or system must be given by COTR. If the equipment is not installed and maintained in accordance with the following provisions, the COTR will withdraw permission for use of the equipment. 2.Electrical installations used by the equipment shall be completed in accordance with the drawings and specifications to prevent damage to the equipment and the electrical systems, i.e. transformers, relays, circuit breakers, fuses, conductors, motor controllers and their overload elements shall be properly sized, coordinated and adjusted. Voltage supplied to each item of equipment shall be verified to be correct and it shall be determined that motors are not overloaded. The electrical equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned before using it and again immediately before final inspection including vacuum cleaning and wiping clean interior and exterior surfaces. 3.Units shall be properly lubricated, balanced, and aligned. Vibrations must be eliminated. 4.Automatic temperature control systems for preheat coils shall function properly and all safety controls shall function to prevent coil freezeup damage. 5.The air filtering system utilized shall be that which is designed for the system when complete, and all filter elements shall be replaced at completion of construction and prior to testing and balancing of system.6.All components of heat production and distribution system, metering equipment, condensate returns, and other auxiliary facilities used in temporary service shall be cleaned prior to use; maintained to prevent corrosion internally and externally during use; and cleaned, maintained and inspected prior to acceptance by the Government. B.Prior to final inspection, the equipment or parts used which show wear and tear beyond normal, shall be replaced with identical replacements, at no additional cost to the Government. C.This paragraph shall not reduce the requirements of the mechanical and electrical specifications sections. 1.15 TEMPORARY TOILETS A.Provide where directed, (for use of all Contractor's workers) ample temporary sanitary toilet accommodations with suitable sewer and water connections; or, when approved by COTR, provide suitable dry closets where directed. Keep such places clean and free from flies, and all connections and appliances connected therewith are to be removed prior to completion of contract, and premises left perfectly clean. 1.16 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES A.The Government shall make all reasonably required amounts of utilities available to the Contractor from existing outlets and supplies, as specified in the contract at no cost to the Contractor. The Contractor shall carefully conserve any utilities furnished without charge. B.The Contractor, at Contractor's expense and in a workmanlike manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer, shall install and maintain all necessary temporary connections and distribution lines, and all meters required to measure the amount of electricity used for the purpose of determining charges. Before final acceptance of the work by the Government, the Contractor shall remove all the temporary connections, distribution lines, meters, and associated paraphernalia. C.Heat: Furnish temporary heat necessary to prevent injury to work and materials through dampness and cold. Use of open salamanders or any temporary heating devices which may be fire hazards or may smoke and damage finished work, will not be permitted. Maintain minimum temperatures as specified for various materials: 1.Obtain heat by connecting to Medical Center heating distribution system. 1.17 NEW TELEPHONE EQUIPMENTThe contractor shall coordinate with the work of installation of telephone equipment by others. This work shall be completed before the building is turned over to VA.1.18 TESTS A.Pretest mechanical and electrical equipment and systems and make corrections required for proper operation of such systems before requesting final tests. Final test will not be conducted unless pretested. B.Conduct final tests required in various sections of specifications in presence of an authorized representative of the Contracting Officer. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, instruments, and forms, to conduct and record such tests. C.Mechanical and electrical systems shall be balanced, controlled and coordinated. A system is defined as the entire complex which must be coordinated to work together during normal operation to produce results for which the system is designed. For example, air conditioning supply air is only one part of entire system which provides comfort conditions for a building. Other related components are return air, exhaust air, steam, chilled water, refrigerant, hot water, controls and electricity, etc. Another example of a complex which involves several components of different disciplines is a boiler installation. Efficient and acceptable boiler operation depends upon the coordination and proper operation of fuel, combustion air, controls, steam, feedwater, condensate and other related components. D.All related components as defined above shall be functioning when any system component is tested. Tests shall be completed within a reasonably short period of time during which operating and environmental conditions remain reasonably constant. E.Individual test result of any component, where required, will only be accepted when submitted with the test results of related components and of the entire system. 1.19 INSTRUCTIONS A.Contractor shall furnish Maintenance and Operating manuals and verbal instructions when required by the various sections of the specifications and as hereinafter specified. B.Manuals: Maintenance and operating manuals (four hard copies and four electronic copies each) for each separate piece of equipment shall be delivered to the COTR coincidental with the delivery of the equipment to the job site. Manuals shall be complete, detailed guides for the maintenance and operation of equipment. They shall include complete information necessary for starting, adjusting, maintaining in continuous operation for long periods of time and dismantling and reassembling of the complete units and subassembly components. Manuals shall include an index covering all component parts clearly crossreferenced to diagrams and illustrations. Illustrations shall include "exploded" views showing and identifying each separate item. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of special tools and instruments. The function of each piece of equipment, component, accessory and control shall be clearly and thoroughly explained. All necessary precautions for the operation of the equipment and the reason for each precaution shall be clearly set forth. Manuals must reference the exact model, style and size of the piece of equipment and system being furnished. Manuals referencing equipment similar to but of a different model, style, and size than that furnished will not be accepted. C.Instructions: Contractor shall provide qualified, factorytrained manufacturers' representatives to give detailed instructions to assigned Department of Veterans Affairs personnel in the operation and complete maintenance for each piece of equipment. All such training will be at the job site. These requirements are more specifically detailed in the various technical sections. Instructions for different items of equipment that are component parts of a complete system, shall be given in an integrated, progressive manner. All instructors for every piece of component equipment in a system shall be available until instructions for all items included in the system have been completed. This is to assure proper instruction in the operation of interrelated systems. All instruction periods shall be at such times as scheduled by the COTR and shall be considered concluded only when the COTR is satisfied in regard to complete and thorough coverage. The Department of Veterans Affairs reserves the right to request the removal of, and substitution for, any instructor who, in the opinion of the COTR, does not demonstrate sufficient qualifications in accordance with requirements for instructors above. 1.20 GOVERNMENTFURNISHED PROPERTY A.The Government shall deliver to the Contractor, the Governmentfurnished property shown on the Schedule. B.Equipment furnished by Government to be installed by Contractor will be furnished to Contractor at the Medical Center.C.Storage space for equipment will be provided by the Government and the Contractor shall be prepared to unload and store such equipment therein upon its receipt at the Medical Center.D.Notify Contracting Officer in writing, 60 days in advance, of date on which Contractor will be prepared to receive equipment furnished by Government. Arrangements will then be made by the Government for delivery of equipment. 1.Immediately upon delivery of equipment, Contractor shall arrange for a joint inspection thereof with a representative of the Government. At such time the Contractor shall acknowledge receipt of equipment described, make notations, and immediately furnish the Government representative with a written statement as to its condition or shortages. 2.Contractor thereafter is responsible for such equipment until such time as acceptance of contract work is made by the Government. E.Equipment furnished by the Government will be delivered in a partially assembled (knock down) condition in accordance with existing standard commercial practices, complete with all fittings, fastenings, and appliances necessary for connections to respective services installed under contract. All fittings and appliances (i.e., couplings, ells, tees, nipples, piping, conduits, cables, and the like) necessary to make the connection between the Government furnished equipment item and the utility stubup shall be furnished and installed by the contractor at no additional cost to the Government. pletely assemble and install the Government furnished equipment in place ready for proper operation in accordance with specifications and drawings. G.Furnish supervision of installation of equipment at construction site by qualified factory trained technicians regularly employed by the equipment manufacturer.1.21 RELOCATED ITEMS A.Contractor shall disconnect, dismantle as necessary, remove and reinstall in new location, all existing items indicated by symbol "R" or otherwise shown to be relocated by the Contractor. B.Perform relocation of such equipment or items at such times and in such a manner as directed by the COTR. C.Suitably cap existing service lines, such as steam, condensate return, water, drain, gas, air, vacuum and/or electrical, whenever such lines are disconnected from equipment to be relocated. Remove abandoned lines in finished areas and cap as specified herein before under paragraph "Abandoned Lines". D.Provide all mechanical and electrical service connections, fittings, fastenings and any other materials necessary for assembly and installation of relocated equipment; and leave such equipment in proper operating condition. E.All service lines such as noted above for relocated equipment shall be in place at point of relocation ready for use before any existing equipment is disconnected. Make relocated existing equipment ready for operation or use immediately after reinstallation. 1.22 photographic documentation A.During the construction period through completion, provide photographic documentation of construction progress and at selected milestones. B.Photographic documentation elements:1.Each digital image shall be taken with a professional grade camera with minimum size of 6 megapixels (MP) capable of producing 200x250mm (8 x 10 inch) prints with a minimum of 2272 x 1704 pixels. 2. Before construction, the building, adjacent streets, roadways, driveways, curbs, sidewalks, landscaping, adjacent utilities and adjacent structures and site shall be documented. Overlapping photographic techniques shall be used to insure maximum coverage. 3. Construction progress for all trades shall be tracked at pre-determined intervals, but not less than once every thirty (30) calendar days (“Progressions”). Progression documentation shall track both the exterior and interior construction of the building. Exterior Progressions shall track 360 degrees around the site and each building. Interior Progressions shall track interior improvements beginning when stud work commences and continuing until Project completion.4. As-built conditions of mechanical, electrical, plumbing and all other systems shall be documented post-inspection and pre-insulation, sheet rock or dry wall installation. This process shall include all finished systems located in the walls and ceilings of all buildings at the Project. Overlapping photographic techniques shall be used to insure maximum coverage. Indexing and navigation accomplished through interactive architectural drawings.5. As-built finished conditions of the interior of each building including floors, ceilings and walls shall be documented at certificate of occupancy or equivalent, or just prior to occupancy, or both, as directed by the COTR. Overlapping photographic techniques shall be used to insure maximum coverage. Indexing and navigation accomplished through interactive architectural drawings.C.Images shall show distinctly, at as large a scale as possible, all parts of work embraced in the picture.D.Coordination of photo shoots is accomplished through COTR. Contractor shall also attend construction team meetings as necessary. Contractor’s operations team shall provide regular updates regarding the status of the documentation, including photo shoots concluded, the availability of new Progressions or Exact-Builts viewable on-line and anticipated future shoot dates.E.Upon completion of the project, final copies of the documentation (the “Permanent Record”) wshall be provided in an electronic media format, typically a DVD or external hard-drive. 1.23 FINAL ELEVATION Digital Images A minimum of two (2) images of each elevation shall be taken with a minimum 6 MP camera, by a professional photographer with different settings to allow the COTR to select the image to be printed. All images are provided to the RE on a CD. Photographs shall be taken upon completion, including landscaping. They shall be taken on a clear sunny day to obtain sufficient detail to show depth and to provide clear, sharp pictures. Pictures shall be 200 mm x 250 mm (8 by 10 inches), printed on regular weight paper, matte finish archival grade photographic paper and produced by a RA4 process from the digital image with a minimum 300 PPI. Identifying data shall be carried on label affixed to back of photograph without damage to photograph and shall be similar to that provided for final construction photographs.1.24 Construction safety Requirements REFERENCESThe publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)ASSE/SAFE A10.32 (2004) Fall ProtectionASSE/SAFE A10.3 (2001; R 2005) Protection of the Public on or Adjacent to Construction SitesASSE/SAFE Z359.1 (2007) Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest Systems, Subsystems and ComponentsASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)ASME B30.22 Articulating Boom CranesASME B30.3 (2004) Construction Tower CranesASME B30.5 (2007) Mobile and Locomotive CranesNATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)NFPA 10 (2007; Errata 2007; AMD 1 2007) Standard for Portable Fire ExtinguishersNFPA 241 (2009) Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition OperationsNFPA 306 (2009) Standard for Control of Gas Hazards in VesselsNFPA 51B (2009) Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot WorkNFPA 70 (2008; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical Code - 2008 EditionNFPA 70E (2009; Errata 2009) Standard for Electrical Safety in the WorkplaceU.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)10 CFR 20 Standards for Protection Against Radiation29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards29 CFR 1910.146 Permit-required Confined Spaces29 CFR 1919 Gear Certification29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction29 CFR 1926.500 Fall ProtectionVHA Construction Safety Guide: web link ()SAFETY PLANSafety plan must be submitted and approved prior to starting any and all work activities.Safety Plan must include the following:Preconstruction SubmittalsAccident Prevention Plan (APP)Job Hazard Analysis (JHA)Crane Critical Lift PlanProof of qualification for Crane OperatorsWest Virginia Crane Operators LicenseTest ReportsOSHA 10 and 30 Hour CardsREPORTSSubmit reports as their incidence occurs, in accordance with the requirements of the paragraph entitled, "Reports."Accident ReportsCrane ReportsConfined Space Entry PermitHot work permitSmoke/Fire Wall Penetration PermitTrenching PermitLicense CertificatesCertificate of Compliance (Crane): Submit one copy of each permit/certificate attached to each Daily Quality Control Report.Machinery & Mechanized Equipment Certification FormDEFINITIONSCompetent Person for Fall Protection. A person who is capable of identifying hazardous or dangerous conditions in the personal fall arrest system or any component thereof, as well as their application and use with related equipment, and has the authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate the hazards of falling.High Visibility Accident. Any mishap which may generate publicity and/or high visibility.Medical Treatment. Treatment administered by a physician or by registered professional personnel under the standing orders of a physician. Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment even through provided by a physician or registered personnel.Recordable Injuries or Illnesses. Any work-related injury or illness that results in:Death, regardless of the time between the injury and death, or the length of the illness; Days away from work (any time lost after day of injury/illness onset);Restricted work;Transfer to another job;Medical treatment beyond first aid;Loss of consciousness; orA significant injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or other licensed health care professional, even if it did not result in (1) through (6) above.REGULATORY REQUIREMENTSIn addition to the detailed requirements included in the provisions of this contract, comply with the most recent addition of the VHA Construction Safety Guidebook, and federal, state, and local, laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and regulations. Submit matters of interpretation of standards to the appropriate administrative agency for resolution before starting work. Where the requirements of this specification, applicable laws, criteria, ordinances, regulations, and referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirements govern.SITE QUALIFICATIONS, DUTIES AND MEETINGSSite Safety and Health Officer (SSHO): The contractor shall provide a Safety oversight team that includes a minimum of one (1) Competent Person at each project site to function as the Safety and Health Officer (SSHO). The SSHO shall be at the work site at all times, unless specified differently in the contract, to perform safety and occupational health management, surveillance, inspections, and safety enforcement for the Contractor, and their training, experience, and qualifications shall be as required by VHA Construction Safety Guide. A Competent Personal shall be provided for all of the hazards identified in the Contractor's Safety and Health Program in accordance with the accepted Accident Prevention Plan, and shall be on-site at all times when the work that presents the hazards associated with their professional expertise is being performed. The credentials of the Competent Persons(s) shall be approved by the Contracting Officer in consultation with the Safety Office.The Contractor Quality Control (QC) person can be the SSHO on this project.The SSHO, as a minimum, must have completed the 30-hour OSHA Construction Safety class. The SSHO is also required to have five (5) years of construction industry safety experience or three (3) years of construction safety experience if in possession of a Certified Safety Profession (CSP) or safety and health petent Person for Confined Space Entry. Provide a competent person for confined space meeting the definition and requirements of VHA Construction Safety Guide. All confined space and enclosed space work shall comply with 1.6F.3.Crane Operators. Meet the crane operators’ requirements in the VHA Construction Safety Guide. In addition, for mobile cranes with Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) rated capacitates of 50,000 pounds or greater, designate crane operators as qualified by a source that qualifies crane operators (i.e., union, a government agency, or/and organization that tests and qualifies crane operators). Provide proof of current qualification.Personnel DutiesSite Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)Conduct daily safety and health inspections and maintain a written log which includes area/operation inspected, date of inspection, identified hazards, recommended corrective actions, estimated and actual dates of corrections. Attach safety inspection logs to the Contractors' daily quality control report.Conduct mishap investigations and complete required reports. Maintain the OSHA Form 300 and Daily Production reports for prime and sub-contractors.Maintain applicable safety reference material on the job site.Attend the pre-construction conference, pre-work meetings including preparatory inspection meeting, and periodic in-progress meetings.Implement and enforce accepted APPS and JHAs.Maintain a safety and health deficiency tracking system that monitors outstanding deficiencies until resolution. Post a list of unresolved safety and health deficiencies on the safety bulletin board.Maintain a list of hazardous chemicals on site and their material safety data sheets.ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP)Use a qualified person to prepare the written site-specific APP. Prepare the APP in accordance with the format and requirements of the VHA Construction Safety Guide and as supplemented herein. Cover all paragraph and subparagraph elements in the VHA Construction Safety Guide.Specific requirements for some of the APP elements are described below. The APP shall be job-specific and address any unusual or unique aspects of the project or activity for which it is written. The APP shall interface with the Contractor's overall safety and health program. Include any portions of the Contractor’s overall safety and health program referenced in the APP in the applicable APP element and made site-specific. The Government considers the Prime Contractor to be the "controlling authority" for all work site safety and health of the subcontractors. Contractors are responsible for informing their subcontractors of the safety provisions under the terms of the contract and the penalties for noncompliance, coordinating the work to prevent one craft from interfering with or creating hazardous working conditions for other crafts, and inspecting subcontractor operations to ensure that accident prevention responsibilities are being carried out. The APP shall be signed by the person and firm (senior person) preparing the APP, the Contractor, the on-site superintendent, the designated site safety and health officer, the Contractor Quality control Manager, and any designated CSP and/or CIH. Submit the APP to the Contracting Officer 15 calendar days prior to the date of the preconstruction conference for acceptance. Work cannot proceed without an accepted APP. Once accepted by the Contracting Officer, the APP and attachments will be enforced as part of the contract. Disregarding the provisions of this contract or the accepted APP will be cause for stopping of work, at the discretion of the Contracting Officer, until the matter has been rectified.Once work begins, changes to the accepted APP shall be made with the knowledge and concurrence of the Contracting Officer, project superintendent, SSHO and quality control manager. Should any severe hazard exposure, i.e. imminent danger, become evident, stop work in the area, secure the area, and develop a plan to remove the exposure and control the hazard. Notify the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of discovery. Eliminate/remove the hazard. In the interim, take all necessary action to restore and maintain safe working conditions in order to safeguard onsite personnel, visitors, the public (as defined by ASSE/SAFE A10.34) and the environment.Copies of the accepted plan will be maintained at the Contracting Officer's office and at the job site. Continuously reviewed and amended the APP, as necessary, throughout the life of the contract. Incorporate unusual or high-hazard activities not identified in the original APP as they are discovered.VHA Construction Safety Guide Contents: In addition to the requirements outlined in the VHA Construction Safety Guide, the following is required:Names and qualifications (resumes including education, training, experience and certifications) of all site safety and health personnel designated to perform work on this project to include the designated site safety and health officer and other competent and qualified personnel to be used such as CSPs, CIHs, STSs, CHSTs. Specify the duties of each position.Qualifications of competent and of qualified persons. As a minimum, designate and submit qualifications of competent persons for each of the following major areas: excavation; scaffolding; fall protection; hazardous energy; confined space; health hazard recognition, evaluation and control of chemical, physical and biological agents; personal protective equipment and clothing to include selection, use and maintenance.Confined Space Entry Plan. Develop a confined and/or enclosed space entry plan in accordance with VHA Construction Safety Guide, applicable OSHA standards, 29 CFR 1910, 29 CFR 1915, and 29 CFR 1926, OSHA Directive 2.100, and any other federal, state and local regulatory requirements identified in this contract. Identify the qualified person's name and qualifications, training, and experience. Delineate the qualified person’s authority to direct work stoppage in the event of hazardous conditions. Include procedure for rescue by contractor personnel and the coordination with emergency responders. (If there is no confined space work, include a statement that no confined space work exists and none will be created.)Crane Critical Lift Plan. Prepare and sign weight handling critical lift plans for lifts over 75 percent of the capacity of the crane or hoist (or lifts over 50 percent of the capacity of a barge mounted mobile crane’s hoists) at any radius of lift; lifts involving more than one crane or hoist; lifts of personnel; and lifts involving non-routine rigging or operation, sensitive equipment, or unusual safety risks. Submit 15 calendar days prior to on-site work and include the requirements of VHA Construction Safety Guide, and the following:For lifts of personnel, demonstrate compliance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.550(g.Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Program Documentation. The program documentation shall be site specific and address all fall hazards in the work place and during different phases of construction. Address how to protect and prevent workers from falling to lower levels when they are exposed to fall hazards above 6 feet. A qualified person for fall protection shall prepare and sign the program documentation. Include fall protection and prevention systems, equipment and methods employed for every phase of work, responsibilities, assisted rescue, self-rescue and evacuation procedures, training requirements, and monitoring methods. Revise the Fall Protection and Prevention Program documentation every six months, reflecting any changes during the course of construction due to changes in personnel, equipment, systems or work habits. Keep and maintain the accepted Fall Protection and Prevention Program documentation at the job site for the duration of the project. Include the Fall Protection and Prevention Program documentation in the Accident Prevention Plan (APP).Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan. The safety and health aspects of asbestos work, prepared in accordance with Section 02 82 14.00 10, ASBESTOS ABATEMENTSite Demolition Plan. The safety and health aspects prepared in accordance with Section 02 41 00, DEMOLITION and referenced sources. Include engineering survey as applicable.Excavation Plan. The safety and health aspects prepared in accordance with Section 31 00 00, EARTHWORK.JOB HAZARD ANALYSIS (JHA) The Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) format shall be performed in accordance with OSHA 3071 (R2002) () and the requirements of chapters 2 through 17 of the VHA Construction Safety Guide. Submit the JHA for review at least 15 calendar days prior to the start of each phase. Format subsequent JHAs as amendments to the APP. The analysis should be used during daily inspections to ensure the implementation and effectiveness of the activity's safety and health controls. The JHA list will be reviewed periodically (at least monthly) at the Contractor supervisory safety meeting and updated as necessary when procedures, scheduling, or hazards change.Develop the activity hazard analyses using the project schedule as the basis for the activities performed. Any activities listed on the project schedule may require a JHA. The JHAs will be developed by the contractor, supplier or subcontractor and provided to the prime contractor for submittal to the Contracting Officer. A JHA shall be prepared for all activities comprising:Jobs with the highest injury or illness rates;Jobs with potential to cause severe or disabling injuries or illness, even if no previous history of accidents;Jobs in which one simple human error could lend to severe accident or injury;Jobs that are new to operators or have undergone changes in procedures and processes;All jobs applicable from VHA Construction Safety Guide for which MAJOR OSHA VIOLATIONS as noted in the Guide text.CONSTRUCTION AND/OR OTHER WORKComply with VHA Construction Safety Guide, NFPA 241, the APP, the AHA, Federal and/or State OSHA regulations, and other related submittals and activity fire and safety regulations. The most stringent standard prevails.Hazardous Material UseEach hazardous material must receive approval from the Contracting Office or their designated representative prior to being brought onto the job site or prior to any other use in connection with this contract. Allow a minimum of 10 working days for processing of the request for use of a hazardous material.Hazardous Material ExclusionsNotwithstanding any other hazardous material used in this contract, radioactive materials or instruments capable of producing ionizing/non-ionizing radiation (with the exception of radioactive material and devices used in accordance with VHA Construction Safety Guide, such as nuclear density meters for compaction testing and laboratory equipment with radioactive sources) as well as materials which contain asbestos, mercury or polychlorinated biphenyls, di-isocynates, lead-based paint are prohibited. The Contracting Officer, upon written request by the Contractor, may consider exceptions to the use of any of the above excluded materials. The Radiation Safety Officer (RSO) must be notified prior to excepted items of radioactive material and devices being brought on base.Unforeseen Hazardous MaterialThe design should have identified materials such as PCB, lead paint, and friable and non-friable asbestos and other OSHA regulated chemicals (i.e. 29 CFR Part 1910.1000). If [additional] material, not indicated, that may be hazardous to human health upon disturbance during construction operations is encountered, stop that portion of work and notify the Contracting Officer immediately. Within 14 calendar days the Government will determine if the material is hazardous. If material is not hazardous or poses no danger, the Government will direct the Contractor to proceed without change. If the material is hazardous and handling of the material is necessary to accomplish the work, the Government will issue a modification pursuant to "FAR 52.243-4, Changes" and "FAR 52.236-2, Differing Site Conditions."SCAFFOLDINGProvide employees with a safe means of access to the work area on the scaffold. Climbing of any scaffold braces or supports not specifically designed for access is prohibited. Access scaffold platforms greater than 20 feet maximum in height by use of a scaffold stair system. Do not use vertical ladders commonly provided by scaffold system manufacturers for accessing scaffold platforms greater than 20 feet maximum in height. The use of an adequate gate is required. Ensure that employees are qualified to perform scaffold erection and dismantling. Do not use scaffold without the capability of supporting at least four times the maximum intended load or without appropriate fall protection as delineated in the accepted fall protection and prevention plan. Stationary scaffolds must be attached to structural building components to safeguard against tipping forward or backward. Give special care to ensure scaffold systems are not overloaded. Side brackets used to extend scaffold platforms on self-supported scaffold systems for the storage of material are prohibited. The first tie-in shall be at the height equal to 4 times the width of the smallest dimension of the scaffold base. Place work platforms on mud sills. Scaffold or work platform erectors shall have fall protection during the erection and dismantling of scaffolding or work platforms that are more than six feet. Delineate fall protection requirements when working above six feet or above dangerous operations in the Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan and Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) for the phase EXCAVATIONSContractor shall perform soil classification by a competent person in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.Utility LocationsPrior to digging, the appropriate digging permit must be obtained. All underground utilities in the work area must be positively identified by a private utility locating service in addition to any station locating service and coordinated with the station utility department. Any markings made during the utility investigation must be maintained throughout the contract.Utility Location VerificationThe Contractor must physically verify underground utility locations by hand digging using wood or fiberglass handled tools when any adjacent construction work is expected to come within three feet of the underground system. Digging within 2 feet of a known utility must not be performed by means of mechanical equipment; hand digging shall be used. If construction is parallel to an existing utility expose the utility by hand digging every 100 feet if parallel within 5 feet of the excavation.Shoring SystemsTrench and shoring systems must be identified in the accepted safety plan and JHA. Manufacture tabulated data and specifications or registered engineer tabulated data for shoring or benching systems shall be readily available on-site for review. Job-made shoring or shielding must have the registered professional engineer stamp, specifications, and tabulated data. Trenching MachineryOperate trenching machines with digging chain drives only when the spotters/laborers are in plain view of the operator. Provide operator and spotters/laborers training on the hazards of the digging chain drives with emphasis on the distance that needs to be maintained when the digging chain is operating. Keep documentation of the training on file at the project site.WORK IN CONFINED SPACESComply with the requirements of the VHA Construction Safety Guide, OSHA 29 CFR 1910.146 and OSHA 29 CFR 1926.21(b)(6). Any potential for a hazard in the confined space requires a permit system to be used. NOTE: The Contractor shall submit documentation, before starting work, that Contractor employees entering confined spaces have received confined space training or re-training within the last 12 months.Entry Procedures.Obtain confined space entry permit from the VA Fire Department- E N D General Decision Number: WV120041 09/28/2012 WV41State: West VirginiaConstruction Type: BuildingCounty: Berkeley County in West Virginia.Modification Number Publication Date 0 09/28/2012 ASBE0024-003 10/01/2010 Rates FringesASBESTOS WORKER/HEAT & FROST INSULATOR........................$ 31.79 14.73---------------------------------------------------------------- BOIL0667-005 10/01/2011 Rates FringesBOILERMAKER......................$ 36.91 19.64---------------------------------------------------------------- BRWV0009-007 12/01/2011 Rates FringesTILE SETTER......................$ 28.17 17.56---------------------------------------------------------------- BRWV0015-007 12/01/2011 Rates FringesBRICKLAYER.......................$ 25.58 14.84---------------------------------------------------------------- BRWV0015-011 12/01/2011 Rates FringesMASON - STONE....................$ 25.58 14.84---------------------------------------------------------------- BRWV0015-014 12/01/2011 Rates FringesTILE FINISHER....................$ 21.01 13.86---------------------------------------------------------------- CARP1024-007 05/01/2012 Rates FringesCARPENTER (Including Drywall Finishing/Taping, Drywall Hanging and Form Work)...........$ 25.95 13.35---------------------------------------------------------------- CARP1024-012 05/01/2012 Rates FringesMILLWRIGHT.......................$ 26.55 13.35---------------------------------------------------------------- ELEC0307-012 06/03/2012 Rates FringesELECTRICIAN (Including Low Voltage Wiring)..................$ 30.00 15.05---------------------------------------------------------------- ELEV0100-001 01/01/2012 Rates FringesELEVATOR MECHANIC................$ 39.70 23.535+a+bPAID HOLIDAYS: a. New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Vetern's Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving, and Christmas Day. b. Employer contributes 8% of regular hourly rate to vacation pay credit for employee who has worked in business more than 5 years; 6% for less than 5 years' service.---------------------------------------------------------------- ENGI0132-009 12/01/2011 Rates FringesPOWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR: GROUP 1.....................$ 33.26 17.43 GROUP 2.....................$ 32.91 17.43 GROUP 3.....................$ 31.91 17.43 GROUP 4.....................$ 21.41 17.43 GROUP 1: All Friction Cranes, Tower Cranes and all Cranes with 180 ft. or more of boom including mast and jibs or lifting capacity of 100 tons or more and hoists with 30,000 pound line pull or more, Mechanics with tools with 3/4 inch drive and below GROUP 2: Operating Cranes and Tower Cranes with a lifting capacity of 15 tons and over GROUP 3: Bulldozer, Forklift, Non-Farm Type Tractor, all other Cranes, all other Mechanics GROUP 4: Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader, Farm Type Tractor, Loader---------------------------------------------------------------- IRON0549-007 12/01/2011 Rates FringesIRONWORKER (Ornamental and Reinforcing).....................$ 29.35 16.04---------------------------------------------------------------- IRON0568-011 05/01/2012 Rates FringesIRONWORKER (Sheeting and Structural)......................$ 26.78 15.47---------------------------------------------------------------- LABO0379-009 12/01/2011 Rates FringesLABORER Group 1.....................$ 20.43 12.35 Group 2.....................$ 20.79 12.35 Group 3.....................$ 21.22 12.35LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Carpenter Tender, Common or General, Demolition GROUP 2: Concrete Saw (Hand held/Walk Behind), Mason Tender-Brick, Mason Tender-Cement/Concrete, Mortar Mixer, Scaffold Builder (Brick and Masonry), Skytrak Forklift OperatorGROUP 3: Pipelayer---------------------------------------------------------------- LABO9999-009 09/06/2012 Rates FringesLABORER Power Tool Operator.........$ 22.73 13.07---------------------------------------------------------------- PLAS0039-002 07/01/2012 Rates FringesCEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 25.53 12.35---------------------------------------------------------------- PLUM0486-009 04/01/2012 Rates FringesPLUMBER..........................$ 36.425 16.09---------------------------------------------------------------- ROOF0034-003 05/01/2007 Rates FringesROOFER...........................$ 19.35 7.75---------------------------------------------------------------- SHEE0100-006 07/01/2011 Rates FringesSHEET METAL WORKER (Includes HVAC Duct Installation) 0-40 miles from City Hall, Cumberland, Maryland........$ 24.06 16.07 41-65 miles from City Hall, Cumberland, Maryland..$ 25.76 16.12 66+ miles from City Hall, Cumberland, Maryland........$ 26.73 16.15---------------------------------------------------------------- SUWV2012-032 08/13/2012 Rates FringesGLAZIER..........................$ 23.20 4.02 OPERATOR: Backhoe...............$ 21.60 7.66 OPERATOR: Excavator.............$ 23.27 11.95 PAINTER: Brush, Roller and Spray............................$ 22.33 9.95 PIPEFITTER.......................$ 25.76 19.46 SPRINKLER FITTER (Fire Sprinklers)......................$ 30.96 15.81---------------------------------------------------------------- TEAM0175-005 10/01/2011 Rates FringesTruck drivers: GROUP 2.....................$ 24.53 13.44 GROUP 3.....................$ 24.68 13.44TRUCK DRIVER CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 2 - Dump Truck (Up to 5 cu. yds.), Water Tank Truck (Straight) GROUP 3 - Dump Truck (5 cu. yds. & over), Tractor Haul Truck, Water Tank Truck (Semi)----------------------------------------------------------------WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performingoperation to which welding is incidental.================================================================ Unlisted classifications needed for work not included withinthe scope of the classifications listed may be added afteraward only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses(29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).---------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classificationand wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for thecited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wagedetermination. The classifications are listed in alphabeticalorder of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particularrate is union or non-union.Union IdentifiersAn identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning withcharacters other than "SU" denotes that the unionclassification and rate have found to be prevailing for thatclassification. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2011. Thefirst four letters , PLUM, indicate the international union andthe four-digit number, 0198, that follows indicates the localunion number or district council number where applicable ,i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in theexample, is an internal number used in processing the wagedetermination. The date, 07/01/2011, following thesecharacters is the effective date of the most currentnegotiated rate/collective bargaining agreement which would beJuly 1, 2011 in the above example.Union prevailing wage rates will be updated to reflect anychanges in the collective bargaining agreements governing therate.0000/9999: weighted union wage rates will be published annuallyeach January.Non-Union IdentifiersClassifications listed under an "SU" identifier were derivedfrom survey data by computing average rates and are not unionrates; however, the data used in computing these rates mayinclude both union and non-union data. Example: SULA2004-0075/13/2010. SU indicates the rates are not union rates, LAindicates the State of Louisiana; 2004 is the year of thesurvey; and 007 is an internal number used in producing thewage determination. A 1993 or later date, 5/13/2010, indicatesthe classifications and rates under that identifier were issuedas a General Wage Determination on that date.Survey wage rates will remain in effect and will not changeuntil a new survey is conducted. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This canbe:* an existing published wage determination* a survey underlying a wage determination* a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter* a conformance (additional classification and rate) rulingOn survey related matters, initial contact, including requestsfor summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and HourRegional Office for the area in which the survey was conductedbecause those Regional Offices have responsibility for theDavis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initialcontact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.)and 3.) should be followed.With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formalprocess described here, initial contact should be with theBranch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 202102.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then aninterested party (those affected by the action) can requestreview and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator(See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210The request should be accompanied by a full statement of theinterested party's position and by any information (wagepayment data, project description, area practice material,etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue.3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, aninterested party may appeal directly to the AdministrativeReview Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 202104.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final.================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISIONSECTION 01 32 16.15Project SCHEDULES(Small Projects – Design/Bid/Build)PART 1- GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTION:A.The Contractor shall develop a Critical Path Method (CPM) plan and schedule demonstrating fulfillment of the contract requirements (Project Schedule), and shall keep the Project Schedule up-to-date in accordance with the requirements of this section and shall utilize the plan for scheduling, coordinating and monitoring work under this contract (including all activities of subcontractors, equipment vendors and suppliers). Conventional Critical Path Method (CPM) technique shall be utilized to satisfy both time and cost applications.1.2 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE:A.The Contractor shall designate an authorized representative responsible for the Project Schedule including preparation, review and progress reporting with and to the Contracting Officer's Representative (COTR).B.The Contractor's representative shall have direct project control and complete authority to act on behalf of the Contractor in fulfilling the requirements of this specification section.C.The Contractor’s representative shall have the option of developing the project schedule within their organization or to engage the services of an outside consultant. If an outside scheduling consultant is utilized, Section 1.3 of this specification will apply.1.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSULTANT:A.The Contractor shall submit a qualification proposal to the COTR, within 10 days of bid acceptance. The qualification proposal shall include:1.The name and address of the proposed consultant.rmation to show that the proposed consultant has the qualifications to meet the requirements specified in the preceding paragraph. 3.A representative sample of prior construction projects, which the proposed consultant has performed complete project scheduling services. These representative samples shall be of similar size and scope.B.The Contracting Officer has the right to approve or disapprove the proposed consultant, and will notify the Contractor of the VA decision within seven calendar days from receipt of the qualification proposal. In case of disapproval, the Contractor shall resubmit another consultant within 10 calendar days for renewed consideration. The Contractor shall have their scheduling consultant approved prior to submitting any schedule for approval.1.4 COMPUTER PRODUCED SCHEDULESA.The contractor shall provide monthly, to the Department of Veterans Affairs (VA), all computer-produced time/cost schedules and reports generated from monthly project updates. This monthly computer service will include: three copies of up to five different reports (inclusive of all pages) available within the user defined reports of the scheduling software approved by the COTR; a hard copy listing of all project schedule changes, and associated data, made at the update and an electronic file of this data; and the resulting monthly updated schedule in PDM format. These must be submitted with and substantively support the contractor’s monthly payment request and the signed look ahead report. The COTR shall identify the five different report formats that the contractor shall provide.B.The contractor shall be responsible for the correctness and timeliness of the computer-produced reports. The Contractor shall also responsible for the accurate and timely submittal of the updated project schedule and all CPM data necessary to produce the computer reports and payment request that is specified. C.The VA will report errors in computer-produced reports to the Contractor’s representative within ten calendar days from receipt of reports. The Contractor shall reprocess the computer-produced reports and associated diskette(s), when requested by the Contracting Officer’s representative, to correct errors which affect the payment and schedule for the project. 1.5 THE COMPLETE PROJECT schedule SUBMITTALA.Within 30 calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit for the COTR's review; three color copies of the interim schedule on sheets of paper 765 x 1070 mm (30 x 42 inches) and an electronic file in the previously approved CPM schedule program. The submittal shall also include three copies of a computer-produced activity/event ID schedule showing project duration; phase completion dates; and other data, including event cost. Each activity/event on the computer-produced schedule shall contain as a minimum, but not limited to, activity/event ID, activity/event description, duration, budget amount, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date and total float. Work activity/event relationships shall be restricted to finish-to-start or start-to-start without lead or lag constraints. Activity/event date constraints, not required by the contract, will not be accepted unless submitted to and approved by the COTR. The contractor shall make a separate written detailed request to the COTR identifying these date constraints and secure the COTR’s written approval before incorporating them into the network diagram. The COTR’s separate approval of the Project Schedule shall not excuse the contractor of this requirement. Logic events (non-work) will be permitted where necessary to reflect proper logic among work events, but must have zero duration. The complete working schedule shall reflect the Contractor's approach to scheduling the complete project. The final Project Schedule in its original form shall contain no contract changes or delays which may have been incurred during the final network diagram development period and shall reflect the entire contract duration as defined in the bid documents. These changes/delays shall be entered at the first update after the final Project Schedule has been approved. The Contractor should provide their requests for time and supporting time extension analysis for contract time as a result of contract changes/delays, after this update, and in accordance with Article, ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT COMPLETION.D.Within 15 calendar days after receipt of the complete project interim Project Schedule and the complete final Project Schedule, the Contracting Officer or her representative, will do one or both of the following:1.Notify the Contractor concerning her actions, opinions, and objections.anize a meeting with the Contractor at or near the job site for joint review, correction or adjustment of the proposed plan will be scheduled if required. Within 10 calendar days after the joint review, the Contractor shall revise and shall submit three color copies of the revised Project Schedule, three copies of the revised computer-produced activity/event ID schedule and a revised electronic file as specified by the COTR. The revised submission will be reviewed by the COTR and, if found to be as previously agreed upon, will be approved.E.The approved baseline schedule and the computer-produced schedule(s) generated there from shall constitute the approved baseline schedule until subsequently revised in accordance with the requirements of this section.F.The Complete Project Schedule shall contain enough work activities/events to clearly identify critical milestones and procedures during the construction of the work.1.6 WORK ACTIVITY/EVENT COST DATAA.The Contractor shall cost load all work activities/events except procurement activities. The cumulative amount of all cost loaded work activities/events (including alternates) shall equal the total contract price. Prorate overhead, profit and general conditions on all work activities/events for the entire project length. The Contractor shall generate from this information cash flow curves indicating graphically the total percentage of work activity/event dollar value scheduled to be in place on early finish, late finish. These cash flow curves will be used by the COTR to assist him in determining approval or disapproval of the cost loading. Negative work activity/event cost data will not be acceptable, except on VA issued contract changes. B.The Contractor shall cost load work activities/events for guarantee period services, test, balance and adjust various systems in accordance with the provisions in Article, FAR 52.232 – 5 (PAYMENT UNDER FIXEDPRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS) and VAAR 852.236 – 83 (PAYMENT UNDER FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS). C.In accordance with FAR 52.236 – 1 (PERFORMANCE OF WORK BY THE CONTRACTOR) and VAAR 852.236 – 72 (PERFORMANCE OF WORK BY THE CONTRACTOR), the Contractor shall submit, simultaneously with the cost per work activity/event of the construction schedule required by this Section, a responsibility code for all activities/events of the project for which the Contractor's forces will perform the work. D.The Contractor shall cost load work activities/events for all BID ITEMS including HAZARDOUS MATERIAL ABATEMENT. The sum of each BID ITEM work shall equal the value of the bid item in the Contractors' bid. 1.7 project schedule REQUIREMENTSA.Show on the project schedule the sequence of work activities/events required for complete performance of all items of work. The Contractor Shall:1.Show activities/events as: a.Contractor's time required for submittal of shop drawings, templates, fabrication, delivery and similar preconstruction work. b.COTR's and ArchitectEngineer's review and approval of shop drawings, equipment schedules, samples, template, or similar items. c.Interruption of VA Facilities utilities, delivery of Government furnished equipment, and rough-in drawings, project phasing and any other specification requirements. d.Test, balance and adjust various systems and pieces of equipment, maintenance and operation manuals, instructions and preventive maintenance tasks.e.VA inspection and acceptance activity/event with a minimum duration of five work days at the end of each phase and immediately preceding any VA move activity/event required by the contract phasing for that phase. 2.Show not only the activities/events for actual construction work for each trade category of the project, but also trade relationships to indicate the movement of trades from one area to another for those trades who are performing major work under this contract. 3.Break up the work into activities/events of a duration no longer than 2 calendar weeks each or one reporting period, except as to nonconstruction activities/events (i.e., procurement of materials, delivery of equipment, concrete and asphalt curing) and any other activities/events for which the COTR may approve the showing of a longer duration. The duration for VA approval of any required submittal, shop drawing, or other submittals will not be less than 20 work days. 4.Describe work activities/events clearly, so the work is readily identifiable for assessment of completion. Activities/events labeled "start," "continue," or "completion," are not specific and will not be allowed. Lead and lag time activities will not be acceptable. 5.The schedule shall be generally numbered in such a way to reflect either discipline, phase or location of the work.B.The Contractor shall submit the following supporting data in addition to the project schedule: 1.The appropriate project calendar including working days and holidays. 2.The planned number of shifts per day. 3.The number of hours per shift. Failure of the Contractor to include this data shall delay the review of the submittal until the COTR is in receipt of the missing data. C.To the extent that the Project Schedule or any revised Project Schedule shows anything not jointly agreed upon, it shall not be deemed to have been approved by the COTR. Failure to include any element of work required for the performance of this contract shall not excuse the Contractor from completing all work required within any applicable completion date of each phase regardless of the COTR’s approval of the Project Schedule. pact Disk Requirements and CPM Activity/Event Record Specifications: Submit to the VA an electronic file(s) containing one file of the data required to produce a schedule, reflecting all the activities/events of the complete project schedule being submitted.1.8 PAYMENT TO THE CONTRACTOR:A.Monthly, the Contractor shall submit the AIA application and certificate for payment documents G702 & G703 reflecting updated schedule activities and cost data in accordance with the provisions of the following Article, PAYMENT AND PROGRESS REPORTING, as the basis upon which progress payments will be made pursuant to Article, FAR 52.232 – 5 (PAYMENT UNDER FIXEDPRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS) and VAAR 852.236 – 83 (PAYMENT UNDER FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS). The Contractor shall be entitled to a monthly progress payment upon approval of estimates as determined from the currently approved updated project schedule. Monthly payment requests shall include: a listing of all agreed upon project schedule changes and associated data; and an electronic file(s) of the resulting monthly updated schedule.B.Approval of the Contractor’s monthly Application for Payment shall be contingent, among other factors, on the submittal of a satisfactory monthly update of the project schedule.1.9 PAYMENT AND PROGRESS REPORTINGA.Monthly schedule update meetings will be held on dates mutually agreed to by the COTR and the Contractor. Contractor and their CPM consultant (if applicable) shall attend all monthly schedule update meetings. The Contractor shall accurately update the Project Schedule and all other data required and provide this information to the COTR three work days in advance of the schedule update meeting. Job progress will be reviewed to verify:1.Actual start and/or finish dates for updated/completed activities/events.2.Remaining duration for each activity/event started, or scheduled to start, but not completed.3.Logic, time and cost data for change orders, and supplemental agreements that are to be incorporated into the Project Schedule.4. Changes in activity/event sequence and/or duration which have been made, pursuant to the provisions of following Article, ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT COMPLETION.pletion percentage for all completed and partially completed activities/events.6.Logic and duration revisions required by this section of the specifications.7.Activity/event duration and percent complete shall be updated independently.B.After completion of the joint review, the contractor shall generate an updated computer-produced calendar-dated schedule and supply the COTR’s representative with reports in accordance with the Article, COMPUTER PRODUCED SCHEDULES, specified.C.After completing the monthly schedule update, the Contractor’s representative or scheduling consultant shall rerun all current period contract change(s) against the prior approved monthly project schedule. The analysis shall only include original workday durations and schedule logic agreed upon by the contractor and COTR for the contract change(s). When there is a disagreement on logic and/or durations, the Contractor shall use the schedule logic and/or durations provided and approved by the COTR. After each rerun update, the resulting electronic project schedule data file shall be appropriately identified and submitted to the VA in accordance to the requirements listed in articles 1.4 and 1.7. This electronic submission is separate from the regular monthly project schedule update requirements and shall be submitted to the COTR within fourteen (14) calendar days of completing the regular schedule update. Before inserting the contract changes durations, care must be taken to ensure that only the original durations will be used for the analysis, not the reported durations after progress. In addition, once the final network diagram is approved, the contractor must recreate all manual progress payment updates on this approved network diagram and associated reruns for contract changes in each of these update periods as outlined above for regular update periods. This will require detailed record keeping for each of the manual progress payment updates.D.Following approval of the CPM schedule, the VA, the General Contractor, its approved CPM Consultant, Contracting Officer or her representative, and all subcontractors needed, as determined by the COTR, shall meet to discuss the monthly updated schedule. The main emphasis shall be to address work activities to avoid slippage of project schedule and to identify any necessary actions required to maintain project schedule during the reporting period. The Government representatives and the Contractor shall conclude the meeting with a clear understanding of those work and administrative actions necessary to maintain project schedule status during the reporting period. This schedule coordination meeting will occur after each monthly project schedule update meeting utilizing the resulting schedule reports from that schedule update. If the project is behind schedule, discussions should include ways to prevent further slippage as well as ways to improve the project schedule status, when appropriate.1.10 RESPONSIBILITY FOR COMPLETIONA.If it becomes apparent from the current revised monthly progress schedule that phasing or contract completion dates will not be met, the Contractor shall execute some or all of the following remedial actions: 1.Increase construction labor force in such quantities and crafts as necessary to eliminate the backlog of work.2.Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per working day, working days per week, the amount of construction equipment, or any combination of the foregoing to eliminate the backlog of work. 3.Reschedule the work in conformance with the specification requirements.B.Prior to proceeding with any of the above actions, the Contractor shall notify and obtain approval from the COTR for the proposed schedule changes. If such actions are approved, the representative schedule revisions shall be incorporated by the Contractor into the Project Schedule before the next update, at no additional cost to the Government.1.11 CHANGES TO the SCHEDULEA.Within 30 calendar days after VA acceptance and approval of any updated project schedule, the Contractor shall submit a revised electronic file(s) and a list of any activity/event changes including predecessors and successors for any of the following reasons:1.Delay in completion of any activity/event or group of activities/events, which may be involved with contract changes, strikes, unusual weather, and other delays will not relieve the Contractor from the requirements specified unless the conditions are shown on the CPM as the direct cause for delaying the project beyond the acceptable limits.2.Delays in submittals, or deliveries, or work stoppage are encountered which make rescheduling of the work necessary.3.The schedule does not represent the actual prosecution and progress of the project.4.When there is, or has been, a substantial revision to the activity/event costs regardless of the cause for these revisions.B.CPM revisions made under this paragraph which affect the previously approved computerproduced schedules for Government furnished equipment, vacating of areas by the VA Facility, contract phase(s) and sub phase(s), utilities furnished by the Government to the Contractor, or any other previously contracted item, shall be furnished in writing to the COTR for approval.C.COTR's approval for the revised project schedule and all relevant data is contingent upon compliance with all other paragraphs of this section and any other previous agreements by the Contracting Officer or the VA representative.D.The cost of revisions to the project schedule resulting from contract changes will be included in the proposal for changes in work as specified in FAR 52.243 – 4 (Changes) and VAAR 852.236 – 88 (Changes – Supplemental), and will be based on the complexity of the revision or contract change, labor hours expended in analyzing the change, and the total cost of the change. E.The cost of revisions to the Project Schedule not resulting from contract changes is the responsibility of the Contractor.1.12 ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT COMPLETIONA.The contract completion time will be adjusted only for causes specified in this contract. Request for an extension of the contract completion date by the Contractor shall be supported with a justification, CPM data and supporting evidence as the COTR may deem necessary for determination as to whether or not the Contractor is entitled to an extension of time under the provisions of the contract. Submission of proof based on revised activity/event logic, durations (in work days) and costs is obligatory to any approvals. The schedule must clearly display that the Contractor has used, in full, all the float time available for the work involved in this request. The COTR's determination as to the total number of days of contract extension will be based upon the current computerproduced calendardated schedule for the time period in question and all other relevant information.B.Actual delays in activities/events which, according to the computer produced calendardated schedule, do not affect the extended and predicted contract completion dates shown by the critical path in the network, will not be the basis for a change to the contract completion date. The COTR will within a reasonable time after receipt of such justification and supporting evidence, review the facts and advise the Contractor in writing of the COTR's decision.C.The Contractor shall submit each request for a change in the contract completion date to the Contracting Officer in accordance with the provisions specified under FAR 52.243 – 4 (Changes) and VAAR 852.236 – 88 (Changes – Supplemental). The Contractor shall include, as a part of each change order proposal, a sketch showing all CPM logic revisions, duration (in work days) changes, and cost changes, for work in question and its relationship to other activities on the approved network diagram.D.All delays due to non-work activities/events such as RFI’s, WEATHER, STRIKES, and similar non-work activities/events shall be analyzed on a month by month basis. E N D SECTION 01 33 23SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLESPART 1- GENERAL1.1 REFERENCED REQUIREMENTS:A.Refer to Articles titled SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR CONSTRUCTION (FAR 52.23621) and, SPECIAL NOTES (VAAR 852.236-91), in GENERAL CONDITIONS.B.For the purposes of this contract, samples including laboratory samples to be tested, test reports, certificates, and manufacturers' literature and data shall also be subject to the previously referenced requirements. The following text refers to all items collectively as SUBMITTALS.1.2 SUBMISSION AND PREPARATION REQUIREMENTSA.Submit for approval, all of the items specifically mentioned under the separate sections of the specification, with information sufficient to evidence full compliance with contract requirements. Materials, fabricated articles and the like to be installed in permanent work shall equal those of approved submittals. After an item has been approved, no change in brand or make will be permitted unless:1.Satisfactory written evidence is presented to, and approved by COTR, that manufacturer cannot make scheduled delivery of approved item or;2.Item delivered has been rejected and substitution of a suitable item is an urgent necessity or;3.Other conditions become apparent which indicates approval of such substitute item to be in best interest of the Government.B.Submittals will be reviewed for compliance with contract requirements by ArchitectEngineer, and action thereon will be taken by COTR.C.Submittal Preparation:1.Manufacturer’s literature shall be marked to identify products, features, standards, and other characteristics applicable to this project.2.Shop drawings shall be prepared specifically for this project. Contract Documents may not be used as shop drawings.3.Samples shall be actual material or product to be used and shall show full range of colors and textures that can be expected in finished product. Photographs or reproduction of colors and textures are not acceptable.1.3 TRANSMITTAL AND REVIEW TIMEForward submittals in sufficient time to permit proper consideration and approval action by Government. Time submission to assure adequate lead time for procurement of contract required items. Delays attributable to untimely and rejected submittals will not serve as a basis for extending contract time for completion.Allow a minimum of two weeks for review of each submittal. Allow an additional week for review of submittals that require review by more than one discipline.Reviews will be prioritized based on the schedule of submittals submitted by the Contractor.If large quantities of submittals are received by the Architect-Engineer in a short period of time, the review time will be increased. Submittals will be transmitted between Architect and Engineer and returned to Contractor by First Class mail. If faster deliveries are required by the Contractor, the Contractor shall provide the Architect-Engineer with an account number to charge the expedited delivery.Within two weeks of Notice to Proceed, Contractor shall submit a schedule for submittals. Schedule shall include the following information:Submittal identification including specification reference and product or material to be reviewed.Date that A/E will receive submittal.Date that Contractor must receive reviewed submittal in order to obtain product or material in a timely fashion.Review of submittals will not begin until submittals are complete. When coordination is required between multiple submittals, such as hollow metal, doors, and hardware, review will not begin until all related submittals have been received.1.4 IDENTIFICATION OF SUBMITTALSContractor will assign a file number to each submittal before sending to the Architect-Engineer or the Government. The number shall include the specification section number where the product or material is specified followed by a sequential number for that specification section. Each product or material submitted under a single specification section shall have a distinct number (e.g.: submittal for carpet and adhesive would be numbered 09 68 00-01 and 09 68 00-02 respectively.) Resubmittals shall be identified using the original submittal number followed by a resubmittal number.Contractor, in any subsequent correspondence, shall refer to this file and identification number to expedite replies relative to previously approved or disapproved submittals.1.5 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALSA.The Government reserves the right to require additional submittals, whether or not particularly mentioned in this contract. If additional submittals beyond those required by the contract are furnished pursuant to request therefor by COTR, adjustment in contract price and time will be made in accordance with Articles titled CHANGES (FAR 52.2434) and CHANGES SUPPLEMENT (VAAR 852.23688) of the GENERAL CONDITIONS.1.6 SCHEDULESA.Schedules called for in specifications and shown on shop drawings shall be submitted for use and information of Department of Veterans Affairs and ArchitectEngineer. However, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for coordinating and verifying schedules. The Contracting Officer and Architect Engineer assumes no responsibility for checking schedules or layout drawings for exact sizes, exact numbers and detailed positioning of items.1.7 QUANTITIESSubmittals must be submitted by Contractor only and shipped prepaid. Neither the Contracting Officer nor the Architect-Engineer assumes responsibility for checking quantities or exact numbers included in such submittals. Submit samples in quadruplicate unless otherwise specified. Submit shop drawings, schedules, manufacturers' literature and data, and certificates in quadruplicate, except where a greater number is specified.Submittals will receive consideration only when accompanied by a transmittal letter signed by Contractor and an identifying submittal number. Letter shall be contain the list of items each identified by its submittal number, name of Medical Center, name of Contractor, contract number, applicable specification paragraph numbers, applicable drawing numbers (and other information required for exact identification of location for each item), manufacturer and brand, ASTM or Federal Specification Number (if any) and such additional information as may be required by specifications for particular item being furnished. In addition, catalogs shall be marked to indicate specific items submitted for approval.A copy of letter must be enclosed with items, and any items received without identification letter will be considered "unclaimed goods" and held for a limited time only.Each sample, certificate, manufacturers' literature and data shall be labeled to indicate the name and location of the Medical Center, name of Contractor, manufacturer, brand, contract number and ASTM or Federal Specification Number as applicable and location(s) on project.Required certificates shall be signed by an authorized representative of manufacturer or supplier of material, and by Contractor. In addition to complying with the applicable requirements specified in preceding Article 1.7, samples which are required to have Laboratory Tests (those preceded by symbol "LT" under the separate sections of the specification shall be tested, at the expense of Contractor, in an independent commercial laboratory approved by Contracting Officer.Laboratory shall furnish COTR with a certificate stating that it is fully equipped and qualified to perform intended work, is fully acquainted with specification requirements and intended use of materials and is an independent establishment in no way connected with organization of Contractor or with manufacturer or supplier of materials to be tested.Certificates shall also set forth a list of comparable projects upon which laboratory have performed similar functions during past five years.Samples and laboratory tests shall be sent directly to approve commercial testing laboratory.Contractor shall send a copy of transmittal letter to both COTR and to ArchitectEngineer simultaneously with submission of material to a commercial testing laboratory.Laboratory test reports shall be sent directly to COTR and Architect-Engineer for appropriate action.Laboratory reports shall list contract specification test requirements and a comparative list of the laboratory test results. When tests show that the material meets specification requirements, the laboratory shall so certify on test report.Laboratory test reports shall also include a recommendation for approval or disapproval of tested item.If submittal samples have been disapproved, resubmit new samples as soon as possible after notification of disapproval. Such new samples shall be marked "Resubmitted Sample" in addition to containing other previously specified information required on label and in transmittal letter.Approved samples will be kept on file by the COTR at the site until completion of contract, at which time such samples will be delivered to Contractor as Contractor's property. Where noted in technical sections of specifications, approved samples in good condition may be used in their proper locations in contract work. At completion of contract, samples that are not approved will be returned to Contractor only upon request and at Contractor's expense. Such request should be made prior to completion of the contract. Disapproved samples that are not requested for return by Contractor will be discarded after completion of contract.Submittal drawings (shop, erection or setting drawings) and schedules, required for work of various trades, shall be checked before submission by technically qualified employees of Contractor for accuracy, completeness and compliance with contract requirements. These drawings and schedules shall be stamped and signed by Contractor certifying to such check. Submittals found by the Contractor not to be in compliance with the Contract Documents shall not be forwarded to the COTR or the Architect-Engineer.For each drawing required, submit four legible full size paper copies.Each drawing shall have marked thereon, proper descriptive title, including Medical Center location, project number, submittal number, manufacturer's number, reference to contract drawing number, detail Section Number, and Specification Section Number.A space 120 mm by 125 mm (43/4 by 5 inches) shall be reserved on each drawing to accommodate Architect-Engineer’s review stamp. Submittals requiring review by more than one discipline shall have space for each discipline’s stamp.Submit drawings, ROLLED WITHIN A MAILING TUBE, fully protected for shipment.One reproducible print of approved or disapproved shop drawings will be forwarded to Contractor.When work is directly related and involves more than one trade, shop drawings shall be submitted to ArchitectEngineer under one cover.1.8 DELIVERY INSTRUCTIONSSamples (except laboratory samples), shop drawings, test reports, certificates and manufacturers' literature and data, shall be submitted for approval to: Oudens Knoop Knoop + Sachs Architects 2 Wisconsin Circle, Suite 820 Chevy Chase, MD 20815B.At the time of transmittal to the Architect-Engineer, the Contractor shall also send a copy of the complete submittal directly to the COTR.1.9 ELECTRONIC FILES AND SUBMISSIONSArchitect-Engineer will accept submittals submitted in electronic format. Submittals shall be in PDF format and shall not require color printing.Submittals shall be designed to be printed on 216 x 279 mm (8?”x11”), 216 x 356 mm (8?”x14”), or 279 x 432 mm (11”x17”) paper.Submittals shall be clear and legible when printed on paper sizes stated above.Submittals received electronically will be returned electronically. Use of Architect-Engineer’s Electronic Files: Refer to Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, for terms and conditions of using the Architect-Engineer’s Electronic Files.PART 2- PRODUCTSNOT APPLICABLEPART 3 – eXECUTIONNOT APPLICABLE E N D SECTION 01 42 19REFERENCE STANDARDSPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies the availability and source of references and standards specified in the project manual under paragraphs APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS and/or shown on the drawings.1.2 AVAILABILITY OF SPECIFICATIONS LISTED IN THE GSA INDEX OF FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS AND COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS FPMR PART 101-29 (FAR?52.211-1) (AUG?1998)A.The GSA Index of Federal Specifications, Standards and Commercial Item Descriptions, FPMR Part 101-29 and copies of specifications, standards, and commercial item descriptions cited in the solicitation may be obtained for a fee by submitting a request to – GSA Federal Supply Service, Specifications Section, Suite 8100, 470 East L’Enfant Plaza, SW, Washington, DC 20407, Telephone (202) 619-8925, Facsimile (202) 619-8978.B.If the General Services Administration, Department of Agriculture, or Department of Veterans Affairs issued this solicitation, a single copy of specifications, standards, and commercial item descriptions cited in this solicitation may be obtained free of charge by submitting a request to the addressee in paragraph (a) of this provision. Additional copies will be issued for a fee.1.3 AVAILABILITY FOR EXAMINATION OF SPECIFICATIONS NOT LISTED IN THE GSA INDEX OF FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS AND COMMERCIAL ITEM descriptions (FAR?52.211-4) (JUN?1988)A.The specifications and standards cited in this solicitation can be examined at the following location:DEPARMENT OF VETERANS AFFAIRSOffice of Construction & Facilities ManagementFacilities Quality Service (00CFM1A)425 Eye Street N.W, (sixth floor)Washington, DC 20001Telephone Numbers: (202) 632-5249 or (202) 632-5178Between 9:00 AM - 3:00 PM1.4 AVAILABILITY OF SPECIFICATIONS NOT LISTED IN THE GSA INDEX OF FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS AND COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (FAR?52.211-3) (JUN?1988)A.The specifications cited in this solicitation may be obtained from the associations or organizations listed below.AAAluminum Association Inc. Air Balance Council Architectural Manufacturer's Association Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists Concrete Institute Diffusion Council General Contractors of America of Home Appliance Manufacturers Institute of Steel Construction Iron and Steel Institute Movement and Control Association, Inc. National Standards Institute, Inc. and Refrigeration Institute Society of Heating, Refrigerating, andAir-Conditioning Engineers Society of Mechanical Engineers Society of Sanitary Engineering Society for Testing and Materials Woodwork Institute Welding Society Water Works Association Hardware Manufacturers Association Institute of America Iron Soil Pipe Institute Link Fence Manufacturers Institute Plant Manufacturers Bureau Reinforcing Steel Institute and Hardware Institute Generating Systems Association Electric Institute Protection Agency Testing Laboratories, Inc. Forest Products Society Association of North America Mutual Insurance Association Services Administration Plywood & Veneer Association of Electrical and Electronics Engineers\NAAMMNational Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers Contractors Association Bureau of StandardsSee - NISTNBBPVINational Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors Electric CodeSee - NFPA National Fire Protection AssociationNEMANational Electrical Manufacturers Association Fire Protection Association Hardwood Lumber Association Institute of Health Institute of Standards and Technology Lumber Manufacturers Association, Inc. Particleboard Association18928 Premiere CourtGaithersburg, MD 20879(301) 670-0604NSFNational Sanitation Foundation and Door Manufacturers Association Safety and Health AdministrationDepartment of Labor Cement Association Plastic Pipe Institute Resilient Floor Covering Institute Manufacturers Association, Inc. Door Institute Glass Manufacturers Alliance Metal and Air-Conditioning ContractorsNational Association, Inc. Council of America, Inc. Uniform Building CodeSee ICBOULUnderwriters' Laboratories Incorporated' Laboratories of Canada - - E N D - - -SECTION 01 45 29TESTING LABORATORY SERVICESPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTION:A.This section specifies materials testing activities and inspection services required during project construction to be provided by an independent Testing Laboratory retained and paid for by Contractor.1.2 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification as applicable to the testing procedures required.B.American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):T27-06Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse AggregatesT96-02 (R2006)Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles MachineT99-01 (R2004)The Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 2.5 Kg (5.5 lb.) Rammer and a 305 mm (12 in.) DropT104-99 (R2003)Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium SulfateT180-01 (R2004)Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 4.54 kg (10 lb.) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) DropT191-02(R2006)Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand-Cone MethodC.American Concrete Institute (ACI):506.4R-94 (R2004)Guide for the Evaluation of ShotcreteD.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A325-06Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile StrengthA370-07Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel ProductsA416/A416M-06Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed ConcreteA490-06Heat Treated Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile StrengthC31/C31M-06Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the FieldC33-03Concrete AggregatesC39/C39M-05Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete SpecimensC109/C109M-05Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement MortarsC138-07Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of ConcreteC140-07Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related UnitsC143/C143M-05Slump of Hydraulic Cement ConcreteC172-07Sampling Freshly Mixed ConcreteC173-07Air Content of freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric MethodC330-05Lightweight Aggregates for Structural ConcreteC567-05Density Structural Lightweight ConcreteC780-07Pre-construction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit MasonryC1019-08Sampling and Testing GroutC1064/C1064M-05Freshly Mixed Portland Cement ConcreteC1077-06Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory EvaluationC1314-07Compressive Strength of Masonry PrismsD698-07Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard EffortD1143-07Piles Under Static Axial Compressive LoadD1188-07Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Paraffin-Coated SpecimensD1556-07Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone MethodD1557-07Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified EffortD2166-06Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive SoilD2167-94(R2001)Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon MethodD2216-05Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by MassD2922-05Density of soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)D2974-07Moisture, Ash, and Organic Matter of Peat and Other Organic SoilsD3666-(2002)Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspection Bituminous Paving MaterialsD3740-07Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Material E94-04Radiographic TestingE164-03Ultrasonic Contact Examination of WeldmentsE329-07Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or TestingE543-06Agencies Performing Non-Destructive TestingE605-93(R2006)Thickness and Density of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material (SFRM) Applied to Structural MembersE709-(2001)Guide for Magnetic Particle ExaminationE1155-96(R2008)Determining FF Floor Flatness and FL Floor Levelness NumbersE.American Welding Society (AWS):D1.1-07Structural Welding Code-Steel1.3 REQUIREMENTS:A.Accreditation Requirements: Construction materials testing laboratories must be accredited by a laboratory accreditation authority and will be required to submit a copy of the Certificate of Accreditation and Scope of Accreditation. The laboratory’s scope of accreditation must include the appropriate ASTM standards (i.e.; E 329, C 1077, D 3666, D3740, A 880, E 543) listed in the technical sections of the specifications. Laboratories engaged in Hazardous Materials Testing shall meet the requirements of OSHA and EPA. The policy applies to the specific laboratory performing the actual testing, not just the “Corporate Office.”B.Inspection and Testing: Testing laboratory shall inspect materials and workmanship and perform tests described herein and additional tests requested by Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR). When it appears materials furnished, or work performed by Contractor fails to meet construction contract requirements, Testing Laboratory shall direct attention of COTR to such failure.C.Written Reports: Testing laboratory shall submit test reports to COTR, Contractor, unless other arrangements are agreed to in writing by the COTR. Submit reports of tests that fail to meet construction contract requirements on colored paper.D.Verbal Reports: Give verbal notification to COTR immediately of any irregularity.PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)PART 3 EXECUTION3.1 Testing requirements:A.Refer to applicable technical section of this Project Manual for specific testing requirements. E N D SECTION 01 57 19TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLSPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies the control of environmental pollution and damage that the Contractor must consider for air, water, and land resources. It includes management of visual aesthetics, noise, solid waste, radiant energy, and radioactive materials, as well as other pollutants and resources encountered or generated by the Contractor. The Contractor is obligated to consider specified control measures with the costs included within the various contract items of work.B.Environmental pollution and damage is defined as the presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents which:1.Adversely effect human health or welfare,2.Unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human life,3.Effect other species of importance to humankind, or;4.Degrade the utility of the environment for aesthetic, cultural, and historical purposes.C.Definitions of Pollutants: 1.Chemical Waste: Petroleum products, bituminous materials, salts, acids, alkalis, herbicides, pesticides, organic chemicals, and inorganic wastes. 2.Debris: Combustible and noncombustible wastes, such as leaves, tree trimmings, ashes, and waste materials resulting from construction or maintenance and repair work. 3.Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by runoff water.4.Solid Waste: Rubbish, debris, garbage, and other discarded solid materials resulting from industrial, commercial, and agricultural operations and from community activities.5.Surface Discharge: The term "Surface Discharge" implies that the water is discharged with possible sheeting action and subsequent soil erosion may occur. Waters that are surface discharged may terminate in drainage ditches, storm sewers, creeks, and/or "water of the United States" and would require a permit to discharge water from the governing agency.6.Rubbish: Combustible and noncombustible wastes such as paper, boxes, glass and crockery, metal and lumber scrap, tin cans, and bones.7.Sanitary Wastes: a.Sewage: Domestic sanitary sewage and human and animal waste. b.Garbage: Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking, dispensing, and consumption of food.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL A.Establish and maintain quality control for the environmental protection of all items set forth herein.B.Record on daily reports any problems in complying with laws, regulations, and ordinances. Note any corrective action taken.1.3 referencesA.The publication listed below forms a part of this specification.B.U.S. National Archives and Records Administration (NARA):33 CFR 328Definitions1.4 SUBMITTALSA.In accordance with Section, 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, furnish the following: 1.Environmental Protection Plan: After the contract is awarded and prior to the commencement of the work, the Contractor shall meet with the Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR) to discuss the proposed Environmental Protection Plan and to develop mutual understanding relative to details of environmental protection. Not more than 20 days after the meeting, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the COTR for approval, a written and/or graphic Environmental Protection Plan including, but not limited to, the following:a.Name(s) of person(s) within the Contractor's organization who is (are) responsible for ensuring adherence to the Environmental Protection Plan.b.Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for manifesting hazardous waste to be removed from the site.c.Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for training the Contractor's environmental protection personnel.d.Description of the Contractor's environmental protection personnel training program.e.A list of Federal, State, and local laws, regulations, and permits concerning environmental protection, pollution control, noise control and abatement that are applicable to the Contractor's proposed operations and the requirements imposed by those laws, regulations, and permits.f.Methods for protection of features to be preserved within authorized work areas including trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, ground cover, landscape features, air and water quality, fish and wildlife, soil, historical, and archeological and cultural resources.g.Procedures to provide the environmental protection that comply with the applicable laws and regulations. Describe the procedures to correct pollution of the environment due to accident, natural causes, or failure to follow the procedures as described in the Environmental Protection Plan.h.Permits, licenses, and the location of the solid waste disposal area.i.Drawings showing locations of any proposed temporary excavations or embankments for material storage areas, structures, sanitary facilities, and stockpiles of excess or spoil materials. Include as part of an Erosion Control Plan approved by the District Office of the U.S. Soil Conservation Service and the Department of Veterans Affairs if required.j.Environmental Monitoring Plans for the job site including land, water, air, and noise.k.Work Area Plan showing the proposed activity in each portion of the area and identifying the areas of limited use or nonuse. Plan should include measures for marking the limits of use areas. This plan may be incorporated within the Erosion Control Plan. B.Approval of the Contractor's Environmental Protection Plan will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for adequate and continued control of pollutants and other environmental protection measures. 1.5 PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCESA.Protect environmental resources within the project boundaries and those affected outside the limits of permanent work during the entire period of this contract. Confine activities to areas defined by the specifications and drawings.B.Protection of Land Resources: Prior to construction, identify all land resources to be preserved within the work area. Do not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy land resources including trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, top soil, and land forms without permission from the COTR. Do not fasten or attach ropes, cables, or guys to trees for anchorage unless specifically authorized, or where special emergency use is permitted.1.Work Area Limits: Prior to any construction, mark the areas that require work to be performed under this contract. Mark or fence isolated areas within the general work area that are to be saved and protected. Protect monuments, works of art, and markers before construction operations begin. Convey to all personnel the purpose of marking and protecting all necessary objects.2.Protection of Landscape: Protect trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, land forms, and other landscape features shown on the drawings to be preserved by marking, fencing, or using any other approved techniques.a.Box and protect from damage existing trees and shrubs to remain on the construction site.b.Immediately repair all damage to existing trees and shrubs by trimming, cleaning, and painting with antiseptic tree paint. c.Do not store building materials or perform construction activities closer to existing trees or shrubs than the farthest extension of their limbs.3.Temporary Protection of Disturbed Areas: Construct diversion ditches, benches, and berms to retard and divert runoff from the construction site to protected drainage areas approved under paragraph 208 of the Clean Water Act.a.Sediment Basins: Trap sediment from construction areas in temporary or permanent sediment basins that accommodate the runoff of a local 50 (design year) storm. After each storm, pump the basins dry and remove the accumulated sediment. Control overflow/drainage with paved weirs or by vertical overflow pipes, draining from the surface.b.Reuse or conserve the collected topsoil sediment as directed by the COTR. c.Institute effluent quality monitoring programs as required by Federal, State, and local environmental agencies.5.Erosion and Sedimentation Control Devices: The erosion and sediment controls selected and maintained by the Contractor shall be such that water quality standards are not violated as a result of the Contractor's activities. Construct or install temporary erosion and sedimentation control features. Maintain temporary erosion and sediment control measures such as berms, dikes, drains, sedimentation basins, grassing, and mulching, until permanent site work is completed and operative.6.Protect adjacent areas from despoilment by temporary excavations and embankments.7.Handle and dispose of solid wastes in such a manner that will prevent contamination of the environment. Place solid wastes (excluding clearing debris) in containers that are emptied on a regular schedule. Transport all solid waste off Government property and dispose of waste in compliance with Federal, State, and local requirements.8.Store chemical waste away from the work areas in corrosion resistant containers and dispose of waste in accordance with Federal, State, and local regulations.9.Handle discarded materials other than those included in the solid waste category as directed by the COTR.C.Protection of Water Resources: Keep construction activities under surveillance, management, and control to avoid pollution of surface and ground waters and sewer systems. Implement management techniques to control water pollution by the listed construction activities that are included in this contract.1.Washing and Curing Water: Do not allow wastewater directly derived from construction activities to enter water areas. Collect and place wastewater in retention ponds allowing the suspended material to settle, the pollutants to separate, or the water to evaporate. 2.Control movement of materials and equipment at stream crossings during construction to prevent violation of water pollution control standards of the Federal, State, or local government. 3.Monitor water areas affected by construction. D.Protection of Fish and Wildlife Resources: Keep construction activities under surveillance, management, and control to minimize interference with, disturbance of, or damage to fish and wildlife. Prior to beginning construction operations, list species that require specific attention along with measures for their protection. E.Protection of Air Resources: Keep construction activities under surveillance, management, and control to minimize pollution of air resources. Burning is not permitted on the job site. Keep activities, equipment, processes, and work operated or performed, in strict accordance with the State of West Virginia Department of Environmental Protection and Federal emission and performance laws and standards. Maintain ambient air quality standards set by the Environmental Protection Agency, for those construction operations and activities specified.1.Particulates: Control dust particles, aerosols, and gaseous by-products from all construction activities, processing, and preparation of materials at all times, including weekends, holidays, and hours when work is not in progress.2.Particulates Control: Maintain all excavations, stockpiles, haul roads, permanent and temporary access roads, plant sites, spoil areas, borrow areas, and all other work areas within or outside the project boundaries free from particulates which would cause a hazard or a nuisance. Sprinklering, chemical treatment of an approved type, light bituminous treatment, baghouse, scrubbers, electrostatic precipitators, or other methods are permitted to control particulates in the work area.3.Hydrocarbons and Carbon Monoxide: Control monoxide emissions from equipment to Federal and State allowable limits.4.Odors: Control odors of construction activities and prevent obnoxious odors from occurring.F.Reduction of Noise: Minimize noise using every action possible. Perform noise-producing work in less sensitive hours of the day or week as directed by the COTR. Maintain noise-produced work at or below the decibel levels and within the time periods specified. 1.Perform construction activities involving repetitive, high-level impact noise only between 7:00a.m. and 6:00p.m unless otherwise permitted by local ordinance or the COTR. Repetitive impact noise on the property shall not exceed the following dB limitations: Time Duration of Impact NoiseSound Level in dB More than 12 minutes in any hour70 Less than 30 seconds of any hour85 Less than three minutes of any hour80 Less than 12 minutes of any hour75 2.Provide sounddeadening devices on equipment and take noise abatement measures that are necessary to comply with the requirements of this contract, consisting of, but not limited to, the following: a.Maintain maximum permissible construction equipment noise levels at 15 m (50 feet) (dBA):EARTHMOVINGMATERIALS HANDLINGFRONT LOADERS75CONCRETE MIXERS75BACKHOES75VIBRATORS75SCAPERS80TRUCKS75COMPRESSORS75b.Use shields or other physical barriers to restrict noise transmission. c.Provide soundproof housings or enclosures for noiseproducing machinery. d.Use efficient silencers on equipment air intakes.e.Use efficient intake and exhaust mufflers on internal combustion engines that are maintained so equipment performs below noise levels specified. f.Line hoppers and storage bins with sound deadening material.g.Conduct truck loading, unloading, and hauling operations so that noise is kept to a minimum. G.Restoration of Damaged Property: If any direct or indirect damage is done to public or private property resulting from any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct, the Contractor shall restore the damaged property to a condition equal to that existing before the damage at no additional cost to the Government. Repair, rebuild, or restore property as directed or make good such damage in an acceptable manner.H.Final Cleanup: On completion of project and after removal of all debris, rubbish, and temporary construction, Contractor shall leave the construction area in a clean condition satisfactory to the COTR. Cleaning shall include off the station disposal of all items and materials not required to be salvaged, as well as all debris and rubbish resulting from demolition and new work operations. E N D SECTION 01 58 16TEMPORARY INTERIOR SIGNAGEPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies temporary interior signs.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 TEMPORARY SIGNSA.Fabricate from 50 Kg (110 pound) or heavier matte finish white paper.B.Signs shall not be less than 100 mm (4-inch) wide by 300 mm (12 inch) long. Signs shall comply with applicable requirements of the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA), including requirements for tactile messages.C.Mount temporary signs where they are readily visible.D.Temporary exit signs shall be illuminated with either rechargeable batteries or the building emergency power system.E.Signs that will be in place for more than 24 hours shall be printed by computer. Strokes shall be approximately 3 mm (1/8 inch) wide. Tactile signs may be Braille or have raised letters..PART 3 EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Install temporary signs attached so that they are securely fastened to wall, door, or pendant.B.Install temporary signs to identify room function and room number.3.2 LOCATIONA.Install exit signs so that the egress path is clearly marked.B.Install temporary signs to identify room function and room number.C.Install directional signs to guide occupants to destinations.D.Doors that do not require signs are as follows:1.Corridor barrier doors (cross-corridor) in corridor with same number.2.Folding doors or partitions.3.Toilet or bathroom doors within and between rooms.municating doors in partitions between rooms with corridor entrance doors.5.Closet doors within rooms.E.Replace signs that have been removed, lost, damaged, or have become illegible.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 01 74 19CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENTPART 1 – GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies the requirements for the management of non-hazardous building construction and demolition waste.B.Waste disposal in landfills shall be minimized to the greatest extent possible. Of the inevitable waste that is generated, as much of the waste material as economically feasible shall be salvaged, recycled or reused.C.Contractor shall use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators, and facilitate their salvage and recycling by implementing, at a minimum, the procedures described below.1.Waste Management Plan development and implementation.2.Techniques to minimize waste generation.3.Sorting and separating of waste materials.4.Salvage of existing materials and items for reuse or resale.5.Recycling of materials that cannot be reused or sold.D.At a minimum the following waste categories shall be diverted from landfills:1.Soil.2.Inerts (e.g., concrete, masonry and asphalt).3.Clean dimensional wood and palette wood.4.Green waste (biodegradable landscaping materials).5.Engineered wood products (plywood, particle board and I-joists, etc).6.Metal products (eg, steel, wire, beverage containers, copper, etc).7.Cardboard, paper and packaging.8.Bitumen roofing materials.9.Plastics (e.g., ABS, PVC).10.Carpet and/or pad.11.Gypsum board.12.Insulation.13.Paint.14.Fluorescent lamps.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Section 02 41 00, DEMOLITION.B.Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.C.Section 01 57 19, TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.D.Lead Paint: Section 02 83 33.13, LEAD BASED PAINT REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Contractor shall practice efficient waste management when sizing, cutting and installing building products. Processes shall be employed to ensure the generation of as little waste as possible. Construction /Demolition waste includes products of the following:1.Excess or unusable construction materials.2.Packaging used for construction products.3.Poor planning and/or layout.4.Construction error.5.Over ordering.6.Weather damage.7.Contamination.8.Mishandling.9.Breakage.B.Establish and maintain the management of non-hazardous building construction and demolition waste set forth herein. Conduct a site assessment to estimate the types of materials that will be generated by demolition and construction.C.Contractor shall develop and implement procedures to reuse and recycle new materials to a minimum of 50 percent.D.Contractor shall be responsible for implementation of any special programs involving rebates or similar incentives related to recycling. Any revenues or savings obtained from salvage or recycling shall accrue to the contractor.E.Contractor shall provide all demolition, removal and legal disposal of materials. Contractor shall ensure that facilities used for recycling, reuse and disposal shall be permitted for the intended use to the extent required by local, state, federal regulations. The Whole Building Design Guide website HYPERLINK "" provides a Construction Waste Management Database that contains information on companies that haul, collect, and process recyclable debris from construction projects.F.Contractor shall assign a specific area to facilitate separation of materials for reuse, salvage, recycling, and return. Such areas are to be kept neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination or mixing of materials.G.Contractor shall provide on-site instructions and supervision of separation, handling, salvaging, recycling, reuse and return methods to be used by all parties during waste generating stages.H.Record on daily reports any problems in complying with laws, regulations and ordinances with corrective action taken.1.4 TERMINOLOGY A.Class III Landfill: A landfill that accepts non-hazardous resources such as household, commercial and industrial waste resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations. B.Clean: Untreated and unpainted; uncontaminated with adhesives, oils, solvents, mastics and like products.C.Construction and Demolition Waste: Includes all non-hazardous resources resulting from construction, remodeling, alterations, repair and demolition operations.D.Dismantle: The process of parting out a building in such a way as to preserve the usefulness of its materials and components.E.Disposal: Acceptance of solid wastes at a legally operating facility for the purpose of land filling (includes Class III landfills and inert fills).F.Inert Backfill Site: A location, other than inert fill or other disposal facility, to which inert materials are taken for the purpose of filling an excavation, shoring or other soil engineering operation.G.Inert Fill: A facility that can legally accept inert waste, such as asphalt and concrete exclusively for the purpose of disposal.H.Inert Solids/Inert Waste: Non-liquid solid resources including, but not limited to, soil and concrete that does not contain hazardous waste or soluble pollutants at concentrations in excess of water-quality objectives established by a regional water board, and does not contain significant quantities of decomposable solid resources.I.Mixed Debris: Loads that include commingled recyclable and non-recyclable materials generated at the construction site.J.Mixed Debris Recycling Facility: A solid resource processing facility that accepts loads of mixed construction and demolition debris for the purpose of recovering re-usable and recyclable materials and disposing non-recyclable materials.K.Permitted Waste Hauler: A company that holds a valid permit to collect and transport solid wastes from individuals or businesses for the purpose of recycling or disposal.L.Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating, and reconstituting materials for the purpose of using the altered form in the manufacture of a new product. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating or thermally destroying solid waste.1.On-site Recycling – Materials that are sorted and processed on site for use in an altered state in the work, i.e. concrete crushed for use as a sub-base in paving.2.Off-site Recycling – Materials hauled to a location and used in an altered form in the manufacture of new products.M.Recycling Facility: An operation that can legally accept materials for the purpose of processing the materials into an altered form for the manufacture of new products. Depending on the types of materials accepted and operating procedures, a recycling facility may or may not be required to have a solid waste facilities permit or be regulated by the local enforcement agency.N.Reuse: Materials that are recovered for use in the same form, on-site or off-site.O.Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit.P.Salvage: To remove waste materials from the site for resale or re-use by a third party.Q.Source-Separated Materials: Materials that are sorted by type at the site for the purpose of reuse and recycling.R.Solid Waste: Materials that have been designated as non-recyclable and are discarded for the purposes of disposal.S.Transfer Station: A facility that can legally accept solid waste for the purpose of temporarily storing the materials for re-loading onto other trucks and transporting them to a landfill for disposal, or recovering some materials for re-use or recycling.1.5 SUBMITTALS A.In accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES, furnish the following:B.Prepare and submit to the Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR) a written demolition debris management plan. The plan shall include, but not be limited to, the following information:1.Procedures to be used for debris management.2.Techniques to be used to minimize waste generation.3.Analysis of the estimated job site waste to be generated:a.List of each material and quantity to be salvaged, reused, or recycled.b.List of each material and quantity proposed to be taken to a landfill.4.Detailed description of the Means/Methods to be used for material handling. a.On site: Material separation, storage, protection where applicable.b.Off site: Transportation means and destination. Include list of materials.1)Description of materials to be site-separated and self-hauled to designated facilities.2)Description of mixed materials to be collected by designated waste haulers and removed from the site.c.The names and locations of mixed debris reuse and recycling facilities or sites.d.The names and locations of trash disposal landfill facilities or sites.e.Documentation that the facilities or sites are approved to receive the materials.C.Designated Manager responsible for instructing personnel, supervising, documenting and administering over meetings relevant to the Waste Management Plan.D.Monthly summary of construction and demolition debris diversion and disposal, quantifying all materials generated at the work site and disposed of or diverted from disposal through recycling.1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSAPublications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced by the basic designation only. In the event that criteria requirements conflict, the most stringent requirements shall be met.1.U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC): Green Building Certification Institute Rating System for New Construction.2.Green Guide For Health Care (GGHC).1.7 RECORDSA.Maintain records to document the quantity of waste generated; the quantity of waste diverted through sale, reuse, or recycling; and the quantity of waste disposed by landfill or incineration. Records shall be kept in accordance with the LEED Reference Guide and LEED Template. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALSA.List of each material and quantity to be salvaged, recycled, or reused.B.List of each material and quantity proposed to be taken to a landfill.C.Material tracking data: Receiving parties, dates removed, transportation costs, weight tickets, tipping fees, manifests, invoices, net total costs or savings.PART 3 EXECUTION3.1 COLLECTIONA.Provide all necessary containers, bins and storage areas to facilitate effective waste management.B.Clearly identify containers, bins and storage areas so that recyclable materials are separated from trash and can be transported to respective recycling facility for processing.C.Hazardous wastes shall be separated, stored, disposed of according to local, state, federal regulations.3.2 DISPOSAL A.Contractor shall be responsible for transporting and disposing of materials that cannot be delivered to a source-separated or mixed materials recycling facility to a transfer station or disposal facility that can accept the materials in accordance with state and federal regulations.B.Construction or demolition materials with no practical reuse or that cannot be salvaged or recycled shall be disposed of at a landfill or incinerator.3.3 REPORT A.With each application for progress payment, submit a summary of construction and demolition debris diversion and disposal including beginning and ending dates of period covered.B.Quantify all materials diverted from landfill disposal through salvage or recycling during the period with the receiving parties, dates removed, transportation costs, weight tickets, manifests, invoices. Include the net total costs or savings for each salvaged or recycled material.C.Quantify all materials disposed of during the period with the receiving parties, dates removed, transportation costs, weight tickets, tipping fees, manifests, and invoices. Include the net total costs for each disposal.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 01 81 11SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTSPART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.This Section describes general requirements and procedures to comply with the Guiding Principles for Leadership in High Performance and Sustainable Buildings Memorandum of Understanding incorporated in the Executive Orders 13423 and 13514; Energy Policy Act of 2005 (EPA 2005) and the Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007 (EISA 2007). 1.2 OBJECTIVES A.To obtain acceptable Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) for the completed project and minimize the environmental impacts of the construction and operation, the Contractor during the construction phase of this project shall implement the following procedures: 1.Select products that minimize consumption of non-renewable resources, consume reduced amounts of energy and minimize amounts of pollution to produce, and employ recycled and/or recyclable materials. It is the intent of this project to conform to EPA’s Five Guiding Principles on environmentally preferable purchasing. The five principles are: a.Include environmental considerations as part of the normal purchasing process. b.Emphasize pollution prevention early in the purchasing process. c.Examine multiple environmental attributes throughout a product’s or service’s life cycle. pare relevant environmental impacts when selecting products and services. e.Collect and base purchasing decisions on accurate and meaningful information about environmental performance. 2.Control sources for potential IAQ pollutants by controlled selection of materials and processes used in project construction in order to attain superior IAQ. 3.Products and processes that achieve the above objectives to the extent currently possible and practical have been selected and included in these Construction Documents. The Contractor is responsible to maintain and support these objectives in developing means and methods for performing the work of this Contract and in proposing product substitutions and/or changes to specified processes. 4.Use building practices that insure construction debris and particulates do not contaminate or enter duct work prior to system startup and turn over. 1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Section 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANANGEMENT 1.4 DEFINITIONS A.Agrifiber Products: Composite panel products derived from agricultural fiber B.Biobased Product: As defined in the 2002 Farm Bill, a product determined by the Secretary to be a commercial or industrial product (other than food or feed) that is composed, in whole or in significant part, of biological products or renewable domestic agricultural materials (including plant, animal, and marine materials) or forestry materials C.Biobased Content: The weight of the biobased material divided by the total weight of the product and expressed as a percentage by weight D.Certificates of Chain-of-Custody: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that wood used to make products has been tracked through its extraction and fabrication to ensure that is was obtained from forests certified by a specified certification program posite Wood: A product consisting of wood fiber or other plant particles bonded together by a resin or binder F.Construction and Demolition Waste: Includes solid wastes, such as building materials, packaging, rubbish, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations. A construction waste management plan is to be provided by the Contractor as defined in Section 01 74 19. G.Third Party Certification: Certification of levels of environmental achievement by nationally recognized sustainability rating system.H.Light Pollution: Light that extends beyond its source such that the additional light is wasted in an unwanted area or in an area where it inhibits view of the night sky I.Recycled Content Materials: Products that contain pre-consumer or post-consumer materials as all or part of their feedstock J.Post-Consumer Recycled Content: The percentage by weight of constituent materials that have been recovered or otherwise diverted from the solid-waste stream after consumer use K.Pre-Consumer Recycled Content: Materials that have been recovered or otherwise diverted from the solid-waste stream during the manufacturing process. Pre-consumer content must be material that would not have otherwise entered the waste stream as per Section 5 of the FTC Act, Part 260 “Guidelines for the Use of Environmental Marketing Claims”: bcp/grnrule/guides980427 L.Regional Materials: Materials that are extracted, harvested, recovered, and manufactured within a radius of 250 miles (400 km) from the Project site M.Salvaged or Reused Materials: Materials extracted from existing buildings in order to be reused in other buildings without being manufactured N.Sealant: Any material that fills and seals gaps between other materials O.Type 1 Finishes: Materials and finishes which have a potential for short-term levels of off gassing from chemicals inherent in their manufacturing process, or which are applied in a form requiring vehicles or carriers for spreading which release a high level of particulate matter in the process of installation and/or curing. P.Type 2 Finishes: “Fuzzy" materials and finishes which are woven, fibrous, or porous in nature and tend to adsorb chemicals offgas.Q.Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs): Any compound of carbon, excluding carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, carbonic acid, metallic carbides or carbonates, and ammonium carbonate, which participates in atmospheric photochemical reactions. Compounds that have negligible photochemical reactivity, listed in EPA 40 CFR 51.100(s), are also excluded from this regulatory definition. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A.Sustainable Design Submittals: 1.Alternative Transportation: Provide manufacturer’s cut sheets for all bike racks installed on site, including the total number of bicycle storage slots provided. Also, provide manufacturer’s cut sheets for any alternative-fuel refueling stations installed on site, including fueling capacity information for an 8-hour period. 2.Heat Island Effect: a.Roofing Materials: Submittals for roofing materials must include manufacturer’s cut sheets or product data highlighting the Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) of the material.3.Water Conserving Fixtures: Submittals must include manufacturer’s cut sheets for all water-consuming plumbing fixtures and fittings (toilets, urinals, faucets, showerheads, etc.) highlighting maximum flow rates and/or flush rates. Include cut sheets for any automatic faucet-control devices. 4.Elimination of CFCs AND HCFCs: Provide manufacturer’s cut sheets for all cooling equipment with manufacturer’s product data, highlighting refrigerants; provide manufacturer’s cut sheets for all fire-suppression equipment, highlighting fire-suppression agents; provide manufacturer’s cut-sheets for all polystyrene insulation (XPS) and closed-cell spray foam polyurethane insulation, highlighting the blowing agent(s). 5.Appliances and Equipment: Provide copies of manufacturer’s product data for all Energy Star eligible equipment and appliances (excluding HVAC and lighting components), verifying compliance with EPA’s Energy Star program. 6.On-Site Renewable Energy Systems: Provide cut sheets and manufacturer’s product data for all on-site renewable energy generating components and equipment, including documentation of output capacity. 7.Measurement and Verification Systems: Provide cut sheets and manufacturer’s product data for all controls systems, highlighting electrical metering and trending capability components. 8.Salvaged or Reused Materials: Provide documentation that lists each salvaged or reused material, the source or vendor of the material, the purchase price, and the replacement cost if greater than the purchase price. 9.Recycled Content: Submittals for all materials with recycled content (excluding MEP systems equipment and components) must include the following documentation: Cost of each material or product, excluding cost of labor and equipment for installation. Manufacturer’s product data, product literature, or a letter from the manufacturer verifying the percentage of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content (by weight) of each material or product. An electronic spreadsheet that tabulates the Project’s total materials cost and combined recycled content value (defined as the sum of the post-consumer recycled content value plus one-half of the pre-consumer recycled content value) expressed as a percentage of total materials cost. This spreadsheet shall be submitted every third month with the Contractor’s Certificate and Application for Payment. It should indicate, on an ongoing basis, line items for each material, including cost, pre-consumer recycled content, post-consumer recycled content, and combined recycled content value. 10.Regional Materials: Submittals for all products or materials expected to contribute to the regional calculation (excluding MEP systems equipment and components) must include the following documentation:a.Cost of each material or product, excluding cost of labor and equipment for installation b.Location of product manufacture and distance from point of manufacture to the Project Site c.Location of point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material in each product and distance from the point of extraction, harvest, or recovery to the Project Site d.Manufacturer’s product data, product literature, or a letter from the manufacturer verifying the location and distance from the Project Site to the point of manufacture for each regional material e.Manufacturer’s product data, product literature, or a letter from the manufacturer verifying the location and distance from the Project Site to the point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each regional material or product, including, at a minimum, gravel and fill, planting materials, concrete, masonry, and GWB f.An electronic spreadsheet that tabulates the Project’s total materials cost and regional materials value, expressed as a percentage of total materials cost. This spreadsheet shall be submitted every third month with the Contractor’s Certificate and Application for Payment. It should indicate on an ongoing basis, line items for each material, including cost, location of manufacture, distance from manufacturing plant to the Project Site, location of raw material extraction, and distance from extraction point to the Project Site. 11.Biobased Products: a.Rapidly Renewable Products: Submittals must include written documentation from the manufacturer declaring that rapidly renewable materials are made from plants harvested within a ten-year or shorter cycle and must indicate the percentage (by weight) of these rapidly renewable components contained in the candidate products, along with the costs of each of these materials, excluding labor and delivery costs. b.Certified Wood: Submittals for all wood-based materials must include a statement indicating the cost of each product containing FSC Certified wood, exclusive of labor and delivery costs, and third party verification of certification from one of the following: 1)Documentation from the supplier verifying that 100% of the wood-based content originates from SFI third-party certified forest lands, identifying the company or companies that performed the SFI third-party certification for both the forest land management and the certified product content. 12.Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring: Provide manufacturer’s cut sheets highlighting the installed carbon dioxide monitoring system components and sequence of controls shop drawing documentation, including CO2 differential set-points and alarm capabilities. 13.Interior Adhesives and Sealants: Submittals for all field-applied adhesives and sealants, which have a potential impact on indoor air, must include manufacturer’s MSDSs or other Product Data highlighting VOC content. a.Provide manufacturers’ documentation verifying all adhesives used to apply laminates, whether shop-applied or field-applied, contain no urea-formaldehyde. 14.Interior Paints and Coatings: Submittals for all field-applied paints and coatings, which have a potential impact on indoor air, must include manufacturer’s MSDSs or other Product Data highlighting VOC content 15.Exterior Paints and Coatings: Submittals for all field-applied paints and coatings, which have a potential impact on ambient air quality, must include manufacturer’s MSDSs or other manufacturer’s Product Data highlighting VOC content. 16.Floorcoverings: a.Carpet Systems: Submittals for all carpet must include the following: 1)A copy of an assessment from the Building for Environmental and Economic Sustainability (BEES) software model, either Version 3.0 or 4.0, with parameters of the model set as described by this specification section. 2)Manufacturer’s product data verifying that all carpet systems meet or exceed the testing and product requirements of the Carpet and Rug Institute Green Label Plus program. 17.Air Filtration: Provide manufacturer’s cut sheets and product data highlighting the following: a.Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) for filtration media in all air handling units (AHUs) per ASHRAE HVAC Design Manual for Hospitals and Clinics.b.Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) for filtration media installed at return air grilles during construction if permanently installed AHUs are used during construction. See above for requirements18.Gypsum Wall Board: Provide manufacturer’s cut sheets or product data verifying that all gypsum wallboard products are moisture and mold-resistant. 19.Fiberglass Insulation: Provide manufacturer’s cut sheets or product data verifying that fiberglass batt insulation contains no urea-formaldehyde. B.Project Materials Cost Data: Provide a spreadsheet in an electronic file indicating the total cost for the Project and the total cost of building materials used for the Project, as follows: 1.Not more than 60 days after the Preconstruction Meeting, the General Contractor shall provide to the Owner and Architect a preliminary schedule of materials costs for all materials used for the Project organized by specification section. Exclude labor costs and all mechanical, electrical, and plumbing (MEP) systems materials and labor costs. Include the following: a.Identify each reused or salvaged material, its cost, and its replacement value. b.Identify each recycled-content material, its post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content as a percentage the product’s weight, its cost, its combined recycled content value (defined as the sum of the post-consumer recycled content value plus one-half of the pre-consumer recycled content value), and the total combined recycled content value for all materials as a percentage of total materials costs. c.Identify each regional material, its cost, its manufacturing location, the distance of this location from the Project site, the source location for each raw material component of the material, the distance of these extraction locations from the Project site, and the total value of regional materials as a percentage of total materials costs. d.Identify each biobased material, its source, its cost, and the total value of biobased materials as a percentage of total materials costs. Also provide the total value of rapidly renewable materials (materials made from plants that are harvested in less than a 10-year cycle) as a percentage of total materials costs. e.Identify each wood-based material, its cost, the total wood-based materials cost, each FSC Certified wood material, its cost, and the total value of Certified wood as a percentage of total wood-based materials costs. 2.Provide final versions of the above spreadsheets to the Owner and Architect not more than 14 days after Substantial Completion. C.Construction Waste Management: See Section 01 74 19 “Construction Waste Management” for submittal requirements. D.Construction Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management: Submittals must include the following: 1.Not more than 30 days after the Preconstruction Meeting, prepare and submit for the Architect and Owner’s approval, an electronic copy of the draft Construction IAQ Management Plan in an electronic file including, but not limited to, descriptions of the following: 2.Instruction procedures for meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 1995, Chapter 3, including procedures for HVAC Protection, Source Control, Pathway Interruption, Housekeeping, and Scheduling a.Instruction procedures for protecting absorptive materials stored on-site or installed from moisture damage b.Schedule of submission to Architect of photographs of on-site construction IAQ management measures such as protection of ducts and on-site stored oil installed absorptive materials c.Instruction procedures if air handlers must be used during construction, including a description of filtration media to be used at each return air grille d.Instruction procedure for replacing all air-filtration media immediately prior to occupancy after completion of construction, including a description of filtration media to be used at each air handling or air supply unit 3.Not more than 30 days following receipt of the approved draft CIAQMP, submit an electronic copy of the approved CIAQMP in an electronic file, along with the following: a.Manufacturer’s cut sheets and product data highlighting the Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) for all filtration media to be installed at return air grilles during construction if permanently installed AHUs are used during construction. b.Manufacturer’s cut sheets and product data highlighting the Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) for filtration media in all air handling units (AHUs). 4.Not more than 14 days after Substantial Completion provide the following: a.Documentation verifying required replacement of air filtration media in all air handling units (AHUs) after the completion of construction and prior to occupancy and, if applicable, required installation of filtration during construction. b.Minimum of 18 Construction photographs: Six photographs taken on three different occasions during construction of the SMACNA approaches employed, along with a brief description of each approach, documenting implementation of the IAQ management measures, such as protection of ducts and on-site stored or installed absorptive materials. c.A copy of the report from testing and inspecting agency documenting the results of IAQ testing, demonstrating conformance with IAQ testing procedures and requirements defined in Section 01 81 09 “Testing for Indoor Air Quality.” E.Sustainable Design Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit reports for the following: 1.Construction Waste Management: Waste reduction progress reports and logs complying with the requirements of Section 01 74 19 ”Construction Waste Management.” 2.Construction IAQ Management: See details below under Section 3.2 Construction Indoor Air Quality Management for Construction IAQ management progress report requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Preconstruction Meeting: After award of Contract and prior to the commencement of the Work, schedule and conduct meeting with Owner, Architect, and all Subcontractors to discuss the Construction Waste Management Plan, the required Construction Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan, and all other Sustainable Design Requirements. The purpose of this meeting is to develop a mutual understanding of the Project’s Sustainable Design Requirements and coordination of the Contractor’s management of these requirements with the Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR). B.Construction Job Conferences: The status of compliance with the Sustainable Design Requirements of these specifications will be an agenda item at all regular job meetings conducted during the course of work at the site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not burn rubbish, organic matter, etc. or any material on the site. Dispose of legally in accordance with Specifications Sections 01 74 19. B.Roofing Materials: All new roofing systems, other than vegetated roof systems, must comply with the following requirements: 1.Low-Sloped roofing less than or equal to 2:12 slope must have an SRI of at least 78. 2.Steep-Sloped roofing greater than 2:12 slope must have an SRI of at least 29. 3.Roofing Materials: Light-colored, reflective, and high-emissivity roofing helps to reduce localized heat build-up from roof surfaces that contribute to the urban heat island effect. C.Herbicides and Pest Control: Herbicides shall not be permitted, and pest control measures shall utilize EPA-registered biopesticides only. D.Water-Conserving Fixtures: Plumbing fixtures and fittings shall use in aggregate at least 40% less water than the water use baseline calculated for the building after meeting the Energy Policy Act of 1992 fixture performance requirements. Flow and flush rates shall not exceed the following: 1.Toilets: no more than 1.3 gallons per flush, otherwise be dual flush 1.6/0.8 gallons per flush, and have documented bowl evacuation capability per MaP testing of at least 400 grams 2.Urinals: Water sense rated with no more than 0.125 gallons per flush or use where considered appropriate.3.Lavatory Faucets: 0.5 gpm with automatic faucet controls 4.Kitchen Sink Lavatories: 2.2 gpmE.Elimination of CFCs AND HCFCs: 1.Ozone Protection: Base building cooling equipment shall contain no refrigerants other than the following: HCFC-123, HFC-134a, HFC-245fa, HFC-407c, or HFC 410a. 2.Fire suppression systems may not contain ozone-depleting substances. 3.Extruded polystyrene insulation (XPS) and closed-cell spray foam polyurethane insulation shall not be manufactured with hydrochlorofluorocarbon (HCFC) blowing agents. F.Appliances and Equipment: All Energy Star eligible equipment and appliances shall be qualified by EPA’s Energy Star program. G.HVAC Distribution Efficiency: 1.All duct systems shall be constructed of galvanized sheet metal, aluminum, or stainless steel as deemed appropriate based on the application requirements. No fiberglass duct board shall be permitted. 2.All medium- and high-pressure ductwork systems shall be pressure-tested in accordance with the current SMACNA standards. 3.All ductwork shall be externally insulated. No interior duct liner shall be permitted. 4.Where possible, all air terminal connections shall be hard-connected with sheet metal ductwork. If flexible ductwork is used, no flexible duct extension shall be more than six feet in length. 5.All HVAC equipment shall be isolated from the ductwork system with flexible duct connectors to minimize the transmittance of vibration. 6.All supply and return air branch ducts shall include the appropriate style of volume damper. Air terminal devices such as grilles, registers, and diffusers shall be balanced at duct branch dampers, not at terminal face. H.Measurement and Verification: Install controls and monitoring devices as required by MEP divisions order to comply with International Performance Measurement & Verification Protocol (IPMVP), Volume III: Concepts and Options for Determining Energy Savings in New Construction, April 2003, Option D. 1.The IPMVP provides guidance on situation-appropriate application of measurement and verification strategies. I.Salvaged or Reused materials: There shall be no substitutions for specified salvaged and reused materials and products. 1.Salvaged materials: Use of salvaged materials reduces impacts of disposal and manufacturing of replacements. J.Recycled Content of Materials: 1.Provide building materials with recycled content such that post-consumer recycled content value plus half the pre-consumer recycled content value constitutes a minimum of 30% of the cost of materials used for the Project, exclusive of all MEP equipment, labor, and delivery costs. The Contractor shall make all attempts to maximize the procurement of materials with recycled content. a.e post-consumer recycled content value of a material shall be determined by dividing the weight of post-consumer recycled content by the total weight of the material and multiplying by the cost of the material. b.Do not include mechanical and electrical components in the calculations. c.Do not include labor and delivery costs in the calculations. d.Recycled content of materials shall be defined according to the Federal Trade Commission’s “Guide for the Use of Environmental Marketing Claims,” 16 CFR 260.7 (e). e.Utilize all on-site existing paving materials that are scheduled for demolition as granulated fill, and include the cost of this material had it been purchased in the calculations for recycled content value. f.The materials in the following list must contain the minimum recycled content indicated: Category Minimum Recycled Content Compost/mulch 100% post-consumer Steel Studs 30% combined Aluminum Fabrications 35% combined Rigid Insulation 20% pre-consumer Batt insulation 30% combined - - - E N D - - -SECTION 02 41 00DEMOLITIONPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTION:A.This section specifies demolition and removal of portions of buildings, utilities and debris from trash dumps shown.1.2 RELATED WORK:A.Safety Requirements: GENERAL CONDITIONS Article, ACCIDENT PREVENTION.B.Disconnecting utility services prior to demolition: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.C.Reserved items that are to remain the property of the Government: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.D.Asbestos Floor Tile and Mastic Removal: Section 02 82 13.19, ASBESTOS FLOOR TILE AND MASTIC ABATEMENT.E.Lead Paint: Section 02 83 33.13, LEAD-BASED PAINT REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL.F.Environmental Protection: Section 01 57 19, TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.G.Construction Waste Management: Section 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT.H.Infectious Control: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article 1.8, INFECTION PREVENTION MEASURES.1.3 PROTECTION:A.Perform demolition in such manner as to eliminate hazards to persons and property; to minimize interference with use of adjacent areas, utilities and structures or interruption of use of such utilities; and to provide free passage to and from such adjacent areas of structures. Comply with requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS Article, ACCIDENT PREVENTION.B.Provide safeguards, including warning signs, barricades, temporary fences, warning lights, and other similar items that are required for protection of all personnel during demolition and removal operations. Comply with requirements of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article PROTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, UTILITIES, AND IMPROVEMENTS.C.Maintain fences, barricades, lights, and other similar items around exposed excavations until such excavations have been completely filled.D.Prevent spread of flying particles and dust. Sprinkle rubbish and debris with water to keep dust to a minimum. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable condition such as, but not limited to; ice, flooding, or pollution. Vacuum and dust the work area daily.E.In addition to previously listed fire and safety rules to be observed in performance of work, include following:1.No wall or part of wall shall be permitted to fall outwardly from structures.2.Wherever a cutting torch or other equipment that might cause a fire is used, provide and maintain fire extinguishers nearby ready for immediate use. Instruct all possible users in use of fire extinguishers.4.Keep hydrants clear and accessible at all times. Prohibit debris from accumulating within a radius of 4500 mm (15 feet) of fire hydrants.F.Before beginning any demolition work, the Contractor shall survey the site and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work. The contractor shall take necessary precautions to avoid damages to existing items to remain in place, to be reused, or to remain the property of the Medical Center; any damaged items shall be repaired or replaced as approved by the Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR). The Contractor shall coordinate the work of this section with all other work and shall construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and supports as required. The Contractor shall ensure that structural elements are not overloaded and shall be responsible for increasing structural supports or adding new supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition work performed under this contract. Do not overload structural elements. Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by demolition or removal works. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement must have COTR’s approval.H.The work shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 57 19, TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.I.The work shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article 1.8 INFECTION PREVENTION MEASURES.1.4 UTILITY SERVICES:A.Demolish and remove outside utility service lines shown to be removed.B.Remove abandoned outside utility lines that would interfere with installation of new utility lines and new construction.PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)PART 3 – EXECUTION3.1 DEMOLITION:pletely demolish and remove construction, including all appurtenances related or connected thereto, as necessary to complete the renovations shown on the drawings.B.Debris, including brick, concrete, stone, metals and similar materials shall become property of Contractor and shall be disposed of by him daily, off the Medical Center property to avoid accumulation at the demolition site. Materials that cannot be removed daily shall be stored in areas specified by the COTR. Contractor shall dispose debris in compliance with applicable federal, state or local permits, rules and/or regulations.C.In removing buildings and structures of more than two stories, demolish work story by story starting at highest level and progressing down to third floor level. Demolition of first and second stories may proceed simultaneously.D.Remove and legally dispose of all materials, other than earth to remain as part of project work, from any trash dumps shown. Materials removed shall become property of contractor and shall be disposed of in compliance with applicable federal, state or local permits, rules and/or regulations. Materials that are discovered to be hazardous, shall be handled as unforeseen.E.Remove existing utilities as indicated or uncovered by work and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility and approved by the COTR. When Utility lines are encountered that are not indicated on the drawings, the COTR shall be notified prior to further work in that area.3.2 CLEANUP:A.On completion of work of this section and after removal of all debris, leave site in clean condition satisfactory to COTR. Cleanup shall include off the Medical Center disposal of all items and materials not required to remain property of the Government as well as all debris and rubbish resulting from demolition operations. E N D SECTION 02 82 11TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENTPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SUMMARY OF THE WORK1.1.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND RELATED REQUIREMENTSDrawings, general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and other Division 01 specifications, shall apply to the work of this section. The contract documents show the work to be done under the contract and related requirements and conditions impacting the project. Related requirements and conditions include applicable codes and regulations, notices and permits, existing site conditions and restrictions on use of the site, requirements for partial owner occupancy during the work, coordination with other work and the phasing of the work. In the event the Asbestos Abatement Contractor discovers a conflict in the contract documents and/or requirements or codes, the conflict must be brought to the immediate attention of the Contracting Officer for resolution. Whenever there is a conflict or overlap in the requirements, the most stringent shall apply. Any actions taken by the Contractor without obtaining guidance from the Contracting Officer shall become the sole risk and responsibility of the Asbestos Abatement Contractor. All costs incurred due to such action are also the responsibility of the Asbestos Abatement Contractor.1.1.2 EXTENT OF WORKA.Below is a brief description of the estimated quantities of asbestos containing materials to be abated. These quantities are for informational purposes only and are based on the best information available at the time of the specification preparation. The Contractor shall satisfy himself as the actual quantities to be abated. Nothing in this section may be interpreted as limiting the extent of work otherwise required by this contract and related documents.B.Removal, clean-up and disposal of asbestos containing materials (ACM) and asbestos/waste contaminated elements in an appropriate regulated area for the following approximate quantities;( 1350) Square Feet of Asbestos Containing Linoleum and sub-floor. Remove any carpet covering the linoleum as contaminated material.1.1.3 RELATED WORKA.Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.B.Section 02 41 00, DEMOLITION.C.Division 09, FINISHESD.Division 22, PLUMBING.E.Section 21 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION / Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING F.Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION.G.Section 22 05 19, METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING / Section 22 05 23, GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING / Section 22 11 00, FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION / Section 22 13 00, FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE / Section 22 14 00, FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE.H.Section 23 21 13, HYDRONIC PIPING.I.Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS / Section 23 37 00, AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS.1.1.4 TASKSThe work tasks are summarized briefly as follows:A.Pre-abatement activities including pre-abatement meeting(s), inspection(s), notifications, permits, submittal approvals, regulated area preparations, emergency procedures arrangements, and standard operating procedures for asbestos abatement work.B.Abatement activities including removal, clean-up and disposal of ACM waste, recordkeeping, security, monitoring, and inspections.C.Cleaning and decontamination activities including final visual inspection, air monitoring and certification of decontamination.1.1.5 CONTRACTORS USE OF PREMISESA.The Contractor and Contractor's personnel shall cooperate fully with the VA representative/consultant to facilitate efficient use of buildings and areas within buildings. The Contractor shall perform the work in accordance with the VA specifications, drawings, phasing plan and in compliance with any/all applicable Federal, State and Local regulations and requirements.B.The Contractor shall use the existing facilities in the building strictly within the limits indicated in contract documents as well as the approved VA Design and Construction Procedures. VA Design and Construction Procedures drawings of partially occupied buildings will show the limits of regulated areas; the placement of decontamination facilities; the temporary location of bagged waste ACM; the path of transport to outside the building; and the temporary waste storage area for each building/regulated area. Any variation from the arrangements shown on drawings shall be secured in writing from the VA representative through the pre-abatement plan of action. The following limitations of use shall apply to existing facilities shown on drawings:1.2 VARIATIONS IN QUANTITYThe quantities and locations of ACM as indicated on the drawings and the extent of work included in this section are estimated which are limited by the physical constraints imposed by occupancy of the buildings and accessibility to ACM. Accordingly, minor variations (+/- 5%) in quantities of ACM within the regulated area are considered as having no impact on contract price and time requirements of this contract. Where additional work is required beyond the above variation, the contractor shall provide unit prices for newly discovered ACM and those prices shall be used for additional work required under the contractor.1.3 STOP ASBESTOS REMOVALIf the Contracting Officer; their field representative; (the facility Safety Officer/Manager or their designee, or the VA Professional Industrial Hygienist/Certified Industrial Hygienist (VPIH/CIH) presents a verbal Stop Asbestos Removal Order, the Contractor/Personnel shall immediately stop all asbestos removal and maintain HEPA filtered negative pressure air flow in the containment and adequately wet any exposed ACM. If a verbal Stop Asbestos Removal Order is issued, the VA shall follow-up with a written order to the Contractor as soon as it is practicable. The Contractor shall not resume any asbestos removal activity until authorized to do so in writing by the VA Contracting Officer. A stop asbestos removal order may be issued at any time the VA Contracting Officer determines abatement conditions/activities are not within VA specification, regulatory requirements or that an imminent hazard exists to human health or the environment. Work stoppage will continue until conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the VA. Standby time and costs for corrective actions will be borne by the Contractor, including the VPIH/CIH time. The occurrence of any of the following events shall be reported immediately by the Contractor’s competent person to the VA Contracting Office or field representative using the most expeditious means (e.g., verbal or telephonic), followed up with written notification to the Contracting Officer as soon as practical. The Contractor shall immediately stop asbestos removal/disturbance activities and initiate fiber reduction activities:A.Airborne PCM analysis results equal to or greater than 0.01 f/cc outside a regulated area or >0.05 f/cc inside a regulated area;B.breach or break in regulated area containment barrier(s);C.less than –0.02” WCG pressure in the regulated area;D.serious injury/death at the site; E.fire/safety emergency at the site;F.respiratory protection system failure;G.power failure or loss of wetting agent; orH.any visible emissions observed outside the regulated area.1.4 DEFINITIONS1.4.1 GENERALDefinitions and explanations here are neither complete nor exclusive of all terms used in the contract documents, but are general for the work to the extent they are not stated more explicitly in another element of the contract documents. Drawings must be recognized as diagrammatic in nature and not completely descriptive of the requirements indicated therein.1.4.2 GLOSSARYAbatement - Procedures to control fiber release from asbestos-containing materials. Includes removal, encapsulation, enclosure, demolition, and renovation activities related to asbestos containing materials (ACM).Aerosol - Solid or liquid particulate suspended in air.Adequately wet - Sufficiently mixed or penetrated with liquid to prevent the release of particulates. If visible emissions are observed coming from the ACM, then that material has not been adequately wetted.Aggressive method - Removal or disturbance of building material by sanding, abrading, grinding, or other method that breaks, crumbles, or disintegrates intact ACM.Aggressive sampling - EPA AHERA defined clearance sampling method using air moving equipment such as fans and leaf blowers to aggressively disturb and maintain in the air residual fibers after abatement.AHERA - Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act. Asbestos regulations for schools issued in 1987.Aircell - Pipe or duct insulation made of corrugated cardboard which contains asbestos.Air monitoring - The process of measuring the fiber content of a known volume of air collected over a specified period of time. The NIOSH 7400 Method, Issue 2 is used to determine the fiber levels in air. For personal samples and clearance air testing using Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM) analysis. NIOSH Method 7402 can be used when it is necessary to confirm fibers counted by PCM as being asbestos. The AHERA TEM analysis may be used for background, area samples and clearance samples when required by this specification, or at the discretion of the VPIH/CIH as appropriate.Air sample filter - The filter used to collect fibers which are then counted. The filter is made of mixed cellulose ester membrane for PCM (Phase Contrast Microscopy) and polycarbonate for TEM (Transmission Electron Microscopy)Amended water - Water to which a surfactant (wetting agent) has been added to increase the penetrating ability of the liquid.Asbestos - Includes chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, tremolite asbestos, anthophyllite asbestos, actinolite asbestos, and any of these minerals that have been chemically treated or altered. Asbestos also includes PACM, as defined below.Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan (AHAP) - Asbestos work procedures required to be submitted by the contractor before work begins.Asbestos-containing material (ACM) - Any material containing more than one percent of asbestos.Asbestos contaminated elements (ACE) - Building elements such as ceilings, walls, lights, or ductwork that are contaminated with asbestos.Asbestos-contaminated soil (ACS) – Soil found in the work area or in adjacent areas such as crawlspaces or pipe tunnels which is contaminated with asbestos-containing material debris and cannot be easily separated from the material.Asbestos-containing waste (ACW) material - Asbestos-containing material or asbestos contaminated objects requiring disposal.Asbestos Project Monitor – Some sates require that any person conducting asbestos abatement clearance inspections and clearance air sampling be licensed as an asbestos project monitor.Asbestos waste decontamination facility - A system consisting of drum/bag washing facilities and a temporary storage area for cleaned containers of asbestos waste. Used as the exit for waste and equipment leaving the regulated area. In an emergency, it may be used to evacuate personnel.Authorized person - Any person authorized by the VA, the Contractor, or government agency and required by work duties to be present in regulated areas.Authorized visitor - Any person approved by the VA; the contractor; or any government agency representative having jurisdiction over the regulated area (e.g., OSHA, Federal and State EPA.Barrier - Any surface the isolates the regulated area and inhibits fiber migration from the regulated area.Containment Barrier - An airtight barrier consisting of walls, floors, and/or ceilings of sealed plastic sheeting which surrounds and seals the outer perimeter of the regulated area.Critical Barrier - The barrier responsible for isolating the regulated area from adjacent spaces, typically constructed of plastic sheeting secured in place at openings such as doors, windows, or any other opening into the regulated area.Primary Barrier – Plastic barriers placed over critical barriers and exposed directly to abatement work.Secondary Barrier - Any additional plastic barriers used to isolate and provide protection from debris during abatement work.Breathing zone - The hemisphere forward of the shoulders with a radius of about 150 - 225 mm (6 - 9 inches) from the worker's nose. Bridging encapsulant - An encapsulant that forms a layer on the surface of the ACM.Building/facility owner - The legal entity, including a lessee, which exercises control over management and recordkeeping functions relating to a building and/or facility in which asbestos activities take place.Bulk testing - The collection and analysis of suspect asbestos containing materials.Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) - A person certified in the comprehensive practice of industrial hygiene by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene.Class I asbestos work - Activities involving the removal of Thermal System Insulation (TSI) and surfacing ACM and Presumed Asbestos Containing Material (PACM).Class II asbestos work - Activities involving the removal of ACM which is not thermal system insulation or surfacing material. This includes, but is not limited to, the removal of asbestos-containing wallboard, floor tile and sheeting, roofing and siding shingles, and construction mastic.Clean room/Changing room - An uncontaminated room having facilities for the storage of employee's street clothing and uncontaminated materials and equipment.Clearance sample - The final air sample taken after all asbestos work has been done and visually inspected. Performed by the VA's professional industrial hygiene consultant/Certified Industrial Hygienist (VPIH/CIH).Closely resemble - The major workplace conditions which have contributed to the levels of historic asbestos exposure, are no more protective than conditions of the current petent person - In addition to the definition in 29 CFR 1926.32(f), one who is capable of identifying existing asbestos hazards in the workplace and selecting the appropriate control strategy for asbestos exposure, who has the authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them, as specified in 29 CFR 1926.32(f); in addition, for Class I and II work who is specially trained in a training course which meets the criteria of EPA's Model Accreditation Plan (40 CFR 763) for supervisor.Contractor's Professional Industrial Hygienist (CPIH/CIH) - The asbestos abatement contractor's industrial hygienist. The industrial hygienist must meet the qualification requirements of a PIH and may be a certified industrial hygienist (CIH).Count - Refers to the fiber count or the average number of fibers greater than five microns in length with a length-to-width (aspect) ratio of at least 3 to 1, per cubic centimeter of air.Crawlspace – An area which can be found either in or adjacent to the work area. This area has limited access and egress and may contain asbestos materials and/or asbestos contaminated soil.Decontamination area/unit - An enclosed area adjacent to and connected to the regulated area and consisting of an equipment room, shower room, and clean room, which is used for the decontamination of workers, materials, and equipment that are contaminated with asbestos.Demolition - The wrecking or taking out of any load-supporting structural member and any related razing, removing, or stripping of asbestos products. VA Total – means a building or substantial part of the building is completely removed, torn or knocked down, bulldozed, flattened, or razed, including removal of building debris. Disposal bag - Typically 6 mil thick sift-proof, dustproof, leak-tight container used to package and transport asbestos waste from regulated areas to the approved landfill. Each bag/container must be labeled/marked in accordance with EPA, OSHA and DOT requirements.Disturbance - Activities that disrupt the matrix of ACM or PACM, crumble or pulverize ACM or PACM, or generate visible debris from ACM or PACM. Disturbance includes cutting away small amounts of ACM or PACM, no greater than the amount that can be contained in one standard sized glove bag or waste bag in order to access a building component. In no event shall the amount of ACM or PACM so disturbed exceed that which can be contained in one glove bag or disposal bag which shall not exceed 60 inches in length or width.Drum - A rigid, impermeable container made of cardboard fiber, plastic, or metal which can be sealed in order to be sift-proof, dustproof, and leak-tight.Employee exposure - The exposure to airborne asbestos that would occur if the employee were not wearing respiratory protection equipment.Encapsulant - A material that surrounds or embeds asbestos fibers in an adhesive matrix and prevents the release of fibers.Encapsulation - Treating ACM with an encapsulant.Enclosure - The construction of an air tight, impermeable, permanent barrier around ACM to control the release of asbestos fibers from the material and also eliminate access to the material. Equipment room - A contaminated room located within the decontamination area that is supplied with impermeable bags or containers for the disposal of contaminated protective clothing and equipment.Fiber - A particulate form of asbestos, 5 microns or longer, with a length to width (aspect) ratio of at least 3 to 1.Fibers per cubic centimeter (f/cc) - Abbreviation for fibers per cubic centimeter, used to describe the level of asbestos fibers in air.Filter - Media used in respirators, vacuums, or other machines to remove particulate from air.Firestopping - Material used to close the open parts of a structure in order to prevent a fire from spreading.Friable asbestos containing material - Any material containing more than one (1) percent or asbestos as determined using the method specified in appendix A, Subpart F, 40 CFR 763, section 1, Polarized Light Microscopy, that, when dry, can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure.Glovebag - Not more than a 60 x 60 inch impervious plastic bag-like enclosure affixed around an asbestos-containing material, with glove-like appendages through which materials and tools may be handled.High efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter – An ASHRAE MERV 17 filter capable of trapping and retaining at least 99.97 percent of all mono-dispersed particles of 0.3 micrometers in diameter.HEPA vacuum - Vacuum collection equipment equipped with a HEPA filter system capable of collecting and retaining asbestos fibers.Homogeneous area - An area of surfacing, thermal system insulation or miscellaneous ACM that is uniform in color, texture and date of application.HVAC - Heating, Ventilation and Air ConditioningIndustrial hygienist (IH) - A professional qualified by education, training, and experience to anticipate, recognize, evaluate and develop controls for occupational health hazards. Meets definition requirements of the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA).Industrial hygienist technician (IH Technician) - A person working under the direction of an IH or CIH who has special training, experience, certifications and licenses required for the industrial hygiene work assigned. Some states require that an industrial hygienist technician conducting asbestos abatement clearance inspection and clearance air sampling be licensed as an asbestos project monitor.Intact - The ACM has not crumbled, been pulverized, or otherwise deteriorated so that the asbestos is no longer likely to be bound with its matrix.Lockdown - Applying encapsulant, after a final visual inspection, on all abated surfaces at the conclusion of ACM removal prior to removal of critical barriers.National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) - EPA's rule to control emissions of asbestos to the environment (40 CFR part 61, Subpart M).Negative initial exposure assessment - A demonstration by the employer which complies with the criteria in 29 CFR 1926.1101 (f)(2)(iii), that employee exposure during an operation is expected to be consistently below the PEL.Negative pressure - Air pressure which is lower than the surrounding area, created by exhausting air from a sealed regulated area through HEPA equipped filtration units. OSHA requires maintaining -0.02" water column gauge inside the negative pressure enclosure.Negative pressure respirator - A respirator in which the air pressure inside the facepiece is negative during inhalation relative to the air pressure outside the respirator facepiece.Non-friable ACM - Material that contains more than 1 percent asbestos but cannot be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand anic vapor cartridge - The type of cartridge used on air purifying respirators to remove organic vapor hazardous air contaminants.Outside air - The air outside buildings and structures, including, but not limited to, the air under a bridge or in an open ferry dock.Owner/operator - Any person who owns, leases, operates, controls, or supervises the facility being demolished or renovated or any person who owns, leases, operates, controls, or supervises the demolition or renovation operation, or both.Penetrating encapsulant - Encapsulant that is absorbed into the ACM matrix without leaving a surface layer.Personal sampling/monitoring - Representative air samples obtained in the breathing zone for one or workers within the regulated area using a filter cassette and a calibrated air sampling pump to determine asbestos exposure. Permissible exposure limit (PEL) - The level of exposure OSHA allows for an 8 hour time weighted average. For asbestos fibers, the eight (8) hour time weighted average PEL is 0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter (0.1 f/cc) of air and the 30-minute Excursion Limit is 1.0 fibers per cubic centimeter (1 f/cc).Personal protective equipment (PPE) – equipment designed to protect user from injury and/or specific job hazard. Such equipment may include protective clothing, hard hats, safety glasses, and respirators. Pipe tunnel – An area, typically located adjacent to mechanical spaces or boiler rooms in which the pipes servicing the heating system in the building are routed to allow the pipes to access heating elements. These areas may contain asbestos pipe insulation, asbestos fittings, or asbestos-contaminated soil.Polarized light microscopy (PLM) - Light microscopy using dispersion staining techniques and refractive indices to identify and quantify the type(s) of asbestos present in a bulk sample.Polyethylene sheeting - Strong plastic barrier material 4 to 6 mils thick, semi-transparent, flame retardant per NFPA 241.Positive/negative fit check - A method of verifying the seal of a facepiece respirator by temporarily occluding the filters and breathing in (inhaling) and then temporarily occluding the exhalation valve and breathing out (exhaling) while checking for inward or outward leakage of the respirator respectively.Presumed ACM (PACM) - Thermal system insulation, surfacing, and flooring material installed in buildings prior to 1981. If the building owner has actual knowledge, or should have known through the exercise of due diligence that other materials are ACM, they too must be treated as PACM. The designation of PACM may be rebutted pursuant to 29 CFR 1926.1101 (b).Professional IH - An IH who meets the definition requirements of AIHA; meets the definition requirements of OSHA as a "Competent Person" at 29 CFR 1926.1101 (b); has completed two specialized EPA approved courses on management and supervision of asbestos abatement projects; has formal training in respiratory protection and waste disposal; and has a minimum of four projects of similar complexity with this project of which at least three projects serving as the supervisory IH. The PIH may be either the VA’s PIH (VPIH) or Contractor’s PIH (CPIH/CIH).Project designer - A person who has successfully completed the training requirements for an asbestos abatement project designer as required by 40 CFR 763 Appendix C, Part I; (B)(5).Assigned protection factor - A value assigned by OSHA/NIOSH to indicate the expected protection provided by each respirator class, when the respirator is properly selected and worn correctly. The number indicates the reduction of exposure level from outside to inside the respirator facepiece.Qualitative fit test (QLFT) - A fit test using a challenge material that can be sensed by the wearer if leakage in the respirator occurs.Quantitative fit test (QNFT) - A fit test using a challenge material which is quantified outside and inside the respirator thus allowing the determination of the actual fit factor. Regulated area - An area established by the employer to demarcate where Class I, II, III asbestos work is conducted, and any adjoining area where debris and waste from such asbestos work may accumulate; and a work area within which airborne concentrations of asbestos exceed, or there is a reasonable possibility they may exceed the PEL.Regulated ACM (RACM) - Friable ACM; Category I non-friable ACM that has become friable; Category I non-friable ACM that will be or has been subjected to sanding, grinding, cutting, or abrading or; Category II non-friable ACM that has a high probability of becoming or has become crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by the forces expected to act on the material in the course of the demolition or renovation operation.Removal - All operations where ACM, PACM and/or RACM is taken out or stripped from structures or substrates, including demolition operations.Renovation - Altering a facility or one or more facility components in any way, including the stripping or removal of asbestos from a facility component which does not involve demolition activity.Repair - Overhauling, rebuilding, reconstructing, or reconditioning of structures or substrates, including encapsulation or other repair of ACM or PACM attached to structures or substrates.Shower room - The portion of the PDF where personnel shower before leaving the regulated area. Supplied air respirator (SAR) - A respiratory protection system that supplies minimum Grade D respirable air per ANSI/Compressed Gas Association Commodity Specification for Air, G-7.1-1989.Surfacing ACM - A material containing more than 1 percent asbestos that is sprayed, troweled on or otherwise applied to surfaces for acoustical, fireproofing and other purposes.Surfactant - A chemical added to water to decrease water's surface tension thus making it more penetrating into ACM.Thermal system ACM - A material containing more than 1 percent asbestos applied to pipes, fittings, boilers, breeching, tanks, ducts, or other structural components to prevent heat loss or gain.Transmission electron microscopy (TEM) - A microscopy method that can identify and count asbestos fibers.VA Professional Industrial Hygienist (VPIH/CIH) – The Department of Veterans Affairs Professional Industrial Hygienist must meet the qualifications of a PIH, and may be a Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH).VA Representative - The VA official responsible for on-going project work.Visible emissions - Any emissions, which are visually detectable without the aid of instruments, coming from ACM/PACM/RACM/ACS or ACM waste material.Waste/Equipment decontamination facility (W/EDF) – The area in which equipment is decontaminated before removal from the regulated area.Waste generator - Any owner or operator whose act or process produces asbestos-containing waste material.Waste shipment record - The shipping document, required to be originated and signed by the waste generator, used to track and substantiate the disposition of asbestos-containing waste material.Wet cleaning - The process of thoroughly eliminating, by wet methods, any asbestos contamination from surfaces or objects. 1.4.3 REFERENCED STANDARDS ORGANIZATIONSThe following acronyms or abbreviations as referenced in contract/specification documents are defined to mean the associated names. Names and addresses may be subject to change.VA Department of Veterans Affairs810 Vermont Avenue, NWWashington, DC 20420AIHA American Industrial Hygiene Association2700 Prosperity Avenue, Suite 250Fairfax, VA 22031703-849-8888ANSI American National Standards Institute1430 BroadwayNew York, NY 10018212-354-3300ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials1916 Race St.Philadelphia, PA 19103215-299-5400CFR Code of Federal RegulationsGovernment Printing OfficeWashington, DC 20420CGA Compressed Gas Association1235 Jefferson Davis HighwayArlington, VA 22202703-979-0900CS Commercial Standard of the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)U. S. Department of CommerceGovernment Printing OfficeWashington, DC 20420EPA Environmental Protection Agency401 M St., SWWashington, DC 20460202-382-3949MIL-STD Military Standards/Standardization DivisionOffice of the Assistant Secretary of DefenseWashington, DC 20420J.NIST National Institute for Standards and TechnologyU. S. Department of CommerceGaithersburg, MD 20234301-921-1000K.NEC National Electrical Code (by NFPA)L.NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association2101 L Street, N.W.Washington, DC 20037M.NFPA National Fire Protection Association1 Batterymarch ParkP.O. Box 9101Quincy, MA 02269-9101800-344-3555N.NIOSH National Institutes for Occupational Safety and Health4676 Columbia ParkwayCincinnati, OH 45226513-533-8236O.OSHA Occupational Safety and Health AdministrationU.S. Department of LaborGovernment Printing OfficeWashington, DC 20402P.UL Underwriters Laboratory333 Pfingsten Rd.Northbrook, IL 60062312-272-88001.5 APPLICABLE CODES AND REGULATIONS1.5.1 GENERAL APPLICABILITY OF CODES, REGULATIONS, AND STANDARDSA.All work under this contract shall be done in strict accordance with all applicable Federal, State, and local regulations, standards and codes governing asbestos abatement, and any other trade work done in conjunction with the abatement. All applicable codes, regulations and standards are adopted into this specification and will have the same force and effect as this specification.B.The most recent edition of any relevant regulation, standard, document or code shall be in effect. Where conflict among the requirements or with these specifications exists, the most stringent requirement(s) shall be utilized.C.Copies of all standards, regulations, codes and other applicable documents, including this specification and those listed in Section 1.5 shall be available at the worksite in the clean change area of the worker decontamination system.1.5.2 Asbestos Abatement CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITYThe Asbestos Abatement Contractor (Contractor) shall assume full responsibility and liability for compliance with all applicable Federal, State and Local regulations related to any and all aspects of the asbestos abatement project. Some of the applicable Federal requirements are listed below. The Contractor is responsible for providing and maintaining training, accreditations, medical exams, medical records, personal protective equipment (PPE) including respiratory protection including respirator fit testing, as required by applicable Federal, State and Local regulations. The Contractor shall hold the VA and VPIH/CIH consultants harmless for any Contractor’s failure to comply with any applicable work, packaging, transporting, disposal, safety, health, or environmental requirement on the part of himself, his employees, or his subcontractors. The Contractor will incur all costs of the CPIH/CIH, including all sampling/analytical costs to assure compliance with OSHA/EPA/State requirements related to failure to comply with the regulations applicable to the work.1.5.3 FEDERAL REQUIREMENTSFederal requirements which govern of asbestos abatement include, but are not limited to, the following regulations. A.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)1.Title 29 CFR 1926.1101 - Construction Standard for Asbestos2.Title 29 CFR 1910 Subpart I - Personal Protective Equipment3.Title 29 CFR 1910.134 - Respiratory Protection4.Title 29 CFR 1926 - Construction Industry Standards5.Title 29 CFR 1910.1020 - Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records6.Title 29 CFR 1910.1200 - Hazard Communication7.Title 29 CFR 1910 Subpart K - Medical and First AidB.Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):1.40 CFR 61 Subpart A and M (Revised Subpart B) - National Emission Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants - Asbestos.2.40 CFR 763.80 - Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA)C.Department of Transportation (DOT)Title 49 CFR 100 - 185 – Transportation1.5.4 STANDARDSA.Standards which govern asbestos abatement activities include, but are not limited to, the following:1.American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z9.2-79 - Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems and ANSI Z88.2 - Practices for Respiratory Protection.2.Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 586-90 - UL Standard for Safety of HEPA Filter Units, 7th Edition.B.Standards which govern encapsulation work include, but are not limited to the following:1.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)C.Standards which govern the fire and safety concerns in abatement work include, but are not limited to, the following:1.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations.2.NFPA 701 - Standard Methods for Fire Tests for Flame Resistant Textiles and Film.3.NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code1.5.5 EPA GUIDANCE DOCUMENTSA.EPA guidance documents which discuss asbestos abatement work activities are listed below. These documents are made part of this section by reference. EPA publications can be ordered from (800) 424-9065.B.Guidance for Controlling ACM in Buildings (Purple Book) EPA 560/5-85-024C.Asbestos Waste Management Guidance EPA 530-SW-85-007D.A Guide to Respiratory Protection for the Asbestos Abatement Industry EPA-560-OPTS-86-001E.Guide to Managing Asbestos in Place (Green Book) TS 799 20T July 19901.5.6 NOTICESA.State and Local agencies: Send written notification as required by state and local regulations including the local fire department prior to beginning any work on ACM as follows:B.Copies of notifications shall be submitted to the VA for the facility's records in the same time frame notification are given to EPA, State, and Local authorities.1.5.7 PERMITS/LICENSESA.The contractor shall apply for and have all required permits and licenses to perform asbestos abatement work as required by Federal, State, and Local regulations.1.5.8 POSTING AND FILING OF REGULATIONSA.Maintain two (2) copies of applicable federal, state, and local regulations. Post one copy of each in the clean room at the regulated area where workers will have daily access to the regulations and keep another copy in the Contractor's office.1.5.9 VA RESPONSIBILITIESPrior to commencement of work:A.Notify occupants adjacent to regulated areas of project dates and requirements for relocation, if needed. Arrangements must be made prior to starting work for relocation of desks, files, equipment and personal possessions to avoid unauthorized access into the regulated area. Note: Notification of adjacent personnel is required by OSHA in 29 CFR 1926.1101 (k) to prevent unnecessary or unauthorized access to the regulated area.B.Submit to the Contractor results of background air sampling; including location of samples, person who collected the samples, equipment utilized, calibration data and method of analysis. During abatement, submit to the Contractor, results of bulk material analysis and air sampling data collected during the course of the abatement. This information shall not release the Contractor from any responsibility for OSHA compliance.1.5.10 EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN AND ARRANGEMENTSA.An Emergency Action Plan shall be developed prior to commencing abatement activities and shall be agreed to by the Contractor and the VA. The Plan shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.38 (a);(b).B.Emergency procedures shall be in written form and prominently posted in the clean room and equipment room of the decontamination unit. Everyone, prior to entering the regulated area, must read and sign these procedures to acknowledge understanding of the regulated area layout, location of emergency exits and emergency procedures.C.Emergency planning shall include written notification of police, fire, and emergency medical personnel of planned abatement activities; work schedule; layout of regulated area; and access to the regulated area, particularly barriers that may affect response capabilities.D.Emergency planning shall include consideration of fire, explosion, hazardous atmospheres, electrical hazards, slips/trips and falls, confined spaces, and heat stress illness. Written procedures for response to emergency situations shall be developed and employee training in procedures shall be provided.E.Employees shall be trained in regulated area/site evacuation procedures in the event of workplace emergencies.1.For non life-threatening situations - employees injured or otherwise incapacitated shall decontaminate following normal procedures with assistance from fellow workers, if necessary, before exiting the regulated area to obtain proper medical treatment.2.For life-threatening injury or illness, worker decontamination shall take least priority after measures to stabilize the injured worker, remove them from the regulated area, and secure proper medical treatment.F.Telephone numbers of any/all emergency response personnel shall be prominently posted in the clean room, along with the location of the nearest telephone.G.The Contractor shall provide verification of first aid/CPR training for personnel responsible for providing first aid/CPR. OSHA requires medical assistance within 3-4 minutes of a life-threatening injury/illness. Bloodborne Pathogen training shall also be verified for those personnel required to provide first aid/CPR.H.The Emergency Action Plan shall provide for a Contingency Plan in the event that an incident occurs that may require the modification of the standard operating procedures during abatement. Such incidents include, but are not limited to, fire; accident; power failure; negative pressure failure; and supplied air system failure. The Contractor shall detail procedures to be followed in the event of an incident assuring that asbestos abatement work is stopped and wetting is continued until correction of the problem.1.5.11 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETINGPrior to commencing the work, the Contractor shall meet with the VA Certified Industrial Hygienist (VPCIH) to present and review, as appropriate, the items following this paragraph. The Contractor's Competent Person(s) who will be on-site shall participate in the pre-start meeting. The pre-start meeting is to discuss and determine procedures to be used during the project. At this meeting, the Contractor shall provide:A.Proof of Contractor licensing.B.Proof the Competent Person(s) is trained and accredited and approved for working in this State. Verification of the experience of the Competent Person(s) shall also be presented.C.A list of all workers who will participate in the project, including experience and verification of training and accreditation.D.A list of and verification of training for all personnel who have current first-aid/CPR training. A minimum of one person per shift must have adequate training.E.Current medical written opinions for all personnel working on-site meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1101 (m).F.Current fit-tests for all personnel wearing respirators on-site meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1101 (h) and Appendix C. G.A copy of the Contractor's Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan. In these procedures, the following information must be detailed, specific for this project.1.Regulated area preparation procedures;2.Notification requirements procedure of Contractor as required in 29 CFR 1926.1101 (d);3.Decontamination area set-up/layout and decontamination procedures for employees;4.Abatement methods/procedures and equipment to be used;5.Personal protective equipment to be used;H.At this meeting the Contractor shall provide all submittals as required.I.Procedures for handling, packaging and disposal of asbestos waste.J.Emergency Action Plan and Contingency Plan Procedures.K.All applicable Federal, State and local regulations.1.6 PROJECT COORDINATIONThe following are the minimum administrative and supervisory personnel necessary for coordination of the work.1.6.1 PERSONNELA.Administrative and supervisory personnel shall consist of a qualified Competent Person(s) as defined by OSHA in the Construction Standards and the Asbestos Construction Standard; Contractor Professional Industrial Hygienist and Industrial Hygiene Technicians. These employees are the Contractor's representatives responsible for compliance with these specifications and all other applicable requirements.B.Non-supervisory personnel shall consist of an adequate number of qualified personnel to meet the schedule requirements of the project. Personnel shall meet required qualifications. Personnel utilized on-site shall be pre-approved by the VA representative. A request for approval shall be submitted for any person to be employed during the project giving the person's name; social security number; qualifications; accreditation card with color picture; Certificate of Worker's Acknowledgment; and Affidavit of Medical Surveillance and Respiratory Protection and current Respirator Fit Test.C.Minimum qualifications for Contractor and assigned personnel are:1.The Contractor has conducted within the last three (3) years, three (3) projects of similar complexity and dollar value as this project; has not been cited and penalized for serious violations of federal (and state as applicable) EPA and OSHA asbestos regulations in the past three (3) years; has adequate liability/occurrence insurance for asbestos work as required by the state; is licensed in applicable states; has adequate and qualified personnel available to complete the work; has comprehensive standard operating procedures for asbestos work; has adequate materials, equipment and supplies to perform the work.2.The Competent Person has four (4) years of abatement experience of which two (2) years were as the Competent Person on the project; meets the OSHA definition of a Competent Person; has been the Competent Person on two (2) projects of similar size and complexity as this project within the past three (3) years; has completed EPA AHERA/OSHA/State/Local training requirements/accreditation(s) and refreshers; and has all required OSHA documentation related to medical and respiratory protection.3.The Contractor Professional Industrial Hygienist/CIH (CPIH/CIH) shall have five (5) years of monitoring experience and supervision of asbestos abatement projects; has participated as senior IH on five (5) abatement projects, three (3) of which are similar in size and complexity as this project; has developed at least one complete standard operating procedure for asbestos abatement; has trained abatement personnel for three (3) years; has specialized EPA AHERA/OSHA training in asbestos abatement management, respiratory protection, waste disposal and asbestos inspection; has completed the NIOSH 582 Course or equivalent, Contractor/Supervisor course; and has appropriate medical/respiratory protection records/documentation.4.The Abatement Personnel shall have completed the EPA AHERA/OSHA abatement worker course; have training on the standard operating procedures of the Contractor; has one year of asbestos abatement experience within the past three (3) years of similar size and complexity; has applicable medical and respiratory protection documentation; has certificate of training/current refresher and State accreditation/license.All personnel should be in compliance with OSHA construction safety training as applicable and submit certification.1.7 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION1.7.1 GENERAL - RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAMThe Contractor shall develop and implement a written Respiratory Protection Program (RPP) which is in compliance with the January 8, 1998 OSHA requirements found at 29 CFR 1926.1101 and 29 CFR 1910.Subpart I;134. ANSI Standard Z88.2-1992 provides excellent guidance for developing a respiratory protection program. All respirators used must be NIOSH approved for asbestos abatement activities. The written RPP shall, at a minimum, contain the basic requirements found at 29 CFR 1910.134 (c)(1)(i - ix) - Respiratory Protection Program.1.7.2 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM COORDINATORThe Respiratory Protection Program Coordinator (RPPC) must be identified and shall have two (2) years experience coordinating RPP of similar size and complexity. The RPPC must submit a signed statement attesting to the fact that the program meets the above requirements.1.7.3 SELECTION AND USE OF RESPIRATORSThe procedure for the selection and use of respirators must be submitted to the VA as part of the Contractor's qualifications. The procedure must written clearly enough for workers to understand. A copy of the Respiratory Protection Program must be available in the clean room of the decontamination unit for reference by employees or authorized visitors.1.7.4 MINIMUM RESPIRATORY PROTECTIONMinimum respiratory protection shall be a full face powered air purifying respirator when fiber levels are maintained consistently at or below 0.5 f/cc. A higher level of respiratory protection may be provided or required, depending on fiber levels. Respirator selection shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1101 (h); Table 1, except as indicated in this paragraph. Abatement personnel must have a respirator for their exclusive use.1.7.5 MEDICAL WRITTEN OPINIONNo employee shall be allowed to wear a respirator unless a physician or other licensed health care professional has provided a written determination they are medically qualified to wear the class of respirator to be used on the project while wearing whole body impermeable garments and subjected to heat or cold stress.1.7.6 RESPIRATOR FIT TESTAll personnel wearing respirators shall have a current qualitative/quantitative fit test which was conducted in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.134 (f) and Appendix A. Quantitative fit tests shall be done for PAPRs which have been put into a motor/blower failure mode.1.7.7 RESPIRATOR FIT CHECKThe Competent Person shall assure that the positive/negative pressure user seal check is done each time the respirator is donned by an employee. Head coverings must cover respirator head straps. Any situation that prevents an effective facepiece to face seal as evidenced by failure of a user seal check shall preclude that person from wearing a respirator inside the regulated area until resolution of the problem. 1.7.8 MAINTENANCE AND CARE OF RESPIRATORSThe Respiratory Protection Program Coordinator shall submit evidence and documentation showing compliance with 29 CFR 1910.134 (h) Maintenance and Care of Respirators.1.7.9 SUPPLIED AIR SYSTEMSIf a supplied air system is used, the system shall meet all requirements of 29 CFR 1910.134 and the ANSI/Compressed Gas Association (CGA) Commodity Specification for Air current requirements for Type 1 - Grade D breathing air. Low pressure systems are not allowed to be used on asbestos abatement projects. Supplied Air respirator use shall be in accordance with EPA/NIOSH publication EPA-560-OPTS-86-001 "A Guide to Respiratory Protection for the Asbestos Abatement Industry". The competent person on site will be responsible for the supplied air system to ensure the safety of the worker.1.8 WORKER PROTECTION1.8.1 TRAINING OF ABATEMENT PERSONNELPrior to beginning any abatement activity, all personnel shall be trained in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 (k)(9) and any additional State/Local requirements. Training must include, at a minimum, the elements listed at 29 CFR 1926.1101 (k)(9)(viii). Training shall have been conducted by a third party, EPA/State approved trainer meeting the requirements of EPA 40 CFR 763 Appendix C (AHERA MAP). Initial training certificates and current refresher and accreditation proof must be submitted for each person working at the site.1.8.2 MEDICAL EXAMINATIONSMedical examinations meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1101 (m) shall be provided for all personnel working in the regulated area, regardless of exposure levels. A current physician's written opinion as required by 29 CFR 1926.1101 (m)(4) shall be provided for each person and shall include in the medical opinion the person has been evaluated for working in a heat and cold stress environment while wearing personal protective equipment (PPE) and is able to perform the work without risk of material health impairment.1.8.3 REGULATED AREA ENTRY PROCEDUREThe Competent Person shall ensure that each time workers enter the regulated area; they remove ALL street clothes in the clean room of the decontamination unit and put on new disposable coveralls, head coverings, a clean respirator, and then proceed through the shower room to the equipment room where they put on non-disposable required personal protective equipment.1.8.4 DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURE The Competent Person shall require all personnel to adhere to following decontamination procedures whenever they leave the regulated area.A.When exiting the regulated area, remove disposable coveralls, and ALL other clothes, disposable head coverings, and foot coverings or boots in the equipment room.B.Still wearing the respirator and completely naked, proceed to the shower. Showering is MANDATORY. Care must be taken to follow reasonable procedures in removing the respirator to avoid inhaling asbestos fibers while showering. The following procedure is required as a minimum:1.Thoroughly wet body including hair and face. If using a PAPR hold blower above head to keep filters dry.2.With respirator still in place, thoroughly decontaminate body, hair, respirator face piece, and all other parts of the respirator except the blower and battery pack on a PAPR. Pay particular attention to cleaning the seal between the face and respirator facepiece and under the respirator straps.3.Take a deep breath, hold it and/or exhale slowly, completely wetting hair, face, and respirator. While still holding breath, remove the respirator and hold it away from the face before starting to breathe.C.Carefully decontaminate the facepiece of the respirator inside and out. If using a PAPR, shut down using the following sequence: a) first cap inlets to filters; b) turn blower off to keep debris collected on the inlet side of the filter from dislodging and contaminating the outside of the unit; c) thoroughly decontaminate blower and hoses; d) carefully decontaminate battery pack with a wet rag being cautious of getting water in the battery pack thus preventing destruction. (THIS PROCEDURE IS NOT A SUBSTITUTE FOR RESPIRATOR CLEANING!)D.Shower and wash body completely with soap and water. Rinse thoroughly. E.Rinse shower room walls and floor to drain prior to exiting.F.Proceed from shower to clean room; dry off and change into street clothes or into new disposable work clothing.1.8.5 REGULATED AREA REQUIREMENTSThe Competent Person shall meet all requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1101 (o) and assure that all requirements for regulated areas at 29 CFR 1926.1101 (e) are met. All personnel in the regulated area shall not be allowed to eat, drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, apply cosmetics, or in any way interfere with the fit of their respirator.1.9 DECONTAMINATION FACILITIES1.9.1 DESCRIPTIONProvide each regulated area with separate personnel decontamination facilities (PDF) and waste/equipment decontamination facilities (W/EDF). Ensure that the PDF are the only means of ingress and egress to the regulated area and that all equipment, bagged waste, and other material exit the regulated area only through the W/EDF. 1.9.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTSAll personnel entering or exiting a regulated area must go through the PDF and shall follow the requirements at 29 CFR 1926.1101 (j)(1) and these specifications. All waste, equipment and contaminated materials must exit the regulated area through the W/EDF and be decontaminated in accordance with these specifications. Walls and ceilings of the PDF and W/EDF must be constructed of a minimum of 3 layers of 6 mil opaque fire retardant polyethylene sheeting and be securely attached to existing building components and/or an adequate temporary framework. A minimum of 3 layers of 6 mil poly shall also be used to cover the floor under the PDF and W/EDF units. Construct doors so that they overlap and secure to adjacent surfaces. Weight inner doorway sheets with layers of duct tape so that they close quickly after release. Put arrows on sheets so they show direction of travel and overlap. If the building adjacent area is occupied, construct a solid barrier on the occupied side(s) to protect the sheeting and reduce potential for non-authorized personnel entering the regulated area.1.9.3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES TO THE PDF and W/EDFThe Competent Person shall provide temporary water service connections to the PDF and W/EDF. Backflow prevention must be provided at the point of connection to the VA system. Water supply must be of adequate pressure and meet requirements of 29 CFR 1910.141(d)(3). Provide adequate temporary overhead electric power with ground fault circuit interruption (GFCI) protection. Provide a sub-panel equipped with GFCI protection for all temporary power in the clean room. Provide adequate lighting to provide a minimum of 50 foot candles in the PDF and W/EDF. Provide temporary heat, if needed, to maintain 70oF throughout the PDF and W/EDF. 1.9.4 PERSONNEL DECONTAMINATION FACILITY (PDF)The Competent Person shall provide a PDF consisting of shower room which is contiguous to a clean room and equipment room which is connected to the regulated area. The PDF must be sized to accommodate the number of personnel scheduled for the project. The shower room, located in the center of the PDF, shall be fitted with as many portable showers as necessary to insure all employees can complete the entire decontamination procedure within 15 minutes. The PDF shall be constructed of opaque poly for privacy. The PDF shall be constructed to eliminate any parallel routes of egress without showering.1.Clean Room: The clean room must be physically and visually separated from the rest of the building to protect the privacy of personnel changing clothes. The clean room shall be constructed of at least 3 layers of 6 mil opaque fire retardant poly to provide an air tight room. Provide a minimum of 2 - 900 mm (3 foot) wide 6 mil poly opaque fire retardant doorways. One doorway shall be the entry from outside the PDF and the second doorway shall be to the shower room of the PDF. The floor of the clean room shall be maintained in a clean, dry condition. Shower overflow shall not be allowed into the clean room. Provide 1 storage locker per person. A portable fire extinguisher, minimum 10 pounds capacity, Type ABC, shall be provided in accordance with OSHA and NFPA Standard 10. All persons entering the regulated area shall remove all street clothing in the clean room and dress in disposable protective clothing and respiratory protection. Any person entering the clean room does so either from the outside with street clothing on or is coming from the shower room completely naked and thoroughly washed. Females required to enter the regulated area shall be ensured of their privacy throughout the entry/exit process by posting guards at both entry points to the PDF so no male can enter or exit the PDF during her stay in the PDF.2.Shower Room: The Competent Person shall assure that the shower room is a completely water tight compartment to be used for the movement of all personnel from the clean room to the equipment room and for the showering of all personnel going from the equipment room to the clean room. Each shower shall be constructed so water runs down the walls of the shower and into a drip pan. Install a freely draining smooth floor on top of the shower pan. The shower room shall be separated from the rest of the building and from the clean room and equipment room using air tight walls made from at least 3 layers of 6 mil opaque fire retardant poly. The shower shall be equipped with a shower head and controls, hot and cold water, drainage, soap dish and continuous supply of soap, and shall be maintained in a sanitary condition throughout its use. The controls shall be arranged so an individual can shower without assistance. Provide a flexible hose shower head, hose bibs and all other items shown on Shower Schematic. Waste water will be pumped to a drain after being filtered through a minimum of a 100 micron sock in the shower drain; a 20 micron filter; and a final 5 micron filter. Filters will be changed a minimum of daily or more often as needed. Filter changes must be done in the shower to prevent loss of contaminated water. Hose down all shower surfaces after each shift and clean any debris from the shower pan. Residue is to be disposed of as asbestos waste.3.Equipment Room: The Competent Person shall provide an equipment room which shall be an air tight compartment for the storage of work equipment/tools, reusable personal protective equipment, except for a respirator and for use as a gross decontamination area for personnel exiting the regulated area. The equipment room shall be separated from the regulated area by a minimum 3 foot wide door made with 2 layers of 6 mil opaque fire retardant poly. The equipment room shall be separated from the regulated area, the shower room and the rest of the building by air tight walls and ceiling constructed of a minimum of 3 layers of 6 mil opaque fire retardant poly. Damp wipe all surfaces of the equipment room after each shift change. Provide an additional loose layer of 6 mil fire retardant poly per shift change and remove this layer after each shift. If needed, provide a temporary electrical sub-panel equipped with GFCI in the equipment room to accommodate any equipment required in the regulated area.4.The PDF shall be as follows: Clean room at the entrance followed by a shower room followed by an equipment room leading to the regulated area. Each doorway in the PDF shall be a minimum of 2 layers of 6 mil opaque fire retardant poly.1.9.5 WASTE/EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION FACILITY (W/EDF)The Competent Person shall provide an W/EDF consisting of a wash room, holding room, and clean room for removal of waste, equipment and contaminated material from the regulated area. Personnel shall not enter or exit the W/EDF except in the event of an emergency. Clean debris and residue in the W/EDF daily. All surfaces in the W/EDF shall be wiped/hosed down after each shift and all debris shall be cleaned from the shower pan. The W/EDF shall consist of the following:1.Wash Down Station: Provide an enclosed shower unit in the regulated area just outside the Wash Room as an equipment bag and container cleaning station.2.Wash Room: Provide a wash room for cleaning of bagged or containerized asbestos containing waste materials passed from the regulated area. Construct the wash room using 50 x 100 mm (2" x 4") wood framing and 3 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly. Locate the wash room so that packaged materials, after being wiped clean, can be passed to the Holding Room. Doorways in the wash room shall be constructed of 2 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly.3.Holding Room: Provide a holding room as a drop location for bagged materials passed from the wash room. Construct the holding room using 50 x 100 mm (2" x 4") wood framing and 3 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly. The holding room shall be located so that bagged material cannot be passed from the wash room to the clean room unless it goes through the holding room. Doorways in the holding room shall be constructed of 2 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly.4.Clean Room: Provide a clean room to isolate the holding room from the exterior of the regulated area. Construct the clean room using 2 x 4 wood framing and 2 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly. The clean room shall be located so as to provide access to the holding room from the building exterior. Doorways to the clean room shall be constructed of 2 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly. When a negative pressure differential system is used, a rigid enclosure separation between the W/EDF clean room and the adjacent areas shall be provided.5.The W/EDF shall be as follows: Wash Room leading to a Holding Room followed by a Clean Room leading to outside the regulated area. See diagram.1.9.6 WASTE/EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURESAt the washdown station in the regulated area, thoroughly wet clean contaminated equipment and/or sealed polyethylene bags and pass into Wash Room after visual inspection. When passing anything into the Wash Room, close all doorways of the W/EDF, other than the doorway between the washdown station and the Wash Room. Keep all outside personnel clear of the W/EDF. Once inside the Wash Room, wet clean the equipment and/or bags. After cleaning and inspection, pass items into the Holding Room. Close all doorways except the doorway between the Holding Room and the Clean Room. Workers from the Clean Room/Exterior shall enter the Holding Room and remove the decontaminated/cleaned equipment/bags for removal and disposal. These personnel will not be required to wear PPE. At no time shall personnel from the clean side be allowed to enter the Wash Room.PART 2 - PRODUCTS, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT2.1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Prior to the start of work, the contractor shall provide and maintain a sufficient quantity of materials and equipment to assure continuous and efficient work throughout the duration of the project. Work shall not start unless the following items have been delivered to the site and the CPIH/CIH has submitted verification to the VA's representative.A.All materials shall be delivered in their original package, container or bundle bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand name (where applicable).B.Store all materials subject to damage off the ground, away from wet or damp surfaces and under cover sufficient enough to prevent damage or contamination. Flammable and combustible materials cannot be stored inside buildings. Replacement materials shall be stored outside of the regulated area until abatement is completed.C.The Contractor shall not block or hinder use of buildings by patients, staff, and visitors to the VA in partially occupied buildings by placing materials/equipment in any unauthorized location.D.The Competent Person shall inspect for damaged, deteriorating or previously used materials. Such materials shall not be used and shall be removed from the worksite and disposed of properly.E.Polyethylene sheeting for walls in the regulated area shall be a minimum of 4-mils. For floors and all other uses, sheeting of at least 6-mil shall be used in widths selected to minimize the frequency of joints. Fire retardant poly shall be used throughout.F.The method of attaching polyethylene sheeting shall be agreed upon in advance by the Contractor and the VA and selected to minimize damage to equipment and surfaces. Method of attachment may include any combination of moisture resistant duct tape furring strips, spray glue, staples, nails, screws, lumber and plywood for enclosures or other effective procedures capable of sealing polyethylene to dissimilar finished or unfinished surfaces under both wet and dry conditions.G.Polyethylene sheeting utilized for the PDF shall be opaque white or black in color, 6 mil fire retardant poly.H.Installation and plumbing hardware, showers, hoses, drain pans, sump pumps and waste water filtration system shall be provided by the Contractor.I.An adequate number of HEPA vacuums, scrapers, sprayers, nylon brushes, brooms, disposable mops, rags, sponges, staple guns, shovels, ladders and scaffolding of suitable height and length as well as meeting OSHA requirements, fall protection devices, water hose to reach all areas in the regulated area, airless spray equipment, and any other tools, materials or equipment required to conduct the abatement project. All electrically operated hand tools, equipment, electric cords shall be connected to GFCI protection.J.Special protection for objects in the regulated area shall be detailed (e.g., plywood over carpeting or hardwood floors to prevent damage from scaffolds, water and falling material).K.Disposal bags – 2 layers of 6 mil poly for asbestos waste shall be pre-printed with labels, markings and address as required by OSHA, EPA and DOT regulations.L.The VA shall be provided an advance copy of the MSDS as required for all hazardous chemicals under OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1200 - Hazard Communication in the pre-start meeting submittal. Chlorinated compounds shall not be used with any spray adhesive, mastic remover or other product. Appropriate encapsulant(s) shall be provided.M.OSHA DANGER demarcation signs, as many and as required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101(k)(7) shall be provided and placed by the Competent Person. All other posters and notices required by Federal and State regulations shall be posted in the Clean Room.N.Adequate and appropriate PPE for the project and number of personnel/shifts shall be provided. All personal protective equipment issued must be based on a written hazard assessment conducted under 29 CFR 1910.132(d).2.2 MONITORING, INSPECTION AND TESTING2.2.1 GENERALA.Perform throughout abatement work monitoring, inspection and testing inside and around the regulated area in accordance with the OSHA requirements and these specifications. OSHA requires that the employee exposure to asbestos must not exceed 0.1 fiber per cubic centimeter (f/cc) of air, averaged over an 8-hour work shift. The CPIH/CIH is responsible for and shall inspect and oversee the performance of the Contractor IH Technician. The IH Technician shall continuously inspect and monitor conditions inside the regulated area to ensure compliance with these specifications. In addition, the CPIH/CIH shall personally manage air sample collection, analysis, and evaluation for personnel, regulated area, and adjacent area samples to satisfy OSHA requirements. Additional inspection and testing requirements are also indicated in other parts of this specification.B.The VA will employ an independent industrial hygienist (VPIH/CIH) consultant and/or use its own IH to perform various services on behalf of the VA. The VPIH/CIH will perform the necessary monitoring, inspection, testing, and other support services to ensure that VA patients, employees, and visitors will not be adversely affected by the abatement work, and that the abatement work proceeds in accordance with these specifications, that the abated areas or abated buildings have been successfully decontaminated. The work of the VPIH/CIH consultant in no way relieves the Contractor from their responsibility to perform the work in accordance with contract/specification requirements, to perform continuous inspection, monitoring and testing for the safety of their employees, and to perform other such services as specified. The cost of the VPIH/CIH and their services will be borne by the VA except for any repeat of final inspection and testing that may be required due to unsatisfactory initial results. Any repeated final inspections and/or testing, if required, will be paid for by the Contractor.C.If fibers counted by the VPIH/CIH during abatement work, either inside or outside the regulated area, utilizing the NIOSH 7400 air monitoring method, exceed the specified respective limits, the Contractor shall stop work. The Contractor may request confirmation of the results by analysis of the samples by TEM. Request must be in writing and submitted to the VA's representative. Cost for the confirmation of results will be borne by the Contractor for both the collection and analysis of samples and for the time delay that may/does result for this confirmation. Confirmation sampling and analysis will be the responsibility of the CPIH with review and approval of the VPIH/CIH. An agreement between the CPIH/CIH and the VPIH/CIH shall be reached on the exact details of the confirmation effort, in writing, including such things as the number of samples, location, collection, quality control on-site, analytical laboratory, interpretation of results and any follow-up actions. This written agreement shall be co-signed by the IH's and delivered to the VA's representative.2.2.2 SCOPE OF SERVICES OF THE VPIH/CIH CONSULTANTA.The purpose of the work of the VPIH/CIH is to: assure quality; adherence to the specification; resolve problems; prevent the spread of contamination beyond the regulated area; and assure clearance at the end of the project. In addition, their work includes performing the final inspection and testing to determine whether the regulated area or building has been adequately decontaminated. All air monitoring is to be done utilizing PCM/TEM. The VPIH/CIH will perform the following tasks:1.Task 1: Establish background levels before abatement begins by collecting background samples. Retain samples for possible TEM analysis.2.Task 2: Perform continuous air monitoring, inspection, and testing outside the regulated area during actual abatement work to detect any faults in the regulated area isolation and any adverse impact on the surroundings from regulated area activities.3.Task 3: Perform unannounced visits to spot check overall compliance of work with contract/specifications. These visits may include any inspection, monitoring, and testing inside and outside the regulated area and all aspects of the operation except personnel monitoring. 4.Task 4: Provide support to the VA representative such as evaluation of submittals from the Contractor, resolution of conflicts, interpret data, etc.5.Task 5: Perform, in the presence of the VA representative, final inspection and testing of a decontaminated regulated area at the conclusion of the abatement to certify compliance with all regulations and VA requirements/specifications.6.Task 6: Issue certificate of decontamination for each regulated area and project report.B.All documentation, inspection results and testing results generated by the VPIH/CIH will be available to the Contractor for information and consideration. The Contractor shall cooperate with and support the VPIH/CIH for efficient and smooth performance of their work.C.The monitoring and inspection results of the VPIH/CIH will be used by the VA to issue any Stop Removal orders to the Contractor during abatement work and to accept or reject a regulated area or building as decontaminated.2.2.3 MONITORING, INSPECTION AND TESTING BY CONTRACTOR CPIH/CIHThe Contractor’s CPIH/CIH is responsible for managing all monitoring, inspections, and testing required by these specifications, as well as any and all regulatory requirements adopted by these specifications. The CPIH/CIH is responsible for the continuous monitoring of all subsystems and procedures which could affect the health and safety of the Contractor’s personnel. Safety and health conditions and the provision of those conditions inside the regulated area for all persons entering the regulated area is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor/Competent Person. The person performing the personnel and area air monitoring inside the regulated area shall be an IH Technician, who shall be trained and shall have specialized field experience in sampling and analysis. The IH Technician shall have successfully completed a NIOSH 582 Course or equivalent and provide documentation. The IH Technician shall participate in the AIHA Asbestos Analysis Registry or participate in the Proficiency Analytic Testing program of AIHA for fiber counting quality control assurance. The IH Technician shall also be an accredited EPA AHERA/State Contractor/Supervisor or Abatement Worker and Building Inspector. The IH Technician shall have participated in five abatement projects collecting personal and area samples as well as responsibility for documentation on substantially similar projects in size and scope. The analytic laboratory used by the Contractor to analyze the samples shall be AIHA accredited for asbestos PAT and approved by the VA prior to start of the project. A daily log shall be maintained by the CPIH/CIH or IH Technician, documenting all OSHA requirements for air personal monitoring for asbestos in 29 CFR 1926.1101(f), (g) and Appendix A. This log shall be made available to the VA representative and the VPIH/CIH upon request. The log will contain, at a minimum, information on personnel or area samples, other persons represented by the sample, the date of sample collection, start and stop times for sampling, sample volume, flow rate, and fibers/cc. The CPIH/CIH shall collect and analyze samples for each representative job being done in the regulated area, i.e., removal, wetting, clean-up, and load-out. No fewer than two personal samples per shift shall be collected and one area sample per 1,000 square feet of regulated area where abatement is taking place and one sample per shift in the clean room area shall be collected. In addition to the continuous monitoring required, the CPIH/CIH will perform inspection and testing at the final stages of abatement for each regulated area as specified in the CPIH/CIH responsibilities. Additionally, the CPIH/CIH will monitor and record pressure readings within the containment daily with a minimum of two readings at the beginning and at the end of a shift, and submit the data in the daily report. 2.3 ASBESTOS hAZARD aBATEMENT pLANThe Contractor shall have established an Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan (AHAP) in printed form and loose leaf folder consisting of simplified text, diagrams, sketches, and pictures that establish and explain clearly the procedures to be followed during all phases of the work by the Contractor's personnel. The AHAP must be modified as needed to address specific requirements of this project and the specifications. The AHAP shall be submitted for review and approval to the VA prior to the start of any abatement work. The minimum topics and areas to be covered by the AHAPs are:A.Minimum Personnel QualificationsB.Emergency Action Plan/Contingency Plans and ArrangementsC.Security and Safety ProceduresD.Respiratory Protection/Personal Protective Equipment Program and TrainingE.Medical Surveillance Program and RecordkeepingF.Regulated Area Requirements - Containment Barriers/Isolation of Regulated AreaG.Decontamination Facilities and Entry/Exit Procedures (PDF and W/EDF)H.Negative Pressure Systems RequirementsI.Monitoring, Inspections, and Testing J.Removal Procedures for ACM K.Removal of Contaminated Soil (if applicable)L.Encapsulation Procedures for ACMM.Disposal of ACM waste/equipmentN.Regulated Area Decontamination/Clean-upO.Regulated Area Visual and Air ClearanceP.Project Completion/Closeout2.4 SUBMITTALS2.4.1 PRE-START MEETING SUBMITTALSSubmit to the VA a minimum of 14 days prior to the pre-start meeting the following for review and approval. Meeting this requirement is a prerequisite for the pre-start meeting for this project:A.Submit a detailed work schedule for the entire project reflecting contract documents and the phasing/schedule requirements from the CPM chart.B.Submit a staff organization chart showing all personnel who will be working on the project and their capacity/function. Provide their qualifications, training, accreditations, and licenses, as appropriate. Provide a copy of the "Certificate of Worker's Acknowledgment" and the "Affidavit of Medical Surveillance and Respiratory Protection" for each person.C.Submit Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan developed specifically for this project, incorporating the requirements of the specifications, prepared, signed and dated by the CPIH/CIH.D.Submit the specifics of the materials and equipment to be used for this project with manufacturer names, model numbers, performance characteristics, pictures/diagrams, and number available for the following:1.Supplied air system, negative air machines, HEPA vacuums, air monitoring pumps, calibration devices, pressure differential monitoring device and emergency power generating system.2.Waste water filtration system, shower system, containment barriers.3.Encapsulants, surfactants, hand held sprayers, airless sprayers, glovebags, and fire extinguishers.4.Respirators, protective clothing, personal protective equipment. 5.Fire safety equipment to be used in the regulated area.E.Submit the name, location, and phone number of the approved landfill; proof/verification the landfill is approved for ACM disposal; the landfill's requirements for ACM waste; the type of vehicle to be used for transportation; and name, address, and phone number of subcontractor, if used. Proof of asbestos training for transportation personnel shall be provided.F.Submit required notifications and arrangements made with regulatory agencies having regulatory jurisdiction and the specific contingency/emergency arrangements made with local health, fire, ambulance, hospital authorities and any other notifications/arrangements.G.Submit the name, location and verification of the laboratory and/or personnel to be used for analysis of air and/or bulk samples. Personal air monitoring must be done in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101(f) and Appendix A. Area or clearance air monitoring shall be conducted in accordance with EPA AHERA protocols.H.Submit qualifications verification: Submit the following evidence of qualifications. Make sure that all references are current and verifiable by providing current phone numbers and documentation.1.Asbestos Abatement Company: Project experience within the past 3 years; listing projects first most similar to this project: Project Name; Type of Abatement; Duration; Cost; Reference Name/Phone Number; Final Clearance; Completion Date2.List of project(s) halted by owner, A/E, IH, regulatory agency in the last 3 years: Project Name; Reason; Date; Reference Name/Number; Resolution3.List asbestos regulatory citations (e.g., OSHA), notices of violations (e.g., Federal and state EPA), penalties, and legal actions taken against the company including and of the company’s officers (including damages paid) in the last 3 years. Provide copies and all information needed for verification.I.Submit information on personnel: Provide a resume; address each item completely; copies of certificates, accreditations, and licenses. Submit an affidavit signed by the CPIH/CIH stating that all personnel submitted below have medical records in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101(m) and 29 CFR 1910.20 and that the company has implemented a medical surveillance program and written respiratory protection program, and maintains recordkeeping in accordance with the above regulations. Submit the phone number and doctor/clinic/hospital used for medical evaluations.1.CPIH/CIH and IH Technician: Name; years of abatement experience; list of projects similar to this one; certificates, licenses, accreditations for proof of AHERA/OSHA specialized asbestos training; professional affiliations; number of workers trained; samples of training materials; samples of AHAPs developed; medical opinion; and current respirator fit test.petent Person(s)/Supervisor(s): Number; names; social security numbers; years of abatement experience as Competent Person/Supervisor; list of similar projects in size/complexity as Competent Person/Supervisor; as a worker; certificates, licenses, accreditations; proof of AHERA/OSHA specialized asbestos training; maximum number of personnel supervised on a project; medical opinion (asbestos surveillance and respirator use); and current respirator fit test.3.Workers: Numbers; names; social security numbers; years of abatement experience; certificates, licenses, accreditations; training courses in asbestos abatement and respiratory protection; medical opinion (asbestos surveillance and respirator use); and current respirator fit test.J.Submit copies of State license for asbestos abatement; copy of insurance policy, including exclusions with a letter from agent stating in plain language the coverage provided and the fact that asbestos abatement activities are covered by the policy; copy of AHAPs incorporating the requirements of this specification; information on who provides your training, how often; who provides medical surveillance, how often; who performs and how is personal air monitoring of abatement workers conducted; a list of references of independent laboratories/IH's familiar with your air monitoring and standard operating procedures; and copies of monitoring results of the five referenced projects listed and analytical method(s) used.K. Rented equipment must be decontaminated prior to returning to the rental agency.L.Submit, before the start of work, the manufacturer's technical data for all types of encapsulants, all MSDS and application instructions.2.4.2 SUBMITTALS DURING ABATEMENTA.The Competent Person shall maintain and submit a daily log at the regulated area documenting the dates and times of the following: purpose, attendees and summary of meetings; all personnel entering/exiting the regulated area; document and discuss the resolution of unusual events such as barrier breeching, equipment failures, emergencies, and any cause for stopping work; and representative air monitoring and results/TWA's/EL's. Submit this information daily to the VPIH/CIH.B.The CPIH/CIH shall document and maintain the inspection and approval of the regulated area preparation prior to start of work and daily during work.1.Removal of any poly barriers.2.Visual inspection/testing by the CPIH/CIH or IH Technician prior to application of lockdown encapsulant.3.Packaging and removal of ACM waste from regulated area.4.Disposal of ACM waste materials; copies of Waste Shipment Records/landfill receipts to the VA's representative on a weekly basis.2.4.3 SUBMITTALS AT COMPLETION OF ABATEMENTThe CPIH/CIH shall submit a project report consisting of the daily log book requirements and documentation of events during the abatement project including Waste Shipment Records signed by the landfill's agent. It will also include information on the containment and transportation of waste from the containment with applicable Chain of Custody forms. The report shall include a certificate of completion, signed and dated by the CPIH/CIH, in accordance with Attachment #1. All clearance and perimeter area samples must be submitted. The VA Representative will retain the abatement report after completion of the project and provide copies of the abatement report to VAMC Office of Engineer and the Safety Office.2.5 ENCAPSULANTS2.5.1 TYPES OF ENCAPSULANTSA.The following four types of encapsulants, if used, must comply with comply with performance requirements as stated in paragraph 2.6.2:1.Removal encapsulant - used as a wetting agent to remove ACM.2.Bridging encapsulant - provides a tough, durable coating on ACM.3.Penetrating encapsulant - penetrates/encapsulates ACM at least 13 mm (1/2"). 4.Lockdown encapsulant - seals microscopic fibers on surfaces after ACM removal.2.5.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSEncapsulants shall meet the latest requirements of EPA; shall not contain toxic or hazardous substances; or solvents; and shall comply with the following performance requirements:A.General Requirements for all Encapsulants:1.ASTM E84: Flame spread of 25; smoke emission of 50.2.University of Pittsburgh Protocol: Combustion Toxicity; zero mortality.3.ASTM C732: Accelerated Aging Test; Life Expectancy - 20 years.4.ASTM E96: Permeability - minimum of 0.4 perms.B.Bridging/Penetrating Encapsulants:1.ASTM E736: Cohesion/Adhesion Test - 24 kPa (50 lbs/ft2).2.ASTM E119: Fire Resistance - 3 hours (Classified by UL for use on fibrous/cementitious fireproofing).3.ASTM D2794: Gardner Impact Test; Impact Resistance - minimum 11.5 kg-mm (43 in/lb).4.ASTM D522: Mandrel Bend Test; Flexibility - no rupture or cracking.C.Lockdown Encapsulants:1.ASTM E119: Fire resistance - 3 hours (tested with fireproofing over encapsulant applied directly to steel member).2.ASTM E736: Bond Strength - 48 kPa (100 lbs/ft2) (test compatibility with cementitious and fibrous fireproofing).3.In certain situations, encapsulants may have to be applied to hot pipes/equipment. The encapsulant must be able to withstand high temperatures without cracking or off-gassing any noxious vapors during application.2.5.3 CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCEThe Contractor shall submit to the VA representative certification from the manufacturer indicating compliance with performance requirements for encapsulants when applied according to manufacturer recommendations.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 REGULATED AREA PREPARATIONS3.1.1 Site securityA.Regulated area access is to be restricted only to authorized, trained/accredited and protected personnel. These may include the Contractor's employees, employees of Subcontractors, VA employees and representatives, State and local inspectors, and any other designated individuals. A list of authorized personnel shall be established prior to commencing the project and be posted in the clean room of the decontamination unit.B.Entry into the regulated area by unauthorized individuals shall be reported immediately to the Competent Person by anyone observing the entry. The Competent Person shall immediately require any unauthorized person to leave the regulated area and then notify the VA Contracting Officer or VA Representative using the most expeditious means.C.A log book shall be maintained in the clean room of the decontamination unit. Anyone who enters the regulated area must record their name, affiliation, time in, and time out for each entry.D.Access to the regulated area shall be through a single decontamination unit. All other access (doors, windows, hallways, etc.) shall be sealed or locked to prevent entry to or exit from the regulated area. The only exceptions for this requirement are the waste/equipment load-out area which shall be sealed except during the removal of containerized asbestos waste from the regulated area, and emergency exits. Emergency exits shall not be locked from the inside; however, they shall be sealed with poly sheeting and taped until needed. In any situation where exposure to high temperatures which may result in a flame hazard, fire retardant poly sheeting must be used.E.The Contractor's Competent Person shall control site security during abatement operations in order to isolate work in progress and protect adjacent personnel. A 24 hour security system shall be provided at the entrance to the regulated area to assure that all entrants are logged in/out and that only authorized personnel are allowed entrance.F.The Contractor will have the VA's assistance in notifying adjacent personnel of the presence, location and quantity of ACM in the regulated area and enforcement of restricted access by the VA's employees.G.The regulated area shall be locked during non-working hours and secured by VA Representative or Competent Person. The VA Police should be informed of asbestos abatement regulated areas to provide security checks during facility rounds and emergency response.3.1.2. SIGNAGE and power managementA.Post OSHA DANGER signs meeting the specifications of OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 at any location and approaches to the regulated area where airborne concentrations of asbestos may exceed the PEL. Signs shall be posted at a distance sufficiently far enough away from the regulated area to permit any personnel to read the sign and take the necessary measures to avoid exposure. Additional signs will be posted following construction of the regulated area enclosure.B.Shut down and lock out/tag out electric power to the regulated area. Provide temporary power and lighting. Insure safe installation including GFCI of temporary power sources and equipment by compliance with all applicable electrical code and OSHA requirements for temporary electrical systems. Electricity shall be provided by the VA.C.Shut down and lock out/tag out heating, cooling, and air conditioning system (HVAC) components that are in, supply or pass through the regulated area. Investigate the regulated area and agree on pre-abatement condition with the VA's representative. Seal all intake and exhaust vents in the regulated area with duct tape and 2 layers of 6-mil poly. Also, seal any seams in system components that pass through the regulated area. Remove all contaminated HVAC system filters and place in labeled 6-mil polyethylene disposal bags for staging and eventual disposal as asbestos waste.3.1.3NEGATIVE PRESSURE FILTRATION SYSTEMThe Contractor shall provide enough HEPA negative air machines to effect > - 0.02” WCG pressure. The Competent Person shall determine the number of units needed for the regulated area by dividing the cubic feet in the regulated area by 15 and then dividing that result by the cubic feet per minute (CFM) for each unit to determine the number of units needed to effect > - 0.02” WCG pressure. Provide a standby unit in the event of machine failure and/or emergency in an adjacent area.NIOSH has done extensive studies and has determined that negative air machines typically operate at ~50% efficiency. The contractor shall consider this in their determination of number of units needed to provide > - 0.02” WCG pressure. The contractor shall use double the number of machines, based on their calculations, or submit proof their machines operate at stated capacities, at a 2" pressure drop across the filters.3.1.3.1 DESIGN AND LAYOUTA.Before start of work submit the design and layout of the regulated area and the negative air machines. The submittal shall indicate the number of, location of and size of negative air machines. The point(s) of exhaust, air flow within the regulated area, anticipated negative pressure differential, and supporting calculations for sizing shall be provided. In addition, submit the following:1.Method of supplying power to the units and designation/location of the panels.2.Description of testing method(s) for correct air volume and pressure differential. 3.If auxiliary power supply is to be provided for the negative air machines, provide a schematic diagram of the power supply and manufacturer's data on the generator and switch.3.1.3.2 NEGATIVE AIR MACHINES (HEPA UNITS)A.Negative Air Machine Cabinet: The cabinet shall be constructed of steel or other durable material capable of withstanding potential damage from rough handling and transportation. The width of the cabinet shall be less than 30" in order to fit in standard doorways. The cabinet must be factory sealed to prevent asbestos fibers from being released during use, transport, or maintenance. Any access to and replacement of filters shall be from the inlet end. The unit must be on casters or wheels.B.Negative Air Machine Fan: The rating capacity of the fan must indicate the CFM under actual operating conditions. Manufacturer's typically use "free-air" (no resistance) conditions when rating fans. The fan must be a centrifugal type fan.C.Negative Air Machine Final Filter: The final filter shall be a HEPA filter. The filter media must be completely sealed on all edges within a structurally rigid frame. The filter shall align with a continuous flexible gasket material in the negative air machine housing to form an air tight seal. Each HEPA filter shall be certified by the manufacturer to have an efficiency of not less than 99.97%. Testing shall have been done in accordance with Military Standard MIL-STD-282 and Army Instruction Manual 136-300-175A. Each filter must bear a UL586 label to indicate ability to perform under specified conditions. Each filter shall be marked with the name of the manufacturer, serial number, air flow rating, efficiency and resistance, and the direction of test air flow.D.Negative Air Machine Pre-filters: The pre-filters, which protect the final HEPA filter by removing larger particles, are required to prolong the operating life of the HEPA filter. Two stages of pre-filtration are required. A first stage pre-filter shall be a low efficiency type for particles 10 ?m or larger. A second stage pre-filter shall have a medium efficiency effective for particles down to 5 ?m or larger. Pre-filters shall be installed either on or in the intake opening of the NAM and the second stage filter must be held in place with a special housing or clamps.E.Negative Air Machine Instrumentation: Each unit must be equipped with a gauge to measure the pressure drop across the filters and to indicate when filters have become loaded and need to be changed. A table indicating the cfm for various pressure readings on the gauge shall be affixed near the gauge for reference or the reading shall indicate at what point the filters shall be changed, noting cfm delivery. The unit must have an elapsed time meter to show total hours of operation.F.Negative Air Machine Safety and Warning Devices: An electrical/ mechanical lockout must be provided to prevent the fan from being operated without a HEPA filter. Units must be equipped with an automatic shutdown device to stop the fan in the event of a rupture in the HEPA filter or blockage in the discharge of the fan. Warning lights are required to indicate normal operation; too high a pressure drop across filters; or too low of a pressure drop across filters.G.Negative Air Machine Electrical: All electrical components shall be approved by the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) and Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Each unit must be provided with overload protection and the motor, fan, fan housing, and cabinet must be grounded.H.It is essential that replacement HEPA filters be tested using an “in-line” testing method, to ensure the seal around the periphery was not damaged during replacement. Damage to the outer HEPA filter seal could allow contaminated air to bypass the HEPA filter and be discharged to an inappropriate location. Contractor will provide written documentation of test results for negative air machine units with HEPA filters changed by the contractor or documentation when changed and tested by the contractor filters3.1.3.3 PRESSURE DIFFERENTIALThe fully operational negative air system within the regulated area shall continuously maintain a pressure differential of -0.02" water column gauge. Before any disturbance of any asbestos material, this shall be demonstrated to the VA by use of a pressure differential meter/manometer as required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101(e)(5)(i). The Competent Person shall be responsible for providing, maintaining, and documenting the negative pressure and air changes as required by OSHA and this specification.3.1.3.4 MONITORINGThe pressure differential shall be continuously monitored and recorded between the regulated area and the area outside the regulated area with a monitoring device that incorporates a strip chart recorder. The strip chart recorder shall become part of the project log and shall indicate at least -0.02" water column gauge for the duration of the project.3.1.3.5 AUXILIARY GENERATORIf the building is occupied during abatement, provide an auxiliary gasoline/diesel generator located outside the building in an area protected from the weather. In the event of a power failure of the general power grid and the VAMC emergency power grid, the generator must automatically start and supply power to a minimum of 50% of the negative air machines in operation.3.1.3.6SUPPLEMENTAL MAKE-UP AIR INLETSProvide, as needed for proper air flow in the regulated area, in a location approved by the VA, openings in the plastic sheeting to allow outside air to flow into the regulated area. Auxiliary makeup air inlets must be located as far from the negative air machines as possible, off the floor near the ceiling, and away from the barriers that separate the regulated area from the occupied clean areas. Cover the inlets with weighted flaps which will seal in the event of failure of the negative pressure system. 3.1.3.7 TESTING THE SYSTEMThe negative pressure system must be tested before any ACM is disturbed in any way. After the regulated area has been completely prepared, the decontamination units set up, and the negative air machines installed, start the units up one at a time. Demonstrate and document the operation and testing of the negative pressure system to the VA using smoke tubes and a negative pressure gauge. Verification and documentation of adequate negative pressure differential across each barrier must be done at the start of each work shift. 3.1.3.8 DEMONSTRATION OF THE NEGATIVE PRESSURE Filtration SYSTEMThe demonstration of the operation of the negative pressure system to the VA shall include, but not be limited to, the following:A.Plastic barriers and sheeting move lightly in toward the regulated area.B.Curtains of the decontamination units move in toward regulated area.C.There is a noticeable movement of air through the decontamination units. Use the smoke tube to demonstrate air movement from the clean room to the shower room to the equipment room to the regulated area.D.Use smoke tubes to demonstrate air is moving across all areas in which work is to be done. Use a differential pressure gauge to indicate a negative pressure of at least -0.02" across every barrier separating the regulated area from the rest of the building. Modify the system as necessary to meet the above requirements. 3.1.3.9 USE OF THE NEGATIVE PRESSURE FILTRATION SYSTEMDURING ABATEMENT OPERATIONSA.Start units before beginning any disturbance of ACM occurs. After work begins, the units shall run continuously, maintaining 4 actual air changes per hour at a negative pressure differential of -0.02" water column gauge, for the duration of the work until a final visual clearance and final air clearance has been successfully completed. No negative air units shall be shut down at any time unless authorized by the VA Contracting Officer, verbally and in writing.B.Pre-cleaning of ACM contaminated items shall be performed after the enclosure has been erected and negative pressure has been established in the work area. After items have been pre-cleaned and decontaminated, they may be removed from the work area for storage until the completion of abatement in the work area.C.Abatement work shall begin at a location farthest from the units and proceed towards them. If an electric failure occurs, the Competent Person shall stop all abatement work and immediately begin wetting all exposed asbestos materials for the duration of the power outage. Abatement work shall not resume until power is restored and all units are operating properly again.D.The negative air machines shall continue to run after all work is completed and until a final visual clearance and a final air clearance has been successfully completed for that regulated area.3.1.3.10 DISMANTLING THE SYSTEMAfter completion of the final visual and final air clearance has been obtained by the VPIH/CIH, the units may be shut down. The unit exterior surfaces shall have been completely decontaminated; pre-filters are not to be removed and the units inlet/outlet sealed with 2 layers of 6 mil poly immediately after shut down. No filter removal shall occur at the VA site following successful completion of site clearance. OSHA/EPA/DOT asbestos shall be attached to the units.3.1.4 CONTAINMENT BARRIERS AND COVERINGS IN THE REGULATED AREA3.1.4.1 GENERALSeal off the perimeter to the regulated area to completely isolate the regulated area from adjacent spaces. All surfaces in the regulated area must be covered to prevent contamination and to facilitate clean-up. Should adjacent areas become contaminated as a result of the work, shall immediately stop work and clean up the contamination at no additional cost to the VA. Provide firestopping and identify all fire barrier penetrations due to abatement work as specified in Section 3.1.4.8; FIRESTOPPING.3.1.4.2 PREPARATION PRIOR TO SEALING THE REGULATED AREAPlace all tools, scaffolding, materials and equipment needed for working in the regulated area prior to erecting any plastic sheeting. All uncontaminated removable furniture, equipment and/or supplies shall be removed by the VA from the regulated area before commencing work. Any objects remaining in the regulated area shall be completely covered with 2 layers of 6-mil fire retardant poly sheeting and secured with duct tape. Lock out and tag out any HVAC/electrical systems in the regulated area.3.1.4.3 CONTROLLING ACCESS TO THE REGULATED AREAAccess to the regulated area is allowed only through the personnel decontamination facility (PDF). All other means of access shall be eliminated and OSHA DANGER demarcation signs posted as required by OSHA. If the regulated area is adjacent to, or within view of an occupied area, provide a visual barrier of 6 mil opaque fire retardant poly to prevent building occupant observation. If the adjacent area is accessible to the public, the barrier must be solid and capable of withstanding the negative pressure.3.1.4.4 CRITICAL BARRIERSCompletely separate any operations in the regulated area from adjacent areas using 2 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly and duct tape. Individually seal with 2 layers of 6 mil poly and duct tape all HVAC openings into the regulated area. Individually seal all lighting fixtures, clocks, doors, windows, convectors, speakers, or any other objects/openings in the regulated area. Heat must be shut off any objects covered with poly.3.1.4.5 PRIMARY BARRIERSA.Cover the regulated area with two layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly on the floors and two layers of 6 mil, fire retardant poly on the walls, unless otherwise directed in writing by the VA representative. Floor layers must form a right angle with the wall and turn up the wall at least 300 mm (12"). Seams must overlap at least 1800 mm (6') and must be spray glued and taped. Install sheeting so that layers can be removed independently from each other. Carpeting shall be covered with three layers of 6 mil poly. Corrugated cardboard sheets must be placed between the bottom and middle layers of poly. Mechanically support and seal with duct tape and glue all wall layers.B.If stairs and ramps are covered with 6 mil plastic, two layers must be used. Provide 19 mm (3/4") exterior grade plywood treads held in place with duct tape/glue on the plastic. Do not cover rungs or rails with any isolation materials.3.1.4.6 SECONDARY BARRIERSA loose layer of 6 mil shall be used as a drop cloth to protect the primary layers from debris generated during the abatement. This layer shall be replaced as needed during the work and at a minimum once per work day.3.1.4.7 EXTENSION OF THE REGULATED AREAIf the enclosure of the regulated area is breached in any way that could allow contamination to occur, the affected area shall be included in the regulated area and constructed as per this section. Decontamination measures must be started immediately and continue until air monitoring indicates background levels are met.3.1.4.8 FIRESTOPPINGA.Through penetrations caused by cables, cable trays, pipes, sleeves, conduits, etc. must be firestopped with a fire-rated firestop system providing an air tight seal.B.Firestop materials that are not equal to the wall or ceiling penetrated shall be brought to the attention of the VA Representative. The contractor shall list all areas of penetration, the type of sealant used, and whether or not the location is fire rated. Any discovery of penetrations during abatement shall be brought to the attention of the VA representative immediately. All walls, floors and ceilings are considered fire rated unless otherwise determined by the VA Representative or Fire Marshall.C.Any visible openings whether or not caused by a penetration shall be reported by the Contractor to the VA Representative for a sealant system determination. Firestops shall meet ASTM E814 and UL 1479 requirements for the opening size, penetrant, and fire rating needed.3.1.5 Sanitary facilitiesThe Contractor shall provide sanitary facilities for abatement personnel and maintain them in a clean and sanitary condition throughout the abatement project.3.1.6 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENTProvide whole body clothing, head coverings, gloves and foot coverings and any other personal protective equipment as determined by conducting the hazard assessment required by OSHA at 29 CFR 1910.132 (d). The Competent Person shall ensure the integrity of personal protective equipment worn for the duration of the project. Duct tape shall be used to secure all suit sleeves to wrists and to secure foot coverings at the ankle.3.1.7 Pre-cleaningThe VA will provide water for abatement purposes. The Contractor shall connect to the existing VA system. The service to the shower(s) shall be supplied with backflow prevention.Pre-cleaning of ACM contaminated items shall be performed after the enclosure has been erected and negative pressure has been established in the work area. All workers performing pre-cleaning activities must don appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE), as specified throughout this document and as approved in the Contractor’s work plan. After items have been pre-cleaned and decontaminated, they may be removed from the work area for storage until the completion of abatement in the work area.Pre-clean all movable objects within the regulated area using a HEPA filtered vacuum and/or wet cleaning methods as appropriate. After cleaning, these objects shall be removed from the regulated area and carefully stored in an uncontaminated location. Drapes, clothing, upholstered furniture and other fabric items should be disposed of as asbestos contaminated waste. Cleaning these asbestos contaminated items utilizing HEPA vacuum techniques and off-premises steam cleaning is very difficult and cannot guarantee decontamination. Carpeting will be disposed of prior to abatement if in the regulated area. If ACM floor tile is attached to the carpet while the Contractor is removing the carpet that section of the carpet will be disposed of as asbestos waste.Pre-clean all fixed objects in the regulated area using HEPA filtered vacuums and/or wet cleaning techniques as appropriate. Careful attention must be paid to machinery behind grills or gratings where access may be difficult but contamination may be significant. Also, pay particular attention to wall, floor and ceiling penetration behind fixed items. After pre-cleaning, enclose fixed objects with 2 layers of 6-mil poly and seal securely in place with duct tape. Objects (e.g., permanent fixtures, shelves, electronic equipment, laboratory tables, sprinklers, alarm systems, closed circuit TV equipment and computer cables) which must remain in the regulated area and that require special ventilation or enclosure requirements should be designated here along with specified means of protection. Contact the manufacturer for special protection requirements.Pre-clean all surfaces in the regulated area using HEPA filtered vacuums and/or wet cleaning methods as appropriate. Do not use any methods that would raise dust such as dry sweeping or vacuuming with equipment not equipped with HEPA filters. Do not disturb asbestos-containing materials during this pre-cleaning phase.3.1.8 PRE-ABATEMENT ACTIVITIES3.1.8.1 PRE-ABATEMENT MeetingThe VA representative, upon receipt, review, and substantial approval of all pre-abatement submittals and verification by the CPIH/CIH that all materials and equipment required for the project are on the site, will arrange for a pre-abatement meeting between the Contractor, the CPIH/CIH, Competent Person(s), the VA representative(s), and the VPIH/CIH. The purpose of the meeting is to discuss any aspect of the submittals needing clarification or amplification and to discuss any aspect of the project execution and the sequence of the operation. The Contractor shall be prepared to provide any supplemental information/documentation to the VA's representative regarding any submittals, documentation, materials or equipment. Upon satisfactory resolution of any outstanding issues, the VA's representative will issue a written order to proceed to the Contractor. No abatement work of any kind described in the following provisions shall be initiated prior to the VA written order to proceed.3.1.8.2 PRE-ABATEMENT CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATIONSA.Perform all preparatory work for the first regulated area in accordance with the approved work schedule and with this specification.B.Upon completion of all preparatory work, the CPIH/CIH will inspect the work and systems and will notify the VA's representative when the work is completed in accordance with this specification. The VA's representative may inspect the regulated area and the systems with the VPIH/CIH and may require that upon satisfactory inspection, the Contractor's employees perform all major aspects of the approved AHAP(s), especially worker protection, respiratory systems, contingency plans, decontamination procedures, and monitoring to demonstrate satisfactory operation. The operational systems for respiratory protection and the negative pressure system shall be demonstrated for proper performance.C.The CPIH/CIH shall document the pre-abatement activities described above and deliver a copy to the VA's representative.D.Upon satisfactory inspection of the installation of and operation of systems the VA's representative will notify the Contractor in writing to proceed with the asbestos abatement work in accordance with this specification and all applicable regulations.3.1.8.3 PRE-ABATEMENT INSPECTIONS AND PREPARATIONSBefore any work begins on the construction of the regulated area, the Contractor will:A.Conduct a space-by-space inspection with an authorized VA representative and prepare a written inventory of all existing damage in those spaces where asbestos abatement will occur. Still or video photography may be used to supplement the written damage inventory. Document will be signed and certified as accurate by both parties.B.The VA Representative, the Contractor, and the VPIH/CIH must be aware of VA A/E Quality Alert 07/09 indicating the failure to identify asbestos in the areas listed as well as common issues when preparing specifications and contract documents. This is especially critical when demolition is planned, because AHERA surveys are non-destructive, and ACM may remain undetected. A NESHAPS (destructive) ACM inspection should be conducted on all building structures that will be demolished. Ensure the following areas are inspected on the project: lay-in ceilings concealing ACM; ACM behind walls/windows from previous renovations; inside utility chases/walls; transite piping/ductwork/sheets; behind radiators; lab fume hoods; transite lab countertops; roofing materials; below window sills; water/sewer lines; electrical conduit coverings; crawlspaces (previous abatement contamination); flooring/mastic covered by carpeting/new flooring; exterior insulated wall panels; on underground fuel tanks; and steam line trench coverings. C.Ensure that all furniture, machinery, equipment, curtains, drapes, blinds, and other movable objects required to be removed from the regulated area have been cleaned and removed or properly protected from contamination.D.If present and required, remove and dispose of carpeting from floors in the regulated area.E.Inspect existing firestopping in the regulated area. Correct as needed.3.2 REMOVAL OF ACM 3.2.1 WETTING acm A.Use amended water for the wetting of ACM prior to removal. The Competent Person shall assure the wetting of ACM meets the definition of "adequately wet" in the EPA NESHAP regulation and OSHA’s “wet methods” for the duration of the project. A removal encapsulant may be used instead of amended water with written approval of the VA's representative.B.Amended Water: Provide water to which a surfactant has been added shall be used to wet the ACM and reduce the potential for fiber release during disturbance of ACM. The mixture must be equal to or greater than the wetting provided by water amended by a surfactant consisting one ounce of 50% polyoxyethylene ester and 50% polyoxyethylene ether mixed with 5 gallons (19L) of water.C.Removal Encapsulant: When authorized by VA, provide a penetrating encapsulant designed specifically for the removal of ACM. The material must, when used, result in adequate wetting of the ACM and retard fiber release during removal. 3.2.2 SECONDARY BARRIER AND WALKWAYSA.Install as a drop cloth a 6 mil poly sheet at the beginning of each work shift where removal is to be done during that shift. Completely cover floors and any walls within 10 feet (3 meters) of the area where work is to done. Secure the secondary barrier with duct tape to prevent it from moving or debris from getting behind it. Remove the secondary barrier at the end of the shift or as work in the area is completed. Keep residue on the secondary barrier wetted. When removing, fold inward to prevent spillage and place in a disposal bag.B.Install walkways using 6 mil black poly between the regulated area and the decontamination facilities (PDF and W/EDF) to protect the primary layers from contamination and damage. Install the walkways at the beginning of each shift and remove at the end of each shift.3.2.3 WET REMOVAL OF ACMA.Adequately and thoroughly wet the ACM to be removed prior to removal with amended water or when authorized by VA, removal encapsulant to reduce/prevent fiber release to the air. Adequate time (at a minimum two hours) must be allowed for the amended water or removal encapsulant to saturate the ACM. Abatement personnel must not disturb dry ACM. Use a fine spray of amended water or removal encapsulant. Saturate the material sufficiently to wet to the substrate without causing excessive dripping. The material must be sprayed repeatedly/continuously during the removal process in order to maintain adequately wet conditions. Removal encapsulants must be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Perforate or carefully separate, using wet methods, an outer covering that is painted or jacketed in order to allow penetration and wetting of the material. Where necessary, carefully remove covering while wetting to minimize fiber release. In no event shall dry removal occur except when authorized in writing by the VPIH/CIH and VA when a greater safety hazard (e.g., electricity) is present. B.If ACM does not wet well with amended water due to composition, coating or jacketing, remove as follows:1.Mist work area continuously with amended water whenever necessary to reduce airborne fiber levels.2.Remove saturated ACM in small sections. Do not allow material to dry out. As material is removed, bag material, while still wet into disposal bags. Twist the bag neck tightly, bend over (gooseneck) and seal with a minimum of three tight wraps of duct tape. Clean /decontaminate the outside of the bag of any residue and move to washdown station adjacent to W/EDF.3.Fireproofing or Architectural Finish on Scratch Coat: Spray with a fine mist of amended water or removal encapsulant. Allow time for saturation to the substrate. Do not over saturate causing excess dripping. Scrape material from substrate. Remove material in manageable quantities and control falling to staging or floor. If the falling distance is over 20 feet (6M), use a drop chute to contain material through descent. Remove residue remaining on the scratch coat after scraping is done using a stiff bristle hand brush. If a removal encapsulant is used, remove residue completely before the encapsulant dries. Periodically re-wet the substrate with amended water as needed to prevent drying of the material before the residue is removed from the substrate.4.Fireproofing or Architectural Finish on Wire Lath: Spray with a fine mist of amended water or removal encapsulant. Allow time to completely saturate the material. Do not over saturate causing excess dripping. If the surface has been painted or otherwise coated, cut small holes as needed and apply amended water or removal encapsulant from above. Cut saturated wire lath into 2' x 6' (50mm x 150mm) sections and cut hanger wires. Roll up complete with ACM, cover in burlap and hand place in disposal bag. Do not drop to floor. After removal of lath/ACM, remove any overspray on decking and structure using stiff bristle nylon brushes. Depending on hardness of overspray, scrapers may be needed for removal.5.Pipe/Tank/Vessel/Boiler Insulation: Remove the outer layer of wrap while spraying with amended water in order to saturate the ACM. Spray ACM with a fine mist of amended water or removal encapsulant. Allow time to saturate the material to the substrate. Cut bands holding pre-formed pipe insulation sections. Slit jacketing at the seams, remove and hand place in a disposal bag. Do not allow dropping to the floor. Remove molded fitting insulation/mud in large pieces and hand place in a disposal bag. Remove any residue on pipe or fitting with a stiff bristle nylon brush. In locations where pipe fitting insulation is removed from fibrous glass or other non-asbestos insulated straight runs of pipe, remove fibrous material at least 6" from the point it contacts the ACM.3.2.4 WET REMOVAL OF AMOSITEA.The following areas shown on drawings indicate locations of amosite ACM which will require local exhaust ventilation and collection as described below, in addition to wet removal. Provide specific description /locations/ drawings.B.Provide local exhaust ventilation and collection systems to assure collection of amosite fibers at the point of generation. A 300 mm (12") flexible rigid non-collapsing duct shall be shall be located no more than 600 mm (2') from any scraping/brushing activity. Primary filters must be replaced every 30 minutes on the negative air machines. Each scraping/brushing activity must have a negative air machine devoted to it. For pre-molded pipe insulation or cutting wire lathe attach a 1200 mm (4') square flared end piece on the intake of the duct. Support the duct horizontally at a point 600 mm (2') below the work to effect capture. One person in the crew shall be assigned to operate the duct collection system on a continual basis. C.Amosite does not wet well with amended water. Submit full information/documentation on the wetting agent proposed prior to start for review and approval by the VPIH/CIH and VA Contracting Officer. Insure that the material is worked on in small sections and is thoroughly and continuously wetted. Package as soon as possible while wet. Remove as required. 3.2.5 REMOVAL OF ACM/DIRT FLOORS AND OTHER SPECIAL PROCEDURESThe CPIH/CIH shall develop and submit a procedure for review and approval by the VPIH/CIH and VA Contracting Officer. Local exhaust; continuous monitoring; misting, if possible; and careful work practices must be followed.A.MAJOR ABATEMENT ON DIRT FLOORS:When working on dirt floors, remove all visible asbestos debris using wet methods after set-up of PDF, W/EDF, negative air systems as required. Perform work and decontaminate/clean-up; perform lockdown as needed and complete work as required in these specifications. The asbestos contaminated soil (ACS) shall be removed and/or enclosed.Options for abatement of asbestos contaminated soil include: Removal of top 6 inches of soil; encapsulated the soil using shotcrete or other spray applied concrete materials. Considerations for which option to be used will be made by the VA representative. Factors which may affect which option to be used may include: access to the work area; height of the area (such as is there sufficient height to use concrete materials in the area, etc.) Soils covered with permanent barriers MUST HAVE PERMANENT SIGNAGE INSTALLED TO WARN AGAINST PENETRATION ASSOCIATED WITH POTENTIAL DISTURBANCE OF ASBESTOS.1.Remove ACS as shown on drawings to a minimum depth of 6 using wet methods. After wetting with amended water to minimize dust, shovel dirt into disposal bags. The CPIH/CIH shall closely monitor work conditions and take appropriate action to protect workers from over exposure to asbestos and heat stress. The minimum number of air changes per hour shall be six using negative air machines. Use special vacuum truck equipped with HEPA filtration to remove soil2.Enclosure of ACS using a concrete layer of 4” over the entire surface may also be done. Thoroughly dampen soil first with amended water before pouring concrete. Personnel shall be proficient in concrete finishing as well as asbestos trained. B.Crawlspaces/Pipe Tunnels:When working in crawlspaces or pipe tunnels, remove all visible asbestos debris using wet methods (if possible) after set-up of PDF, W/EDF, and after establishing negative air systems as required. Perform work and decontaminate/clean-up; perform lockdown as needed and complete work as required in these specifications. The asbestos contaminated soil (ACS) shall be removed and/or enclosed. Clearance requirements include confirmation sampling of affected soil by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM). Clearance sampling requirements are specified in Sections 3.6.4 and 3.6.5.Options for abatement of asbestos contaminated soil include: Removal of top 6 inches of soil; encapsulated the soil using shotcrete or other spray applied concrete materials. Considerations for which option to be used will be made by the VA representative. Factors which may affect which option to be used may include: access to the work area; height of the area (such as is there sufficient height to use concrete materials in the area, etc.)3.3 LOCKDOWN ENCAPSULATION3.3.1 GENERALLockdown encapsulation is an integral part of the ACM removal. At the conclusion of ACM removal and before removal of the primary barriers, the contractor shall encapsulate all surfaces with a bridging encapsulant.3.3.2 DELIVERY AND STORAGEDeliver materials to the job site in original, new and unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's name and label as well as the following information: name of material, manufacturer's stock number, date of manufacture, thinning instructions, application instructions and the MSDS for the material.3.3.3 WORKER PROTECTIONBefore beginning work with any material for which an MSDS has been submitted, provide workers with any required personal protective equipment. The required personal protective equipment shall be used whenever exposure to the material might occur. In addition to OSHA/specification requirements for respiratory protection, a paint pre-filter and an organic vapor cartridge, at a minimum, shall used in addition to the HEPA filter when an organic solvent based encapsulant is used. The CPIH/CIH shall be responsible for provision of adequate respiratory protection. Note: Flammable and combustible encapsulants shall not be used, unless authorized in writing by the VA.3.3.4 ENCAPSULATION OF SCRATCH COAT PLASTER OR PIPINGA.Apply two coats of lockdown encapsulant to the scratch coat plaster or piping after all ACM has been removed. Apply in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Any deviation from the instructions must be approved by the VA's representative in writing prior to commencing the work.B.Apply the lockdown encapsulant with an airless sprayer at a pressure and using a nozzle orifice as recommended by the manufacturer. Apply the first coat while the while the scratch coat is still damp from the asbestos removal process, after passing the visual inspection. If the surface has been allowed to dry, wet wipe or HEPA vacuum prior to spraying with encapsulant. Apply a second coat over the first coat in strict conformance with the manufacturer's instructions. Color the lockdown encapsulant and contrast the color in the second coat so that visual confirmation of completeness and uniform coverage of each coat is possible. Adhere to the manufacturer's instructions for coloring. At the completion of the encapsulation, the surface must be a uniform third color produced by the mixture.3.3.5 SEALING EXPOSED EDGESSeal edges of ACM exposed by removal work which is inaccessible, such as a sleeve, wall penetration, etc., with two coats of bridging encapsulant. Prior to sealing, permit the exposed edges to dry completely to permit penetration of the bridging encapsulant. Apply in accordance with 3.3.4 (B).3.4 DISPOSAL OF ACM WASTE MATERIALS3.4.1 GENERALDispose of waste ACM and debris which is packaged in accordance with these specifications, OSHA, EPA and DOT. The landfill requirements for packaging must also be met. Transport will be in compliance with 49 CFR 100–185 regulations. Disposal shall be done at an approved landfill. Disposal of non-friable ACM shall be done in accordance with applicable regulations.3.4.2 PROCEDURESA. The VA must be notified at least 24 hours in advance of any waste removed from the containment.B.Asbestos waste shall be packaged and moved through the W/EDF into a covered transport container in accordance with procedures is this specification. Waste shall be double-bagged and wetted with amended water prior to disposal. Wetted waste can be very heavy. Bags shall not be overfilled. Bags shall be securely sealed to prevent accidental opening and/or leakage. The top shall be tightly twisted and goose necked prior to tightly sealing with at least three wraps of duct tape. Ensure that unauthorized persons do not have access to the waste material once it is outside the regulated area. All transport containers must be covered at all times when not in use. NESHAP signs must be on containers during loading and unloading. Material shall not be transported in open vehicles. If drums are used for packaging, the drums shall be labeled properly and shall not be re-used.Waste Load Out: Waste load out shall be done in accordance with the procedures in W/EDF Decontamination Procedures. Sealed waste bags shall be decontaminated on exterior surfaces by wet cleaning and/or HEPA vacuuming before being placed in the second waste bag and sealed, which then must also be wet wiped or HEPA vacuumed.Asbestos waste with sharp edged components, i.e., nails, screws, lath, strapping, tin sheeting, jacketing, metal mesh, etc., which might tear poly bags shall be wrapped securely in burlap before packaging and, if needed, use a poly lined fiber drum as the second container, prior to disposal.3.5 PROJECT DECONTAMINATION3.5.1 GENERALA.The entire work related to project decontamination shall be performed under the close supervision and monitoring of the CPIH/CIH.B.If the asbestos abatement work is in an area which was contaminated prior to the start of abatement, the decontamination will be done by cleaning the primary barrier poly prior to its removal and cleanings of the surfaces of the regulated area after the primary barrier removal.C.If the asbestos abatement work is in an area which was uncontaminated prior to the start of abatement, the decontamination will be done by cleaning the primary barrier poly prior to its removal, thus preventing contamination of the building when the regulated area critical barriers are removed.3.5.2 REGULATED AREA CLEARANCEClearance air testing and other requirements which must be met before release of the Contractor and re-occupancy of the regulated area space are specified in Final Testing Procedures.3.5.3 WORK DESCRIPTIONDecontamination includes the clearance air testing in the regulated area and the decontamination and removal of the enclosures/facilities installed prior to the abatement work including primary/critical barriers, PDF and W/EDF facilities, and negative pressure systems.3.5.4 PRE-DECONTAMINATION CONDITIONSA.Before decontamination starts, all ACM waste from the regulated area shall be collected and removed, and the loose 6 mil layer of poly removed while being adequately wetted with amended water and disposed of along with any gross debris generated by the work.B.At the start of decontamination, the following shall be in place:1.Primary barriers consisting of 2 layers of 6 mil poly on the floor and 4 mil poly on the walls.2.Critical barriers consisting of 2 layers of 6 mil poly which is the sole barrier between the regulated area and openings to the rest of the building or outside.4.Decontamination facilities for personnel and equipment in operating condition and the negative pressure system in operation.3.5.5 FIRST CLEANINGCarry out a first cleaning of all surfaces of the regulated area including items of remaining poly sheeting, tools, scaffolding, ladders/staging by wet methods and/or HEPA vacuuming. Do not use dry dusting/sweeping/air blowing methods. Use each surface of a wetted cleaning cloth one time only and then dispose of as contaminated waste. Continue this cleaning until there is no visible residue from abated surfaces or poly or other surfaces. Remove all filters in the air handling system and dispose of as ACM waste in accordance with these specifications. The negative pressure system shall remain in operation during this time. Additional cleaning(s) may be needed as determined by the CPIH/VPIH/CIH.3.5.6 PRE-CLEARANCE INSPECTION AND TESTINGThe CPIH/CIH and VPIH/CIH will perform a thorough and detailed visual inspection at the end of the cleaning to determine whether there is any visible residue in the regulated area. If the visual inspection is acceptable, the CPIH/CIH will perform pre-clearance sampling using aggressive clearance as detailed in 40 CFR 763 Subpart E (AHERA) Appendix A (III)(B)(7)(d). If the sampling results show values below 0.01 f/cc, then the Contractor shall notify the VA's representative of the results with a brief report from the CPIH/CIH documenting the inspection and sampling results and a statement verifying that the regulated area is ready for lockdown encapsulation. The VA reserves the right to utilize their own VPIH/CIH to perform a pre-clearance inspection and testing for verification.3.5.7 LOCKDOWN ENCAPSULATION OF ABATED SURFACESWith the express written permission of the VA's representative, perform lockdown encapsulation of all surfaces from which asbestos was abated in accordance with the procedures in this specification. Negative pressure shall be maintained in the regulated area during the lockdown application.3.6 FINAL VISUAL INSPECTION AND AIR CLEARANCE TESTING3.6.1 GENERALNotify the VA representative 24 hours in advance for the performance of the final visual inspection and testing. The final visual inspection and testing will be performed by the VPIH/CIH starting after the final cleaning.3.6.2 FINAL VISUAL INSPECTIONFinal visual inspection will include the entire regulated area, the PDF, all poly sheeting, seals over HVAC openings, doorways, windows, and any other openings. If any debris, residue, dust or any other suspect material is detected, the final cleaning shall be repeated at no cost to the VA. Dust/material samples may be collected and analyzed at no cost to the VA at the discretion of the VPIH/CIH to confirm visual findings. When the regulated area is visually clean the final testing can be done.3.6.3 FINAL AIR CLEARANCE TESTINGA.After an acceptable final visual inspection by the VPIH/CIH and VA Representative, the VPIH/CIH will perform the final clearance testing. Air samples will be collected and analyzed in accordance with procedures for AHERA in this specification. If work is less than 260 lf/160 sf/35 cf, 5 PCM samples shall be collected for clearance and a minimum of one field blank. If work is equal to or more than 260 lf/160 sf/35 cf, AHERA TEM sampling shall be performed for clearance. TEM analysis shall be done in accordance with procedures for EPA AHERA in this specification. If the release criteria are not met, the Contractor shall repeat the final cleaning and continue decontamination procedures until clearance is achieved. All Additional inspection and testing costs will be borne by the Contractor.B.If release criteria are met, proceed to perform the abatement closeout and to issue the certificate of completion in accordance with these specifications.3.6.4 FINAL AIR CLEARANCE PROCEDURESContractor's Release Criteria: Work in a regulated area is complete when the regulated area is visually clean and airborne fiber levels have been reduced to or below 0.01 f/cc as measured by the AHERA PCM protocol, or 70 AHERA structures per square millimeter (s/mm2) by AHERA TEM.B.Air Monitoring and Final Clearance Sampling: To determine if the elevated airborne fiber counts encountered during abatement operations have been reduced to the specified level, the VPIH/CIH will secure samples and analyze them according to the following procedures:Fibers Counted: “Fibers” referred to in this section shall be either all fibers regardless of composition as counted in the NIOSH 7400 PCM method or asbestos fibers counted using the AHERA TEM method.Aggressive Sampling: All final air testing samples shall be collected using aggressive sampling techniques except where soil is not encapsulated or enclosed. Samples will be collected on 0.8 MCE filters for PCM analysis and 0.45 Polycarbonate filters for TEM. A minimum of 1200 Liters of using calibrated pumps shall be collected for clearance samples. Before pumps are started, initiate aggressive air mixing sampling as detailed in 40 CFR 763 Subpart E (AHERA) Appendix A (III)(B)(7)(d). Air samples will be collected in areas subject to normal air circulation away from corners, obstructed locations, and locations near windows, doors, or vents. After air sampling pumps have been shut off, circulating fans shall be shut off. The negative pressure system shall continue to operate.Final clearance for soil that is not encapsulated, samples will be collected on 0.8? MCE filters for PCM analysis and 0.45? Polycarbonate filters for TEM. A minimum of 1200 Liters of using calibrated pumps shall be collected for clearance samples. Air clearance of work areas where contaminated soil has been removed is in addition to the requirement for clearance by bulk sample analysis discussed within these specifications. There will be no aggressive air sampling for the clearance of soil due to the fact that aggressive air sampling may overload the cassettes. Random samples shall be collected from areas of soil which have been abated to ensure that the soil has been properly decontaminated. The total number of samples to be collected from the soil areas shall be; <1000 SF of soil – 3 samples; >1000 to <5000 SF of soil – 5 samples; and >5000 SF of soil – 7 samples. The soil samples shall be collected in a statistically random manner and shall be analyzed by PLM method. The clearance level to determine the soil clean is <1% asbestos by weight as analyzed by PLM method. If this level is achieved, the soil areas shall be considered clear. If the levels are >1% asbestos, the areas shall be re-cleaned until the sample results are <1%.3.6.5 CLEARANCE SAMPLING USING PCM – LESS THAN 260LF/160SF:A.The VPIH/CIH will perform clearance samples as indicated by the specification.B.The NIOSH 7400 PCM method will be used for clearance sampling with a minimum collection volume of 1200 Liters of air. A minimum of 5 PCM clearance samples shall be collected. All samples must be equal to or less than 0.01 f/cc to clear the regulated area.C.Random samples shall be collected from areas of soil which have been abated to ensure that the soil has been properly decontaminated. The total number of samples to be collected from the soil areas shall be; <1000 SF of soil – 3 samples; >1000 to <5000 SF of soil – 5 samples; and >5000 SF of soil – 7 samples. The soil samples shall be collected in a statistically random manner and shall be analyzed by PLM method. The clearance level to determine the soil clean is <1% asbestos by weight as analyzed by PLM method. If this level is achieved, the soil areas shall be considered clear. If the levels are >1% asbestos, the areas shall be re-cleaned until the sample results are <1%.3.6.6 CLEARANCE SAMPLING USING TEM – EQUAL TO OR MORE THAN 260LF/160SF: TEM A.Clearance requires 13 samples be collected; 5 inside the regulated area; 5 outside the regulated area; and 3 field blanks.B.The TEM method will be used for clearance sampling with a minimum collection volume of 1200 Liters of air. A minimum of 13 clearance samples shall be collected. All samples must be equal to or less than 70 AHERA structures per square millimeter (s/mm2) AHERA TEM.3.6.7 LABORATORY TESTING OF PCM CLEARANCE SAMPLESThe services of an AIHA accredited laboratory will be employed by the VA to perform analysis for the PCM air samples. The accredited laboratory shall be successfully participating in the AIHA Proficiency Analytical Testing (PAT) program. Samples will be sent daily by the VPIH/CIH so that verbal/faxed reports can be received within 24 hours. A complete record, certified by the laboratory, of all air monitoring tests and results will be furnished to the VA’s representative and the Contractor.3.6.8 LABORATORY TESTING OF TEM SAMPLESSamples shall be sent by the VPIH/CIH to a NIST accredited laboratory for analysis by TEM. The laboratory shall be successfully participating in the NIST Airborne Asbestos Analysis (TEM) program. Verbal/faxed results from the laboratory shall be available within 24 hours after receipt of the samples. A complete record, certified by the laboratory, of all TEM results shall be furnished to the VA's representative and the Contractor.3.6.9 LABORATORY TESTING OF BULK SAMPLESSamples shall be sent by the VPIH/CIH or CPIH/CIH to a NIST accredited laboratory for analysis by PLM. The laboratory shall be successfully participating in the NIST Bulk Asbestos Analysis (PLM) program. Verbal/faxed results from the laboratory shall be available within 24 hours after receipt of the samples. A complete record, certified by the laboratory, of all TEM results shall be furnished to the VA's representative and the Contractor.3.7 ABATEMENT CLOSEOUT AND CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE3.7.1 COMPLETION OF ABATEMENT WORKAfter thorough decontamination, seal negative air machines with 2 layers of 6 mil poly and duct tape to form a tight seal at the intake/outlet ends before removal from the regulated area. Complete asbestos abatement work upon meeting the regulated area visual and air clearance criteria and fulfilling the following:A.Remove all equipment and materials from the project area.B. Dispose of all packaged ACM waste as required.C.Repair or replace all interior finishes damaged during the abatement work, as required.D.Fulfill other project closeout requirements as required in this specification.3.7.2 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION BY CONTRACTORThe CPIH/CIH shall complete and sign the "Certificate of Completion" in accordance with Attachment 1 at the completion of the abatement and decontamination of the regulated area.3.7.3 WORK SHIFTSAll work shall be done during administrative hours (8:00 AM to 4:30 PM) Monday -Friday excluding Federal Holidays. Any change in the work schedule must be approved in writing by the VA Representative. 3.7.4 RE-INSULATIONIf required as part of the contract, replace all asbestos containing insulation/fire-proofing with suitable non-asbestos material. Provide MSDS’s for all replacement materials in advance of installation for VA approval. Refer to Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION.ATTACHMENT #1CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETIONDATE: VA Project #:PROJECT NAME:Abatement Contractor:VAMC/ADDRESS:1.I certify that I have personally inspected, monitored and supervised the abatement work of (specify regulated area or Building):which took place from / / to / /2.That throughout the work all applicable requirements/regulations and the VA's specifications were met.3.That any person who entered the regulated area was protected with the appropriate personal protective equipment and respirator and that they followed the proper entry and exit procedures and the proper operating procedures for the duration of the work.4.That all employees of the Abatement Contractor engaged in this work were trained in respiratory protection, were experienced with abatement work, had proper medical surveillance documentation, were fit-tested for their respirator, and were not exposed at any time during the work to asbestos without the benefit of appropriate respiratory protection.5.That I performed and supervised all inspection and testing specified and required by applicable regulations and VA specifications.6.That the conditions inside the regulated area were always maintained in a safe and healthy condition and the maximum fiber count never exceeded 0.5 f/cc, except as described below.7. That all abatement work was done in accordance with OSHA requirements and the manufacturer’s recommendations. CPIH/CIH Signature/Date:CPIH/CIH Print Name:Abatement Contractor Signature/Date:Abatement Contractor Print Name:ATTACHMENT #2CERTIFICATE OF WORKER'S ACKNOWLEDGMENTPROJECT NAME:DATE:PROJECT ADDRESS:ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR'S NAME:WORKING WITH ASBESTOS CAN BE HAZARDOUS TO YOUR HEALTH. INHALING ASBESTOS HAS BEEN LINKED WITH VARIOUS TYPES OF CANCERS. IF YOU SMOKE AND INHALE ASBESTOS FIBERS, YOUR CHANCES OF DEVELOPING LUNG CANCER IS GREATER THAN THAT OF THE NON-SMOKING PUBLIC.Your employer's contract with the owner for the above project requires that: You must be supplied with the proper personal protective equipment including an adequate respirator and be trained in its use. You must be trained in safe and healthy work practices and in the use of the equipment found at an asbestos abatement project. You must receive/have a current medical examination for working with asbestos. These things shall be provided at no cost to you. By signing this certificate you are indicating to the owner that your employer has met these obligations.RESPIRATORY PROTECTION: I have been trained in the proper use of respirators and have been informed of the type of respirator to be used on the above indicated project. I have a copy of the written Respiratory Protection Program issued by my employer. I have been provided for my exclusive use, at no cost, with a respirator to be used on the above indicated project.TRAINING COURSE: I have been trained by a third party, State/EPA accredited trainer in the requirements for an AHERA/OSHA Asbestos Abatement Worker training course, 32 hours minimum duration. I currently have a valid State accreditation certificate. The topics covered in the course include, as a minimum, the following:Physical Characteristics and Background Information on AsbestosPotential Health Effects Related to Exposure to AsbestosEmployee Personal Protective EquipmentEstablishment of a Respiratory Protection ProgramState of the Art Work PracticesPersonal HygieneAdditional Safety HazardsMedical MonitoringAir MonitoringRelevant Federal, State and Local Regulatory Requirements, Procedures, andStandardsAsbestos Waste DisposalMEDICAL EXAMINATION: I have had a medical examination within the past 12 months which was paid for by my employer. This examination included: health history, occupational history, pulmonary function test, and may have included a chest x-ray evaluation. The physician issued a positive written opinion after the examination.Signature:Printed Name:Social Security Number:Witness:ATTACHMENT #3AFFIDAVIT OF MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE, RESPIRATORY PROTECTION AND TRAINING/ACCREDITATIONVA PROJECT NAME AND NUMBER:VA MEDICAL FACILITY:ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR'S NAME AND ADDRESS:1.I verify that the following individualName:Social Security Number:who is proposed to be employed in asbestos abatement work associated with the above project by the named Abatement Contractor, is included in a medical surveillance program in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101(m), and that complete records of the medical surveillance program as required by 29 CFR 1926.1101(m)(n) and 29 CFR 1910.20 are kept at the offices of the Abatement Contractor at the following address.Address:2.I verify that this individual has been trained, fit-tested and instructed in the use of all appropriate respiratory protection systems and that the person is capable of working in safe and healthy manner as expected and required in the expected work environment of this project.3.I verify that this individual has been trained as required by 29 CFR 1926.1101(k). This individual has also obtained a valid State accreditation certificate. Documentation will be kept on-site.4.I verify that I meet the minimum qualifications criteria of the VA specifications for a CPIH.Signature of CPIH/CIH:Date:Printed Name of CPIH/CIH:Signature of Contractor:Date:Printed Name of Contractor:ATTACHMENT #4ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR/COMPETENT PERSON(S) REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE VA’S ASBESTOS SPECIFICATIONSVA Project Location: VA Project #:VA Project Description:This form shall be signed by the Asbestos Abatement Contractor Owner and the Asbestos Abatement Contractor’s Competent Person(s) prior to any start of work at the VA related to this Specification. If the Asbestos Abatement Contractor’s/Competent Person(s) has not signed this form, they shall not be allowed to work on-site.I, the undersigned, have read VA’s Asbestos Specification regarding the asbestos abatement requirements. I understand the requirements of the VA’s Asbestos Specification and agree to follow these requirements as well as all required rules and regulations of OSHA/EPA/DOT and State/Local requirements. I have been given ample opportunity to read the VA’s Asbestos Specification and have been given an opportunity to ask any questions regarding the content and have received a response related to those questions. I do not have any further questions regarding the content, intent and requirements of the VA’s Asbestos Specification.At the conclusion of the asbestos abatement, I will certify that all asbestos abatement work was done in accordance with the VA’s Asbestos Specification and all ACM was removed properly and no fibrous residue remains on any abated surfaces.Abatement Contractor Owner’s SignatureDateAbatement Contractor Competent Person(s)Date- - END- - - -SECTION 02 82 13.19ASBESTOS FLOOR TILE AND MASTIC ABATEMENTPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SUMMARY OF THE WORK1.1.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND RELATED REQUIREMENTSDrawings, general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and other Division 01 specifications, shall apply to the work of this section. The contract documents show the work to be done under the contract and related requirements and conditions impacting the project. Related requirements and conditions include applicable codes and regulations, notices and permits, existing site conditions and restrictions on use of the site, requirements for partial owner occupancy during the work, coordination with other work and the phasing of the work. In the event the Asbestos Abatement Contractor discovers a conflict in the contract documents and/or requirements or codes, the conflict must be brought to the immediate attention of the Contracting Officer for resolution. Whenever there is a conflict or overlap in the requirements, the most stringent shall apply. Any actions taken by the Contractor without obtaining guidance from the Contracting Officer shall become the sole risk and responsibility of the Asbestos Abatement Contractor. All costs incurred due to such action are also the responsibility of the Asbestos Abatement Contractor.1.1.2 EXTENT OF WORKA.Below is a brief description of the estimated quantities of asbestos flooring materials to be abated. These quantities are for informational purposes only and are based on the best information available at the time of the specification preparation. The Contractor shall satisfy himself as the actual quantities to be abated. Nothing in this section may be interpreted as limiting the extent of work otherwise required by this contract and related documents.B.Removal, clean-up and disposal of ACM flooring in an appropriate regulated area in the following approximate quantities:1.2,300 square feet of sheet vinyl and vinyl composition tile flooring and mastic.2.Refer to Attachment #5, “Floor Plan – Asbestos Materials Location” dated May 10, 2012, provided and prepared by the VAMC Martinsburg, for approximate location and distribution of asbestos containing materials.1.1.3 RELATED WORKA.Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.B.Section 02 41 00, DEMOLITION.C.Division 09, FINISHES.1.1.4 TASKSThe work tasks are summarized briefly as follows:A.Pre-abatement activities including pre-abatement meeting(s), inspection(s), notifications, permits, submittal approvals, regulated area preparations, emergency procedures arrangements, and Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plans for asbestos abatement work.B.Abatement activities including removal, clean-up and disposal of ACM waste, recordkeeping, security, monitoring, and inspections.C.Cleaning and decontamination activities including final visual inspection, air monitoring and certification of decontamination.1.1.5 ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISESA.The Contractor and Contractor's personnel shall cooperate fully with the VA representative/consultant to facilitate efficient use of available space. The Contractor shall perform the work in accordance with the VA specifications, drawings and in compliance with any/all applicable Federal, State and Local regulations and requirements.B.The Contractor shall use the existing facilities in the building strictly within the limits indicated in contract documents as well as the approved VA Design Construction Procedure. VA Design Construction Procedure drawings of partially occupied buildings will show the limits of regulated areas; the placement of decontamination facilities; the temporary location of bagged waste ACM; the path of transport to outside the building; and the temporary waste storage. Any variation from the arrangements shown on drawings shall be secured in writing from the VA representative through the pre-abatement plan of action.1.2 VARIATIONS IN QUANTITYThe quantities and locations of ACM as indicated above and the extent of work included in this section are estimated which are limited by the physical constraints imposed by occupancy of the buildings and accessibility to ACM. Accordingly, minor variations (+/- 5%) in quantities of ACM within the regulated area are considered as having no impact on contract price and time requirements of this contract. Where additional work is required beyond the above variation, the contractor shall provide unit prices for newly discovered ACM and those prices shall be used for additional work required under the contractor.1.3 STOP ASBESTOS REMOVALIf the Contracting Officer; their field representative; (the facility Safety Officer/Manager or their designee, or the VA Professional Industrial Hygienist/Certified Industrial Hygienist (VPIH/CIH) presents a verbal Stop Asbestos Removal Order, the Contractor/Personnel shall immediately stop all asbestos removal and maintain HEPA filtered negative pressure air flow in the containment and adequately wet any exposed ACM. If a verbal Stop Asbestos Removal Order is issued, the VA shall follow-up with a written order to the Contractor as soon as it is practicable. The Contractor shall not resume any asbestos removal activity until authorized to do so in writing by the VA Contracting Officer. A stop asbestos removal order may be issued at any time the VA Contracting Officer determines abatement conditions/activities are not within VA specification, regulatory requirements or that an imminent hazard exists to human health or the environment. Work stoppage will continue until conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the VA. Standby time and costs for corrective actions will be borne by the Contractor, including the VPIH/CIH time. The occurrence of any of the following events shall be reported immediately by the Contractor’s competent person to the VA Contracting Office or field representative using the most expeditious means (e.g., verbal or telephonic), followed up with written notification to the Contracting Officer as soon as practical. The Contractor shall immediately stop asbestos removal/disturbance activities and initiate fiber reduction activities:A.Airborne PCM analysis results equal to or greater than 0.01 f/cc outside a regulated area or >0.05 f/cc inside a regulated area;B.breach or break in regulated area containment barrier(s);C.less than –0.02” WCG pressure in the regulated area;D.serious injury/death at the site; E.fire/safety emergency at the site;F.respiratory protection system failure;G.power failure or loss of wetting agent; orH.any visible emissions observed outside the regulated area.1.4 DEFINITIONS1.4.1 GENERALDefinitions and explanations here are neither complete nor exclusive of all terms used in the contract documents, but are general for the work to the extent they are not stated more explicitly in another element of the contract documents. Drawings must be recognized as diagrammatic in nature and not completely descriptive of the requirements indicated therein.1.4.2 GLOSSARYAbatement - Procedures to control fiber release from asbestos-containing materials. Includes removal, encapsulation, enclosure, demolition, and renovation activities related to asbestos containing materials (ACM).Aerosol - Solid or liquid particulate suspended in air.Adequately wet - Sufficiently mixed or penetrated with liquid to prevent the release of particulates. If visible emissions are observed coming from the ACM, then that material has not been adequately wetted.Aggressive method - Removal or disturbance of building material by sanding, abrading, grinding, or other method that breaks, crumbles, or disintegrates intact ACM.Aggressive sampling - EPA AHERA defined clearance sampling method using air moving equipment such as fans and leaf blowers to aggressively disturb and maintain in the air residual fibers after abatement.AHERA - Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act. Asbestos regulations for schools issued in 1987.Aircell - Pipe or duct insulation made of corrugated cardboard which contains asbestos.Air monitoring - The process of measuring the fiber content of a known volume of air collected over a specified period of time. The NIOSH 7400 Method, Issue 2 is used to determine the fiber levels in air. For personal samples and clearance air testing using Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM) analysis. NIOSH Method 7402 can be used when it is necessary to confirm fibers counted by PCM as being asbestos. The AHERA TEM analysis may be used for background, area samples and clearance samples when required by this specification, or at the discretion of the VPIH/CIH as appropriate.Air sample filter - The filter used to collect fibers which are then counted. The filter is made of mixed cellulose ester membrane for PCM (Phase Contrast Microscopy) and polycarbonate for TEM (Transmission Electron Microscopy)Amended water - Water to which a surfactant (wetting agent) has been added to increase the penetrating ability of the liquid.Asbestos - Includes chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, tremolite asbestos, anthophyllite asbestos, actinolite asbestos, and any of these minerals that have been chemically treated or altered. Asbestos also includes PACM, as defined below.Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan (AHAP) - Asbestos work procedures required to be submitted by the contractor before work begins.Asbestos-containing material (ACM) - Any material containing more than one percent of asbestos.Asbestos contaminated elements (ACE) - Building elements such as ceilings, walls, lights, or ductwork that are contaminated with asbestos.Asbestos-contaminated soil (ACS) – Soil found in the work area or in adjacent areas such as crawlspaces or pipe tunnels which is contaminated with asbestos-containing material debris and cannot be easily separated from the material.Asbestos-containing waste (ACW) material - Asbestos-containing material or asbestos contaminated objects requiring disposal.Asbestos Project Monitor – Some states require that any person conducting asbestos abatement clearance inspections and clearance air sampling be licensed as an asbestos project monitor.Asbestos waste decontamination facility - A system consisting of drum/bag washing facilities and a temporary storage area for cleaned containers of asbestos waste. Used as the exit for waste and equipment leaving the regulated area. In an emergency, it may be used to evacuate personnel.Authorized person - Any person authorized by the VA, the Contractor, or government agency and required by work duties to be present in regulated areas.Authorized visitor - Any person approved by the VA; the contractor; or any government agency representative having jurisdiction over the regulated area (e.g., OSHA, Federal and State EPA0..Barrier - Any surface the isolates the regulated area and inhibits fiber migration from the regulated area.Containment Barrier - An airtight barrier consisting of walls, floors, and/or ceilings of sealed plastic sheeting which surrounds and seals the outer perimeter of the regulated area.Critical Barrier - The barrier responsible for isolating the regulated area from adjacent spaces, typically constructed of plastic sheeting secured in place at openings such as doors, windows, or any other opening into the regulated area.Primary Barrier – Plastic barriers placed over critical barriers and exposed directly to abatement work.Secondary Barrier - Any additional plastic barriers used to isolate and provide protection from debris during abatement work.Breathing zone - The hemisphere forward of the shoulders with a radius of about 150 - 225 mm (6 - 9 inches) from the worker's nose. Bridging encapsulant - An encapsulant that forms a layer on the surface of the ACM.Building/facility owner - The legal entity, including a lessee, which exercises control over management and recordkeeping functions relating to a building and/or facility in which asbestos activities take place.Bulk testing - The collection and analysis of suspect asbestos containing materials.Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) - A person certified in the comprehensive practice of industrial hygiene by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene.Class I asbestos work - Activities involving the removal of Thermal System Insulation (TSI) and surfacing ACM and Presumed Asbestos Containing Material (PACM).Class II asbestos work - Activities involving the removal of ACM which is not thermal system insulation or surfacing material. This includes, but is not limited to, the removal of asbestos-containing wallboard, floor tile and sheeting, roofing and siding shingles, and construction mastic.Clean room/Changing room - An uncontaminated room having facilities for the storage of employee's street clothing and uncontaminated materials and equipment.Clearance sample - The final air sample taken after all asbestos work has been done and visually inspected. Performed by the VA's professional industrial hygiene consultant/Certified Industrial Hygienist (VPIH/CIH).Closely resemble - The major workplace conditions which have contributed to the levels of historic asbestos exposure, are no more protective than conditions of the current petent person - In addition to the definition in 29 CFR 1926.32(f), one who is capable of identifying existing asbestos hazards in the workplace and selecting the appropriate control strategy for asbestos exposure, who has the authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them, as specified in 29 CFR 1926.32(f); in addition, for Class I and II work who is specially trained in a training course which meets the criteria of EPA's Model Accreditation Plan (40 CFR 763) for supervisor.Contractor's Professional Industrial Hygienist (CPIH/CIH) - The asbestos abatement contractor's industrial hygienist. The industrial hygienist must meet the qualification requirements of a PIH and may be a certified industrial hygienist (CIH).Count - Refers to the fiber count or the average number of fibers greater than five microns in length with a length-to-width (aspect) ratio of at least 3 to 1, per cubic centimeter of air.Crawlspace – An area which can be found either in or adjacent to the work area. This area has limited access and egress and may contain asbestos materials and/or asbestos contaminated soil.Decontamination area/unit - An enclosed area adjacent to and connected to the regulated area and consisting of an equipment room, shower room, and clean room, which is used for the decontamination of workers, materials, and equipment that are contaminated with asbestos.Demolition - The wrecking or taking out of any load-supporting structural member and any related razing, removing, or stripping of asbestos products.VA Total – means a building or substantial part of the building is completely removed, torn or knocked down, bulldozed, flattened, or razed, including removal of building debris.Disposal bag - Typically 6 mil thick sift-proof, dustproof, leak-tight container used to package and transport asbestos waste from regulated areas to the approved landfill. Each bag/container must be labeled/marked in accordance with EPA, OSHA and DOT requirements.Disturbance - Activities that disrupt the matrix of ACM or PACM, crumble or pulverize ACM or PACM, or generate visible debris from ACM or PACM. Disturbance includes cutting away small amounts of ACM or PACM, no greater than the amount that can be contained in one standard sized glove bag or waste bag in order to access a building component. In no event shall the amount of ACM or PACM so disturbed exceed that which can be contained in one glove bag or disposal bag which shall not exceed 60 inches in length or width.Drum - A rigid, impermeable container made of cardboard fiber, plastic, or metal which can be sealed in order to be sift-proof, dustproof, and leak-tight.Employee exposure - The exposure to airborne asbestos that would occur if the employee were not wearing respiratory protection equipment.Encapsulant - A material that surrounds or embeds asbestos fibers in an adhesive matrix and prevents the release of fibers.Encapsulation - Treating ACM with an encapsulant.Enclosure - The construction of an air tight, impermeable, permanent barrier around ACM to control the release of asbestos fibers from the material and also eliminate access to the material. Equipment room - A contaminated room located within the decontamination area that is supplied with impermeable bags or containers for the disposal of contaminated protective clothing and equipment.Fiber - A particulate form of asbestos, 5 microns or longer, with a length to width (aspect) ratio of at least 3 to 1.Fibers per cubic centimeter (f/cc) - Abbreviation for fibers per cubic centimeter, used to describe the level of asbestos fibers in air.Filter - Media used in respirators, vacuums, or other machines to remove particulate from air.Firestopping - Material used to close the open parts of a structure in order to prevent a fire from spreading.Friable asbestos containing material - Any material containing more than one (1) percent or asbestos as determined using the method specified in appendix A, Subpart F, 40 CFR 763, section 1, Polarized Light Microscopy, that, when dry, can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure.Glovebag - Not more than a 60 x 60 inch impervious plastic bag-like enclosure affixed around an asbestos-containing material, with glove-like appendages through which materials and tools may be handled.High efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter – An ASHRAE MERV 17 filter capable of trapping and retaining at least 99.97 percent of all mono-dispersed particles of 0.3 micrometers in diameter.HEPA vacuum - Vacuum collection equipment equipped with a HEPA filter system capable of collecting and retaining asbestos fibers.Homogeneous area - An area of surfacing, thermal system insulation or miscellaneous ACM that is uniform in color, texture and date of application.HVAC - Heating, Ventilation and Air ConditioningIndustrial hygienist (IH) - A professional qualified by education, training, and experience to anticipate, recognize, evaluate and develop controls for occupational health hazards. Meets definition requirements of the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA).Industrial hygienist technician (IH Technician) - A person working under the direction of an IH or CIH who has special training, experience, certifications and licenses required for the industrial hygiene work assigned. Some states require that an industrial hygienist technician conducting asbestos abatement clearance inspection and clearance air sampling be licensed as an asbestos project monitor.Intact - The ACM has not crumbled, been pulverized, or otherwise deteriorated so that the asbestos is no longer likely to be bound with its matrix.Lockdown - Applying encapsulant, after a final visual inspection, on all abated surfaces at the conclusion of ACM removal prior to removal of critical barriers.National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) - EPA's rule to control emissions of asbestos to the environment (40 CFR Part 61, Subpart M).Negative initial exposure assessment - A demonstration by the employer which complies with the criteria in 29 CFR 1926.1101 (f)(2)(iii), that employee exposure during an operation is expected to be consistently below the PELs.Negative pressure - Air pressure which is lower than the surrounding area, created by exhausting air from a sealed regulated area through HEPA equipped filtration units. OSHA requires maintaining -0.02" water column gauge inside the negative pressure enclosure.Negative pressure respirator - A respirator in which the air pressure inside the facepiece is negative during inhalation relative to the air pressure outside the respirator facepiece.Non-friable ACM - Material that contains more than 1 percent asbestos but cannot be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand anic vapor cartridge - The type of cartridge used on air purifying respirators to remove organic vapor hazardous air contaminants.Outside air - The air outside buildings and structures, including, but not limited to, the air under a bridge or in an open ferry dock.Owner/operator - Any person who owns, leases, operates, controls, or supervises the facility being demolished or renovated or any person who owns, leases, operates, controls, or supervises the demolition or renovation operation, or both.Penetrating encapsulant - Encapsulant that is absorbed into the ACM matrix without leaving a surface layer.Personal protective equipment (PPE) – equipment designed to protect user from injury and/or specific job hazard. Such equipment may include protective clothing, hard hats, safety glasses, and respirators.Personal sampling/monitoring - Representative air samples obtained in the breathing zone for one or workers within the regulated area using a filter cassette and a calibrated air sampling pump to determine asbestos exposure. Permissible exposure limit (PEL) - The level of exposure OSHA allows for an 8 hour time weighted average. For asbestos fibers, the eight (8) hour time weighted average PEL is 0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter (0.1 f/cc) of air and the 30-minute Excursion Limit is 1.0 fibers per cubic centimeter (1 f/cc).Pipe Tunnel – An area, typically located adjacent to mechanical spaces or boiler rooms in which the pipes servicing the heating system in the building are routed to allow the pipes to access heating elements. These areas may contain asbestos pipe insulation, asbestos fittings, or asbestos-contaminated soil.Polarized light microscopy (PLM) - Light microscopy using dispersion staining techniques and refractive indices to identify and quantify the type(s) of asbestos present in a bulk sample.Polyethylene sheeting - Strong plastic barrier material 4 to 6 mils thick, semi-transparent, flame retardant per NFPA 241.Positive/negative fit check - A method of verifying the seal of a facepiece respirator by temporarily occluding the filters and breathing in (inhaling) and then temporarily occluding the exhalation valve and breathing out (exhaling) while checking for inward or outward leakage of the respirator respectively.Presumed ACM (PACM) - Thermal system insulation, surfacing, and flooring material installed in buildings prior to 1981. If the building owner has actual knowledge, or should have known through the exercise of due diligence that other materials are ACM, they too must be treated as PACM. The designation of PACM may be rebutted pursuant to 29 CFR 1926.1101 (b).Professional IH - An IH who meets the definition requirements of AIHA; meets the definition requirements of OSHA as a "Competent Person" at 29 CFR 1926.1101 (b); has completed two specialized EPA approved courses on management and supervision of asbestos abatement projects; has formal training in respiratory protection and waste disposal; and has a minimum of four projects of similar complexity with this project of which at least three projects serving as the supervisory IH. The PIH may be either the VA’s PIH (VPIH) of Contractor’s PIH (CPIH/CIH).Project designer - A person who has successfully completed the training requirements for an asbestos abatement project designer as required by 40 CFR 763 Appendix C, Part I; (B)(5).Assigned Protection factor - A value assigned by OSHA/NIOSH to indicate the expected protection provided by each respirator class, when the respirator is properly selected and worn correctly. The number indicates the reduction of exposure level from outside to inside the respirator facepiece.Qualitative fit test (QLFT) - A fit test using a challenge material that can be sensed by the wearer if leakage in the respirator occurs.Quantitative fit test (QNFT) - A fit test using a challenge material which is quantified outside and inside the respirator thus allowing the determination of the actual fit factor. Regulated area - An area established by the employer to demarcate where Class I, II, and III asbestos work is conducted, and any adjoining area where debris and waste from such asbestos work may accumulate; and a work area within which airborne concentrations of asbestos exceed, or there is a reasonable possibility they may exceed the PEL.Regulated ACM (RACM) - Friable ACM; Category I non-friable ACM that has become friable; Category I non-friable ACM that will be or has been subjected to sanding, grinding, cutting, or abrading or; Category II non-friable ACM that has a high probability of becoming or has become crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by the forces expected to act on the material in the course of the demolition or renovation operation.Removal - All operations where ACM, PACM and/or RACM is taken out or stripped from structures or substrates, including demolition operations.Renovation - Altering a facility or one or more facility components in any way, including the stripping or removal of asbestos from a facility component which does not involve demolition activity.Repair - Overhauling, rebuilding, reconstructing, or reconditioning of structures or substrates, including encapsulation or other repair of ACM or PACM attached to structures or substrates.Shower room - The portion of the PDF where personnel shower before leaving the regulated area. Supplied air respirator (SAR) - A respiratory protection system that supplies minimum Grade D respirable air per ANSI/Compressed Gas Association Commodity Specification for Air, G-7.1-1989.Surfacing ACM - A material containing more than 1 percent asbestos that is sprayed, troweled on or otherwise applied to surfaces for acoustical, fireproofing and other purposes.Surfactant - A chemical added to water to decrease water's surface tension thus making it more penetrating into ACM.Thermal system ACM - A material containing more than 1 percent asbestos applied to pipes, fittings, boilers, breeching, tanks, ducts, or other structural components to prevent heat loss or gain.Transmission electron microscopy (TEM) - A microscopy method that can identify and count asbestos fibers.VA Professional Industrial Hygienist (VPIH/CIH) – The Department of Veterans Affairs Professional Industrial Hygienist must meet the qualifications of a PIH, and may be a Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH).VA Representative - The VA official responsible for on-going project work.Visible emissions - Any emissions, which are visually detectable without the aid of instruments, coming from ACM/PACM/RACM/ACS or ACM waste material.Waste/Equipment decontamination facility (W/EDF) – The area in which equipment is decontaminated before removal from the regulated area.Waste generator - Any owner or operator whose act or process produces asbestos-containing waste material.Waste shipment record - The shipping document, required to be originated and signed by the waste generator, used to track and substantiate the disposition of asbestos-containing waste material.Wet cleaning - The process of thoroughly eliminating, by wet methods, any asbestos contamination from surfaces or objects. 1.4.3 REFERENCED STANDARDS ORGANIZATIONSThe following acronyms or abbreviations as referenced in contract/ specification documents are defined to mean the associated names. Names and addresses may be subject to change.VA Department of Veterans Affairs810 Vermont Avenue, NWWashington, DC 20420AIHA American Industrial Hygiene Association2700 Prosperity Avenue, Suite 250Fairfax, VA 22031703-849-8888ANSI American National Standards Institute1430 BroadwayNew York, NY 10018212-354-3300ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials1916 Race St.Philadelphia, PA 19103215-299-5400CFR Code of Federal RegulationsGovernment Printing OfficeWashington, DC 20420F.CGA Compressed Gas Association1235 Jefferson Davis HighwayArlington, VA 22202703-979-0900CS Commercial Standard of the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)U. S. Department of CommerceGovernment Printing OfficeWashington, DC 20420EPA Environmental Protection Agency401 M St., SWWashington, DC 20460202-382-3949MIL-STD Military Standards/Standardization DivisionOffice of the Assistant Secretary of DefenseWashington, DC 20420I.NEC National Electrical Code (by NFPA)J.NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association2101 L Street, NWWashington, DC 20037K.NFPA National Fire Protection Association1 Batterymarch ParkP.O. Box 9101Quincy, MA 02269-9101800-344-3555L.NIOSH National Institutes for Occupational Safety and Health4676 Columbia ParkwayCincinnati, OH 45226513-533-8236M.OSHA Occupational Safety and Health AdministrationU.S. Department of LaborGovernment Printing OfficeWashington, DC 20402N.UL Underwriters Laboratory333 Pfingsten Rd.Northbrook, IL 60062312-272-88001.5 APPLICABLE CODES AND REGULATIONS1.5.1 GENERAL APPLICABILITY OF CODES, REGULATIONS, AND STANDARDSA.All work under this contract shall be done in strict accordance with all applicable Federal, State, and local regulations, standards and codes governing asbestos abatement, and any other trade work done in conjunction with the abatement. All applicable codes, regulations and standards are adopted into this specification and will have the same force and effect as this specification.B.The most recent edition of any relevant regulation, standard, document or code shall be in effect. Where conflict among the requirements or with these specifications exists, the most stringent requirement(s) shall be utilized.C.Copies of all standards, regulations, codes and other applicable documents, including this specification and those listed in Section 1.5 shall be available at the worksite in the clean change area of the worker decontamination system.1.5.2 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITYThe Asbestos Abatement Contractor (Contractor) shall assume full responsibility and liability for compliance with all applicable Federal, State and Local regulations related to any and all aspects of the asbestos abatement project. The Contractor is responsible for providing and maintaining training, accreditations, medical exams, medical records, personal protective equipment (PPE) including respiratory protection including respirator fit testing, as required by applicable Federal, State and Local regulations. The Contractor shall hold the VA and VPIH/CIH consultants harmless for any Contractor’s failure to comply with any applicable work, packaging, transporting, disposal, safety, health, or environmental requirement on the part of himself, his employees, or his subcontractors. The Contractor will incur all costs of the CPIH/CIH, including all sampling/analytical costs to assure compliance with OSHA/EPA/State requirements related to failure to comply with the regulations applicable to the work.1.5.3 FEDERAL REQUIREMENTSFederal requirements which govern some aspect of asbestos abatement include, but are not limited to, the following regulations.A.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)1.Title 29 CFR 1926.1101 - Construction Standard for Asbestos2.Title 29 CFR 1910.132 - Personal Protective Equipment3.Title 29 CFR 1910.134 - Respiratory Protection4.Title 29 CFR 1926 - Construction Industry Standards5.Title 29 CFR 1910.20 - Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records6.Title 29 CFR 1910.1200 - Hazard Communication7.Title 29 CFR 1910.151 - Medical and First AidB.Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)1.40 CFR 61 Subpart A and M (Revised Subpart B) - National Emission Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants - Asbestos.2.40 CFR 763.80 - Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA)C.Department of Transportation (DOT)Title 49 CFR 100 - 185 – Transportation1.5.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.Follow local, state, and federal laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and regulations regarding removing, handling, storing, transporting, and disposing of lead-contaminated materials.1.5.5 STANDARDSA.Standards which govern asbestos abatement activities include, but are not limited to, the following:1.American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z9.2-79 - Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems Z88.2 - Practices for Respiratory Protection.2.Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 586-90 - UL Standard for Safety of HEPA filter Units, 7th Edition.B.Standards which govern encapsulation work include, but are not limited to, the following:1.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)C.Standards which govern the fire and safety concerns in abatement work include, but are not limited to, the following:1.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations.2.NFPA 701 - Standard Methods for Fire Tests for Flame Resistant Textiles and Film.3.NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code1.5.6 EPA GUIDANCE DOCUMENTSA.EPA guidance documents which discuss asbestos abatement work activities are listed below. These documents are made part of this section by reference. EPA publications can be ordered from (800) 424-9065.B.Guidance for Controlling ACM in Buildings (Purple Book) EPA 560/5-85-024C.Asbestos Waste Management Guidance EPA 530-SW-85-007D.A Guide to Respiratory Protection for the Asbestos Abatement Industry EPA-560-OPTS-86-001E.Guide to Managing Asbestos in Place (Green Book) TS 799 20T July 19901.5.7 NOTICESA.State and Local agencies: Send written notification as required by state and local regulations including the local fire department prior to beginning any work on ACM as follows:B.Copies of notifications shall be submitted to the VA for the facility's records in the same time frame notification are given to EPA, State, and Local authorities.1.5.8 PERMITS/LICENSESA.The contractor shall apply for and have all required permits and licenses to perform asbestos abatement work as required by Federal, State, and Local regulations.1.5.9 POSTING AND FILING OF REGULATIONSA.Maintain two (2) copies of applicable federal, state, and local regulations. Post one copy of each at the regulated area where workers will have daily access to the regulations and keep another copy in the Contractor's office.1.5.10 VA RESPONSIBILITIESPrior to commencement of work:A.Notify occupants adjacent to regulated areas of project dates and requirements for relocation, if needed. Arrangements must be made prior to starting work for relocation of desks, files, equipments and personal possessions to avoid unauthorized access into the regulated area. Note: Notification of adjacent personnel is required by OSHA in 29 CFR 1926.1101 (k) to prevent unnecessary or unauthorized access to the regulated area.B.Submit to the Contractor results of background air sampling; including location of samples, person who collected the samples, equipment utilized, calibration data and method of analysis. During abatement, submit to the Contractor, results of bulk material analysis and air sampling data collected during the course of the abatement. This information shall not release the Contractor from any responsibility for OSHA compliance.1.5.11 SITE SECURITYA.Regulated area access is to be restricted only to authorized, trained/accredited and protected personnel. These may include the Contractor's employees, employees of Subcontractors, VA employees and representatives, State and local inspectors, and any other designated individuals. A list of authorized personnel shall be established prior to commencing the project and be posted in the clean room of the decontamination unit.B.Entry into the regulated area by unauthorized individuals shall be reported immediately to the Competent Person by anyone observing the entry. The Competent person shall immediately notify the VA.C.A log book shall be maintained in the clean room of the decontamination unit. Anyone who enters the regulated area must record their name, affiliation, time in, and time out for each entry.D.Access to the regulated area shall be through of a critical barrier doorway. All other access (doors, windows, hallways, etc.) shall be sealed or locked to prevent entry to or exit from the regulated area. The only exceptions for this requirement are the waste/equipment load-out area which shall be sealed except during the removal of containerized asbestos waste from the regulated area, and emergency exits. Emergency exits shall not be locked from the inside; however, they shall be sealed with poly sheeting and taped until needed.E.The Contractor's Competent Person shall control site security during abatement operations in order to isolate work in progress and protect adjacent personnel. A 24 hour security system shall be provided at the entrance to the regulated area to assure that all entrants are logged in/out and that only authorized personnel are allowed entrance. F.The Contractor will have the VA's assistance in notifying adjacent personnel of the presence, location and quantity of ACM in the regulated area and enforcement of restricted access by the VA's employees.G.The regulated area shall be locked during non-working hours and secured by VA security guards.1.5.12 EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN AND ARRANGEMENTSA.An Emergency Action Plan shall be developed prior to commencing abatement activities and shall be agreed to by the Contractor and the VA. The Plan shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.38 (a);(b).B.Emergency procedures shall be in written form and prominently posted in the clean room and equipment room of the decontamination unit. Everyone, prior to entering the regulated area, must read and sign these procedures to acknowledge understanding of the regulated area layout, location of emergency exits and emergency procedures.C.Emergency planning shall include written notification of police, fire, and emergency medical personnel of planned abatement activities; work schedule; layout of regulated area; and access to the regulated area, particularly barriers that may affect response capabilities.D.Emergency planning shall include consideration of fire, explosion, hazardous atmospheres, electrical hazards, slips/trips and falls, confined spaces, and heat stress illness. Written procedures for response to emergency situations shall be developed and employee training in procedures shall be provided.E.Employees shall be trained in regulated area/site evacuation procedures in the event of workplace emergencies.1.For non life-threatening situations - employees injured or otherwise incapacitated shall decontaminate following normal procedures with assistance from fellow workers, if necessary, before exiting the regulated area to obtain proper medical treatment.2.For life-threatening injury or illness, worker decontamination shall take least priority after measures to stabilize the injured worker, remove them from the regulated area, and secure proper medical treatment.F.Telephone numbers of any/all emergency response personnel shall be prominently posted in the clean room, along with the location of the nearest telephone.G.The Contractor shall provide verification of first aid/CPR training for personnel responsible for providing first aid/CPR. OSHA requires medical assistance within 3-4 minutes of a life-threatening injury/illness. Bloodborne Pathogen training shall also be verified for those personnel required to provide first aid/CPR.H.The Emergency Action Plan shall provide for a Contingency Plan in the event that an incident occurs that may require the modification of the Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plans during abatement. Such incidents include, but are not limited to, fire; accident; power failure; negative pressure failure; and supplied air system failure. The Contractor shall detail procedures to be followed in the event of an incident assuring that asbestos abatement work is stopped and wetting is continued until correction of the problem.1.5.13 PRE-construction MEETINGPrior to commencing the work, the Contractor shall meet with the VA Certified Industrial Hygienist (VPCIH) to present and review, as appropriate, the items following this paragraph. The Contractor's Competent Person(s) who will be on-site shall participate in the pre-start meeting. The pre-start meeting is to discuss and determine procedures to be used during the project. At this meeting, the Contractor shall provide:A.Proof of Contractor licensing.B.Proof the Competent Person(s) is trained and accredited and approved for working in this State. Verification of the experience of the Competent Person(s) shall also be presented.C.A list of all workers who will participate in the project, including experience and verification of training and accreditation.D.A list of and verification of training for all personnel who have current first-aid/CPR training. A minimum of one person per shift must have adequate training.E.Current medical written opinions for all personnel working on-site meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1101 (m).F.Current fit-tests for all personnel wearing respirators on-site meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1101 (h) and Appendix C. G.A copy of the Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan. In these procedures, the following information must be detailed, specific for this project.1.Regulated area preparation procedures;2.Notification requirements procedure of Contractor as required in 29 CFR 1926.1101 (d);3.Decontamination area set-up/layout and decontamination procedures for employees;4.Abatement methods/procedures and equipment to be used;5.Personal protective equipment to be used;H.At this meeting the Contractor shall provide all submittals as required.I.Procedures for handling, packaging and disposal of asbestos waste.J.Emergency Action Plan and Contingency Plan Procedures.1.6 PROJECT COORDINATIONThe following are the minimum administrative and supervisory personnel necessary for coordination of the work.1.6.1 PERSONNELA.Administrative and supervisory personnel shall consist of a qualified Competent Person(s) as defined by OSHA in the Construction Standards and the Asbestos Construction Standard; Contractor Professional Industrial Hygienist and Industrial Hygiene Technicians. These employees are the Contractor's representatives responsible for compliance with these specifications and all other applicable requirements.B.Non-supervisory personnel shall consist of an adequate number of qualified personnel to meet the schedule requirements of the project. Personnel shall meet required qualifications. Personnel utilized on-site shall be pre-approved by the VA representative. A request for approval shall be submitted for any person to be employed during the project giving the person's name; social security number; qualifications; accreditation card with color picture; Certificate of Worker's Acknowledgment; and Affidavit of Medical Surveillance and Respiratory Protection and current Respirator Fit Test.C.Minimum qualifications for Contractor and assigned personnel are:1.The Contractor has conducted within the last three (3) years, three (3) projects of similar complexity and dollar value as this project; has not been cited and penalized for serious violations of federal (and state as applicable) EPA and OSHA asbestos regulations in the past three (3) years; has adequate liability/occurrence insurance for asbestos work as required by the state; is licensed in applicable states; has adequate and qualified personnel available to complete the work; has comprehensive Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plans for asbestos work; and has adequate materials, equipment and supplies to perform the work.2.The Competent Person has four (4) years of abatement experience of which two (2) years were as the Competent Person on the project; meets the OSHA definition of a Competent Person; has been the Competent Person on two (2) projects of similar size and complexity as this project within the past three (3) years; has completed EPA AHERA/OSHA/State/Local training requirements/accreditation(s) and refreshers; and has all required OSHA documentation related to medical and respiratory protection.3.The Contractor Professional Industrial Hygienist/CIH (CPIH/CIH) shall have five (5) years of monitoring experience and supervision of asbestos abatement projects; has participated as senior IH on five (5) abatement projects, three (3) of which are similar in size and complexity as this project; has developed at least one complete Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan for asbestos abatement; has trained abatement personnel for three (3) years; has specialized EPA AHERA/OSHA training in asbestos abatement management, respiratory protection, waste disposal and asbestos inspection; has completed the NIOSH 582 Course or equivalent, Contractor/Supervisor course; and has appropriate medical/respiratory protection records/documentation.4.The Abatement Personnel shall have completed the EPA AHERA/OSHA abatement worker course; have training on the Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plans of the Contractor; has one year of asbestos abatement experience within the past three (3) years of similar size and complexity; has applicable medical and respiratory protection documentation; and has certificate of training/current refresher and State accreditation/license.All personnel should be in compliance with OSHA construction safety training as applicable and submit certification.1.7 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION1.7.1 GENERAL - RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAMThe Contractor shall develop and implement a written Respiratory Protection Program (RPP) which is in compliance with the January 8, 1998 OSHA requirements found at 29 CFR 1926.1101 and 29 CFR 1910.Subpart I;134. ANSI Standard Z88.2-1992 provides excellent guidance for developing a respiratory protection program. All respirators used must be NIOSH approved for asbestos abatement activities. The written RPP shall, at a minimum, contain the basic requirements found at 29 CFR 1910.134 (c)(1)(i - ix) - Respiratory Protection Program.1.7.2 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM COORDINATORThe Respiratory Protection Program Coordinator (RPPC) must be identified and shall have two (2) years experience coordinating RPP of similar size and complexity. The RPPC must submit a signed statement attesting to the fact that the program meets the above requirements.1.7.3 SELECTION AND USE OF RESPIRATORSThe procedure for the selection and use of respirators must be submitted to the VA as part of the Contractor's qualifications. The procedure must written clearly enough for workers to understand. A copy of the Respiratory Protection Program must be available in the clean room of the decontamination unit for reference by employees or authorized visitors.1.7.4 MINIMUM RESPIRATORY PROTECTIONMinimum respiratory protection shall be a half face, HEPA filtered, air purifying respirator when fiber levels are maintained consistently at or below 0.1 f/cc. A higher level of respiratory protection may be provided or required, depending on fiber levels. Respirator selection shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1101 (h); Table 1, except as indicated in this paragraph. Abatement personnel must have a respirator for their exclusive use.1.7.5 MEDICAL WRITTEN OPINIONNo employee shall be allowed to wear a respirator unless a physician or other licensed health care professional has provided a written determination they are medically qualified to wear the class of respirator to be used on the project while wearing whole body impermeable garments and subjected to heat or cold stress.1.7.6 RESPIRATOR FIT TESTAll personnel wearing respirators shall have a current qualitative/quantitative fit test which was conducted in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.134 (f) and Appendix A. Quantitative fit tests shall be done for PAPRs which have been put into a motor/blower failure mode.1.7.7 RESPIRATOR FIT CHECKThe Competent Person shall assure that the positive/negative pressure user seal check is done each time the respirator is donned by an employee. Head coverings must cover respirator head straps. Any situation that prevents an effective facepiece to face seal as evidenced by failure of a user seal check shall preclude that person from wearing a respirator inside the regulated area until resolution of the problem. 1.7.8 MAINTENANCE AND CARE OF RESPIRATORSThe Respiratory Protection Program Coordinator shall submit evidence and documentation showing compliance with 29 CFR 1910.134 (h) Maintenance and Care of Respirators.1.7.9 SUPPLIED AIR SYSTEMSIf a supplied air system is used, the system shall meet all requirements of 29 CFR 1910.134 and the ANSI/Compressed Gas Association (CGA) Commodity Specification for Air current requirements for Type 1 - Grade D breathing air. Low pressure systems are not allowed to be used on asbestos abatement projects. Supplied Air respirator use shall be in accordance with EPA/NIOSH publication EPA-560-OPTS-86-001 "A Guide to Respiratory Protection for the Asbestos Abatement Industry". The competent person on site will be responsible for the supplied air system to ensure the safety of the worker.1.8 WORKER PROTECTION1.8.1 TRAINING OF ABATEMENT PERSONNELPrior to beginning any abatement activity, all personnel shall be trained in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 (k)(9) and any additional State/Local requirements. Training must include, at a minimum, the elements listed at 29 CFR 1926.1101 (k)(9)(viii). Training shall have been conducted by a third party, EPA/State approved trainer meeting the requirements of EPA 40 CFR 763 Appendix C (AHERA MAP). Initial training certificates and current refresher and accreditation proof must be submitted for each person working at the site.1.8.2 MEDICAL EXAMINATIONSMedical examinations meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1101 (m) shall be provided for all personnel working in the regulated area, regardless of exposure levels. A current physician's written opinion as required by 29 CFR 1926.1101 (m)(4) shall be provided for each person and shall include in the medical opinion the person has been evaluated for working in a heat and cold stress environment while wearing personal protective equipment (PPE) and is able to perform the work without risk of material health impairment.1.8.3 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT Provide whole body clothing, head coverings, foot coverings and any other personal protective equipment as determined by conducting the hazard assessment required by OSHA at 29 CFR 1910.132 (d). The Competent Person shall ensure the integrity of personal protective equipment worn for the duration of the project. Duct tape shall be used to secure all suit sleeves to wrists and to secure foot coverings at the ankle. Worker protection shall meet the most stringent requirements.1.8.4 REGULATED AREA ENTRY PROCEDUREThe Competent Person shall ensure that each time workers enter the regulated area they remove ALL street clothes in the clean room of the decontamination unit and put on new disposable coveralls, head coverings, a clean respirator, and then proceed through the shower room to the equipment room where they put on non-disposable required personal protective equipment. 1.8.5 DECONTAMINATION PROCEDUREThe Competent Person shall require all personnel to adhere to following decontamination procedures whenever they leave the regulated area.A.When exiting the regulated area, remove all disposable PPE and dispose of in a disposal bag provided in the regulated area. B. Carefully decontaminate and clean the respirator. Put in a clean container/bag.1.8.6 REGULATED AREA REQUIREMENTSThe Competent Person shall meet all requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1101 (o) and assure that all requirements for Class I regulated areas at 29 CFR 1926.1101 (e) are met applicable to Class II work. All personnel in the regulated area shall not be allowed to eat, drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, apply cosmetics, or in any way interfere with the fit of their respirator.1.9 DECONTAMINATION FACILITIES:1.9.1 DESCRIPTION: Provide each regulated area with separate personnel decontamination facilities (PDF) and waste/equipment decontamination facilities (W/EDF). Ensure that the PDF are the only means of ingress and egress to the regulated area and that all equipment, bagged waste, and other material exit the regulated area only through the W/EDF. 1.9.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTSAll personnel entering or exiting a regulated area must go through the PDF and shall follow the requirements at 29 CFR 1926.1101 (j)(1) and these specifications. All waste, equipment and contaminated materials must exit the regulated area through the W/EDF and be decontaminated in accordance with these specifications. Walls and ceilings of the PDF and W/EDF must be constructed of a minimum of 3 layers of 6 mil opaque fire retardant polyethylene sheeting and be securely attached to existing building components and/or an adequate temporary framework. A minimum of 3 layers of 6 mil poly shall also be used to cover the floor under the PDF and W/EDF units. Construct doors so that they overlap and secure to adjacent surfaces. Weight inner doorway sheets with layers of duct tape so that they close quickly after release. Put arrows on sheets so they show direction of travel and overlap. If the building adjacent area is occupied, construct a solid barrier on the occupied side(s) to protect the sheeting and reduce potential for non-authorized personnel entering the regulated area.1.9.3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES TO THE PDF AND W/EDFThe Competent Person shall provide temporary water service connections to the PDF and W/EDF. Backflow prevention must be provided at the point of connection to the VA system. Water supply must be of adequate pressure and meet requirements of 29 CFR 1910.141 (d)(3). Provide adequate temporary overhead electric power with ground fault circuit interruption (GFCI) protection. Provide a sub-panel equipped with GFCI protection for all temporary power in the clean room. Provide adequate lighting to provide a minimum of 50 foot candles in the PDF and W/EDF. Provide temporary heat, if needed, to maintain 70oF throughout the PDF and W/EDF.1.9.4 PERSONNEL DECONTAMINATION FACILITY (PDF)1. Clean Room: The clean room must be physically and visually separated from the rest of the building to protect the privacy of personnel changing clothes. The clean room shall be constructed of at least 3 layers of 6 mil opaque fire retardant poly to provide an air tight room. Provide a minimum of 2 - 900 mm (3 foot) wide 6 mil poly opaque fire retardant doorways. One doorway shall be the entry from outside the PDF and the second doorway shall be to the shower room of the PDF. The floor of the clean room shall be maintained in a clean, dry condition. Shower overflow shall not be allowed into the clean room. Provide 1 storage locker per person. A portable fire extinguisher, minimum 10 pounds capacity, Type ABC, shall be provided in accordance with OSHA and NFPA Standard 10. All persons entering the regulated area shall remove all street clothing in the clean room and dress in disposable protective clothing and respiratory protection. Any person entering the clean room does so either from the outside with street clothing on or is coming from the shower room completely naked and thoroughly washed. Females required to enter the regulated area shall be ensured of their privacy throughout the entry/exit process by posting guards at both entry points to the PDF so no male can enter or exit the PDF during her stay in the PDF.2.Shower Room: The Competent Person shall assure that the shower room is a completely water tight compartment to be used for the movement of all personnel from the clean room to the equipment room and for the showering of all personnel going from the equipment room to the clean room. Each shower shall be constructed so water runs down the walls of the shower and into a drip pan. Install a freely draining smooth floor on top of the shower pan. The shower room shall be separated from the rest of the building and from the clean room and equipment room using air tight walls made from at least 3 layers of 6 mil opaque fire retardant poly. The shower shall be equipped with a shower head and controls, hot and cold water, drainage, soap dish and continuous supply of soap, and shall be maintained in a sanitary condition throughout its use. The controls shall be arranged so an individual can shower without assistance. Provide a flexible hose shower head, hose bibs and all other items shown on Shower Schematic. Waste water will be pumped to a drain after being filtered through a minimum of a 100 micron sock in the shower drain; a 20 micron filter; and a final 5 micron filter. Filters will be changed a minimum of daily or more often as needed. Filter changes must be done in the shower to prevent loss of contaminated water. Hose down all shower surfaces after each shift and clean any debris from the shower pan. Residue is to be disposed of as asbestos waste.3.Equipment Room: The Competent Person shall provide an equipment room which shall be an air tight compartment for the storage of work equipment/tools, reusable personal protective equipment, except for a respirator and for use as a gross decontamination area for personnel exiting the regulated area. The equipment room shall be separated from the regulated area by a minimum 3 foot wide door made with 2 layers of 6 mil opaque fire retardant poly. The equipment room shall be separated from the regulated area, the shower room and the rest of the building by air tight walls and ceiling constructed of a minimum of 3 layers of 6 mil opaque fire retardant poly. Damp wipe all surfaces of the equipment room after each shift change. Provide an additional loose layer of 6 mil fire retardant poly per shift change and remove this layer after each shift. If needed, provide a temporary electrical sub-panel equipped with GFCI in the equipment room to accommodate any equipment required in the regulated area.4.The PDF shall be as follows: Clean room at the entrance followed by a shower room followed by an equipment room leading to the regulated area. Each doorway in the PDF shall be a minimum of 2 layers of 6 mil opaque fire retardant poly.SPEC. WRITER NOTE: OSHA does not require a decontamination unit for Class II work.1.9.5 WASTE/EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION FACILITY (W/EDF) The Competent Person shall provide an W/EDF consisting of a wash room, holding room, and clean room for removal of waste, equipment and contaminated material from the regulated area. Personnel shall not enter or exit the W/EDF except in the event of an emergency. Clean debris and residue in the W/EDF daily. All surfaces in the W/EDF shall be wiped/hosed down after each shift and all debris shall be cleaned from the shower pan. The W/EDF shall consist of the following:1.Wash Down Station: Provide an enclosed shower unit in the regulated area just outside the Wash Room as an equipment bag and container cleaning station.2.Wash Room: Provide a wash room for cleaning of bagged or containerized asbestos containing waste materials passed from the regulated area. Construct the wash room using 50 x 100 mm (2" x 4") wood framing and 3 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly. Locate the wash room so that packaged materials, after being wiped clean, can be passed to the Holding Room. Doorways in the wash room shall be constructed of 2 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly.3.Holding Room: Provide a holding room as a drop location for bagged materials passed from the wash room. Construct the holding room using 50 x 100 mm (2" x 4") wood framing and 3 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly. The holding room shall be located so that bagged material cannot be passed from the wash room to the clean room unless it goes through the holding room. Doorways in the holding room shall be constructed of 2 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly.4.Clean Room: Provide a clean room to isolate the holding room from the exterior of the regulated area. Construct the clean room using 2 x 4 wood framing and 2 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly. The clean room shall be located so as to provide access to the holding room from the building exterior. Doorways to the clean room shall be constructed of 2 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly. When a negative pressure differential system is used, a rigid enclosure separation between the W/EDF clean room and the adjacent areas shall be provided.5.The W/EDF shall be as follows: Wash Room leading to a Holding Room followed by a Clean Room leading to outside the regulated area. See diagram.1.9.6 WASTE/EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES: At the washdown station in the regulated area, thoroughly wet clean contaminated equipment and/or sealed polyethylene bags and pass into Wash Room after visual inspection. When passing anything into the Wash Room, close all doorways of the W/EDF, other than the doorway between the washdown station and the Wash Room. Keep all outside personnel clear of the W/EDF. Once inside the Wash Room, wet clean the equipment and/or bags. After cleaning and inspection, pass items into the Holding Room. Close all doorways except the doorway between the Holding Room and the Clean Room. Workers from the Clean Room/Exterior shall enter the Holding Room and remove the decontaminated/cleaned equipment/bags for removal and disposal. These personnel will not be required to wear PPE. At no time shall personnel from the clean side be allowed to enter the Wash Room.PART 2 - PRODUCTS, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT2.1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (all abatement projects)Prior to the start of work, the contractor shall provide and maintain a sufficient quantity of materials and equipment to assure continuous and efficient work throughout the duration of the project. Work shall not start unless the following items have been delivered to the site and the CPIH/CIH has submitted verification to the VA's representative.A.All materials shall be delivered in their original package, container or bundle bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand name (where applicable).B.Store all materials subject to damage off the ground, away from wet or damp surfaces and under cover sufficient enough to prevent damage or contamination. Flammable and combustible materials cannot be stored inside buildings. Replacement materials shall be stored outside of the regulated area until abatement is completed.C.The Contractor shall not block or hinder use of buildings by patients, staff, and visitors to the VA in partially occupied buildings by placing materials/equipment in any unauthorized location.D.The Competent Person shall inspect for damaged, deteriorating or previously used materials. Such materials shall not be used and shall be removed from the worksite and disposed of properly.E.Polyethylene sheeting for walls in the regulated area shall be a minimum of 4-mils. For floors and all other uses, sheeting of at least 6-mil shall be used in widths selected to minimize the frequency of joints. Fire retardant poly shall be used throughout.F.The method of attaching polyethylene sheeting shall be agreed upon in advance by the Contractor and the VA and selected to minimize damage to equipment and surfaces. Method of attachment may include any combination of moisture resistant duct tape furring strips, spray glue, staples, nails, screws, lumber and plywood for enclosures or other effective procedures capable of sealing polyethylene to dissimilar finished or unfinished surfaces under both wet and dry conditions.G.Polyethylene sheeting utilized for the PDF shall be opaque white or black in color, 6 mil fire retardant poly.H.Installation and plumbing hardware, showers, hoses, drain pans, sump pumps and waste water filtration system shall be provided by the Contractor.I.An adequate number of HEPA vacuums, scrapers, sprayers, nylon brushes, brooms, disposable mops, rags, sponges, staple guns, shovels, ladders and scaffolding of suitable height and length as well as meeting OSHA requirements, fall protection devices, water hose to reach all areas in the regulated area, airless spray equipment, and any other tools, materials or equipment required to conduct the abatement project. All electrically operated hand tools, equipment, electric cords shall be connected to GFCI protection.J.Special protection for objects in the regulated area shall be detailed (e.g., plywood over carpeting or hardwood floors to prevent damage from scaffolds, water and falling material).K.Disposal bags – 2 layers of 6 mil poly for asbestos waste shall be pre-printed with labels, markings and address as required by OSHA, EPA and DOT regulations.L.The VA shall be provided an advance copy of the MSDS as required for all hazardous chemicals under OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1200 - Hazard Communication in the pre-project submittal. Chlorinated compounds shall not be used with any spray adhesive, mastic remover or other product. Appropriate encapsulant(s) shall be provided.M.OSHA DANGER demarcation signs, as many and as required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101(k)(7) shall be provided and placed by the Competent Person. All other posters and notices required by Federal and State regulations shall be posted in the Clean Room.N.Adequate and appropriate PPE for the project and number of personnel/shifts shall be provided. All personal protective equipment issued must be based on a written hazard assessment conducted under 29 CFR 1910.132(d).2.1.2 NEGATIVE PRESSURE FILTRATION SYSTEMThe Contractor shall provide enough HEPA negative air machines to continuously maintain a pressure differential of -0.02" water column gauge (WCG). The Competent Person shall determine the number of units needed for the regulated area by dividing the cubic feet in the regulated area by 15 and then dividing that result by the cubic feet per minute (CFM) for each unit to determine the number of units needed to continuously maintain a pressure differential of -0.02" WCG. Provide a standby unit in the event of machine failure and/or emergency in an adjacent area.NIOSH has done extensive studies and has determined that negative air machines typically operate at ~50% efficiency. The contractor shall consider this in their determination of number of units needed to continuously maintain a pressure differential of -0.02" WCG. The contractor shall use 8 air changes per hour or double the number of machines, based on their calculations, or submit proof their machines operate at stated capacities, at a 2" pressure drop across the filters.2.1.3 DESIGN AND LAYOUTA.Before start of work submit the design and layout of the regulated area and the negative air machines. The submittal shall indicate the number of, location of and size of negative air machines. The point(s) of exhaust, air flow within the regulated area, anticipated negative pressure differential, and supporting calculations for sizing shall be provided. In addition, submit the following:1.Method of supplying power to the units and designation/location of the panels.2.Description of testing method(s) for correct air volume and pressure differential. 3.If auxiliary power supply is to be provided for the negative air machines, provide a schematic diagram of the power supply and manufacturer's data on the generator and switch.2.1.4 NEGATIVE AIR MACHINES (HEPA UNITS)A.Negative Air Machine Cabinet: The cabinet shall be constructed of steel or other durable material capable of withstanding potential damage from rough handling and transportation. The width of the cabinet shall be less than 30" in order to fit in standard doorways. The cabinet must be factory sealed to prevent asbestos fibers from being released during use, transport, or maintenance. Any access to and replacement of filters shall be from the inlet end. The unit must be on casters or wheels.B.Negative Air Machine Fan: The rating capacity of the fan must indicate the CFM under actual operating conditions. Manufacturer's typically use "free-air" (no resistance) conditions when rating fans. The fan must be a centrifugal type fan.C.Negative Air Machine Final Filter: The final filter shall be a HEPA filter. The filter media must be completely sealed on all edges within a structurally rigid frame. The filter shall align with a continuous flexible gasket material in the negative air machine housing to form an air tight seal. Each HEPA filter shall be certified by the manufacturer to have an efficiency of not less than 99.97%. Testing shall have been done in accordance with Military Standard MIL-STD-282 and Army Instruction Manual 136-300-175A. Each filter must bear a UL586 label to indicate ability to perform under specified conditions. Each filter shall be marked with the name of the manufacturer, serial number, air flow rating, efficiency and resistance, and the direction of test air flow.D.Negative Air Machine Pre-filters: The pre-filters, which protect the final HEPA filter by removing larger particles, are required to prolong the operating life of the HEPA filter. Two stages of pre-filtration are required. A first stage pre-filter shall be a low efficiency type for particles 10 micron or larger. A second stage pre-filter shall have a medium efficiency effective for particles down to 5 micron or larger. Pre-filters shall be installed either on or in the intake opening of the NAM and the second stage filter must be held in place with a special housing or clamps.E.Negative Air Machine Instrumentation: Each unit must be equipped with a gauge to measure the pressure drop across the filters and to indicate when filters have become loaded and need to be changed. A table indicating the cfm for various pressure readings on the gauge shall be affixed near the gauge for reference or the reading shall indicate at what point the filters shall be changed, noting cfm delivery. The unit must have an elapsed time meter to show total hours of operation.F.Negative Air Machine Safety and Warning Devices: An electrical/ mechanical lockout must be provided to prevent the fan from being operated without a HEPA filter. Units must be equipped with an automatic shutdown device to stop the fan in the event of a rupture in the HEPA filter or blockage in the discharge of the fan. Warning lights are required to indicate normal operation; too high a pressure drop across filters; or too low of a pressure drop across filters.G.Negative Air Machine Electrical: All electrical components shall be approved by the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) and Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Each unit must be provided with overload protection and the motor, fan, fan housing, and cabinet must be grounded.H.It is essential that replacement HEPA filters be tested using an “in-line” testing method, to ensure the seal around the periphery was not damaged during replacement. Damage to the outer HEPA filter seal could allow contaminated air to bypass the HEPA filter and be discharged to an inappropriate location. Contractor will provide written documentation of test results for negative air machine units with HEPA filters changed by the contractor or documentation when changed and tested by the contractor filters.2.1.5 PRESSURE DIFFERENTIALThe fully operational negative air system within the regulated area shall continuously maintain a pressure differential of -0.02" water column gauge. Before any disturbance of any asbestos material, this shall be demonstrated to the VA by use of a pressure differential meter/manometer as required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101(e)(5)(i). The Competent Person shall be responsible for providing, maintaining, and documenting the negative pressure and air changes as required by OSHA and this specification.2.2 CONTAINMENT BARRIERS AND COVERINGS IN THE REGULATED AREA2.2.1 GENERALA.Using critical barriers, seal off the perimeter to the regulated area to completely isolate the regulated area from adjacent spaces. All surfaces in the regulated area must be covered to prevent contamination and to facilitate clean-up. Should adjacent areas become contaminated as a result of the work, shall immediately stop work and clean up the contamination at no additional cost to the VA. Provide firestopping and identify all fire barrier penetrations due to abatement work as specified in Section 3.1.4.8; FIRESTOPPING.B.Place all tools, scaffolding, materials and equipment needed for working in the regulated area prior to erecting any plastic sheeting. All uncontaminated removable furniture, equipment and/or supplies shall be removed by the VA from the regulated area before commencing work. Any objects remaining in the regulated area shall be completely covered with 2 layers of 6-mil fire retardant poly sheeting and secured with duct tape. Lock out and tag out any HVAC/electrical systems in the regulated area.2.2.3 CONTROLLING ACCESS TO THE REGULATED AREAAccess to the regulated area is allowed only through the personnel decontamination facility (PDF). All other means of access shall be eliminated and OSHA DANGER demarcation signs posted as required by OSHA. The barrier must be solid and capable of withstanding the negative pressure.2.2.4 CRITICAL BARRIERSCompletely separate any operations in the regulated area from adjacent areas using 2 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly and duct tape. Individually seal with 2 layers of 6 mil poly and duct tape all HVAC openings into the regulated area. Individually seal all lighting fixtures, clocks, doors, windows, convectors, speakers, or any other objects/openings in the regulated area. Heat must be shut off any objects covered with poly.2.2.5 secondary barriers:A loose layer of 6 mil poly shall be used as a drop cloth to protect the primary layers from debris generated during the abatement. This layer shall be replaced as needed during the work and at a minimum once per work day.2.2.6 EXTENSION OF THE REGULATED AREAIf the enclosure of the regulated area is breached in any way that could allow contamination to occur, the affected area shall be included in the regulated area and constructed as per this section. Decontamination measures must be started immediately and continue until air monitoring indicates background levels are met.2.2.7 FIRESTOPPINGA.Through penetrations caused by cables, cable trays, pipes, sleeves, conduits, etc. must be firestopped with a fire-rated firestop system providing an air tight seal.B.Firestop materials that are not equal to the wall or ceiling penetrated shall be brought to the attention of the VA Representative. The contractor shall list all areas of penetration, the type of sealant used, and whether or not the location is fire rated. Any discovery of penetrations during abatement shall be brought to the attention of the VA representative immediately. All walls, floors and ceilings are considered fire rated unless otherwise determined by the VA Representative or Fire Marshall.C.Any visible openings whether or not caused by a penetration shall be reported by the Contractor to the VA Representative for a sealant system determination. Firestops shall meet ASTM E814 and UL 1479 requirements for the opening size, penetrant, and fire rating needed.2.3 MONITORING, INSPECTION AND TESTING2.3.1 GENERALA.Perform throughout abatement work monitoring, inspection and testing inside and around the regulated area in accordance with the OSHA requirements and these specifications. OSHA requires that the Employee exposure to asbestos must not exceed 0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter (f/cc) of air, averaged over an 8-hour work shift. The CPIH/CIH is responsible for and shall inspect and oversee the performance of the Contractor IH Technician. The IH Technician shall continuously inspect and monitor conditions inside the regulated area to ensure compliance with these specifications. In addition, the CPIH/CIH shall personally manage air sample collection, analysis, and evaluation for personnel, regulated area, and adjacent area samples to satisfy OSHA requirements. Additional inspection and testing requirements are also indicated in other parts of this specification.B.The VA will employ an independent industrial hygienist (VPIH/CIH) consultant and/or use its own IH to perform various services on behalf of the VA. The VPIH/CIH will perform the necessary monitoring, inspection, testing, and other support services to ensure that VA patients, employees, and visitors will not be adversely affected by the abatement work, and that the abatement work proceeds in accordance with these specifications, that the abated areas or abated buildings have been successfully decontaminated. The work of the VPIH/CIH consultant in no way relieves the Contractor from their responsibility to perform the work in accordance with contract/specification requirements, to perform continuous inspection, monitoring and testing for the safety of their employees, and to perform other such services as specified. The cost of the VPIH/CIH and their services will be borne by the VA except for any repeat of final inspection and testing that may be required due to unsatisfactory initial results. Any repeated final inspections and/or testing, if required, will be paid for by the Contractor.C.If fibers counted by the VPIH/CIH during abatement work, either inside or outside the regulated area, utilizing the NIOSH 7400 air monitoring method, exceed the specified respective limits, the Contractor shall stop work. The Contractor may request confirmation of the results by analysis of the samples by TEM. Request must be in writing and submitted to the VA's representative. Cost for the confirmation of results will be borne by the Contractor for both the collection and analysis of samples and for the time delay that may/does result for this confirmation. Confirmation sampling and analysis will be the responsibility of the CPIH/CIH with review and approval of the VPIH/CIH. An agreement between the CPIH/CIH and the VPIH/CIH shall be reached on the exact details of the confirmation effort, in writing, including such things as the number of samples, location, collection, quality control on-site, analytical laboratory, interpretation of results and any follow-up actions. This written agreement shall be co-signed by the IH's and delivered to the VA's representative.2.3.2 SCOPE OF SERVICES OF THE VPIH/CIH CONSULTANTA.The purpose of the work of the VPIH/CIH is to: assure quality; adherence to the specification; resolve problems; prevent the spread of contamination beyond the regulated area; and assure clearance at the end of the project. In addition, their work includes performing the final inspection and testing to determine whether the regulated area or building has been adequately decontaminated. All air monitoring is to be done utilizing PCM/TEM. The VPIH/CIH will perform the following tasks:1.Task 1: Establish background levels before abatement begins by collecting background samples. Retain samples for possible TEM analysis.2.Task 2: Perform continuous air monitoring, inspection, and testing outside the regulated area during actual abatement work to detect any faults in the regulated area isolation and any adverse impact on the surroundings from regulated area activities.3.Task 3: Perform unannounced visits to spot check overall compliance of work with contract/specifications. These visits may include any inspection, monitoring, and testing inside and outside the regulated area and all aspects of the operation except personnel monitoring. 4.Task 4: Provide support to the VA representative such as evaluation of submittals from the Contractor, resolution of conflicts, interpret data, etc.5.Task 5: Perform, in the presence of the VA representative, final inspection and testing of a decontaminated regulated area at the conclusion of the abatement to certify compliance with all regulations and VA requirements/specifications.6.Task 6: Issue certificate of decontamination for each regulated area and project report.B.All documentation, inspection results and testing results generated by the VPIH/CIH will be available to the Contractor for information and consideration. The Contractor shall cooperate with and support the VPIH/CIH for efficient and smooth performance of their work.C.The monitoring and inspection results of the VPIH/CIH will be used by the VA to issue any Stop Removal orders to the Contractor during abatement work and to accept or reject a regulated area or building as decontaminated.2.3.3 MONITORING, INSPECTION AND TESTING BY CONTRACTOR CPIH/CIHThe Contractor’s CPIH/CIH is responsible for managing all monitoring, inspections, and testing required by these specifications, as well as any and all regulatory requirements adopted by these specifications. The CPIH/CIH is responsible for the continuous monitoring of all subsystems and procedures which could affect the health and safety of the Contractor’s personnel. Safety and health conditions and the provision of those conditions inside the regulated area for all persons entering the regulated area is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor/Competent Person. The person performing the personnel and area air monitoring inside the regulated area shall be an IH Technician, who shall be trained and shall have specialized field experience in sampling and analysis. The IH Technician shall have successfully completed a NIOSH 582 Course or equivalent and provide documentation. The IH Technician shall participate in the AIHA Asbestos Analysis Registry or participate in the Proficiency Analytic Testing program of AIHA for fiber counting quality control assurance. The IH Technician shall also be an accredited EPA AHERA/State Contractor/Supervisor (or Abatement Worker) and Building Inspector. The IH Technician shall have participated in five abatement projects collecting personal and area samples as well as responsibility for documentation on substantially similar projects in size and scope. The analytic laboratory used by the Contractor to analyze the samples shall be AIHA accredited for asbestos PAT and approved by the VA prior to start of the project. A daily log shall be maintained by the CPIH/CIH or IH Technician, documenting all OSHA requirements for air personal monitoring for asbestos in 29 CFR 1926.1101 (f), (g) and Appendix A. This log shall be made available to the VA representative and the VPIH/CIH upon request. The log will contain, at a minimum, information on personnel or area samples, other persons represented by the sample, the date of sample collection, start and stop times for sampling, sample volume, flow rate, and fibers/cc. The CPIH/CIH shall collect and analyze samples for each representative job being done in the regulated area, i.e., removal, wetting, clean-up, and load-out. No fewer than two personal samples per shift shall be collected and one area sample per 1,000 square feet of regulated area where abatement is taking place and one sample per shift in the clean room area shall be collected. In addition to the continuous monitoring required, the CPIH/CIH will perform inspection and testing at the final stages of abatement for each regulated area as specified in the CPIH/CIH responsibilities. Additionally, the CPIH/CIH will monitor and record pressure readings within the containment daily with a minimum of two readings at the beginning and at the end of a shift, and submit the data in the daily report.2.4 asbestos hazard abatement planThe Contractor shall have established Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan (AHAP) in printed form and loose leaf folder consisting of simplified text, diagrams, sketches, and pictures that establish and explain clearly the procedures to be followed during all phases of the work by the Contractor's personnel. The AHAP must be modified as needed to address specific requirements of this project and the specifications. The AHAP(s) shall be submitted for review and approval to the VA prior to the start of any abatement work. The minimum topics and areas to be covered by the AHAP(s) are:A.Minimum Personnel QualificationsB.Emergency Action Plan/Contingency Plans and ArrangementsC.Security and Safety ProceduresD.Respiratory Protection/Personal Protective Equipment Program and TrainingE.Medical Surveillance Program and RecordkeepingF.Regulated Area Requirements - Containment Barriers/Isolation of Regulated AreaG.Decontamination Facilities and Entry/Exit Procedures (PDF and W/EDF)H.Negative Pressure Systems RequirementsI.Monitoring, Inspections, and Testing J.Removal Procedures for ACM K.Removal of Contaminated Soil (if applicable)L.Encapsulation Procedures for ACMM.Disposal of ACM waste/equipmentN.Regulated Area Decontamination/Clean-upO.Regulated Area Visual and Air ClearanceP.Project Completion/Closeout2.5 SUBMITTALS2.5.1 PRE-start MEETING SUBMITTALSSubmit to the VA a minimum of 14 days prior to the pre-start meeting the following for review and approval. Meeting this requirement is a prerequisite for the pre-start meeting for this project:A.Submit a detailed work schedule for the entire project reflecting contract documents and the phasing/schedule requirements from the CPM chart.B.Submit a staff organization chart showing all personnel who will be working on the project and their capacity/function. Provide their qualifications, training, accreditations, and licenses, as appropriate. Provide a copy of the "Certificate of Worker's Acknowledgment" and the "Affidavit of Medical Surveillance and Respiratory Protection" for each person.C.Submit Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan developed specifically for this project, incorporating the requirements of the specifications, prepared, signed and dated by the CPIH/CIH.D.Submit the specifics of the materials and equipment to be used for this project with manufacturer names, model numbers, performance characteristics, pictures/diagrams, and number available for the following:1.Supplied air system, negative air machines, HEPA vacuums, air monitoring pumps, calibration devices, pressure differential monitoring device and emergency power generating system.2.Waste water filtration system, shower system, containment barriers.3.Encapsulants, surfactants, hand held sprayers, airless sprayers, and fire extinguishers.4.Respirators, protective clothing, personal protective equipment. 5.Fire safety equipment to be used in the regulated area.E.Submit the name, location, and phone number of the approved landfill; proof/verification the landfill is approved for ACM disposal; the landfill's requirements for ACM waste; the type of vehicle to be used for transportation; and name, address, and phone number of subcontractor, if used. Proof of asbestos training for transportation personnel shall be provided.F.Submit required notifications and arrangements made with regulatory agencies having regulatory jurisdiction and the specific contingency/emergency arrangements made with local health, fire, ambulance, hospital authorities and any other notifications/arrangements.G.Submit the name, location and verification of the laboratory and/or personnel to be used for analysis of air and/or bulk samples. Personal air monitoring must be done in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101(f) and Appendix A. And area or clearance air monitoring in accordance with EPA AHERA protocols.H.Submit qualifications verification: Submit the following evidence of qualifications. Make sure that all references are current and verifiable by providing current phone numbers and documentation.1.Asbestos Abatement Company: Project experience within the past 3 years; listing projects first most similar to this project: Project Name; Type of Abatement; Duration; Cost; Reference Name/Phone Number; Final Clearance; and Completion Date2.List of project(s) halted by owner, A/E, IH, regulatory agency in the last 3 years: Project Name; Reason; Date; Reference Name/Number; Resolution3.List asbestos regulatory citations (e.g., OSHA), notices of violations (e.g., Federal and state EPA), penalties, and legal actions taken against the company including and of the company’s officers (including damages paid) in the last 3 years. Provide copies and all information needed for verification.I.Submit information on personnel: Provide a resume; address each item completely; copies of certificates, accreditations, and licenses. Submit an affidavit signed by the CPIH/CIH stating that all personnel submitted below have medical records in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101(m) and 29 CFR 1910.20 and that the company has implemented a medical surveillance program and written respiratory protection program, and maintains recordkeeping in accordance with the above regulations. Submit the phone number and doctor/clinic/hospital used for medical evaluations.1.CPIH/CIH and IH Technician: Name; years of abatement experience; list of projects similar to this one; certificates, licenses, accreditations for proof of AHERA/OSHA specialized asbestos training; professional affiliations; number of workers trained; samples of training materials; samples of AHAP(s) developed; medical opinion; and current respirator fit test.petent Person(s)/Supervisor(s): Number; names; social security numbers; years of abatement experience as Competent Person/Supervisor; list of similar projects in size/complexity as Competent Person/Supervisor; as a worker; certificates, licenses, accreditations; proof of AHERA/OSHA specialized asbestos training; maximum number of personnel supervised on a project; medical opinion (asbestos surveillance and respirator use); and current respirator fit test.3.Workers: Numbers; names; social security numbers; years of abatement experience; certificates, licenses, accreditations; training courses in asbestos abatement and respiratory protection; medical opinion (asbestos surveillance and respirator use); and current respirator fit test.J.Submit copies of State license for asbestos abatement; copy of insurance policy, including exclusions with a letter from agent stating in plain language the coverage provided and the fact that asbestos abatement activities are covered by the policy; copy of the AHAP incorporating the requirements of this specification; information on who provides your training, how often; who provides medical surveillance, how often; who performs and how is personal air monitoring of abatement workers conducted; a list of references of independent laboratories/IH's familiar with your air monitoring and Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plans; copies of monitoring results of the five referenced projects listed and analytical method(s) used.K. Rented equipment must be decontaminated prior to returning to the rental agency.L.Submit, before the start of work, the manufacturer's technical data for all types of encapsulants, all MSDS, and application instructions.2.5.2 SUBMITTALS DURING ABATEMENTA.The Competent Person shall maintain and submit a daily log at the regulated area documenting the dates and times of the following: purpose, attendees and summary of meetings; all personnel entering/exiting the regulated area; document and discuss the resolution of unusual events such as barrier breeching, equipment failures, emergencies, and any cause for stopping work; representative air monitoring and results/TWAs/ELs. Submit this information daily to the VPIH/CIH.B.The CPIH/CIH shall document and maintain the inspection and approval of the regulated area preparation prior to start of work and daily during work.1.Removal of any poly barriers.2.Visual inspection/testing by the CPIH/CIH or IH Technician prior to application of lockdown encapsulant.3.Packaging and removal of ACM waste from regulated area.4.Disposal of ACM waste materials; copies of Waste Shipment Records/landfill receipts to the VA's representative on a weekly basis.2.5.3 SUBMITTALS AT COMPLETION OF ABATEMENTThe CPIH/CIH shall submit a project report consisting of the daily log book requirements and documentation of events during the abatement project including Waste Shipment Records signed by the landfill's agent. It will also include information on the containment and transportation of waste from the containment with applicable Chain of Custody forms. The report shall include a certificate of completion, signed and dated by the CPIH/CIH, in accordance with Attachment #1. All clearance and perimeter area samples must be submitted. The VA Representative will retain the abatement report after completion of the project and provide copies of the abatement report to VAMC Office of Engineer and the Safety Office.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 PRE-ABATEMENT ACTIVITIES3.1.1 PRE-ABATEMENT MEETINGThe VA representative, upon receipt, review, and substantial approval of all pre-abatement submittals and verification by the CPIH/CIH that all materials and equipment required for the project are on the site, will arrange for a pre-abatement meeting between the Contractor, the CPIH/CIH, Competent Person(s), the VA representative(s), and the VPIH/CIH. The purpose of the meeting is to discuss any aspect of the submittals needing clarification or amplification and to discuss any aspect of the project execution and the sequence of the operation. The Contractor shall be prepared to provide any supplemental information/documentation to the VA's representative regarding any submittals, documentation, materials or equipment. Upon satisfactory resolution of any outstanding issues, the VA's representative will issue a written order to proceed to the Contractor. No abatement work of any kind described in the following provisions shall be initiated prior to the VA written order to proceed.3.1.2 PRE-ABATEMENT INSPECTIONS AND PREPARATIONSBefore any work begins on the construction of the regulated area, the Contractor will:A.Conduct a space-by-space inspection with an authorized VA representative and prepare a written inventory of all existing damage in those spaces where asbestos abatement will occur. Still or video photography may be used to supplement the written damage inventory. Document will be signed and certified as accurate by both parties.B.The VA Representative, the Contractor, and the VPIH/CIH must be aware of VA A/E Quality Alert 07/09 indicating the failure to identify asbestos in the areas listed as well as common issues when preparing specifications and contract documents. This is especially critical when demolition is planned, because AHERA surveys are non-destructive, and ACM may remain undetected. A NESHAPS (destructive) ACM inspection should be conducted on all building structures that will be demolished. Ensure the following areas are inspected on the project: Lay-in ceilings concealing ACM; ACM behind walls/windows from previous renovations; inside utility chases/walls; transite piping/ductwork/sheets; behind radiators; lab fume hoods; transite lab countertops; roofing materials; below window sills; water/sewer lines; electrical conduit coverings; crawl spaces( previous abatement contamination); flooring/mastic covered by carpeting/new flooring; exterior insulated wall panels; on underground fuel tanks; and steam line trench coverings. C.Ensure that all furniture, machinery, equipment, curtains, drapes, blinds, and other movable objects required to be removed from the regulated area have been cleaned and removed or properly protected from contamination.D.If present and required, remove and dispose of carpeting from floors in the regulated area. If ACM floor tile is attached to the carpet while the Contractor is removing the carpet that section of the carpet will be disposed of as asbestos waste.E.Inspect existing firestopping in the regulated area. Correct as needed.3.1.3 PRE-ABATEMENT CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATIONSA.Perform all preparatory work for the first regulated area in accordance with the approved work schedule and with this specification.B.Upon completion of all preparatory work, the CPIH/CIH will inspect the work and systems and will notify the VA's representative when the work is completed in accordance with this specification. The VA's representative may inspect the regulated area and the systems with the VPIH/CIH and may require that upon satisfactory inspection, the Contractor's employees perform all major aspects of the approved AHAP, especially worker protection, respiratory systems, contingency plans, decontamination procedures, and monitoring to demonstrate satisfactory operation. The operational systems for respiratory protection and the negative pressure system shall be demonstrated for proper performance.C.The CPIH/CIH shall document the pre-abatement activities described above and deliver a copy to the VA's representative.D.Upon satisfactory inspection of the installation of and operation of systems the VA's representative will notify the Contractor in writing to proceed with the asbestos abatement work in accordance with this specification and all applicable regulations.3.2 REGULATED AREA PREPARATIONS3.2.1 OSHA DANGER SIGNSPost OSHA DANGER signs meeting the specifications of OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 at any location and approaches to the regulated area where airborne concentrations of asbestos may exceed the PEL. Signs shall be posted at a distance sufficiently far enough away from the regulated area to permit any personnel to read the sign and take the necessary measures to avoid exposure. Additional signs will be posted following construction of the regulated area enclosure.3.2.2 CONTROLLING ACCESS TO THE REGULATED AREAAccess to the regulated area is allowed only through the personnel decontamination facility (PDF), if required. All other means of access shall be eliminated and OSHA Danger demarcation signs posted as required by OSHA. If the regulated area is adjacent to or within view of an occupied area, provide a visual barrier of 6 mil opaque fire retardant poly sheeting to prevent building occupant observation. If the adjacent area is accessible to the public, the barrier must be solid3.2.3 SHUT DOWN - LOCK OUT ELECTRICALShut down and lock out/tag out electric power to the regulated area. Provide temporary power and lighting. Insure safe installation including GFCI of temporary power sources and equipment by compliance with all applicable electrical code requirements and OSHA requirements for temporary electrical systems. Electricity shall be provided by the VA.3.2.4 SHUT DOWN - LOCK OUT HVACShut down and lock out/tag out heating, cooling, and air conditioning system (HVAC) components that are in, supply or pass through the regulated area.Investigate the regulated area and agree on pre-abatement condition with the VA's representative. Seal all intake and exhaust vents in the regulated area with duct tape and 2 layers of 6-mil poly. Also, seal any seams in system components that pass through the regulated area. Remove all contaminated HVAC system filters and place in labeled 6-mil poly disposal bags for disposal as asbestos waste.3.2.5 SANITARY FACILITIESThe Contractor shall provide sanitary facilities for abatement personnel and maintain them in a clean and sanitary condition throughout the abatement project.3.2.6 WATER FOR ABATEMENTThe VA will provide water for abatement purposes. The Contractor shall connect to the existing VA system. The service to the shower(s) shall be supplied with backflow prevention.3.2.7 PREPARATION PRIOR TO SEALING OFFPlace all tools, materials and equipment needed for working in the regulated area prior to erecting any plastic sheeting. Remove all uncontaminated removable furniture, equipment and/or supplies from the regulated area before commencing work, or completely cover with 2 layers of 6-mil fire retardant poly sheeting and secure with duct tape. Lock out and tag out any HVAC systems in the regulated area.3.2.8 Critical BarriersCompletely separate any openings into the regulated area from adjacent areas using fire retardant poly at least 6 mils thick and duct tape. Individually seal with 2 layers of 6 mil poly and duct tape all HVAC openings into the regulated area. Individually seal all lighting fixtures, clocks, doors, windows, convectors, speakers, or any other objects in the regulated area. Heat must be shut off any objects covered with poly 3.2.9 PRE-CLEANING MOVABLE OBJECTSPre-cleaning of ACM contaminated items shall be performed after the enclosure has been erected and negative pressure has been established in the work area. After items have been pre-cleaned and decontaminated, they may be removed from the work area for storage until the completion of abatement in the work area.Pre-clean all movable objects within the regulated area using a HEPA filtered vacuum and/or wet cleaning methods as appropriate. After cleaning, these objects shall be removed from the regulated area and carefully stored in an uncontaminated location.3.2.10 PRE-CLEANING FIXED OBJECTSPre-cleaning of ACM contaminated items shall be performed after the enclosure has been erected and negative pressure has been established in the work areaPre-clean all fixed objects in the regulated area using HEPA filtered vacuums and/or wet cleaning techniques as appropriate. Careful attention must be paid to machinery behind grills or gratings where access may be difficult but contamination may be significant. Also, pay particular attention to wall, floor and ceiling penetration behind fixed items. After pre-cleaning, enclose fixed objects with 2 layers of 6-mil poly and seal securely in place with duct tape. Objects (e.g., permanent fixtures, shelves, electronic equipment, laboratory tables, sprinklers, alarm systems, closed circuit TV equipment and computer cables) which must remain in the regulated area and that require special ventilation or enclosure requirements should be designated here along with specified means of protection. Contact the manufacturer for special protection requirements.3.2.11 PRE-CLEANING SURFACES IN THE REGULATED AREAPre-cleaning of ACM contaminated items shall be performed after the enclosure has been erected and negative pressure has been established in the work areaPre-clean all surfaces in the regulated area using HEPA filtered vacuums and/or wet cleaning methods as appropriate. Do not use any methods that would raise dust such as dry sweeping or vacuuming with equipment not equipped with HEPA filters. Do not disturb asbestos-containing materials during this pre-cleaning phase.3.2.12 EXTENSION OF THE REGULATED AREAIf the regulated area barrier is breached in any manner that could allow the passage of asbestos fibers or debris, the Competent Person shall immediately stop work, continue wetting, and proceed to extend the regulated area to enclose the affected area as per procedures described in this specification. If the affected area cannot be enclosed, decontamination measures and cleanup shall start immediately. All personnel shall be isolated from the affected area until decontamination/cleanup is completed as verified by visual inspection and air monitoring. Air monitoring at completion must indicate background levels.3.3 REMOVAL OF CLASS II FLOORING MATERIALS: 3.3.1 GENERALAll applicable requirements of OSHA, EPA, and DOT shall be followed during Class II work. Keep materials intact; do not disturb; wet while working with it; wrap as soon as possible with 2 layers of 6 mil plastic for disposal. 3.3.2 REMOVAL OF flooring materials: A.All requirements of OSHA Flooring agreement provisions shall be followed:1. The Contractor shall provide enough HEPA negative air machines to effect > - 0.02” WCG pressure. Provide a standby unit in the event of machine failure and/or emergency in an adjacent area. The contractor shall use double the number of machines, based on their calculations, or submit proof their machines operate at stated capacities, at a 2" pressure drop across the filters. 2.Flooring shall be removed intact, as much as possible. Do not rip or tear flooring.3.Mechanical chipping or sanding is not allowed.4.Flooring shall be removed with an infra-red heating unit operated by trained personnel following the manufacturer’s instructions.5.Wet clean and HEPA vacuum the floor before and after removal of flooring.6.Place a 6 mil poly layer 4’ by 10’ adjacent to the regulated area for use as a decontaminated area. All waste must be contained in the regulated area.7.Package all waste in 6 mil poly lined fiberboard drums.3.3.3 REMOVAL OF MASTICA.All chemical mastic removers must be low in volatile organic compound (VOC) content, have a flash point greater than 200° Fahrenheit, contain no chlorinated solvents, and comply with California Air Resources Board (CARB) thresholds for VOCs (effective January 1, 2010).B. A negative air machine as required under flooring removal shall be provided.C.Follow all manufacturers’ instructions in the use of the mastic removal material.Package all waste in 6 mil poly lined fiberboard drums.Prior to application of any liquid material, check the floor for penetrations and seal before removing mastic.3.4 DISPOSAL OF CLASS ii WASTE MATERIAL: 3.4.1 GENERALDispose of waste ACM and debris which is packaged in accordance with these specifications, OSHA, EPA and DOT. The landfill requirements for packaging must also be met. Transport will be in compliance with 49 CFR 100–185 regulations. Disposal shall be done at an approved landfill. Disposal of non-friable ACM shall be done in accordance with applicable regulations.3.5 PROJECT DECONTAMINATION3.5.1 GENERALA.The VA must be notified at least 24 hours in advance of any waste removed from the containment,B.The entire work related to project decontamination shall be performed under the close supervision and monitoring of the CPIH/CIH.C.If the asbestos abatement work is in an area which was contaminated prior to the start of abatement, the decontamination will be done by cleaning the primary barrier poly prior to its removal and cleanings of the surfaces of the regulated area after the primary barrier removal.D.If the asbestos abatement work is in an area which was uncontaminated prior to the start of abatement, the decontamination will be done by cleaning the primary barrier poly prior to its removal, thus preventing contamination of the building when the regulated area critical barriers are removed.3.5.2 REGULATED AREA CLEARANCEAir testing and other requirements which must be met before release of the Contractor and re-occupancy of the regulated area space are specified in Final Testing Procedures.3.5.3 WORK DESCRIPTIONDecontamination includes the clearance air testing in the regulated area and the decontamination and removal of the enclosures/facilities installed prior to the abatement work including primary/critical barriers, PDF and W/EDF facilities, and negative pressure systems. 3.5.4 PRE-DECONTAMINATION CONDITIONSA.Before decontamination starts, all ACM waste from the regulated area shall be removed, all waste collected and removed, and the secondary barrier of poly removed and disposed of along with any gross debris generated by the work.B.At the start of decontamination, the following shall be in place:1.Critical barriers over all openings consisting of two layers of 6 mil poly which is the sole barrier between the regulated area and the rest of the building or outside.2.Decontamination facilities, if required for personnel and equipment in operating condition.3.5.5 CLEANING: Carry out a first cleaning of all surfaces of the regulated area including items of remaining poly sheeting, tools, scaffolding, ladders/staging by wet methods and/or HEPA vacuuming. Do not use dry dusting/sweeping/air blowing methods. Use each surface of a wetted cleaning cloth one time only and then dispose of as contaminated waste. Continue this cleaning until there is no visible residue from abated surfaces or poly or other surfaces. Remove all filters in the air handling system and dispose of as ACM waste in accordance with these specifications. The negative pressure system shall remain in operation during this time. Additional cleaning(s) may be needed as determined by the CPIH/VPIH/CIH.3.6 VISUAL INSPECTION AND AIR CLEARANCE TESTING3.6.1 GENERALNotify the VA representative 24 hours in advance for the performance of the final visual inspection and testing. The final visual inspection and testing will be performed by the VPIH/CIH after the final cleaning.3.6.2 VISUAL INSPECTIONFinal visual inspection will include the entire regulated area, the PDF, all poly sheeting, seals over HVAC openings, doorways, windows, and any other openings. If any debris, residue, dust or any other suspect material is detected, the final cleaning shall be repeated at no cost to the VA. Dust/material samples may be collected and analyzed at no cost to the VA at the discretion of the VPIH/CIH to confirm visual findings. When the regulated area is visually clean the final testing can be done.3.6.3 AIR CLEARANCE TESTINGA.After an acceptable final visual inspection by the VPIH/CIH and VA Representative, the VPIH/CIH will perform the final clearance testing. Air samples will be collected and analyzed in accordance with procedures for AHERA in this specification. If work is less than 260 lf/160 sf/35 cf, 5 PCM samples shall be collected for clearance and a minimum of one field blank. If work is equal to or more than 260 lf/160 sf/35 cf, AHERA TEM sampling shall be performed for clearance. TEM analysis shall be done in accordance with procedures for EPA AHERA in this specification. If the release criteria are not met, the Contractor shall repeat the final cleaning and continue decontamination procedures until clearance is achieved. All Additional inspection and testing costs will be borne by the Contractor.B.If release criteria are met, proceed to perform the abatement closeout and to issue the certificate of completion in accordance with these specifications.3.6.4 final AIR CLEARANCE PROCEDURESContractor's Release Criteria: Work in a regulated area is complete when the regulated area is visually clean and airborne fiber levels have been reduced to or below 0.01 f/cc as measured by the AHERA PCM protocol, or 70 AHERA structures per square millimeter (s/mm2) by AHERA TEM.B.Air Monitoring and Final Clearance Sampling: To determine if the elevated airborne fiber counts encountered during abatement operations have been reduced to the specified level, the VPIH/CIH will secure samples and analyze them according to the following procedures:Fibers Counted: “Fibers” referred to in this section shall be either all fibers regardless of composition as counted in the NIOSH 7400 PCM method or asbestos fibers counted using the AHERA TEM method.2.Aggressive Sampling: All final air testing samples shall be collected using aggressive sampling techniques except where soil is not encapsulated or enclosed. Samples will be collected on 0.8 MCE filters for PCM analysis and 0.45 Polycarbonate filters for TEM. A minimum of 1200 Liters of using calibrated pumps shall be collected for clearance samples. Before pumps are started, initiate aggressive air mixing sampling as detailed in 40 CFR 763 Subpart E (AHERA) Appendix A (III)(B)(7)(d). Air samples will be collected in areas subject to normal air circulation away from corners, obstructed locations, and locations near windows, doors, or vents. After air sampling pumps have been shut off, circulating fans shall be shut off. The negative pressure system shall continue to operate.3.7 ABATEMENT CLOSEOUT AND CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE3.7.1 COMPLETION OF ABATEMENT WORKA.After thorough decontamination, complete asbestos abatement work upon meeting the regulated area clearance criteria and fulfilling the following:1.Remove all equipment, materials, and debris from the project area.2.Package and dispose of all asbestos waste as required.3.Repair or replace all interior finishes damaged during the abatement work.4.Fulfill other project closeout requirements as specified elsewhere in this specification.3.7.2 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION BY CONTRACTORThe CPIH shall complete and sign the "Certificate of Completion" in accordance with Attachment 1 at the completion of the abatement and decontamination of the regulated area.3.7.3 WORK SHIFTSAll work shall be done during administrative hours (8:00 AM to 4:30 PM) Monday - Friday excluding Federal Holidays. Any change in the work schedule must be approved in writing by the VA Representative.ATTACHMENT #1CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETIONDATE: VA Project #:PROJECT NAME:Abatement Contractor:VAMC/ADDRESS:1.I certify that I have personally inspected, monitored and supervised the abatement work of (specify regulated area or Building):which took place from / / to / /2.That throughout the work all applicable requirements/regulations and the VA's specifications were met.3.That any person who entered the regulated area was protected with the appropriate personal protective equipment and respirator and that they followed the proper entry and exit procedures and the proper operating procedures for the duration of the work.4.That all employees of the Abatement Contractor engaged in this work were trained in respiratory protection, were experienced with abatement work, had proper medical surveillance documentation, were fit-tested for their respirator, and were not exposed at any time during the work to asbestos without the benefit of appropriate respiratory protection.5.That I performed and supervised all inspection and testing specified and required by applicable regulations and VA specifications.6.That the conditions inside the regulated area were always maintained in a safe and healthy condition and the maximum fiber count never exceeded 0.5 f/cc, except as described below.7. That all abatement work was done in accordance with OSHA requirements and the manufacturer’s recommendations.CPIH/CIH Signature/Date:CPIH/CIH Print Name:Abatement Contractor Signature/Date:Abatement Contractor Print Name:ATTACHMENT #2CERTIFICATE OF WORKER'S ACKNOWLEDGMENTPROJECT NAME:DATE:PROJECT ADDRESS:ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR'S NAME:WORKING WITH ASBESTOS CAN BE HAZARDOUS TO YOUR HEALTH. INHALING ASBESTOS HAS BEEN LINKED WITH VARIOUS TYPES OF CANCERS. IF YOU SMOKE AND INHALE ASBESTOS FIBERS, YOUR CHANCES OF DEVELOPING LUNG CANCER IS GREATER THAN THAT OF THE NON-SMOKING PUBLIC.Your employer's contract with the owner for the above project requires that: You must be supplied with the proper personal protective equipment including an adequate respirator and be trained in its use. You must be trained in safe and healthy work practices and in the use of the equipment found at an asbestos abatement project. You must receive/have a current medical examination for working with asbestos. These things shall be provided at no cost to you. By signing this certificate you are indicating to the owner that your employer has met these obligations.RESPIRATORY PROTECTION: I have been trained in the proper use of respirators and have been informed of the type of respirator to be used on the above indicated project. I have a copy of the written Respiratory Protection Program issued by my employer. I have been provided for my exclusive use, at no cost, with a respirator to be used on the above indicated project.TRAINING COURSE: I have been trained by a third party, State/EPA accredited trainer in the requirements for an AHERA/OSHA Asbestos Abatement Worker training course, 32 hours minimum duration. I currently have a valid State accreditation certificate. The topics covered in the course include, as a minimum, the following:Physical Characteristics and Background Information on AsbestosPotential Health Effects Related to Exposure to AsbestosEmployee Personal Protective EquipmentEstablishment of a Respiratory Protection ProgramState of the Art Work PracticesPersonal HygieneAdditional Safety HazardsMedical MonitoringAir MonitoringRelevant Federal, State and Local Regulatory Requirements, Procedures, andStandardsAsbestos Waste DisposalMEDICAL EXAMINATION: I have had a medical examination within the past 12 months which was paid for by my employer. This examination included: health history, occupational history, pulmonary function test, and may have included a chest x-ray evaluation. The physician issued a positive written opinion after the examination.Signature:Printed Name:Social Security Number:Witness:ATTACHMENT #3AFFIDAVIT OF MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE, RESPIRATORY PROTECTION AND TRAINING/ACCREDITATIONVA PROJECT NAME AND NUMBER:VA MEDICAL FACILITY:ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR'S NAME AND ADDRESS:1.I verify that the following individualName:Social Security Number:who is proposed to be employed in asbestos abatement work associated with the above project by the named Abatement Contractor, is included in a medical surveillance program in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101(m), and that complete records of the medical surveillance program as required by 29 CFR 1926.1101(m)(n) and 29 CFR 1910.20 are kept at the offices of the Abatement Contractor at the following address.Address:2.I verify that this individual has been trained, fit-tested and instructed in the use of all appropriate respiratory protection systems and that the person is capable of working in safe and healthy manner as expected and required in the expected work environment of this project.3.I verify that this individual has been trained as required by 29 CFR 1926.1101(k). This individual has also obtained a valid State accreditation certificate. Documentation will be kept on-site.4.I verify that I meet the minimum qualifications criteria of the VA specifications for a CPIH.Signature of CPIH/CIH:Date:Printed Name of CPIH/CIH:Signature of Contractor:Date:Printed Name of Contractor:ATTACHMENT #4ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR/COMPETENT PERSON(S) REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE VA’S ASBESTOS SPECIFICATIONSVA Project Location:VA Project #:VA Project Description:This form shall be signed by the Asbestos Abatement Contractor Owner and the Asbestos Abatement Contractor’s Competent Person(s) prior to any start of work at the VA related to this Specification. If the Asbestos Abatement Contractor’s/Competent Person(s) has not signed this form, they shall not be allowed to work on-site.I, the undersigned, have read VA’s Asbestos Specification regarding the asbestos abatement requirements. I understand the requirements of the VA’s Asbestos Specification and agree to follow these requirements as well as all required rules and regulations of OSHA/EPA/DOT and State/Local requirements. I have been given ample opportunity to read the VA’s Asbestos Specification and have been given an opportunity to ask any questions regarding the content and have received a response related to those questions. I do not have any further questions regarding the content, intent and requirements of the VA’s Asbestos Specification.At the conclusion of the asbestos abatement, I will certify that all asbestos abatement work was done in accordance with the VA’s Asbestos Specification and all ACM was removed properly and no fibrous residue remains on any abated surfaces.Abatement Contractor Owner’s SignatureDateAbatement Contractor Competent Person(s)DateATTACHMENT #5- - END- - - -SECTION 02 83 33.13LEAD-BASED PAINT REMOVAL AND DISPOSALPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies abatement and disposal of lead-based paint (LBP) and controls needed to limit occupational and environmental exposure to lead hazards.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Section 02 82 13.19, ASBESTOS FLOOR TILE AND MASTIC ABATEMENT.B.Section 02 41 00, DEMOLITION.C.Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.1.3 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.B.Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):CFR 29 Part 1910Occupational Safety and Health StandardsCFR 29 Part 1926Safety and Health Regulations for ConstructionCFR 40 Part 148Hazardous Waste Injection RestrictionsCFR 40 Part 260Hazardous Waste Management System: GeneralCFR 40 Part 261Identification and Listing of Hazardous WasteCFR 40 Part 262Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous WasteCRF 40 Part 263Standards Applicable to Transporters of Hazardous WasteCFR 40 Part 264Standards for Owners and Operations of Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal FacilitiesCFR 40 Part 265Interim Status Standards for Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal FacilitiesCFR 40 Part 268Land Disposal RestrictionsCFR 49 Part 172Hazardous Material Table, Special Provisions, Hazardous Material Communications, Emergency Response Information, and Training RequirementsCFR 49 Part 178Specifications for PackagingC.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):NFPA 701-2004Methods of Fire Test for Flame-Resistant Textiles and FilmsD.National Institute for Occupational Safety And Health (NIOSH)NIOSH OSHA Booklet 3142Lead in ConstructionE.Underwriters Laboratories (UL)UL 586-1996 (Rev 2009)High-Efficiency, Particulate, Air Filter UnitsF.American National Standards InstituteZ9.2-2006Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust SystemsZ88.6-2006Respiratory Protection1.4 DEFINITIONSA.Action Level: Employee exposure, without regard to use of respirations, to an airborne concentration of lead of 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air averaged over an 8-hour period. As used in this section, ”30 micrograms per cubic meter of air" refers to the action level.B.Area Monitoring: Sampling of lead concentrations within the lead control area and inside the physical boundaries which is representative of the airborne lead concentrations which may reach the breathing zone of personnel potentially exposed to lead.C.Physical Boundary: Area physically roped or partitioned off around an enclosed lead control area to limit unauthorized entry of personnel. As used in this section, "inside boundary" shall mean the same as "outside lead control area."D.Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH): As used in this section, refers to an Industrial Hygienist employed by the Contractor and is certified by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene in comprehensive practice.E.Change Rooms and Shower Facilities: Rooms within the designated physical boundary around the lead control area equipped with separate storage facilities for clean protective work clothing and equipment and for street clothes which prevent cross- contamination.petent Person: A person capable of identifying lead hazards in the work area and is authorized by the contractor to take corrective action.G.Decontamination Room: Room for removal of contaminated personal protective equipment (PPE).H.Eight-Hour Time Weighted Average (TWA): Airborne concentration of lead averaged over an 8-hour workday to which an employee is exposed.I.High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) Filter Equipment: HEPA filtered vacuuming equipment with a UL 586 filter system capable of collecting and retaining lead-contaminated paint dust. A high efficiency particulate filter means 99.97 percent efficient against 0.3 micron size particles.J.Lead: Metallic lead, inorganic lead compounds, and organic lead soaps. Excluded from this definition are other organic lead compounds.K.Lead Control Area: An enclosed area or structure with full containment to prevent the spread of lead dust, paint chips, or debris of lead-containing paint removal operations. The lead control area is isolated by physical boundaries to prevent unauthorized entry of personnel.L.Lead Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL): Fifty micrograms per cubic meter of air as an 8-hour time weighted average as determined by 29 CFR 1910.1025. If an employee is exposed for more than 8 hours in a work day, the PEL shall be determined by the following formula. PEL (micrograms/cubic meter of air) = 400/No. of hrs worked per dayM.Personnel Monitoring: Sampling of lead concentrations within the breathing zone of an employee to determine the 8-hour time weighted average concentration in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1025. Samples shall be representative of the employee's work tasks. Breathing zone shall be considered an area within a hemisphere, forward of the shoulders, with a radius of 150 mm to 225 mm (6 to 9 inches) and the center at the nose or mouth of an employee.1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA.Before exposure to lead-contaminated dust, provide workers with a comprehensive medical examination as required by 29 CFR 1926.62 (I) (1) (i) & (ii). The examination shall not be required if adequate records show that employees have been examined as required by 29 CFR 1926.62(I) without the last year.B.Medical Records: Maintain complete and accurate medical records of employees in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.20.C.CIH Responsibilities: The Contractor shall employ a certified Industrial Hygienist who will be responsible for the following:1.Certify Training.2.Review and approve lead-containing paint removal plan for conformance to the applicable referenced standards.3.Inspect lead-containing paint removal work for conformance with the approved plan.4. Direct monitoring.5.Ensure work is performed in strict accordance with specifications at all times.6.Ensure hazardous exposure to personnel and to the environment is adequately controlled at all times.D.Training: Train each employee performing paint removal, disposal, and air sampling operations prior to the time of initial job assignment, in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62.E.Training Certification: Submit certificates signed and dated by the CIH and by each employee stating that the employee has received training.F.Respiratory Protection Program:1.Furnish each employee required to wear a negative pressure respirator or other appropriate type with a respirator fit test at the time of initial fitting and at least every 6 months thereafter as required by 29 CFR 1926.62.2.Establish and implement a respiratory protection program as required by 29 CFR 1910.134, 29 CFR 1910.1025, and 29 CFR 1926.62.G.Hazard Communication Program: Establish and implement a Hazard Communication Program as required by 29 CFR 1910.1200.H.Hazardous Waste Management: The Hazardous Waste Management plan shall comply with applicable requirements of Federal, State, and local hazardous waste regulations and address:1.Identification of hazardous wastes associated with the work.2.Estimated quantities of wastes to be generated and disposed of.3.Names and qualifications of each contractor that will be transporting, storing, treating, and disposing of the wastes. Include the facility location and a 24-hour point of contact. Furnish two copies of EPA, state, and local hazardous waste permit applications, permits, and EPA Identification numbers as required for the performance of this work.4.Names and qualifications (experience and training) of personnel who will be working on-site with hazardous wastes.5.List of waste handling equipment to be used in performing the work, to include cleaning, volume reduction, and transport equipment.6.Spill prevention, containment, and cleanup contingency measures to be implemented.7.Work plan and schedule for waste containment, removal and disposal. Wastes shall be cleaned up and containerized daily.8.Cost for hazardous waste disposal according to this plan.I.Safety and Health Compliance:1.In addition to the detailed requirements of this specification, comply with laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations of federal, state, and local authorities regarding removing, handling, storing, transporting, and disposing of lead waste materials. Comply with the applicable requirements of the current issue of 29 CFR 1910.1025. Submit matters regarding interpretation of standards to the Contracting Officer for resolution before starting work.2.Where specification requirements and the referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirements shall apply.3.Follow local, state, and federal laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and regulations regarding removing, handling, storing, transporting, and disposing of lead-contaminated materials.J.Pre-Construction Conference: Along with the CIH, meet with the Contracting Officer to discuss in detail the lead-containing paint removal work plan, including work procedures and precautions for the work plan.1.6 SUBMITTALSA.Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Catalog Data:Vacuum filtersRespiratorsC.Instructions: Paint removal materials. Include applicable material safety data sheets.D.Statements Certifications and Statements:1.Qualifications of CIH: Submit name, address, and telephone number of the CIH selected to perform responsibilities in paragraph entitled "CIH Responsibilities." Provide previous experience of the CIH. Submit proper documentation that the Industrial Hygienist is certified by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene in comprehensive practice, including certification number and date of certification/recertification.2.Testing Laboratory: Submit the name, address, and telephone number of the testing laboratory selected to perform the monitoring, testing, and reporting of airborne concentrations of lead. Provide proper documentation that persons performing the analysis have been judged proficient by successful participation within the last year in the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) Proficiency Analytical Testing (PAT) Program. The laboratory shall be accredited by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA). Provide AIHA documentation along with date of accreditation/reaccreditation.3.Lead-Containing Paint Removal Plan:a.Submit a detailed job-specific plan of the work procedures to be used in the removal of lead-containing paint. The plan shall include a sketch showing the location, size, and details of lead control areas, location and details of decontamination rooms, change rooms, shower facilities, and mechanical ventilation system.b.Include in the plan, eating, drinking, smoking and restroom procedures, interface of trades, sequencing of lead related work, collected wastewater and paint debris disposal plan, air sampling plan, respirators, protective equipment, and a detailed description of the method of containment of the operation to ensure that airborne lead concentrations of 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air are not exceeded outside of the lead control area.c.Include air sampling, training and strategy, sampling methodology, frequency, duration of sampling, and qualifications of air monitoring personnel in the air sampling portion on the plan.4.Field Test Reports: Monitoring Results: Submit monitoring results to the Contracting Officer within 3 working days, signed by the testing laboratory employee performing the air monitoring, the employee that analyzed the sample, and the CIH.5.Records:pleted and signed hazardous waste manifest from treatment or disposal facility.b.Certification of Medical Examinations.c.Employee training certification.PART 2 PRODUCTSA.PAINT REMOVAL PRODUCTS: Submit applicable Material Safety Data Sheets for paint removal products used in paint removal work. Use the least toxic product, suitable for the job and acceptable to the Industrial Hygienist.PART 3 EXECUTION3.1 PROTECTIONA.Notification: Notify the Contracting Officer 20 days prior to the start of any paint removal work.B.Lead Control Area Requirements.1.Establish a lead control area by completely enclosing with containment screens the area or structure where lead-containing paint removal operations will be performed.2.Contain removal operations by the use of a negative pressure full containment system with at least one change room and with HEPA filtered exhaust.C.Protection of Existing Work to Remain: Perform paint removal work without damage or contamination of adjacent areas. Where existing work is damaged or contaminated, restore work to its original condition.D.Boundary Requirements: Provide physical boundaries around the lead control area by roping off the area [designated on the drawings] or providing curtains, portable partitions or other enclosures to ensure that airborne concentrations of lead will not reach 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air outside of the lead control area.E.Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Systems: Shut down, lock out, and isolate HVAC systems that supply, exhaust, or pass through the lead control areas. Seal intake and exhaust vents in the lead control area with 6-mil plastic sheet and tape. Seal seams in HVAC components that pass through the lead control area.F.Change Room and Shower Facilities: Provide clean change rooms and shower facilities within the physical boundary around the designated lead control area in accordance with requirements of 29 CFR 1926.62.G.Mechanical Ventilation System:1.Use adequate ventilation to control personnel exposure to lead in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.57.2.To the extent feasible, use fixed local exhaust ventilation connected to HEPA filters or other collection systems, approved by the industrial hygienist. Local exhaust ventilation systems shall be designed, constructed, installed, and maintained in accordance with ANSI Z9.2.3.If air from exhaust ventilation is recirculated into the work place, the system shall have a high efficiency filter with reliable back-up filter and controls to monitor the concentration of lead in the return air and to bypass the recirculation system automatically if it fails. Air may be recirculated only where exhaust to the outside is not feasible.H.Personnel Protection: Personnel shall wear and use protective clothing and equipment as specified herein. Eating, smoking, or drinking is not permitted in the lead control area. No one will be permitted in the lead control area unless they have been given appropriate training and protective equipment.I.Warning Signs: Provide warning signs at approaches to lead control areas. Locate signs at such a distance that personnel may read the sign and take the necessary precautions before entering the area. Signs shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.62.3.2 WORK PROCEDURESA.Perform removal of lead-containing paint in accordance with approved lead-containing paint removal plan. Use procedures and equipment required to limit occupational and environmental exposure to lead when lead- containing paint is removed in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62, except as specified herein. Dispose of removed paint chips and associated waste in compliance with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), federal, state, and local requirements.B.Personnel Exiting Procedures:1.Whenever personnel exit the lead-controlled area, they shall perform the following procedures and shall not leave the work place wearing any clothing or equipment worn during the work day:a.Vacuum themselves off.b.Remove protective clothing in the decontamination room, and place them in an approved impermeable disposal bag.c.Shower.d.Change to clean clothes prior to leaving the physical boundary designated around the lead-contaminated job site.C.Monitoring: Monitoring of airborne concentrations of lead shall be in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1025 and as specified herein. Air monitoring, testing, and reporting shall be performed by a CIH or an Industrial Hygiene (IH) Technician who is under the direction of the CIH:1.The CIH or the IH Technician under the direction of the CIH shall be on the job site directing the monitoring, and inspecting the lead-containing paint removal work to ensure that the requirements of the Contract have been satisfied during the entire lead-containing paint removal operation.2.Take personal air monitoring samples on employees who are anticipated to have the greatest risk of exposure as determined by the CIH. In addition, take air monitoring samples on at least 25 percent of the work crew or a minimum of two employees, whichever is greater, during each work shift.3.Submit results of air monitoring samples, signed by the CIH, within 24 hours after the air samples are taken. Notify the Contracting Officer immediately of exposure to lead at or in excess of the action level of 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air outside of the lead control area.D.Monitoring During Paint Removal Work:1.Perform personal and area monitoring during the entire paint removal operation. Sufficient area monitoring shall be conducted at the physical boundary to ensure unprotected personnel are not exposed above 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air at all times. If the outside boundary lead levels are at or exceed 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air, work shall be stopped and the CIH shall immediately correct the condition(s) causing the increased levels and notify the Contracting Officer immediately.2.The CIH shall review the sampling data collected on that day to determine if condition(s) requires any further change in work methods. Removal work shall resume when approval is given by the CIH. The Contractor shall control the lead level outside of the work boundary to less than 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air at all times. As a minimum, conduct area monitoring daily on each shift in which lead paint removal operations are performed in areas immediately adjacent to the lead control area.3.For outdoor operations, at least one sample on each shift shall be taken on the downwind side of the lead control area. If adjacent areas are contaminated, clean and visually inspect contaminated areas. The CIH shall certify that the area has been cleaned of lead contamination.3.3 LEAD-CONTAINING PAINT REMOVALA.Remove paint within the areas designated on the drawings in order to completely expose the substrate. Take whatever precautions are necessary to minimize damage to the underlying substrate.B.Indoor Lead Paint Removal: Select paint removal processes to minimize contamination of work areas with lead-contaminated dust or other lead-contaminated debris/waste. This paint removal process should be described in the lead-containing paint removal plan. Perform manual sanding and scraping to the maximum extent feasible.C.Mechanical Paint Removal and Blast Cleaning: Perform mechanical paint removal and blast cleaning in lead control areas using negative pressure full containments with HEPA filtered exhaust. Collect paint residue and spent grit (used abrasive) from blasting operations for disposal in accordance with EPA, state and local requirements.D.Outside Lead Paint Removal: Select removal processes to minimize contamination of work areas with lead-contaminated dust or other lead-contaminated debris/waste. This paint removal process should be described in the lead-containing paint removal plan. Perform manual sanding and scraping to the maximum extent feasible.CLEANUP AND DISPOSALA.Cleanup: Maintain surfaces of the lead control area free of accumulations of paint chips and dust. Restrict the spread of dust and debris; keep waste from being distributed over the work area. Do not dry sweep or use compressed air to clean up the area. At the end of each shift and when the paint removal operation has been completed, clean the area of visible lead paint contamination by vacuuming with a HEPA filtered vacuum cleaner and wet mopping the area.B.Certification: The CIH shall certify in writing that the inside and outside the lead control area air monitoring samples are less than 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air, the respiratory protection for the employees was adequate, the work procedures were performed in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62, and that there were no visible accumulations of lead-contaminated paint and dust on the worksite. Do not remove the lead control area or roped-off boundary and warning signs prior to the Contracting Officer's receipt of the CIH's certification. Reclean areas showing dust or residual paint chips.C.Testing of Lead-Containing Paint Residue and Used Abrasive Where indicated or when directed by the Contracting Officer, test lead containing paint residue and used abrasive in accordance with 40 CFR 261 for hazardous waste.D.Disposal:1.Collect lead-contaminated waste, scrap, debris, bags, containers, equipment, and lead-contaminated clothing, which may produce airborne concentrations of lead particles.2.Store removed paint, lead-contaminated clothing and equipment, and lead-contaminated dust and cleaning debris into U.S. Department of Transportation (49 CFR 178) approved 55-gallon drums. Properly label each drum to identify the type of waste (49 CFR 172) and the date lead-contaminated wastes were first put into the drum. Obtain and complete the Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest forms. Comply with land disposal restriction notification requirements as required by 40 CFR 268:a.Collect lead-contaminated waste, scrap, debris, bags, containers, equipment, and lead-contaminated clothing which may produce airborne concentrations of lead particles. Label the containers in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62. Dispose of lead-contaminated waste material at a EPA or state approved hazardous waste treatment, storage, or disposal facility off Government property.b.Store waste materials in U.S. Department of Transportation (49 CFR 178) approved 55-gallon drums. Properly label each drum to identify the type of waste (49 CFR 172) and the date the drum was filled. The Contracting Officer or an authorized representative will assign an area for interim storage of waste-containing drums. Do not store hazardous waste drums in interim storage longer than 90 calendar days from the date affixed to each drum.c.Handle, store, transport, and dispose lead or lead-contaminated waste in accordance with 40 CFR 260, 40 CFR 261, 40 CFR 262, 40 CFR 263, 40 CFR 264, and 40 CFR 265. Comply with land disposal restriction notification requirements as required by 40 CFR 268.E.Disposal Documentation Submit written evidence that the hazardous waste treatment, storage, or disposal facility (TSD) is approved for lead disposal by the EPA and state or local regulatory agencies. Submit one copy of the completed manifest, signed and dated by the initial transporter in accordance with 40 CFR 262.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 03 30 00CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETEPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTION:This section specifies castinplace structural concrete and materials and mixes for other concrete.1.2 RELATED WORK:A.Materials testing and inspection during construction: Section 01 45 29, TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES.1.3 TESTING AGENCY FOR CONCRETE MIX DESIGN:A.Testing agency retained and reimbursed by the Contractor and approved by Contracting Officer.B.Testing agency maintaining active participation in Program of Cement and Concrete Reference Laboratory (CCRL) of National Institute of Standards and Technology. Accompany request for approval of testing agency with a copy of Report of Latest Inspection of Laboratory Facilities by CCRL. C.Testing agency shall furnish equipment and qualified technicians to establish proportions of ingredients for concrete mixes.1.4 TOLERANCES:A.Formwork: ACI 117, except the elevation tolerance of formed surfaces before removal of shores is +0 mm (+0 inch) and -20 mm (-3/4 inch).B.Reinforcement Fabricating and Placing: ACI 117, except that fabrication tolerance for bar sizes Nos. 10, 13, and 16 (Nos. 3, 4, and 5) (Tolerance Symbol 1 in Fig. 2.1(a), ACI, 117) used as column ties or stirrups is +0 mm (+0 inch) and -13 mm (-1/2 inch) where gross bar length is less than 3600 mm (12 feet), or +0 mm (+0 inch) and -20 mm (-3/4 inch) where gross bar length is 3600 mm (12 feet) or more.C.Cross-Sectional Dimension: ACI 117, except tolerance for thickness of slabs 12 inches or less is +20 mm (+3/4 inch) and - 6 mm (-1/4 inch). Tolerance of thickness of beams more than 300 mm (12 inch) but less than 900 mm (3 feet) is +20 mm (+3/4 inch) and -10 mm (-3/8 inch).D.Slab/pad Finishes: ACI 117, Section 4.5.6, F-number method in accordance with ASTM E1155, except as follows:1.Test entire slab/pad surface, including those areas within 600 mm (2 feet) of construction joints and vertical elements that project through slab surface.2.Maximum elevation change which may occur within 600 mm (2 feet) of any column or wall element is 6 mm (0.25 inches).3.Allow sample measurement lines that are perpendicular to construction joints to extend past joint into previous placement no further than 1500 mm (5 feet).1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:A.ACI SP-66 – ACI Detailing Manual.B.ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.C.ACI 301 – Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete.1.6 SUBMITTALS:A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.B.Samples:1.Portland cement: 3.5 kg (8 pounds).2.Fly ash: 2.25 kg (5 pounds).C.Shop Drawings: Reinforcing steel: Complete shop drawingsD.Mill Test Reports:1.Reinforcing Steel.2.Cement.E.Manufacturer's Certificates:1.Abrasive aggregate.2.Airentraining admixture.3.Chemical admixtures, including chloride ion content.4.Waterproof paper for curing concrete.5.Liquid membraneforming compounds for curing concrete.6.Nonshrinking grout.7.Liquid hardener.F.Testing Agency for Concrete Mix Design: Approval request including qualifications of principals and technicians and evidence of active participation in program of Cement and Concrete Reference Laboratory (CCRL) of National Institute of Standards and Technology and copy of report of latest CCRL, Inspection of Laboratory. G.Test Report for Concrete Mix Designs: Trial mixes including watercement fly ash ratio curves, concrete mix ingredients, and admixtures.H.Shoring and Reshoring Sequence: Submit for approval a shoring and reshoring sequence for flat slab/flat plate portions, prepared by a registered Professional Engineer. As a minimum, include timing of form stripping, reshoring, number of floors to be re-shored and timing of re-shore removal to serve as an initial outline of procedures subject to modification as construction progresses. Submit revisions to sequence, whether initiated by Contracting Officer (see FORMWORK) or Contractor.1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:A.Conform to ACI 304. Store aggregate separately for each kind or grade, to prevent segregation of sizes and avoid inclusion of dirt and other materials.B.Deliver cement in original sealed containers bearing name of brand and manufacturer, and marked with net weight of contents. Store in suitable watertight building in which floor is raised at least 300 mm (1 foot) above ground. Store bulk cement and fly ash in separate suitable bins.C.Deliver other packaged materials for use in concrete in original sealed containers, plainly marked with manufacturer's name and brand, and protect from damage until used.1.8 PRE-CONCRETE CONFERENCE:A.General: At least 15 days prior to submittal of design mixes, conduct a meeting to review proposed methods of concrete construction to achieve the required results.B.Agenda: Includes but is not limited to:1.Submittals.2.Coordination of work.3.Availability of material.4.Concrete mix design including admixtures.5.Methods of placing, finishing, and curing.6.Finish criteria required to obtain required flatness and levelness.7.Timing of floor finish measurements.8.Material inspection and testing.C.Attendees: Include but not limited to representatives of Contractor; subcontractors involved in supplying, conveying, placing, finishing, and curing concrete; admixture manufacturers; Contracting Officer; Consulting Engineer; Department of Veterans Affairs retained testing laboratories for concrete testing and finish (F-number) verification.D.Minutes of the meeting: Contractor shall take minutes and type and distribute the minutes to attendees within five days of the meeting.1.10 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:A.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.B.American Concrete Institute (ACI):117-06Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials211.102(R2009)Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete214R02Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete301-05Structural Concrete 304R-2000Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete305R-99Hot Weather Concreting306R-(2002)Cold Weather Concreting308R-(2001)Standard Practice for Curing Concrete309R-05Guide for Consolidation of Concrete31808Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary347R-04Guide to Formwork for ConcreteSP-66-04ACI Detailing ManualC.American National Standards Institute and American Hardboard Association (ANSI/AHA):A135.4-2004Basic HardboardD.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A82/A82M-07Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete ReinforcementA615/A615M09Deformed and Plain BilletSteel Bars for Concrete ReinforcementC31/C31M09Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the fieldC3308Concrete AggregatesC39/C39M05Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete SpecimensC94/C94M09ReadyMixed ConcreteC143/C143M09Slump of Hydraulic Cement ConcreteC15009Portland Cement C17107Sheet Materials for Curing ConcreteC17208Sampling Freshly Mixed ConcreteC17309...Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric MethodC192/C192M07Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the LaboratoryC23109aAir Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure MethodC26006AirEntraining Admixtures for ConcreteC30907Liquid MembraneForming Compounds for Curing ConcreteC494/C494M08Chemical Admixtures for ConcreteC496-04e1Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete SpecimensC61805Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in ConcreteC666/C666M03(R2008)Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and ThawingC1107/1107M-08Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink)C1315-08 …………………………………Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing ConcreteD6-95(R2006)Loss on Heating of Oil and Asphaltic CompoundsD297-93(R2006)Rubber Products-Chemical AnalysisD4397-09Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial and Agricultural ApplicationsE1155-96(R2008)Determining FF Floor Flatness and FL Floor Levelness NumbersE.Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI):Handbook 2008F.U. S. Department of Commerce Product Standard (PS):PS 1Construction and Industrial PlywoodPS 20American Softwood LumberPART 2 – PRODUCTS:2.1 FORMS:A.Wood: PS 20 free from loose knots and suitable to facilitate finishing concrete surface specified; tongue and grooved.B.Plywood: PS-1 Exterior Grade BB (concreteform) 16 mm (5/8 inch), or 20 mm (3/4 inch) thick for unlined contact form. B-B High Density Concrete Form Overlay optional.E.Corrugated Fiberboard Void Boxes: Double faced, completely impregnated with paraffin and laminated with moisture resistant adhesive, size as shown. Design forms to support not less than 48 KPa (1000 psf) and not lose more than 15 percent of their original strength after being completely submerged in water for 24 hours and then air dried.F.Form Lining:1.Hardboard: ANSI/AHA A135.4, Class 2 with one (S1S) smooth side)2.Plywood: Grade BB Exterior (concreteform) not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick.3.Plastic, fiberglass, or elastomeric capable of reproducing the desired pattern or texture.G.Form Ties: Develop a minimum working strength of 13.35 kN (3000 pounds) when fully assembled. Ties shall be adjustable in length to permit tightening of forms and not have any lugs, cones, washers to act as spreader within form, nor leave a hole larger than 20 mm (3/4 inch) diameter, or a depression in exposed concrete surface, or leave metal closer than 40 mm (1 1/2 inches) to concrete surface. Wire ties not permitted. Cutting ties back from concrete face not permitted.2.2 MATERIALS:A.Portland Cement: ASTM C150 Type I or II.B.Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F including supplementary optional requirements relating to reactive aggregates and alkalies, and loss on ignition (LOI) not to exceed 5 percent.C.Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33.1.Size 67 or Size 467 may be used for footings and walls over 300 mm (12 inches) thick.2.Coarse aggregate for applied topping, encasement of steel columns, and metal pan stair fill shall be Size 7.3.Maximum size of coarse aggregates not more than onefifth of narrowest dimension between sides of forms, onethird of depth of slabs, nor threefourth of minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars.D.Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33. Fine aggregate for applied concrete floor topping shall pass a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve, 10 percent maximum shall pass a 150 ?m (No. 100) sieve.E.Mixing Water: Fresh, clean, and potable.F.Admixtures:1.Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water.2.Water Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water.3.High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or G, and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water.4.Non-Corrosive, Non-Chloride Accelerator: ASTM C494, Type C or E, and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water. Admixture manufacturer must have long-term non-corrosive test data from an independent testing laboratory of at least one year duration using an acceptable accelerated corrosion test method such as that using electrical potential measures.5.Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260.6.Calcium Nitrite corrosion inhibitor: ASTM C494 Type C.7.Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride, thiocyanate or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions are not permitted.8.Certification: Written conformance to the requirements above and the chloride ion content of the admixture prior to mix design review.G.Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, or ASTM A996, deformed, grade as shown. H.Supports, Spacers, and Chairs: Types which will hold reinforcement in position shown in accordance with requirements of ACI 318 except as specified. I.Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete: ASTM C171.J.Liquid Membrane-forming Compounds for Curing Concrete: ASTM C309, Type I, with fugitive dye. Compound shall be compatible with scheduled surface treatment, such as paint and resilient tile, and shall not discolor concrete surface.K. Moisture Vapor Emissions & Alkalinity Control Sealer: 100% active colorless aqueous siliconate solution concrete surface treatment applied the day of the concrete pour in lieu of other curing methods for all concrete slabs receiving resilient flooring, such as, sheet vinyl, vinyl composition tile, rubber, wood flooring, carpet, epoxy coatings and overlays .ASTM C1315 Type 1 Class A, and ASTM C309 Type 1 Class A, penetrating product to have no less than 34% solid content, leaving no sheen, volatile organic compound (VOC) content rating as required to suite regulatory requirements. The product shall have at least a five (5) year documented history in controlling moisture vapor emission from damaging floor covering, compatible with all finish materials. MVE 15-Year Warranty When a floor covering is installed on a below grade, on grade, or above grade concrete slab treated with Moisture Vapor Emissions & Alkalinity Control Sealer according to manufacturer’s instruction, sealer manufacturer shall warrant the floor covering system against failure due to moisture vapor migration or moisture-born contaminates for a period of fifteen (15) years from the date of original installation. The warranty shall cover all labor and materials needed to replace all floor covering that fails due to moisture vapor emission & moisture born contaminates. L.Non-Shrink Grout:1.ASTM C1107, pre-mixed, produce a compressive strength of at least 18 MPa at three days and 35 MPa (5000 psi) at 28 days. Furnish test data from an independent laboratory indicating that the grout when placed at a fluid consistency shall achieve 95 percent bearing under a 1200 mm x 1200 mm (4 foot by 4 foot) base plate.2.Where high fluidity or increased placing time is required, furnish test data from an independent laboratory indicating that the grout when placed at a fluid consistency shall achieve 95 percent under an 450 mm x 900 mm (18 inch by 36 inch) base plate.2.3 CONCRETE MIXES:A.Mix Designs: Proportioned in accordance with Section 5.3, "Proportioning on the Basis of Field Experience and/or Trial Mixtures" of ACI 318.1.28-day compressive strength, f’c, of concrete for exterior reinforced slabs and stairs shall be 4,000 psi and for all other concrete, f’c shall be 3,000 psi.2. If trial mixes are used, make a set of at least 6 cylinders in accordance with ASTM C192 for test purposes from each trial mix; test three for compressive strength at 7 days and three at 28 days.3.Submit a report of results of each test series, include a detailed listing of the proportions of trial mix or mixes, including cement, fly ash, admixtures, weight of fine and coarse aggregate per m3 (cubic yard) measured dry rodded and damp loose, specific gravity, fineness modulus, percentage of moisture, air content, watercement fly ash ratio, and consistency of each cylinder in terms of slump.4.Prepare a curve showing relationship between watercementfly ash ratio at 7day and 28day compressive strengths. Plot each curve using at least three specimens. 5.If the field experience method is used, submit complete standard deviation analysis.B.Fly Ash Testing: Submit certificate verifying conformance with specifications initially with mix design and for each truck load of fly ash delivered from source. Notify Contracting Officer immediately when change in source is anticipated. Prior to beginning trial mixes submit to the Contracting Officer the following representative samples of material to be used, properly identified source and project description and number, type of testing (complete chemical and physical), suitably packaged for shipment, and addressed as specified. Allow 60 calendar days for test results after submittal of sample.1.Fly ash 2.25 kg (five pounds).2.Portland cement 3.5 kg (8 pounds):Address Waterways Experiment Station (WES)3909 Halls Ferry RoadVicksburg, MS 39180-6199ATTN: Engineering Materials GroupC.After approval of mixes no substitution in material or change in proportions of approval mixes may be made without additional tests and approval of Contracting Officer or as specified. Making and testing of preliminary test cylinders may be carried on pending approval of cement and fly ash, providing Contractor and manufacturer certify that ingredients used in making test cylinders are the same. Contracting Officer may allow Contractor to proceed with depositing concrete for certain portions of work, pending final approval of cement and fly ash and approval of design mix.D.Cement Factor: Maintain minimum cement factors in Table I regardless of compressive strength developed above minimums. Fly ash may be substituted for up to 20 percent of the minimum cement factor at option of Contractor, except fly ash may not be used in concrete designated as architectural concrete.TABLE I - CEMENT AND WATER FACTORS FOR CONCRETEConcrete StrengthNon-Air-EntrainedAir-EntrainedMin. 28 Day Comp. Str.MPa (psi)Min. Cementkg/m3 (lbs/c. yd)Max. Water Cement RatioMin. Cementkg/m3 (lbs/c. yd)Max. WaterCement RatioSlabs/stairs:30 (4000)1,2325 (550)0.47340 (570)0.47Foundations:25 (3000)1,2280 (470)0.66290 (490)0.661.If trial mixes are used, the proposed mix design shall achieve a compressive strength 8.3 MPa (1200 psi) in excess of f'c. For concrete strengths above 35 Mpa (5000 psi), the proposed mix design shall achieve a compressive strength 9.7 MPa (1400 psi) in excess of f’c.2.For concrete exposed to high sulfate content soils maximum water cement ratio is 0.44.*Determined by Laboratory in accordance with ACI 211.1 for normal concrete.E.Maximum Slump: Maximum slump, as determined by ASTM C143 with tolerances as established by ASTM C94, for concrete to be vibrated shall be as shown in Table II.TABLE II MAXIMUM SLUMP, mm (INCHES)*Type of ConstructionNormal Weight ConcreteReinforced Footings 100 mm (4 inches)Slabsand Stairs100 mm (4 inches)*Slump may be increased by the use of the approved high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer). Tolerances as established by ASTM C94. Concrete containing the high-range-water-reducing admixture may have a maximum slump of 225 mm (9 inches). The concrete shall arrive at the job site at a slump of 50 mm to 75 mm (2 inches to 3 inches), and 75 mm to 100 mm (3 inches to 4 inches) for lightweight concrete. This should be verified, and then the high-range-water-reducing admixture added to increase the slump to the approved level.F.Air-Entrainment: Air-entrainment of normal weight concrete shall conform with Table III. Determine air content by either ASTM C173 or ASTM C231.TABLE III TOTAL AIR CONTENTFOR VARIOUS SIZES OF COARSE AGGREGATES (NORMAL CONCRETE)Structure Type Entrained Air Content (%) Foundations up to 2%Slabs and Stairs 6%G.High early strength concrete, made with Type III cement or Type I cement plus non-corrosive accelerator, shall have a 7-day compressive strength equal to specified minimum 28day compressive strength for concrete type specified made with standard Portland cement.H.Concrete slabs placed at air temperatures below 10 degrees C (50 degrees Fahrenheit) use non-corrosive, non-chloride accelerator. Concrete required to be air entrained use approved air entraining admixture. Pumped concrete, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water/cement ratio below 0.50 use high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer).I.Durability: Use air entrainment for exterior exposed concrete subjected to freezing and thawing and other concrete shown or specified. Air content as shown in Table III or Table IV.J.Enforcing Strength Requirements: Test as specified in Section 01 45 29, TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES, during the progress of the work. Sevenday tests may be used as indicators of 28day strength. Average of any three 28day consecutive strength tests of laboratorycured specimens representing each type of concrete shall be equal to or greater than specified strength. No single test shall be more than 3.5 MPa (500 psi) below specified strength. Interpret field test results in accordance with ACI 214. Should strengths shown by test specimens fall below required values, Contracting Officer may require any one or any combination of the following corrective actions, at no additional cost to the Government:1.Require changes in mix proportions by selecting one of the other appropriate trial mixes or changing proportions, including cement content, of approved trial mix.2.Require additional curing and protection.3.If five consecutive tests fall below 95 percent of minimum values given in Table I or if test results are so low as to raise a question as to the safety of the structure, Contracting Officer may direct Contractor to take cores from portions of the structure. Use results from cores tested by the Contractor retained testing agency to analyze structure.4.If strength of core drilled specimens falls below 85 percent of minimum value given in Table I, Contracting Officer may order load tests, made by Contractor retained testing agency, on portions of building so affected. Load tests in accordance with ACI 318 and criteria of acceptability of concrete under test as given therein.5.Concrete work, judged inadequate by structural analysis, by results of load test, or for any reason, shall be reinforced with additional construction or replaced, if directed by the Contracting Officer.2.4 BATCHING AND MIXING:A.General: Concrete shall be "ReadyMixed" and comply with ACI 318 and ASTM C94, except as specified. Batch mixing at the site is permitted. Mixing process and equipment must be approved by Contracting Officer. With each batch of concrete, furnish certified delivery tickets listing information in Paragraph 16.1 and 16.2 of ASTM C94. Maximum delivery temperature of concrete is 380C (100 degrees Fahrenheit). Minimum delivery temperature as follows:Atmospheric TemperatureMinimum Concrete Temperature-1. degrees to 4.4 degrees C (30 degrees to 40 degrees F)15.6 degrees C (60 degrees F.)-17 degrees C to -1.1 degrees C (0 degrees to 30 degrees F.)21 degrees C (70 degrees F.)1.Services of aggregate manufacturer's representative shall be furnished during the design of trial mixes and as requested by the Contracting Officer for consultation during batching, mixing, and placing operations of lightweight structural concrete. Services will be required until field controls indicate that concrete of required quality is being furnished. Representative shall be thoroughly familiar with the structural lightweight aggregate, adjustment and control of mixes to produce concrete of required quality. Representative shall assist and advise Contracting Officer.PART 3 – EXECUTION3.1 FORMWORK:A.General: Design in accordance with ACI 347 is the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall retain a registered Professional Engineer to design the formwork, shores, and reshores.1.Form boards and plywood forms may be reused for contact surfaces of exposed concrete only if thoroughly cleaned, patched, and repaired and Contracting Officer approves their reuse.2.Provide forms for concrete footings unless Contracting Officer determines forms are not necessary.3.Corrugated fiberboard forms: Place forms on a smooth firm bed, set tight, with no buckled cartons to prevent horizontal displacement, and in a dry condition when concrete is placed.B.Treating and Wetting: Treat or wet contact forms as follows:1.Coat plywood and board forms with nonstaining form sealer. In hot weather, cool forms by wetting with cool water just before concrete is placed.2.Clean and coat removable metal forms with light form oil before reinforcement is placed. In hot weather, cool metal forms by thoroughly wetting with water just before placing concrete.3.Use sealer on reused plywood forms as specified for new material.C.Size and Spacing of Studs: Size and space studs, wales and other framing members for wall forms so as not to exceed safe working stress of kind of lumber used nor to develop deflection greater than 1/270 of free span of member.D.Unlined Forms: Use plywood forms to obtain a smooth finish for concrete surfaces. Tightly butt edges of sheets to prevent leakage. Back up all vertical joints solidly and nail edges of adjacent sheets to same stud with 6d box nails spaced not over 150 mm (6 inches) apart.E.Lined Forms: May be used in lieu of unlined plywood forms. Back up form lining solidly with square edge board lumber securely nailed to studs with all edges in close contact to prevent bulging of lining. No joints in lining and backing may coincide. Nail abutted edges of sheets to same backing board. Nail lining at not over 200 mm (8 inches) on center along edges and with at least one nail to each square foot of surface area; nails to be 3d blued shingle or similar nails with thin flatheads.F.Architectural Liner: Attach liner as recommended by the manufacturer with tight joints to prevent leakage.G.Inserts, Sleeves, and Similar Items: Flashing reglets, steel strips, masonry ties, anchors, wood blocks, nailing strips, grounds, inserts, wire hangers, sleeves, drains, guard angles, forms for floor hinge boxes, inserts or bond blocks for elevator guide rails and supports, and other items specified as furnished under this and other sections of specifications and required to be in their final position at time concrete is placed shall be properly located, accurately positioned, and built into construction, and maintained securely in place.1.Locate inserts or hanger wires for furred and suspended ceilings only in bottom of concrete joists, or similar concrete member of overhead concrete joist construction. 2.Install sleeves, inserts and similar items for mechanical services in accordance with drawings prepared specially for mechanical services. Contractor is responsible for accuracy and completeness of drawings and shall coordinate requirements for mechanical services and equipment.3.Do not install sleeves in beams, joists or columns except where shown or permitted by Contracting Officer. Install sleeves in beams, joists, or columns that are not shown, but are permitted by the Contracting Officer, and require no structural changes, at no additional cost to the Government.4.Minimum clear distance of embedded items such as conduit and pipe is at least three times diameter of conduit or pipe, except at stubups and other similar locations.5.Provide recesses and blockouts in floor slabs for door closers and other hardware as necessary in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.H.Construction Tolerances:1.Set and maintain concrete formwork to assure erection of completed work within tolerances specified and to accommodate installation of other rough and finish materials. Accomplish remedial work necessary for correcting excessive tolerances. Erected work that exceeds specified tolerance limits shall be remedied or removed and replaced, at no additional cost to the Government.2.Permissible surface irregularities for various classes of materials are defined as "finishes" in specification sections covering individual materials. They are to be distinguished from tolerances specified which are applicable to surface irregularities of structural elements.3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT:A.General: Details of concrete reinforcement in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 315, unless otherwise shown.B.Placing: Place reinforcement conforming to CRSI DA4, unless otherwise shown.1.Place reinforcing bars accurately and tie securely at intersections and splices with 1.6 mm (16 gauge) black annealed wire. Secure reinforcing bars against displacement during the placing of concrete by spacers, chairs, or other similar supports. Portions of supports, spacers, and chairs in contact with formwork shall be made of plastic in areas that will be exposed when building is occupied. Type, number, and spacing of supports conform to ACI 315. Where concrete slabs are placed on ground, use concrete blocks or other noncorrodible material of proper height, for support of reinforcement. Use of brick or stone supports will not be permitted.C.Spacing: Minimum clear distances between parallel bars, except in columns and multiple layers of bars in beams shall be equal to nominal diameter of bars. Minimum clear spacing is 25 mm (1 inch) or 11/3 times maximum size of coarse aggregate.D.Splicing: Splices of reinforcement made only as required or shown or specified. Accomplish splicing as follows:1.Lap splices: Do not use lap splices for bars larger than Number 36 (Number 11). Minimum lengths of lap as shown.E.Bending: Bend bars cold, unless otherwise approved. Do not field bend bars partially embedded in concrete, except when approved by Contracting Officer.F.Cleaning: Metal reinforcement, at time concrete is placed, shall be free from loose flaky rust, mud, oil, or similar coatings that will reduce bond.G.Future Bonding: Protect exposed reinforcement bars intended for bonding with future work by wrapping with felt and coating felt with a bituminous compound unless otherwise shown.3.3 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSIONS & ALKALINITY CONTROL SEALER:A. Sealer is applied on the day of the concrete pour or as soon as harsh weather permits, prior to any other chemical treatments for concrete slabs either on grade, below grade or above grade receiving resilient flooring, such as, sheet vinyl, vinyl composition tile, rubber, wood flooring, carpet, epoxy coatings and overlays.B.Manufacturer’s representative will be on the site the day of concrete pour to install or train its application and document. He shall return on every application thereafter to verify that proper procedures are followed.Apply Sealer to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete and the concrete has hardened sufficiently to sustain floor traffic without damage.Spray apply Sealer at the rate of 20 m2 (200 square feet) per gallon. Lightly broom product evenly over the substrate and product has completely penetrated the surface.If within two (2) hours after initial application areas are subjected to heavy rainfall and puddling occurs, reapply Sealer product to these areas as soon as weather condition permits.3.4 PLACING CONCRETE:A.Preparation:1.Remove hardened concrete, wood chips, shavings and other debris from forms.2.Remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from interior surfaces of mixing and conveying equipment.3.Have forms and reinforcement inspected and approved by Contracting Officer before depositing concrete.4.Provide runways for wheeling equipment to convey concrete to point of deposit. Keep equipment on runways which are not supported by or bear on reinforcement. Provide similar runways for protection of vapor barrier on coarse fill.B.Conveying Concrete: Convey concrete from mixer to final place of deposit by a method which will prevent segregation. Method of conveying concrete subject to approval of Contracting Officer.C.Placing: For special requirements see Paragraphs, HOT WEATHER and COLD WEATHER.1.Do not place concrete when weather conditions prevent proper placement and consolidation, or when concrete has attained its initial set, or has contained its water or cement content more than 1 1/2 hours.2.Deposit concrete in forms as near as practicable in its final position. Prevent splashing of forms or reinforcement with concrete in advance of placing concrete.3.Do not drop concrete freely more than 3000 mm (10 feet) for concrete containing the high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) or 1500 mm (5 feet) for conventional concrete. Where greater drops are required, use a tremie or flexible spout (canvas elephant trunk), attached to a suitable hopper.4.Discharge contents of tremies or flexible spouts in horizontal layers not exceeding 500 mm (20 inches) in thickness, and space tremies such as to provide a minimum of lateral movement of concrete.5.Continuously place concrete until an entire unit between construction joints is placed. Rate and method of placing concrete shall be such that no concrete between construction joints will be deposited upon or against partly set concrete, after it's initial set has taken place, or after 45 minutes of elapsed time during concrete placement.6.On bottom of members with severe congestion of reinforcement, deposit 25 mm (1 inch) layer of flowing concrete containing the specified high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer). Successive concrete lifts may be a continuation of this concrete or concrete with a conventional slump.D.Consolidation: Conform to ACI 309. Immediately after depositing, spade concrete next to forms, work around reinforcement and into angles of forms, tamp lightly by hand, and compact with mechanical vibrator applied directly into concrete at approximately 450 mm (18 inch) intervals. Mechanical vibrator shall be power driven, hand operated type with minimum frequency of 5000 cycles per minute having an intensity sufficient to cause flow or settlement of concrete into place. Vibrate concrete to produce thorough compaction, complete embedment of reinforcement and concrete of uniform and maximum density without segregation of mix. Do not transport concrete in forms by vibration.1.Use of form vibration shall be approved only when concrete sections are too thin or too inaccessible for use of internal vibration.2.Carry on vibration continuously with placing of concrete. Do not insert vibrator into concrete that has begun to set.3.5 HOT WEATHER:Follow the recommendations of ACI 305 or as specified to prevent problems in the manufacturing, placing, and curing of concrete that can adversely affect the properties and serviceability of the hardened concrete. Methods proposed for cooling materials and arrangements for protecting concrete shall be made in advance of concrete placement and approved by Contracting Officer.3.6 COLD WEATHER:Follow the recommendations of ACI 306 or as specified to prevent freezing of concrete and to permit concrete to gain strength properly. Use only the specified non-corrosive, non-chloride accelerator. Do not use calcium chloride, thiocyantes or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions. Methods proposed for heating materials and arrangements for protecting concrete shall be made in advance of concrete placement and approved by Contracting Officer.3.7 PROTECTION AND CURING:A.Conform to ACI 308: Initial curing shall immediately follow the finishing operation. Protect exposed surfaces of concrete from premature drying, wash by rain and running water, wind, mechanical injury, and excessively hot or cold temperatures. Keep concrete not covered with membrane or other curing material continuously wet for at least 7 days after placing, except wet curing period for high-early-strength concrete shall be not less than 3 days. Keep wood forms continuously wet to prevent moisture loss until forms are removed. Cure exposed concrete surfaces as described below. Other curing methods may be used if approved by Contracting Officer.1.Liquid curing and sealing compounds: Apply by power-driven spray or roller in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Apply immediately after finishing. Maximum coverage 10m2/L (400 square feet per gallon) on steel troweled surfaces and 7.5m2/L (300 square feet per gallon) on floated or broomed surfaces for the curing/sealing compound.2.Plastic sheets: Apply as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent surface damage. Utilize widest practical width sheet and overlap adjacent sheets 50 mm (2 inches). Tightly seal joints with tape.3.Paper: Utilize widest practical width paper and overlap adjacent sheets 50 mm (2 inches). Tightly seal joints with sand, wood planks, pressuresensitive tape, mastic or glue.3.8 REMOVAL OF FORMS:A.Remove in a manner to assure complete safety of structure after the following conditions have been met.1.Where structure as a whole is supported on shores, forms for beams and girder sides, columns, and similar vertical structural members may be removed after 24 hours, provided concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent surface damage and curing is continued without any lapse in time as specified for exposed surfaces.2.Take particular care in removing forms of architectural exposed concrete to insure surfaces are not marred or gouged, and that corners and arises are true, sharp and unbroken.B.Control Test: Use to determine if the concrete has attained sufficient strength and curing to permit removal of supporting forms. Cylinders required for control tests taken in accordance with ASTM C172, molded in accordance with ASTM C31, and tested in accordance with ASTM C39. Control cylinders cured and protected in the same manner as the structure they represent. Supporting forms or shoring not removed until strength of control test cylinders have attained at least 70 percent of minimum 28day compressive strength specified. // For post-tensioned systems supporting forms and shoring not removed until stressing is completed. // Exercise care to assure that newly unsupported portions of structure are not subjected to heavy construction or material loading.C.Reshoring: Reshoring is required if superimposed load plus dead load of the floor exceeds the capacity of the floor at the time of loading. // In addition, for flat slab/plate, reshoring is required immediately after stripping operations are complete and not later than the end of the same day. // Reshoring accomplished in accordance with ACI 347 at no additional cost to the Government.3.9 CONCRETE SURFACE PREPARATION:A.Metal Removal: Unnecessary metal items cut back flush with face of concrete members.B.Patching: Maintain curing and start patching as soon as forms are removed. Do not apply curing compounds to concrete surfaces requiring patching until patching is completed. Use cement mortar for patching of same composition as that used in concrete. Use white or gray Portland cement as necessary to obtain finish color matching surrounding concrete. Thoroughly clean areas to be patched. Cut out honeycombed or otherwise defective areas to solid concrete to a depth of not less than 25 mm (1 inch). Cut edge perpendicular to surface of concrete. Saturate with water area to be patched, and at least 150 mm (6 inches) surrounding before placing patching mortar. Give area to be patched a brush coat of cement grout followed immediately by patching mortar. Cement grout composed of one part Portland cement, 1.5 parts fine sand, bonding admixture, and water at a 50:50 ratio, mix to achieve consistency of thick paint. Mix patching mortar approximately 1 hour before placing and remix occasionally during this period without addition of water. Compact mortar into place and screed slightly higher than surrounding surface. After initial shrinkage has occurred, finish to match color and texture of adjoining surfaces. Cure patches as specified for other concrete. Fill form tie holes which extend entirely through walls from unexposed face by means of a pressure gun or other suitable device to force mortar through wall. Wipe excess mortar off exposed face with a cloth.C.Upon removal of forms, clean vertical concrete surface that is to receive bonded applied cementitious application with wire brushes or by sand blasting to remove unset material, laitance, and loose particles to expose aggregates to provide a clean, firm, granular surface for bond of applied finish.3.10 CONCRETE FINISHES:A.Slab Finishes:1.Monitoring and Adjustment: Provide continuous cycle of placement, measurement, evaluation and adjustment of procedures to produce slabs within specified tolerances. Monitor elevations of structural steel in key locations before and after concrete placement to establish typical deflection patterns for the structural steel. Determine elevations of cast-in-place slab soffits prior to removal of shores. Provide information to Contracting Officer and floor consultant for evaluation and recommendations for subsequent placements.2.Set perimeter forms to serve as screed using either optical or laser instruments. For slabs on grade, wet screeds may be used to establish initial grade during strike-off, unless Contracting Officer determines that the method is proving insufficient to meet required finish tolerances and directs use of rigid screed guides. Where wet screeds are allowed, they shall be placed using grade stakes set by optical or laser instruments. Use rigid screed guides, as opposed to wet screeds, to control strike-off elevation for all types of elevated (non slab-on-grade) slabs. Divide bays into halves or thirds by hard screeds. Adjust as necessary where monitoring of previous placements indicates unshored structural steel deflections to other than a level profile.3.Place slabs monolithically. Once slab placement commences, complete finishing operations within same day. Slope finished slab to floor drains where they occur, whether shown or not.4.Use straightedges specifically made for screeding, such as hollow magnesium straightedges or power strike-offs. Do not use pieces of dimensioned lumber. Strike off and screed slab to a true surface at required elevations. Use optical or laser instruments to check concrete finished surface grade after strike-off. Repeat strike-off as necessary. Complete screeding before any excess moisture or bleeding water is present on surface. Do not sprinkle dry cement on the surface.5.Immediately following screeding, and before any bleed water appears, use a 3000 mm (10 foot) wide highway straightedge in a cutting and filling operation to achieve surface flatness. Do not use bull floats or darbys, except that darbying may be allowed for narrow slabs and restricted spaces.6.Wait until water sheen disappears and surface stiffens before proceeding further. Do not perform subsequent operations until concrete will sustain foot pressure with maximum of 6 mm (1/4 inch) indentation.7.Broom Finish: Finish exterior slabs, ramps, and stair treads with a bristle brush moistened with clear water after surfaces have been floated. Brush in a direction transverse to main traffic. Match texture approved by Contracting Officer from sample panel.8.Remedial Measures for Rejected Slabs: Correct rejected slab areas by grinding, planing, surface repair with underlayment compound or repair topping, retopping, or removal and replacement of entire rejected slab areas, as directed by Contracting Officer, until a slab finish constructed within specified tolerances is accepted. E N D SECTION 05 50 00METAL FABRICATIONSPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies assemblies fabricated from steel shapes as shown and specified.B.Items specified.1.Loose Lintels2.Guardrail and Handrails1.2 RELATED WORKA.Prime and finish painting: Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B.Shop Drawings:1.Each item specified, showing complete detail, location in the project, material and size of components, method of joining various components and assemblies, finish, and location, size and type of anchors.2.Mark items requiring field assembly for erection identification and furnish erection drawings and instructions.3.Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.C.Manufacturer's Certificates:1.Anodized finish as specified.2.Live load designs as specified.D.Design Calculations for specified live loads including dead loads.E.Furnish setting drawings and instructions for installation of anchors to be preset into concrete and masonry work, and for the positioning of items having anchors to be built into concrete or masonry construction.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA.Each product type shall be the same and be made by the same manufacturer and assembled to the greatest extent possible before delivery to the site.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):B18.6.1-97Wood ScrewsB18.2.2-87(R2005)Square and Hex NutsC.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A36/A36M-08Structural SteelA47-99(R2009)Malleable Iron CastingsA48-03(R2008)Gray Iron CastingsA53-10Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and SeamlessA123-09Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel ProductsA167-99(R2009)Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and StripA269-10Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General ServiceA307-10Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile StrengthA312/A312M-09Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel PipesA391/A391M-07Grade 80 Alloy Steel ChainA653/A653M-10Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip ProcessA786/A786M-09Rolled Steel Floor PlateB221-08Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and TubesB456-03(R2009)Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus ChromiumB632-08Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread PlateC1107-08Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)D3656-07Insect Screening and Louver Cloth Woven from Vinyl-Coated Glass YarnsF436-10Hardened Steel WashersF468-10Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for General UseF593-02(R2008)Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and StudsF1667-11Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes and StaplesD.American Welding Society (AWS):D1.1-10Structural Welding Code SteelD1.2-08Structural Welding Code AluminumD1.3-08Structural Welding Code Sheet SteelE.National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)AMP 521-01Pipe Railing Manual AMP 500-06Metal Finishes ManualMBG 531-09Metal Bar Grating ManualMBG 532-09Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating ManualF.Structural Steel Painting Council (SSPC)/Society of Protective Coatings:SP 1-04No. 1, Solvent CleaningSP 2-04No. 2, Hand Tool CleaningSP 3-04No. 3, Power Tool CleaningG.Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec):RR-T-650ETreads, Metallic and Nonmetallic, NonskidPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 DESIGN CRITERIAA.In addition to the dead loads, design fabrications to support the following live loads unless otherwise specified.B.Railings and Handrails: 900 N (200 pounds) in any direction at any point.2.2 MATERIALSA.Steel Pipe: ASTM A53.1.Galvanized for exterior locations.2.Type S, Grade A unless specified otherwise.3.NPS (inside diameter) as shown.B.Primer Paint: As specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.2.3 FABRICATION GENERALA.Material1.Use material as specified. Use material of commercial quality and suitable for intended purpose for material that is not named or its standard of quality not specified.2.Use material free of defects which could affect the appearance or service ability of the finished product.B.Size:1.Size and thickness of members as shown.2.When size and thickness is not specified or shown for an individual part, use size and thickness not less than that used for the same component on similar standard commercial items or in accordance with established shop methods.C.Connections1.Except as otherwise specified, connections may be made by welding.2.Weld connections shall be made to develop a joint strength of not less than the design value.3.Size and shape welds to develop the full design strength of the parts connected by welds and to transmit imposed stresses without permanent deformation or failure when subject to service loadings.D.Fasteners and Anchors1.Use methods for fastening or anchoring metal fabrications to building construction as shown or specified.2.Where fasteners and anchors are not shown, design the type, size, location and spacing to resist the loads imposed without deformation of the members or causing failure of the anchor or fastener, and suit the sequence of installation.3.Use material and finish of the fasteners compatible with the kinds of materials which are fastened together and their location in the finished work.4.Fasteners for securing metal fabrication to existing construction or new construction may be expansion bolts, toggle bolts, power actuated drive pins, welding, self drilling and tapping screws or bolts.E.Workmanship1.General:a.Fabricate items to design shown.b.Furnish members in longest lengths commercially available within the limits shown and specified.c.Fabricate straight, true, free from warp and twist, and where applicable square and in same plane.d.Provide holes, sinkages and reinforcement shown and required for fasteners and anchorage items.e.Provide openings, cut-outs, and tapped holes for attachment and clearances required for work of other trades.f.Prepare members for the installation and fitting of hardware.g.Fabricate surfaces and edges free from sharp edges, burrs and projections which may cause injury.2.Welding:a.Weld in accordance with AWS.b.Welds shall show good fusion, be free from cracks and porosity and accomplish secure and rigid joints in proper alignment.c.Where exposed in the finished work, continuous weld for the full length of the members joined and have depressed areas filled and protruding welds finished smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.d.Finish welded joints to match finish of adjacent surface.3.Joining:a.Miter or butt members at corners.b.Where frames members are butted at corners, cut leg of frame member perpendicular to surface, as required for clearance.4.Anchors:a.Where metal fabrications are shown to be preset in concrete, weld 32 x 3 mm (1-1/4 by 1/8 inch) steel strap anchors, 150 mm (6 inches) long with 25 mm (one inch) hooked end, to back of member at 600 mm (2 feet) on center, unless otherwise shown.b.Where metal fabrications are shown to be built into masonry use 32 x 3 mm (1-1/4 by 1/8 inch) steel strap anchors, 250 mm (10 inches) long with 50 mm (2 inch) hooked end, welded to back of member at 600 mm (2 feet) on center, unless otherwise shown.5.Cutting and Fitting:a.Accurately cut, machine and fit joints, corners, copes, and miters.b.Fit removable members to be easily removed.c.Design and construct field connections in the most practical place for appearance and ease of installation.d.Fit pieces together as required.e.Fabricate connections for ease of assembly and disassembly without use of special tools.f.Joints firm when assembled.g.Conceal joining, fitting and welding on exposed work as far as practical.h.Do not show rivets and screws prominently on the exposed face.i.The fit of components and the alignment of holes shall eliminate the need to modify component or to use exceptional force in the assembly of item and eliminate the need to use other than common tools.2.4 LOOSE LINTELSA.Furnish lintels of sizes shown. Where size of lintels is not shown, provide the sizes specified.B.Fabricate lintels with not less than 150 mm (6 inch) bearing at each end for nonbearing masonry walls, and 200 mm (8 inch) bearing at each end for bearing walls.C.Provide one angle lintel for each 100 mm (4 inches) of masonry thickness as follows except as otherwise specified or shown.1.Openings 750 mm to 1800 mm (2-1/2 feet to 6 feet) - 100 x 90 x 8 mm (4 x 3-1/2 x 5/16 inch).2.Openings 1800 mm to 3000 mm (6 feet to 10 feet) - 150 x 90 x 9 mm (6 x 3-1/2 x 3/8 inch).D.For 150 mm (6 inch) thick masonry openings 750 mm to 3000 mm (2-1/2 feet to 10 feet) use one angle 150 x 90 x 9 mm (6 x 3-1/2 x 3/8 inch).E.Provide bearing plates for lintels where shown.F.Weld or bolt upstanding legs of double angle lintels together with 19 mm (3/4 inch bolts) spaced at 300 mm (12 inches) on centers.G.Insert spreaders at bolt points to separate the angles for insertion of metal windows, louver, and other anchorage.H.Where shown or specified, punch upstanding legs of single lintels to suit size and spacing of anchor bolts.2.5 RAILINGSA.In addition to the dead load design railing assembly to support live load specified.1.Galvanized for in accordance with ASTM A53.B.Fabrication General:1.Provide continuous welded joints, dressed smooth and flush.2.Standard flush fittings, designed to be welded, may be used.4.Form handrail brackets to size and design shown.5.Exterior Post Anchors.a.Fabricate tube or pipe sleeves with closed ends or plates as shown.b.Where inserts interfere with reinforcing bars, provide flanged fittings welded or threaded to posts for securing to concrete with expansion bolts.C.Handrails:1.Close free ends of rail with flush metal caps welded in place except where flanges for securing to walls with bolts are shown.2.Make provisions for attaching handrail brackets to posts as shown.D.Steel Pipe Railings:1.Fabricate of steel pipe with welded joints.2.Number and space of rails as shown.3.Space posts for railings not over 1800 mm (6 feet) on centers between end posts.4.Form handrail brackets from malleable iron.5.Fabricate removable sections with posts at end of section.7.Opening Guard Rails:a.Fabricate rails with flanged fitting at each end to fit between wall opening jambs.b.Design flange fittings for fastening with machine screws to steel plate anchored to jambs.c.Fabricate rails for floor openings for anchorage in sleeves.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERALA.Set work accurately, in alignment and where shown, plumb, level, free of rack and twist, and set parallel or perpendicular as required to line and plane of surface.B.Items set into concrete or masonry.1.Provide temporary bracing for such items until concrete or masonry is set.2.Place in accordance with setting drawings and instructions.3.Build strap anchors, into masonry as work progresses.C.Field weld in accordance with AWS.1.Design and finish as specified for shop welding.2.Use continuous weld unless specified otherwise.D.Install anchoring devices and fasteners as shown and as necessary for securing metal fabrications to building construction as specified. Power actuated drive pins may be used except for removable items and where members would be deformed or substrate damaged by their use.3.2 STEEL LINTELSA.Use lintel sizes and combinations shown or specified.1.Galvanized for in accordance with ASTM A53.B.Install lintels with longest leg upstanding, except for openings in 150 mm (6 inch) masonry walls install lintels with longest leg horizontal.C.Install lintels to have not less than 150 mm (6 inch) bearing at each end for nonbearing walls, and 200 mm (8 inch) bearing at each end for bearing walls.3.3 RAILINGSA.Steel Posts:1.Secure fixed posts to concrete with expansion bolts through flanged fittings except where sleeves are shown with pourable grout.2.Install sleeves in concrete formwork.3.Set post in sleeve and pour grout to surface. Apply beveled bead of urethane sealant at perimeter of post or under flange fitting as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS on exterior posts.B.Handrails:1.Anchor brackets for metal handrails as detailed.3.19 CLEAN AND ADJUSTINGA.Adjust movable parts including hardware to operate as designed without binding or deformation of the members centered in the opening or frame and, where applicable, contact surfaces fit tight and even without forcing or warping the components.B.Clean after installation exposed prefinished and plated items and items fabricated from stainless steel, aluminum and copper alloys, as recommended by the metal manufacture and protected from damage until completion of the project.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 06 10 00ROUGH CARPENTRYPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTION:A.Section specifies wood blocking, framing, furring, nailers, sub-flooring, rough hardware and light wood construction.1.2 RELATED WORK:A.Milled woodwork: Section 06 20 00, FINISH CARPENTRY.B.Gypsum board: Section 09 29 00, GYPSUM BOARD.C.Metal stud framing: Section 09 22 16, NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING.1.3 SUMBITTALS:A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Product data and certification for:1.Lumber indicating species, grade, and strength.2.Fire retardant treatment3.Preservative treatment.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA.All lumber shall be fire retardant treated.B.Each piece of lumber shall bear a stamp indicating type of fire retardant treatment.1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:A.Protect lumber and other products from dampness both during and after delivery at site.B.Pile lumber in stacks in such manner as to provide air circulation around surfaces of each piece.C.Locate stacks within work area or on well drained areas, supported at least 150 mm (6 inches) above grade and cover with well ventilated sheds having firmly constructed over hanging roof with sufficient end wall to protect lumber from driving rain. 1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:A.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.B.American Forest and Paper Association (AFPA):National Design Specification for Wood ConstructionNDS-05Conventional Wood Frame ConstructionC.American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC):A190.1-07Structural Glued Laminated TimberD.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):B18.2.1-96(R2005)Square and Hex Bolts and ScrewsB18.2.2-87Square and Hex NutsB18.6.1-97Wood ScrewsE.American Plywood Association (APA):E30-07Engineered Wood Construction GuideF.American Society for Testing And Materials (ASTM):C954-10Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 inch (2.24 mm) to 0.112-inch (2.84 mm) in thicknessC1002-07Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Metal StudsD2559-10Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure ConditionsF844-07Washers, Steel, Plan (Flat) Unhardened for General UseF1667-08Nails, Spikes, and StaplesCommercial Item Description (CID):A-A-55615Shield, Expansion (Wood Screw and Lag Bolt Self Threading Anchors)H.Military Specification (Mil. Spec.):MIL-L-19140ELumber and Plywood, Fire-Retardant TreatedI.U.S. Department of Commerce Product Standard (PS)PS 1-95Construction and Industrial PlywoodPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 LUMBER:A.Unless otherwise specified, each piece of lumber bear grade mark, stamp, or other identifying marks indicating grades of material, and rules or standards under which produced. 1.Identifying marks in accordance with rule or standard under which material is produced, including requirements for qualifications and authority of the inspection organization, usage of authorized identification, and information included in the identification. 2.Inspection agency for lumber approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, to grade species used.B.Non-Structural Lumber:1.Unless otherwise specified, species graded under the grading rules of an inspection agency approved by Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee.3.Furring, blocking, nailers and similar items 100 mm (4 inches) and narrower Standard Grade; and, members 150 mm (6 inches) and wider, Number 2 Grade.C.Sizes:1.Conforming to Prod. Std., PS20.2.Size references are nominal sizes, unless otherwise specified, actual sizes within manufacturing tolerances allowed by standard under which produced.D.Moisture Content: Moisture Content at time of delivery shall be maintained at the site and shall be as follows:1.Boards and lumber 50 mm (2 inches) and less in thickness: 19 percent or less.2.Lumber over 50 mm (2 inches) thick: 25 percent or less.E.Fire Retardant Treatment: All lumber used on site shall be fire retardant treated.1.Mil Spec. MIL-L-19140 with piece of treated material bearing identification of testing agency and showing performance rating.2.Treatment and performance inspection, by an independent and qualified testing agency that establishes performance ratings.2.2 ply with Prod. Std., PS 1.B.Bear the mark of a recognized association or independent inspection agency that maintains continuing control over quality of plywood which identifies compliance by veneer grade, group number, span rating where applicable, and glue type. C.Sheathing:1.APA rated Exposure 1 or Exterior; panel grade CD or better.2.Wall sheathing:a.Minimum 9 mm (11/32 inch) thick with supports 400 mm (16 inches) on center and 12 mm (15/32 inch) thick with supports 600 mm (24 inches) on center unless specified otherwise.b.Minimum 1200 mm (48 inches) wide at corners without corner bracing of framing.3.Roof sheathing:a.Minimum 9 mm (11/32 inch) thick with span rating 24/0 or 12 mm (15/32 inch) thick with span rating for supports 400 mm (16 inches) on center unless specified otherwise.b.Minimum 15 mm (19/32 inch) thick or span rating of 40/20 or 18 mm (23/32 inch) thick or span rating of 48/24 for supports 600 mm (24 inches) on center.2.4 ROUGH HARDWARE AND ADHESIVES:A.Miscellaneous Bolts: Expansion Bolts: C1D, A-A-55615; lag bolt, long enough to extend at least 65 mm (2-1/2 inches) into masonry or concrete. Use 13 mm (1/2 inch) bolt unless shown otherwise.B.Washers1.ASTM F844.2.Use zinc or cadmium coated steel or cast iron for washers exposed to moisture.C.Screws:1.Wood to Wood: ANSI B18.6.1 or ASTM C1002.2.Wood to Steel: ASTM C954, or ASTM C1002.3.Use zinc or cadmium coated steel or cast iron for washers exposed to moisture.D.Nails:1.Size and type best suited for purpose unless noted otherwise. Use aluminum-alloy nails, plated nails, or zinc-coated nails, for nailing wood work exposed to moisture.2.ASTM F1667:mon: Type I, Style 10.b.Concrete: Type I, Style 11.c.Barbed: Type I, Style 26.d.Underlayment: Type I, Style 25.e.Masonry: Type I, Style 27.f.Use special nails designed for use with ties, strap anchors, framing connectors, joists hangers, and similar items. Nails not less than 32 mm (1-1/4 inches) long, 8d and deformed or annular ring shank.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS WOOD MEMBERS:A.Fasteners:1.Nails.a.Nail in accordance with the Recommended Nailing Schedule as specified in AFPA Manual for House Framing where detailed nailing requirements are not indicated. Select nail size and nail spacing sufficient to develop adequate strength for the connection without splitting the members.b.Use eight penny or larger nails for nailing through 25 mm (1 inch) thick lumber and for toe nailing 50 mm (2 inch) thick lumber.c.Use 16 penny or larger nails for nailing through 50 mm (2 inch) thick lumber.2.Bolts:a.Fit bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood with washers.b.Countersink bolt heads flush with the surface of nailers.c.Embed in concrete and solid masonry or use expansion bolts. Special bolts or screws designed for anchor to solid masonry or concrete in drilled holes may be used.d.Use toggle bolts to gypsum board, hollow masonry or sheet metal.e.Use bolts to steel over 2.84 mm (0.112 inch, 11 gage) in thickness. Secure wood nailers to vertical structural steel members with bolts, placed one at ends of nailer and 600 mm (24 inch) intervals between end bolts. Use clips to beam flanges.3.Drill Screws to steel less than 2.84 mm (0.112 inch) thick.a.ASTM C1002 for steel less than 0.84 mm (0.033 inch) thick.b.ASTM C 954 for steel over 0.84 mm (0.033 inch) thick.4.Power actuated drive pins may be used where practical to anchor to solid masonry, concrete, or steel.5.Do not anchor to wood plugs or nailing blocks in masonry or concrete. Use metal plugs, inserts or similar fastening.6.Screws to Join Wood:a.Where shown or option to nails.b.ASTM C1002, sized to provide not less than 25 mm (1 inch) penetration into anchorage member.c.Spaced same as nails.B.Blocking Nailers, and Furring:1.Install furring, blocking, nailers, and grounds where shown and where required.2.Use longest lengths practicable.3.Use only fire retardant treated wood blocking.4.Layers of Blocking or Plates:a.Stagger end joints between upper and lower pieces.b.Nail at ends and not over 600 mm (24 inches) between ends.c.Stagger nails from side to side of wood member over 125 mm (5 inches) in width.G.Rough Bucks:1.Install rough wood bucks at opening in masonry or concrete where wood frames or trim occur.2.Brace and maintain bucks plumb and true until masonry has been built around them or concrete cast in place.3.Cut rough bucks from 50 mm (2 inch) thick stock, of same width as partitions in which they occur and of width shown in exterior walls.4.Extend bucks full height of openings and across head of openings; fasten securely with anchors specified.H.Subflooring:1.Subflooring may be either boards, structural-use panels, or plywood.2.Lay board subflooring diagonally, with close joints. Stagger end joints and make joints over supports. Bear each board on at least three supports.3.Provide a clearance of approximately 13 mm (1/2 inch) at masonry or concrete at walls.4.Apply plywood and structural-use panel subflooring with face grain or long dimension at right angles to the supports, with edges 6 mm (1/4 inch) apart at side joints, and 3 mm (1/8 inch) apart at end joints.bination subfloor-underlayment: a.Space edges 3 mm (1/8 inch) apart.b.Provide a clearance of 6 mm (1/4 inch) at masonry on concrete at walls.6.Stagger panel end joints and make over support.I.Sheathing:1.Use plywood or structural-use panels for sheathing.2.Lay panels with joints staggered, with edge and ends 3 mm (1/8 inch) apart and nailed over bearings as specified.3.Set nails not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch) from edges.4.Install 50 mm by 100 mm (2 inch by 4 inch) blocking spiked between joists, rafters and studs to support edge or end joints of panels.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 06 20 00FINISH CARPENTRYPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies exterior and interior millwork.B.Items specified.1. Counter or Work Tops2. Wall and Base Cabinets3. Plastic Laminate4. Solid Surface Material5. Window Sill1.2 RELATED WORKA.Framing, furring and blocking: Section 06 10 00, ROUGH CARPENTRY.B.Wood doors: Section 08 14 00, INTERIOR WOOD DOORS.C.Electrical light fixtures and duplex outlets: Division 26, ELECTRICAL.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Shop Drawings:1.Millwork items – Quarter full size scale for sections and details 1:50 (1/4-inch) for elevations and plans.2.Show construction and installation.C.Samples:1.Plastic laminate, solid surface material, wood veneer and any other exposed to view material: 150 mm by 300 mm (6 by 12 inches).2.Cabinet hardware: one of each piece.D.Certificates:1.Indicating preservative treatment and fire retardant treatment of materials meet the requirements specified.2.Indicating moisture content of materials meet the requirements specified.E.List of acceptable sealers for fire retardant and preservative treated materials.F.Manufacturer's literature and data:1.Cabinet hardware and accessories2.Sinks with fittings (for information only – review will be by plumbing engineer)3.Electrical components (for information only – review will be by electrical engineer)4. Plastic Laminate5. Solid Surface Material1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA.Protect lumber and millwork from dampness, maintaining moisture content specified both during and after delivery at site.B.Store finishing lumber and millwork in weathertight well ventilated structures or in space in existing buildings designated by COTR. Store at a minimum temperature of 210C (700F) for not less than 10 days before installation.C.Pile lumber in stacks in such manner as to provide air circulation around surfaces of each piece.1.5 quality assuranceA.Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.??Shop shall be a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.B.Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI’s Quality Certification Program.C.Source Limitation: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork.D.Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for Premium Grade of interior architectural woodwork.E.Fire Test Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated, provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation.F.Forest Certification: Provide interior architectural woodwork produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC?STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."G.Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to review installation conditions and requirements. Do not proceed with installation until all conditions are satisfactory to the installer.1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):A36/A36M-08Structural SteelA167-99 (R2009)Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and StripB26/B26M-09Aluminum-Alloy Sand CastingsB221-08Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and TubesE84-09Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsC.Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA):A156.9-03Cabinet HardwareA156.11-04Cabinet LocksA156.16-02Auxiliary HardwareD.International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (ISSFA):ISSFA-2-01 (2007)Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing MaterialE.Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association (HPVA):HP1-09Hardwood and Decorative PlywoodF.National Particleboard Association (NPA):ANSI/NPA A208.1-09ParticleboardG.Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI):AWI-05Architectural Woodwork Quality StandardsH.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):LD 3-05High-Pressure Decorative LaminatesI.U.S. Department of Commerce, Product Standard (PS):PS 1-09Structural PlywoodPS 2-04Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use PanelsJ.Military Specification (Mil. Spec):MIL-L-19140ELumber and Plywood, Fire-Retardant TreatedK.Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):A-A-1922AShield ExpansionA-A-1936Contact AdhesiveFF-N-836DNut, Square, Hexagon Cap, Slotted, CastleFF-S-111D(1)Screw, WoodMM-L-736(C)Lumber, HardwoodPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 LUMBERA.Grading and Marking:1.Lumber shall bear the grade mark, stamp, or other identifying marks indicating grades of material.2.Such identifying marks on a material shall be in accordance with the rule or standard under which the material is produced, including requirements for qualifications and authority of the inspection organization, usage of authorized identification, and information included in the identification.3.The inspection agency for lumber shall be approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, to grade species used.B.Sizes:1.Lumber Size references, unless otherwise specified, are nominal sizes, and actual sizes shall be within manufacturing tolerances allowed by the standard under which product is produced.2.Millwork, standing and running trim, and rails: Actual size as shown or specified.C.Hardwood: MM-L-736, species as specified for each item.D.Softwood: PS-20, exposed to view appearance grades:1.Use C select or D select, vertical grain for transparent finish including stain transparent finish.2.Use Prime for painted or opaque finish.2.2 PLYWOODA.Softwood Plywood:1.Product Standard PS-12.Grading and Marking:a.Each sheet of plywood shall bear the mark of a recognized association or independent inspection agency that maintains continuing control over the quality of the plywood.b.The mark shall identify the plywood by species group or identification index, and shall show glue type, grade, and compliance with PS1.3.Plywood, 13 mm (1/2 inch) and thicker; not less than five ply construction, except 32 mm (1-1/4 inch) thick plywood not less than seven ply.4.Plastic Laminate Plywood Cores:a.Exterior Type, and species group.b.Veneer Grade: A-C.5.Shelving Plywood:a.Interior Type, any species group.b.Veneer Grade: A-B.6.Other: As specified for item.2.3 PARTICLEBOARDA.ANSI/NPA A208.1 and PS-2B.Plastic Laminate Particleboard Cores:1.Use Type 1, Grade 1-M-3, or Type 2, Grade 2-M-2, unless otherwise specified.2.Use Type 2, Grade 2-M-2, exterior bond, for tops with sinks.C.General Use: Type 1, Grade 1-M-3 or Type 2, Grade 2-M-2.2.4 PLASTIC LAMINATEA.NEMA LD-3.B.Exposed decorative surfaces including countertops, both sides of cabinet doors, and for items having plastic laminate finish. General Purpose, Type HGL.C.Cabinet Interiors including Shelving: Both of following options to comply with NEMA, CLS as a minimum.1.Plastic laminate clad plywood or particle board.2.Resin impregnated decorative paper thermally fused to particle board.D.Backing sheet on bottom of plastic laminate covered wood tops: Backer, Type HGP.E.Post Forming Fabrication, Decorative Surfaces: Post forming, Type HGP.F.Colors and Patterns:1.PL-1: 7950-VT, French Cherry Wood, Velva-Tex Finish, Laminart.2.5 ADHESIVEA.For Plastic Laminate: Fed. Spec. A-A-1936.B.Unextended urea resin, unextended melamine resin, phenol resin, or resorcinol resin.C.Free of toxic chemicals such as formaldehyde.2.6 solid surfacing materialA.Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2.1.Minimum thickness: 13 mm (1/2 inch).2.Non-porous.B.Fabricate tops in one piece unless indicated otherwise.1.Provide shop fabricated and installed edges.2.Provide integral backsplashes and shop fabricated endsplashes for field installation.C.Plumbing fixture preparation:1.Drill holes in counter tops for plumbing fittings in shop.2.Cut openings for sink bowls in shop.D.Colors and Patterns:1.SSM-1: Sorrel/Corian2.7 WINDOW SILLSA.HP1-09B.Exposed window sill with shop applied finish. Finish to match door stain and color specified in Section 08 14 00 “Interior Wood Doors”C.Fabricate sills per indicated dimensions2.7 STAINLESS STEELA.ASTM A167, Type 302 or 304.2.8 ALUMINUM CASTA.ASTM B262.9 ALUMINUM EXTRUDEDA.ASTM B2212.10 HARDWAREA.Rough Hardware:1.Furnish rough hardware with a standard plating, applied after punching, forming and assembly of parts; galvanized, cadmium plated, or zinc-coated by electric-galvanizing process.2.Use galvanized coating on ferrous metal for all work unless non-ferrous metals or stainless is used.3.Fasteners:a.Bolts with Nuts: FF-N-836.b.Expansion Bolts: A-A-1922A.c.Screws: Fed. Spec. FF-S-111.B.Finish Hardware1.Cabinet Hardware: ANSI A156.9, grade 1 with zinc finish unless indicated otherwise.a.Door/Drawer Pulls: 89 mm (3? inch) long x 8 mm (5/16 in) diameter with 33 mm (1-5/16 inch) projection wire pulls; satin stainless steel or satin chrome.b.Drawer Slides:i.B05051 for drawers over 150 mm (6 inches) deep: full extension, side mounted, ball bearing, self-closing, 70 kg (150 pound) capacity, zinc coated.ii.B05052 for drawers 150 mm (6 inches) deep or less: full extension, side mounted, ball bearing, self-closing, 35 kg (75 pound) capacity, zinc coated.c.Adjustable Shelf Standards: B4061 with shelf rest B04081.d.Concealed Hinges: B1601, minimum 110 degree opening.e.Cabinet Door Catch: B031712.Cabinet Locks: ANSI A156.11, grade 1 with bright stainless steel finish unless indicated otherwise.a.Hinged Door: E07261 with surface mounted catch.b.Drawers: E07021 With strike plate.3.Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI A156.16, grade 1 with bright stainless steel finish unless indicated otherwise.a.Closet Bar: L03131 chrome finish of required length.4.Primers: Manufacturer's standard primer for steel providing baked enamel finish.2.11 MOISTURE CONTENTA.Moisture content of lumber and millwork at time of delivery to site.1.Interior finish lumber, trim, and millwork 32 mm (1-1/4 inches) or less in nominal thickness: 12 percent on 85 percent of the pieces and 15 percent on the remainder.3.Moisture content of other materials shall be in accordance with the standards under which the products are produced.2.12 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENTA.Where wood members and plywood are specified to be fire retardant treated, the treatment shall be in accordance with Mil. Spec. MIL-L19140.B.Treatment and performance inspection shall be by an independent and qualified testing agency that establishes performance ratings.C.Each piece of treated material shall bear identification of the testing agency and shall indicate performance in accordance with such rating of flame spread and smoke developed.D.Treat wood for maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 25.E.Fire Resistant Softwood Plywood:1.Use Grade A, Exterior, plywood for treatment.2.Meet the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.a.Flame spread: 0 to 25.b.Smoke developed: 100 maximumF.Fire Resistant Hardwood Plywood:1.Core: Fire retardant treated softwood plywood.2.Hardwood face and back veneers untreated,3.Factory seal panel edges, to prevent loss of fire retardant salts.2.13 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENTA.Wood members and plywood used for countertops with sinks or in contact with plaster, masonry or concrete, including wood members used for rough framing of millwork items except heart-wood Redwood and Western Red Cedar shall be preservative treated in accordance with AWPA Standards.B.Use Grade A, exterior plywood for treatment.2.14 FABRICATIONA.General:1.Except as otherwise specified, use AWI Premium Grade for architectural woodwork and interior millwork.2.Finish woodwork shall be free from pitch pockets.3.Except where special profiles are shown, trim shall be standard stock molding and members of the same species.4.Plywood shall be not less than 13 mm (1/2 inch), unless otherwise shown or specified.5.Edges of members in contact with concrete or masonry shall have a square corner caulking rebate.6.Fabricate members less than 4 m (14 feet) in length from one piece of lumber, back channeled and molded a shown.7.Interior trim and items of millwork to be painted may be fabricated from jointed, built-up, or laminated members, unless otherwise shown on drawings or specified.8.Plastic Laminate Work:a.Factory glued to either a plywood or a particle board core, thickness as shown or specified.b.Cover exposed edges with plastic laminate, except where aluminum, stainless steel, or plastic molded edge strips are shown or specified. Use plastic molded edge strips on 19 mm (3/4-inch) molded thick or thinner core material.c.Provide plastic backing sheet on underside of countertops, vanity tops including back splashes and end splashes of countertops.d.Use backing sheet on concealed large panel surface when decorative face does not occur.B.Counter or Work Tops:1.Fabrication with plastic laminate over 32 mm (1-1/4 inch) thick core unless shown otherwise.a.Use decorative laminate for exposed edges of tops 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) wide and on back splash and end splash. Use plastic or metal edges for top edges less than 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) wide.b.Use solid surfacing material not less than 50 mm (1/2 inch) thick where indicated.c.Assemble back splash and end splash to counter top. Back splash and end splashes shall be the same material as counter top.d.Use one piece counters for straight runs.d.Miter corners for field joints with overlapping blocking on underside of joint.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTSA.Maintain work areas and storage areas to a minimum temperature of 210C (700F) for not less than 10 days before and during installation of interior millwork.B.Do not install finish lumber or millwork in any room or space where wet process systems such as concrete, masonry, or plaster work is not complete and dry.3.2 INSTALLATIONA.General:1.Millwork receiving transparent or opaque finish shall be primed and back-painted on concealed surfaces. Set no millwork until primed and back-painted.2.Set nails for putty stopping. Use washers under bolt heads where no other bearing plate occurs.3.Seal cut edges of preservative and fire retardant treated wood materials with a certified acceptable sealer.4.Coordinate with plumbing and electrical work for installation of fixtures and service connections in millwork items.5.Plumb and level items unless shown otherwise.6.Nail finish at each blocking, lookout, or other nailer and intermediate points; toggle or expansion bolt in place where nails are not suitable.B.Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop.1.Align adjacent solid-surfacing material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.3.Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.4.Seal space between backsplash and wall with clear sealant specified in Division?7 Section "Joint Sealants."C.Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.1.Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.2.Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No.?10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips or No.?10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.3.3 adjusting and cleaningA.Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.B.Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.C.Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 07 21 13THERMAL INSULATIONPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTION:A.This section specifies foam-plastic board, glass-fiber blanket, and spray polyurethane foam thermal insulation for buildings.B.Acoustical insulation is identified by thickness and words "Acoustical Insulation". 1.2 RELATED WORK A.Gypsum board wall assemblies: Section 09 29 00, GYPSUM BOARD.1.3 SUBMITTALS:A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES . B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Insulation, each type used C.Certificates: Stating the type, thickness and "R" value (thermal resistance) of the insulation to be installed. 1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING:A.Store insulation materials in weathertight enclosure. B.Protect insulation from damage from handling, weather and construction operations before, during, and after installation. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):C270-08Mortar for Unit Masonry C578-08Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation C591-08Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocynurate Thermal InsulationC728-05Perlite Thermal Insulation BoardC954-07Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Base to Steel Studs From 0.033 (0.84 mm) inch to 0.112 inch (2.84 mm) in thicknessC1002-07Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel StudsPART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION – GENERAL:A.Where thermal resistance ("R" value) is specified or shown for insulation, the thickness shown on the drawings is nominal. Use only insulation with actual thickness that is not less than that required to provide the thermal resistance specified. B.Where "R" value is not specified for insulation, use the thickness shown on the drawings. C.Where more than one type of insulation is specified, the type of insulation for each use is optional, except use only one type of insulation in any particular area. D.Insulation Products shall comply with following minimum content standards for recovered materials:Material Type Percent by WeightPerlite composite board23 percent post consumer recovered paperPolyisocyanurate/polyurethaneRigid foam9 percent recovered materialFoam-in-place5 percent recovered materialGlass fiber reinforced6 percent recovered materialPhenolic rigid foam5 percent recovered materialRock wool material75 percent recovered materialThe minimum-content standards are based on the weight (not the volume)of the material in the insulating core only.2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC board INSULATION:A.Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM?E?84.B.Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM?C?1289, Type?I, Class?1, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM?E?84.C.Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.2.3 Glass-fiber blanket INSULATION:A.Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM?C?665, Type?I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM?E?84; passing ASTM?E?136 for combustion characteristics.B.Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM?C?665, Type?III (reflective faced), Class?B (faced surface with a flame-propagation resistance of 0.12?W/sq. cm); Category?1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.2.4 spray polyurethane foam INSULATION:A.Closed-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM?C?1029, Type?II, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM?E?84. Minimum density of 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu.?m), thermal resistivity of 6.2 deg?F x?h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg?F (43?K x m/W at 24 deg?C).2.5 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION:A.Mineral Fiber boards: ASTM C553, Type II, flexible, or Type III, semirigid (4.5 pound nominal density). B.Mineral Fiber Batt or Blankets: ASTM C665. Maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke development of 450 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. C.Located between framing members of interior walls, and where shown. D.Thickness: as shown on drawings. 2.6 RIGID INSULATION:A.On the inside face of exterior walls, floor joists bottom, and where shown. B.Mineral Fiber Board: ASTM C612, Type IB or 2. C.Perlite Board: ASTM C728. D.Cellular Glass Block: ASTM C552, Type I. 2.7 FASTENERS:A.Staples or Nails: ASTM F1667, zinccoated, size and type best suited for purpose. B.Screws: ASTM C954 or C1002, size and length best suited for purpose with washer not less than 50 mm (two inches) in diameter.C.Impaling Pins: Steel pins with head not less than 50 mm (two inches) in diameter with adhesive for anchorage to substrate. Provide impaling pins of length to extend beyond insulation and retain cap washer when washer is placed on the pin. 2.8 ADHESIVE:A.As recommended by the manufacturer of the insulation. 2.9 TAPE:A.Pressure sensitive adhesive on one face. B.Perm rating of not more than 0.50. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION GENERALA.Install insulation with the vapor barrier facing the heated side, unless specified otherwise. B.Install rigid insulating units with joints close and flush, in regular courses and with cross joints broken. C.Install batt or blanket insulation with tight joints and filling framing void completely. Seal cuts, tears, and unlapped joints with tape. D.Fit insulation tight against adjoining construction and penetrations, unless specified otherwise. 3.5 RIGID INSULATION ON SURFACE OF EXTERIOR WALLS:A.On the interior face of solid masonry and concrete walls and to the face of studs for interior wall finish where shown. B.Bond to solid vertical surfaces with adhesive as recommended by insulation manufacturer. Fill joints with adhesive cement. C.Use impaling pins for attachment to underside of horizontal surfaces. Space fastenings as required to hold insulation in place and prevent sagging. D.Fasten board insulation to face of studs with screws, nails or staples. Space fastenings not more than 300 mm (12 inches) apart. Stagger fasteners at joints of boards. Install at each corner. 3.7 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION:A.Fasten blanket insulation between metal studs and wall furring with continuous pressure sensitive tape along edges or adhesive. B.Do not compress insulation below required thickness except where embedded items prevent required thickness. E N D SECTION 07 31 13ASPHALT SHINGLESPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies organic felt and fiberglass asphalt shingles.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Counterflashing and flashing of roof projections: Section 07 60 00, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.1.3 SUMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Samples: Shingles, each type, color and texture.C.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:1.Shingles, each type2.Installation instructions1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGEA.Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened bundles or containers with the manufacturer's brand and name clearly marked thereon.B.Shingle bundle wrapping shall bear the label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.C.Store shingles in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Store roll goods on end in an upright position.D.Keep materials dry, covered completely and protected from the weather.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below form a part o this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):D226-06Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and WaterproofingD1970-08Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam ProtectionD2178-04Asphalt Glass Felt used in Roofing and WaterproofingD3018-03Class A Asphalt Shingles Surfaced with Mineral GranulesD3462-07Asphalt, Shingles Made from Glass Felt and Surfaced with Mineral GranulesF1667-05Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and StaplesC.Underwriter’s Laboratories Inc. (UL):UL790-04Fire Tests of Roof CoveringPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 SHINGLESA.Class A: (Fire resistive), per UL790. ASTM D3018, Type I and ASTM 3462, square butt for a maximum exposure of 125 mm (5 inches), headlap minimum 50 mm (2 inches), wind resistant, self sealing. Minimum weight: 10.3 Kg/sqm (210 lbs/100sft).B. Color, size and texture are to match existing.2.2 ROOFING NAILSA.ASTM F1667; Type I, Style 20, galvanized steel, deformed shanks, with heads 9.5 mm to 11 mm (3/8-inch to 7/16-inch) diameter.B.Use nails 32 mm (1-1/4 inches) long for shingles and 19 mm (3/4-inch long) for felt.2.3 ROOFING FELTFiberglass Felt: ASTM anic Felt: ASTM D226, TYPE l.Modified bitumen; ASTM D 1970.PART 3 EXECUTION3.1 PREPARATIONA.Roof surfaces shall be sound, reasonably smooth and free from defects which would interfere with roofing installation.B.Roof accessories, vent pipes and other projections through the roof must be in place and roof flashing installed or ready for installation before laying shingles.3.2 LAYINGA.Lay felt under shingles over entire roof.B.Install asphalt felt underlayment, lapping a minimum of 100 mm (four inches) at ends, 50 mm (2 inches) at head and 300 mm (12 inches) over ridge. Extend felt 13 mm (1/2-inch) beyond edges of roof. Nail felt 125 mm (five inches) on centers along laps.C.At eaves, install strip of 41 Kg (90 pound) mineral surface roll roofing not less than 460 mm (18 inches) wide and starter course of roof shingles with tabs reversed. Both shall overhang lower edge of roof 13 mm (1/2-inch).D.Lay shingles with maximum exposure of 125 mm (5 inches). Nail shingles in accordance with manufacturer's published directions.3.3 METAL DRIP EDGESA.At rakes, install metal drip edges made of stainless steel specified under Section 07 60 00, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. Apply the metal drip edge directly over the underlayment along the rakes.B.Secure metal drip edges with compatible nails spaced not more than 250 mm (10 inches) on center along the inner edges.3.4 FLASHINGSProvide metal flashings specified under Section 07 60 00, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL at the intersections of roofs, adjoining walls, or projections through the deck such as chimneys and vent stacks. Give careful attention to the installation of all flashings.3.5 RIDGEA.Bend each shingle lengthwise down center to provide equal exposure on each side of ridge. Beginning at one end of ridge, apply shingles with maximum 125 mm (5 inches) exposure.B.Secure each shingle with one nail on each side, 210 mm (8-1/2 inches) back from exposed end and one inch up from edge.3.6 VALLEY FLASHINGA.Install metal valley flashing shown and as specified under Section 07 60 00, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.B.Secure valley flashing in accordance with shingle manufacturer's printed instructions.C.Expose flashing in open portion of valley a minimum of 125 mm (5 inches) and lap the shingles over the flashing a minimum of 125 mm (5 inches).- - - E N D - - -SECTION 07 46 00SIDINGGENERALDESCRIPTIONThis section specifies fiber-cement siding and soffits.RELATED WORKFraming, furring blocking and sheathing: Section 06 10 00, ROUGH CARPENTRY.MANUFACTURER’S QUALIFICATIONSLabeling: Provide fiber-cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM?C?1186 by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, texture, and pattern of siding and soffit, including related accessories, from single source from single manufacturer.SUBMITTALSSubmit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.Product Data: For each type of product indicated.Samples for Initial Selection: For siding and soffit including related accessories.Samples for Verification: For each type, color, texture, and pattern required.Retain one of first two subparagraphs below.150mm (6 inch) square Sample of siding.Retain one or both subparagraphs below if required.150mm (6 inch) square Sample of soffit.DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGStore materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place.COORDINATIONCoordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing.WARRANTYSpecial Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding and soffit that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:Structural failures including cracking, deforming,?and fading.Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.Retain ",?and fading" option above and first subparagraph below if manufacturers cover fading in their warranty. If retaining, also retain one of three options below. Most vinyl siding manufacturers define fading as more than 4 Hunter units.Fading is defined as loss of color, after cleaning with product recommended by manufacturer, of more than 5 Hunter color-difference units as measured according to ASTM?D?2244.Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.PRODUCTSFIBER-CEMENT SIDINGGeneral: ASTM?C?1186, Type?A, Grade?II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM?E?136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM?E?84.See Editing Instruction No.?1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming manufacturers. Retain one of first two subparagraphs and list of manufacturers below. See Division?01 Section "Product Requirements."Horizontal Pattern: Boards 133mm (5-1/4 inches) wide in plain style.Texture: SmoothPanel Texture: 1200mm (48 inch) wide sheets with smooth texture.Factory priming is generally offered as an optional feature by manufacturers listed.Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer.FIBER-CEMENT SOFFITGeneral: ASTM?C?1186, Type?A, Grade?II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM?E?136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM?E?84.Texture: SmoothVentilation: Provide perforated soffit as indicated on drawings.Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer.ACCESSORIESSiding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner caps, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration.Flashing: Provide aluminum flashing complying with Division?07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated.Finish for Aluminum Flashing: Siliconized polyester coating, same color as siding.Fasteners:For fastening to wood, use siding nails or ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 25mm (1 inch) into substrate.For fastening fiber cement, use hot-dip galvanized fasteners.Insect Screening for Soffit Vents: Aluminum, 18-by-16 (1.4-by-1.6-mm) meshRound Soffit Vents: Stamped aluminum louvered vents, 2 inches (51 mm) in diameter, made to be inserted into round holes cut into soffit.Finish: White paintEXECUTIONINSTALLATIONGeneral: Comply with siding and soffit manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.Do not install damaged components.Center nails in elongated nailing slots without binding siding to allow for thermal movement.Install fiber-cement [siding] [and] [soffit] and related accessories.Install fasteners no more than (600 mm) 24 inches o.c.Install joint sealants as specified in Division?07 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce a weathertight installation.ADJUSTING AND CLEANINGRemove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements.Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction.SECTION 07 60 00FLASHING AND SHEET METALPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.Formed sheet metal work for wall and roof flashing, roof edge metal, fascia and drainage specialties are specified in this section.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Flashing components of factory finished roofing and wall systems: Division 07 roofing and wall system sections.B.Integral flashing components of manufactured roof specialties and accessories or equipment: Division 22, PLUMBING sections and Division 23 HVAC sections.1.3 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. Editions of applicable publications current on date of issue of bidding documents apply unless otherwise indicated.B.Aluminum Association (AA):AA-C22A41Aluminum Chemically etched medium matte, with clear anodic coating, Class I Architectural, 0.7-mil thickAA-C22A42Chemically etched medium matte, with integrally colored anodic coating, Class I Architectural, 0.7 mils thickAA-C22A44Chemically etched medium matte with electrolytically deposited metallic compound, integrally colored coating Class I Architectural, 0.7-mil thick finishC.American National Standards Institute/Single-Ply Roofing Institute (ANSI/SPRI):ANSI/SPRI ES-1-03Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems D.American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):AAMA 620Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural AluminumAAMA 621Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel SubstratesE.ASTM International (ASTM):A167-99(R2009)Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and StripA653/A653M-09Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Alloy Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot- Dip ProcessB32-08Solder MetalB209-07Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and PlateB370-09Copper Sheet and Strip for Building ConstructionD173-03Bitumen-Saturated Cotton Fabrics Used in Roofing and WaterproofingD412-06Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers-TensionD1187-97(R2002)Asphalt Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for MetalD1784-08Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) CompoundsD3656-07Insect Screening and Louver Cloth Woven from Vinyl-Coated Glass YarnsD4586-07Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos FreeF.Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.G.National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):AMP 500-06Metal Finishes ManualH.Federal Specification (Fed. Spec):A-A-1925AShield, Expansion; (Nail Anchors)UU-B-790ABuilding Paper, Vegetable FiberI.International Code Commission (ICC): International Building Code, Current Edition1.4 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Shop Drawings: For all specified items, including:1.Flashings2.Gutter and ConductorsC.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: For all specified items, including:1.Two-piece counterflashing2.Thru wall flashingD.Certificates: Indicating compliance with specified finishing requirements, from applicator and contractor.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL MATERIALSA.Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 302B, dead soft temper.B.Copper ASTM B370, cold-rolled temper.C.Bituminous Coated Copper: Minimum copper ASTM B370, weight not less than 1 kg/m? (3 oz/sf). Bituminous coating shall weigh not less than 2 kg/m? (6 oz/sf); or, copper sheets may be bonded between two layers of coarsely woven bitumen-saturated cotton fabric ASTM D173. Exposed fabric surface shall be crimped.D.Copper Covered Paper: Fabricated of electro-deposit pure copper sheets ASTM B 370, bonded with special asphalt compound to both sides of creped, reinforced building paper, UU-B-790, Type I, style 5, or to a three ply sheet of asphalt impregnated creped paper. Grooves running along the width of sheet.E.Polyethylene Coated Copper: Copper sheet ASTM B370, weighing 1 Kg/m? (3 oz/sf) bonded between two layers of (two mil) thick polyethylene sheet.F.Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy 3003-H14 //except alloy used for color anodized aluminum shall be as required to produce specified color. Alloy required to produce specified color shall have the same structural properties as alloy 3003-H14//.G.Galvanized Sheet: ASTM, A653.2.2 SHEET METAL THICKNESSA.Except as otherwise shown or specified use thickness or weight of sheet metal as follows:B.Concealed Locations (Built into Construction):1.Copper: 30g (10 oz) minimum 0.33 mm (0.013 inch thick).2.Stainless steel: 0.25 mm (0.010 inch) thick.3.Copper clad stainless steel: 0.25 mm (0.010 inch) thick.4.Galvanized steel: 0.5 mm (0.021 inch) thick.C.Exposed Locations:1.Copper: 0.4 Kg (16 oz).2.Stainless steel: 0.4 mm (0.015 inch).3.Copper clad stainless steel: 0.4 mm (0.015 inch).D.Thickness of aluminum or galvanized steel is specified with each item.2.3 FABRICATION, GENERALA.Jointing:1.In general, copper, stainless steel and copper clad stainless steel joints, except expansion and contraction joints, shall be locked and soldered.2.Jointing of copper over 0.5 Kg (20 oz) weight or stainless steel over 0.45 mm (0.018 inch) thick shall be done by lapping, riveting and soldering.3.Joints shall conform to following requirements:a.Flat-lock joints shall finish not less than 19 mm (3/4 inch) wide.b.Lap joints subject to stress shall finish not less than 25 mm (one inch) wide and shall be soldered and riveted.c.Unsoldered lap joints shall finish not less than 100 mm (4 inches) wide.4.Flat and lap joints shall be made in direction of flow.5.Edges of bituminous coated copper, copper covered paper, nonreinforced elastomeric sheeting and polyethylene coated copper shall be jointed by lapping not less than 100 mm (4 inches) in the direction of flow and cementing with asphalt roof cement or sealant as required by the manufacturer's printed instructions.6.Soldering:a.Pre tin both mating surfaces with solder for a width not less than 38 mm (1 1/2 inches) of uncoated copper, stainless steel, and copper clad stainless steel.b.Wire brush to produce a bright surface before soldering lead coated copper.c.Treat in accordance with metal producers recommendations other sheet metal required to be soldered.pletely remove acid and flux after soldering is completed.B.Drips:1.Form drips at lower edge of sheet metal counter-flashings (cap flashings), fascias, gravel stops, wall copings, by folding edge back 13 mm (1/2 inch) and bending out 45 degrees from vertical to carry water away from the wall.2.Form drip to provide hook to engage cleat or edge strip for fastening for not less than 19 mm (3/4 inch) loose lock where shown.C.Edges:1.Edges of flashings concealed in masonry joints opposite drain side shall be turned up 6 mm (1/4 inch) to form dam, unless otherwise specified or shown otherwise.2.Finish exposed edges of flashing with a 6 mm (1/4 inch) hem formed by folding edge of flashing back on itself when not hooked to edge strip or cleat. Use 6 mm (1/4 inch) minimum penetration beyond wall face with drip for through-wall flashing exposed edge.3.All metal roof edges shall meet requirements of IBC, current edition.2.4 THROUGH-WALL FLASHINGSA.Form through-wall flashing to provide a mechanical bond or key against lateral movement in all directions. Install a sheet having 2 mm (1/16 inch) deep transverse channels spaced four to every 25 mm (one inch), or ribbed diagonal pattern, or having other deformation unless specified otherwise.1.Fabricate in not less than 2400 mm (8 feet) lengths; 3000 mm (10 feet) maximum lengths.2.Fabricate so keying nests at overlaps.B.For Masonry Work When Concealed Except for Drip:1.Either copper, stainless steel, or copper clad stainless steel.2.Form an integral dam at least 5 mm (3/16 inch) high at back edge.3.Form exposed portions of flashing with drip, approximately 6 mm (1/4 inch) projection beyond wall face.C.Window Sill Flashing and Lintel Flashing:1.Use either copper, stainless steel, copper clad stainless steel plane flat sheet, or nonreinforced elastomeric sheeting, bituminous coated copper, copper covered paper, or polyethylene coated copper.2.Fabricate flashing at ends with folded corners to turn up 5 mm (3/16 inch) in first vertical masonry joint beyond masonry opening.3.Turn up back edge as shown.4.Form exposed portion with drip as specified or receiver.2.5 HANGING GUTTERSA.Fabricate gutters of not less than the following:1.0.5Kg (20oz) copper..2.0.6mm (0.025 inch) thick stainless steel.. 3.0.8mm (0.032 inch) thick aluminum..B.Fabricate hanging gutters in sections not less than 2400 mm (8 feet) long, except at ends of runs where shorter lengths are required.C.Building side of gutter shall be not less than 38 mm (1 1/2 inches) higher than exterior side.D.Gutter Bead: Stiffen outer edge of gutter by folding edge over approximately 19 mm (3/4 inch) toward roof and down approximately19 mm (3/4 inch) unless shown otherwise.E.Gutter Spacers:1.Fabricate of same material and thickness as gutter.2.Fabricate 25 mm (one inch) wide strap and fasten to gutters not over 900 mm (36 inches) on center.3.Turn back edge up 25 mm (one inch) and lap front edge over gutter bead.4.Rivet and solder to gutter except rivet and seal to aluminum.F.Outlet Tubes:1.Form outlet tubes to connect gutters to conductors of same metal and thickness as gutters extend into the conductor 75 mm (3 inch). Flange upper end of outlet tube 13 mm (1/2 inch).2.Lock and solder longitudinal seam //except use sealant in lieu of solder with aluminum//.3.//Solder tube to gutter.//Seal aluminum tube to gutter and rivet to gutter.4.Fabricate basket strainers of same material as gutters.G.Gutter Brackets:Fabricate of same metal as gutter. Use the following:a.3 by 25 mm (1/8 by 1 inch) or 6 by 25 mm (1/4 by 1 inch) copper.b.3 by 25 mm (1/8 by 1 inch) or 3 by 40 mm (1/8 by 1 1/2 inch) stainless steel.c.5 by 25 mm (3/16 by 1 inch) or 6 by 25 mm (1/4 by 1 inch) aluminum.2.Fabricate to gutter profile.3.Drill two 5 mm (3/16 inch) diameter holes in anchor leg for countersunk flat head screws.2.6 CONDUCTORS (DOWNSPOUTS)A.Fabricate conductors of same metal and thickness as gutters in sections approximately 3000 mm (10 feet) long [with 19 mm (3/4 inch) wide flat locked seams].1.Fabricate open face channel shape with hemmed longitudinal edges.B.Fabricate elbows by mitering, riveting, and soldering except seal aluminum in lieu of solder. Lap upper section to the inside of the lower piece.C.Fabricate conductor brackets or hangers of same material as conductor, 2 mm (1/16 inch) thick by 25 mm (one inch) minimum width. Form to support conductors 25 mm (one inch) from wall surface in accordance with Architectural Sheet Metal Manual Plate 34, Design C for rectangular shapes and E for round shapes.D.Conductor Heads:1.Fabricate of same material as conductor.2.Fabricate conductor heads to not less than 250 mm (10 inch) wide by 200 mm (8 inch) deep by 200 mm (8 inches) from front to back.3.Form front and side edges channel shape not less than 13 mm (1/2 inch) wide flanges with edge hemmed.4.Slope bottom to sleeve to conductor or downspout at not less than 60 degree angle.5.Extend wall edge not less than 25 mm (one inch) above front edge.6.Solder joints for water tight assembly.7.Fabricate outlet tube or sleeve at bottom not less than 50 mm (2 inches) long to insert into conductor.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.General:1.Install flashing and sheet metal items as shown in Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc., publication, ARCHITECTURAL SHEET METAL MANUAL, except as otherwise shown or specified.2.Apply Sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.3.Apply sheet metal and other flashing material to surfaces which are smooth, sound, clean, dry and free from defects that might affect the application.4.Remove projections which would puncture the materials and fill holes and depressions with material compatible with the substrate. Cover holes or cracks in wood wider than 6 mm (1/4 inch) with sheet metal compatible with the roofing and flashing material used.5.Coordinate with masonry work for the application of a skim coat of mortar to surfaces of unit masonry to receive flashing material before the application of flashing.6.Apply a layer of 7 Kg (15 pound) saturated felt followed by a layer of rosin paper to wood surfaces to be covered with copper. Lap each ply 50 mm (2 inch) with the slope and nail with large headed copper nails.7.Confine direct nailing of sheet metal to strips 300 mm (12 inch) or less wide. Nail flashing along one edge only. Space nail not over 100 mm (4 inches) on center unless specified otherwise.8.Install bolts, rivets, and screws where indicated, specified, or required in accordance with the SMACNA Sheet Metal Manual. Space rivets at 75 mm (3 inch) on centers in two rows in a staggered position. Use neoprene washers under fastener heads when fastener head is exposed.9.Coordinate with roofing work for the installation of metal base flashings and other metal items having roof flanges for anchorage and watertight installation.10.Nail continuous cleats on 75 mm (3 inch) on centers in two rows in a staggered position.11.Nail individual cleats with two nails and bend end tab over nail heads. Lock other end of cleat into hemmed edge.12.Install flashings in conjunction with other trades so that flashings are inserted in other materials and joined together to provide a water tight installation.13.Where required to prevent galvanic action between dissimilar metal isolate the contact areas of dissimilar metal with sheet lead, waterproof building paper, or a coat of bituminous paint.14.Isolate aluminum in contact with dissimilar metals others than stainless steel, white bronze or other metal compatible with aluminum by:a.Paint dissimilar metal with a prime coat of zinc-chromate or other suitable primer, followed by two coats of aluminum paint.b.Paint dissimilar metal with a coat of bituminous paint.c.Apply an approved caulking material between aluminum and dissimilar metal.15.Paint aluminum in contact with or built into mortar, concrete, plaster, or other masonry materials with a coat of bituminous paint.16.Paint aluminum in contact with absorptive materials that may become repeatedly wet with two coats of bituminous paint or two coats of aluminum paint.17.Bitumen Stops:a.Install bitumen stops for built-up roof opening penetrations through deck and at formed sheet metal gravel stops.b.Nail leg of bitumen stop at 300 mm (12 inch) intervals to nailing strip at roof edge before roofing material is installed.3.2 THROUGH-WALL FLASHINGA.General:1.Install continuous through-wall flashing between top of concrete foundation walls and bottom of masonry building walls; at top of concrete floors; under masonry, concrete, or stone copings and elsewhere as shown.2.Where exposed portions are used as a counterflashings, lap base flashings at least 100 mm (4 inches) and use thickness of metal as specified for exposed locations.3.Exposed edge of flashing may be formed as a receiver for two piece counter flashing as specified.4.Terminate exterior edge beyond face of wall approximately 6 mm (1/4 inch) with drip edge where not part of counter flashing.5.Turn back edge up 6 mm (1/4 inch) unless noted otherwise where flashing terminates in mortar joint or hollow masonry unit joint.6.Terminate interior raised edge in masonry backup unit approximately 38 mm (1 1/2 inch) into unit unless shown otherwise.7.Under copings terminate both edges beyond face of wall approximately 6 mm (1/4 inch) with drip edge.8.Lap end joints at least two corrugations, but not less than 100 mm (4 inches). Seal laps with sealant.9.Where dowels, reinforcing bars and fastening devices penetrate flashing, seal penetration with sealing compound. Sealing compound is specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.10.Coordinate with other work to set in a bed of mortar above and below flashing so that total thickness of the two layers of mortar and flashing are same as regular mortar joint.11.Where ends of flashing terminate turn ends up 25 mm (1 inch) and fold corners to form dam extending to wall face in vertical mortar or veneer joint.12.Turn flashing up not less than 200 mm (8 inch) between masonry or behind exterior veneer.13.When flashing terminates in reglet extend flashing full depth into reglet and secure with lead or plastic wedges spaced 150 mm (6 inch) on center.B.Flashing at Top of Concrete Foundation Walls Where concrete is exposed. Turn up not less than 200 mm (8 inch) high and into masonry backup mortar joint or reglet in concrete backup as specified.C.Flashing at Cavity Wall Construction: Where flashing occurs in cavity walls turn vertical portion up against backup under waterproofing, if any, into mortar joint. Turn up over insulation, if any, and horizontally through insulation into mortar joint.D.Window Sill Flashing:1.Install flashing to extend not less than 100 mm (4 inch) beyond ends of sill into vertical joint of masonry or veneer.2.Turn back edge up to terminate under window frame.3.Turn ends up 25 mm (one inch) and fold corners to form dam and extend to face of wall.3.3 HANGING GUTTERSA.Hang gutters with high points equidistant from downspouts. Slope at not less than 1:200 (1/16 inch per foot).B.Lap joints, except for expansion joints, at least 25 mm (one inch) in the direction of flow. Rivet and seal or solder lapped joints.C.Support gutters in brackets spaced not more than 600 mm (24 inch) on centers, brackets attached to facial or wood nailer by at least two screws or nails.1.For copper or copper clad stainless steel gutters use brass or bronze brackets.2.For stainless steel gutters use stainless steel brackets.3.For aluminum gutters use aluminum brackets or stainless steel brackets.4.Use brass or stainless steel screws.D.Secure brackets to gutters in such a manner as to allow free movement of gutter due to expansion and contraction.E.Gutter Expansion Joint:1.Locate expansion joints midway between outlet tubes.2.Provide at least a 25 mm (one inch) expansion joint space between end baffles of gutters.3.Install a cover plate over the space at expansion joint.4.Fasten cover plates to gutter section on one side of expansion joint only.5.Secure loose end of cover plate to gutter section on other side of expansion joint by a loose-locked slip joint.F.Outlet Tubes: Set bracket strainers loosely into gutter outlet tubes.3.4 CONDUCTORS (DOWNSPOUTS)A.Where scuppers discharge into downspouts install conductor head to receive discharge with back edge up behind drip edge of scupper. Fasten and seal joint. Sleeve conductors to gutter outlet tubes and fasten joint and joints between sections.B.Set conductors plumb and clear of wall, and anchor to wall with two anchor straps, located near top and bottom of each section of conductor. Strap at top shall be fixed to downspout, intermediate straps and strap at bottom shall be slotted to allow not less than 13 mm (1/2 inch) movement for each 3000 mm (10 feet) of downspout.C.Install elbows, offsets and shoes where shown and required. Slope not less than 45 degrees.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 07 84 00FIRESTOPPINGPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.Closures of openings in walls, floors, and roof decks against penetration of flame, heat, and smoke or gases in fire resistant rated construction.B.Closure of openings in walls against penetration of gases or smoke in smoke partitions.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Sealants and application: Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturers literature, data, and installation instructions for types of firestopping and smoke stopping used.C.List of FM, UL, or WH classification number of systems installed.D.Certified laboratory test reports for ASTM E814 tests for systems not listed by FM, UL, or WH proposed for use.E.Submit shop drawings that indicate fire-ratings for each location that firestopping is to be installed.1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGEA.Deliver materials in their original unopened containers with manufacturer’s name and product identification. B.Store in a location providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements.1.5 warrantyA.Firestopping work subject to the terms of the Article “Warranty of Construction”, FAR clause 52.246-21, except extend the warranty period to five years.1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCEA.FM, UL, or WH or other approved laboratory tested products will be acceptable.1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):E84-10Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsE814-11Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire StopsC.Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM):Annual Issue Approval Guide Building MaterialsD.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):Annual Issue Building Materials DirectoryAnnual Issue Fire Resistance Directory1479-10Fire Tests of Through-Penetration FirestopsE.Warnock Hersey (WH):Annual Issue Certification ListingsPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 FIRESTOP SYSTEMSA.Use either factory built (Firestop Devices) or field erected (through-Penetration Firestop Systems) to form a specific building system maintaining required integrity of the fire barrier and stop the passage of gases or smoke.B.Through-penetration firestop systems and firestop devices tested in accordance with ASTM E814 or UL 1479 using the "F" or "T" rating to maintain the same rating and integrity as the fire barrier being sealed. "T" ratings are not required for penetrations smaller than or equal to 100 mm (4 in) nominal pipe or 0.01 m2 (16 sq. in.) in overall cross sectional area.C.Products requiring heat activation to seal an opening by its intumescence shall exhibit a demonstrated ability to function as designed to maintain the fire barrier.D.Firestop sealants used for firestopping or smoke sealing shall have following properties:1.Contain no flammable or toxic solvents.2.Have no dangerous or flammable out gassing during the drying or curing of products.3.Water-resistant after drying or curing and unaffected by high humidity, condensation or transient water exposure.4.When used in exposed areas, shall be capable of being sanded and finished with similar surface treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor surface. E.Firestopping system or devices used for penetrations by glass pipe, plastic pipe or conduits, unenclosed cables, or other non-metallic materials shall have following properties:1.Classified for use with the particular type of penetrating material used.2.Penetrations containing loose electrical cables, computer data cables, and communications cables protected using firestopping systems that allow unrestricted cable changes without damage to the seal.3.Intumescent products which would expand to seal the opening and act as fire, smoke, toxic fumes, and, water sealant.F.Maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke development of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.G.FM, UL, or WH rated or tested by an approved laboratory in accordance with ASTM E814.H.Materials to be asbestos free.2.2 SMOKE STOPPING IN SMOKE PARTITIONSA.Use silicone sealant in smoke partitions as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS. B.Use mineral fiber filler and bond breaker behind sealant.C.Sealants shall have a maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50 when tested in accordance with E84.D.When used in exposed areas capable of being sanded and finished with similar surface treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor surface.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 EXAMINATIONA.Submit product data and installation instructions, as required by article, submittals, after an on site examination of areas to receive firestopping.3.2 PREPARATIONA.Remove dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, or other substances that prevent adherence and bonding or application of the firestopping or smoke stopping materials.B.Remove insulation on insulated pipe for a distance of 150 mm (six inches) on either side of the fire rated assembly prior to applying the firestopping materials unless the firestopping materials are tested and approved for use on insulated pipes.3.3 INSTALLATIONA.Install firestopping in the following locations:1.New openings created in order to accommodate new penetrations through new or existing construction.B.Do not begin work until the specified material data and installation instructions of the proposed firestopping systems have been submitted and approved.C.Install firestopping systems with smoke stopping in accordance with FM, UL, WH, or other approved system details and installation instructions.D.Install smoke stopping seals in smoke partitions.3.4 CLEAN-UP AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORKA.As work on each floor is completed, remove materials, litter, and debris.B.Do not move materials and equipment to the next-scheduled work area until completed work is inspected and accepted by the COTR.C.Clean up spills of liquid type materials.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 07 92 00JOINT SEALANTSPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTION:A.Section covers all sealant and caulking materials and their application, wherever required for complete installation of building materials or systems.1.2 RELATED WORK:A.Firestopping penetrations: Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.B.Sound rated gypsum partitions/sound sealants: Section 09 29 00, GYPSUM BOARD.C.Plumbing: Division 22.D.Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning: Division 23.E.Electrical: Division 26. 1.3 QUALITY CONTROL:A.Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.B.Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.C.VOC: Acrylic latex and Silicon sealants shall have less than 50g/l VOC content.1.4 SUBMITTALS:A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's installation instructions for each product used.C.Cured samples of exposed sealants for each color where required to match adjacent material.D.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Caulking compound 2.Primers 3.Sealing compound, each type, including compatibility when different sealants are in contact with each other.1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS:A.Environmental Limitations: 1.Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 5 C (40 F) or when joint substrates are wet.B.Joint-Width Conditions:1.Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.C.Joint-Substrate Conditions:1.Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE:A.Deliver materials in manufacturers' original unopened containers, with brand names, date of manufacture, shelf life, and material designation clearly marked thereon.B.Carefully handle and store to prevent inclusion of foreign materials.C.Do not subject to sustained temperatures exceeding 32 C (90 F) or less than 5 C (40 F).1.7 DEFINITIONS:A.Definitions of terms in accordance with ASTM C717 and as specified.B.Backup Rod: A type of sealant backing.C.Bond Breakers: A type of sealant backing.D.Filler: A sealant backing used behind a back-up rod.1.8 warranty:A.Warranty against adhesion, and cohesive failure, and subject to terms of "Warranty of Construction", FAR clause 52.246-21, except that warranty period shall be extended to two years.B.General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Government of other rights Government may have under other provisions of Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of Contract Documents.1.9 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:A.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):C612-10Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. C717-10Standard Terminology of Building Seals and Sealants.C834-10Latex Sealants.C919-08.Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.C920-10Elastomeric Joint Sealants.C1193-09Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.C1330-02 (R2007)Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid Applied Sealants.D1056-07Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials—Sponge or Expanded Rubber.C.Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute (SWRI). The Professionals’ GuidePART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALANTS:A.S-1(plumbing fixtures and millwork): 1.ASTM C920 silicone. 2.Type S. 3.Class 25. 4.Grade NS. 5.Shore A hardness of 25-30. 6.Non-yellowing, mildew resistant.7.Color:a.Plumbing fixtures: White.b.Millwork: Clear.2.3 COLOR:A.Color of sealants for other locations shall be light gray or aluminum, unless specified otherwise.2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING:A.General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.B.Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:1.Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin.C.Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 32 C (minus 26 F). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.D.Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.2.5 FILLER:A.Mineral fiber board: ASTM C612, Class 1.B.Thickness same as joint width.C.Depth to fill void completely behind back-up rod. 2.6 PRIMER:A.As recommended by manufacturer of caulking or sealant material. B.Stain free type.2.7 CLEANERS-NON POUROUS SURFACES:A.seq level0 \h \r0 seq level1 \h \r0 seq level2 \h \r0 seq level3 \h \r0 seq level4 \h \r0 seq level5 \h \r0 seq level6 \h \r0 seq level7 \h \r0 Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturer of sealants and sealant backing material, free of oily residues and other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent non-porous surfaces and formulated to promote adhesion of sealant and substrates.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSPECTION:A.Inspect substrate surface for bond breaker contamination and unsound materials at adherent faces of sealant.B.Coordinate for repair and resolution of unsound substrate materials. C.Inspect for uniform joint widths and that dimensions are within tolerance established by sealant manufacturer.3.2 PREPARATIONS:A.Prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and SWRI.B.Clean surfaces of joint to receive caulking or sealants leaving joint dry to the touch, free from frost, moisture, grease, oil, wax, lacquer paint, or other foreign matter that would tend to destroy or impair adhesion.1.Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. 2.Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following:a.Concrete.b.Masonry.c.Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.3.Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.4.Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.a.Metal.b.Glass.c.Porcelain enamel.d.Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.C.Do not cut or damage joint edges.D.Apply masking tape to face of surfaces adjacent to joints before applying primers, caulking, or sealing compounds.1.Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.2.Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.3.Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.E.Apply primer to sides of joints wherever required by compound manufacturer's printed instructions. 1.Apply primer prior to installation of back-up rod or bond breaker tape. 2.Use brush or other approved means that will reach all parts of joints.F.Take all necessary steps to prevent three sided adhesion of sealants.3.3 BACKING INSTALLATION:A.Install back-up material, to form joints enclosed on three sides as required for specified depth of sealant.B.Where deep joints occur, install filler to fill space behind the back-up rod and position the rod at proper depth.C.Cut fillers installed by others to proper depth for installation of back-up rod and sealants.D.Install back-up rod, without puncturing the material, to a uniform depth, within plus or minus 3 mm (1/8 inch) for sealant depths specified.E.Where space for back-up rod does not exist, install bond breaker tape strip at bottom (or back) of joint so sealant bonds only to two opposing surfaces.F.Take all necessary steps to prevent three sided adhesion of sealants.3.4 SEALANT DEPTHS AND GEOMETRY:A.At widths up to 6 mm (1/4 inch), sealant depth equal to width.B.At widths over 6 mm (1/4 inch), sealant depth 1/2 of width up to 13 mm (1/2 inch) maximum depth at center of joint with sealant thickness at center of joint approximately 1/2 of depth at adhesion surface.3.5 INSTALLATION:A.General: 1.Apply sealants and caulking only when ambient temperature is between 5 C and 38 C (40 and 100 F). 2.Do not use polysulfide base sealants where sealant may be exposed to fumes from bituminous materials, or where water vapor in continuous contact with cementitious materials may be present. 3.Do not use sealant type listed by manufacture as not suitable for use in locations specified. 4.Apply caulking and sealing compound in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 5.Avoid dropping or smearing compound on adjacent surfaces. 6.Fill joints solidly with compound and finish compound smooth. 7.Tool joints to concave surface unless shown or specified otherwise. 8.Apply compounds with nozzle size to fit joint width. 9.Test sealants for compatibility with each other and substrate. Use only compatible sealant. B.For application of sealants, follow requirements of ASTM C1193 unless specified otherwise. C.Where gypsum board partitions are of sound rated, fire rated, or smoke barrier construction, follow requirements of ASTM C919 only to seal all cut-outs and intersections with the adjoining construction unless specified otherwise. 1.Apply a 6 mm (1/4 inch) minimum bead of sealant each side of runners (tracks), including those used at partition intersections with dissimilar wall construction.2.Coordinate with application of gypsum board to install sealant immediately prior to application of gypsum board.3.Partition intersections: Seal edges of face layer of gypsum board abutting intersecting partitions, before taping and finishing or application of veneer plaster-joint reinforcing. 4.Openings: Apply a 6 mm (1/4 inch) bead of sealant around all cut-outs to seal openings of electrical boxes, ducts, pipes and similar penetrations. To seal electrical boxes, seal sides and backs. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:A.Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements.3.7 CLEANING:A.Fresh compound accidentally smeared on adjoining surfaces: Scrape off immediately and rub clean with a solvent as recommended by the caulking or sealant manufacturer.B.After filling and finishing joints, remove masking tape.C.Leave adjacent surfaces in a clean and unstained condition. E N D SECTION 08 11 13HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMESPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies steel doors, steel frames and related components.B.Terms relating to steel doors and frames as defined in ANSI A123.1 and as specified.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Solid Core Wood Doors: Section 08 14 00, INTERIOR WOOD DOORSF.Door Hardware: Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE.G.Glazing: Section 08 80 00, GLAZING.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Hollow metal frame submittals will be reviewed concurrently with door hardware, wood door, and automatic door operator submittals. Review will not begin until all submittals have been received and are determined to be complete.C.Manufacturers Literature and Data: Complete description of frames, materials, construction, physical characteristics for fire rated doors and frames, showing conformance with NFPA 80 and Underwriters Laboratory, Inc., or Intertek Testing Services or Factory Mutual fire rating requirements.D.Hollow Metal Schedule: Indicate opening number/location, size, thickness, profile, rating, installation and anchorage details, and swing.1.4 SHIPMENT A.Prior to shipment label each door and frame to show location, size, door swing and other pertinent information.B.Fasten temporary steel spreaders across the bottom of each door frame.1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLINGA.Store doors and frames at the site under cover. B.Protect from rust and damage during storage and erection until completion.1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.Steel Door Institute (SDI):A250.8-03Standard Steel Doors and FramesC.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A1008-08Steel, sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High Strength Low Alloy and High Strength Low Alloy with Improved FormabilityD.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 8009Fire Doors and Fire WindowsE.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Fire Resistance Directory Latest EditionF.Intertek Testing Services (ITS): Certifications Listings…Latest EditionG.Factory Mutual System (FM): Approval Guide Latest EditionPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALSA.Sheet Steel: ASTM A1008, coldrolled for panels (face sheets) of doors.B.Door Construction: Heavy duty, SDI A250.8, Level 2, Model 2 of size and design shown. Unitized steel grid core construction. Galvanized cold rolled face sheets; galvanized stiles, tops and bottoms.C.Fabrication: 1.Follow SDI A250.8 for fabrication of standard steel doors, except as specified otherwise. Doors to receive hardware specified in Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE. Tolerances as per SDI A250.8. Thickness, 44 mm (1-3/4 inches), unless otherwise shown.2.Close top edge of exterior doors flush and seal to prevent water intrusion.3.When vertical steel stiffeners are used for core construction, fill spaces between stiffeners with mineral fiber insulation.D.Anchors, Fastenings and Accessories: Fastenings anchors, clips connecting members and sleeves from zinc coated steel. E.Prime Paint: Paint that meets or exceeds the requirements of A250.8. 2.2 METAL FRAMES A.General: 1.Thickness:ply with SDI A250.8, type and style as indicated.b.Frames for manually operated doors: 1.52 mm (0.060 inch, 16 ga.) thick sheet steel.c.Frames for power operated doors: 1.9 mm (0.075 inch, 14 ga.) thick sheet steel.2.Frames for exterior doors: Fabricate from 1.7 mm (0.067 inch) thick galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A525.3.Frames for labeled fire rated doors and windows.ply with NFPA 80. Test by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Intertek Testing Services, or Factory Mutual or other independent testing service acceptable to the Contracting Officer.b.Fire rated labels of approving laboratory permanently attached to frames as evidence of conformance with these requirements. Provide labels of metal or engraved stamp, with raised or incised markings.4.Knockeddown frames are not acceptable. B.Reinforcement and Covers: 1.SDI A250.8 for, minimum thickness of steel reinforcement welded to back of frames.2.Provide mortar guards securely fastened to back of hardware reinforcements. C.Terminated Stops: Provide terminated stops on door frames that do not have fire rating and are not installed in smoke barrier. Comply with SDI A250.8.F.Frame Anchors: 1.Floor anchors: a.At bottom of jamb use 1.3 mm (0.053 inch) thick steel clip angles welded to jamb and drilled to receive two 6 mm (1/4 inch) floor bolts. Use 50 mm x 50 mm (2 inch by 2 inch) 9 mm by (3/8 inch) clip angle for lead lined frames, drilled for 9 mm (3/8 inch) floor bolts. b.Where mullions occur, provide 2.3 mm (0.093 inch) thick steel channel anchors, drilled for two 6 mm (1/4 inch) floor bolts and frame anchor screws. 2.Jamb anchors: a.Locate anchors on jambs near top and bottom of each frame, and at intermediate points not over 600 mm (24 inches) apart, except for fire rated frames space anchors as required by labeling authority. b.Form jamb anchors of not less than 1 mm (0.042 inch) thick steel unless otherwise specified. c.Anchors set in masonry: Use adjustable anchors designed for friction fit against the frame and for extension into the masonry not less than 250 mm (10 inches). Use one of following type: 1)Wire loop type of 5 mm (3/16 inch) diameter wire. 2)Tshape or strap and stirrup type of corrugated or perforated sheet steel. d.Anchors for stud partitions: Either weld to frame or use lockin snapin type. Provide tabs for securing anchor to the sides of the studs.e.Anchors for frames set in prepared openings: 1)Steel pipe spacers with 6 mm (1/4 inch) inside diameter welded to plate reinforcing at jamb stops or hat shaped formed strap spacers, 50 mm (2 inches) wide, welded to jamb near stop. 2)Drill jamb stop and strap spacers for 6 mm (1/4 inch) flat head bolts to pass thru frame and spacers. 3)Two piece frames: Subframe or rough buck drilled for 6 mm (1/4 inch) bolts. f.Anchors for observation windows and other continuous frames set in stud partitions. 1)In addition to jamb anchors, weld clip anchors to sills and heads of continuous frames over 1200 mm (4 feet) long. 2)Anchors spaced 600 mm (24 inches) on centers maximum. g.Modify frame anchors to fit special frame and wall construction and provide special anchors where shown or required. 2.6 SHOP PrimingA.Shop prime hollow metal frames so that they are ready for field painting. Comply with SDI A250.8. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Plumb, align and brace frames securely until permanent anchors are set. 1.Use triangular bracing near each corner on both sides of frames with temporary wood spreaders at midpoint. 2.Use wood or metal spreaders at bottom of frame if the shipping spreader is removed. 3.Protect frame from accidental damage and abuse. 4.Where construction will permit concealment, leave the shipping spreaders in place after installation, otherwise remove the spreaders after the frames are set and anchored. 5.Remove spreaders and braces only after the walls are built and jamb anchors are secured. B.Floor Anchors: 1.Anchor the bottom of door frames to floor with two 6 mm (1/4 inch) diameter expansion bolts.C.Jamb Anchors: 1.Secure anchors to sides of studs with two fasteners through anchor tabs. Use steel drill screws to steel studs. 2.Coat frame back with a bituminous coating prior to lining of grout filling in masonry walls.3.Secure anchors to sides of studs with two fasteners through anchor tabs. Use steel drill screws to steel studs. 4.Frames set in prepared openings of masonry or concrete: Expansion bolt to wall with 6 mm (1/4 inch) expansion bolts through spacers. Where subframes or rough bucks are used, 6 mm (1/4 inch) expansion bolts on 600 mm (24 inch) centers or power activated drive pins 600 mm (24 inches) on centers. Secure two piece frames to subframe or rough buck with machine screws on both faces. D.Install anchors for labeled fire rated doors to provide rating as required.3.2 INSTALLATION OF DOORS AND APPLICATION OF HARDWAREA.Install doors and hardware as specified in Sections 08 14 00, WOOD DOORS and 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE. E N D SECTION 08 14 00Interior WOOD DOORSPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies interior flush doors with prefinish, prefit option.B.Section also includes fire rated doors.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Metal door frames: Section 08 11 13, HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES.B.Door hardware including hardware location (height): Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE.C.Glazing: Section 08 80 00, GLAZING.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B.Wood door submittals will be reviewed concurrently with hollow metal frame, door hardware, and automatic door operator submittals. Review will not begin until all submittals have been received and are determined to be complete.C.Samples: Veneer sample 200 mm (8 inch) by 275 mm (11 inch) by 6 mm (1/4 inch) showing specified wood species sanded to receive a transparent finish. Factory finish veneer sample where the prefinished option is accepted. C.Shop Drawings:1.Show every door in project and schedule location in building.2.Indicate type, grade, finish and size; include detail of glazing, fire rating and pertinent details.3.Provide information concerning specific requirements not included in the manufacturer's literature and data submittal.D.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:1.Full description of door construction, materials, and installation requirements. Identify referenced standards.2.Labeled fire rated doors showing conformance with NFPA 80. 3.Warranty.E.Laboratory Test Reports:1.Screw holding capacity test report in accordance with WDMA T.M.10.2.Split resistance test report in accordance with WDMA T.M.5.3.Cycle/Slam test report in accordance with WDMA T.M.7.4.Hinge-Loading test report in accordance with WDMA T.M.8.1.4 WarrantyA.Doors are subject to terms of Article titled “Warranty of Construction”, FAR clause 52.246-21, except that warranty shall be as follows:1.For interior doors, manufacturer’s warranty for lifetime of original installation.1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGEA.Factory seal doors and accessories in minimum of 6 mill polyethylene bags or cardboard packages which shall remain unbroken during delivery and storage.B.Store in accordance with WDMA I.S.1-A, J-1 Job Site Information.C.Label package for door opening where used.1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSPublications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.B.Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA):I.S.1-A-04Architectural Wood Flush DoorsT.M.5-90Split Resistance Test Method T.M.7-08Cycle-Slam Test MethodT.M.8-08Hinge Loading Test MethodT.M.10-08Screwholding Test MethodC.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):80-07Protection of Buildings from Exterior Fire252-08Fire Tests of Door AssembliesPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 FLUSH DOORSA.General:1.Meet requirements of WDMA I.S.1-A, Extra Heavy Duty.2.Adhesive: Type II3.Thickness: 45 mm (1-3/4 inches) unless otherwise shown or specified.4.Core Type: Particle or staved lumber with internal blocking as required for hardware. B.Face Veneer:1.In accordance with WDMA I.S.1-A.2.Match Architect-Engineer’s sample.3.Species and Grade: Premium Grade, quarter sawn, white Birch.a.AA grade face veneer b.Match face veneers for doors for uniform effect of color and grain at joints.c.Door edges shall be same species as door face veneer.4.Factory finish doors with clear, transparent finish over stain.C.Wood for stops and moldings of flush doors required to have transparent finish:1.Solid Wood of same species as face veneer, except maple may be used on birch doors.2.Glazing:a.On non-labeled doors use applied wood stops nailed tight on room side and attached on opposite side with flathead, countersunk wood screws, spaced approximately 125 mm (5 inches) on centers.b.Use stainless steel or dull chrome plated brass screws for exterior doors. D.Fire rated wood doors:1.Fire Performance Rating:a.“B” label, 1-1/2 hours.b.“C” label, 3/4 hour.2.Labels:a.Doors shall conform to the requirements of ASTM E2074, or NFPA 252, and, carry an identifying label from a qualified testing and inspection agency for class of door or opening shown designating fire performance rating.b.Metal labels with raised or incised markings. 3.Performance Criteria for Stiles of doors utilizing standard mortise leaf hinges:a.Hinge Loading: WDMA T.M.8. Average of 10 test samples for Extra Heavy Duty doors.b.Direct screw withdrawal: WDMA T.M.10 for Extra Heavy Duty doors. Average of 10 test samples using a steel, fully threaded #12 wood screw.c.Cycle Slam: 1,000,000 cycles with no loose hinge screws or other visible signs of failure when tested in accordance with WDMA T.M.7.4.Additional Hardware Reinforcement:a.Provide fire rated doors with hardware reinforcement blocking.b.Size of lock blocks as required to secure hardware specified., bottom and intermediate rail blocks shall measure not less than 125 mm (five inches) minimum by full core width.d.Reinforcement blocking in compliance with manufacturer's labeling requirements.e.Mineral material similar to core is not acceptable.5.Other Core Components: Manufacturer's standard as allowed by the labeling requirements.6.Provide steel frame approved for use in labeled doors for vision panels.E.Fire Rated and Smoke Barrier Doors:1.For glazed openings use steel frames approved for use in labeled doors.2.Provide a steel astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors, including double egress doors. 2.2 factory FINISH and FITA.Flush doors may be factory machined to receive hardware, bevels, undercuts, cutouts, accessories and fitting for frame.B.Factory fitting to conform to specification for shop and field fitting, including factory application of sealer to edge and routings.C.Flush doors to receive transparent finish (in addition to being prefit) shall be factory finished as follows: 1.WDMA I.S.1-A System TR-6, catalyzed polyurethane, premium grade.2.Use stain when required to produce finish that matches VT Industries Architectural Wood Doors’ White Birch Veneer with Oasis finish, OA07.2.4 IDENTIFICATION MARK:A.On top edge of door.B.Either a stamp, brand or other indelible mark, giving manufacturer’s name, door’s trade name, construction of door, code date of manufacture and quality.C.Accompanied by either of the following additional requirements:1.An identification mark or a separate certification including name of inspection organization.2.Identification of standards for door, including glue type.2.5 SEALING:A.Give top and bottom edge of doors two coats of catalyzed polyurethane or water resistant sealer before sealing in shipping containers.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 DOOR PREPARATIONA.Do not violate the qualified testing and inspection agency label requirements for fire rated doors.B.Clearances between Doors and Frames and Floors: Maximum 3 mm (1/8 inch) clearance at the jambs, heads, and meeting stiles, and a 19 mm (3/4 inch) clearance at bottom, except as otherwise specified.C.Provide cutouts for special details required and specified.D.Rout doors for hardware using templates and location heights specified in Section, 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE.E.Fit doors to frame, bevel lock edge of doors 3 mm (1/8 inch) for each 50 mm (two inches) of door thickness and undercut where shown. F.Immediately after fitting and cutting of doors for hardware, seal cut edges of doors with two coats of water resistant sealer.G.Finish surfaces, including both faces, top and bottom and edges of the doors smooth to touch.H.Apply a steel astragal on the opposite side of active door on pairs of fire rated doors.I.Apply a steel astragal to meeting style of active leaf of pair of doors or double egress smoke doors.3.2 INSTALLATION OF DOORS APPLICATION OF HARDWAREInstall doors and hardware as specified in this Section.3.3 DOOR PROTECTIONA.As door installation is completed, place polyethylene bag or cardboard shipping container over door and tape in place.B.Provide protective covering over knobs and handles in addition to covering door. - - - E N D - - -SECTION 08 31 13ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMESPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTION:A.Section specifies access doors or panels.1.2 RELATED WORK:A.Gypsum Board Ceilings: Section 09 29 00, GYPSUM BOARD.1.3 SUBMITTALS:A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Shop Drawings: Access doors, each type, showing construction, location, size, and installation details.C.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Access doors, each type.1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.B.American Welding Society (AWS):D1.3-08Structural Welding Code Sheet SteelC.The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): AMP 500 SeriesMetal Finishes ManualD.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):Fire Resistance DirectoryPART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 FABRICATION, GENERALA.Fabricate components to be straight, square, flat and in same plane where required. 1.Slightly round exposed edges and without burrs, snags and sharp edges. 2.Exposed welds continuous and ground smooth.3.Weld in accordance with AWS D1.3.B.Number of locks and non-continuous hinges as required to maintain alignment of panel with frame.C.Provide anchors or make provisions in frame for anchoring to adjacent construction. Provide size, number and location of anchors on four sides to secure access door in opening. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS, FLUSH PANEL:A. Door Panel: 1.Form of 1.9 mm (0.0747 inch) thick galvanized steel sheet. 2.Reinforce to maintain flat surface.B.Frame: 1.Form of 1.5 mm (0.0598 inch) thick galvanized steel sheet of depth and configuration to suit material and type of construction where installed.2.Provide surface mounted units having frame flange at perimeter where installed in concrete, masonry, or gypsum board construction. 3.Weld exposed joints in flange and grind smooth.C.Hinge: 1.Concealed spring hinge to allow panel to open 175 degrees. 2.Provide removable hinge pin to allow removal of panel from frame.D.Lock: 1.Flush, screwdriver operated cam lock. 2.3 FINISH:A.Provide in accordance with NAAMM AMP 500 series on exposed surfaces.B.Steel Surfaces: Baked-on prime coat over a protective phosphate coating.2.4 SIZE:A.Minimum 450 mm (18 inches) square door unless otherwise shown or required to suit opening in suspension system of ceiling.PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LOCATION:A.Provide access panels or doors wherever any valves, traps, dampers, cleanouts, and other control items of mechanical, electrical and conveyor work are concealed in wall or partition, or are above ceiling of gypsum board or plaster.B.Use fire rated doors in fire rated partitions and ceilings.C.Use flush panels in partitions and gypsum board ceilings.3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL:A.Install access doors in openings to have sides vertical in wall installations, and parallel to ceiling suspension grid or side walls when installed in ceiling. B.Set frames so that edge of frames without flanges will finish flush with surrounding finish surfaces. C.Set frames with flanges to overlap opening and so that face will be uniformly spaced from the finish surface. 3.3 ANCHORAGE:A.Secure frames to adjacent construction using anchors attached to frames or by use of bolts or screws through the frame members. B.Type, size and number of anchoring device suitable for the material surrounding the opening, maintain alignment, and resist displacement during normal use of access door. C.Anchors for fire rated access doors shall meet requirements of applicable fire test.3.4 ADJUSTMENT:A.Adjust hardware so that door panel will open freely. B.Adjust door when closed so door panel is centered in the frame.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 08 51 13ALUMINUM WINDOWSPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies thermally broken commercial Single Hung Window System of type and size shown complete with hardware, related components and accessories.1.2 DEFINITIONSA.Accessories: Mullions, staff beads, casings, closures, trim, moldings, panning systems, sub-sills, clips anchors, fasteners, weather-stripping, insect screens and other necessary components required for fabrication and installation of window units.B.Uncontrolled Water: Water not drained to the exterior, or water appearing on the room side of the window.1.3 RELATED WORKA.Glazing: Section 08 80 00, GLAZING.1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA.Protect windows from damage during handling and construction operations before, during and after installation.B.Store windows under cover, setting upright.C.Do not stack windows flat.D.Do not lay building materials or equipment on windows.1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA.Approval by contracting officer technical representative is required of products or service of proposed manufacturers and installers.B.Approval will be based on submission of certification by Contractor that:1.Manufacturer regularly and presently manufactures the specified windows as one of its principal products.2.Installer has technical qualifications, experience, trained personnel and facilities to install specified items.C.Provide each type of window produced from one source of manufacture.D.Quality Certified Labels or certificate:1.Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association, "AAMA label" affixed to each window indicating compliance with specification.2.Certificates in lieu of label with copy of recent test report (not more than 4 years old) from an independent testing laboratory and certificate signed by window manufacturer stating that windows provided comply with specified requirements and AAMA 101/I.S.2 for type of window specified.1.6 SUBMITTALA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Shop Drawings:1.Minimum of 1/2 full scale of each type of windows on project.2.Identifying parts of window units by name and kind of metal or material, show construction, locking systems, mechanical operators, trim, installation and anchorages.3.Include glazing details and standards for factory glazed units.C.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:Window.Sash locks, keepers, and key.D.Certificates:1.Certificates as specified in paragraph QUALITY ASSURANCE.2.Indicating manufacturers and installers qualifications.3.Manufacturer's Certification that windows delivered to project are identical to windows tested.E.Test Reports:1.Air Infiltration Test: plete testing in accordance with ASTM E 283, at a static air pressure of 1.57 lb PSF.b.Resultant air infiltration shall not exceed .26 cfm/ft.2.Water Resistance Test: plete testing in accordance with ASTM E 331 and ASTM E 547, at a static pressure difference of 5.25 PSF (DH-C35) 6.00 PSF (DH-HC40) 7.50 PSF (DH-HC50).b.There shall be no uncontrolled water leakage.3.Thermal Transmittance (U-Factor):a.Thermal testing is to be conducted in accordance with the National Fenestration Rating Council, Inc., NFRC 100 procedure.b.Maximum U-Factor is to be .32.4.Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC):plete calculations and furnish certified values in accordance with NFRC 200 procedure. The specified Window and Glass combination shall not have a SHGC of greater than.21.5.Air Leakage:a.Testing is to be conducted in accordance with NFRC 400 procedure.b.The maximum Air Leakage value for Single Hung windows shall not exceed .3.F.Samples: Provide 150 mm (six-inch) length samples showing finishes, specified.1.7 WARRANTYA.Warrant windows against malfunctions due to defects in thermal breaks, hardware, materials and workmanship, subject to the terms of Article “WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION”, FAR clause 52.246-21, except provide 10 year warranty period.1.8 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.B.American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)90.1-07Energy Standard of BuildingsC.American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):101/I.S.2/A440-08Windows, Doors, and Unit Skylights505-09Dry Shrinkage and Composite Performance Thermal Cycling Test Procedures2605-05Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Architectural Aluminum Extrusions and PanelsTIR-A8-08Structural Performance of Poured and Debridged Framing SystemsD.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A653/A653M-09Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized), Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-dip ProcessE 90-09Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building PartitionsE.National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC):NFRC 100-10Determining Fenestration Product U-FactorsNFRC 200-10Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal IncidenceF.National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):AMP 500-06Metal Finishes ManualPART 2- PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALSA.Aluminum Extrusions: 6063-T6 aluminum alloyB.Hardware:1.Sash Lock & Lift: a.The sash lock is to be a spring action, pick resistant cam lock with accompanying die cast keeper.b.The bottom sash is to be fitted with one surface applied die cast sash lift. 2.Balances:a.The operating sash balances are to be manufactured from non-rusting or rust resistant materials and are to utilize a heavy duty Block and Tackle system with dual springs. b.The sash balances must be capable of maintaining the operating sash in any position, within its travel, without the use of other devices.c.All sash balances must be replaceable without the use of tools. 3.Screens:a.All screen frames are to be extruded aluminum with a minimum wall thickness of .053.b.Screen mesh is to be Charcoal 18x16 fiberglassc.Screen mesh is to be held in place with a removable vinyl spline, to facilitate field replacement of the mesh. C.Weather-strips and Glazing Gaskets: 1.All glazing gaskets are to be marine type vinyl, specifically designed for a tight seal between the glass and the sash extrusion. 2.Weather-stripping is to be double polypropylene pile with a center fin with a minimum pile height of .230. 3.All non-poured thermal separators are to be Polyvinylchloride (PVC). D.Glass and Glazing: 1.Glazing requirements are indicated at Section 08 80 00 of these specifications and at the project plans. Furnish glazing vinyls for 1" insulated glass as indicated. 2.All glass and glazing materials are to be factory installed. 3.All factory and field glazed materials shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturers published glazing instructions. E.Thermal Barrier: 1.The thermal break is to consist of a two part, air drying, polyurethane, poured-in-place separator contained in a specifically designed receptor channel. After de-bridging, the thermal break must produce a separation of the interior and exterior aluminum of not less than 0.210".2.The inside surfaces of the thermal break receptor channel are to be Azo-Brade prior to pouring & de-bridging.3.All thermal breaks, within the same frame component, must align.4.Mechanical fasteners, welded components and operating hardware shall not bridge the thermal break.2.2 THERMAL AND CONDENSATION PERFORMANCEA.Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF): Minimum CRF of C 50.B.Thermal Transmittance:1.Maximum U value class for insulating glass windows: 50 (U=0.50).C.Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): SHGC shall comply with State or local energy code requirement.2.3 FABRICATIONA.Fabrication to exceed or meet requirements of Physical Load Tests, Air Infiltration Test, and Water Resistance Test of AAMA 101/I.S.2.B.Glazing:1.Factory glazing.2.Glaze in accordance with Section 08 80 00, GLAZING.3.Windows reglazable without dismantling sash framing.4.Design rabbet to suit glass thickness and glazing method specified. C.Trim:1.Trim includes casings, closures, and panning.2.Fabricate to shapes shown of aluminum not less than 1.6 mm (0.062 inch) thick 3.Extruded or formed sections, straight, true, and smooth on exposed surfaces. 4.Exposed external corners mitered and internal corners coped; fitted with hairline joints.5.Reinforce 1.6 mm (0.062 inch) thick members with not less than 3 mm (1/8-inch) thick aluminum.6.Except for strap anchors, provide reinforcing for fastening near ends and at intervals not more than 305 mm (12 inches) between ends.7.Design to allow unrestricted expansion and contraction of members and window frames.8.Secure to window frames with machine screws or expansion rivets.9.Exposed screws, fasteners or pop rivets are not acceptable on exterior of the casing or trim cover system.D.Thermal-Break Construction:1.Manufacturer’s Standard.2.Low conductance thermal barrier.3.Capable of structurally holding sash in position and together.4.All Thermal Break Assemblies (Pour & Debridge, Insulbar or others) shall be tested as per AAMA TIR A8 and AAMA 505 for Dry Shrinkage and Composite Performance.5.Location of thermal barrier and design of window shall be such that, in closed position, outside air shall not come in direct contact with interior frame of the window. G.Insect Screens:1.AAMA 101/I.S.2.2.Aluminum 2.4 SINGLE Hung Windows:A.AAMA 101/I.S.2. Single hungB.AAMA certified product to the AAMA 101/I.S.2.-97 standard.1.Provide units with "Tilt-in" feature permitting both sides of both sash to be cleaned from interior.2.Do not tilt-in sash without use of maintenance only release mechanism and removable locking handle. Finger operated tilt latches not acceptable. 2.10 FINISHA.In accordance with NAAMM AMP 500 series.B.Finish exposed aluminum surfaces as follows:1.Anodized Aluminum Color White C.Hardware: Finish hardware exposed when window is in the closed position: Match window color.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 PROTECTION (DISSIMILAR MATERIALS): AAMA 101/I.S.2.3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERALA.Install window units in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installation of window units, hardware, operators and other components of work.B.Where type, size or spacing of fastenings for securing window accessories or equipment to building construction is not shown or specified, use expansion or toggle bolts or screws, as best suited to construction material.1.Provide bolts or screws minimum 6 mm (1/4-inch) in diameter.2.Sized and spaced to resist the tensile and shear loads imposed.3.Do not use exposed fasteners on exterior, except when unavoidable for application of hardware.4.Provide non-magnetic stainless steel Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, where required, or special tamper-proof fasteners.5.Locate fasteners to not disturb the thermal break construction of windows.C.Set windows plumb, level, true, and in alignment; without warp or rack of frames or sash.D.Anchor windows on four sides with anchor clips or fin trim.1.Do not allow anchor clips to bridge thermal breaks.2.Use separate clips for each side of thermal breaks.3.Make connections to allow for thermal and other movements.4.Do not allow building load to bear on windows.5.Use manufacturer's standard clips at corners and not over 600 mm (24 inches) on center.6.Where fin trim anchorage is shown build into adjacent construction, anchoring at corners and not over 600 mm (24 inches) on center.3.3 ADJUST AND CLEANA.Adjust ventilating sash and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points, and at weather-stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.B.Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of windows, exercising care to avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes. C.Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. D.Lubricate hardware and moving parts.E.Clean glass promptly after installation of windows. Remove glazing and sealant compound, dirt and other substances.F.Except when a window is being adjusted or tested, keep locked in the closed position during the progress of work on the project.3.4 OPERATION DEVICESA.Provide locking and operating handles, as specified to operate windows.B.Provide one emergency ventilating operating handle for every four windows.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 08 71 00DOOR HARDWAREPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.Door hardware and related items necessary for complete installation and operation of doors. 1.2 RELATED WORKA.Caulking: Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.B.Section 08 14 00, INTERIOR WOOD DOORSC.Section 08 11 13, HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES.D.Finishes: Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.E.Painting: Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.1.3 GENERALA.All hardware shall comply with UFAS, (Uniform Federal Accessible Standards) unless specified otherwise.B.Provide rated door hardware assemblies where required by most current version of the International Building Code (IBC).C.Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors and Exit Doors: Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 for labeled fire doors and to NFPA 101 for exit doors, as well as to other requirements specified. Provide hardware listed by UL, except where heavier materials, large size, or better grades are specified herein under paragraph HARDWARE SETS. In lieu of UL labeling and listing, test reports from a nationally recognized testing agency may be submitted showing that hardware has been tested in accordance with UL test methods and that it conforms to NFPA requirements.D.Hardware for application on metal and wood doors and frames shall be made to standard templates. Furnish templates to the fabricator of these items in sufficient time so as not to delay the construction. E.The following items shall be of the same manufacturer, if possible, except as otherwise specified: 1.Mortise locksets. 2.Hinges for hollow metal and wood doors. 3.Surface applied overhead door closers. 4.Exit devices. 5.Floor closers.1.4 WARRANTYA.Automatic door operators shall be subject to the terms of FAR Clause 52.24-21, except that the Warranty period shall be two years in lieu of one year for all items except as noted below:1.Locks, latchsets, and panic hardware: 5 years.2.Door closers and continuous hinges: 10 years.1.5 MAINTENANCE MANUALSA.In accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Article titled "INSTRUCTIONS", furnish maintenance manuals and instructions on all door hardware.1.6 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. Submit 6 copies of the schedule per Section 01 33 23 plus 2 copies to the VAMC Locksmith (VISN Locksmith if the VAMC does not have a locksmith).B.Door hardware submittals will be reviewed concurrently with hollow metal frame, wood door, and automatic door operator submittals. Review will not begin until all submittals have been received and are determined to be complete.C.Hardware Schedule: Prepare and submit hardware schedule in tabular form that includes the following information:1.Hardware set number.2.Doors to receive hardware set.3.Door swing, size, and fire rating.4.Each item of hardwarea.Manufacturer’s name.b.Product name and model number.c.Function (locks closers and other operating devices).d.Finish (AMSI/BHMA designation).e.Quantity of each item for each door opening.5.Key control. D.Samples and Manufacturers' Literature: 1.Samples: All exposed to view hardware items proposed for the project shall be submitted for approval. Tag and mark all items with manufacturer's name, catalog number and project number. After acceptance, samples may be installed in the Work.2.Manufacturers’ Literature: Submit product data for each specified hardware item. Include product description sufficient to confirm compliance with these specifications and installation instructions. Identify options necessary for proper installation and operation.E.Certificate of Compliance and Test Reports: Submit certificates that hardware conforms to the requirements specified herein. Certificates shall be accompanied by copies of reports as referenced. The testing shall have been conducted either in the manufacturer's plant and certified by an independent testing laboratory or conducted in an independent laboratory, within four years of submittal of reports for approval.1.7 DELIVERY AND MARKINGA.Deliver items of hardware to job site in their original containers, complete with necessary appurtenances including screws, keys, and instructions. Tag one of each different item of hardware and deliver to COTR for reference purposes. Tag shall identify items by Project Specification number and manufacturer's catalog number. These items shall remain on file in COTR's office until all other similar items have been installed in project, at which time the COTR will deliver items on file to Contractor for installation in predetermined locations on the project.1.8 preinstallation meetingA.Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than 30 days before start of installation of door hardware. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including Contractor and Installer, Architect, Project Engineer and VA Locksmith, Hardware Consultant, and Hardware Manufacturer’s Representative. Review the following:1.Inspection of door hardware.2.Job and surface readiness.3.Coordination with other work. 4.Protection of hardware surfaces.5.Substrate surface protection.6.Installation.7.Adjusting.8.Repair.9.Field quality control.10. Cleaning.1.9 INSTRUCTIONSA.Hardware Sets are indicated on the drawings. They refer to Hardware Sets in the Hardware Schedule at the end of this Section.B.Manufacturers' Catalog Number References: Where manufacturers' products are specified herein, products of other manufacturers which are considered equivalent to those specified may be used. Manufacturers whose products are specified are identified by abbreviations as follows: AdamsRiteAdams Rite Mfg. Co.Pomona, CABestBest Access SystemsIndianapolis, INCorbin RusswinCorbin Russwin, Inc./Assa AbloyMonroe, NCDon-JoDon-Jo ManufacturingSterling, MAG.E. SecurityGE Security, Inc.Bradentown, FLMarkarMarkar Architectural ProductsPomona, CAPemkoPemko Manufacturing Co.Ventura, CARixsonRixsonFranklin Park, ILRockwoodRockwood Manufacturing Co.Rockwood, PASecuritronSecuritron Magnalock Corp.Sparks, NVSouthern FolgerSouthern Folger Detention Equipment Co.San Antonio, TXStanleyThe Stanley WorksNew Britain, CTTiceTice IndustriesPortland, ORTrimcoTriangle Brass Mfg. Co.Los Angeles, CA ZeroZero Weather Stripping Co.New York, NYC.Keying: All cylinders shall be keyed into existing system. Contractor shall obtain instructions from the Contracting Officer and the VA Locksmith on hierarchy and labeling to be used. 1.10 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. In text, hardware items are referred to by series, types, etc., listed in such specifications and standards, except as otherwise specified. B.American National Standards Institute/Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA):A156.106Butts and HingesA156.203Bored and Pre-assembled Locks and LatchesA156.308Exit Devices, Coordinators, and Auto Flush BoltsA156.408Door Controls (Closers) A156.501Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products A156.605Architectural Door Trim A156.805Door ControlsOverhead Stops and Holders A156.13-05Mortise Locks and Latches Series 1000 A156.1608Auxiliary HardwareA156.17-04 .............Self-Closing Hinges and PivotsA156.1806Materials and Finishes A156.21-09ThresholdsA156.22-05Door Gasketing and Edge Seal SystemsA156.26-06Continuous HingesA250.8-03Standard Steel Doors and FramesC.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 80-10Fire Doors and Fire Windows 101-09Life Safety CodeD.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Building Materials Directory (2008)PART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 BUTT HINGESA.ANSI A156.1. Provide only five-knuckle, full mortise, ball bearing type hinges with hospital tips. The following types of butt hinges shall be used for the types of doors listed, except where otherwise specified:1.Exterior Doors: Type A2112/A5112 for doors 900 mm (3 feet) wide or less and Type A2111/A5111 for doors over 900 mm (3 feet) wide. Hinges for exterior outswing doors shall have nonremovable pins. 2.Interior Doors: Type A8112/A5112 for doors 900 mm (3 feet) wide or less and Type A8111/A5111 for doors over 900 mm (3 feet) wide. Hinges for doors exposed to high humidity areas (shower rooms, toilet rooms, kitchens, janitor rooms, etc. shall be of stainless steel material.B.Provide quantity and size of hinges per door leaf as follows:Doors up to 1210 mm (4 feet) high: 2 hinges.Doors 1210 mm (4 feet) to 2260 mm (7 feet 5 inches) high: 3 hinges minimum.Doors greater than 2260 mm (7 feet 5 inches) high: 4 hinges.Doors up to 900 mm (3 feet) wide, standard weight: 114 mm x 114 mm (4-1/2 inches x 4-1/2 inches) hinges.Doors over 900 mm (3 feet) to 1065 mm (3 feet 6 inches) wide, standard weight: 127 mm x 114 mm (5 inches x 4-1/2 inches).Doors over 1065 mm (3 feet 6 inches) to 1210 mm (4 feet), heavy weight: 127 mm x 114 mm (5 inches x 4-1/2 inches).Provide heavy-weight hinges where specified.At doors weighing 330 kg (150 lbs.) or more furnish 127 mm (5 inch) high hinges.C.Provide hinges with non-removable pins at lockable, out-swinging doors.D.Provide stainless steel hinges for exterior doors.E.See Articles "MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE" and "HARDWARE SETS" for pivots and hinges other than butts specified above and continuous hinges specified below.2.2 DOOR CLOSING DEVICESA.Closing devices shall be products of one manufacturer for each type specified.2.3 OVERHEAD CLOSERSA.Conform to ANSI A156.4, Grade 1.B.Closers shall conform to the following: 1.The closer shall have minimum 50 percent adjustable closing force over minimum value for that closer and have adjustable hydraulic back check effective between 60 degrees and 85 degrees of door opening.2.Where specified, closer shall have hold-open feature. 3.Size Requirements: Provide multi-size closers, sizes 1 through 6, except where multi-size closer is not available for the required application.4.Material of closer body shall be forged or cast. 5.Arm and brackets for closers shall be steel, malleable iron or high strength ductile cast iron. 6.Where closers are exposed to the exterior or are mounted in rooms that experience high humidity, provide closer body and arm assembly of stainless steel material.7.Closers shall have full size metal cover; plastic covers will not be accepted.8.Closers shall have adjustable hydraulic backcheck, separate valves for closing and latching speed, adjustable back-check positioning valve, and adjustable delayed action valve. 9.Provide closers with any accessories required for the mounting application, including (but not limited to) drop plates, special soffit plates, spacers for heavy-duty parallel arm fifth screws, bull-nose or other regular arm brackets, longer or shorter arm assemblies, and special factory templating. Provide special arms, drop plates, and templating as needed to allow mounting at doors with overhead stops and/or holders.10. Closer arms or backcheck valve shall not be used to stop the door from overswing, except in applications where a separate wall, floor, or overhead stop cannot be used.11. Provide parallel arm closers with heavy duty rigid arm.12. Where closers are to be installed on the push side of the door, provide parallel arm type except where conditions require use of top jamb arm.13. Provide all surface closers with the same body attachment screw pattern for ease of replacement and maintenance.14. All closers shall have a 1 ?” (38mm) minimum piston diameter. 15.Closing devices shall be the product of one manufacturer.2.4 DOOR STOPSA.Conform to ANSI A156.16.B.Provide door stops wherever an opened door or any item of hardware thereon would strike a wall, column, equipment or other parts of building construction. For concrete, masonry or quarry tile construction, use lead expansion shields for mounting door stops. C.Where cylindrical locks with turn pieces or pushbuttons occur, equip wall bumpers Type L02251 (rubber pads having concave face) to receive turn piece or button. D.Provide floor stops (Type L02141 or L02161 in office areas; Type L02121 x 3 screws into floor elsewhere. Wall bumpers, where used, must be installed to impact the trim or the door within the leading half of its width. Floor stops, where used, must be installed within 4-inches of the wall face and impact the door within the leading half of its width.E.Where drywall partitions occur, use floor stops, Type L02141 or L02161 in office areas, Type L02121 elsewhere. F.Provide stop Type L02011, as applicable for exterior doors. At outswing doors where stop can be installed in concrete, provide stop mated to concrete anchor set in 76mm (3-inch) core-drilled hole and filled with quick-setting cement.G.Provide appropriate door mounted stop on doors in individual toilets where floor or wall mounted stops cannot be used. H.Where the specified wall or floor stop cannot be used, provide concealed overhead stops (surface-mounted where concealed cannot be used).2.5 LOCKS AND LATCHESA.Conform to ANSI A156.2. Locks and latches for doors 45 mm (13/4 inch) thick or over shall have beveled fronts. Lock cylinders shall have seven pins. Cylinders for all locksets shall be removable core type (basis of design: Corbin Russwin IC7). Cylinders shall be furnished with construction removable cores and construction master keys. Cylinder shall be removable by special key or tool. Construct all cores so that they will be interchangeable into the core housings of all mortise locks, rim locks, cylindrical locks, and any other type lock included in the Great Grand Master Key System. Keyway shall be 59A2, 0-bitted. Disassembly of lever or lockset shall not be required to remove core from lockset. All locksets or latches on double doors with fire label shall have latch bolt with 19 mm (3/4 inch) throw, unless shorter throw allowed by the door manufacturer’s fire label. Provide temporary keying device or construction core of allow opening and closing during construction and prior to the installation of final cores. B.In addition to above requirements, locks and latches shall comply with following requirements: 1.Mortise Lock and Latch Sets: Conform to ANSI/BHMA A156.13. Mortise locksets shall be series 1000, minimum Grade 1. All locksets and latchsets shall be Corbin Russwin ML2000 series with “Lustra” design handles fabricated from wrought lever with cast rose (Corbin Russwin LWB). No substitute lever material shall be accepted. All locks and latchsets shall be furnished with 122.55 mm (4-7/8-inch) curved lip strike and wrought box. At outswing pairs with overlapping astragals, provide flat lip strip with 21mm (7/8-inch) lip-to-center dimension. Furnish armored fronts for all mortise locks. Where mortise locks are installed in high-humidity locations or where exposed to the exterior on both sides of the opening, provide non-ferrous mortise lock case and stainless steel components.2.Auxiliary locks shall be as specified under hardware sets and conform to ANSI A156.5. 3.Privacy locks shall have an inside thumbturn for privacy and an outside thumbturn for emergency entrance.2.6 KEYSA.Stamp all keys with change number and key set symbol. Furnish five keys for each lock. Obtain instructions from the Contracting Officer and VA Locksmith regarding master keying. 2.7 FLUSH BOLTS (LEVER EXTENSION)A.Conform to ANSI A156.16. Flush bolts shall be Type L24081 unless otherwise specified. Furnish proper dustproof strikes conforming to ANSI A156.16, for flush bolts required on lower part of doors. B.Lever extension manual flush bolts shall only be used at non-fire-rated pairs for rooms only accessed by maintenance personnel.C.Face plates for cylindrical strikes shall be rectangular and not less than 25 mm by 63 mm (1 inch by 21/2 inches). D.Frictionfit cylindrical dustproof strikes with circular face plate may be used only where metal thresholds occur.2.8 THRESHOLDSA.Conform to ANSI A156.21, mill finish extruded aluminum, except as otherwise specified. In existing construction, thresholds shall be installed in a bed of sealant with ?-20 stainless steel machine screws and expansion shields. In new construction, embed aluminum anchors coated with epoxy in concrete to secure thresholds. Furnish thresholds for the full width of the openings.B.At exterior doors and any interior doors exposed to moisture, provide threshold with non-slip abrasive finish and neoprene bumper.D.Provide with miter returns where threshold extends more than 12 mm (0.5 inch) from fame face.2.9 WEATHERSTRIPS (For Exterior Doors)A.Conform to ANSI A156.22. Air leakage shall not to exceed 0.50 CFM per foot of crack length (0.000774m3/s/m).2.10 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWAREA.Access Doors (including Sheet Metal, Screen and Woven Wire Mesh Types): Except for firerated doors and doors to Temperature Control Cabinets, equip each single or double metal access door with Lock Type E76213, conforming to ANSI A156.5. Key locks as directed. Ship lock prepaid to the door manufacturer. Hinges shall be provided by door manufacturer. B.Mutes: Conform to ANSI A156.16. Provide door mutes or door silencers Type L03011 or L03021, depending on frame material, light gray color, on each steel or wood door frame, except at fire-rated frames. Furnish 3 mutes for single doors and 2 mutes for each pair of doors. Provide 2 mutes for each edge of sliding door which would contact door frame. 2.11 FINISHESA.Exposed surfaces of hardware shall have ANSI A156.18, finishes as specified below. Finishes on all hinges, pivots, closers, thresholds, etc., shall be as specified below under "Miscellaneous Finishes." For field painting (final coat) of ferrous hardware, see Section 09 91 00, PAINTING. B.626 or 630: All surfaces on exterior and interior of buildings, except where other finishes are specified.C.Miscellaneous Finishes: 1.Hinges --exterior doors: 630. 2.Hinges --interior doors: 626 or 630. 3.Locksets and latchsets -- exterior doors: 630.4. Locksets and latchsets – interior doors: 626 or 630.5.Door Closers: Factory applied paint finish. Dull or Satin Aluminum color. 6.Thresholds: Clear anodized aluminum. 7.Cover plates for floor hinges and pivots: 630. 8.Other primed steel hardware: 600. D.Hardware Finishes for Existing Buildings: U.S. Standard finishes shall match finishes of hardware in (similar) existing spaces except where otherwise specified. 2.12 BASE METALSA.Apply specified U.S. Standard finishes on different base metals as following: FinishBase Metal 626Brass or bronze 630Stainless steel PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 HARDWARE HEIGHTSA.For existing buildings locate hardware on doors at heights to match existing hardware. The Contractor shall visit the site, verify location of existing hardware and submit locations to Contracting Officer for approval or, if acceptable to the Contracting Officer, mount hardware in accordance with the following (all dimensions shown as height above finish floor):1.Exit devices centerline of strike (where applicable) 1024 mm (405/16 inches). 2.Locksets and latch sets centerline of strike 1024 mm (405/16 inches). 3.Deadlocks centerline of strike 1219 mm (48 inches). 4.Hospital arm pull 1168 mm (46 inches) to centerline of bottom supporting bracket. 5.Centerline of door pulls to be 1016 mm (40 inches). 6.Push plates and pushpull shall be 1270 mm (50 inches) to top of plate.7.Pushpull latch to be 1024 mm (405/16 inches) to centerline of strike. 8.Locate other hardware at standard commercial heights. Locate push and pull plates to prevent conflict with other hardware.3.2 INSTALLATIONA.Closer devices, including those with holdopen features, shall be equipped and mounted to provide maximum door opening permitted by building construction or equipment. Closers shall be mounted on side of door inside rooms, inside stairs, and away from corridors. At exterior doors, closers shall be mounted on interior side. Where closers are mounted on doors they shall be mounted with sex nuts and bolts; foot shall be fastened to frame with machine screws. B.Hinge Size Requirements: As indicated above.C.Hinge leaves shall be sufficiently wide to allow doors to swing clear of door frame trim and surrounding conditions. D.Where new hinges are specified for new doors in existing frames or existing doors in new frames, sizes of new hinges shall match sizes of existing hinges. Existing hinges shall not be reused. E.Hinges Required Per Door: As indicated above. F.Fastenings: Suitable size and type and shall harmonize with hardware as to material and finish. Provide machine screws and lead expansion shields to secure hardware to concrete, ceramic or quarry floor tile, or solid masonry. Fiber or rawl plugs and adhesives are not permitted. All fastenings exposed to weather shall be of nonferrous metal. G.After locks have been installed; show in presence of COTR that keys operate their respective locks in accordance with keying requirements. (All keys, Master Key level and above shall be sent Registered Mail to the Medical Center Director along with the bitting list. Also a copy of the invoice shall be sent to the COTR for his records.) Installation of locks which do not meet specified keying requirements shall be considered sufficient justification for rejection and replacement of all locks installed on project.3.3 FINAL INSPECTIONA.Installer to provide letter to VA Resident/Project Engineer that upon completion, installer has visited the Project and has accomplished the following:1.Re-adjust hardware.2.Evaluate maintenance procedures and recommend changes or additions, and instruct VA personnel.3.Identify items that have deteriorated or failed.4.Submit written report identifying problems.3.4 DEMONSTRATIONA.Demonstrate efficacy of mechanical hardware and electrical, and electronic hardware systems, including adjustment and maintenance procedures, to satisfaction of Resident/Project Engineer and VA Locksmith.3.5 HARDWARE SETSA.Following sets of hardware correspond to hardware symbols shown on drawings.Hardware Set HW-11? pair butts114 x 114 mm (4?” x 4 ?”)1 mortise locksetEntrance/Office Function (F04)1 closer1 wall stop3 silencersHardware Set HW-21? pair butts114 x 114 mm (4?” x 4 ?”)1 mortise locksetInstitutional Privacy Function (F26)1 closer1 wall stop3 silencers1 coat hookHardware Set HW-31? pair butts114 x 114 mm (4?” x 4 ?”)1 mortise latchsetPassage Function (F01)1 deadbolt and strikeOutside key, inside thumb turn 1 floor stop3 SilencersHardware Set HW-43 pair butts114 x 114 mm (4?” x 4?”)1 mortise latchsetPassage Function (F01) 1 deadbolt and strikeOutside key, inside thumb turn1 dummy pullMatch latchset1 set manual flush boltsTop and bottom1 wall stop1 floor stop2 silencersHardware Set HW-51? pair butts114 x 114 mm (4?” x 4 ?”)1 mortise locksetStorage Function (F07)1 closer1 wall stop3 silencersHardware Set HW-61? pair butts114 x 114 mm (4?” x 4 ?”) x stainless steel x NRP1 mortise locksetEntrance/Office Function (F04) x stainless steel1 closerInterior mounted with hold-open and stop1 set weatherstrippingContinuous neoprene bubble; head and jambs1 thresholdAnodized aluminum with neoprene bumper- E N D SECTION 08 80 00GLAZINGPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies glass and related glazing materials and accessories. Glazing products specified apply to factory or field glazed items.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Factory glazed by manufacturer in following units:1.Section 08 11 13, HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES2.Section 08 14 00, WOOD DOORS.3.Mirrors: Section 10 28 00, TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES.4.Section 08 51 13, ALUMINUM WINDOWS (Double Hung).1.3 LABELSA.Temporary labels:1.Provide temporary label on each light of glass identifying manufacturer or brand and glass type, quality and nominal thickness.2.Label in accordance with NFRC (National Fenestration Rating Council) label requirements.3.Temporary labels shall remain intact until glass is approved by Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR).B.Permanent labels:1.Locate in corner for each pane.2.Label in accordance with ANSI Z97.1 and SGCC (Safety Glass Certification Council) label requirements.a.Tempered glass.b.Laminated glass or have certificate for panes without permanent label.anic coated glass.1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Glass Thickness:1.Select thickness of exterior glass to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with ASCE 7 or other applicable code. In no case shall glass be less than 6mm (1/4 inch) nominal thickness.2.Test in accordance with ASTM E 1300.3.Thicknesses listed are minimum. Coordinate thicknesses with framing system manufacturers.1.5 SUBMITTALS A.In accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Certificates:1.Certificates stating that wire glass, meets requirements for safety glazing material as specified in ANSI Z97.1.C.Warranty: Submit written guaranty, conforming to General Condition requirements, and to “Warranty of Construction” Article in this Section.D.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:1.Glass, each kind required.2.Insulating glass units.3.Elastic compound for metal sash glazing.4.Putty, for wood sash glazing.5.Glazing cushion.6.Sealing compound.E.Samples:1.Size: 150 mm by 150 mm (6 inches by 6 inches).F.Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: Submit glazing sealant manufacturer’s test report indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials.1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA.Delivery: Schedule delivery to coincide with glazing schedules so minimum handling of crates is required. Do not open crates except as required for inspection for shipping damage.B.Storage: Store cases according to printed instructions on case, in areas least subject to traffic or falling objects. Keep storage area clean and dry.C.Handling: Unpack cases following printed instructions on case. Stack individual windows on edge leaned slightly against upright supports with separators between each.1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONSA.Field Measurements: Field measure openings before ordering tempered glass products. Be responsible for proper fit of field measured products.1.8 warrantyA.Warranty: Conform to terms of "Warranty of Construction", FAR clause 52.246-21, except extend warranty period for the following:1.Insulating glass units to remain sealed for 10 years.2.Laminated glass units to remain laminated for 5 years.1.9 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.B.American National Standards Institute (ANSI):Z97.104Safety Glazing Material Used in Building Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.C.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):C1363-05Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies, by Means of A Hot Box ApparatusC542-05LockStrip Gaskets.C716-06Installing Lock-Strip Gaskets and Infill Glazing Materials.C794-06Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants.C864-05Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers.C920-08Elastomeric Joint Sealants.C964-07Standard Guide for Lock-Strip Gasket Glazing.C1036-06Flat Glass.C1048-04HeatTreated Flat GlassKind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.C1172-09Laminated Architectural Flat Glass.C1376-10Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat Glass.D635-06Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of SelfSupporting Plastic in a Horizontal Position.D4802-02Poly (Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic Sheet.E84-09Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.E2190-08Insulating Glass mercial Item Description (CID):A-A-59502Plastic Sheet, PolycarbonateE.Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; 1977, with 1984 Revision.F.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):8008Fire Doors and Windows.G.National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC)H.Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC)2009:Certified Products Directory (Issued SemiAnnually).I.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):75206BulletResisting Equipment.J.Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC):4-010-01-2007DOD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for BuildingsK.Glass Association of North America (GANA):Glazing Manual (Latest Edition)Sealant Manual (2008)L.American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):ASCE 7-10Wind Load ProvisionsPART 2 PRODUCT2.1 GLASSA.Use thickness stated unless specified otherwise in assemblies or required by code.2.2 INSULATING GLASS UNITS (Glass type GL-1)A.Provide factory fabricated, hermetically sealed glass unit consisting of two panes of glass separated by a dehydrated air space and comply with ASTM E2190.B.Assemble units to have a Solar Heat Gain Coefficient of .21 maximum and U-Value of .32 maximum.C.Overall thickness: 19 mm (11/16 inch).D.Sealed Edge Units (SEU):1.Insulating Glass Unita.Outboard Lite1.Glass type: Tempered 2.Glass Tint: Bronzeb.Spacer1.Gas Fill: (90% Argon)c.Inboard Lite1. Glass Type: Tempered2.Glass Tint: None2.3 HEAT-TREATED GLASS (Glass Type gl-2) A.Frosted Tempered Glass:1.ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3.2.Thickness, 6 mm (1/4 inch) minimum.2.13 GLAZING ACCESSORIESA.As required to supplement the accessories provided with the items to be glazed and to provide a complete installation. Ferrous metal accessories exposed in the finished work shall have a finish that will not corrode or stain while in service.B.Setting Blocks: ASTM C864:1.Channel shape; having 6 mm (1/4 inch) internal depth.2.Shore a hardness of 80 to 90 Durometer.3.Block lengths: 50 mm (two inches) except 100 to 150 mm (four to six inches) for insulating glass.4.Block width: Approximately 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) less than the full width of the rabbet.5.Block thickness: Minimum 4.8 mm (3/16 inch). Thickness sized for rabbet depth as required.C.Spacers: ASTM C864:1.Channel shape having a 6 mm (1/4 inch) internal depth.2.Flanges not less 2.4 mm (3/32 inch) thick and web 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick.3.Lengths: One to 25 to 76 mm (one to three inches).4.Shore a hardness of 40 to 50 Durometer. D.Sealing Tapes:1.Semisolid polymeric based material exhibiting pressuresensitive adhesion and withstanding exposure to sunlight, moisture, heat, cold, and aging.2.Shape, size and degree of softness and strength suitable for use in glazing application to prevent water infiltration.E.Glazing Sealants: ASTM C920, silicone neutral cure:1.Type S.2.Class 253.Grade NS.4.Shore A hardness of 25 to 30 Durometer.5.Color: ClearPART 3 EXECUTION3.1 EXAMINATIONA.Verification of Conditions:1.Examine openings for glass and glazing units; determine they are proper size; plumb; square; and level before installation is started. 2.Verify that glazing openings conform with details, dimensions and tolerances indicated on manufacturer’s approved shop drawings.B.Installer shall advise Contractor of conditions which may adversely affect glass and glazing unit installation, prior to commencement of installation: Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.C.Verify that wash down of adjacent masonry is completed prior to erection of glass and glazing units to prevent damage to glass and glazing units by cleaning materials.3.2 PREPARATIONA.For sealant glazing, prepare glazing surfaces in accordance with GANA-02 Sealant Manual.B.Determine glazing unit size and edge clearances by measuring the actual unit to receive the glazing.C.Shop fabricate and cut glass with smooth, straight edges of full size required by openings to provide GANA recommended edge clearances.D.Verify that components used are compatible.E.Clean and dry glazing surfaces.F.Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERALA.Install in accordance with GANA-01 Glazing Manual and GANA-02 Sealant Manual unless specified otherwise.B.Glaze in accordance with recommendations of glazing and framing manufacturers, and as required to meet the Performance Test Requirements specified in other applicable sections of specifications.C.Set glazing without bending, twisting, or forcing of units.D.Do not allow glass to rest on or contact any framing member.E.Glaze doors and operable sash, in a securely fixed or closed and locked position, until sealant, glazing compound, or putty has thoroughly set.G.Tempered Glass: Install with roller distortions in horizontal position unless otherwise directed.3.4 REPLACEMENT AND CLEANINGA.Clean new glass surfaces removing temporary labels, paint spots, and defacement after approval by COTR.B.Replace cracked, broken, and imperfect glass, or glass which has been installed improperly.C.Leave glass, putty, and other setting material in clean, whole, and acceptable condition. 3.5 PROTECTIONProtect finished surfaces from damage during erection, and after completion of work. Strippable plastic coatings on colored anodized finish are not acceptable.3.6 GLAZING SCHEDULEA.Insulating Glass Unit: Install in exterior single hung windows.B.Tempered Glass: Install in full and partially glazed doors.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 08 90 00LOUVERS AND VENTSPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTIONThis section specifies fixed wall louvers.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Exterior walls: Section 0420 00, UNIT MASONRY.B.Color of finish: Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHESS.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Shop Drawings: Indentifying each type, showing material, finish, size of members, installation and anchorage details.C.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.The Master Painters Institute (MPI):Approved Product List – September 2011C.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A167-99(R2009)Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium - Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and StripA1008/A1008M-10Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Structural, and High Strength Low-Alloy with Improved FormabilityB209/B209M-03(R2007)Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy, Sheet and PlateD.National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):AMP 500-06Metal Finishes ManualE.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):90A-09Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems G.American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):2605-11High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and PanelsH.Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA):500-L-07Testing LouversPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALSA.Aluminum, Extruded: ASTM B221/B221M.B.Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 302B.C.Carbon Steel: ASTM A1008/A1008M.D.Aluminum, Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209/B209M.E.Fasteners: Fasteners for securing louvers and wall vents to adjoining construction, except as otherwise specified or shown, shall be toggle or expansion bolts, of size and type as required for each specific type of installation and service condition.1.Where type, size, or spacing of fasteners is not shown or specified, submit shop drawings showing proposed fasteners, and method of installation.2.Fasteners for louvers, louver frames, and wire guards shall be of stainless steel or aluminum.2.2 EXTERIOR WALL LOUVERS A.General: 1.Provide fixed type louvers of size and design shown.2.Heads, sills and jamb sections shall have formed caulking slots or be designed to retain caulking. Head sections shall have exterior drip lip, and sill sections an integral water stop.3.Furnish louvers with sill as shown.4.Frame shall be mechanically fastened or welded construction with welds dressed smooth and flush.B.Performance Characteristics: Louvers shall bear AMCA certified rating seals for air performance and water penetration ratings.C.Aluminum Louvers:1.General: Frames, blades, sills and mullions (sliding interlocking type); 2 mm (0.081-inch) thick extruded aluminum. Blades shall be standard type and have reinforcing bosses.2.Louvers, fixed: Make frame sizes 13 mm (1/2-inch) smaller than openings. Single louvers frames shall not exceed 1700 mm (66 inches) wide. When openings exceed 1700 mm (66 inches), provide twin louvers separated by mullion members.2.3 CLOSURE ANGLES AND CLOSURE PLATESA.Fabricate from 2 mm (0.074-inch) thick stainless steel or aluminum.B.Provide continuous closure angles and closure plates on inside head, jambs and sill of exterior wall louvers.C.Secure angles and plates to louver frames with screws, and to masonry or concrete with fasteners as specified.2.4 WIRE GUARDSA.Provide wire guards on outside of all exterior louvers, except on exhaust air louvers.B.Fabricate frames from 2 mm (0.081-inch) thick extruded or sheet aluminum designed to retain wire mesh.C.Wire mesh shall be woven from not less than 1.6 mm (0.063-inch) diameter aluminum wire in 13 mm (1/2-inch) square mesh.D.Miter corners and join by concealed corner clips or locks extending about 57 mm (2-1/4 inches) into rails and stiles. Equip wire guards over four feet in height with a mid-rail constructed as specified for frame components.E.Fasten frames to outside of louvers with aluminum or stainless steel devices designed to allow removal and replacement without damage to the wire guard or the louver.2.10 FINISHA.In accordance with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual: AMP 500-505B.Aluminum Louvers and Wire Guards: Anodized Bronze Finish to match existing exterior louvers.2.11 PROTECTIONA.Provide protection for aluminum against galvanic action wherever dissimilar materials are in contact, by painting the contact surfaces of the dissimilar material with a heavy coat of bituminous paint (complete coverage), or by separating the contact surfaces with a performed synthetic rubber tape having pressure sensitive adhesive coating on one side.B.Isolate the aluminum from plaster, concrete and masonry by coating aluminum with zincchromate primer.C.Protect finished surfaces from damage during fabrication, erection, and after completion of the work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Set work accurately, in alignment and where shown. Items shall be plumb, level, free of rack and twist, and set parallel or perpendicular as required to line and plane of surface.B.Furnish setting drawings and instructions for installation of anchors and for the positioning of items having anchors to be built into masonry construction. Provide temporary bracing for such items until masonry is set. C.Provide anchoring devices and fasteners as shown and as necessary for securing louvers and vents to building construction as specified. Power actuated drive pins may be used, except for removal items and where members would be deformed or substrate damaged by their use.D.Generally, set wall louvers and vents in masonry walls during progress of the work. If wall louvers and vents are not delivered to job in time for installation in prepared openings, make provision for later installation. Set in castinplace concrete in prepared openings.3.2 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A.After installation, all exposed prefinished and plated items and all items fabricated from stainless steel and aluminum shall be cleaned as recommended by the manufacturer and protected from damage until completion of the project.B.All movable parts, including hardware, shall be cleaned and adjusted to operate as designed without binding or deformation of the members, so as to be centered in the opening of frame, and where applicable, to have all contact surfaces fit tight and even without forcing or warping the components E N D SECTION 09 06 00SCHEDULE FOR FINISHESPART I – GENERAL1.1 DESCRiPTIONThis section contains a coordinated system in which requirements for materials specified in other sections shown are identified by abbreviated material names and finish codes in the room finish schedule or shown for other locations.1.2 MANUFACTURERSManufacturer’s trade names and numbers used herein are only to identify colors, finishes, textures and patterns. Products of other manufacturer’s equivalent to colors, finishes, textures and patterns of manufacturers listed that meet requirements of technical specifications will be acceptable upon approval in writing by contracting officer for finish requirements. 1.3 SUBMITALSSubmit in accordance with SECTION 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES provide quadruplicate samples for color approval of materials and finishes specified in this section. 1.4 applicable publicationsA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.B.MASTER PAINTING INSTITUTE: (MPI)2001Architectural Painting Specification ManualPART 2- PRODUCTS2.9 Division 09 - FINISHESPART III EXECUTION3.1 FINISH SCHEDULES.FINISH SPECIFICATION LEGEND.SYMBOLDESCRIPTIONMANUFACTURERSTYLE/COLORREMARKSACT-1ACOUSTICAL TILEUSGMARS CLIMAPLUS HIGH NRC 2' X 2'GENERALCT-1Ceramic TileDaltileSan Michele / SI3212121P* Tile size: 12” x 12” * Type: Si32 MOKA Cross-cut STD* Grout: TBDRestroom Floor TileCT-2Ceramic TileDaltilePolaris / Gloss Almond DT / PL22? (Deco)* Tile size: 4” x 12” * Grid Pattern* Grout: TBDRestroom Wall TileCPT-1Carpet TileShawKnit Tile 59492 / Sterling 91150 * Tile size: 24” x 24” * Monolithic installationOfficesLVT-1Vinyl TileManningtonNature’s Path Select Tile / Birdseye Maple / Champagne 12220* Tile size18” x 18” Corridor / LobbyPL-1Plastic LaminateLaminartFrench Cherry wood, Velva-Tex Finish / 7950-VTMillworkPNT-1PaintBenjamin MooreSonnet / AF-55General Paint (Office, Restroom, Mech.)PNT-2PaintBenjamin MooreBrookline Beige / HC-47Corridor PaintPNT-3PaintBenjamin Moore1155 / Cappuccino MuffinCorridor Niche and associated Door FramesPNT-4PaintBenjamin Moore1131 / Autumn LeafKitchen PaintSSM-1Solid Surface MaterialCorianSorrelKitchenRF-2Rubber FloorCapri CorkSequel Rubber Cork / Lead #SQ5011* Tile size: 19 11/16” x 19 11/16” x 3 mmKitchenVCT-1Vinyl Composition TileManningtonEssentials Standard VCT / 107 BisqueMechanical RoomWB-1Rubber Wall BaseJohnsonite/ Traditional Wall Base / 45 Sanalwood WB *4” Cove baseGeneral, not in Restroom--- E N D---SECTION 09 22 16NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMINGPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.This section specifies steel studs wall systems ceiling or soffit suspended or furred framing, wall furring, fasteners, and accessories for the screw attachment of gypsum board, plaster bases or other building boards. 1.2 RELATED WORK A.Ceiling suspension systems for acoustical panels: Section 09 51 00, ACOUSTICAL CEILINGSB.Gypsum Board panels: Section 09 29 00, GYPSUM BOARD.1.3 TERMINOLOGY A.Description of terms shall be in accordance with ASTM C754, ASTM C11, ASTM C841 and as specified. B.Underside of Structure Overhead: In spaces where steel trusses or bar joists are located, the underside of structure overhead shall be the underside of the roof construction supported by beams, trusses, or bar joists.C.Thickness of steel specified is the minimum bare (uncoated) steel thickness. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Studs, runners and accessories. 2.Hanger inserts. 3.Channels (Rolled steel). 4.Furring channels. 5.Screws, clips and other fasteners. 6.Typical assemblies for fire rated construction.C.Test Results: Fire rating test designation, each fire rating required for each assembly. 1.5 DELIVERY, IDENTIFICATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A.In accordance with the requirements of ASTM C754. 1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) A123-09Zinc (Hot-dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel ProductsA653/A653M-09Steel Sheet, ZincCoated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the HotDip Process A64109ZincCoated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire C1110Terminology Relating to Gypsum and Related Building Materials and Systems C63507Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension System for Acoustical Tile and Layin Panel Ceilings C63606Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Layin Panels C64509NonStructural Steel Framing Members C75409Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive ScrewAttached Gypsum Panel Products C84103(R2008)Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring C954-07Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in ThicknessPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PROTECTIVE COATING A.Galvanize steel studs, runners (track), rigid (hat section) furring channels, and rolled channels, with coating designation of G-60 minimum, per ASTM 123.2.2 STEEL STUDS AND RUNNERS (TRACK) A.ASTM C645, modified for thickness specified and sizes as shown. 1.Use ASTM A525 steel, 0.8 mm (0.0329-inch) thick bare metal (33 mil). 2.Runners same thickness as studs. B.Curved (contour) track for flexible framing, to be used in main curved wall.1.ASTM C6452.20 or 25 gaugeC.Provide not less than two cutouts in web of each stud, approximately 300 mm (12 inches) from each end, and intermediate cutouts on approximately 600 mm (24inch) centers. D.Doubled studs for openings and studs for supporting concrete backerboard.E.Studs 3600 mm (12 feet) or less in length shall be in one piece. 2.3 FURRING CHANNELS A.Rigid furring channels (hat shape): ASTM C645. B.Rolled Steel Channels: ASTM C754, cold rolled; or, ASTM C841, cold rolled.2.4 FASTENERS, CLIPS, AND OTHER METAL ACCESSORIES A.ASTM C754, except as otherwise specified. B.For fire rated construction: Type and size same as used in fire rating test. C.Fasteners for steel studs thicker than 0.84 mm (0.033inch) thick. Use ASTM C954 steel drill screws of size and type recommended by the manufacturer of the material being fastened. D.Clips: ASTM C841 (paragraph 6.11), manufacturer’s standard items. Clips used in lieu of tie wire shall have holding power equivalent to that provided by the tie wire for the specific application. E.Concrete ceiling hanger inserts (anchorage for hanger wire and hanger straps): Steel, zinccoated (galvanized), manufacturers standard items, designed to support twice the hanger loads imposed and the type of hanger used. F.Tie Wire and Hanger Wire: 1.ASTM A641, soft temper, Class 1 coating. 2.Gage (diameter) as specified in ASTM C754 or ASTM C841.2.5 SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM FOR GYPSUM BOARDA.Conform to ASTM C635, heavy duty, with not less than 35 mm (13/8 inch) wide knurled capped flange face designed for screw attachment of gypsum board. B.Wall track channel with 35 mm (13/8 inch) wide flange.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION CRITERIA A.Where fire rated construction is required for walls, partitions, columns, beams and floorceiling assemblies, the construction shall be same as that used in fire rating test.B.Construction requirements for fire rated assemblies and materials shall be as shown and specified, the provisions of the Scope paragraph (1.2) of ASTM C754 and ASTM C841 regarding details of construction shall not apply.3.2 INSTALLING STUDS A.Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754, except as otherwise shown or specified. B.Space studs not more than 406 mm (16 inches) on center. C.Cut studs 6 mm to 9 mm (1/4 to 3/8inch) less than floor to underside of structure overhead. D.Extend studs to underside of structure overhead. E.Openings: 1.Frame jambs of openings in stud partitions and furring with two studs placed back to back or as shown. Framing at openings shall have a minimum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.0396 Inches).2.Fasten back to back studs together with 9 mm (3/8inch) long Type S pan head screws at not less than 600 mm (two feet) on center, staggered along webs. 3.Studs fastened flange to flange shall have splice plates on both sides approximately 50 X 75 mm (2 by 3 inches) screwed to each stud with two screws in each stud. Locate splice plates at 600 mm (24 inches) on center between runner tracks. F.Fastening Studs: 1.Fasten studs located adjacent to partition intersections, corners and studs at jambs of openings to flange of runner tracks with two screws through each end of each stud and flange of runner.2.Do not fasten studs to top runner track when studs extend to underside of structure overhead. G.Chase Wall Partitions: 1.Locate cross braces for chase wall partitions to permit the installation of pipes, conduits, carriers and similar items. 2.Use studs or runners as cross bracing not less than 63 mm (21/2 inches wide). 3.3 INSTALLING WALL FURRING FOR FINISH APPLIED TO ONE SIDE ONLY A.In accordance with ASTM C754, or ASTM C841 except as otherwise specified or shown. B.Wall furringStud System: 1.Framed with 63 mm (21/2 inch) or narrower studs, 406 mm (16 inches) on center. 2.Brace as specified in ASTM C754 for Wall FurringStud System or brace with sections or runners or studs placed horizontally at not less than three foot vertical intervals on side without finish. 3.Securely fasten braces to each stud with two Type S pan head screws at each bearing. C.Installing Wall FurringBracket System: Space furring channels not more than 400 mm (16 inches) on center. 3.4 INSTALLING SUPPORTS REQUIRED BY OTHER TRADES A.Provide for attachment and support of electrical outlets, plumbing, heating fixtures, recessed type plumbing fixture accessories, access panel frames, wall bumpers, toilet stall partitions, urinal screens, wallhung casework, handrail brackets, recessed fire extinguisher cabinets, baby changing tables, televisions, and other items like auto door buttons and auto door operators supported by stud construction. B.Provide additional studs where required. Install metal backing plates, or special metal shapes as required, securely fastened to metal studs. 3.5 INSTALLING FURRED AND SUSPENDED CEILINGS OR SOFFITS A.Install furred and suspended ceilings or soffits in accordance with ASTM C754 or ASTM C841 except as otherwise specified or shown for screw attached gypsum board ceilings and for plaster ceilings or soffits. 1.Space framing at 600 mm (24-inch) centers for gypsum board anchorage.B.Where bar joists or beams are more than 1200 mm (48 inches) apart, provide intermediate hangers so that spacing between supports does not exceed 1200 mm (48 inches). Use clips, bolts, or wire ties for direct attachment to steel framing.C.Existing concrete construction exposed or concrete on steel decking: 1.Use power actuated fasteners either eye pin, threaded studs or drive pins for type of hanger attachment required. 2.Install fasteners at approximate mid height of concrete beams or joists. Do not install in bottom of beams or joists. D.Steel decking without concrete topping: 1.Do not fasten to steel decking 0.76 mm (0.0299inch) or thinner. 2.Toggle bolt to decking 0.9 mm (0.0359inch) or thicker only where anchorage to steel framing is not possible. E.Installing suspended ceiling system for gypsum board (ASTM C635): 1.Install only for ceilings to receive screw attached gypsum board. 2.Install in accordance with ASTM C636. a.Install main runners spaced 1200 mm (48 inches) on center. b.Install 1200 mm (four foot) tees not over 600 mm (24 inches) on center; locate for edge support of gypsum board. c.Install wall track channel at perimeter. F.Installing Ceiling Bracing System: 1.Construct bracing of 38 mm (11/2 inch) channels for lengths up to 2400 mm (8 feet) and 50 mm (2 inch) channels for lengths over 2400 mm (8 feet) with ends bent to form surfaces for anchorage to carrying channels and over head construction. Lap channels not less than 600 mm (2 feet) at midpoint back to back. Screw or bolt lap together with two fasteners. 2.Install bracing at an approximate 45 degree angle to carrying channels and structure overhead; secure as specified to structure overhead with two fasteners and to carrying channels with two fasteners or wire ties. 3.For exterior soffits, install cross bracing and framing made of galvanized studs or channels to resist wind uplift.3.6 TOLERANCES A.Fastening surface for application of subsequent materials shall not vary more than 3 mm (1/8inch) from the layout line. B.Plumb and align vertical members within 3 mm (1/8inch.) C.Level or align ceilings within 3 mm (1/8inch.) E N D SECTION 09 29 00GYPSUM BOARDPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies installation and finishing of interior and exterior gypsum board.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Installation of steel framing members for walls, partitions, furring, interior and exterior soffits, and ceilings: Section 09 22 16, NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING.B.Acoustical Sealants: Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.1.3 TERMINOLOGYA.Definitions and description of terms shall be in accordance with ASTM C11, C840, and as specified.B.Underside of Structure Overhead: The underside of the floor or roof construction supported by the trusses or bar joists.C."Yoked": Gypsum board cut out for opening with no joint at the opening (along door jamb or above the door).1.4 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:1.Cornerbead and edge trim.2.Finishing materials.3.Laminating adhesive.4.Gypsum board, each type.5.Joint compound.6.Joint tape.7.Fire rated assemblies.8.Verification of compliance with requirements for recycled content.C.Test Results:1.Fire rating test, each fire rating required for each assembly.2.Sound rating test.1.5 DELIVERY, IDENTIFICATION, HANDLING AND STORAGEA.In accordance with the requirements of ASTM C840.1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONSA.In accordance with the requirements of ASTM C840.1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society for Testing And Materials (ASTM):C11-08Terminology Relating to Gypsum and Related Building Materials and SystemsC475-02Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum BoardC840-08Application and Finishing of Gypsum BoardC919-08Sealants in Acoustical ApplicationsC954-07Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Stud from 0.033 in. (0.84mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84mm) in thicknessC1002-07Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel StudsC1047-05Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer BaseC1177-06Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as SheathingC1658-06Glass Mat Gypsum PanelsC1396-06Gypsum BoardE84-08Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsC.Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):Latest EditionFire Resistance DirectoryD.Intertek Testing Services (ITS):Latest EditionsCertification ListingsPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 GYPSUM BOARDA.Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396, Type X, 16 mm (5/8 inch) thick unless shown otherwise. Product shall contain a minimum of 20 percent recycled gypsum.B.Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness. Use minimum two layers at locations where radious gypsum board finish is required.1.Thickness: 6.4mm (1/4 inch) 2.Long Edges: TaperedC.Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C620, Type X, 16 mm (5/8 inch) thick.D.Gypsum cores shall contain a minimum of 95 percent post industrial recycled gypsum content. Paper facings shall contain 100 percent post-consumer recycled paper content.Panels for exterior sheathing and soffitsA.Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated.B.Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM?C?1177/C?1177M.Flame Spread and Smoke Developed: 0/0 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.Surface Material: Glass mat.Flexural Strength: 80 pounds (36 g).Permeance: Not greater than 23 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.R Value: 1.12 per inch of thickness.See Editing Instruction No.?1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming products and manufacturers.Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type?X.2.3 ACCESSORIESA.ASTM C1047, except formed of 0.39 mm (0.015 inch) thick zinc coated steel sheet. PVC plastic accessories will not be acceptable.1.Corner Beads: 32 mm x 32 mm (1? inch x 1? inch) flat flanges, continuous for the full length or height of each outside corner similar to Durabead Corner Bead No. 103 as manufactured by USG.2.Casing Beads: L shaped beads designed to be invisible when joint compound is applied similar to L Trim No. 200-B as manufactured by USG.3.Control Joints: Recessed flexible joint similar to Control Joint No. 093 as manufactured by USG.B.Flanges not less than 22 mm (7/8 inch) wide with punchouts or deformations as required to provide compound bond.C.Acoustic Insulation/Sound Attenuation Blankets: Mineral wool with a density of not less than 0.9kg/0.03 cubic meters (2 pounds/cubic foot). Thickness shall be 89 mm (3? inches) unless indicated otherwise.2.4 FASTENERSA.ASTM C1002 and ASTM C840, except as otherwise specified.B.ASTM C954, for steel studs thicker than 0.04 mm (0.33 inch).C.Select screws of size and type recommended by the manufacturer of the material being fastened. Fasteners used in damp interior locations and all exterior locations shall be galvanized.D.For fire rated construction, type and size same as used in fire rating test.E.Clips: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; gypsum board manufacturer's standard items.2.5 FINISHING MATERIALS AND LAMINATING ADHESIVEA.ASTM C475 and ASTM C840. Free of antifreeze, vinyl adhesives, preservatives, biocides and other VOC. Adhesive shall contain a maximum VOC content of 50 g/l.B.Joint Tape: Fiberglass, self-adhesive joint tape.C.Joint Compound: All purpose setting type or ready-mixed joint compound suitable for filling, joint treatment, finishing corners and installing trim. Comply with ASTM C475.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 ply with manufacturer’s instructions for environmental conditions.B.Do not permit dust from finishing to migrate into occupied areas or ventilation system.C.Patch around new and existing wall penetrations to prevent passage of smoke.3.2 GYPSUM BOARD HEIGHTSA.Extend all layers of gypsum board from floor to underside of structure overhead, unless shown otherwise.3.3 INSTALLING GYPSUM BOARDA.Coordinate installation of gypsum board with other trades and related work.B.Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840, except as otherwise specified.C.Moisture and Mold–Resistant Assemblies: Provide and install moisture and mold-resistant glass mat gypsum wallboard products with moisture-resistant surfaces complying with ASTM C1658 where shown and in locations which might be subject to moisture exposure during construction. D.Use gypsum boards in maximum practical lengths to minimize number of end joints.E.Bring gypsum board into contact, but do not force into place.F.Ceilings use perpendicular application.G.Walls:1.When gypsum board is installed parallel to framing members, space fasteners 300 mm (12 inches) on center in field of the board, and 200 mm (8 inches) on center along edges.2.When gypsum board is installed perpendicular to framing members, space fasteners 300 mm (12 inches) on center in field and along edges.3.Stagger screws on abutting edges or ends.4.For single-ply construction, apply gypsum board with long dimension either parallel or perpendicular to framing members as required to minimize number of joints.5.For two-ply gypsum board assemblies, apply base ply of gypsum board to assure minimum number of joints in face layer. Apply face ply of wallboard to base ply so that joints of face ply do not occur at joints of base ply with joints over framing members.6.No offset in exposed face of walls and partitions will be permitted because of single-ply and two-ply application requirements.H.Acoustical or Sound Rated Partitions, Fire and Smoke Partitions:1.Cut gypsum board for a space approximately 3 mm to 6 mm (1/8 to 1/4 inch) wide around partition perimeter.2.Coordinate for application of caulking or sealants to space prior to taping and finishing.3.For sound rated partitions, use sealing compound (ASTM C919) to fill the annular spaces between all receptacle boxes and the partition finish material through which the boxes protrude to seal all holes and/or openings on the back and sides of the boxes. STC minimum values as shown.Exterior Soffits and Ceilings: Apply exterior soffit board panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations.Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws at 8-inches (203mm) o.c.Apply joint tape over joints and embed in setting type joint compound.Skim coat surface with setting type joint compound for smooth finish suitable for painting.J.Accessories:1.Set accessories plumb, level and true to line, neatly mitered at corners and intersections, and securely attach to supporting surfaces as specified.2.Install in one piece, without the limits of the longest commercially available lengths.3.Corner Beads:a.Install at all vertical and horizontal external corners and where shown.b.Use screws only. Do not use crimping tool.4.Edge Trim (casings Beads):a.Where gypsum board terminates against dissimilar materials and at perimeter of openings, except where covered by flanges, casings or permanently built-in equipment.b.Where gypsum board surfaces of non-load bearing assemblies abut load bearing members.c.Where shown.3.4 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARDA.Finish joints, edges, corners, and fastener heads in accordance with ASTM C840. 1.Use Level 4 finish for all finished areas open to public view.2.Use Level 3 finish for areas concealed behind millwork, lockers and other built-in items as well as on occupied side of temporary partitions.3.Use Level 2 finish for areas above ceiling and construction side of temporary partitions.4.Ensure that all joints are finished to a level that complies with requirements for fire rating.B.Before proceeding with installation of finishing materials, assure the following:1.Gypsum board is fastened and held close to framing or furring.2.Fastening heads in gypsum board are slightly below surface in dimple formed by driving tool.C.Finish joints, fasteners, and all openings, including openings around penetrations, on that part of the gypsum board extending above suspended ceilings to seal surface of non decorated portion of smoke barrier, fire rated, and sound rated gypsum board construction. After the installation of hanger rods, hanger wires, supports, equipment, conduits, piping and similar work, seal remaining openings and maintain the integrity of the smoke barrier, fire rated, and sound rated construction. Sanding is not required of non decorated surfaces.3.5 REPAIRSA.After taping and finishing has been completed, and before decoration, repair all damaged and defective work, including nondecorated surfaces.B.Patch holes or openings 13 mm (1/2 inch) or less in diameter, or equivalent size, with a setting type finishing compound or patching plaster.C.Repair holes or openings over 13 mm (1/2 inch) diameter, or equivalent size, with 16 mm (5/8 inch) thick gypsum board secured in such a manner as to provide solid substrate equivalent to undamaged surface.D.Tape and refinish scratched, abraded or damaged finish surfaces including cracks and joints in non decorated surface to provide smoke tight construction, fire protection equivalent to the fire rated construction and STC equivalent to the sound rated construction.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 09 30 13CERAMIC/PORCELAIN TILINGPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.This section specifies ceramic tile, and marble thresholds.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Sealing of joints where specified: Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.B.Finishes: Ceramic tile products and installation are specified in this Section. Color, finish and location are indicated on the drawings.1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Samples:1.Ceramic tile, each type, each color, each size to be installed.2.Trim shapes, bullnose cap and cove including bullnose cap and base pieces at internal and external corners of vertical surfaces for each type of tile.C.Product Data:1.Ceramic marked to show each type, size, and shape required.2.Leveling compound.3.LatexPortland cement mortar and grout.4.Waterproofing isolation membrane.D.Certification:1.Master grade, ANSI A137.1.2.Manufacturer's certificates indicating that the proposed materials and products comply with specification requirements:1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A.Deliver materials in containers with labels legible and intact and gradeseals unbroken.B.Store material to prevent damage or contamination. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.B.American National Standards Institute (ANSI):A10.20-05Safety Requirements for Ceramic Tile, Terrazzo, and Marble WorksA108.4-05Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy AdhesivesA108.5-05Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement MortarA108.6-05Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and Grouting EpoxyA118.1-05Dry-Set Portland Cement MortarA118.4-05Latex-Portland Cement MortarA118.5-05Chemical Resistant Furan Mortars and Grouts for Tile InstallationA118.6-05Standard Cement Grouts for Tile InstallationA118.9-05Cementitious Backer UnitsA136.1-05Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic TileA137.1-88Ceramic TileAmerican Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM): C109/C109M-07Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2 inch. or [50-mm] Cube Specimens)C24190 (R2005)Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot TrafficC348-02Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-Cement MortarsC97905Pigments for Integrally Colored ConcreteC1027-99(R2004)Determining “Visible Abrasion Resistance on Glazed Ceramic Tile”C1178/C1178M-06Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing PanelD5109-99(R2004)Standard Test Methods for Copper-Clad Thermosetting Laminates for Printed Wiring BoardsD.Marble Institute of America (MIA): Design Manual III2007 E.Tile Council of America, Inc. (TCA):2007Handbook for Ceramic Tile InstallationPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE ply with ANSI A137.1, Standard Grade, except as modified:1.Inspection procedures listed under the Appendix of ANSI A137.1.2.Abrasion Resistance Classification:a.Tested in accordance with values listed in Table 1, ASTM C 1027.b.Class V, 12000 revolutions for floors in Corridors, Kitchens, Storage including Refrigerated Rooms c.Class IV, 6000 revolutions for remaining areas.3.Factory Blending: For tile with color variations, within the ranges selected during sample submittals blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples.4.Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: a.Protect exposed face surfaces (top surface) of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by pre-coating with a continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot.b.Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.c.Pre-wax tiles set or grouted with latex modified mortars.B.Floor Tile (CT-1): 1.Product Description: Porcelain tile2.Product: San Michele as manufactured by Daltile. (SI3212121P)3.Size: 304mm x 304mm (12 inch x 12 inch).4.Thickness: 9mm (3/8 inch).5.Color: MOKA Si32 (Cross-Cut Field Tile) C.Wall Tile (CT-2): 1.Product Description: Wall Glazed tile2.Product: Polaris as manufactured by Daltile.3.Size: 304mm x 457mm (12 inch x 18 inch).4.Thickness: 9 mm (3/8 inch).5.Color: MOKA Si32 (Cross-Cut Field Tile) 6.Installation: Brick Pattern (vertical orientation) D.Trim Shapes:1.Conform to applicable requirements of adjoining floor and wall tile.2.Use trim shapes sizes conforming to size of adjoining field wall tile unless detailed or specified otherwise.3.Internal and External Corners:a.Square internal and external corner joints are not acceptable.b.External corners including edges: Use bullnose shapes.c.Internal corners: Use cove shapes.d.Base to floor internal corners: Use special shapes providing integral cove vertical and horizontal joint.e.Base to floor external corners: Use special shapes providing bullnose vertical edge with integral cove horizontal joint. Use stop at bottom of openings having bullnose return to wall.f.Wall top edge internal corners: Use special shapes providing integral cove vertical joint with bullnose top edge.g.Wall top edge external corners: Use special shapes providing bullnose vertical and horizontal joint edge.h.For unglazed ceramic mosaic and glazed wall tile installed in Portland cement mortar setting bed, use cove and bullnose shapes as applicable. When ceramic mosaic wall and base tile is required, use C Series cove and bullnose shapes.i.For unglazed ceramic mosaic and glazed wall tile installed in dryset Portland cement mortar, latexPortland cement mortar, and organic adhesive (thin set methods), use cove and surfacebullnose shapes as applicable2.2 SETTING MATERIALS OR BOND COATS A.Conform to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.B.LatexPortland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4.1.For wall applications, provide non-sagging, latex-Portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A118.4.2.Prepackaged Dry-Mortar Mix: Factory-prepared mixture of Portland cement; dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to which only water needs to be added at Project site.D.DrySet Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1. For wall applications, provide non-sagging, latex-Portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A118.4.H.Waterproofing Isolation Membrane:1.Sheet System TCA F122-02.2.Optional System to elastomeric waterproof membrane.posite sheet consisting of ASTM D5109, Type II, Grade I Chlorinated Polyethylene (CM) sheet reinforced on both sides with a non-woven polyester fiber.4.Designed for use in wet areas as an isolation and positive waterproofing membranes for thin-set bonding of sheet to substrate and thin-set bonding of ceramic and porcelain tile or marble to sheet. Suited for both horizontal and vertical applications.5.Conform to the following additional physical properties:PropertyUnitsResultsTest MethodHardness Shore APoints70-80ASTM D2240 (10 Second Reading)ShrinkagePercent5 maximumASTM D1204BrittlenessNo crack remains flexible at temperature-37 degrees C (-25 degrees F)ASTM D2497 13 mm (1/2- inch) Mandrel BendRetention of Properties after Heat AgingPercent of original80 Tensile80 Breaking80 ElongationASTM D3045, 90 degrees C (194 degrees F) for 168 hours6.Manufacturer’s standard sheet size with prefabricated or preformed inside and outside corners.7.Sheet manufacturer’s solvent welding liquid or xylene and edge sealant.2.3 GROUTING MATERIALS A.Coloring Pigments: 1.Pure mineral pigments, limeproof and nonfading, complying with ASTM C979.2.Add coloring pigments to grout by the manufacturer. 3.Job colored grout is not acceptable.4.Use is required in Commercial Portland Cement Grout, DrySet Grout, and LatexPortland Cement Grout.5. Color: TO BE SELECTEDB.LatexPortland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6 color as specified.1.Unsanded grout mixture for joints 3.2 mm (1/8 inch) and narrower.2.Sanded grout mixture for joints 3.2 mm (1/8 inch) and wider.2.4 PATCHING AND LEVELING COMPOUND A.Portland cement base, polymer-modified, self-leveling compound, manufactured specifically for resurfacing and leveling concrete floors. Products containing gypsum are not acceptable.B.Shall have minimum following physical properties: pressive strength 25 MPa (3500 psig) per ASTM C109/C109M.2.Flexural strength 7 MPa (1000 psig) per ASTM C348 (28 day value).3.Tensile strength - 600 psi per ANSI 118.7.4.Density – 1.9. C.Capable of being applied in layers up to 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) thick without fillers and up to 100 mm (four inches) thick with fillers, being brought to a feather edge, and being trowelled to a smooth finish.D.Primers, fillers, and reinforcement as required by manufacturer for application and substrate condition.E.Ready for use in 48 hours after application. 2.5 MARBLEA.Soundness Classification in accordance with MIA Design Manual III Groups.B.Thresholds:1.Group A, Minimum abrasive hardness (Ha) of 10.0 per ASTM C241.2.Honed finish on exposed faces.3.Thickness and contour as shown on drawings. Bevels and slopes shall comply with the requirements of the ADA and ABA Accessibility Guidelines and the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards, whichever is the most restrictive.4.Fabricate from one piece without holes, cracks, or open seams; full depth of wall or frame opening by full width of wall or frame opening; 19 mm (3/4-inch) minimum thickness and 6 mm (1/4-inch) minimum thickness at beveled edge.5.Set not more than 13 mm (1/2-inch) above adjoining finished floor surfaces, with transition edges beveled on a slope of no greater than 1:2. On existing floor slabs provide 13 mm (1/2-inch) above ceramic tile surface with bevel edge joint top flush with adjacent floor.6.One piece full width of door opening. 2.6 WATER A.Clean, potable and free from salts and other injurious elements to mortar and grout materials.2.7 CLEANING COMPOUNDS A.Specifically designed for cleaning masonry and concrete and which will not prevent bond of subsequent tile setting materials including patching and leveling compounds and elastomeric waterproofing membrane and coat.B.Materials containing acid or caustic material not acceptable.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Maintain ambient temperature of work areas at not less than 16 degree C (60 degrees F), without interruption, for not less than 24 hours before installation and not less than three days after installation.B.Maintain higher temperatures for a longer period of time where required by manufacturer's recommendation and ANSI Specifications for installation.C.Do not install tile when the temperature is above 38 degrees C (100 degrees F).D.Do not install materials when the temperature of the substrate is below 16 degrees C (60 degrees F).E.Do not allow temperature to fall below 10 degrees C (50 degrees F) after fourth day of completion of tile work.3.2 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCE A.Variation in plane of subfloor, including concrete fills leveling compounds and mortar beds:1.Not more than 1 in 1000 (1/8 inch in 10 feet).B.Variation in Plane of Wall Surfaces:1.Not more than 1 in 800 (1/8 inch in eight feet).3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A.Patching and Leveling: 1.Mix and apply patching and leveling compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.2.Fill holes and cracks and align concrete floors that are out of required plane with patching and leveling compound.a.Thickness of compound as required to bring finish tile system to elevation shown.b.Float finish.c.At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment.3.Apply patching and leveling compound to concrete and masonry wall surfaces that are out of required plane.4.Apply leveling coats of material compatible with wall surface and tile setting material to wall surfaces, other than concrete and masonry that are out of required plane.B.Walls: 1.Apply leveling coats of material compatible with wall surface and tile setting material to wall surfaces, other than concrete and masonry that are out of required plane.3.4 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS A.Remove polyethylene wrapping from cementitious backer units and separate to allow for air circulation. Allow moisture content of backer units to dry down to a maximum of 35 percent before applying joint treatment and tile.B.Install in accordance with ANSI A108.11 except as specified otherwise.C.Install units horizontally or vertically to minimize joints with end joints over framing members. Units with rounded edges; face rounded edge away from studs to form a V joint for joint treatment.D.Secure cementitious backer units to each framing member with screws spaced not more than 200 mm (eight inches) on center and not closer than 13 mm (1/2 inch) from the edge of the backer unit or as recommended by backer unit manufacturer. Install screws so that the screw heads are flush with the surface of the backer unit.E.Where backer unit joins shower pans or waterproofing, lap backer unit over turned up waterproof system. Install fasteners only through top one-inch of turned up waterproof systems.F.Do not install joint treatment for seven days after installation of cementitious backer unit.G.Joint Treatment: 1.Fill horizontal and vertical joints and corners with latexPortland cement mortar. Apply fiberglass tape over joints and corners and embed with same mortar.2.Leave 6 mm (1/4 inch) space for sealant at lips of tubs, sinks, or other plumbing receptors.3.5 MARBLE A.Secure thresholds and stools in position with minimum of two stainless steel dowels.B.Set in dryset Portland cement mortar or latexPortland cement mortar bond coat.3.6 CERAMIC TILE GENERAL ply with ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" applicable to methods of installation.ply with TCA Installation Guidelines:D.Setting Beds or Bond Coats:1.Set floor tile in elastomeric bond coat over elastomeric membrane ANSI 108. 13, TCA System F122.2.Set tile installed over gypsum board and gypsum plaster in organic adhesive, ANSI A108.4, TCA System W242-02.3.Set trim shapes in same material specified for setting adjoining tile.E.Workmanship: 1.Lay out tile work so that no tile less than onehalf full size is used. Make all cuts on the outer edge of the field. 2.Set tile firmly in place with finish surfaces in true planes. 3.Form intersections and returns accurately.4.Cut and drill tile neatly without marring surface.5.Cut edges of tile abutting penetrations, finish, or builtin items: a.Fit tile closely around electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and fittings, so that plates, escutcheons, collars and flanges will overlap cut edge of tile.b.Seal tile joints water tight as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS, around electrical outlets, piping fixtures and fittings before cover plates and escutcheons are set in place.pleted work shall be free from hollow sounding areas and loose, cracked or defective tile.7.Remove and reset tiles that are out of plane or misaligned.8.Floors:a.Extend floor tile beneath casework and equipment, except those units mounted in wall recesses.b.Align finish surface of new tile work flush with other and existing adjoining floor finish where shown.c.In areas where floor drains occur, slope to drains where shown.d.Shove and vibrate tiles over 200 mm (8 inches) square to achieve full support of bond coat.9.Walls:a.Cover walls to nominal wainscot heights shown with tile.b.Finish reveals of openings with tile, except where other finish materials are shown or specified.c.Finish wall surfaces behind and at sides of casework and equipment, except those units mounted in wall recesses, with same tile as scheduled for room proper.10.Joints:a.Keep all joints in line, straight, level, perpendicular and of even width unless shown otherwise.b.Make joints 2 mm (1/16 inch) wide for glazed wall tile and mosaic tile work.3.7 THIN SET CERAMIC and porcelain TILE INSTALLED WITH DRYSET PORTLAND CEMENT AND LATEX-PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR A.Installation of Tile: ANSI A108.5, except as specified otherwise. B.Slope tile work to drains not less than 1 in 100 (1/8 inch per foot). 3.8 THIN SET CERAMIC and porcelain TILE INSTALLED WITH ORGANIC ADHESIVE A.Installation of Tile: ANSI A108.4. 3.9 GROUTINGA.Grout Type and Location: Grout for glazed wall and base tile, latex-Portland cement grout.B.Workmanship: Install and cure grout in accordance with the applicable standard.3.10 CLEANING A.Thoroughly sponge and wash tile. Polish glazed surfaces with clean dry cloths.B.Methods and materials used shall not damage or impair appearance of tile surfaces.C.The use of acid or acid cleaners on glazed tile surfaces is prohibited.D.Clean tile grouted with epoxy, furan and commercial Portland cement grout and tile set in elastomeric bond coat as recommended by the manufacturer of the grout and bond coat.3.11 PROTECTION A.Keep traffic off tile floor, until grout and setting material is firmly set and cured.B.Where traffic occurs over tile floor, cover tile floor with not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch) thick plywood, wood particle board, or hardboard securely taped in place. Do not remove protective cover until time for final inspection. Clean tile of any tape, adhesive and stains. E N D SECTION 09 51 00ACOUSTICAL CEILINGSPART 1- GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.Metal ceiling suspension system for acoustical ceilings.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings: Section 09 22 16, NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING B.Finishes: Acoustical ceiling products and installation are specified in this Section. Specific ceiling panels and their location are indicated on the drawings.1.3 SUBMITTALA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Samples:1.Acoustical units, each type, with label indicating conformance to specification requirements.2.Ceiling suspension system components.C.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:1.Ceiling suspension system, each type, showing complete details of installation.1.4 DEFINITIONSA.Standard definitions as defined in ASTM C634.B.Terminology as defined in ASTM E1264.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A641/A641M-03Zinc-coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire A653/A653M-07Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip ProcessC423-07Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room MethodC634-02 (E2007)Standard Terminology Relating to Environmental AcousticsC635-04Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel CeilingsC636-06Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in PanelsE84-07Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsE119-07Fire Tests of Building Construction and MaterialsE413-04Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.E1264-(R2005)Classification for Acoustical Ceiling ProductsPART 2- PRODUCTS2.1 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMA.ASTM C635, heavy-duty system, except as otherwise specified.1.Ceiling suspension system members may be fabricated from either of the following unless specified otherwise.a.Galvanized cold-rolled steel, bonderized.b.Extruded aluminum.2.Use same construction for cross runners as main runners. Use of lighter-duty sections for cross runners is not acceptable.B.Exposed grid suspension system for support of lay-in panels:1.Exposed grid width not less than 22 mm (7/8 inch) with not less than 8 mm (5/16 inch) panel bearing surface.2.Fabricate wall molding and other special molding from the same material with same exposed width and finish as the exposed grid members.3.On exposed metal surfaces apply baked-on enamel flat texture finish in color to match adjacent acoustical units.2.2 PERIMETER SEALA.Vinyl, polyethylene or polyurethane open cell sponge material having density of 1.3 plus or minus 10 percent, compression set less than 10 percent with pressure sensitive adhesive coating on one side.B.Thickness as required to fill voids between back of wall molding and finish wall.C.Not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch) wide strip.2.3 WIREA.ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, pre-stretched.B.Yield Stress Load: At least three times design load.C.For wire hangers: Minimum diameter 2.68 mm (0.1055 inch).D.For bracing wires: Minimum diameter 3.43 mm (0.1350 inch).2.4 ANCHORS AND INSERTSA.Use anchors or inserts to support twice the loads imposed by hangers attached thereto.B.Hanger Inserts:1.Fabricate inserts from steel, zinc-coated (galvanized after fabrication).2.Nailing type option for wood forms:a.Upper portion designed for anchorage in concrete and positioning lower portion below surface of concrete approximately 25 mm (one inch).b.Lower portion provided with not less than 8 mm (5/16 inch) hole to permit attachment of hangers.3.Flush ceiling insert type:a.Designed to provide a shell covered opening over a wire loop to permit attachment of hangers and keep concrete out of insert recess.b.Insert opening inside shell approximately 16 mm (5/8 inch) wide by 9 mm (3/8 inch) high over top of wire.c.Wire 5 mm (3/16 inch) diameter with length to provide positive hooked anchorage in concrete.C.Clips:1.Galvanized steel.2.Designed to clamp to steel beam or bar joists, or secure framing member together.3.Designed to rigidly secure framing members together.4.Designed to sustain twice the loads imposed by hangers or items supported.2.5 CARRYING CHANNELS FOR SECONDARY FRAMINGA.Fabricate from cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel, black asphaltic paint finish, free of rust.B.Weighing not less than the following, per 300 m (per thousand linear feet):Size mmSizeInchesCold-rolledKgPoundHot-rolledKgPound381 1/2215.44755081120502267.6590571.512602.7 ACOUSTICAL UNITSA.General:1.Ceiling Tile shall meet minimum 37% bio-based content in accordance with USDA Bio-Preferred Product requirements.2.ASTM E1264, weighing 3.6 kg/m2 (3/4 psf) minimum for mineral fiber panels or tile.3.Class A Flame Spread: ASTM 844.Minimum NRC (Noise Reduction Coefficient): 0.55 unless specified otherwise: ASTM C423.5.Minimum CAC (Ceiling Attenuation Class): 40-44 range unless specified otherwise: ASTM E413.6.Manufacturers standard finish, minimum Light Reflectance (LR) coefficient of 0.75 on the exposed surfaces.7.Lay-in panels: Sizes and edge profile as indicated.B.ACT-1, Mineral Fiber Lay-In Ceiling Panels: 1.Basis of Design: Mars ClimaPlus High NRC by USG. (86185)2.Minimum NRC (Noise Reduction Coefficient): 0.70: ASTM C423.3.Minimum CAC (Ceiling Attenuation Class): 35: ASTM E413.4.Light Reflectance (LR) coefficient of .89 on the exposed surfaces.5.Edge/Profile: Square.6.Color: White.7.Size: 600 mm x 600 mm x 19 mm (24 inches X 24 inches X 3/4 inch).PART 3 EXECUTION3.1 CEILING TREATMENTA.Treatment of ceilings shall include sides and soffits of ceiling beams, furred work 600 mm (24 inches) wide and over, and vertical surfaces at changes in ceiling heights unless otherwise shown. Install acoustic tiles after wet finishes have been installed and solvents have cured.B.Lay out acoustical units as shown on reflected ceiling plan.C.Moldings:1.Install metal wall molding at perimeter of room, column, or edge at vertical surfaces.2.Install special shaped molding at changes in ceiling heights and at other breaks in ceiling construction to support acoustical units and to conceal their edges.3.2 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM INSTALLATIONA.General:1.Install metal suspension system for acoustical tile and lay-in panels in accordance with ASTM C636, except as specified otherwise.2.Use direct or indirect hung suspension system or combination thereof as defined in ASTM C635.3.Support a maximum area of 1.48 m2 (16 sf) of ceiling per hanger.4.Prevent deflection in excess of 1/360 of span of cross runner and main runner.5.Provide extra hangers, minimum of one hanger at each corner of each item of mechanical, electrical and miscellaneous equipment supported by ceiling suspension system not having separate support or hangers.6.Provide not less than 100 mm (4 inch) clearance from the exposed face of the acoustical units to the underside of ducts, pipe, conduit, secondary suspension channels, concrete beams or joists; and steel beam or bar joist unless furred system is shown,7.Use main runners not less than 1200 mm (48 inches) in length.8.Install hanger wires vertically. Angled wires are not acceptable except for seismic restraint bracing wires.B.Anchorage to Structure:1.Wood:a.When wood framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels for attachment of hanger wires.(1)Size and space carrying channels to insure that the maximum deflection specified will not be exceeded.(2)Attach hangers to steel carrying channels, spaced four feet on center, unless area supported or deflection exceeds the amount specified.C.Direct Hung Suspension System:1.As illustrated in ASTM C635.2.Support main runners by hanger wires attached directly to the structure overhead.3.Maximum spacing of hangers, 1200 mm (4 feet) on centers unless interference occurs by mechanical systems. Use indirect hung suspension system where not possible to maintain hanger spacing.D.Indirect Hung Suspension System:1.As illustrated in ASTM C635.2.Space carrying channels for indirect hung suspension system not more than 1200 mm (4 feet) on center. Space hangers for carrying channels not more than 2400 mm (8 feet) on center or for carrying channels less than 1200 mm (4 feet) or center so as to insure that specified requirements are not exceeded.3.Support main runners by specially designed clips attached to carrying channels.3.3 ACOUSTICAL UNIT INSTALLATIONA.Cut acoustic units for perimeter borders and penetrations to fit tight against penetration for joint not concealed by molding.B.Install lay-in acoustic panels in exposed grid with not less than 6?mm (1/4 inch) bearing at edges on supports.1.Install tile to lay level and in full contact with exposed grid.2.Replace cracked, broken, stained, dirty, or tile not cut for minimum bearing.3.4 CLEAN-UP AND COMPLETIONA.Replace damaged, discolored, dirty, cracked and broken acoustical units.B.Leave finished work free from defects.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 09 65 13RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIESPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies the installation of rubber base.B.Resilient transition strips for use with resilient flooring and carpet. 1.2 RELATED WORKA.Not UsedB.Carpet: Section 09 68 00, CARPETING.C.Finishes: Resilient base products and installation are specified in this Section. Color and location are indicated on the drawings.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:1.Description of each product.2.Adhesive: Literature indicating each type, application and installation instructions.C.Samples:1.Base: 150 mm (6 inches) long, each type and color.2.Transition Strips: 150 mm (6 inches) long for each available color.1.4 DeliveryA.Deliver materials to the site in original sealed packages or containers, clearly marked with the manufacturer's name or brand, type and color, production run number and date of manufacture.B.Materials from containers which have been distorted, damaged or opened prior to installation will be rejected.1.5 STORAGEA.Store materials in weather tight and dry storage facility.B.Protect material from damage by handling and construction operations before, during, and after installation. 1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publication listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):F1344-10Rubber Floor TileF1861-08Resilient Wall BasePART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 GENERALA.Products identified below are the basis of design. Products of other manufacturers that are equal in quality and appearance will be considered.B.Use only products by the same manufacturer and from the same production run.2.2 RESILIENT BASEA.ASTM F1861, 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick, 101 mm (4 inches) high, Type TP Rubber, Thermoplastics, Group 2-layered with modeled top.B.Products:1.WB-1: 45 Sanalwood WB, 101 mm (4 inches) high as manufactured by Johnsonite.2.3 TRANSITION sTRIPSA.RubberB.Profile: As indicated or necessary to provide transition between the following flooring materials:1.Resilient tile to carpet.C.Color: As selected from the manufacturer’s full range of available colors. 2.5 PRIMER (For Concrete Floors)A.As recommended by the adhesive and tile manufacturer.2.6 ADHESIVESA.Use products recommended by the material manufacturer for the conditions of use.B.Use low-VOC adhesive during installation. Water based adhesive with low VOC is preferred over solvent based adhesive.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 PROJECT CONDITIONSA.Maintain temperature of materials above 21o C (70 F), for 48 hours before installation.B.Maintain temperature of rooms where work occurs, between 21o C and 27o C (70oF and 80oF) for at least 48 hours, before, during, and after installation.C.Do not install materials until building is permanently enclosed and wet construction is complete, dry, and cured.3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTSA.Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.B.Submit proposed installation deviation from this specification to the COTR indicating the differences in the method of installation.3.3 PREPARATIONA.Examine surfaces on which material is to be installed.B.Do not use adhesive for leveling or filling.C.Grind, sand, or cut away protrusions; grind high spots.D.Clean substrate area of oil, grease, dust, paint, and deleterious substances.E.Preparation of existing installation:1.Remove existing base and stair treads including adhesive.2.Do not use solvents to remove adhesives.3.Prepare substrate as specified.3.4 BASE INSTALLATIONA.Location:1.Unless otherwise specified or shown, where base is scheduled, install base over toe space of base of casework, lockers, laboratory, pharmacy furniture island cabinets and where other equipment occurs.2.Extend base scheduled for room into adjacent closet, alcoves, and around columns.B.Application:1.Apply adhesive uniformly with no bare spots.2.Set base with joints aligned and butted to touch for entire height.3.Before starting installation, layout base material to provide the minimum number of joints with no strip less than 600 mm (24 inches) length.a.Short pieces to save material will not be permitted.b.Locate joints as remote from corners as the material lengths or the wall configuration will permit.C.Form corners and end stops as follows:1.Score back of outside corner.2.Score face of inside corner and notch cove.D.Roll base for complete adhesion.3.5 Transition strip installationA.Location: Install transition strip wherever floor finish material changes. Extend transition strip for the full length of the intersection of two materials.B.Installation:1.Apply adhesive uniformly across the full length of the transition strip.2.Ensure that the edge of each floor finish is protected by transition strip.3.Install to provide a smooth transition between finishes of differing thicknesses.3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA.Clean all exposed surfaces of base and adjoining areas of adhesive spatter before it sets.B.Keep traffic off resilient material for at least 72 hours after installation.C.After two weeks, scrub resilient base, sheet rubber and treads materials with a minimum amount of water and a mild detergent. Leave surfaces clean and free of detergent residue. Polish resilient base to a gloss finish.D.Where protective materials are removed and immediately prior to acceptance, replace damaged materials and re-clean resilient materials. Damaged materials are defined as having cuts, gouges, scrapes or tears and not fully adhered.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 09 65 19RESILIENT TILE FLOORINGPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies the installation of vinyl composition tile flooring, rubber tile flooring, and accessories.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Resilient Base: Section 09 65 13, RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES.B. Refer to drawings for location, color and pattern of products specified in this section.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:1.Description of each product.2.Resilient material manufacturer’s recommendations for adhesives, underlayment, primers and polish.3.Application and installation instructions.C.Samples:1.Tile: 300 mm by 300 mm (12 inches by 12 inches) for each type, pattern and color.2.Edge Strips: 150 mm (6 inches) long, each type.3.Feature Strips: 150 mm (6 inches) long.D.Shop Drawings:1.Layout of patterns shown on the drawings.2.Edge strip locations showing types and detail cross sections.E.Test Reports:1.Abrasion resistance: Depth of wear for each tile type and color and volume loss of tile, certified by independent laboratory.2.Tested per ASTM F510.1.4 DELIVERYA.Deliver materials to the site in original sealed packages or containers, clearly marked with the manufacturer's name or brand, type and color, production run number and date of manufacture.B.Materials from containers which have been distorted, damaged or opened prior to installation will be rejected.1.5 STORAGEA.Store materials in weathertight and dry storage facility.B.Protect from damage from handling, water, and temperature.1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):D4078-02 (2008)Water Emulsion Floor FinishE648-10Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Energy SourceE662-09Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid MaterialsE1155-96 (R2008)Determining Floor Flatness and Floor Levelness NumbersF510-93 (R 2008)Resistance to Abrasion of Resilient Floor Coverings Using an Abrader with a Grit Feed MethodF710-08Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient FlooringF1066-04 (R2010)Vinyl Composition Floor TileF1344-10Rubber Floor TileF1700-04 (R2010)Solid Vinyl Floor TileC.Resilient Floor Covering Institute (RFCI):IP #2Installation Practice for Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT)Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):SS-T-312Tile Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl and Vinyl Composition PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 GENERALA.Furnish product type, materials of the same production run and meeting following criteria.B.Use adhesives, underlayment, primers and polish recommended by the floor resilient material manufacturer.C.Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more, Class I, per ASTM E 648.D.Smoke density: Less than 450 per ASTM E662.2.2 VINYL COMPOSITION TILEA.ASTM F1066, Composition 1, //Class I (solid color)// Class 2 (through pattern) //, 300 mm (12 inches) square, 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick.B.Color and pattern uniformly distributed throughout thickness.C.LVT-1: Basis of Design: by Mannington (Luxury Vinyl Tile)1.Color/Style: Nature’s Path Select Tile / Birdseye Maple / Champagne 122202.Size: 18”x18” (457mm x 457mm)D.VCT-1: Basis of Design: by Mannington (Vinyl Composition Tile)1.Color/Style: Essentials Standard VCT / 107 Bisque2.3 RUBBER TILE FLOORA.ASTM F1344, Class 1, homogenous rubber tile, B, through mottled, 300 mm (12 inches) square, 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick.B.Color and pattern uniformly distributed throughout tile.C.Molded pattern wearing surface base thickness 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick.D.Where rubber tile is used provide tiles with a minimum of 90% post consumer rubber.E.RF-2: Basis of Design: by Capri Cork (Rubber Floor)1.Color/Style: Sequel Rubber Cork / Lead #SQ50112.Size: 19 11/16” x 19 11/16” 3.Thickness: 3 mm2.4 ply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials Green Seal (GS-36) for commercial adhesive.B.Use low-VOC adhesive during installation. Water based is preferred over solvent based adhesives.2.5 PRIMER (FOR CONCRETE SUBFLOORS)A.As recommended by the adhesive and tile manufacturer.2.6 LEVELING COMPOUND (For Concrete Floors)A.Provide cementitious products with latex or polyvinyl acetate resins in the mix.B.Determine the type of underlayment selected for use by the condition to be corrected.2.7 POLISH AND CLEANERSA.Cleaners RFCI CL-1.B.Polish: ASTM D4078.2.8 TRANSITIONS STRIPSA.Resilient Edge Strip or Reducer Strip: Fed. Specs. SS-T-312, Solid vinyl.B.As specified in Section 09 65 13, RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES.2.9 FEATURE STRIPSA.Use same material as floor tile.B.Sizes and shapes as shown.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 PROJECT CONDITIONSA.Maintain temperature of materials a minimum of 22 C (70 F,) for 48 hours before installation.B.Maintain temperature of rooms where work occurs between 21 C and 27 C (70 F and 80 F), for at least 48 hours, before, during and after installation.C.Do not install flooring until building is permanently enclosed and wet construction in or near areas to receive tile materials is complete, dry and cured.3.2 SUBFLOOR PREPARATIONA.Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710. At existing slabs, determine levelness by F-number method in accordance with ASTM E1155. Overall value shall not exceed FF30/FL20B.Correct conditions which will impair proper installation.C.Fill cracks, joints and other irregularities in concrete with leveling compound:1.Do not use adhesive for filling or leveling purposes.2.Do not use leveling compound to correct imperfections which can be corrected by spot grinding.3.Trowel to smooth surface free of trowel marks, pits, dents, protrusions, cracks or joints.D.Clean floor of oil, paint, dust, and deleterious substances: Leave floor dry and cured free of residue from existing curing or cleaning agents.E.Concrete Subfloor Testing: Determine Adhesion and dryness of the floor by bond and moisture tests as recommended by RFCI manual MRP.F.Perform additional subfloor preparation to obtain satisfactory adherence of flooring if subfloor test patches allows easy removal of tile.G.Prime the concrete subfloor if the primer will seal slab conditions that would inhibit bonding, or if priming is recommended by the tile or adhesive manufacturers.3.3 INSTALLATIONA.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for application and installation unless specified otherwise.B.Mix tile from at least two containers. An apparent line either of shades or pattern variance will not be accepted.C.Tile Layout:1.If layout is not shown on drawings, lay tile symmetrically about center of room or space with joints aligned.2.No tile shall be less than 150 mm (6 inches) and of equal width at walls.3.Place tile pattern in the same direction; do not alternate tiles.D.Trim tiles to touch for the length of intersections at pipes and vertical projections, seal joints at pipes with waterproof cement.E.Application:1.Apply adhesive uniformly with no bare spots.a.Conform to RFC1-TM-6 for joint tightness and for corner intersection unless layout pattern shows random corner intersection.b.More than 5 percent of the joints not touching will not be accepted.2.Roll tile floor with a minimum 45 kg (100 pound) roller. No exceptions.3.The Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR) may have test tiles removed to check for non-uniform adhesion, spotty adhesive coverage, and ease of removal. Install new tile for broken removed tile.F.Installation of Edge Strips:1.Locate edge strips under center line of doors unless otherwise shown.2.Set resilient edge and transitions strips in adhesive.3.Where tile edge is exposed, butt edge strip to touch along tile edge.4.Where thin set ceramic tile abuts resilient tile, set edge strip against floor file and against the ceramic tile edge.3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA.Clean adhesive marks on exposed surfaces during the application of resilient materials before the adhesive sets. Exposed adhesive is not acceptable.B.Keep traffic off resilient material for a minimum 72 hours after installation.C.Clean and polish materials in the following order:1.For the first two weeks sweep and damp mopped only.2.After two weeks, scrub resilient materials with a minimum amount of water and a mild detergent. Leave surface clean and free of detergent residue.3.Apply polish to the floors in accordance with the polish manufacturer's instructions.D.When construction traffic occurs over tile, cover resilient materials with reinforced kraft paper properly secured and maintained until removal is directed by COTR. At entrances and where wheeled vehicles or carts are used, cover tile with plywood, hardboard, or particle board over paper, secured and maintained until removal is directed by COTR.E.When protective materials are removed and immediately prior to acceptance, replace any damage tile, re-clean resilient materials, lightly re-apply polish and buff floors.3.6 LOCATIONA.Unless otherwise specified or shown, install tile flooring, on floor under areas where casework, millwork furniture and other equipment occurs, except where mounted in wall recesses.B.Extend tile flooring for room into adjacent closets and alcoves.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 09 68 00CARPETINGPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DescriptionA.Section specifies carpet, edge strips, adhesives, and other items required for complete installation.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Resilient wall base and transition strips: Section 09 65 13, RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES.B.Finishes: Carpet and related materials are specified in this Section. Locations are indicated on the drawings. 1.3 Quality assuranceA.Carpet installed by mechanics certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board.B.Certify and label the carpet that it has been tested and meets criteria of CRI IAQ Carpet Testing Program for indoor air quality.1.4 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Product Data:1.Manufacturer’s catalog data and printed documentation stating physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading and flame resistance characteristics for each type of carpet material and installation accessory.2.Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions for the carpet, including preparation of installation substrate, seaming techniques and recommended adhesives and tapes.3.Manufacturer’s certificate verifying carpet containing recycled materials include percentage of recycled materials as specified.C.Samples:1.Carpet: "Production Quality" samples 300 x 300 mm (12 x 12 inches) of carpets, showing quality, pattern and color specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.2.Floor Edge Strip (Molding): 150 mm (6 inches) long of each color and type specified.D.Shop Drawings: Installers layout plan showing seams and cuts for sheet carpet and carpet module.E.Maintenance Data: Carpet manufacturer’s maintenance instructions describing recommended type of cleaning equipment and material, spotting and cleaning methods and cleaning cycles.1.5 delivery and storageA.Deliver carpet in manufacturer’s original wrappings and packages clearly labeled with manufacturer’s name, brand, name, size, dye lot number and related information.B.Deliver adhesives in containers clearly labeled with manufacturer’s name, brand name, number, installation instructions, safety instructions and flash points.C.Store in a clean, dry, well ventilated area, protected from damage and soiling. Maintain storage space at a temperature above 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) for 2 days prior to installation.1.6 environmental requirementsAreas in which carpeting is to be installed shall be maintained at a temperature above 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) for 2 days before installation, during installation and for 2 days after installation. A minimum temperature of 13 degrees C (55 degrees F) shall be maintained thereafter for the duration of the contract. Traffic or movement of furniture or equipment in carpeted area shall not be permitted for 24 hours after installation. Other work which would damage the carpet shall be completed prior to installation of carpet.1.7 warrantyCarpet and installation subject to terms of "Warranty of Construction" FAR clause 52.246-21, except that warranty period is extended to two years. 1.8 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publication listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):ANSI/NSF 140-10Sustainable Carpet Assessment StandardC.American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC):AATCC 16-04Colorfastness to LightAATCC 129-10Colorfastness to Ozone in the Atmosphere under High HumiditiesAATCC 134-11Electric Static Propensity of CarpetsAATCC 165-08Colorfastness to Crocking: Textile Floor Conerings-AATCC Crockmeter MethodD.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):ASTM D1335-05Tuft Bind of Pile Yarn Floor CoveringsASTM D3278-96 (R2004)Flash Point of Liquids by Small Scale Closed-Cup ApparatusASTM D5116-10Determinations of Organic Emissions from Indoor Materials/ProductsASTM D5252-05Operation of the Hexapod Tumble Drum TesterASTM D5417-05Operation of the Vettermann Drum TesterASTM E648-10Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy SourceE.The Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI):CRI 104-11Installation of Commercial CarpetPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 CARPETA.Physical Characteristics:1.Carpet free of visual blemishes, streaks, poorly dyed areas, fuzzing of pile yarn, spots or stains and other physical and manufacturing defects.2.Manufacturers standard construction commercial carpet:a.Modular Tile: 660 mm (24 inches) square tile.3.Provide static control to permanently control static build upto less than 2.0 kV when tested at 20 percent relative humidity and 21 degrees C (70 degrees F) in accordance with AATCC 134.4.Pile Height: Maximum 3.81 mm (.150 inch).5.Pile Fiber: Eco Solution Nylon with recycled content 25 percent minimum branded (federally registered trademark).6.Pile Type: Multi-Level Pattern Loop.7.Backing materials: Manufacturer’s unitary backing designed for glue-down installation using recovered materials.8.Flammability and Critical Radiant Flux Requirements:a.Test Carpet in accordance with ASTM E 648.b.Class I: Not less than 0.45 watts per square centimeter.9.VOC Limits: Use carpet and carpet adhesive that comply with the following limits for VOC content when tested according to ASTM D 5116:a.Carpet, Total VOCs: 0.5 mg/sq.m x hr.b.Carpet, 4-PC (4-Phenylcyclohexene): 0.05 mg/sq.m x hr.c.Carpet, Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq.m x hr.d.Carpet, Styrene: 0.4 mg/sq.m x hr. e.Adhesive, Total VOCs: 10.00 mg/sq.m x hr.f.Adhesive, Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq.m x hr.g. Adhesive, 2-Ethyl-1-Hexanol: 3.00 mg/sq.m x hr.B.Shall meet platinum level of ANSI/NSF 140.C.Color, Texture, and Pattern: 1.CPT-1: Basis of Designa.style name: knit tile b.style number: 59492c.color: sterlingd.color number: 91150e.installation: monolithic2.2 ADHESIVE AND CONCRETE PRIMERA.Waterproof, resistant to cleaning solutions, steam and water, nonflammable, complies with air-quality standards as specified. Adhesives flashpoint minimum 60 degrees C (140 degrees F), complies with ASTM D 3278.B.Seam Adhesives: Waterproof, non-flammable and non-staining.2.3 seaming tapeA.Permanently resistant to carpet cleaning solutions, steam, and water.B.Recommended by carpet manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 SURFACE PREPARATIONA.Examine surfaces on which carpeting is to be installed.B.Clean floor of oil, waxy films, paint, dust and deleterious substances that prevent adhesion, leave floor dry and cured, free of residue from curing or cleaning agents.C.Correct conditions which will impair proper installation, including trowel marks, pits, dents, protrusions, cracks or joints.D.Fill cracks, joints depressions, and other irregularities in concrete with leveling compound.1.Do not use adhesive for filling or leveling purposes.2.Do not use leveling compound to correct imperfections which can be corrected by spot grinding.3.Trowel to smooth surface free of trowel marks, pits, dents, protrusions, cracks or joint lines.3.2 CARPET installtionA.Do not install carpet until work of other trades including painting is complete and dry.B.Install in accordance with CRI 104 direct glue down installation.C.Secure carpet to subfloor of spaces with adhesive applied as recommended by carpet manufacturer. D.Follow carpet manufacturer's recommendations for matching pattern and texture directions.E.Cut openings in carpet where required for installing equipment, pipes, outlets, and penetrations.1.Bind or seal cut edge of sheet carpet and replace flanges or plates.2.Use additional adhesive to secure carpets around pipes and other vertical projections.F.Carpet Modules:1.Install per CRI 104, Section 13, Adhesive Application.2.Install carpet modules so that cleaning methods and solutions do not cause dislocation of modules.3.Lay carpet modules uniformly to provide tight flush joints free from movement when subject to traffic.3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANINGA.Remove waste, fasteners and other cuttings from carpet floors.B.Vacuum carpet and provide suitable protection. Do not use polyethylene film.C.Do not permit traffic on carpeted surfaces for at least 48 hours after installation. Protect the carpet in accordance with CRI 104.D.Do not move furniture or equipment on unprotected carpeted surfaces. E.Just before final acceptance of work, remove protection and vacuum carpet clean.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 09 91 00PAINTINGPART 1-GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.Section specifies field painting.B.Section specifies prime coats which may be applied in shop under other sections.C.Painting includes shellacs, stains, varnishes, coatings specified, and striping or markers and identity markings.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Shop prime painting of steel and ferrous metals: Division 05 - METALS, Division 08 - OPENINGS, Division 10 - SPECIALTIES, Division 11 - EQUIPMENT, Division 12 - FURNISHINGS, Division 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION, Division 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION, Division 22 - PLUMBING, Division 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING, Division 26 - ELECTRICAL, Division 27 - COMMUNICATIONS, and Division 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY sections.B.Refer to drawings for location and color of exposed to view products specified in this section.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:Before work is started, or sample panels are prepared, submit manufacturer's literature, the current Master Painters Institute (MPI) "Approved Product List" indicating brand label, product name and product code as of the date of contract award, will be used to determine compliance with the submittal requirements of this specification. The Contractor may choose to use subsequent MPI "Approved Product List", however, only one list may be used for the entire contract and each coating system is to be from a single manufacturer. All coats on a particular substrate must be from a single manufacturer. No variation from the MPI "Approved Product List" where applicable is acceptable. C.Sample Panels:1.After painters' materials have been approved and before work is started submit sample panels showing each type of finish and color specified.2.Panels to show color: Composition board, 100 by 250 by 3 mm (4 inch by 10 inch by 1/8 inch).3.Panel to show transparent finishes: Wood of same species and grain pattern as wood approved for use, 100 by 250 by 3 mm (4 inch by 10 inch face by 1/4 inch) thick minimum, and where both flat and edge grain will be exposed, 250 mm (10 inches) long by sufficient size, 50 by 50 mm (2 by 2 inch) minimum or actual wood member to show complete finish. 4.Attach labels to panel stating the following:a.Federal Specification Number or manufacturers name and product number of paints used.b.Product type and color.c.Name of project.5.Strips showing not less than 50 mm (2 inch) wide strips of undercoats and 100 mm (4 inch) wide strip of finish coat.D.Manufacturers' Certificates indicating compliance with specified requirements:1.Manufacturer's paint substituted for Federal Specification paints meets or exceeds performance of paint specified.1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGEA.Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's sealed container marked to show following:1.Name of manufacturer.2.Product type.3.Batch number.4.Instructions for use.5.Safety precautions.B.In addition to manufacturer's label, provide a label legibly printed as following:1.Federal Specification Number, where applicable, and name of material.2.Surface upon which material is to be applied.3.If paint or other coating, state coat types; prime, body or finish.C.Maintain space for storage, and handling of painting materials and equipment in a neat and orderly condition to prevent spontaneous combustion from occurring or igniting adjacent items.D.Store materials at site at least 24 hours before using, at a temperature between 18 and 30 degrees C (65 and 85 degrees F).1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.B.American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH):ACGIH TLV-BKLT-2008Threshold Limit Values (TLV) for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents and Biological Exposure Indices (BEIs)ACGIH TLV-DOC-2008Documentation of Threshold Limit Values and Biological Exposure Indices, (Seventh Edition)C.Master Painters Institute (MPI):No. 8-07Exterior Alkyd, Flat MPI Gloss Level 1 (EO)No. 9-07Exterior Alkyd Enamel MPI Gloss Level 6 (EO)No. 10-07Exterior Latex, Flat (AE)No. 11-07Exterior Latex, Semi-Gloss (AE)No. 26-07Cementitious Galvanized Metal PrimerNo. 27-07Exterior / Interior Alkyd Floor Enamel, Gloss (FE)No. 31-07Polyurethane, Moisture Cured, Clear Gloss (PV)No. 36-07Knot SealerNo. 43-07Interior Satin Latex, MPI Gloss Level 4No. 44-07Interior Low Sheen Latex, MPI Gloss Level 2No. 45-07Interior Primer SealerNo. 46-07Interior Enamel UndercoatNo. 47-07Interior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5 (AK)No. 48-07Interior Alkyd, Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 6 (AK)No. 49-07Interior Alkyd, Flat, MPI Gloss Level 1 (AK)No. 50-07Interior Latex Primer SealerNo. 51-07Interior Alkyd, Eggshell, MPI Gloss Level 3No. 52-07Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level 3 (LE)No. 53-07Interior Latex, Flat, MPI Gloss Level 1 (LE)No. 54-07Interior Latex, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5 (LE)No. 74-07Interior Alkyd Varnish, Semi-GlossNo. 77-07Epoxy Cold Cured, Gloss (EC)No. 79-07Marine Alkyd Metal PrimerNo. 90-07Interior Wood Stain, Semi-Transparent (WS)No. 91-07Wood Filler PasteNo. 94-07Exterior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss (EO)No. 95-07Fast Drying Metal PrimerNo. 98-07High Build Epoxy CoatingNo. 101-07Epoxy Anti-Corrosive Metal PrimerNo. 108-07High Build Epoxy Coating, Low Gloss (EC)No. 114-07Interior Latex, Gloss (LE) and (LG)No. 119-07Exterior Latex, High Gloss (acrylic) (AE)No. 135-07Non-Cementitious Galvanized PrimerNo. 138-07Interior High Performance Latex, MPI Gloss Level 2 (LF)No. 139-07Interior High Performance Latex, MPI Gloss Level 3 (LL)No. 140-07Interior High Performance Latex, MPI Gloss Level 4No. 141-07Interior High Performance Latex (SG) MPI Gloss Level 5H.Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):SSPC SP 1-04 (R2004)Solvent CleaningSSPC SP 2-04 (R2004)Hand Tool CleaningSSPC SP 3-04 (R2004)Power Tool CleaningPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALSA.Wood Sealer: MPI 31 (gloss) or MPI 71 (flat) thinned with thinner recommended by manufacturer at rate of about one part of thinner to four parts of varnish.B.Identity markers options:1.Pressure sensitive vinyl markers.2.Snap-on coil plastic markers.E.Aluminum Paint (AP): MPI 1.F.Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI 4.G.Exterior Alkyd Wood Primer: MPI 5.H.Exterior Oil Wood Primer: MPI 7.I.Exterior Alkyd, Flat (EO): MPI 8.J.Exterior Alkyd Enamel (EO): MPI 9.K.Exterior Latex, Flat (AE): MPI 10.L.Exterior Latex, Semi-Gloss (AE): MPI 11.anic Zinc rich Coating (HR): MPI 22.N.High Heat Resistant Coating (HR): MPI 22.O.Cementitious Galvanized Metal Primer: MPI 26.P.Exterior/ interior Alkyd Floor Enamel, Gloss (FE): MPI 27.Q.Knot Sealer: MPI 36.R.Interior Satin Latex: MPI 43.S.Interior Low Sheen Latex: MPI 44.T.Interior Primer Sealer: MPI 45.U.Interior Enamel Undercoat: MPI 47.V.Interior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss (AK): MPI 47.W.Interior Alkyd, Gloss (AK): MPI 49.x.Interior Latex Primer Sealer: MPI 50.Y.Interior Alkyd, Eggshell: MPI 51Z.Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level 3 (LE): MPI 52.AA.Interior Latex, Flat, MPI Gloss Level 1 (LE): MPI 53.BB.Interior Latex, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5 (LE): MPI 54.DD.Interior / Exterior Alkyd Porch & Floor Enamel, Low Gloss (FE): MPI 59.EE.Interior/ Exterior Latex Porch & Floor Paint, Low Gloss: MPI 60.FF.Interior Alkyd Fire Retardant, Clear Top-Coat (ULC Approved) (FC): MPI 66.GG.Interior Latex Fire Retardant, Top-Coat (ULC Approved) (FR): MPI 67.HH.Interior/ Exterior Latex Porch & Floor Paint, gloss: MPI 68.II.Epoxy Cold Cured, Gloss (EC): MPI 77.JJ.Marine Alkyd Metal primer: MPI 79.KK.Interior Wood Stain, Semi-Transparent (WS): MPI 90.LL.Wood Filler Paste: MPI 91.MM.Exterior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss (EO): MPI 94.NN.Fast Drying Metal Primer: MPI 95.OO.High Build Epoxy Coating: MPI 98.PP.Epoxy Anti-Corrosive Metal Primer: MPI 101.RR.Interior latex, Gloss (LE) and (LG): MPI 114.SS.Exterior Latex, High Gloss (acrylic) (AE): MPI 119.TT.Waterborne Galvanized Primer: MPI 134.UU.Non-Cementitious Galvanized Primer: MPI 135.VV.Interior High Performance Latex, MPI Gloss Level 2(LF): MPI 138.WW.Interior High Performance Latex, MPI Gloss Level 3 (LL): MPI 139.XX.Interior High Performance Latex, MPI Gloss Level 4: MPI 140.YY.Interior High Performance Latex (SG), MPI Gloss Level 5: MPI 141.2.2 PAINT PROPERTIESA.Use ready-mixed (including colors), except paints requiring specified additives.B.Where no requirements are given in the referenced specifications for primers, use primers with pigment and vehicle, compatible with substrate and finish coats specified.2.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS/quality assuranceA.Paint materials shall conform to the restrictions of the local Environmental and Toxic Control jurisdiction.1.Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC): VOC content of paint materials shall not exceed 10g/l for interior latex paints/primers and 50g/l for exterior latex paints and primers.2.Lead-Base Paint shall not be used.3.Asbestos: Materials shall not contain asbestos.4.Chromate, Cadmium, Mercury, and Silica: Materials shall not contain zinc-chromate, strontium-chromate, Cadmium, mercury or mercury compounds or free crystalline silica.5.Human Carcinogens: Materials shall not contain any of the ACGIH-BKLT and ACGHI-DOC confirmed or suspected human carcinogens.6.Use high performance acrylic paints in place of alkyd paints, where possible.7.VOC content for solvent-based paints shall not exceed 250g/l and shall not be formulated with more than one percent aromatic hydro carbons by weight.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 JOB CONDITIONSA.Safety: Observe required safety regulations and manufacturer's warning and instructions for storage, handling and application of painting materials.1.Take necessary precautions to protect personnel and property from hazards due to falls, injuries, toxic fumes, fire, explosion, or other harm.2.Deposit soiled cleaning rags and waste materials in metal containers approved for that purpose. Dispose of such items off the site at end of each days work.B.Atmospheric and Surface Conditions:1.Do not apply coating when air or substrate conditions are:a.Less than 3 degrees C (5 degrees F) above dew point.b.Below 10 degrees C (50 degrees F) or over 35 degrees C (95 degrees F), unless specifically pre-approved by the Contracting Officer and the product manufacturer. Under no circumstances shall application conditions exceed manufacturer recommendations.2.Maintain interior temperatures until paint dries hard.3.Apply only on clean, dry and frost free surfaces.4.Varnishing:a.Apply in clean areas and in still air.b.Before varnishing vacuum and dust area.c.Immediately before varnishing wipe down surfaces with a tack rag.3.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONA.Method of surface preparation is optional, provided results of finish painting produce solid even color and texture specified with no overlays.B.General:1.Remove prefinished items not to be painted such as lighting fixtures, escutcheon plates, hardware, trim, switchplates, outlets covers and similar items for reinstallation after paint is dried.2.Remove items for reinstallation and complete painting of such items and adjacent areas when item or adjacent surface is not accessible or finish is different.3.See other sections of specifications for specified surface conditions and prime coat.4.Clean surfaces for painting with materials and methods compatible with substrate and specified finish. Remove any residue remaining from cleaning agents used. Do not use solvents, acid, or steam on concrete and masonry.C.Wood:1.Sand to a smooth even surface and then dust off.2.Sand surfaces showing raised grain smooth between each coat.3.Wipe surface with a tack rag prior to applying finish.4.Surface painted with an opaque finish:a.Coat knots, sap and pitch streaks with MPI 36 (Knot Sealer) before applying paint.b.Apply two coats of MPI 36 (Knot Sealer) over large knots.5.After application of prime or first coat of stain, fill cracks, nail and screw holes, depressions and similar defects with wood filler paste. Sand the surface to make smooth and finish flush with adjacent surface. 6.Before applying finish coat, reapply wood filler paste if required, and sand surface to remove surface blemishes. Finish flush with adjacent surfaces.D.Ferrous Metals:1.Remove oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, flux and other detrimental foreign matter in accordance with SSPC-SP 1 (Solvent Cleaning).2.Remove loose mill scale, rust, and paint, by hand or power tool cleaning, as defined in SSPC-SP 2 (Hand Tool Cleaning) and SSPC-SP 3 (Power Tool Cleaning). Exception: where high temperature aluminum paint is used, prepare surface in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions.3.Fill dents, holes and similar voids and depressions in flat exposed surfaces of hollow steel doors and frames, access panels, roll-up steel doors and similar items specified to have semi-gloss or gloss finish with TT-F-322D (Filler, Two-Component Type, For Dents, Small Holes and Blow-Holes). Finish flush with adjacent surfaces.a.This includes flat head countersunk screws used for permanent anchors.b.Do not fill screws of item intended for removal such as glazing beads.4.Spot prime abraded and damaged areas in shop prime coat which expose bare metal with same type of paint used for prime coat. Feather edge of spot prime to produce smooth finish coat. 5.Spot prime abraded and damaged areas which expose bare metal of factory finished items with paint as recommended by manufacturer of item.E.Gypsum Board:1.Remove efflorescence, loose and chalking plaster or finishing materials.2.Remove dust, dirt, and other deterrents to paint adhesion.3.Fill holes, cracks, and other depressions with CID-A-A-1272A [Plaster, Gypsum (Spackling Compound) finished flush with adjacent surface, with texture to match texture of adjacent surface. Patch holes over 25 mm (1-inch) in diameter as specified in Section for plaster or gypsum board.3.3 PAINT PREPARATIONA.Thoroughly mix painting materials to ensure uniformity of color, complete dispersion of pigment and uniform composition.B.Do not thin unless necessary for application and when finish paint is used for body and prime coats. Use materials and quantities for thinning as specified in manufacturer's printed instructions.C.Remove paint skins, then strain paint through commercial paint strainer to remove lumps and other particles.D.For tinting required to produce exact shades specified, use color pigment recommended by the paint manufacturer. Tinting shall not be done in the field.3.4 APPLICATIONA.Start of surface preparation or painting will be construed as acceptance of the surface as satisfactory for the application of materials.B.Unless otherwise specified, apply paint in three coats; prime, body, and finish. When two coats applied to prime coat are the same, first coat applied over primer is body coat and second coat is finish coat.C.Apply each coat evenly and cover substrate completely.D.Allow not less than 48 hours between application of succeeding coats, except as allowed by manufacturer's printed instructions, and approved by Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative.E.Finish surfaces to show solid even color, free from runs, lumps, brushmarks, laps, holidays, or other defects.F.Apply by brush or roller. Spray application is not permitted. G.Do not paint in closed position operable items such as access doors and panels, window sashes, overhead doors, and similar items except overhead roll-up doors and shutters.3.5 PRIME PAINTINGA.After surface preparation prime surfaces before application of body and finish coats, except as otherwise specified.B.Spot prime and apply body coat to damaged and abraded painted surfaces before applying succeeding coats.C.Additional field applied prime coats over shop or factory applied prime coats are not required.D.Wood and Wood Particleboard:1.Use same kind of primer specified for exposed face surface.a.Interior wood except for transparent finish: MPI 45 (Interior Primer Sealer) or MPI 46 (Interior Enamel Undercoat), thinned if recommended by manufacturer.b.Transparent finishes as specified under Transparent Finishes on Wood.F.Metals except boilers, incinerator stacks, and engine exhaust pipes:1.Steel and iron: MPI 95 (Fast Drying Metal Primer).2.Zinc-coated steel and iron: MPI 134 (Waterborne Galvanized Primer).3.6 EXTERIOR FINISHESA.Apply following finish coats where specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.B.Steel and Ferrous Metal:1.Two coats of MPI 8 (Exterior Alkyd, Flat (EO)) MPI 94 (Exterior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss (EO)) on exposed surfaces, except on surfaces over 94 degrees C (200 degrees F).E.Cement Plaster and Concrete:1.General:a.Where specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES or shown.b.Mix as specified in manufacturer's printed directions.c.Do not mix more paint at one time than can be used within four hours after mixing. Discard paint that has started to set.d.Dampen warm surfaces above 24 degrees C (75 degrees F) with fine mist of water before application of paint. Do not leave free water on surface.e.Cure paint with a fine mist of water as specified in manufacturer's printed instructions.2.Use two coats of TT-P-1411 (Paint, Co-polymer-Resin, Cementitious (CEP)), unless specified otherwise.3.7 INTERIOR FINISHESA.Apply following finish coats over prime coats in spaces or on surfaces specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.B.Metal Work:1.Apply to exposed surfaces.2.Omit body and finish coats on surfaces concealed after installation except electrical conduit containing conductors over 600 volts.3.Ferrous Metal, Galvanized Metal, and Other Metals Scheduled: a.Apply two coats of MPI 47 (Interior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss (AK)) unless specified otherwise.C.Gypsum Board:1.General use: One coat of MPI 45 (Interior Primer Sealer) or MPI 46 (Interior Enamel Undercoat) plus one coat of MPI 139 (Interior High Performance Latex, MPI Gloss level 3 (LL)).2.Toilet rooms, clean utility rooms and locker rooms: One coat of MPI 45 (Interior Primer Sealer) or MPI 46 (Interior Enamel Undercoat) plus one coat of MPI 54 (Interior Latex, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5 (LE)) or MPI 114 (Interior Latex, Gloss (LE) and (LG)).D.Masonry and Concrete Walls:1.Over MPI 4 (Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler) on CMU surfaces.2.Two coats of MPI 54 (Interior Latex, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5 (LE)) or MPI 114 (Interior Latex, Gloss (LE) and (LG)).E.Wood:1.Sanding:a.Use 220-grit sandpaper.b.Sand sealers and varnish between coats.c.Sand enough to scarify surface to assure good adhesion of subsequent coats, to level roughly applied sealer and varnish, and to knock off "whiskers" of any raised grain as well as dust particles.2.Sealers:a.Apply sealers specified except sealer may be omitted where pigmented, penetrating, or wiping stains containing resins are used.b.Allow manufacturer's recommended drying time before sanding, but not less than 24 hours or 36 hours in damp or muggy weather.c.Sand as specified.3.Transparent Finishes on Wood Except Floors.a.Natural Finish:1)One coat of sealer as written in 2.1.2)Two coats of MPI 71 (Polyurethane, Moisture Cured, Clear Flat (PV)//MPI 31 (Polyurethane, Moisture Cured, Clear Gloss (PV).b.Stain Finish:1)One coat of MPI 90 (Interior Wood Stain, Semi-Transparent (WS)).2)Use wood stain of type and color required to achieve finish specified. Do not use varnish type stains.3)One coat of sealer as written in 2.1.4)Two coats of // MPI 71 (Polyurethane, Moisture Cured, Clear Flat (PV) or MPI 31 (Polyurethane Moisture Cured, Clear Gloss (PV)).3.8 REFINISHING EXISTING PAINTED SURFACESA.Clean, patch and repair existing surfaces as specified under surface preparation.B.Remove and reinstall switch plates, cover plates, signs, light fixtures, toilet accessories, equipment, and similar items and as specified under surface preparation.C.Remove existing finishes or apply separation coats to prevent non compatible coatings from having contact.D.Patched or Replaced Areas in Surfaces and Components: Apply spot prime and body coats as specified for new work to repaired areas or replaced components.E.Except where scheduled for complete painting apply finish coat over plane surface to nearest break in plane, such as corner, reveal, or frame.F.Refinish areas as specified for new work to match adjoining work unless specified or scheduled otherwise.G.Coat knots and pitch streaks showing through old finish with MPI 36 (Knot Sealer) before refinishing.H.Sand or dull glossy surfaces prior to painting.I.Sand existing coatings to a feather edge so that transition between new and existing finish will not show in finished work.3.9 PAINT COLORA.Color and gloss of finish coats is specified in schedule below. Refer to drawings for location of each color and gloss.B.For additional requirements regarding color see Articles, REFINISHING EXISTING PAINTED SURFACE and MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL FIELD PAINTING SCHEDULE.C.Coat Colors:1.Color of priming coat: Lighter than body coat.2.Color of body coat: Lighter than finish coat.3.Color prime and body coats to not show through the finish coat and to mask surface imperfections or contrasts.D.Painting, Caulking, Closures, and Fillers Adjacent to Casework:1.Paint to match color of casework where casework has a paint finish.2.Paint to match color of wall where casework is stainless steel, plastic laminate, or varnished wood.E.Paint Color Schedule: Match the Benjamin Moore colors identified below.1.PNT-1: Sonnet / AF-552.PNT-2: Brookline Beige / HC-473.PNT-3: 1155 / Cappuccino Muffin4.PNT-4: 1131 / Autumn Leaf3.10 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK FIELD PAINTING SCHEDULEA.Field painting of mechanical and electrical consists of cleaning, touching-up abraded shop prime coats, and applying prime, body and finish coats to materials and equipment if not factory finished in space scheduled to be finished.B.In spaces not scheduled to be finish painted paint as specified under paragraph H, colors.C.Paint various systems specified in Division 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS, Division 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION, Division 22 - PLUMBING, Division 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING, Division 26 - ELECTRICAL, Division 27 - COMMUNICATIONS, and Division 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY.D.Paint after tests have been completed.E.Omit prime coat from factory prime-coated items. F.Finish painting of mechanical and electrical equipment is not required when located in interstitial spaces, above suspended ceilings, in concealed areas such as pipe and electric closets, pipe basements, pipe tunnels, trenches, attics, roof spaces, shafts and furred spaces except on electrical conduit containing feeders 600 volts or more.G.Omit field painting of items specified in paragraph, Building and Structural WORK NOT PAINTED.3.11 BUILDING AND STRUCTURAL WORK FIELD PAINTINGA.Painting and finishing of interior and exterior work except as specified under paragraph 3.11 B.1.Painting and finishing of new work including colors and gloss of finish selected is specified in Finish Schedule, Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.3.Painting of ferrous metal and galvanized metal.B.Building and Structural Work not Painted:1.Prefinished items:a.Casework, doors, elevator entrances and cabs, metal panels, wall covering, and similar items specified factory finished under other sections.b.Factory finished equipment and pre-engineered metal building components such as metal roof and wall panels.2.Finished surfaces:a.Hardware except ferrous metal.b.Anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plating, copper, and brass, except as otherwise specified.c.Signs, fixtures, and other similar items integrally finished.3.12 FIRE AND SMOKE PARTITIONSA.Identify partitions above ceilings on both sides of partitions except within shafts in letters not less than 64 mm (2 1/2 inches) high.B.Stenciled message: "SMOKE BARRIER" or, "FIRE BARRIER" as applicable. Indicate fire rating of fire barriers.C.Locate not more than 6100 mm (20 feet) on center on corridor sides of partitions, and with a least one message per room on room side of partition.D.Use semigloss paint of color that contrasts with color of substrate.3.13 PROTECTION CLEAN UP, AND TOUCH-UPA.Protect work from paint droppings and spattering by use of masking, drop cloths, removal of items or by other approved methods.B.Upon completion, clean paint from hardware, glass and other surfaces and items not required to be painted of paint drops or smears.C.Before final inspection, touch-up or refinished in a manner to produce solid even color and finish texture, free from defects in work which was damaged or discolored.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 10 28 00TOILET ACCESSORIESPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies manufactured items usually used in toilet rooms.B.Items Specified:1.Grab Bars2.Metal framed mirror3.Toilet paper dispenser4.Paper towel dispenser5.Soap dispenser1.2 RELATED WORKA.Plumbing fixtures and trim: Division 22.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Shop Drawings: For each product specified. Include installation and mounting details and support details for grab bars and diaper changing stations.C.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:1.All accessories specified.2.Show type of material, gages or metal thickness in inches, finishes, and when required, capacity of accessories.D.Manufacturer's Certificates:1.Stainless steel finish as specified.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA.Each product shall meet, as a minimum, the requirements specified, and shall be a standard commercial product of a manufacturer regularly presently manufacturing items of type specified.B.Each accessory type shall be the same and be made by the same manufacturer.C.Each accessory shall be assembled to the greatest extent possible before delivery to the site.D.Include additional features, which are not specifically prohibited by this specification, but which are a part of the manufacturer's standard commercial product. 1.5 PACKAGING AND DELIVERYA.Pack accessories individually to protect finish.B.Deliver accessories to the project only when installation work in rooms is ready to receive them.C.Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site at appropriate time for building-in.D.Deliver products to site in sealed packages of containers; labeled for identification with manufacturer's name, brand, and contents.1.6 STORAGEA.Store products in weathertight and dry storage facility.B.Protect from damage from handling, weather and construction operations before, during and after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A167-99(R2009)Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.A176-99(R2009)Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium Steel Plate, Sheet, and StripA269-10Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General ServiceA312/A312M-09Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel PipesA653/A653M-10Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip ProcessB221-08Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and TubesB456-03(R2009)Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus ChromiumC1036-06Flat GlassC1048-04Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated GlassD635-10Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal PositionF446-85(R2009)Consumer Safety Specification for Grab Bars and Accessories Installed in the Bathing Area.C.The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):AMP 500 SeriesMetal Finishes ManualD.American Welding Society (AWS):D10.4-86 (R2000)Welding Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Piping and Tubing E.Federal Specifications (Fed. Specs.):A-A-3002Mirrors, GlassFF-S-107C (2)Screw, Tapping and DriveFF-S-107CScrew, Tapping and Drive.WW-P-541E(1)Plumbing Fixtures (Accessories, Land Use) Detail SpecificationPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALSA.Aluminum: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5 and alloy 6463-T5.B.Stainless Steel: 1. Plate or sheet: ASTM A167, Type 302, 304, or 304L, except ASTM A176 where Type 430 is specified, 0.0299-inch thick unless otherwise specified.2.Tube: ASTM A269, Alloy Type 302, 304, or 304L.C.Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, Grade 304 or 304L, seamless or welded.D.Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A312; Grade TP 304 or TP 304L.E.Steel Sheet: ASTM A653, zinc-coated (galvanized) coating designation G90.F.Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q2, for mirrors, ASTM C1048, Kind FT, quality q3 where tempering is specified.2.2 FASTENERSA.Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel or chromium plated brass, finish to match adjacent surface.B.Concealed Fasteners: Steel, hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel.C.Toggle Bolts: For use in hollow masonry or frame construction.D.Hex bolts: For through bolting on thin panels.E.Expansion Shields: Lead or plastic as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate for use in solid masonry or concrete. Use only where toggle bolts cannot be used.F.Screws: 1.ASME B18.6.4.2.Fed Spec. FF-S-107, Stainless steel Type A.G.Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer for products to be joined.2.3 FINISHA.In accordance with NAAMM AMP 500 series.B.Anodized Aluminum:1.AA-C22A41 Chemically etched medium matte, with clear anodic coating, Class I Architectural, 0.7-mil thick.C. AA-M32, Mechanical finish1.Chromium Plating: ASTM B456, satin or bright as specified, Service Condition No. SC2.2.Stainless Steel: NAAMM AMP 503, finish number 4.3.Ferrous Metal:a.Shop Prime: Clean, pretreat and apply one coat of primer and bake.b.Finish: Over primer apply two coats of alkyd or phenolic resin enamel, and bake.2.4 FABRICATION - GENERALA.Welding, AWS D10.4.B.Grind dress, and finish welded joints to match finish of adjacent surface.C.Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints.D.Provide steel anchors and components required for secure installation.E.Form flat surfaces without distortion. Keep exposed surfaces free from scratches and dents. Reinforce doors to prevent warp or twist.F.Isolate aluminum from dissimilar metals and from contact with building materials as required to prevent electrolysis and corrosion.G.Hot-dip galvanized steel, except stainless steel, anchors and fastening devices.H.Shop assemble accessories and package with all components, anchors, fittings, fasteners and keys.I.Key items alike.J.Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.K.Round and deburr edges of sheets to remove sharp edges.2.5 GRAB BARSA.Fed. Spec WW-P-541/8B, Type IV, bars, surface mounted, Class 2, grab bars and ASTM F446.B.Fabricate of either stainless steel or nylon coated steel, except use only one type throughout the project:1.Stainless steel: Grab bars, flanges, mounting plates, supports, screws, bolts.C.All mounting hardware shall be concealed.D.Bars:1.Fabricate from 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) outside diameter tubing.a.Stainless steel, minimum 1.2 mm (0.0478 inch) thick.2.Fabricate as indicated on drawings and with end turned towards walls.E.Flange for Concealed Mounting:1.Minimum of 2.65 mm (0.1046 inch) thick, approximately 75 mm (3 inch) diameter by 13 mm (1/2 inch) deep, with provisions for not less than three set screws for securing flange to back plate.2.Insert grab bar through center of the flange and continuously weld perimeter of grab bar flush to back side of flange.F.Back Plates:1.Minimum 2.65 mm (0.1046 inch) thick metal.2.Fabricate in one piece, approximately 6 mm (1/4 inch) deep, with diameter sized to fit flange. Provide slotted holes to accommodate anchor bolts.3.Furnish spreaders, through bolt fasteners, and cap nuts, where grab bars are mounted on metal stud partitions.2.6 METAL FRAMED MIRRORSA.Fed. Spec. A-A-3002 metal frame; stainless steel, type 302 or 304. B.Mirror Glass:1.Minimum 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick.2.Set mirror in a protective vinyl glazing tape.3.Use tempered glass.C.Frames:1.Channel or angle shaped section with face of frame not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch) wide. Fabricate with square corners.2.Use either 0.9 mm (0.0359 inch) thick stainless steel.3.Filler:a.Where mirrors are mounted on walls having ceramic tile wainscots not flush with wall above, provide fillers at void between back of mirror and wall surface.b.Fabricate fillers from same material and finish as the mirror frame, contoured to conceal the void behind the mirror at sides and top.D.Back Plate:1.Fabricate backplate for concealed wall hanging of either zinc-coated, or cadmium plated 0.9 mm (0.036 inch) thick sheet steel, die cut to fit face of mirror frame, and furnish with theft resistant concealed wall fastenings.2.Use set screw type theft resistant concealed fastening system for mounting mirrors.E.Mounting Bracket: 1.Designed to support mirror tight to wall.2.Designed to retain mirror with concealed set screw fastenings.2.7 TOILET PAPER DISPENSER (OWNER FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED)A.Side by side double roll bathroom dispenser. Georgia Pacific model #56784.2.8 PAPER TOWEL HOLDER (OWNER FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED)A.Sofpull Translucent Smoke Dispenser (center pull). Georgia Pacific model #58204.B.Size – 11.5”x9.25”x8.75” for rolls 7.8”x15”2.9 SOAP DISPENSER (OWNER FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED)A.Bacti-foam Soap Dispenser. Echo Lab model #92723188 for Bacti-foam Soap (#EL61806-499)PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 PREPARATIONA.Before starting work notify COTR in writing of any conflicts detrimental to installation or operation of units.B.Verify with the COTR the exact location of accessories.3.2 INSTALLATIONA.Set work accurately, in alignment and where shown. Items shall be plumb, level, free of rack and twist, and set parallel or perpendicular as required to line and plane of surface.B.Toggle bolt to steel anchorage plates in frame partitions or hollow masonry.C.Install accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and ASTM F446.D.Install accessories plumb and level and securely anchor to substrate.E.Install accessories in a manner that will permit the accessory to function as designed and allow for servicing as required without hampering or hindering the performance of other devices.F.Align mirrors, dispensers and other accessories even and level, when installed in battery.G.Install accessories to prevent striking by other moving, items or interference with accessibility.3.3 SCHEDULE OF ACCESSORIESA. As indicated on Drawings3.4 CLEANINGAfter installation, clean as recommended by the manufacturer and protect from damage until completion of the project.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 10 44 13FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETSPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section covers recessed fire extinguisher cabinets.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Field Painting: Section 09 91 00, PAINTING. 1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Fire extinguisher cabinet including installation instruction and rough opening required.1.4 APPLICATION PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):D4802-10Poly (Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic SheetPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETA.Recessed type with flat trim of size and design shown. 2.2 FABRICATIONA.Form body of cabinet from 0.9 mm (0.0359 inch) thick sheet steel. B.Fabricate door and trim from 1.2 mm (0.0478 inch) thick sheet steel with all face joints fully welded and ground smooth.1.Glaze doors with 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick ASTM D4802, clear acrylic sheet, Category B-1, Finish 1.2.Design doors to open 180 degrees.3.Provide continuous hinge, pull handle, and adjustable roller catch.2.3 FINISHA.Finish interior of cabinet body with baked-on semigloss white enamel.B.Finish door, frame with manufacturer's standard baked-on prime coat suitable for field painting.PART 3 - EXECUTIONA.Install fire extinguisher cabinets in prepared openings and secure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B.Install cabinet so that bottom of cabinet is 975 mm (39 inches) above finished floor.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 21 05 11COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSIONPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.The requirements of this Section apply to all sections of Division 21. B.Definitions:1.Exposed: Piping and equipment exposed to view in finished rooms. 2.Option or optional: Contractor's choice of an alternate material or method. 1.2 RELATED WORK Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.C.Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS. D.Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. E.Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS. F.Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.G.Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Products Criteria:1.Standard Products: Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least 3 years. See other specification sections for any exceptions.2.Equipment Service: Products shall be supported by a service organization which maintains a complete inventory of repair parts and is located reasonably close to the site.3.Multiple Units: When two or more units of materials or equipment of the same type or class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.4.Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product.5.Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment.6.Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.B.Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the COTR prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material. C.Guaranty: In GENERAL CONDITIONS. D.Supports for sprinkler piping shall be in conformance with NFPA 13.1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Submit under the pertinent section rather than under this section. 1.Equipment and materials identification. 2.Fire-stopping materials. 3.Hangers, inserts, supports and bracing. Provide load calculations for variable spring and constant support hangers. 4.Wall, floor, and ceiling plates. C.Coordination Drawings: Provide detailed layout drawings of all piping systems. Provide details of the following. 1.Crawl space.2.Hangers, inserts, supports, and bracing. 3.Pipe sleeves. D.Maintenance Data and Operating Instructions: 1.Maintenance and operating manuals in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, INSTRUCTIONS, for systems and equipment. 2.Provide a listing of recommended replacement parts for keeping in stock supply, including sources of supply, for equipment. Include in the listing belts for equipment. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A36/A36M-2001Carbon Structural SteelA575-96Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades R (2002)E84-2003Standard Test Method for Burning Characteristics of Building Materials E1192000Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials C.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 90A96Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 10197Life Safety Code PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LIFTING ATTACHMENTS Provide equipment with suitable lifting attachments to enable equipment to be lifted in its normal position. Lifting attachments shall withstand any handling conditions that might be encountered, without bending or distortion of shape, such as rapid lowering and braking of load.2.4 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS IDENTIFICATION A.Use symbols, nomenclature and equipment numbers specified, shown on the drawings and shown in the maintenance manuals. Identification for piping is specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING. B.Interior (Indoor) Equipment: Engraved nameplates, with letters not less than 48 mm (3/16inch) high of brass with blackfilled letters, or rigid black plastic with white letters specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING permanently fastened to the equipment. Identify unit components such as coils, filters, fans, etc. C.Valve Tags and Lists: 1.Valve tags: Engraved black filled numbers and letters not less than 13 mm (1/2inch) high for number designation, and not less than 6.4 mm(1/4inch) for service designation on 19 gage 38 mm (11/2 inches) round brass disc, attached with brass "S" hook or brass chain. 2.Valve lists: Typed or printed plastic coated card(s), sized 216 mm (81/2 inches) by 280 mm (11 inches) showing tag number, valve function and area of control, for each service or system. Punch sheets for a 3ring notebook.3.Provide detailed plan for each floor of the building indicating the location and valve number for each valve. Identify location of each valve with a color coded thumb tack in ceiling.2.5 FIRESTOPPING Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING specifies an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases where penetrations occur for piping. 2.6 GALVANIZED REPAIR COMPOUNDMil. Spec. DODP21035B, paint form. 2.7 PIPE PENETRATIONSA.Install sleeves during construction. B.To prevent accidental liquid spills from passing to a lower level, provide the following: 1.For sleeves: Extend sleeve 25 mm (one inch) above finished floor and provide sealant for watertight joint. 2.For drilled penetrations: Provide 40 mm (11/2 inch) angle ring or square set in silicone adhesive around penetration. C.Penetrations are not allowed through beams or ribs, but may be installed in concrete beam flanges. Any deviation from this requirement must receive prior approval of COTR. D.Sheet Metal, Plastic, or Moistureresistant Fiber Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through floors, interior walls, and partitions, unless brass or steel pipe sleeves are specifically called for below.E.Sleeve Clearance: Sleeve through floors, walls, partitions, and beam flanges shall be one inch greater in diameter than external diameter of pipe. Sleeve for pipe with insulation shall be large enough to accommodate the insulation. Interior openings shall be caulked tight with fire stopping material and sealant to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and gases. F.Sealant and Adhesives: Shall be as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS. 2.8 TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS A.Furnish, and turn over to the COTR, special tools not readily available commercially, that are required for disassembly or adjustment of equipment and machinery furnished. 2.9 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES A.Material and Type: Chrome plated brass or chrome plated steel, one piece or split type with concealed hinge, with set screw for fastening to pipe, or sleeve. Use plates that fit tight around pipes, cover openings around pipes and cover the entire pipe sleeve projection. B.Thickness: Not less than 2.4 mm (3/32inch) for floor plates. For wall and ceiling plates, not less than 0.64 mm (0.025-inch) for up to 80 mm (3inch pipe), 0.89 mm (0.035-inch) for larger pipe. C.Locations: Use where pipe penetrates floors, walls and ceilings in exposed locations, in finished areas only. Provide a watertight joint in spaces where brass or steel pipe sleeves are specified. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Coordinate location of piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, and equipment. Locate piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, and equipment clear of windows, doors, openings, light outlets, and other services and utilities. Follow manufacturer's published recommendations for installation methods not otherwise specified. B.Protection and Cleaning: 1.Equipment and materials shall be carefully handled, properly stored, and adequately protected to prevent damage before and during installation, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the COTR. Damaged or defective items in the opinion of the COTR, shall be replaced. 2.Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. Tightly cover and protect equipment against dirt, water chemical, or mechanical injury. At completion of all work thoroughly exposed materials and equipment. C.Concrete and Grout: Use concrete and shrink compensating grout 25 MPa (3000 psi) minimum, specified in Section 03 30 00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. D.Install gages, valves, and other devices with due regard for ease in reading or operating and maintaining said devices. Locate and position gages to be easily read by operator or staff standing on floor or walkway provided. Servicing shall not require dismantling adjacent equipment or pipe work. E.Work in Existing Building: 1.Perform as specified in Article, OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS, Article, ALTERATIONS, and Article, RESTORATION of the Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS for relocation of existing equipment, alterations and restoration of existing building(s). 2.As specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS, make alterations to existing service piping at times that will least interfere with normal operation of the facility. 3.Cut required openings through existing masonry and reinforced concrete using diamond core drills. Use of pneumatic hammer type drills, impact type electric drills, and hand or manual hammer type drills, will be permitted only with approval of the COTR. Locate openings that will least effect structural slabs, columns, ribs or beams. Refer to the COTR for determination of proper design for openings through structural sections and opening layouts approval, prior to cutting or drilling into structure. After COTR's approval, carefully cut opening through construction no larger than absolutely necessary for the required installation. H.Inaccessible Equipment:1.Where the Government determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, equipment shall be removed and reinstalled or remedial action performed as directed at no additional cost to the Government.2.The term "conveniently accessible" is defined as capable of being reached without the use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as motors, fans, pumps, belt guards, transformers, high voltage lines, piping, and ductwork.3.2 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS A.Prior to the final inspection, perform required tests as specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, TESTS and submit the test reports and records to the COTR. B.Should evidence of malfunction in any tested system, or piece of equipment or component part thereof, occur during or as a result of tests, make proper corrections, repairs or replacements, and repeat tests at no additional cost to the Government. C.When completion of certain work or system occurs at a time when final control settings and adjustments cannot be properly made to make performance tests, then make performance tests for heating systems and for cooling systems respectively during first actual seasonal use of respective systems following completion of work. 3.3 INSTRUCTIONS TO VA PERSONNELProvide in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. E N D SECTION 21 05 11SECTION 21 13 13WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS (DRY-PIPE SYSTEM)PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A.Design, installation and testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 except for specified exceptions.B.Modification of the existing sprinkler system as indicated on the drawings and as further required by these specifications. C.Any new sprinkler heads shall be compatible with dry-pipe quick response system.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.C.Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING, Treatment of penetrations through rated enclosures.D.Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.F.Section 28 31 00, FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM, Connection to fire alarm of flow switches, pressure switches and valve supervisory switches.G.Section 21 05 11 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA.Installer Reliability: The installer shall possess a valid State of West Virginia contractor's license. The installer shall have been actively and successfully engaged in the installation of commercial automatic sprinkler systems for the past ten years.B.Materials and Equipment: All equipment and devices shall be of a make and type listed by UL and approved by FM, or other nationally recognized testing laboratory for the specific purpose for which it is used. All materials, devices, and equipment shall be approved by the VA.C.Submittals: Submit as one package in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Prepare detailed working drawings that are signed by a NICET Level III or Level IV Sprinkler Technician or stamped by a Registered Professional Engineer practicing in the field of Fire Protection Engineering. As Government review is for technical adequacy only, the installer remains responsible for correcting any conflicts with other trades and building construction that arise during installation. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Material submittals shall be approved prior to the purchase or delivery to the job site. Suitably bind submittals in notebooks or binders and provide index referencing the appropriate specification section. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:1.Qualifications:a.Provide a copy of the installing contractors state contractor’s license. b.Provide a copy of the NICET certification for the NICET Level III or Level IV Sprinkler Technician who prepared and signed the detailed working drawings unless the drawings are stamped by a Registered Professional Engineer practicing in the field of Fire Protection Engineering.2.Drawings: Submit detailed 1:100 (1/8 inch) scale (minimum) working drawings conforming to NFPA 13. Include a site plan showing the piping to the water supply test location. 3.Manufacturers Data Sheets: b.Provide for materials and equipment proposed for use on the system. Include listing information and installation instructions in data sheets. Where data sheet describes items in addition to that item being submitted, clearly identify proposed item on the sheet.4.Calculation Sheets: Submit hydraulic calculation sheets in tabular form conforming to the requirements and recommendations of NFPA 13.5.Final Document Submittals: Provide as-built drawings, testing and maintenance instructions in accordance with the requirements in Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:a.One complete set of reproducible as-built drawings showing the installed system with the specific interconnections between the waterflow switch or pressure switch and the fire alarm equipment.plete, simple, understandable, step-by-step, testing instructions giving recommended and required testing frequency of all equipment, methods for testing all equipment, and a complete trouble shooting manual. Provide maintenance instructions on replacing any components of the system including internal parts, periodic cleaning and adjustment of the equipment and components with information as to the address and telephone number of both the manufacturer and the local supplier of each item.c.Material and Testing Certificate: Upon completion of the sprinkler system installation or any partial section of the system, including testing and flushing, provide a copy of a completed Material and Testing Certificate as indicated in NFPA 13.d.Certificates shall document all parts of the installation.e.Instruction Manual: Provide one copy of the instruction manual covering the system in a flexible protective cover and mount in an accessible location adjacent to the riser.D.Design Basis Information: Provide design, materials, equipment, installation, inspection, and testing of the automatic sprinkler system in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13. Recommendations in appendices shall be treated as requirements.1.Perform hydraulic calculations in accordance with NFPA 13 utilizing the Area/Density method. Do not restrict design area reductions permitted for using quick response sprinklers throughout by the required use of standard response sprinklers in the areas identified in this section.2.Sprinkler Protection: To determining spacing and sizing, apply the following coverage classifications:a.Light Hazard Occupancies: Patient care, treatment, and customary access areas.b.Request clarification from the Government for any hazard classification not identified.3.Hydraulic Calculations: Calculated demand including hose stream requirements shall fall no less than 10 percent below the available water supply curve.4.Water Supply: Base water supply on a flow test of:a.Location: Fire Pump Flow Test Dischargeb..Churn pressure: ( 111 psi)net, 170 psi dischargec.Flow pressure: ( 104 psi)net, 148 psi discharged.Flow: ( 498 gpm)@ 100% flowe.Date: 3-20-2008 Contact VA Fire Marshal for latest flow test data.1.4 APPLICABLE PUIBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):13-2002Installation of Sprinkler Systems101-2003Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures (Life Safety Code)170-1999Fire Safety SymbolsC.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):Fire Protection Equipment Directory – Most Recent EditionD.Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM):Approval Guide – Most Recent Edition E.Uniform Building Code – 1997F. Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research-2005PART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 PIPING & FITTINGSA.Sprinkler systems in accordance with NFPA 13..2.2 VALVESA.Valves in accordance with NFPA 13.Do not use quarter turn ball valves for 50 mm (2 inch) or larger drain valves.2.3 SPRINKLERSA.All sprinklers shall be FM approved. Provide quick response sprinklers in all areas, except where specifically prohibited by their listing or approval.B.Temperature Ratings: In accordance with NFPA 13.2.4 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS/HYDRAULIC PLACARDSPlastic, steel or aluminum signs with white lettering on a red background with holes for easy attachment. Enter pertinent data for each system on the hydraulic placard.2.5 GAUGES Provide gauges as required by NFPA 13.2.6 PIPE hangers and SUPPORTSSupports, hangers, etc., of an approved pattern placement to conform to NFPA 13. System piping shall be substantially supported to the building structure. The installation of hangers and supports shall adhere to the requirements set forth in NFPA 13, Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems. Materials used in the installation or construction of hangers and supports shall be listed and approved for such application. Hangers or supports not specifically listed for service shall be designed and bear the seal of a professional engineer. 2.7 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATESProvide chrome plated steel escutcheon plates for exposed piping passing though walls, floors or ceilings.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Installation shall be accomplished by the licensed contractor. Provide a qualified technician, experienced in the installation and operation of the type of system being installed, to supervise the installation and testing of the system.B.Installation of Piping: Accurately cut pipe to measurements established by the installer and work into place without springing or forcing. In any situation where bending of the pipe is required, use a standard pipe-bending template. Install concealed piping in spaces that have finished ceilings. Sidewall heads may need to be utilized. C.Welding: Conform to the requirements and recommendations of NFPA 13.D.Drains: Pipe drains to discharge at safe points outside of the building or to sight cones attached to drains of adequate size to readily carry the full flow from each drain under maximum pressure. Do not provide a direct drain connection to sewer system or discharge into sinks. Install drips and drains where necessary and required by NFPA 13.G.Inspector's Test Connection: Install and supply in conformance with NFPA 13, locate in a secured area, and discharge to the exterior of the building.H.Affix cutout disks, which are created by cutting holes in the walls of pipe for flow switches and non-threaded pipe connections to the respective waterflow switch or pipe connection near to the pipe from where they were cut. I.Sleeves: Provide for pipes passing through masonry or concrete. Provide space between the pipe and the sleeve in accordance with NFPA 13. Seal this space with a UL Listed through penetration fire stop material in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. Where core drilling is used in lieu of sleeves, also seal space. Seal penetrations of walls, floors and ceilings of other types of construction, in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.J.Firestopping shall comply with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.K.Securely attach identification signs to control valves, drain valves, and test valves. Locate hydraulic placard information signs at each sectional control valve where there is a zone water flow switch.L.Repairs: Repair damage to the building or equipment resulting from the installation of the sprinkler system by the installer at no additional expense to the Government.M.Interruption of Service: There shall be no interruption of the existing sprinkler protection, water, electric, or fire alarm services without prior permission of the Contracting Officer. Contractor shall develop an interim fire protection program where interruptions involve in occupied spaces. Request in writing at least one week prior to the planned interruption. 3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTA.Preliminary Testing: Flush newly installed systems prior to performing hydrostatic tests in order to remove any debris which may have been left as well as ensuring piping is unobstructed. Hydrostatically test system, including the fire department connections, as specified in NFPA 13, in the presence of the Contracting Officers Technical Representative (COTR) or his designated representative. B.Final Inspection and Testing: Subject system to tests in accordance with NFPA 13, and when all necessary corrections have been accomplished, advise COTR/COTR to schedule a final inspection and test. Connection to the fire alarm system shall have been in service for at least ten days prior to the final inspection, with adjustments made to prevent false alarms. Furnish all instruments, labor and materials required for the tests and provide the services of the installation foreman or other competent representative of the installer to perform the tests. Correct deficiencies and retest system as necessary, prior to the final acceptance. Include the operation of all features of the systems under normal operations in test.3.3 INSTRUCTIONSFurnish the services of a competent instructor for not less than two hours for instructing personnel in the operation and maintenance of the system, on the dates requested by the COTR/COTR.E N D SECTION 21 13 13 SECTION 22 05 11COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBINGPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.The requirements of this Section shall apply to all sections of Division 22. B.Definitions:1.Exposed: Piping and equipment exposed to view in finished rooms. 2.Option or optional: Contractor's choice of an alternate material or method. 1.2 RELATED WORK Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.C.Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS. D.Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. E.Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS. F.Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.G.Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION.H.Section 23 09 23, DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS FOR HVAC. I.Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Products Criteria:1.Standard Products: Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least 3 years. However, digital electronics devices, software and systems such as controls, instruments, computer work station, shall be the current generation of technology and basic design that has a proven satisfactory service record of at least three years.2.Equipment Service: There shall be permanent service organizations, authorized and trained by manufacturers of the equipment supplied, located within 160 km (100 miles) of the project. These organizations shall come to the site and provide acceptable service to restore operations within four hours of receipt of notification by phone, e-mail or fax in event of an emergency, such as the shut-down of equipment; or within 24 hours in a non-emergency. Names, mail and e-mail addresses and phone numbers of service organizations providing service under these conditions for (as applicable to the project): pumps, critical instrumentation, computer workstation and programming shall be submitted for project record and inserted into the operations and maintenance manual. 3.All items furnished shall be free from defects that would adversely affect the performance, maintainability and appearance of individual components and overall assembly.4.The products and execution of work specified in Division 22 shall conform to the referenced codes and standards as required by the specifications. Local codes and amendments enforced by the local code official shall be enforced, if required by local authorities such as the natural gas supplier. If the local codes are more stringent, then the local code shall apply. Any conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the COTR/Contracting Officers Technical Representative (COTR).5.Multiple Units: When two or more units of materials or equipment of the same type or class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.6.Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product.7.Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment.8.Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.B.Welding: Before any welding is performed, contractor shall submit a certificate certifying that welders comply with the following requirements:1.Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications".ply with provisions of ASME B31 series "Code for Pressure Piping".3.Certify that each welder has passed American Welding Society (AWS) qualification tests for the welding processes involved, and that certification is current.4.All welds shall be stamped according to the provisions of the American Welding Society.C.Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the COTR prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material. D.Execution (Installation, Construction) Quality:1.All items shall be applied and installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Conflicts between the manufacturer's instructions and the contract drawings and specifications shall be referred to the COTR for resolution. Written hard copies or computer files of manufacturer’s installation instructions shall be provided to the COTR at least two weeks prior to commencing installation of any item.plete layout drawings shall be required by Paragraph, SUBMITTALS. Construction work shall not start on any system until the layout drawings have been approved.E.Guaranty: Warranty of Construction, FAR clause 52.246-21.F.Plumbing Systems: IPC, International Plumbing Code.1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submittals shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES. rmation and material submitted under this section shall be marked "SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING", with applicable paragraph identification.C.Contractor shall make all necessary field measurements and investigations to assure that the equipment and assemblies will meet contract requirements.D.If equipment is submitted which differs in arrangement from that shown, provide drawings that show the rearrangement of all associated systems. Approval will be given only if all features of the equipment and associated systems, including accessibility, are equivalent to that required by the contract.E.Prior to submitting shop drawings for approval, contractor shall certify in writing that manufacturers of all major items of equipment have each reviewed drawings and specifications, and have jointly coordinated and properly integrated their equipment and controls to provide a complete and efficient installation.F.Upon request by Government, lists of previous installations for selected items of equipment shall be provided. Contact persons who will serve as references, with telephone numbers and e-mail addresses shall be submitted with the references.G.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Manufacturer’s literature shall be submitted under the pertinent section rather than under this section. 1.Electric motor data and variable speed drive data shall be submitted with the driven equipment. 2.Equipment and materials identification. 3.Fire stopping materials. 4.Hangers, inserts, supports and bracing. Provide load calculations for variable spring and constant support hangers. 5.Wall, floor, and ceiling plates. H.Coordination Drawings: In accordance with GENERAL CONDITIONS, Article, SUBCONTRACTS AND WORK COORDINATION. Complete consolidated and coordinated layout drawings shall be submitted for all new systems, and for existing systems that are in the same areas. The drawings shall include plan views, elevations and sections of all systems and shall be on a scale of not less than 1:32 (3/8-inch equal to one foot). Clearly identify and dimension the proposed locations of the principal items of equipment. The drawings shall clearly show the proposed location and adequate clearance for all equipment, piping, pumps, valves and other items. All valves, trap primer valves, water hammer arrestors, strainers, and equipment requiring service shall be provided with an access door sized for the complete removal of plumbing device, component, or equipment. Equipment foundations shall not be installed until equipment or piping until layout drawings have been approved. Detailed layout drawings shall be provided for all piping systems. In addition, details of the following shall be provided.1.Mechanical equipment rooms. 2.Interstitial space.3.Hangers, inserts, supports, and bracing. 4.Pipe sleeves. 5.Equipment penetrations of floors, walls, ceilings, or roofs. I.Maintenance Data and Operating Instructions: 1.Maintenance and operating manuals in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, INSTRUCTIONS, for systems and equipment. 2.Listing of recommended replacement parts for keeping in stock supply, including sources of supply, for equipment shall be provided.3.The listing shall include belts for equipment: Belt manufacturer, model number, size and style, and distinguished whether of multiple belt sets.1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Protection of Equipment: 1.Equipment and material placed on the job site shall remain in the custody of the Contractor until phased acceptance, whether or not the Government has reimbursed the Contractor for the equipment and material. The Contractor is solely responsible for the protection of such equipment and material against any damage.2.Damaged equipment shall be replaced with an identical unit as determined and directed by the COTR. Such replacement shall be at no additional cost to the Government.3.Interiors of new equipment and piping systems shall be protected against entry of foreign matter. Both inside and outside shall be cleaned before painting or placing equipment in operation.4.Existing equipment and piping being worked on by the Contractor shall be under the custody and responsibility of the Contractor and shall be protected as required for new work.B.Cleanliness of Piping and Equipment Systems:1.Care shall be exercised in the storage and handling of equipment and piping material to be incorporated in the work. Debris arising from cutting, threading and welding of piping shall be removed.2.Piping systems shall be flushed, blown or pigged as necessary to deliver clean systems.3.Contractor shall be fully responsible for all costs, damage, and delay arising from failure to provide clean systems.1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below shall form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC): SEC IX-2007Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications. C.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A36/A36M-2008Standard Specification for Carbon Structural SteelA575-96 (R 2007)Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades R (2002)E84-2005Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials E1192008aStandard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials D.Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc: SP5802Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design and Manufacture SP 69-2003 (R 2004)Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and ApplicationE.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):MG1-2003, Rev. 1-2007Motors and GeneratorsF. International Code Council, (ICC):IBC-06, (R 2007)International Building CodeIPC-06, (R 2007)International Plumbing CodePART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FACTORY-ASSEMBLED PRODUCTSA.Standardization of components shall be maximized to reduce spare part requirements.B.Manufacturers of equipment assemblies that include components made by others shall assume complete responsibility for final assembled unit.1.All components of an assembled unit need not be products of same manufacturer.2.Constituent parts that are alike shall be products of a single manufacturer.ponents shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for intended service.4.Contractor shall guarantee performance of assemblies of components, and shall repair or replace elements of the assemblies as required to deliver specified performance of the complete assembly.ponents of equipment shall bear manufacturer's name and trademark, model number, serial number and performance data on a name plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place, or cast integral with, stamped or otherwise permanently marked upon the components of the equipment.D.Major items of equipment, which serve the same function, shall be the same make and model2.2 COMPATIBILITY OF RELATED EQUIPMENT A.Equipment and materials installed shall be compatible in all respects with other items being furnished and with existing items so that the result will be a complete and fully operational system that conforms to contract requirements.2.3 LIFTING ATTACHMENTS Equipment shall be provided with suitable lifting attachments to enable equipment to be lifted in its normal position. Lifting attachments shall withstand any handling conditions that might be encountered, without bending or distortion of shape, such as rapid lowering and braking of load.2.4 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS IDENTIFICATION A.Use symbols, nomenclature and equipment numbers specified, shown on the drawings, or shown in the maintenance manuals. Identification for piping is specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING. B.Interior (Indoor) Equipment: Engraved nameplates, with letters not less than 48 mm (3/16inch) high of brass with blackfilled letters, or rigid black plastic with white letters specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING shall be permanently fastened to the equipment. Unit components such as water heaters, tanks, coils, filters, fans, etc. shall be identified. C.Control Items: All temperature, pressure, and controllers shall be labeled and the component’s function identified. Identify and label each item as they appear on the control diagrams. D.Valve Tags and Lists: 1.Plumbing: All valves shall be provided with valve tags and listed on a valve list (Fixture stops not included). 2.Valve tags: Engraved black filled numbers and letters not less than 13 mm (1/2inch) high for number designation, and not less than 6.4 mm(1/4inch) for service designation on 19 gage, 38 mm (11/2 inches) round brass disc, attached with brass "S" hook or brass chain. 3.Valve lists: Valve lists shall be created using a word processing program and printed on plastic coated cards. The plastic coated valve list card(s), sized 216 mm (81/2 inches) by 280 mm (11 inches) shall show valve tag number, valve function and area of control for each service or system. The valve list shall be in a punched 3ring binder notebook. A copy of the valve list shall be mounted in picture frames for mounting to a wall.4.A detailed plan for each floor of the building indicating the location and valve number for each valve shall be provided. Each valve location shall be identified with a color coded sticker or thumb tack in ceiling.2.8 FIRE STOPPING A.Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING specifies an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases where penetrations occur for piping. Refer to Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION, for pipe insulation. 2.9 GALVANIZED REPAIR COMPOUNDA.Mil. Spec. DODP21035B, paint. 2.10 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTSA.In lieu of the paragraph which follows, suspended equipment support and restraints may be designed and installed in accordance with the International Building Code (IBC), latest edition. Submittals based on the International Building Code (IBC), latest edition, or the following paragraphs of this Section shall be stamped and signed by a professional engineer registered in a state where the project is located. The Support system of suspended equipment over 227 kg (500 pounds) shall be submitted for approval of the COTR in all cases. See these specifications for lateral force design requirements.B.Type Numbers Specified: MSS SP58. For selection and application refer to MSS SP69. Refer to Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS, for miscellaneous metal support materials and prime coat painting. C.For Attachment to Concrete Construction:1.Concrete insert: Type 18, MSS SP58. 2.Selfdrilling expansion shields and machine bolt expansion anchors: Permitted in concrete not less than 102 mm (4 inches) thick when approved by the COTR for each job condition.3.Powerdriven fasteners: Permitted in existing concrete or masonry not less than 102 mm (4 inches) thick when approved by the COTR for each job condition. D.For Attachment to Steel Construction: MSS SP58. 1.Welded attachment: Type 22. 2.Beam clamps: Types 20, 21, 28 or 29. Type 23 Cclamp may be used for individual copper tubing up to 23 mm (7/8inch) outside diameter. E.Hanger Rods: Hotrolled steel, ASTM A36 or A575 for allowable load listed in MSS SP58. For piping, provide adjustment means for controlling level or slope. Types 13 or 15 turnbuckles shall provide 38 mm (11/2 inches) minimum of adjustment and incorporate locknuts. Allthread rods are acceptable. F.Multiple (Trapeze) Hangers: Galvanized, cold formed, lipped steel channel horizontal member, not less than 41 mm by 41 mm (15/8 inches by 15/8 inches), 2.7 mm (No. 12 gage), designed to accept special spring held, hardened steel nuts. Trapeze hangers are not permitted for steam supply and condensate piping. 1.Allowable hanger load: Manufacturers rating less 91kg (200 pounds). 2.Guide individual pipes on the horizontal member of every other trapeze hanger with 6 mm (1/4inch) Ubolt fabricated from steel rod. Provide Type 40 insulation shield, secured by two 13 mm (1/2inch) galvanized steel bands, or insulated calcium silicate shield for insulated piping at each hanger. G.Pipe Hangers and Supports: (MSS SP58), use hangers sized to encircle insulation on insulated piping. Refer to Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, and BOILER PLANT INSULATION for insulation thickness. To protect insulation, provide Type 39 saddles for roller type supports or insulated calcium silicate shields. Provide Type 40 insulation shield or insulated calcium silicate shield at all other types of supports and hangers including those for insulated piping.1.General Types (MSS SP58): a.Standard clevis hanger: Type 1; provide locknut. b.Riser clamps: Type 8. c.Ubolt clamp: Type 24. d.Copper Tube: 1)Hangers, clamps and other support material in contact with tubing shall be painted with copper colored epoxy paint, plastic coated or taped with isolation tape to prevent electrolysis.2)For vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps.3)For supporting tube to strut: Provide epoxy painted pipe straps for copper tube or plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps.4)Insulated Lines: Provide pre-insulated calcium silicate shields sized for copper tube.1.Plumbing Piping (Other Than General Types): a.Horizontal piping: Type 1, 5, 7, 9, and 10. b.Chrome plated piping: Chrome plated supports. H.Pre-insulated Calcium Silicate Shields:1.Provide 360 degree water resistant high density 965 kPa (140 psi) compressive strength calcium silicate shields encased in galvanized metal.2.Pre-insulated calcium silicate shields to be installed at the point of support during erection.3.Shield thickness shall match the pipe insulation.4.The type of shield is selected by the temperature of the pipe, the load it must carry, and the type of support it will be used with.a.Shields for supporting cold water shall have insulation that extends a minimum of one inch past the sheet metal.b.The insulated calcium silicate shield shall support the maximum allowable water filled span as indicated in MSS-SP 69. To support the load, the shields shall have one or more of the following features: structural inserts 4138 kPa (600 psi) compressive strength, an extra bottom metal shield, or formed structural steel (ASTM A36) wear plates welded to the bottom sheet metal jacket.Shields may be used on steel clevis hanger type supports, roller supports or flat surfaces.2.11 PIPE PENETRATIONSA.Pipe penetration sleeves shall be installed for all pipe other than rectangular blocked out floor openings for risers in mechanical bays.B.Pipe penetration sleeve materials shall comply with all fire stopping requirements for each penetration.C.To prevent accidental liquid spills from passing to a lower level, provide the following: 1.For sleeves: Extend sleeve 25 mm (1 inch) above finished floor and provide sealant for watertight joint. 2.For blocked out floor openings: Provide 40 mm (11/2 inch) angle set in silicone adhesive around opening. 3.For drilled penetrations: Provide 40 mm (11/2 inch) angle ring or square set in silicone adhesive around penetration. C.Penetrations are not allowed through beams or ribs, but may be installed in concrete beam flanges. Any deviation from these requirements must receive prior approval of COTR. D.Sheet metal, plastic, or moisture resistant fiber sleeves shall be provided for pipe passing through floors, interior walls, and partitions, unless brass or steel pipe sleeves are specifically called for below.E.Brass Pipe Sleeves shall be provided for pipe passing through quarry tile, terrazzo or ceramic tile floors. The sleeve shall be connected with a floor plate. F.Sleeve clearance through floors, walls, partitions, and beam flanges shall be 25 mm (1 inch) greater in diameter than external diameter of pipe. Sleeve for pipe with insulation shall be large enough to accommodate the insulation plus 25 mm (1 inch) in diameter. Interior openings shall be caulked tight with fire stopping material and sealant to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and gases. G.Sealant and Adhesives: Shall be as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS. 2.12 TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS A.Furnish, and turn over to the COTR, special tools not readily available commercially, that are required for disassembly or adjustment of equipment and machinery furnished. 2.13 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES A.Material and Type: Chrome plated brass or chrome plated steel, one piece or split type with concealed hinge, with set screw for fastening to pipe, or sleeve. Use plates that fit tight around pipes, cover openings around pipes and cover the entire pipe sleeve projection. B.Thickness: Not less than 2.4 mm (3/32inch) for floor plates. For wall and ceiling plates, not less than 0.64 mm (0.025-inch) for up to 80 mm (3 inch) pipe, 0.89 mm (0.035-inch) for larger pipe. C.Locations: Use where pipe penetrates floors, walls and ceilings in exposed locations, in finished areas only. Wall plates shall be used where insulation ends on exposed water supply pipe drop from overhead. A watertight joint shall be provided in spaces where brass or steel pipe sleeves are specified. 2.14 ASBESTOSMaterials containing asbestos are not permitted.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ARRANGEMENT AND INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING A.Location of piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, and equipment, access provisions shall be coordinated with the work of all trades. Piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, and equipment shall be located clear of windows, doors, openings, light outlets, and other services and utilities. Equipment layout drawings shall be prepared to coordinate proper location and personnel access of all facilities. The drawings shall be submitted for review.Manufacturer's published recommendations shall be followed for installation methods not otherwise specified. B.Operating Personnel Access and Observation Provisions: All equipment and systems shall be arranged to provide clear view and easy access, without use of portable ladders, for maintenance and operation of all devices including, but not limited to: all equipment items, valves, filters, strainers, transmitters, sensors, control devices. All gages and indicators shall be clearly visible by personnel standing on the floor or on permanent platforms. Maintenance and operating space and access provisions that are shown on the drawings shall not be changed nor reduced. C.Structural systems necessary for pipe and equipment support shall be coordinated to permit proper installation.D.Location of pipe sleeves, trenches and chases shall be accurately coordinated with equipment and piping locations.E.Cutting Holes:1.Holes through concrete and masonry shall be cut by rotary core drill. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, and hand or manual hammer type drill will not be allowed, except as permitted by COTR where working area space is limited.2.Holes shall be located to avoid interference with structural members such as beams or grade beams. Holes shall be laid out in advance and drilling done only after approval by COTR. If the Contractor considers it necessary to drill through structural members, this matter shall be referred to COTR for approval.3.Waterproof membrane shall not be penetrated. Pipe floor penetration block outs shall be provided outside the extents of the waterproof membrane.F.Interconnection of Instrumentation or Control Devices: Generally, electrical and pneumatic interconnections are not shown but must be provided.G.Minor Piping: Generally, small diameter pipe runs from drips and drains, water cooling, and other service are not shown but must be provided.H.Protection and Cleaning: 1.Equipment and materials shall be carefully handled, properly stored, and adequately protected to prevent damage before and during installation, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the COTR. Damaged or defective items in the opinion of the COTR, shall be replaced. 2.Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. Pipe openings, equipment, and plumbing fixtures shall be tightly covered against dirt or mechanical injury. At completion of all work thoroughly clean fixtures, exposed materials and equipment. I.Concrete and Grout: Concrete and shrink compensating grout 25 MPa (3000 psi) minimum, shall be used for all pad or floor mounted equipment. Gages, thermometers, valves and other devices shall be installed with due regard for ease in reading or operating and maintaining said devices. Thermometers and gages shall be located and positioned to be easily read by operator or staff standing on floor or walkway provided. Servicing shall not require dismantling adjacent equipment or pipe work.J.Interconnection of Controls and Instruments: Electrical interconnection is generally not shown but shall be provided. This includes interconnections of sensors, transmitters, transducers, control devices, control and instrumentation panels, instruments and computer workstations. Comply with NFPA-70.K. Work in Existing Building: 1.Perform as specified in Article, OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS, Article, ALTERATIONS, and Article, RESTORATION of the Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS for relocation of existing equipment, alterations and restoration of existing building(s). 2.As specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS, make alterations to existing service piping at times that will cause the least interference with normal operation of the facility. L.Inaccessible Equipment:1.Where the Government determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, equipment shall be removed and reinstalled or remedial action performed as directed at no additional cost to the Government.2.The term "conveniently accessible" is defined as capable of being reached without the use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as electrical conduit, motors, fans, pumps, belt guards, transformers, high voltage lines, piping, and ductwork. M. Work in bathrooms, restrooms, housekeeping closets: All pipe penetratins behind escutcheons shall be sealed with plumbers putty.3.2 TEMPORARY PIPING AND EQUIPMENTA.Continuity of operation of existing facilities may require temporary installation or relocation of equipment and piping. Temporary equipment or pipe installation or relocation shall be provided to maintain continuity of operation of existing facilities.B.The Contractor shall provide all required facilities in accordance with the requirements of phased construction and maintenance of service. All piping and equipment shall be properly supported, sloped to drain, operate without excessive stress, and shall be insulated where injury can occur to personnel by contact with operating facilities. The requirements of Para. 3.1 shall apply.C.Temporary facilities and piping shall be completely removed and any openings in structures sealed. Necessary blind flanges and caps shall be provided to seal open piping remaining in service.3.3 RIGGINGA.Openings in building structures shall be planned to accommodate design scheme.B.Alternative methods of equipment delivery may be offered and will be considered by Government under specified restrictions of phasing and service requirements as well as structural integrity of the building.C.All openings in the building shall be closed when not required for rigging operations to maintain proper environment in the facility for Government operation and maintenance of service. D.Contractor shall provide all facilities required to deliver specified equipment and place on foundations. Attachments to structures for rigging purposes and support of equipment on structures shall be Contractor's full responsibility.E.Contractor shall check all clearances, weight limitations and shall provide a rigging plan designed by a Registered Professional Engineer. All modifications to structures, including reinforcement thereof, shall be at Contractor's cost, time and responsibility.F.Rigging plan and methods shall be referred to COTR for evaluation prior to actual work.3.4 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A.Where hanger spacing does not correspond with joist or rib spacing, use structural steel channels secured directly to joist and rib structure that will correspond to the required hanger spacing, and then suspend the equipment and piping from the channels. Holes shall be drilled or burned in structural steel ONLY with the prior written approval of the COTR. B.The use of chain pipe supports, wire or strap hangers; wood for blocking, stays and bracing, or hangers suspended from piping above shall not be permitted. Rusty products shall be replaced.C.Hanger rods shall be used that are straight and vertical. Turnbuckles for vertical adjustments may be omitted where limited space prevents use. A minimum of 15 mm (1/2inch) clearance between pipe or piping covering and adjacent work shall be provided. D.For horizontal and vertical plumbing pipe supports, refer to the International Plumbing Code (IPC), latest edition, and these specifications.E.Overhead Supports:1.The basic structural system of the building is designed to sustain the loads imposed by equipment and piping to be supported overhead.2.Provide steel structural members, in addition to those shown, of adequate capability to support the imposed loads, located in accordance with the final approved layout of equipment and piping.3.Tubing and capillary systems shall be supported in channel troughs.F. Floor Supports:1.Provide concrete bases, concrete anchor blocks and pedestals, and structural steel systems for support of equipment and piping. Concrete bases and structural systems shall be anchored and doweled to resist forces under operating and seismic conditions (if applicable) without excessive displacement or structural failure.2.Bases and supports shall not be located and installed until equipment mounted thereon has been approved. Bases shall be sized to match equipment mounted thereon plus 50 mm (2 inch) excess on all edges. Structural drawings shall be reviewed for additional requirements. Bases shall be neatly finished and smoothed, shall have chamfered edges at the top, and shall be suitable for painting.3.All equipment shall be shimmed, leveled, firmly anchored, and grouted with epoxy grout. Anchor bolts shall be placed in sleeves, anchored to the bases. Fill the annular space between sleeves and bolts with a grout material to permit alignment and realignment.3.5 Plumbing systems DEMOLITIONA.Rigging access, other than indicated on the drawings, shall be provided after approval for structural integrity by the COTR. Such access shall be provided without additional cost or time to the Government. Where work is in an occupied facility, approved protection from dust and debris shall be provided at all times for the safety of occupants and maintenance of existing building systems.B.Unless specified otherwise, all piping, wiring, conduit, and other devices associated with the equipment not re-used in the new work shall be completely removed from Government property. This includes all pipe, valves, fittings, insulation, and all hangers including the top connection and any fastenings to building structural systems. All openings shall be sealed after removal of equipment, pipes, ducts, and other penetrations in roof, walls, floors, in an approved manner and in accordance with plans and specifications where specifically covered. Structural integrity of the building system shall be maintained. Reference shall also be made to the drawings and specifications of the other disciplines in the project for additional facilities to be demolished or handled.C.All valves including gate, globe, ball, butterfly and check, all pressure gages and thermometers with wells shall remain Government property and shall be removed and delivered to COTR and stored as directed. The Contractor shall remove all other material and equipment, devices and demolition debris under these plans and specifications. Such material shall be removed from Government property expeditiously and shall not be allowed to accumulate.3.7 CLEANING AND PAINTINGA.Prior to final inspection and acceptance of the plant and facilities for beneficial use by the Government, the plant facilities, equipment and systems shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted. Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.B.In addition, the following special conditions apply:Cleaning shall be thorough. Solvents, cleaning materials and methods recommended by the manufacturers shall be used for the specific tasks. All rust shall be removed prior to painting and from surfaces to remain unpainted. Scratches, scuffs, and abrasions shall be repaired prior to applying prime and finish coats. The following Material And Equipment shall NOT be painted::a.Motors, controllers, control switches, and safety switches.b.Control and interlock devices.c.Regulators.d.Pressure reducing valves.e.Control valves and thermostatic elements.f.Lubrication devices and grease fittings.g.Copper, brass, aluminum, stainless steel and bronze surfaces.h.Valve stems and rotating shafts.i.Pressure gages and thermometers.j.Glass.k.Name plates.3.Temporary Facilities: Apply paint to surfaces that do not have existing finish coats.4.The final result shall be a smooth, even-colored, even-textured factory finish on all items. The entire piece of equipment shall be repainted, if necessary, to achieve this.3.8 IDENTIFICATION SIGNSA.Laminated plastic signs, with engraved lettering not less than 5 mm (3/16-inch) high, shall be provided that designates equipment function, for all equipment, switches, motor controllers, relays, meters, control devices, including automatic control valves. Nomenclature and identification symbols shall correspond to that used in maintenance manual, and in diagrams specified elsewhere. Attach by chain, adhesive, or screws.B.Factory Built Equipment: Metal plate, securely attached, with name and address of manufacturer, serial number, model number, size, performance shall be placed on factory built equipment.C.Pipe Identification: Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.3.9 STARTUP AND TEMPORARY OPERATION A.Start up of equipment shall be performed as described in the equipment specifications. Vibration within specified tolerance shall be verified prior to extended operation. Temporary use of equipment is specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, TEMPORARY USE OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. 3.10 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS A.Prior to the final inspection, all required tests shall be performed as specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, TESTS and submit the test reports and records to the COTR. B.Should evidence of malfunction in any tested system, or piece of equipment or component part thereof, occur during or as a result of tests, make proper corrections, repairs or replacements, and repeat tests at no additional cost to the Government. C.When completion of certain work or system occurs at a time when final control settings and adjustments cannot be properly made to make performance tests, then make performance tests such systems respectively during first actual seasonal use of respective systems following completion of work. 3.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALSA.Provide four bound copies. The Operations and maintenance manuals shall be delivered to COTR not less than 30 days prior to completion of a phase or final inspection.B.All new and temporary equipment and all elements of each assembly shall be included.C.Data sheet on each device listing model, size, capacity, pressure, speed, horsepower, impeller size, and other information shall be included.D.Manufacturer’s installation, maintenance, repair, and operation instructions for each device shall be included. Assembly drawings and parts lists shall also be included. A summary of operating precautions and reasons for precautions shall be included in the Operations and Maintenance Manual.E.Emergency procedures.3.12 INSTRUCTIONS TO VA PERSONNELInstructions shall be provided in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. E N D SECTION 22 05 11SECTION 22 05 19METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPINGPART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section describes the requirements for water meters and pressure gages.1.2 RELATED WORK Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES. B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Water Meter. 2.BACnet communication protocol3.Product certificates for each type of meter and gaugeC.Operations and Maintenance manual shall include: 1.System Description2.Major assembly block diagrams3.Troubleshooting and preventive maintenance guidelines4.Spare parts information.D.Shop Drawings shall include the following: 1.One line, wiring and terminal diagrams including terminals identified, protocol or communication modules, and Ethernet connections.1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American National Standards Institute (ANSI): American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): (Copyrighted Society)B40.1-05Gauges-Pressure Indicating Dial Type-Elastic C.American Water Works Association (AWWA):C70007 (R 2003)Standard for Cold Water Meters, Displacement Type, Bronze Main CaseC70107Cold Water Meters-Turbine Type, for Customer Service AWWA/ ANSIC70201Cold water meters – Compound TypeD.International Code Council (ICC):IPC06(2007 Supplement) International Plumbing Code1.5 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATIONA.The electronic documentation and copies of the Operations and Maintenance Manual, approved submittals, shop drawings, and other closeout documentation shall be prepared by a computer software program complying with Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended (29 U.S.C 794d). The manufacturer or vendor of the software used to prepare the electronic documentation shall have a Voluntary Product Accessibility Template made available for review and included as part of the Operations and Maintenance Manual or closeout documentation. All available accessibility functions listed in the Voluntary Accessibility Template shall be enabled in the prepared electronic files. As Adobe Acrobat is a common industry format for such documentation, following the document, "Creating Accessible Adobe PDF files, A Guide for Document Authors" that is maintained and made available by Adobe free of charge is recommended.”B.Four sets of manufacturer’s literature and data updated to include submittal review comments and any equipment substitutions.C.Four sets of operation and maintenance data updated to include submittal review comments shall be inserted into a three ring binder. All aspects of system operation and maintenance procedures, including piping isometrics, wiring diagrams of all circuits, a written description of system design, control logic, and sequence of operation shall be included in the operation and maintenance manual. The operations and maintenance manual shall include troubleshooting techniques and procedures for emergency situations. Notes on all special systems or devices such as damper and door closure interlocks shall be included. A List of recommended spare parts (manufacturer, model number, and quantity) shall be furnished. Information explaining any special knowledge or tools the owner will be required to employ shall be inserted into the As-Built documentation.PART 2 – PRODUCTS2.1 displacement WATER METER A.For pipe sizes under 50 mm (2 inches), the water meter shall be displacement type, full size nutating disc, magnetic drive, sealed register, and fully conform to AWWA C700. Peak domestic flow shall be 2.2 L/S (34 gpm). The meter register shall indicate flow in U.S. gallons.B.The water meter shall be rated for use at temperatures ranging from -40° C (-40° F) and +70° C (158° F) and operate at a working pressure of 1034 kPa (150-psig).C.The meter case, bottom caps, and register box lids shall be constructed from cast bronze.2.2 WATER METER PROGRAMMINGA.The software shall have a Microsoft based interface and operate on the latest Windows operating system. The software shall allow the user to configure the meter, troubleshoot the meter, query and display meter parameters, and configure data and stored values.B.The meter firmware shall be upgradeable through one of the communication ports without removing the unit from service.C.the meter shall include output for analog 4-20 milliamp signals and binary output.D.The meter shall have two dry contact relays outputs for alarm or control functions.2.3 WATER METER COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLA.The meter shall use a native BACnet Ethernet communication protocol supporting Modbus. The communications shall be protected against surges induced on its communications channels.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Test plugs shall be installed on the inlet and outlet pipes all heat exchangers or water heaters serving more than one plumbing fixture.B.Water meter installation shall conform to AWWA C700, AWWA C701, and AWWA C702. Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70 (National Electric Code), and to the requirements specified herein. New materials shall be provided.C.Each water meter shall communicate with the building energy management and control system and report daily water consumption and peak daily flow rate.3.2FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA.The meter assembly shall be visually inspected and operationally tested. The correct multiplier placement on the face of the meter shall be verified.3.3TRAININGA.A training course shall be provided to the medical center on meter configuration and maintenance. Training manuals shall be supplied for all attendee with four additional copies supplied. The training course shall cover meter configuration, troubleshooting, and diagnostic procedures.E N D SECTION 22 05 19SECTION 22 05 23GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPINGPART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.This section describes the requirements for general-duty valves for domestic water and sewer systems.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES. B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Valves. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A536-84(R 2004) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron CastingsC.American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE)ASSE 1003-01 (R 2003)Performance Requirements for Water Pressure Reducing ValvesASSE 1012-02Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric VentASSE 1013-05Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow PreventersD.International Code Council (ICC)IPC-06 (R 2007)International Plumbing CodeE.Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS):SP-25-98Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and UnionsSP-67-02a (R 2004) Butterfly Valve of the Single flange Type (Lug Wafer)SP-70-06Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.SP-72-99Ball Valves With Flanged or Butt Welding For General PurposeSP-80-03Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.SP-110-96Ball Valve Threaded, Socket Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA.Valves shall be prepared for shipping as follows:1.Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.2.Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.3.Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.4.Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfacesB.Valves shall be prepared for storage as follows:1.Maintain valve end protection.2.Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature.PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES A.Asbestos packing and gaskets are prohibited.B.Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc shall not be permitted.C.Valves in insulated piping shall have 50 mm or DN50 (2 inch) stem extensions and extended handles of non-thermal conductive material that allows operating the valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing the insulation. Memory stops shall be fully adjustable after insulation is applied.D.Ball valves, used to supply potable water shall meet the requirements of NSF 61.E.Shutoff: 1.Cold, Hot and Re-circulating Hot Water: a.50 mm or DN50 (2 inches) and smaller: Ball, MSS SP-72, SP-110, Ball valve shall be full port three piece or two piece with a union design with adjustable stem package. Threaded stem designs are not allowed. The ball valve shall have a SWP rating of 1035 kPa (150 psig) and a CWP rating of 4140 kPa (600 psig). The body material shall be Bronze ASTM B584, Alloy C844. The ends shall be solder, F.Balancing: Hot Water Re-circulating, 80 mm or DN80 (3 inches) and smaller manual balancing valve shall be of bronze body, brass ball construction with glass and carbon filled TFE seat rings and designed for positive shutoff. The manual balancing valve shall have differential pressure read-out ports across the valve seat area. The read out ports shall be fitting with internal EPT inserts and check valves. The valve body shall have 8 mm or DN8 NPT (?” NPT) tapped drain and purge port. The valves shall have memory stops that allow the valve to close for service and then reopened to set point without disturbing the balance position. All valves shall have calibrated nameplates to assure specific valve settings.G. Check valves less than 80 mm or DN80 (3 inches) and smaller) shall be class 125, bronze swing check valves with non metallic Buna-N disc. The check valve shall meet MSS SP-80 Type 4 standard. The check valve shall have a CWP rating of 1380 kPa (200 psig). The check valve shall have a Y pattern horizontal body design with bronze body material conforming to ASTM B 62, solder joints, and PTFE or TFE disc.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 eXAMINATION Valve interior shall be examined for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Special packing materials shall be removed, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.Valves shall be operated in positions from fully open to fully closed. Guides and seats shall be examined and made accessible by such operations.Threads on valve and mating pipe shall be examined for form and cleanliness. Mating flange faces shall be examined for conditions that might cause leakage. Bolting shall be checked for proper size, length, and material. Gaskets shall be verified for proper size and that its material composition is suitable for service and free from defects and damage.Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.Valves shall be located for easy access and shall be provide with separate support. Valves shall be accessible with access doors when installed inside partitions or above hard ceilings.Valves shall be installed in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipeValves shall be installed in a position to allow full stem movement.3.3 ADJUSTING A.Valve packing shall be adjusted or replaced after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves shall be replaced if persistent leaking occurs.E N D SECTION 22 05 23 SECTION 22 07 11PLUMBING INSULATIONPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.Field applied insulation for thermal efficiency and condensation control for 1.Plumbing piping and equipment.2.Re-insulation of plumbing piping and equipment after asbestos abatement.B.Definitions 1.ASJ: All service jacket, white finish facing or jacket. 2.Air conditioned space: Space having air temperature and/or humidity controlled by mechanical equipment. 3.Cold: Equipment or piping handling media at design temperature of 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) or below. 4.Concealed: Piping above ceilings and in chases, //interstitial space, // and pipe spaces. 5.Exposed: Piping and equipment exposed to view in finished areas including mechanical equipment rooms or exposed to outdoor weather. Shafts, chases, //interstitial spaces, // unfinished attics, crawl spaces and pipe basements are not considered finished areas.6.FSK: Foilscrimkraft facing. 7.Hot: Plumbing equipment or piping handling media above 41 degrees C (105 degrees F). 8.Density: kg/m3 - kilograms per cubic meter (Pcf - pounds per cubic foot). 9.Thermal conductance: Heat flow rate through materials.a.Flat surface: Watts per square meter (BTU per hour per square foot). b.Pipe or Cylinder: Watts per square meter (BTU per hour per linear foot). 10. Thermal Conductivity (k): Watt per meter, per degree C (BTU per inch thickness, per hour, per square foot, per degree F temperature difference). 11. Vapor Retarder (Vapor Barrier): A material which retards the transmission (migration) of water vapor. Performance of the vapor retarder is rated in terms of permeance (perms). For the purpose of this specification, vapor retarders shall have a maximum published permeance of 0.1 perms and vapor barriers shall have a maximum published permeance of 0.001 perms. 12. R: Pump recirculation.13. CW: Cold water.14. SW: Soft water.15. HW: Hot water.16. PVDC: Polyvinylidene chloride vapor retarder jacketing, white.1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 02 82 11, TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT: Insulation containing asbestos material. B. Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING: Mineral fiber and bond breaker behind sealant. C. Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division 22. D. Section 22 05 23, GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING: Hot and cold water piping.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Refer to article QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING.B.Criteria: ply with NFPA 90A, particularly paragraphs 4.3.3.1 through 4.3.3.6, 4.3.10.2.6, and 5.4.6.4, parts of which are quoted as follows:4.3.3.1 Pipe insulation and coverings, vapor retarder facings, adhesives, fasteners, tapes, unless otherwise provided for in??4.3.3.1.12 or??4.3.3.1.2, shall have, in the form in which they are used, a maximum flame spread index of 25 without evidence of continued progressive combustion and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with??NFPA 255, Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.?4.3.3.1.1 Where these products are to be applied with adhesives, they shall be tested with such adhesives applied, or the adhesives used shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when in the final dry state. (See ?4.2.4.2.)?4.3.3.3 Pipe insulation and coverings shall not flame, glow, smolder, or smoke when tested in accordance with a similar test for pipe covering, ASTM C 411, Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature Thermal Insulation, at the temperature to which they are exposed in service.?4.3.3.3.1 In no case shall the test temperature be below 121°C (250°F).?4.3.10.2.6.3 Nonferrous fire sprinkler piping shall be listed as having a maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average optical density of 0.15 or less, and a maximum flame spread distance of 1.5 m (5 ft) or less when tested in accordance with UL 1887, Standard for Safety Fire Test of Plastic Sprinkler Pipe for Visible Flame and Smoke Characteristics.?4.3.10.2.6.7 Smoke detectors shall not be required to meet the provisions of this section.?2.Test methods: ASTM E84, UL 723, or NFPA 255. 3.Specified k factors are at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F) mean temperature unless stated otherwise. Where optional thermal insulation material is used, select thickness to provide thermal conductance no greater than that for the specified material. For pipe, use insulation manufacturer's published heat flow tables. For domestic hot water supply and return, run out insulation and condensation control insulation, no thickness adjustment need be made. 4.All materials shall be compatible and suitable for service temperature, and shall not contribute to corrosion or otherwise attack surface to which applied in either the wet or dry state. C. Every package or standard container of insulation or accessories delivered to the job site for use must have a manufacturer's stamp or label giving the name of the manufacturer and description of the material. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Shop Drawings: 1.All information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications and ASTM, federal and military specifications.a.Insulation materials: Specify each type used and state surface burning characteristics. b.Insulation facings and jackets: Each type used. c.Insulation accessory materials: Each type used. d.Manufacturer's installation and fitting fabrication instructions for flexible unicellular insulation. e.Make reference to applicable specification paragraph numbers for coordination. C. Samples: 1.Each type of insulation: Minimum size 100 mm (4 inches) square for board/block/ blanket; 150 mm (6 inches) long, full diameter for round types. 2.Each type of facing and jacket: Minimum size 100 mm (4 inches square). 3.Each accessory material: Minimum 120 ML (4 ounce) liquid container or 120 gram (4 ounce) dry weight for adhesives / cement / mastic. 1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALStore materials in clean and dry environment, pipe covering jackets shall be clean and unmarred. Place adhesives in original containers. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions as required by printed instructions of manufacturers of adhesives, mastics and finishing cements. 1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only. B.Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.): LP535E (2)-91Plastic Sheet (Sheeting): Plastic Strip; Poly (Vinyl Chloride) and Poly (Vinyl Chloride - Vinyl Acetate), Rigid.C.Military Specifications (Mil. Spec.): MILA3316C (2)-90Adhesives, FireResistant, Thermal InsulationMILA24179A (1)-87Adhesive, Flexible UnicellularPlasticThermal Insulation MILC19565C (1)-88Coating Compounds, Thermal Insulation, Fire-and Water-Resistant, Vapor-BarrierMILC20079H-87Cloth, Glass; Tape, Textile Glass; and Thread, Glass and Wire-Reinforced Glass D.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A167-04 Standard Specification for Stainless and HeatResisting ChromiumNickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip B209-07Standard Specification for Aluminum and AluminumAlloy Sheet and Plate C411-05Standard test method for HotSurface Performance of HighTemperature Thermal Insulation C449-07Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber HydraulicSetting Thermal Insulating and Finishing CementC533-09Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation C534-08 Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular FormC547-07 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber pipe Insulation C55207 Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal InsulationC553-08 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial ApplicationsC585-09Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System) R (1998)C612-10 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal InsulationC1126-10Standard Specification for Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation C1136-10 Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal InsulationD166897a (2006)Standard Specification for Glass Fabrics (Woven and Treated) for Roofing and Waterproofing E84-10 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsE11909CStandard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials E13609 bStandard Test Methods for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 degrees C (1380 F)E.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 101-09 Life Safety Code251-06Standard methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building Construction Materials255-06Standard Method of tests of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsF.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL):723UL Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials with Revision of 08/03G.Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry (MSS):SP58-2002Pipe Hangers and Supports Materials, Design, and ManufacturePART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MINERAL FIBER or fiber glass A.ASTM C612 (Board, Block), Class 1 or 2, density 48 kg/m3 (3 pcf), k = 0.037 (.26) at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F), external insulation for temperatures up to 204 degrees C (400 degrees F).B.ASTM C553 (Blanket, Flexible) Type I, // Class B-3, Density 16 kg/m3 (1 pcf), k = 0.045 (0.31) // Class B-5, Density 32 kg/m3 (2 pcf), k = 0.04 (0.27) // at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F), for use at temperatures up to 204 degrees C (400 degrees F)C.ASTM C547 (Pipe Fitting Insulation and Preformed Pipe Insulation), Class 1, k = 0.037 (0.26) at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F), for use at temperatures up to 230 degrees C (450 degrees F)with an all service vapor retarder jacket with polyvinyl chloride premolded fitting covering. 2.2 Mineral wool or refractory ply with Standard ASTM C612, Class 3, 450 degrees C (850 degrees F).2.3 RIGID CELLULAR PHENOLIC FoamA.Preformed (molded) pipe insulation, ASTM C1126, type III, grade 1, k = 0.021(0.15) at 10 degrees C (50 degrees F), for use at temperatures up to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F) with vapor retarder and all service vapor retarder jacket with polyvinyl chloride premolded fitting covering.B.Equipment Insulation, ASTM C 1126, type II, grade 1, k = 0.021 (0.15) at 10 degrees C (50 degrees F), for use at temperatures up to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F) with rigid cellular phenolic insulation and covering, and all service vapor retarder jacket.2.4 CELLULAR GLASS closed-ply with Standard ASTM C177, C518, density 120 kg/m3 (7.5 pcf) nominal, k = 0.033 (0.29) at 240 degrees C (75 degrees F).B.Pipe insulation for use at temperatures up to 200 degrees C (400 degrees F) with all service vapor retarder jacket.2.5 polyisocyanurate closed-cell rigidA.Preformed (fabricated) pipe insulation, ASTM C591, type IV, K=0.027(0.19) at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F), flame spread not over 25, smoke developed not over 50, for use at temperatures up to 149 degree C (300 degree F) with factory applied PVDC or all service vapor retarder jacket with polyvinyl chloride premolded fitting covers.B.Equipment and duct insulation, ASTM C 591,type IV, K=0.027(0.19) at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F), for use at temperatures up to 149 degrees C (300 degrees F) with PVDC or all service jacket vapor retarder jacket.2.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR THERMALASTM C177, C518, k = 0.039 (0.27) at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F), flame spread not over 25, smoke developed not over 50, for temperatures from minus 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) to 93 degrees C (200 degrees F). No jacket required. 2.7 calcium silicateA.Preformed pipe Insulation: ASTM C533, Type I and Type II with indicator denoting asbestos-free material.B.Premolded Pipe Fitting Insulation: ASTM C533, Type I and Type II with indicator denoting asbestos-free material. C.Equipment Insulation: ASTM C533, Type I and Type IID.Characteristics:Insulation CharacteristicsITEMSTYPE ITYPE IITemperature, maximum degrees C (degrees F)649 (1200)927 (1700)Density (dry), Kg/m3 (lb/ ft3)232 (14.5)288 (18)Thermal conductivity:Min W/ m K (Btu in/h ft2 degrees F)@mean temperature of 93 degrees?C (200 degrees F)0.059(0.41)0.078 (0.540)Surface burning characteristics:Flame spread Index, Maximum00Smoke Density index, Maximum002.8 INSULATION FACINGS AND JACKETSA.Vapor Retarder, higher strength with low water permeance = 0.02 or less perm rating, Beach puncture 50 units for insulation facing on pipe insulation jackets. Facings and jackets shall be all service type (ASJ) or PVDC Vapor Retarder jacketing. B.ASJ jacket shall be white kraft bonded to 0.025 mm (1 mil) thick aluminum foil, fiberglass reinforced, with pressure sensitive adhesive closure. Comply with ASTM C1136. Beach puncture 50 units, Suitable for painting without sizing. Jackets shall have minimum 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) lap on longitudinal joints and minimum 75mm (3 inch) butt strip on end joints. Butt strip material shall be same as the jacket. Lap and butt strips shall be self-sealing type with factory-applied pressure sensitive adhesive.C.Vapor Retarder medium strength with low water vapor permeance of 0.02 or less perm rating), Beach puncture 25 units: FoilScrimKraft (FSK) or PVDC vapor retarder jacketing type for concealed ductwork and equipment. D.Field applied vapor barrier jackets shall be provided, in addition to the specified facings and jackets, on all exterior piping as well as on interior piping exposed to outdoor air (i.e.; in ventilated attics, piping in ventilated (not air conditioned) spaces, etc.) in high humidity areas or conveying fluids below ambient temperature. The vapor barrier jacket shall consist of a multi-layer laminated cladding with a maximum water vapor permeance of 0.001 perms. The minimum puncture resistance shall be 35 cm-kg (30 inch-pounds) for interior locations and 92 cm-kg (80 inch-pounds) for exterior or exposed locations or where the insulation is subject to damage.E.Glass Cloth Jackets: Presized, minimum 0.18 kg per square meter (7.8 ounces per square yard), 2000 kPa (300 psig) bursting strength with integral vapor retarder where required or specified. Weather proof if utilized for outside service.F.Factory composite materials may be used providedG.Pipe fitting insulation covering (jackets): Fitting covering shall be premolded to match shape of fitting and shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conforming to Fed Spec L-P-335, composition A, Type II Grade GU, and Type III, minimum thickness 0.7 mm (0.03 inches). Provide color matching vapor retarder pressure sensitive tape.H.Aluminum Jacket-Piping systems and circular breeching and stacks: ASTM B209, 3003 alloy, H-14 temper, 0.6 mm (0.023 inch) minimum thickness with locking longitudinal joints. Jackets for elbows, tees and other fittings shall be factory-fabricated to match shape of fitting and of 0.6 mm (0.024) inch minimum thickness aluminum. Fittings shall be of same construction as straight run jackets but need not be of the same alloy. Factory-fabricated stainless steel bands shall be installed on all circumferential joints. Bands shall be 13 mm (0.5 inch) wide on 450 mm (18 inch) centers. System shall be weatherproof if utilized for outside service.I.Aluminum jacket-Rectangular breeching: ASTM B209, 3003 alloy, H-14 temper, 0.5 mm (0.020 inches) thick with 32 mm (1-1/4 inch) corrugations or 0.8 mm (0.032 inches) thick with no corrugations. System shall be weatherproof if used for outside service.2.9 pipe covering protection saddlesA.Cold pipe support: Premolded pipe insulation 180 degrees (half-shells) on bottom half of pipe at supports. Material shall be cellular glass or high density Polyisocyanurate insulation of the same thickness as adjacent insulation. Density of Polyisocyanurate insulation shall be a minimum of 48 kg/m3 (3.0 pcf).Nominal Pipe Size and Accessories Material (Insert Blocks)Nominal Pipe Size mm (inches)Insert Blocks mm (inches)Up through 125 (5)150 (6) long150 (6)150 (6) long200 (8), 250 (10), 300 (12)225 (9) long350 (14), 400 (16)300 (12) long450 through 600 (18 through 24)350 (14) longB.Warm or hot pipe supports: Premolded pipe insulation (180 degree half-shells) on bottom half of pipe at supports. Material shall be high density Polyisocyanurate (for temperatures up to 149 degrees C [300 degrees F]), cellular glass or calcium silicate. Insulation at supports shall have same thickness as adjacent insulation. Density of Polyisocyanurate insulation shall be a minimum of 48 kg/m3 (3.0 pcf).2.10 adhesive, Mastic, CementA.Mil. Spec. MILA3316, Class 1: Jacket and lap adhesive and protective finish coating for insulation. B.Mil. Spec. MILA3316, Class 2: Adhesive for laps and for adhering insulation to metal surfaces. C.Mil. Spec. MILA24179, Type II Class 1: Adhesive for installing flexible unicellular insulation and for laps and general use. D.Mil. Spec. MILC19565, Type I: Protective finish for outdoor use. E.Mil. Spec. MILC19565, Type I or Type II: Vapor barrier compound for indoor use. F.ASTM C449: Mineral fiber hydraulicsetting thermal insulating and finishing cement. G.Other: Insulation manufacturers' published recommendations. 2.11 Mechanical FastenersA.Pins, anchors: Welded pins, or metal or nylon anchors with galvanized steel or fiber washer, or clips. Pin diameter shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. B.Staples: Outward clinching galvanized steel C.Wire: 1.3 mm thick (18 gage) soft annealed galvanized or 1.9 mm (14 gage) copper clad steel or nickel copper alloy. D.Bands: 13 mm (1/2 inch) nominal width, brass, galvanized steel, aluminum or stainless steel.2.12 Reinforcement and Finishes A.Glass fabric, open weave: ASTM D1668, Type III (resin treated) and Type I (asphalt treated). B.Glass fiber fitting tape: Mil. Spec MILC20079, Type II, Class 1.C.Tape for Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: As recommended by the insulation manufacturer. D.Hexagonal wire netting: 25 mm (one inch) mesh, 0.85 mm thick (22 gage) galvanized steel. E.Corner beads: 50 mm (2 inch) by 50 mm (2 inch), 0.55 mm thick (26 gage) galvanized steel; or, 25 mm (1 inch) by 25 mm (1 inch), 0.47 mm thick (28 gage) aluminum angle adhered to 50 mm (2 inch) by 50 mm (2 inch) Kraft paper.F.PVC fitting cover: Fed. Spec LP535, Composition A, 1186 Type II, Grade GU, with Form B Mineral Fiber insert, for media temperature 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F). Below 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) and above 121 degrees C (250 degrees F). Provide double layer insert. Provide color matching vapor barrier pressure sensitive tape.2.13 Firestopping MaterialOther than pipe insulation, refer to Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.2.14 flame and smokeUnless shown otherwise all assembled systems shall meet flame spread 25 and smoke developed 50 rating as developed under ASTM, NFPA and UL standards and specifications. See paragraph 1.3 "Quality Assurance".PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Required pressure tests of piping joints and connections shall be completed and the work approved by the COTR for application of insulation. Surface shall be clean and dry with all foreign materials, such as dirt, oil, loose scale and rust removed. B.Except for specific exceptions, insulate all specified equipment, and piping (pipe, fittings, valves, accessories). Insulate each pipe individually. Do not use scrap pieces of insulation where a full length section will fit. C.Where removal of insulation of piping and equipment is required to comply with Section 02?82?11, TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT, such areas shall be reinsulated to comply with this specification. D.Insulation materials shall be installed in a first class manner with smooth and even surfaces, with jackets and facings drawn tight and smoothly cemented down at all laps. Insulation shall be continuous through all sleeves and openings, except at fire dampers and duct heaters (NFPA 90A). Vapor retarders shall be continuous and uninterrupted throughout systems with operating temperature 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) and below. Lap and seal vapor barrier over ends and exposed edges of insulation. Anchors, supports and other metal projections through insulation on cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed for a minimum length of 150 mm (6 inches). E.Install vapor stops at all insulation terminations on either side of valves, pumps and equipment and particularly in straight lengths of pipe insulation.F.Construct insulation on parts of equipment such as cold water pumps and heat exchangers that must be opened periodically for maintenance or repair, so insulation can be removed and replaced without damage. Install insulation with bolted 1 mm thick (20 gage) galvanized steel or aluminum covers as complete units, or in sections, with all necessary supports, and split to coincide with flange/split of the equipment.G.Insulation on hot piping and equipment shall be terminated square at items not to be insulated, access openings and nameplates. Cover all exposed raw insulation with white sealer or jacket material. H.Protect all insulations outside of buildings with aluminum jacket using lock joint or other approved system for a continuous weather tight system. Access doors and other items requiring maintenance or access shall be removable and sealable.I.Plumbing work not to be insulated: 1.Piping and valves of fire protection system. 2.Chromium plated brass piping. 3.Water piping in contact with earth. 4.Small horizontal cold water branch runs in partitions to individual fixtures may be without insulation for maximum distance of 900 mm (3 feet). 5.Distilled water piping. J.Apply insulation materials subject to the manufacturer's recommended temperature limits. Apply adhesives, mastic and coatings at the manufacturer's recommended minimum coverage.K.Elbows, flanges and other fittings shall be insulated with the same material as is used on the pipe straights. Use of polyurethane spray-foam to fill a PVC elbow jacket is prohibited on cold applications.L.Firestop Pipe insulation:1.Provide firestopping insulation at fire and smoke barriers through penetrations. Fire stopping insulation shall be UL listed as defines in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.2.Pipe penetrations requiring fire stop insulation including, but not limited to the following:a.Pipe risers through floorsb.Pipe chase walls and floorsc.Smoke partitionsd.Fire partitionsM.Freeze protection of above grade outdoor piping (over heat tracing tape): 20 mm (0.75) thick insulation, for all pipe sizes 75 mm(3 inches) and smaller and 25 mm(1inch) thick insulation for larger pipes. Provide metal jackets for all pipes. Provide for cold water make-up where indicated on the drawings as described in Section 23 21 13, HYDRONIC PIPING (electrical heat tracing systems).N.Provide vapor barrier jackets over insulation as follows:1.All piping exposed to outdoor weather. 2.All interior piping conveying fluids exposed to outdoor air (i.e. in attics, ventilated (not air conditioned) spaces, etc.) or below ambient air temperature.O.Provide metal jackets over insulation as follows:a.All plumbing piping exposed to outdoor weather.b.Piping exposed in building, within 1800 mm (6 feet) of the floor, that connects to sterilizers, kitchen and laundry equipment. Jackets may be applied with pop rivets. Provide aluminum angle ring escutcheons at wall, ceiling or floor penetrations.c.A 50 mm (2 inch) overlap is required at longitudinal and circumferential joints.3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATIONA.Mineral Fiber Board: 1.Faced board: Apply board on pins spaced not more than 300 mm (12 inches) on center each way, and not less than 75 mm (3 inches) from each edge of board. In addition to pins, apply insulation bonding adhesive to entire underside of horizontal metal surfaces. Butt insulation edges tightly and seal all joints with laps and butt strips. After applying speed clips cut pins off flush and apply vapor seal patches over clips.2.Plain board: a.Insulation shall be scored, beveled or mitered to provide tight joints and be secured to equipment with bands spaced 225 mm (9 inches) on center for irregular surfaces or with pins and clips on flat surfaces. Use corner beads to protect edges of insulation. b.For hot equipment: Stretch 25 mm (1 inch) mesh wire, with edges wire laced together, over insulation and finish with insulating and finishing cement applied in one coat, 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick, trowel led to a smooth finish. c.For cold equipment: Apply meshed glass fabric in a tack coat 1.5 to 1.7 square meter per liter (60 to 70 square feet per gallon) of vapor mastic and finish with mastic at 0.3 to 0.4 square meter per liter (12 to 15 square feet per gallon) over the entire fabric surface.3.Cold equipment: 40 mm (1-1/2inch) thick insulation faced with ASJ.a.Water filter, chemical feeder pot or tank.b.Pneumatic, cold storage water and surge tanks.4.Hot equipment: 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) thick insulation faced with ASJ.a.Domestic water heaters and hot water storage tanks (not factory insulated).b.Booster water heaters for dietetics dish and pot washers and for washdown grease-extracting hoods.B. Molded Mineral Fiber Pipe and Tubing Covering: 1.Fit insulation to pipe, aligning longitudinal joints. Seal longitudinal joint laps and circumferential butt strips by rubbing hard with a nylon sealing tool to assure a positive seal. Staples may be used to assist in securing insulation. Seal all vapor retarder penetrations on cold piping with a generous application of vapor barrier mastic. Provide inserts and install with metal insulation shields at outside pipe supports. Install freeze protection insulation over heating cable.2.Contractor's options for fitting, flange and valve insulation: a.Insulating and finishing cement for sizes less than 100 mm (4 inches) operating at surface temperature of 16 degrees C (61 degrees F) or more. b.Factory premolded, one piece PVC covers with mineral fiber, (Form B), inserts. Provide two insert layers for pipe temperatures below 4 degrees C (40 degrees F), or above 121 degrees C (250 degrees F). Secure first layer of insulation with twine. Seal seam edges with vapor barrier mastic and secure with fitting tape. c.Factory molded, ASTM C547 or field mitered sections, joined with adhesive or wired in place. For hot piping finish with a smoothing coat of finishing cement. For cold fittings, 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) or less, vapor seal with a layer of glass fitting tape imbedded between two 2 mm (1/16 inch) coats of vapor barrier mastic. d.Fitting tape shall extend over the adjacent pipe insulation and overlap on itself at least 50 mm (2 inches).3.Nominal thickness in millimeters and inches specified in the schedule at the end of this section. C.Rigid Cellular Phenolic Foam:1.Rigid closed cell phenolic insulation may be provided for piping, ductwork and equipment for temperatures up to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F).2.Note the NFPA 90A burning characteristics requirements of 25/50 in paragraph 1.3.B3.Provide secure attachment facilities such as welding pins.4.Apply insulation with joints tightly drawn together 5.Apply adhesives, coverings, neatly finished at fittings, and valves.6.Final installation shall be smooth, tight, neatly finished at all edges.7.Minimum thickness in millimeters (inches) specified in the schedule at the end of this section. 8.Condensation control insulation: Minimum 25 mm (1.0 inch) thick for all pipe sizes.a.Plumbing piping as follows:1)Body of roof and overflow drains horizontal runs and offsets (including elbows) of interior downspout piping in all areas above pipe basement.2)Waste piping from electric water coolers and icemakers to drainage system.3)Waste piping located above basement floor from ice making and film developing equipment and air handling units, from equipment(including trap) to main vertical waste pipe.4)MRI quench vent piping.5)Bedpan sanitizer atmospheric vent6)Reagent grade water piping.Cold water piping.D.Cellular Glass Insulation:1.Pipe and tubing, covering nominal thickness in millimeters and inches as specified in the schedule at the end of this section.2.Underground Piping Other than or in lieu of that Specified in Section 22 11 00, FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION: Type II, factory jacketed with a 3 mm laminate jacketing consisting of 3000 mm x 3000 mm (10 ft x 10 ft) asphalt impregant4ed glass fabric, bituminous mastic and outside protective plastic film.a.75 mm (3 inches) thick for hot water piping.b.As scheduled at the end of this section for chilled water piping. c.Underground piping: Apply insulation with joints tightly butted. Seal longitudinal self-sealing lap. Use field fabricated or factory made fittings. Seal butt joints and fitting with jacketing as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Use 100 mm (4 inch) wide strips to seal butt joints.d.Provide expansion chambers for pipe loops, anchors and wallpenetrations as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.e.Underground insulation shall be inspected and approved by the COTR as follows:Insulation in place before coating.After coating.f.Sand bed and backfill: Minimum 75 mm (3 inches) all aroundInsulated pipe or tank, applied after coating has dried.3.Cold equipment: 50 mm (2 inch) thick insulation faced with ASJ.E.Polyisocyanurate Closed-Cell Rigid Insulation:1.Polyisocyanurate closed-cell rigid insulation (PIR) may be provided for exterior piping and equipment for temperature up to 149 degree C (300 degree F.2.Install insulation, vapor retarder and jacketing per manufacturer’s recommendations. Particular attention should be paid to recommendations for joint staggering, adhesive application, external hanger design, expansion/contraction joint design and spacing and vapor retarder integrity.3.Install insulation with all joints tightly butted (except expansion) joints in hot applications).4.If insulation thickness exceeds 63 mm (2.5 inches), install as a double layer system with longitudinal (lap) and butt joint staggering as recommended by manufacturer.5.For cold applications, vapor retarder shall be installed in a continuous manner. No staples, rivets, screws or any other attachment device capable of penetrating the vapor retarder shall be used to attach the vapor retarder or jacketing. No wire ties capable of penetrating the vapor retarder shall be used to hold the insulation in place. Banding shall be used to attach PVC or metal jacketing. 6.Elbows, flanges and other fittings shall be insulated with the same material as is used on the pipe straights. The elbow/ fitting insulation shall be field-fabricated, mitered or factory prefabricated to the necessary size and shape to fit on the elbow/ fitting. Use of polyurethane spray-foam to fill PVC elbow jacket is prohibited on cold applications.7.For cold applications, the vapor retarder on elbows/fittings shall be either mastic-fabric-mastic or 2 mil thick PVDC vapor retarder adhesive tape.8.All PVC and metal jacketing shall be installed so as to naturally shed water. Joints shall point down and shall be sealed with either adhesive or caulking (except for periodic slip joints).9.Note the NFPA 90A burning characteristic requirements of 25/50 in paragraph 1.3B. Refer to paragraph 3.1 for items not to be insulated.10.Minimum thickness in millimeter (inches) specified in the schedule at the end of this section.F.Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation: 1.Apply insulation and fabricate fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and finish with two coats of weather resistant finish as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. 2.Pipe and tubing insulation: a.Use proper size material. Do not stretch or strain insulation.b.To avoid undue compression of insulation, provide cork stoppers or wood inserts at supports as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Insulation shields are specified under Section 22 05?11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING.c.Where possible, slip insulation over the pipe or tubing prior to connection, and seal the butt joints with adhesive. Where the slipon technique is not possible, slit the insulation and apply it to the pipe sealing the seam and joints with contact adhesive. Optional tape sealing, as recommended by the manufacturer, may be employed. Make changes from mineral fiber insulation in a straight run of pipe, not at a fitting. Seal joint with tape. 3.Apply sheet insulation to flat or large curved surfaces with 100 percent adhesive coverage. For fittings and large pipe, apply adhesive to seams only. 4.Pipe insulation: nominal thickness in millimeters (inches as specified in the schedule at the end of this section. G.Calcium Silicate:1.Minimum thickness in millimeter (inches) specified below for piping other than in boiler plant. Nominal Thickness Of Calcium Silicate Insulation(Non-Boiler Plant)Nominal Pipe SizeMillimeters (Inches)Thru 25 (1)32 to 75(1-1/4 to 3)100-200(4 to 6)Over 200(6)93-260 degrees C(200-500 degrees F)(HPS, HPR)100(4)125(5)150(6)150(6)2.MRI Quench Vent Insulation: Type I, class D, 150 mm (6 inch) nominal thickness.3.3 PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULEProvide insulation for piping systems as scheduled below: Insulation Thickness Millimeters (Inches)Nominal Pipe Size Millimeters (Inches)Operating Temperature Range/ServiceInsulation MaterialLess than 25 (1)25 – 32 (1 – 1?)38 – 75 (1? - 3) 100 (4) and Above38-60 degrees C (100-140 degrees F) (Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return)Mineral Fiber (Above ground piping only)38 (1.5)38 (1.5)50 (2.0)50 (2.0)38-60 degrees C (100-140 degrees F) (Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return)Rigid Cellular Phenolic Foam (Above ground piping only)38 (1.5)38 (1.5)50 (2.0)50 (2.0)38-60 degrees C (100-140 degrees F) (Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return)Polyiso-cyanurate Closed-Cell Rigid (Exterior Locations only) 38 (1.5)38 (1.5) ---- ----38-60 degrees C (100-140 degrees F) (Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return)Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal (Above ground piping only)38 (1.5)38 (1.5) ---- ---- E N D SECTION SECTION 22 11 00FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTIONPART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION Domestic water systems, including piping, equipment and all necessary accessories as designated in this section.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Penetrations in rated enclosures: Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. B.Preparation and finish painting and identification of piping systems: Section 09 91 00, PAINTING. C.Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING. D.Pipe Insulation: Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Piping. 2.Strainers. 3.All items listed in Part 2 - Products. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.): A-A-1427CSodium Hypochlorite Solution A-A-59617Unions, Brass or Bronze Threaded, Pipe Connections and Solder-Joint Tube ConnectionsC.American National Standards Institute (ANSI): American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): (Copyrighted Society)A13.1-96Scheme for Identification of Piping SystemsB16.398Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ANSI/ASMEB16.498Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250 ANSI/ASMEB16.901Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings ANSI/ASMEB16.1101Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded ANSI/ASME B16.1298Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings ANSI/ASMEB16.15-85(R 1994)Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings ANSI/ASMEB16.18-01Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings ANSI/ASMEB16.22-01Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings ANSI/ASMEElement ANSI/ASMED.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A47-99Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings Revision 1989A53-02Pipe, Steel, Black And Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and SeamlessA74-03Cast Iron Soil Pipe and FittingsA183-83(R1998)Carbon Steel Track Bolts and NutsA312-03Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel PipeA536-84(R1999) E1Ductile Iron CastingsA733-03Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe NipplesB32-03Solder MetalB61-02Steam or Bronze CastingsB62-02Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal CastingsB75-99(Rev A)Seamless Copper TubeB88-03Seamless Copper Water TubeB584-00Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications Revision AB687-99Brass, Copper, and Chromium-Plated Pipe NipplesC564-03Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and FittingsD2000-01Rubber Products in Automotive ApplicationsD4101-03b Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion MaterialsD2447-93Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40 and 80, Based on Outside DiameterD2564-94Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and FittingsD2665-94 Revision APoly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and FittingsD4101-03bPropylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion MaterialsE1120Standard Specification For Liquid ChlorineE1229Standard Specification For Calcium Hypochlorite E.American Water Works Association (AWWA):C110-03/ A21.10-03Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings - 75 mm thru 1200 mm (3 inch thru 48 inches) for Water and other liquids AWWA/ ANSI C151-00/ A21.51-02Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids AWWA/ ANSIC20302Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - Hot Applied AWWA/ ANSIC65199Disinfecting Water Mains F.American Welding Society (AWS): A5.8-92Filler Metals for BrazingG.National Association of Plumbing - Heating - Cooling Contractors (PHCC):National Standard Plumbing Code - 1996H.International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO):Uniform Plumbing Code - 2000IS6-93Installation StandardI.Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS):SP-72-99Ball Valves With Flanged or Butt Welding For General PurposeSP-110-96Ball Valve Threaded, Socket Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared EndsJ.American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE):1001-02Pipe Applied Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers1018-01Performance for trap seal primer valve-water supply fed1020-04Vacuum Breakers, Anti-Siphon, Pressure TypeK.Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI):PDI WH-201Water Hammer ArrestorPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A.Pipe: Copper tube, ASTM B88, Type K or L, drawn. B.Fittings for Copper Tube: 1.Wrought copper or bronze castings conforming to ANSI B16.18 and B16.22. Unions shall be bronze, MSS SP72 & SP 110, Solder or braze joints.2.Grooved fittings, 50 to 150 mm (2 to 6 inch) wrought copper ASTM B75 C12200, 125 to 150 mm (5 to 6 inch) bronze casting ASTM B584, CDA 844. Mechanical grooved couplings, ductile iron, ASTM A536 (Grade 65-45-12), or malleable iron, ASTM A47 (Grade 32510) housing, with EPDM gasket, steel track head bolts, ASTM A183, coated with copper colored alkyd enamel. D.Adapters: Provide adapters for joining screwed pipe to copper tubing. E.Solder: ASTM B32 Composition Sb5 HA or HB. Provide noncorrosive flux.F.Brazing alloy: AWS A5.8, Classification BCuP. 2.2 EXPOSED WATER PIPINGA. Finished Room: Use full iron pipe size chrome plated brass piping for exposed water piping connecting fixtures, casework, cabinets, equipment and reagent racks when not concealed by apron including those furnished by the Government or specified in other sections.1.Pipe: Fed. Spec. WW-P-351, standard weight.2.Fittings: ANSI B16.15 cast bronze threaded fittings with chrome finish, (125 and 250).3.Nipples: ASTM B 687, Chromium plated.4.Unions: Mss SP-72, SP-110, Brass or Bronze with chrome finish. Unions 65 mm (2-1/2 inches) and larger shall be flange type with approved gaskets.B.Unfinished Rooms, Mechanical Rooms and Kitchens: Chrome-plated brass piping is not required. Paint piping systems as specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.2.3 TRAP PRIMER WATER PIPING A.Pipe Copper tube, ASTM B88, type K, hard drawn. B.Fittings: Bronze castings conforming to ANSI B16.18 Solder joints.C.Solder: ASTM B32 composition Sb5. Provide non-corrosive flux.2.4 WATERPROOFING A.Provide at points where pipes pass through membrane waterproofed floors or walls in contact with earth. B.Floors: Provide cast iron stack sleeve with flashing device and a underdeck clamp. After stack is passed through sleeve, provide a waterproofed caulked joint at top hub. C.Walls: See detail shown on drawings. 2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS Provide dielectric couplings or unions between ferrous and nonferrous pipe. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.General: Comply with the PHCC National Standard Plumbing Code and the following: 1.Install branch piping for water from the piping system and connect to all fixtures, valves, cocks, outlets, casework, cabinets and equipment, including those furnished by the Government or specified in other sections. 2.Pipe shall be round and straight. Cutting shall be done with proper tools. Pipe, except for plastic and glass, shall be reamed to full size after cutting. 3.All pipe runs shall be laid out to avoid interference with other work. 4.Install union and shut-off valve on pressure piping at connections to equipment.5.Pipe Hangers, Supports and Accessories:a.All piping shall be supported per of the National Standard Plumbing Code, Chapter No. 8.b.Shop Painting and Plating: Hangers, supports, rods, inserts and accessories used for Pipe supports shall be shop coated with red lead or zinc Chromate primer paint. Electroplated copper hanger rods, hangers and accessories may be used with copper tubing.c.Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates, Supports, Hangers:1)Solid or split unplated cast iron.2)All plates shall be provided with set screws.3)Pipe Hangers: Height adjustable clevis type.4)Adjustable Floor Rests and Base Flanges: Steel.5)Concrete Inserts: "Universal" or continuous slotted type.6)Hanger Rods: Mild, low carbon steel, fully threaded or Threaded at each end with two removable nuts at each end for positioning rod and hanger and locking each in place.7)Riser Clamps: Malleable iron or steel.8)Rollers: Cast iron.9)Self-drilling type expansion shields shall be "Phillips" type, with case hardened steel expander plugs.10)Hangers and supports utilized with insulated pipe and tubing shall have 180 degree (min.) metal protection shield Centered on and welded to the hanger and support. The shield shall be 4 inches in length and be 16 gauge steel. The shield shall be sized for the insulation.11)Miscellaneous Materials: As specified, required, directed or as noted on the drawings for proper installation of hangers, supports and accessories. If the vertical distance exceeds 6 m (20 feet) for cast iron pipe additional support shall be provided in the center of that span. Provide all necessary auxiliary steel to provide that support.6.Install cast escutcheon with set screw at each wall, floor and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.7.Penetrations:a.Fire Stopping: Where pipes pass through fire partitions, fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases as specified in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. Completely fill and seal clearances between raceways and openings with the fire stopping materials. b.Waterproofing: At floor penetrations, completely seal clearances around the pipe and make watertight with sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.B.Piping shall conform to the following: 1.Domestic Water: a.Where possible, grade all lines to facilitate drainage. Provide drain valves at bottom of risers. All unnecessary traps in circulating lines shall be avoided. b.Connect branch lines at bottom of main serving fixtures below and pitch down so that main may be drained through fixture. Connect branch lines to top of main serving only fixtures located on floor above. 3.2 TESTS A.General: Test system either in its entirety or in sections. B.Potable Water System: Test after installation of piping and domestic water heaters, but before piping is concealed, before covering is applied, and before plumbing fixtures are connected. Fill systems with water and maintain hydrostatic pressure of 690 kPa (100 psi) gage for two hours. No decrease in pressure is allowed. Provide a pressure gage with a shutoff and bleeder valve at the highest point of the piping being tested. C.All Other Piping Tests: Test new installed piping under 1 1/2 times actual operating conditions and prove tight.3.3 STERILIZATION A.After tests have been successfully completed, thoroughly flush and sterilize the interior domestic water distribution system in accordance with AWWA C651. B.Use either liquid chlorine or hypochlorite for sterilization. E N D SECTION 22 11 00SECTION 22 13 00FACILITY SANITARY and vent pipingPART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section pertains to sanitary sewer and vent systems, including piping, equipment and all necessary accessories as designated in this section.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING: Penetrations in rated enclosures.B.Section 09 91 00, PAINTING: Preparation and finish painting and identification of piping systems. C.Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING: Pipe Hangers and Supports, Materials Identification.D.Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION: Pipe Insulation.E.Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants: Sealant products.1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES. B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Piping. 2.Floor Drains. 3.Cleanouts.4.All items listed in Part 2 - Products.C.Detailed shop drawing of clamping device and extensions when required in connection with the waterproofing membrane or the floor drain. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): (Copyrighted Society)A112.6.3-01 (R 2007)Standard for Floor and Trench DrainsA13.1-07Scheme for Identification of Piping SystemsB16.306Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300.B16.406Standard for Grey Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250B16.1298 (R 2006)Cast Iron Threaded Drainage FittingsB16.15-06Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings, Classes 125 and 250C.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A47/A47M-99 (R 2004)Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum Coated, by the Hot Dip ProcessA53/A53M-07Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black And Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated, Welded and SeamlessA74-06Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and FittingsA183-03Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and NutsA536-84(R 2004)Standard Specification for Ductile Iron CastingsB32-08Standard Specification for Solder MetalB75-02Standard Specification for Seamless Copper TubeB306-02Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV)B584-06aStandard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General ApplicationsC564-03aStandard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and FittingsD2000-08Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive ApplicationsD2564-04E1Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and FittingsD2665-08Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and FittingsD.International Code Council:IPC-06International Plumbing CodeE.Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI):301-05Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications310-04Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping ApplicationsF.American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE):1018-01Trap Seal Primer Valves – Potable, Water SuppliedG.Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI):PDI WH-201Water Hammer ArrestorPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SANITARY waste, drain, and vent PIPING A.Cast iron waste, drain, and vent pipe and fittings1.Cast iron waste, drain, and vent pipe and fittings shall be used for the following applications:a.pipe buried in or in contact with earthb.sanitary pipe extensions to a distance of approximately 1500 mm (5 feet) outside of the building.c.interior waste and vent piping above grade.2.Cast iron Pipe shall be bell and spigot or hubless (plain end or no-hub or hubless). 3.The material for all pipe and fittings shall be cast iron soil pipe and fittings and shall conform to the requirements of CISPI Standard 301, ASTM A-888, or ASTM A-74.4.Joints for hubless pipe and fittings shall conform to the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Couplings for hubless joints shall conform to CISPI 310. Joints for hub and spigot pipe shall be installed with compression gaskets conforming to the requirements of ASTM Standard C-564 or be installed with lead and oakum. B.Copper Tube, (DWV):1.Copper DWV tube sanitary waste, drain and vent pipe may be used for piping above ground, except for urinal drains. 2.The copper DWV tube shall be drainage type, drawn temper conforming to ASTM B306.3.The copper drainage fittings shall be cast copper or wrought copper conforming to ASME B16.23 or ASME 16.29.4.The joints shall be lead free, using a water flushable flux, and conforming to ASTM B32. C.Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)1.Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe and fittings are permitted where the waste temperature is below 60C (140F).2.PVC piping and fittings shall NOT be used for the following applications: a.Waste collected from steam condensate drainsb.spaces such as mechanical equipment rooms, kitchens, SPD, and sterilizer areas.b.Vertical waste and soil stacks serving more than two floorsc.Exposed in mechanical equipment rooms.d.Exposed inside of ceiling return plenums3.Polyvinyl chloride sanitary waste, drain, and vent pipe and fittings shall be schedule 40 solid core sewer piping conforming to ASTM D 1785 and ASTM D2665, sewer and drain series with ends for solvent cemented joints.4.Fittings: a.PVC fittings shall be solvent welded socket type using solvent cement conforming to ASTM D2564. 2.2 EXPOSED WASTE PIPING A.Full iron pipe size chrome plated brass piping shall be used in finished rooms for exposed waste piping connecting fixtures, casework, cabinets, equipment and reagent racks when not concealed by apron including those furnished by the Government or specified in other sections. 1.The Pipe shall meet Fed. Spec. WWP351, standard weight. 2.The Fittings shall conform to ANSI B16.15, cast bronze threaded fittings with chrome finish, (125 and 250). 3.Nipples shall conform to ASTM B 687, Chromium-plated. 4.Unions shall be brass or bronze with chrome finish. Unions 65 mm (21/2 inches) and larger shall be flange type with approved gaskets. B.In unfinished Rooms such as mechanical Rooms and Kitchens, Chromeplated brass piping is not required. The pipe materials specified under the paragraph “Sanitary Waste, Drain, and Vent Piping” can be used. The sanitary pipe in unfinished rooms shall be painted as specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.2.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGSA.Transition pipe couplings shall join piping with small differences in outside diameters or different materials. End connections shall be of the same size and compatible with the pipes being joined. The transition coupling shall be elastomeric, sleeve type reducing or transition pattern and include shear and corrosion resistant metal, tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. The transition coupling sleeve coupling shall be of the following material:1.For cast iron soil pipes, the sleeve material shall be rubber conforming to ASTM C564.2.For dissimilar pipes, the sleeve material shall be PVC conforming to ASTM D5926, or other material compatible with the pipe materials being joined.B.The dielectric fittings shall conform to ASSE 1079 with a pressure rating of 860 kPa (125 psig) at a minimum temperature of 82°C (180°F). The end connection shall be solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.C.Dielectric flange insulating kits shall be of non conducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges with a pressure rating of 1035 kPa (150 psig). The gasket shall be neoprene or phenolic. The bolt sleeves shall be phenolic or polyethylene. The washers shall be phenolic with steel backing washers.D.The di-electric nipples shall be electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545 with a pressure ratings of 2070 kPa (300 psig) at 107°C (225°F). The end connection shall be male threaded. The lining shall be inert and noncorrosive propylene.2.4 CLEANOUTS A.Cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe, up to 100 mm (4 inches); and not less than 100 mm (4 inches) for larger pipe. Cleanouts shall be easily accessible and shall be gastight and watertight. Minimum clearance of 600 mm (24 inches) shall be provided for clearing a clogged sanitary line. B.Cleanouts shall be provided at or near the base of the vertical stacks with the cleanout plug located approximately 600 mm (24 inches) above the floor. If there are no fixtures installed on the lowest floor, the cleanout shall be installed at the base of the stack. The cleanouts shall be extended to the wall access cover. Cleanout shall consist of sanitary tees. Nickelbronze square frame and stainless steel cover with minimum opening of 150 by 150 mm (6 by 6 inches) shall be furnished at each wall cleanout. Where the piping is concealed, a fixture trap or a fixture with integral trap, readily removable without disturbing concealed pipe, shall be accepted as a cleanout equivalent providing the opening to be used as a cleanout opening is the size required.C.In horizontal runs above grade, cleanouts shall consist of cast brass tapered screw plug in fitting or caulked/hubless cast iron ferrule. Plain end (hubless) piping in interstitial space or above ceiling may use plain end (hubless) blind plug and clamp. 2.5 FLOOR DRAINS A.Type A (FD-A) floor drain shall comply with ANSI A112.6.3. A caulking flange, inside gasket, or hubless connection shall be provided for connection to cast iron pipe, screwed or no hub outlets for connection to steel pipe. The drain connection shall be bottom outlet. A membrane clamp and extensions shall be provided, if required, where installed in connection with waterproof membrane. Puncturing membrane other than for drain opening will not be permitted. Double drainage pattern floor drains shall have integral seepage pan for embedding into floor construction, and weep holes to provide adequate drainage from pan to drain pipe. For drains not installed in connection with a waterproof membrane, a 2.2 kg (16-ounce) soft copper membrane, 600 mm (24 inches) square or another approved waterproof membrane shall be provided. 2.6 TRAPS A. Traps shall be provided on all sanitary branch waste connections from fixtures or equipment not provided with traps. Exposed brass shall be polished brass chromium plated with nipple and set screw escutcheons. Concealed traps may be rough cast brass or same material as pipe connected to. Slip joints are not permitted on sewer side of trap. Traps shall correspond to fittings on cast iron soil pipe or steel pipe respectively, and size shall be as required by connected service or fixture.2.7 TRAP seal PRIMER valves and trap seal primer systemsA.Trap Primer (TP-1): The trap seal primer system shall be electronic type conforming to ASSE 1044.1.The controller shall have a 24 hour programmable timer, solid state, 6 outlet zones, minimum adjustable run time of 1 minute for each zone, 12 hour program battery backup, manual switch for 120VAC power, 120VAC to 24VAC internal transformer, fuse protected circuitry, UL listed, 120VAC input-24VAC output, constructed of enameled steel or plastic.2.The cabinet shall be recessed mounting with a stainless steel cover.3.The solenoid valve shall have a brass body, Buna “N” seats, normally closed, 5.98 kPa (125 psi) rated, 24VAC.4.The control wiring shall be copper in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electric Code, Article 725 and not less than 18 gauge. All wiring shall be in conduit and in accordance with Division 26 of the specifications.5.The vacuum breaker shall conform to ASSE 1001.B.Trap Primer (TP-2): The trap seal primer valve shall be hydraulic, supply type with a pressure rating of 5.98 kPa (125 psig) and conforming to standard ASSE 1018.1.The inlet and outlet connections shall be 15 mm or DN15 (NPS ? inch) 2.The trap seal primer valve shall be fully automatic with an all brass or bronze body.3.The trap seal primer valve shall be activated by a drop in building water pressure, no adjustment required.4.The trap seal primer valve shall include a manifold when serving two, three, or four traps.5.The manifold shall be omitted when serving only one trap.2.8 WATERPROOFING A.A sleeve flashing device shall be provided at points where pipes pass through membrane waterproofed floors or walls. The sleeve flashing device shall be manufactured, cast iron fitting with clamping device that forms a sleeve for the pipe floor penetration of the floor membrane. A galvanized steel pipe extension shall be included in the top of the fitting that will extend 50 mm (2 inches) above finished floor and galvanized steel pipe extension in the bottom of the fitting that will extend through the floor slab. A waterproof caulked joint shall be provided at the top hub.B.Walls: See detail shown on drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Pipe INSTALLATION A.The pipe installation shall comply with the requirements of the International Plumbing Code (IPC) and these specifications. B.Branch piping shall be installed for waste from the respective piping systems and connect to all fixtures, valves, cocks, outlets, casework, cabinets and equipment, including those furnished by the Government or specified in other sections. C.Pipe shall be round and straight. Cutting shall be done with proper tools. Pipe shall be reamed to full size after cutting. D.All pipe runs shall be laid out to avoid interference with other work. E.The piping shall be installed above accessible ceilings where possible.F.The piping shall be installed to permit valve servicing or operation.G.Unless specifically indicated on the drawings, the minimum slope shall be 2% slope.H.The piping shall be installed free of sags and bends.I.Seismic restraint shall be installed where required by code. J.Changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping shall be made using appropriate branches, bends and long sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short sweep quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Long turn double wye branch and eighth bend fittings shall be used if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Proper size of standard increaser and reducers shall be used if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.K.Buried soil and waste drainage and vent piping shall be laid beginning at the low point of each system. Piping shall be installed true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Hub ends shall be placed upstream. Required gaskets shall be installed according to manufacturer’s written instruction for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.L.Cast iron piping shall be installed according to CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,” Chapter IV, “Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings”M.Aboveground copper tubing shall be installed according to CDA’s “Copper Tube Handbook”.3.2 joint constructionA.Hub and spigot, cast iron piping with gasket joints shall be joined in accordance with CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook” for compression joints.B.Hub and spigot, cast iron piping with calked joints shall be joined in accordance with CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook” for lead and oakum calked joints.C.Hubless or No-hub, cast iron piping shall be joined in accordance with CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook” for hubless piping coupling joints.D.For threaded joints, thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. The threads shall be cut full and clean using sharp disc cutters. Threaded pipe ends shall be reamed to remove burrs and restored to full pipe inside diameter. Pipe fittings and valves shall be joined as follows:1.Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is required by the pipe service2.Pipe sections with damaged threads shall be replaced with new sections of pipe.E.Copper tube and fittings with soldered joints shall be joined according to ASTM B828. A water flushable, lead free flux conforming to ASTM B813 and a lead free alloy solder conforming to ASTM B32 shall be used.F.For PVC piping, solvent cement joints shall be used for joints. All surfaces shall be cleaned and dry prior to applying the primer and solvent cement. Installation practices shall comply with ASTM F402. The joint shall conform to ASTM D2855 and ASTM D2665 appendixes.3.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGSA.Transition coupling shall be installed at pipe joints with small differences in pipe outside diameters. B.Dielectric fittings shall be installed at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.3.3 Pipe Hangers, Supports and Accessories:A. All piping shall be supported according to the International Plumbing Code (IPC), Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING, and these specifications. Where conflicts arise between these the code and Section 22 05 11, the most restrictive or the requirement that specifies supports with highest loading or shortest spacing shall apply.B.Hangers, supports, rods, inserts and accessories used for pipe supports shall be shop coated with zinc chromate primer paint. Electroplated copper hanger rods, hangers and accessories may be used with copper tubing.C.Horizontal piping and tubing shall be supported within 300 mm (12 inches) of each fitting or coupling.D.Horizontal cast iron piping shall be supported with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum hanger rod diameters:1.40 mm or DN40 to 50 mm or DN50 (NPS 1-1/2 inch to NPS 2 inch): 1500 mm (60 inches) with 10 mm (3/8 inch) rod.2.80 mm or DN 80 (NPS 3 inch): 1500 mm (60 inches) with 13 mm (? inch) rod.3.100 mm or DN100 to 125 mm or DN125 (NPS 4 to NPS 5): 1500 mm (60 inches) with 16 mm (5/8 inch) rod.4. 150 mm or DN150 to 200 mm or DN200 (NPS 6 inch to NPS 8 inch): 1500 mm (60 inches) with 19 mm (? inch) rod.5. 250 mm or DN250 to 300 mm or DN 300 (NPS 10 inch to NPS 12 inch): 1500 mm (60 inch) with 22 mm (7/8 inch) rod.E.The maximum spacing for plastic pipe shall be 1.22 m (4 feet).F.Vertical piping and tubing shall be supported at the base, at each floor, and at intervals no greater than 4.57 m (15 feet).G.In addition to the requirements in Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING, floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates, Supports, Hangers shall have the following characteristics:1.Solid or split unplated cast iron.2.All plates shall be provided with set screws.3.Height adjustable clevis type pipe hangers.4.Adjustable floor rests and base flanges shall be steel.5.Hanger rods shall be low carbon steel, fully threaded or threaded at each end with two removable nuts at each end for positioning rod and hanger and locking each in place.7.Riser clamps shall be malleable iron or steel.8.Rollers shall be cast iron.9.See Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING, for requirements on insulated pipe protective shields at hanger supports.H.Miscellaneous materials shall be provided as specified, required, directed or as noted on the drawings for proper installation of hangers, supports and accessories. If the vertical distance exceeds 6 m (20 feet) for cast iron pipe additional support shall be provided in the center of that span. All necessary auxiliary steel shall be provided to provide that support.I.Cast escutcheon with set screw shall be provided at each wall, floor and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.J.Penetrations:1.Fire Stopping: Where pipes pass through fire partitions, fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors, a fire stop shall be installed that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases as specified in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. Clearances between raceways and openings shall be completely filled and sealed with the fire stopping materials. 2.Water proofing: At floor penetrations, clearances shall be completely sealed around the pipe and make watertight with sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.K.Piping shall conform to the following: 1.Waste and Vent Drain to main stacks: Pipe SizeMinimum Pitch 80 mm or DN 80 (3 inches) and smaller2%100 mm or DN 100 (4 inches) and larger1%2.Exhaust vents shall be extended separately through roof. Sanitary vents shall not connect to exhaust vents. 3.4 TESTS A.Sanitary waste and drain systems shall be tested either in its entirety or in sections. B.Waste System tests shall be conducted before trenches are backfilled or fixtures are connected. A water test or air test shall be conducted, as directed. 1.If entire system is tested for a water test, tightly close all openings in pipes except highest opening, and fill system with water to point of overflow. If the waste system is tested in sections, tightly plug each opening except highest opening of section under test, fill each section with water and test with at least a 3 m (10 foot) head of water. In testing successive sections, test at least upper 3 m (10 feet) of next preceding section so that each joint or pipe except upper most 3 m (10 feet) of system has been submitted to a test of at least a 3 m (10 foot) head of water. Water shall be kept in the system, or in portion under test, for at least 15 minutes before inspection starts. System shall then be tight at all joints. 2.For an air test, an air pressure of 35 kPa (5 psig) gage shall be maintained for at least 15 minutes without leakage. A force pump and mercury column gage shall be used for the air test.3.After installing all fixtures and equipment, open water supply so that all p-traps can be observed. For 15 minutes of operation, all p-traps shall be inspected for leaks and any leaks found shall be corrected. 3.Final Tests: Either one of the following tests may be used. a.Smoke Test: After fixtures are permanently connected and traps are filled with water, fill entire drainage and vent systems with smoke under pressure of 1.3 kPa (1 inch of water) with a smoke machine. Chemical smoke is prohibited. b.Peppermint Test: Introduce (2 ounces) of peppermint into each line or stack. E N D SECTION 22 13 00 SECTION 22 14 00FACILITY STORM DRAINAGEPART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section describes the requirements for storm drainage systems, including piping and all necessary accessories as designated in this section.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING: Penetrations in rated enclosures.B.Section 09 91 00, PAINTING: Preparation and finish painting and identification of piping systems.C.Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING: Pipe Hangers and Supports, Materials Identification.D.Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION: Pipe Insulation.1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Piping. 2.Roof Drains. 3.Cleanouts.4.All items listed in Part 2 - Products. C.Detailed shop drawing of clamping device and extensions when required in connection with the waterproofing membrane. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American National Standards Institute (ANSI). C.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): (Copyrighted Society)A112.21.2m-83Roof DrainsA13.1-07Scheme for Identification of Piping SystemsB16.306Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300. B16.907Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt welding Fittings B16.1105Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded B16.1298 (R 2006)Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings B16.15-06)Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings, Class 125 and 250B16.18-01 (R 2005)Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure FittingsB16.22-01 (R 2005)Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure FittingsD.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A47-99 (R 2004)Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum Coated, by the Hot-Dip ProcessA53-07Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black And Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and SeamlessA74-06Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and FittingsA183-03)Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and NutsA312-03Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel PipeA536-84(R 2004)Standard Specification for Ductile Iron CastingsA733-03Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe NipplesB32-04Standard Specification for Solder MetalB61-08Standard Specification for Steam or Bronze CastingsB62-02Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal CastingsB75-02Standard Specification for Seamless Copper TubeB88-03Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water TubeB306-02Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV)B584-08Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General ApplicationsB687-99Standard Specification for Brass, Copper, and Chromium-Plated Pipe NipplesC564-06aStandard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and FittingsD2000-08Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive ApplicationsD4101-07Standard Specification for Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion MaterialsD2447-03Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40 and 80, Based on Outside DiameterD2564-04e1Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and FittingsD2665-07Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and FittingsE.American Welding Society (AWS): A5.8-04Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze WeldingF.International Code Council (ICC): IPC-06International Plumbing CodeG.Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI):301-05Hubless Cast Iron Soil and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications310-04Couplings for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping ApplicationsH.Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS):SP-72-99Standard for Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt Welding For General PurposeSP-110-96Ball Valve Threaded, Socket Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared EndsPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STORM WATER DRAIN PIPING A.Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)1.Polyvinyl chloride storm sewer pipe and fittings are permitted for single story structures except for mechanical equipment rooms and other areas containing air handling equipment or hot water generation equipment.2.Polyvinyl chloride storm sewer pipe and fittings shall be schedule 40 solid core sewer piping conforming to ASTM D1785 and D 2665, Sewer and Drain Series, with ends for solvent cemented joints.3.Polyvinyl chloride joints shall be solvent welded socket type using solvent cement conforming to ASTM D2564.2.2 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGSA.Transition pipe couplings shall join piping with small differences in outside diameters or be of different materials. End connections shall be of the same size and compatible with the pipes being joined. The transition coupling shall be elastomeric, sleeve type reducing or transition pattern and include shear erring and corrosion resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. The transition coupling sleeve coupling shall be of the following material:1.For PVC soil pipes, the sleeve material shall be elastomeric seal or PVC, conforming to ASTM F 477 or ASTM D5926.2.For dissimilar pipes, the sleeve material shall be PVC conforming to ASTM D5926, or other material compatible with the pipe materials being joined. 2.3 ROOF DRAINS AND CONNECTIONS A.Roof Drains: Roof Drains (RD) shall be cast iron with clamping device for making watertight connection. Free openings through strainer shall be twice area of drain outlet. For roof drains not installed in connection with a waterproof membrane, a soft copper membrane shall be provided 300 mm (12 inches) in diameter greater than outside diameter of drain collar. An integral gravel stop shall be provided for drains installed on roofs having built up roofing covered with gravel or slag. Integral no-hub, soil pipe gasket or threaded outlet connection shall be provided.1.Portico Roofs and Gutters: Roof drains shall be horizontal angle type drain with flat bottom and horizontal outlet at the same elevation as the pipe to which it is connected. Strainer shall be removable angle grate type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 pipe INSTALLATION A.The pipe installation shall comply with the requirements of the International code and these specifications. B.Branch piping shall be installed from the piping system and connect to all drains and outlets. C.Pipe shall be round and straight. Cutting shall be done with proper tools. Pipe shall be reamed to full size after cutting. D.All pipe runs shall be laid out to avoid interference with other work. E.The piping shall be installed above accessible ceilings to allow for ceiling panel removal.F.Unless otherwise stated on the documents, minimum horizontal slope shall be one inch for every1.22 m (4 feet) of pipe length.G.The piping shall be installed free of sags and bends.H.Seismic restraint shall be installed where required by code. I.Changes in direction for storm drainage piping shall be made using appropriate branches, bends and long sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short sweep ? bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Long turn double wye branch and 1/8 bend fittings shall be used if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Proper size of standard increaser and reducers shall be used if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.J.Aboveground PVC piping shall be installed according to ASTM D2665. Underground PVC piping shall be installed according to ASTM D2321.3.2 joint constructionA.for PVC piping, solvent cement joints shall be used for joints. All surfaces shall be cleaned and dry prior to applying the primer and solvent cement. Installation practices shall comply with ASTM F402. The joint shall conform to ASTM D2855 and ASTM D2665 appendixes.3.3 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND ACCESSORIES:A.All piping shall be supported according to the International plumbing code, Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING, and these specifications.B.Hangers, supports, rods, inserts and accessories used for Pipe supports shall be shop coated with zinc Chromate primer paint. Electroplated copper hanger rods, hangers and accessories may be used with copper tubing.C.Horizontal piping and tubing shall be supported within 300 mm (12 inches) of each fitting or coupling.D.The maximum support spacing for horizontal plastic shall be 1.22 m (4 feet).E.Vertical piping and tubing shall be supported at the base, at each floor, and at intervals no greater than 4.57 m (15 feet).F.In addition to the requirements in Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING, floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates shall have the following characteristics:1.All plates shall be provided with set screws.2.Height adjustable clevis type pipe hangers.3.Adjustable Floor Rests and Base Flanges shall be steel.4.Hanger Rods shall be low carbon steel, fully threaded or Threaded at each end with two removable nuts at each end for positioning rod and hanger and locking each in place.5.Riser Clamps shall be malleable iron or steel.6.Roller shall be cast iron.7.Hangers and supports utilized with insulated pipe and tubing shall have 180 degree (min.) metal protection shield Centered on and welded to the hanger and support. The shield shall be 4 inches in length and be 16 gage steel. The shield shall be sized for the insulation.G.Miscellaneous Materials shall be provided as specified, required, directed or as noted on the drawings for proper installation of hangers, supports and accessories. If the vertical distance exceeds 6 m (20 feet) for cast iron pipe additional support shall be provided in the center of that span. All necessary auxiliary steel shall be provided to provide that support.H.Cast escutcheon with set screw shall be installed at each wall, floor and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.I.Penetrations:1.Fire Stopping: Where pipes pass through fire partitions, fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors, a fire stop shall be installed that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases as specified in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. Clearances between raceways and openings shall be completely filled and sealed with the fire stopping materials. 2.Water proofing: At floor penetrations, Clearances around the pipe shall be completely sealed and made watertight with sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.J.Piping shall conform to the following: 1.Storm Water Drain and Vent Drain to main stacks: Pipe SizeMinimum Pitch 80 mm (3 inches) and smaller2%100 mm (4 inches) (4 inches) and larger1%3.4 TESTS A.Storm sewer system shall be tested either in its entirety or in sections.B.Storm Water Drain tests shall be conducted before trenches are backfilled or fixtures are connected. A water test or air test shall be conducted, as directed.1.If entire system is tested with water, tightly close all openings in pipes except the highest opening, and fill system with water to point of overflow. If system is tested in sections, tightly plug each opening except highest opening of section under test, fill each section with water and test with at least a 3 m (10 foot) head of water. In testing successive sections, test at least upper 3 m (10 feet) of next preceding section so that each joint or pipe except upper most 3 m (10 feet) of system has been submitted to a test of at least a 3 m (10 foot) head of water. Water shall be kept in the system, or in portion under test, for at least 15 minutes before inspection starts. System shall then be tight at all joints. 2.For an air test, an air pressure of 35 kPa (5 psi) gage shall be maintained for at least 15 minutes without leakage. A force pump and mercury column gage shall be used for the test. 3.Final Tests: Either one of the following tests may be used. a.Smoke Test: After fixtures are permanently connected and traps are filled with water, fill entire drainage and vent systems with smoke under pressure of 1.3 kPa (1 inch of water) with a smoke machine. Chemical smoke is prohibited. b.Peppermint Test: Introduce .06 liters (2 ounces) of peppermint into each line or stack. E N D – SECTION 22 14 00SECTION 22 33 00ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERSPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION:This section describes the requirements for installing a complete electric domestic water heater system ready for operation including the water heaters, thermometers, and all necessary accessories, connections, and equipment. 1.2 RELATED WORK:A.Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING.B.Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION: Heater Insulation.E., 22 05 23, GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING, and 22 11 00, FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION: Piping, Fittings, Valves and Gages.1.3 quality assurance:ply with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air- Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) for efficiency performance:1.ASHRAE 90.1, Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings, ”for commercial water heaters.”B.Electrical components, devices and accessories shall be listed and labeled B as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.C.ASME code construction shall be a vessel fabricated in compliance with the ASME boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.D.Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contract with potable water to comply with NSF 61, “Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects”1.4 SUBMITTALS:A.Submit manufacturer’s literature and data pertaining to the water heater in properly bound package, in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Include the following as a minimum:1.Water Heaters.2.Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves.4.Thermometers. 5.Pressure Gages.6.Vacuum Breakers.B.For each electric domestic hot water heater type and size, the following characteristics shall be submitted:Rated Capacities.Operating characteristics.Electrical characteristics.Furnished specialties and accessories.A form U-1 or other documentation stating compliance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel code.C.Shop drawings shall include wiring diagrams for power, signal and control functions.D.Seismic qualification certificates shall be submitted that details equipment anchorage components, identifies equipment center of gravity with mounting and anchorage provisions, and whether the seismic qualification certificate is based on an actual test or calculations.E.The domestic water heater shall be certified and labeled by a testing agency.1.5 Applicable publications:A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE):1005Performance Requirements for Water Heater Drain Valves, 20 mm (3/4 inch) sizeC.American National Standard Institute (ANSI):Z21.22B-2001Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply SystemsD.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):B1.20.1-83(R 2006)Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)B16.5-03Standard for Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS ? through NPS 24B16.24-06Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500.PTC 25.3-02Pressure Relief DevicesSection IV-07Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Section IV, Recommended Rules for the Care and Operation of Heating BoilersSection VIII D1-07Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Pressure Vessels Division 1 –Basic CoverageE.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)70-06National Electrical CodeF.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):174-04Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters1453-04Water Heaters, Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank 499-05Standard for Safety Electric Heating Appliances1.6 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATIONA.The electronic documentation and copies of the Operations and Maintenance Manual, approved submittals, shop drawings, and other closeout documentation shall be prepared by a computer software program complying with Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended (29 U.S.C 794d). ??The manufacturer or vendor of the software used to prepare the electronic documentation shall have a Voluntary Product Accessibility Template made available for review and included as part of the Operations and Maintenance Manual or closeout documentation. ?All available accessibility functions listed in the Voluntary Accessibility Template shall be enabled in the prepared electronic files. ?As Adobe Acrobat is a common industry format for such documentation, following the document, "Creating Accessible Adobe PDF files, A Guide for Document Authors" that is maintained and made available by Adobe free of charge is recommended.”B.Four sets of manufacturer’s literature and data updated to include submittal review comments and any equipment substitutions.C.Four sets of operation and maintenance data updated to include submittal review comments shall be inserted into a three ring binder. All aspects of system operation and maintenance procedures, including piping isometrics, wiring diagrams of all circuits, a written description of system design, control logic, and sequence of operation shall be included in the operation and maintenance manual. The operations and maintenance manual shall include troubleshooting techniques and procedures for emergency situations. Notes on all special systems or devices such as damper and door closure interlocks shall be included. A List of recommended spare parts (manufacturer, model number, and quantity) shall be furnished. Information explaining any special knowledge or tools the owner will be required to employ shall be inserted into the As-Built documentation.PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRIC domestic WATER HEATERs:A.The tank construction shall be steel shell, with a inner tank liner complying with NSF 61 for barrier materials for potable water. The inner liner shall be extended into the tappings. The vessel shall be ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC), section VIII, fabricated with a pressure rating of 1035 kPa (150 psig)B.Tapping (openings) shall be Factory fabricated of materials compatible with the tank and in accordance with appropriate ASME standards B1.20.1 for piping connections, pressure and temperature relief valve, pressure gauge, thermometer, drain valve, anode rods and controls as required. Tappings shall comply with the following:1.50 mm or DN50 (2 inch) and smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.2.65 mm or DN65 (2 1/2-inch) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel and stainless steel flanges, and according to ASME B 16.24.C.Tank insulation shall comply with ASHRAE 90.1.D.For domestic hot water heater sizes greater than 9 KW, the heating element shall be arranged in multiples of three elements. For heaters less than 9 KW, the heater elements shall be arranged in single elements.E.The domestic hot water heaters shall have screw in or bolt in immersion type, thermostatically adjustable. Set thermostat for maximum water temperature of 55°C (130°F). The electrical characteristics are scheduled on the drawings.bination Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves shall be ASME rated and stamped for combination temperature and pressure relief valves. One or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as the heat input shall be included. The pressure setting shall be less than the domestic water heater working pressure rating. G.the anode rod shall be replaceable magnesium.H.the drain valve shall be corrosion resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005.2.2 comBINATION TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVESA.The combination temperature and pressure relief valves shall be ASME rated and stamped and include a relieving capacity at least as great as the heat input and include a pressure setting less than the water heater’s working pressure rating.2.3 THERMOMETERS:The thermometers shall be straight stem, iron case, red reflecting mercury thermometer or red liquid-filled thermometers, approximately 175 mm (7 inches) high, 4 to 115°C (40 to 240°F). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Installation:A.Water heaters shall be installed on concrete bases unless elevated above the floor. Refer to Specification Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBINGB.The water heaters shall be installed level and plumb and securely anchored.C.The water heaters shall be installed and connected in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.D.All pressure and temperature relief valves discharge shall be piped to nearby floor drains. E.Thermometers shall be installed on the water heater inlet and outlet piping.F.The thermostatic control shall be set for a maximum setting of 54 degrees C (130 degrees F). G.Shutoff valves shall be installed on the domestic water supply piping to the water heater and on the domestic hot water outlet piping.H.All manufacturers’s required clearances shall be maintained.I.A combination temperature and pressure relief valve shall be installed at the top portion of the storage tank. The sensing element shall extend into the tank. The relief valve outlet drain piping shall discharge by positive air gap into a floor drain.J.Piping type heat traps shall be installed on the inlet and outlet piping of the electric domestic hot water heater storage tanks.K.Water heater drain piping shall be installed as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Hose end drain valves shall be installed at low points in water piping for electric domestic hot water heaters without integral drains.3.2 LEAKAGE TEST:Before piping connections are made, water heaters shall be tested with hydrostatic pressure of 1375 kPa (200 psi) and 1654 kPa (240 psi) for a unit with a MAWP of 1103 kPa (160 psi). Any domestic water heater leaking water shall be replaced with a new unit at no additional cost to the VA.3.3 performance test:All of the remote water outlets shall have a minimum of 49°C (120°F) and a maximum of 54°C (130°F) water flow at all times. If necessary, make all corrections to balance the return water system or reset the thermostat to make the system comply with design requirements.E N D SECTION 22 33 00SECTION 22 40 00PLUMBING FIXTURESPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONPlumbing fixtures, associated trim and fittings necessary to make a complete installation from wall or floor connections to rough piping, and certain accessories. 1.2 RELATED WORKA.Sealing between fixtures and other finish surfaces: Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.B.Flush panel access doors: Section 08 31 13, ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES. C.Not Used.D.Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING.1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B.Submit plumbing fixture information in an assembled brochure, showing cuts and full detailed description of each fixture. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American National Standard Institute (ANSI): The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):A112.6.1M02(R2008)Floor Affixed Supports for OfftheFloor Plumbing Fixtures for Public UseA112.19.1M04Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing fixtures A112.19.2M03(R2008)Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures A112.19.3-2001(R2008)Stainless Steel Plumbing fixtures (Designed for Residential Use)C.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A276-2003Stainless and HeatResisting Steel Bars and Shapes D.National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): NAAMM AMP 500-505Metal Finishes Manual (1988) E.American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE):1016-05Performance Requirements for Individual Thermostatic, Pressure Balancing and Combination Pressure Balancing and Thermostatic Control Valves for Individual Fixture Fittings F. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)/American National Standards Institute (ANSI):61-03Drinking Water System Components-Health EffectsG. American with Disabilities Act(A.D.A) Section 4-19.4 Exposed Pipes and Surfaces PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 STAINLESS STEELA.Corrosion-resistant Steel (CRS):1.Plate, Sheet and Strip: CRS flat products shall conform to chemical composition requirements of any 300 series steel specified in ASTM A276.2.Finish: Exposed surfaces shall have standard polish (ground and polished) equal to NAAMM finish Number 4.B.Die-cast zinc alloy products are prohibited.2.2 STOPS A.Provide lockshield loose key or screw driver pattern angle stops, straight stops or stops integral with faucet, with each compression type faucet whether specifically called for or not, including sinks in wood and metal casework, laboratory furniture and pharmacy furniture. Locate stops centrally above or below fixture in accessible location. B.Furnish keys for lock shield stops to COTR.C.Supply from stops not integral with faucet shall be chrome plated copper flexible tubing or flexible stainless steel with inner core of non-toxic polymer.D.Supply pipe from wall to valve stop shall be rigid threaded IPS copper alloy pipe, i.e. red brass pipe nipple. E.Psychiatric Area: Provide stainless steel drain guard for all lavatories not installed in casework.2.3 ESCUTCHEONS Heavy type, chrome plated, with set screws. Provide for piping serving plumbing fixtures and at each wall, ceiling and floor penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. 2.4 CARRIERS A.ASME/ANSI A112.6.1M, with adjustable gasket faceplate chair carriers for wall hung closets with auxiliary anchor foot assembly, hanger rod support feet, and rear anchor tie down. B.ASME/ANSI A112.6.1M, lavatory, // chair carrier for thin wall construction . All lavatory chair carriers shall be capable of supporting the lavatory with a 250-pound vertical load applied at the front of the fixture. C.Where water closets, lavatories or sinks are installed backtoback and carriers are specified, provide one carrier to serve both fixtures in lieu of individual carriers. The drainage fitting of the back to back carrier shall be so constructed that it prevents the discharge from one fixture from flowing into the opposite fixture.2.5 WATER CLOSETS A.(P-101) Water Closet (Floor Mounted, ANSI 112.19.2M, Figure 6) - office and industrial, elongated bowl, siphon jet 6 L (1.6 gallons) per flush, floor outlet. Top of rim shall be 434 to 437 mm (17 1/8 inch to 17 1/4 inch)above finished floor.1.Seat: Institutional/Industrial, extra heavy duty, chemical resistant, solid plastic, open front less cover for elongated bowls, integrally molded bumpers, concealed check hinge with stainless steel post. Seat shall be posture contoured body design. Color shall be white.2.Fittings and Accessories: Floor flange fittings-cast iron; Gasket-wax; bolts with chromium plated cap nuts and washers.3.Flush valve: Large chloramines resistant diaphragm, semi red brass valve body, exposed chrome plated, non-hold-open ADA approved side oscillating handle , water saver design 6 L (1.6 gallons) per flush with maximum 10 percent variance, top spud connection, adjustable tailpiece, one-inch IPS screwdriver back check angle stop with vandal resistant cap, high back pressure vacuum breaker, and sweat solder adapter with cover tube and cast set screw wall flange. Set centerline of inlet 275 mm (11-1/2) inches above rim. Seat bumpers shall be integral part of flush valve. Valve body, cover, tailpiece and control stop shall be in conformance with ASTM Alloy classification for semi-red brass.2.6 LAVATORIESA.Dimensions for lavatories are specified, Length by width (distance from wall) and depth.B.Brass components in contact with water shall contain no more than 3 percent lead content by dry weight.C.(P402) Lavatory (Elbow Control, ASME/ANSI A112.19.2M, Figure 16) straight back, approximately 500 by 450 mm (20 by 18 inches) and a 102 mm (4-inch) maximum apron, first quality vitreous china. Punching for faucet on 203 mm (8inch) centers. Set with rim 864 mm (34 inches) above finished floor. 1.Faucet: Solid cast brass construction with washerless ceramic disc mixing cartridge type and centrally exposed rigid gooseneck spout [Outlet 125-150 mm (5-6 inches) above rim]. Provide laminar flow control device. One hundred millimeters (4inch) elbow handles on faucets shall be cast, formed or drop forged copper alloy. Faucet, wall and floor escutcheons shall be either copper alloy or CRS. Exposed metal parts, including exposed part under valve handle when in open position, shall have a smooth bright finish. 2.Drain: Cast or wrought brass with flat grid strainer and offset tailpiece, chrome plated finish. Stops: Angle type, See paragraph 2.2. StopsTrap: Cast copper alloy, 40 by 32 mm (1-1/2 by 1-1/4 inch) P-trap. Adjustable with connected elbow and 1.4 mm thick (17 gauge) tubing extensions to wall. Exposed metal trap surfaces and connection hardware shall be chrome plated with a smooth bright finish. Set trap parallel to wall.Provide cover for drain, stops and trap per A.D.A 4-19.4.2.7 SINKS AND LAUNDRY TUBSA.(P528) Sink (CRS, Single Compartment, Counter Top ASME/ANSI A112.19.2M, Kitchen Sinks, Figure 5) self rimming, back faucet ledge, approximately 533 by 558 mm (21 by 22 inches) with single compartment inside dimensions approximately 406 by 483 by 190 mm (16 by 19 by 7 ? inches) deep. Shall be minimum of 1.3 mm thick (18 gauge) CRS. Corners and edges shall be well rounded:1.Faucet: Solid brass construction, deck mounted combination faucet with monel or ceramic seats, removable replacement unit containing all parts subject to ware, swivel gooseneck spout with approximately 200 mm (8-inche) reach with spout outlet 150 mm (6-inches above deck and // 102 mm (4 inch) wrist blades // single lever // with hose spray. Faucet shall be polished chrome plated. 2.Drain: Drain plug with cup strainer, stainless steel. Trap: Cast copper alloy 40 mm (11/2 inch) Ptrap with cleanout plug. Provide wall connection and escutcheon. Provide cover for drain, stops and trap per A.D.A 4-19.4.PART 3 - EXECUTIONA.Fixture Setting: Opening between fixture and floor and wall finish shall be sealed as specified under Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.B.Supports and Fastening: Secure all fixtures, equipment and trimmings to partitions, walls and related finish surfaces. Exposed heads of bolts and nuts in finished rooms shall be hexagonal, polished chrome plated brass with rounded tops.D.Toggle Bolts: For hollow masonry units, finished or unfinished.E.Expansion Bolts: For brick or concrete or other solid masonry. Shall be 6 mm (1/4-inch) diameter bolts, and to extend at least 75 mm (3-inches) into masonry and be fitted with loose tubing or sleeves extending into masonry. Wood plugs, fiber plugs, lead or other soft metal shields are prohibited.F.Power Set Fasteners: May be used for concrete walls, shall be 6 mm (1/4-inch) threaded studs, and shall extend at least 35 mm (1-1/4 inches) into wall.G.Tightly cover and protect fixtures and equipment against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury.H.Where water closet waste pipe has to be offset due to beam interference, provide correct and additional piping necessary to eliminate relocation of water closet.I.Do not use aerators on lavatories and sinks.3.2 CLEANINGAt completion of all work, fixtures, exposed materials and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned.E N D SECTION 22 40 00SECTION 23 05 11COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATIONPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.The requirements of this Section apply to all sections of Division 23. B.Definitions:1.Exposed: Piping, ductwork, and equipment exposed to view in finished rooms. 2.Option or optional: Contractor's choice of an alternate material or method. 3. COTR: Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative.1.2 RELATED WORK Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. C.Section 02 82 11, TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT. D.Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS. E.Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. F.Flashing for Wall and Roof Penetrations: Section 07 60 00, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. G.Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS. H.Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.I.Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONSJ.Section 26 29 11, LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR STARTERS. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Mechanical, electrical and associated systems shall be safe, reliable, efficient, durable, easily and safely operable and maintainable, easily and safely accessible, and in compliance with applicable codes as specified. The systems shall be comprised of high quality institutional-class and industrial-class products of manufacturers that are experienced specialists in the required product lines. All construction firms and personnel shall be experienced and qualified specialists in industrial and institutional HVAC or steam boiler plant construction, as applicable. B.Flow Rate Tolerance for HVAC Equipment: Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.C.Equipment Vibration Tolerance:1.Refer to Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT. Equipment shall be factory-balanced to this tolerance and re-balanced on site, as necessary.2.After HVAC air balance work is completed and permanent drive sheaves are in place, perform field mechanical balancing and adjustments required to meet the specified vibration tolerance.D.Products Criteria:1.Standard Products: Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least 3 years. The design, model and size of each item shall have been in satisfactory and efficient operation on at least three installations for approximately three years. However, digital electronics devices, software and systems such as controls, instruments, computer work station, shall be the current generation of technology and basic design that has a proven satisfactory service record of at least three years. See other specification sections for any exceptions.2.Not Used.3.All items furnished shall be free from defects that would adversely affect the performance, maintainability and appearance of individual components and overall assembly.4.Conform to codes and standards as required by the specifications. Conform to local codes, if required by local authorities such as the natural gas supplier, if the local codes are more stringent then those specified. Refer any conflicts to the COTR (RE)/Contracting Officers Technical Representative (COTR).5.Multiple Units: When two or more units of materials or equipment of the same type or class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.6.Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product.7.Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment.8.Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.E.Equipment Service Organizations: 1.HVAC: Products and systems shall be supported by service organizations that maintain a complete inventory of repair parts and are located reasonably close to the site. 2.Boiler Plants: Service organizations, authorized and trained by manufacturers of the equipment supplied, shall be located within 100 miles of the project. These organizations shall come to the site and provide acceptable service to restore boiler plant operations within four hours of receipt of notification by phone, e-mail or fax in event of an emergency, such as the shut-down of equipment; or within 24 hours in a non-emergency. Submit names, mail and e-mail addresses and phone numbers of service organizations providing service under these conditions for (as applicable to the project): burners, burner control systems, boiler control systems, pumps, critical instrumentation, computer workstation and programming.F.HVAC Mechanical Systems Welding: Before any welding is performed, contractor shall submit a certificate certifying that welders comply with the following requirements:1.Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications".ply with provisions of ASME B31 series "Code for Pressure Piping".3.Certify that each welder has passed American Welding Society (AWS) qualification tests for the welding processes involved, and that certification is current.G.Execution (Installation, Construction) Quality:1.Apply and install all items in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Refer conflicts between the manufacturer's instructions and the contract drawings and specifications to the COTR for resolution. Provide written hard copies or computer files of manufacturer’s installation instructions to the COTR at least two weeks prior to commencing installation of any item. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations is a cause for rejection of the material.2.All items that require access, such as for operating, cleaning, servicing, maintenance, and calibration, shall be easily and safely accessible by persons standing at floor level, or standing on permanent platforms, without the use of portable ladders. Examples of these itemsinclude, but are not limited to: all types of valves, filters and strainers, transmitters, control devices. Prior to commencing installation work, refer conflicts between this requirement and contract drawings to the COTR for resolution. 3.Provide complete layout drawings required by Paragraph, SUBMITTALS. Do not commence construction work on any system until the layout drawings have been approved.1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, and with requirements in the individual specification sections. B.Contractor shall make all necessary field measurements and investigations to assure that the equipment and assemblies will meet contract requirements.C.If equipment is submitted which differs in arrangement from that shown, provide drawings that show the rearrangement of all associated systems. Approval will be given only if all features of the equipment and associated systems, including accessibility, are equivalent to that required by the contract.D.Prior to submitting shop drawings for approval, contractor shall certify in writing that manufacturers of all major items of equipment have each reviewed drawings and specifications, and have jointly coordinated and properly integrated their equipment and controls to provide a complete and efficient installation.E.Upon request by Government, provide lists of previous installations for selected items of equipment. Include contact persons who will serve as references, with telephone numbers and e-mail addresses.F.Submittals and shop drawings for interdependent items, containing applicable descriptive information, shall be furnished together and complete in a group. Coordinate and properly integrate materials and equipment in each group to provide a completely compatible and efficient installation. Final review and approvals will be made only by groups.G.Ungrouped submittal items for boiler plants, which may be submitted individually, include, but are not limited to:1.Pipe, valves and fittings identified as to service application.2.Strainers.3.Safety valves and drip pan ells.4.Temperature control valves, sensors.5.Steam pressure reducing valves and pilots. 6.Steam traps with orifice sizes and pressure ratings. 7.Thermometers and pressure gauges and accessories. 8.Flexible connectors, hose, braided. 9.Dielectric fittings and unions.10.Quick-couple hose fittings and steam hose.11.Heating and ventilating equipment.12.Vibration isolators - air, water.13.Supports and braces for pipe, stacks, breeching; load, size, movement calculations.14.Pressure gauge test kit.15.Insulation, field-applied.H.Layout Drawings: 1.Submit complete consolidated and coordinated layout drawings for all new systems, and for existing systems that are in the same areas. Refer to the GENERAL CONDITIONS. 2.The drawings shall include plan views, elevations and sections of all systems and shall be on a scale of not less than 1:32 (3/8-inch equal to one foot). Clearly identify and dimension the proposed locations of the principal items of equipment. The drawings shall clearly show locations and adequate clearance for all equipment, piping, valves, control panels and other items. Show the access means for all items requiring access for operations and maintenance. Provide detailed layout drawings of all piping and duct systems.3.Do not install equipment foundations, equipment or piping until layout drawings have been approved. 4.In addition, for HVAC systems, provide details of the following:a.Mechanical equipment rooms. b. Crawl space.c.Hangers, inserts, supports, and bracing. c.Pipe sleeves. d.Duct or equipment penetrations of floors, walls, ceilings, or roofs.I.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Submit under the pertinent section rather than under this section. 1.Submit belt drive with the driven equipment. Submit selection data for specific drives when requested by the COTR. 2.Submit electric motor data and variable speed drive data with the driven equipment. 3.Equipment and materials identification. 4.Fire-stopping materials. 5.Hangers, inserts, supports and bracing. Provide load calculations for variable spring and constant support hangers. 6.Wall, floor, and ceiling plates. J.HVAC Maintenance Data and Operating Instructions: 1.Maintenance and operating manuals in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, INSTRUCTIONS, for systems and equipment. 2.Provide a listing of recommended replacement parts for keeping in stock supply, including sources of supply, for equipment. Include in the listing belts for equipment: Belt manufacturer, model number, size and style, and distinguished whether of multiple belt sets. K.Boiler Plant Maintenance Data and Operating Instructions:1.Provide four bound copies. Deliver to COTR not less than 30 days prior to completion of a phase or final inspection.2.Include all new and temporary equipment and all elements of each assembly.3.Data sheet on each device listing model, size, capacity, pressure, speed, horsepower, pump impeller size, other data.4.Manufacturer’s installation, maintenance, repair, and operation instructions for each device. Include assembly drawings and parts lists. Include operating precautions and reasons for precautions.5.Lubrication instructions including type and quantity of lubricant.6.Schematic diagrams and wiring diagrams of all control systems corrected to include all field modifications.7.Description of boiler firing and operating sequence including description of relay and interlock positions at each part of the sequence. 8.Set points of all interlock devices.9.Trouble-shooting guide for control systems.10.Operation of the combustion control system.11.Emergency procedures.12. Control system programming information for parameters, such as set points, that do not require services of an experienced technician.L.Provide copies of approved HVAC equipment submittals to the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Subcontractor. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI): 43099Central Station AirHandling Units C.American National Standard Institute (ANSI): B31.12004Power Piping D.Rubber Manufacturers Association (ANSI/RMA): IP202007Drives Using Classical VBelts and SheavesIP211991(1997)Drives Using Double-V (Hexagonal) Belts IP222007Drives Using Narrow VBelts and Sheaves E.Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA): 41096Recommended Safety Practices for Air Moving Devices F.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC): Section I-2007Power BoilersSection IX-2007Welding and Brazing Qualifications Code for Pressure Piping:B31.1-2004Power Piping, with AmendmentsG.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A36/A36M-05Carbon Structural SteelA575-96(2002)Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades R (2002)E84-07Standard Test Method for Burning Characteristics of Building Materials E11907Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials H.Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc: SP582002Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design and Manufacture SP 69-2003Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and ApplicationSP 127-2001Bracing for Piping Systems, Seismic – Wind – Dynamic, Design, Selection, ApplicationJ. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):MG-1-2006Motors and GeneratorsK.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 31-06Standard for Installation of Oil-Burning Equipment54-06National Fuel Gas Code70-08National Electrical Code85-07Boiler and Combustion Systems Hazard Code90A02Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 10106Life Safety Code 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Protection of Equipment: 1.Equipment and material placed on the job site shall remain in the custody of the Contractor until phased acceptance, whether or not the Government has reimbursed the Contractor for the equipment and material. The Contractor is solely responsible for the protection of such equipment and material against any damage.2.Place damaged equipment in first class, new operating condition; or, replace same as determined and directed by the COTR. Such repair or replacement shall be at no additional cost to the Government.3.Protect interiors of new equipment and piping systems against entry of foreign matter. Clean both inside and outside before painting or placing equipment in operation.4.Existing equipment and piping being worked on by the Contractor shall be under the custody and responsibility of the Contractor and shall be protected as required for new work.B.Cleanliness of Piping and Equipment Systems:1.Exercise care in storage and handling of equipment and piping material to be incorporated in the work. Remove debris arising from cutting, threading and welding of piping.2.Piping systems shall be flushed, blown or pigged as necessary to deliver clean systems.3.Clean interior of all tanks prior to delivery for beneficial use by the Government.4.Boilers shall be left clean following final internal inspection by Government insurance representative or inspector.5.Contractor shall be fully responsible for all costs, damage, and delay arising from failure to provide clean systems.1.7 JOB CONDITIONS – work in existing boiler plantA.Plant Operation: Government employees will be continuously operating and managing all plant facilities, including temporary facilities, that serve the steam and condensate requirements of the medical center. B.Maintenance of Steam Supply and Condensate Return Service: Schedule all work to permit continuous steam and condensate service at pressures and flow rates as required by the medical center. At all times there shall be one spare boiler available and one spare pump for each service available, in addition to those required for serving the load demand. The spare boiler and pumps must be capable of handling the loads that may be imposed if the operating boiler or pump fails. C.Steam and Condensate Service Interruptions: Limited steam and condensate service interruptions, as required for interconnections of new and existing systems, will be permitted by the COTR during periods when the steam demands are not critical to the operation of the medical center. These non-critical periods are limited to between 8 pm and 5 am during the non-heating season. Provide at least one week advance notice to the COTR. D.Phasing of Work: Comply with all requirements shown on drawings or specified.E.Plant Working Environment: Maintain the architectural and structural integrity of the plant building and the working environment at all times. Maintain the interior of plant at 18 degrees C (65 degrees F) minimum. Limit the opening of doors, windows or other access openings to brief periods as necessary for rigging purposes. No storm water or ground water leakage permitted. Provide daily cleanup of construction and demolition debris on all floor surfaces and on all equipment being operated by VA. F.Acceptance of Work for Government Operation: As new facilities are made available for operation and these facilities are of beneficial use to the Government, inspections will be made and tests will be performed. Based on the inspections, a list of contract deficiencies will be issued to the Contractor. After correction of deficiencies as necessary for beneficial use, the Contracting Officer will process necessary acceptance and the equipment will then be under the control and operation of Government personnel.PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FACTORY-ASSEMBLED PRODUCTSA.Provide maximum standardization of components to reduce spare part requirements.B.Manufacturers of equipment assemblies that include components made by others shall assume complete responsibility for final assembled unit.1.All components of an assembled unit need not be products of same manufacturer.2.Constituent parts that are alike shall be products of a single manufacturer.ponents shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for intended service.4.Contractor shall guarantee performance of assemblies of components, and shall repair or replace elements of the assemblies as required to deliver specified performance of the complete assembly.ponents of equipment shall bear manufacturer's name and trademark, model number, serial number and performance data on a name plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place, or cast integral with, stamped or otherwise permanently marked upon the components of the equipment.D.Major items of equipment, which serve the same function, must be the same make and model. Exceptions will be permitted if performance requirements cannot be met.2.2 COMPATIBILITY OF RELATED EQUIPMENT Equipment and materials installed shall be compatible in all respects with other items being furnished and with existing items so that the result will be a complete and fully operational plant that conforms to contract requirements.2.3 BELT DRIVES A.Type: ANSI/RMA standard Vbelts with proper motor pulley and driven sheave. Belts shall be constructed of reinforced cord and rubber. B.Dimensions, rating and selection standards: ANSI/RMA IP20 and IP21. C.Minimum Horsepower Rating: Motor horsepower plus recommended ANSI/RMA service factor (not less than 20 percent) in addition to the ANSI/RMA allowances for pitch diameter, center distance, and arc of contact. D.Maximum Speed: 25 m/s (5000 feet per minute). E.Adjustment Provisions: For alignment and ANSI/RMA standard allowances for installation and takeup. F.Drives may utilize a single VBelt (any cross section) when it is the manufacturer's standard. G.Multiple Belts: Matched to ANSI/RMA specified limits by measurement on a belt measuring fixture. Seal matched sets together to prevent mixing or partial loss of sets. Replacement, when necessary, shall be an entire set of new matched belts. H.Sheaves and Pulleys:1.Material: Pressed steel, or close grained cast iron. 2.Bore: Fixed or bushing type for securing to shaft with keys. 3.Balanced: Statically and dynamically. 4.Groove spacing for driving and driven pulleys shall be the same. 5.Minimum Diameter of VBelt Sheaves (ANSI/RMA recommendations)in millimeters and inches:Fractional HorsepowerStandardHigh CapacityCross SectionMin. odmm (in)Cross SectionMin. odmm (in)Cross SectionMin. odmm (in)2L20 (0.8)A83 (3.25)3V67 (2.65)3L38 (1.5)B146 (5.75)4V180 (7.10)4L64 (2.5)C239 (9.40)5V318 (12.50)5L89 (3.5)D345 (13.60)E554 (21.80)I.Drive Types, Based on ARI 435: 1.Provide adjustablepitch or fixedpitch drive as follows: a.Fan speeds up to 1800 RPM: 7.5 kW (10 horsepower) and smaller. b.Fan speeds over 1800 RPM: 2.2 kW (3 horsepower) and smaller. 2.Provide fixedpitch drives for drives larger than those listed above. 3.The final fan speeds required to just meet the system CFM and pressure requirements, without throttling, shall be determined by adjustment of a temporary adjustablepitch motor sheave or by fan law calculation if a fixedpitch drive is used initially. 2.4 DRIVE GUARDS A.For machinery and equipment, provide guards as shown in AMCA 410 for belts, chains, couplings, pulleys, sheaves, shafts, gears and other moving parts regardless of height above the floor to prevent damage to equipment and injury to personnel. Drive guards may be excluded where motors and drives are inside factory fabricated air handling unit casings. B.Pump shafts and couplings shall be fully guarded by a sheet steel guard, covering coupling and shaft but not bearings. Material shall be minimum 16-gage sheet steel; ends shall be braked and drilled and attached to pump base with minimum of four 6 mm (1/4-inch) bolts. Reinforce guard as necessary to prevent side play forcing guard onto couplings.C.V-belt and sheave assemblies shall be totally enclosed, firmly mounted, non-resonant. Guard shall be an assembly of minimum 22-gage sheet steel and expanded or perforated metal to permit observation of belts. 25 mm (one-inch) diameter hole shall be provided at each shaft centerline to permit speed measurement.D.Materials: Sheet steel, cast iron, expanded metal or wire mesh rigidly secured so as to be removable without disassembling pipe, duct, or electrical connections to equipment. E.Access for Speed Measurement: 25 mm (One inch) diameter hole at each shaft center. 2.5 LIFTING ATTACHMENTS Provide equipment with suitable lifting attachments to enable equipment to be lifted in its normal position. Lifting attachments shall withstand any handling conditions that might be encountered, without bending or distortion of shape, such as rapid lowering and braking of load.2.6 ELECTRIC MOTORS A.All material and equipment furnished and installation methods shall conform to the requirements of Section 23 05 12, GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION EQUIPMENT; Section 26 29 11, LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR STARTERS; and, Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW). Provide all electrical wiring, conduit, and devices necessary for the proper connection, protection and operation of the systems. Provide special energy efficient motors as scheduled. Unless otherwise specified for a particular application use electric motors with the following requirements. B.Singlephase Motors: Capacitorstart type for hard starting applications. Motors for centrifugal fans and pumps may be split phase or permanent split capacitor (PSC). C.Poly-phase Motors: NEMA Design B, Squirrel cage, induction type. Each two-speed motor shall have two separate windings. Provide a time- delay (20 seconds minimum) relay for switching from high to low speed.D.Rating: Continuous duty at 100 percent capacity in an ambient temperature of 40 degrees centigrade (104 degrees F); minimum horsepower as shown on drawings; maximum horsepower in normal operation not to exceed nameplate rating without service factor. E.Special Requirements:1.Where motor power requirements of equipment furnished deviate from power shown on plans, provide electrical service designed under the requirements of NFPA 70 without additional time or cost to the Government.2.Assemblies of motors, starters, controls and interlocks on factory assembled and wired devices shall be in accordance with the requirements of this specification.3.Wire and cable materials specified in the electrical division of the specifications shall be modified as follows:a.Wiring material located where temperatures can exceed 71 degrees C (160 degrees F) shall be stranded copper with Teflon FEP insulation with jacket. This includes wiring on the boilers.b.Other wiring at boilers and to control panels shall be NFPA 70 designation THWN.c.Provide shielded conductors or wiring in separate conduits for all instrumentation and control systems where recommended by manufacturer of equipment.4.Select motor sizes so that the motors do not operate into the service factor at maximum required loads on the driven equipment. Motors on pumps shall be sized for non-overloading at all points on the pump performance curves.5.Motors utilized with variable frequency drives shall be rated “inverter-ready” per NEMA Standard, MG1, Part 31.4.4.2. Provide motor shaft grounding apparatus that will protect bearings from damage from stray currents.F.Motor Efficiency and Power Factor: All motors, when specified as “high efficiency” by the project specifications on driven equipment, shall conform to efficiency and power factor requirements in Section 23 05 12, GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION EQUIPMENT, with no consideration of annual service hours. Motor manufacturers generally define these efficiency requirements as “NEMA premium efficient” and the requirements generally exceed those of the Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPACT). Motors not specified as “high efficiency” shall comply with EPACT.G.Insulation Resistance: Not less than onehalf meg-ohm between stator conductors and frame, to be determined at the time of final inspection. 2.7 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS IDENTIFICATION A.Use symbols, nomenclature and equipment numbers specified, shown on the drawings and shown in the maintenance manuals. Identification for piping is specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING. B.Interior (Indoor) Equipment: Engraved nameplates, with letters not less than 48 mm (3/16inch) high of brass with blackfilled letters, or rigid black plastic with white letters specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING permanently fastened to the equipment. Identify unit components such as coils, filters, fans, etc. C.Exterior (Outdoor) Equipment: Brass nameplates, with engraved black filled letters, not less than 48 mm (3/16inch) high riveted or bolted to the equipment. D.Control Items: Label all temperature and humidity sensors, controllers and control dampers. Identify and label each item as they appear on the control diagrams. E.Valve Tags and Lists: 1.HVAC and Boiler Plant: Provide for all valves other than for equipment in Section 23 82 00, CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS. 2.Valve tags: Engraved black filled numbers and letters not less than 13 mm (1/2inch) high for number designation, and not less than 6.4 mm(1/4inch) for service designation on 19 gage 38 mm (11/2 inches) round brass disc, attached with brass "S" hook or brass chain. 3.Valve lists: Typed or printed plastic coated card(s), sized 216 mm(81/2 inches) by 280 mm (11 inches) showing tag number, valve function and area of control, for each service or system. Punch sheets for a 3ring notebook.4.Provide detailed plan for each floor of the building indicating the location and valve number for each valve. Identify location of each valve with a color coded thumb tack in ceiling.2.8 FIRESTOPPING Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING specifies an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases where penetrations occur for piping and ductwork. Refer to Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION, for firestop pipe and duct insulation. 2.9 GALVANIZED REPAIR COMPOUNDMil. Spec. DODP21035B, paint form. 2.10 hvac PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTS A.Vibration Isolators: Refer to Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.B.Not Used.C.Supports for Roof Mounted Items: 1.Equipment: Equipment rails shall be galvanized steel, minimum 1.3 mm (18 gauge), with integral baseplate, continuous welded corner seams, factory installed 50 mm by 100 mm (2 by 4) treated wood nailer, 1.3 mm (18 gauge) galvanized steel counter flashing cap with screws, builtin cant strip, (except for gypsum or tectum deck), minimum height 280 mm (11 inches). For surface insulated roof deck, provide raised cant strip to start at the upper surface of the insulation. 2.Pipe/duct pedestals: Provide a galvanized Unistrut channel welded to Ushaped mounting brackets which are secured to side of rail with galvanized lag bolts. D.Pipe Supports: Comply with MSS SP58. Type Numbers specified refer to this standard. For selection and application comply with MSS SP69. Refer to Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS, for miscellaneous metal support materials and prime coat painting requirements. E.Attachment to Concrete Building Construction:1.Concrete insert: MSS SP-58, Type 18. 2.Selfdrilling expansion shields and machine bolt expansion anchors: Permitted in concrete not less than 102 mm (four inches) thick when approved by the COTR for each job condition.3.Powerdriven fasteners: Permitted in existing concrete or masonry not less than 102 mm (four inches) thick when approved by the COTR for each job condition. F.Attachment to Steel Building Construction: 1.Welded attachment: MSS SP58, Type 22. 2.Beam clamps: MSS SP-58, Types 20, 21, 28 or 29. Type 23 Cclamp may be used for individual copper tubing up to 23mm (7/8inch) outside diameter. G.Attachment to Wood Construction: Wood screws or lag bolts. H.Hanger Rods: Hotrolled steel, ASTM A36 or A575 for allowable load listed in MSS SP58. For piping, provide adjustment means for controlling level or slope. Types 13 or 15 turnbuckles shall provide 38 mm (11/2 inches) minimum of adjustment and incorporate locknuts. Allthread rods are acceptable. I.Hangers Supporting Multiple Pipes (Trapeze Hangers): Galvanized, cold formed, lipped steel channel horizontal member, not less than 41 mm by 41 mm (15/8 inches by 15/8 inches), 2.7 mm (No. 12 gage), designed to accept special spring held, hardened steel nuts. Not permitted for steam supply and condensate piping. 1.Allowable hanger load: Manufacturers rating less 91kg (200 pounds). 2.Guide individual pipes on the horizontal member of every other trapeze hanger with 6 mm (1/4inch) Ubolt fabricated from steel rod. Provide Type 40 insulation shield, secured by two 13mm (1/2inch) galvanized steel bands, or preinsulated calcium silicate shield for insulated piping at each hanger. J.Supports for Piping Systems:1.Select hangers sized to encircle insulation on insulated piping. Refer to Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION for insulation thickness. To protect insulation, provide Type 39 saddles for roller type supports or preinsulated calcium silicate shields. Provide Type 40 insulation shield or preinsulated calcium silicate shield at all other types of supports and hangers including those for preinsulated piping.2.Piping Systems except High and Medium Pressure Steam (MSS SP58): a.Standard clevis hanger: Type 1; provide locknut. b.Riser clamps: Type 8. c.Wall brackets: Types 31, 32 or 33. d.Roller supports: Type 41, 43, 44 and 46. e.Saddle support: Type 36, 37 or 38. f.Turnbuckle: Types 13 or 15. Preinsulate.g.Ubolt clamp: Type 24. h.Copper Tube: 1)Hangers, clamps and other support material in contact with tubing shall be painted with copper colored epoxy paint, plastic coated or taped with non adhesive isolation tape to prevent electrolysis.2)For vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps.3)For supporting tube to strut: Provide epoxy painted pipe straps for copper tube or plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps.4)Insulated Lines: Provide pre-insulated calcium silicate shields sized for copper tube.i.Supports for plastic or glass piping: As recommended by the pipe manufacturer with black rubber tape extending one inch beyond steel support or clamp. K.Pre-insulated Calcium Silicate Shields:1.Provide 360 degree water resistant high density 965 kPa (140 psi) compressive strength calcium silicate shields encased in galvanized metal.2.Pre-insulated calcium silicate shields to be installed at the point of support during erection.3.Shield thickness shall match the pipe insulation.4.The type of shield is selected by the temperature of the pipe, the load it must carry, and the type of support it will be used with.a.Shields for supporting chilled or cold water shall have insulation that extends a minimum of 1 inch past the sheet metal. Provide for an adequate vapor barrier in chilled lines.b.The pre-insulated calcium silicate shield shall support the maximum allowable water filled span as indicated in MSS-SP 69. To support the load, the shields may have one or more of the following features: structural inserts 4138 kPa (600 psi) compressive strength, an extra bottom metal shield, or formed structural steel (ASTM A36) wear plates welded to the bottom sheet metal jacket.Shields may be used on steel clevis hanger type supports, roller supports or flat surfaces.2.14 PIPE PENETRATIONSA.Install sleeves during construction for other than blocked out floor openings for risers in mechanical bays. B.To prevent accidental liquid spills from passing to a lower level, provide the following: 1.For sleeves: Extend sleeve 25 mm (one inch) above finished floor and provide sealant for watertight joint. 2.For blocked out floor openings: Provide 40 mm (11/2 inch) angle set in silicone adhesive around opening. 3.For drilled penetrations: Provide 40 mm (11/2 inch) angle ring or square set in silicone adhesive around penetration. C.Penetrations are not allowed through beams or ribs, but may be installed in concrete beam flanges. Any deviation from these requirements must receive prior approval of COTR. D.Sheet Metal, Plastic, or Moistureresistant Fiber Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through floors, interior walls, and partitions, unless brass or steel pipe sleeves are specifically called for below.E.Cast Iron or Zinc Coated Pipe Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through exterior walls below grade. Make space between sleeve and pipe watertight with a modular or link rubber seal. Seal shall be applied at both ends of sleeve. F.Galvanized Steel or an alternate Black Iron Pipe with asphalt coating Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through concrete beam flanges, except where brass pipe sleeves are called for. Provide sleeve for pipe passing through floor of mechanical rooms, laundry work rooms, and animal rooms above basement. Except in mechanical rooms, connect sleeve with floor plate. G.Brass Pipe Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through quarry tile, terrazzo or ceramic tile floors. Connect sleeve with floor plate. H.Sleeves are not required for wall hydrants for fire department connections or in drywall construction. I.Sleeve Clearance: Sleeve through floors, walls, partitions, and beam flanges shall be one inch greater in diameter than external diameter of pipe. Sleeve for pipe with insulation shall be large enough to accommodate the insulation. Interior openings shall be caulked tight with fire stopping material and sealant to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and gases. J.Sealant and Adhesives: Shall be as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS. 2.15 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS A.Furnish, and turn over to the COTR, special tools not readily available commercially, that are required for disassembly or adjustment of equipment and machinery furnished. B.Grease Guns with Attachments for Applicable Fittings: One for each type of grease required for each motor or other equipment. C.Tool Containers: Hardwood or metal, permanently identified for in tended service and mounted, or located, where directed by the COTR. D.Lubricants: A minimum of 0.95 L (one quart) of oil, and 0.45 kg (one pound) of grease, of equipment manufacturer's recommended grade and type, in unopened containers and properly identified as to use for each different application. 2.16 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES A.Material and Type: Chrome plated brass or chrome plated steel, one piece or split type with concealed hinge, with set screw for fastening to pipe, or sleeve. Use plates that fit tight around pipes, cover openings around pipes and cover the entire pipe sleeve projection. B.Thickness: Not less than 2.4 mm (3/32inch) for floor plates. For wall and ceiling plates, not less than 0.64 mm (0.025-inch) for up to 80 mm (3inch pipe), 0.89 mm (0.035-inch) for larger pipe. C.Locations: Use where pipe penetrates floors, walls and ceilings in exposed locations, in finished areas only. Use also where insulation ends on exposed water supply pipe drop from overhead. Provide a watertight joint in spaces where brass or steel pipe sleeves are specified. 2.17 ASBESTOSMaterials containing asbestos are not permitted.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ARRANGEMENT AND INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING A.Coordinate location of piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, ductwork and equipment. Locate piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, ductwork and equipment clear of windows, doors, openings, light outlets, and other services and utilities. Prepare equipment layout drawings to coordinate proper location and personnel access of all facilities. Submit the drawings for review as required by Part 1. Follow manufacturer's published recommendations for installation methods not otherwise specified. B.Operating Personnel Access and Observation Provisions: Select and arrange all equipment and systems to provide clear view and easy access, without use of portable ladders, for maintenance and operation of all devices including, but not limited to: all equipment items, valves, filters, strainers, transmitters, sensors, control devices. All gages and indicators shall be clearly visible by personnel standing on the floor or on permanent platforms. Do not reduce or change maintenance and operating space and access provisions that are shown on the drawings. C.Equipment and Piping Support: Coordinate structural systems necessary for pipe and equipment support with pipe and equipment locations to permit proper installation.D.Location of pipe sleeves, trenches and chases shall be accurately coordinated with equipment and piping locations.E.Cutting Holes:1.Cut holes through concrete and masonry by rotary core drill. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, and hand or manual hammer type drill will not be allowed, except as permitted by COTR where working area space is limited.2.Locate holes to avoid interference with structural members such as beams or grade beams. Holes shall be laid out in advance and drilling done only after approval by COTR. If the Contractor considers it necessary to drill through structural members, this matter shall be referred to COTR for approval.3.Do not penetrate membrane waterproofing.F.Interconnection of Instrumentation or Control Devices: Generally, electrical and pneumatic interconnections are not shown but must be provided.G.Minor Piping: Generally, small diameter pipe runs from drips and drains, water cooling, and other service are not shown but must be provided.H.Electrical and Pneumatic Interconnection of Controls and Instruments: This generally not shown but must be provided. This includes interconnections of sensors, transmitters, transducers, control devices, control and instrumentation panels, instruments and computer workstations. Comply with NFPA-70.I.Protection and Cleaning: 1.Equipment and materials shall be carefully handled, properly stored, and adequately protected to prevent damage before and during installation, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the COTR. Damaged or defective items in the opinion of the COTR, shall be replaced. 2.Protect all finished parts of equipment, such as shafts and bearings where accessible, from rust prior to operation by means of protective grease coating and wrapping. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. Tightly cover and protect fixtures and equipment against dirt, water chemical, or mechanical injury. At completion of all work thoroughly clean fixtures, exposed materials and equipment. J.Concrete and Grout: Use concrete and shrink compensating grout 25 MPa (3000 psi) minimum, specified in Section 03 30 00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. K.Install gages, thermometers, valves and other devices with due regard for ease in reading or operating and maintaining said devices. Locate and position thermometers and gages to be easily read by operator or staff standing on floor or walkway provided. Servicing shall not require dismantling adjacent equipment or pipe work. L.Install steam piping expansion joints as per manufacturer’s recommendations.M.Work in Existing Building: 1.Perform as specified in Article, OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS, Article, ALTERATIONS, and Article, RESTORATION of the Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS for relocation of existing equipment, alterations and restoration of existing building(s). 2.As specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS, make alterations to existing service piping at times that will least interfere with normal operation of the facility. 3.Cut required openings through existing masonry and reinforced concrete using diamond core drills. Use of pneumatic hammer type drills, impact type electric drills, and hand or manual hammer type drills, will be permitted only with approval of the COTR. Locate openings that will least effect structural slabs, columns, ribs or beams. Refer to the COTR for determination of proper design for openings through structural sections and opening layouts approval, prior to cutting or drilling into structure. After COTR's approval, carefully cut opening through construction no larger than absolutely necessary for the required installation. N.Inaccessible Equipment:1.Where the Government determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, equipment shall be removed and reinstalled or remedial action performed as directed at no additional cost to the Government.2.The term "conveniently accessible" is defined as capable of being reached without the use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as motors, fans, pumps, belt guards, transformers, high voltage lines, piping, and ductwork.3.2 TEMPORARY PIPING AND EQUIPMENTA.Continuity of operation of existing facilities will generally require temporary installation or relocation of equipment and piping.B.The Contractor shall provide all required facilities in accordance with the requirements of phased construction and maintenance of service. All piping and equipment shall be properly supported, sloped to drain, operate without excessive stress, and shall be insulated where injury can occur to personnel by contact with operating facilities. The requirements of Para. 3.1 apply.C.Temporary facilities and piping shall be completely removed and any openings in structures sealed. Provide necessary blind flanges and caps to seal open piping remaining in service.3.3 RIGGINGA.Design is based on application of available equipment. Openings in building structures are planned to accommodate design scheme.B.Alternative methods of equipment delivery may be offered by Contractor and will be considered by Government under specified restrictions of phasing and maintenance of service as well as structural integrity of the building.C.Close all openings in the building when not required for rigging operations to maintain proper environment in the facility for Government operation and maintenance of service. D.Contractor shall provide all facilities required to deliver specified equipment and place on foundations. Attachments to structures for rigging purposes and support of equipment on structures shall be Contractor's full responsibility. Upon request, the Government will check structure adequacy and advise Contractor of recommended restrictions.E.Contractor shall check all clearances, weight limitations and shall offer a rigging plan designed by a Registered Professional Engineer. All modifications to structures, including reinforcement thereof, shall be at Contractor's cost, time and responsibility.F.Rigging plan and methods shall be referred to COTR for evaluation prior to actual work.G.Restore building to original condition upon completion of rigging work.3.4 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A.Where hanger spacing does not correspond with joist or rib spacing, use structural steel channels secured directly to joist and rib structure that will correspond to the required hanger spacing, and then suspend the equipment and piping from the channels. Drill or burn holes in structural steel only with the prior approval of the COTR. B.Use of chain, wire or strap hangers; wood for blocking, stays and bracing; or, hangers suspended from piping above will not be permitted. Replace or thoroughly clean rusty products and paint with zinc primer. C.Use hanger rods that are straight and vertical. Turnbuckles for vertical adjustments may be omitted where limited space prevents use. Provide a minimum of 15 mm (1/2inch) clearance between pipe or piping covering and adjacent work. D.HVAC Horizontal Pipe Support Spacing: Refer to MSS SP69. Provide additional supports at valves, strainers, inline pumps and other heavy components. Provide a support within one foot of each elbow. E.HVAC Vertical Pipe Supports: 1.Up to 150 mm (6inch pipe), 9 m (30 feet) long, bolt riser clamps to the pipe below couplings, or welded to the pipe and rests supports securely on the building structure. 2.Vertical pipe larger than the foregoing, support on base elbows or tees, or substantial pipe legs extending to the building structure. F.Overhead Supports:1.The basic structural system of the building is designed to sustain the loads imposed by equipment and piping to be supported overhead.2.Provide steel structural members, in addition to those shown, of adequate capability to support the imposed loads, located in accordance with the final approved layout of equipment and piping.3.Tubing and capillary systems shall be supported in channel troughs.G.Floor Supports:1.Provide concrete bases, concrete anchor blocks and pedestals, and structural steel systems for support of equipment and piping. Anchor and dowel concrete bases and structural systems to resist forces under operating and seismic conditions (if applicable) without excessive displacement or structural failure.2.Do not locate or install bases and supports until equipment mounted thereon has been approved. Size bases to match equipment mounted thereon plus 50 mm (2 inch) excess on all edges. Boiler foundations shall have horizontal dimensions that exceed boiler base frame dimensions by at least 150 mm (6 inches) on all sides. Refer to structural drawings. Bases shall be neatly finished and smoothed, shall have chamfered edges at the top, and shall be suitable for painting.3.All equipment shall be shimmed, leveled, firmly anchored, and grouted with epoxy grout. Anchor bolts shall be placed in sleeves, anchored to the bases. Fill the annular space between sleeves and bolts with a granular material to permit alignment and realignment.3.5 MECHANICAL DEMOLITIONA.Rigging access, other than indicated on the drawings, shall be provided by the Contractor after approval for structural integrity by the COTR. Such access shall be provided without additional cost or time to the Government. Where work is in an operating plant, provide approved protection from dust and debris at all times for the safety of plant personnel and maintenance of plant operation and environment of the plant.B.In an operating plant, maintain the operation, cleanliness and safety. Government personnel will be carrying on their normal duties of operating, cleaning and maintaining equipment and plant operation. Confine the work to the immediate area concerned; maintain cleanliness and wet down demolished materials to eliminate dust. Do not permit debris to accumulate in the area to the detriment of plant operation. Perform all flame cutting to maintain the fire safety integrity of this plant. Adequate fire extinguishing facilities shall be available at all times. Perform all work in accordance with recognized fire protection standards. Inspection will be made by personnel of the VA Medical Center, and Contractor shall follow all directives of the RE or COTR with regard to rigging, safety, fire safety, and maintenance of operations.pletely remove all piping, wiring, conduit, and other devices associated with the equipment not to be re-used in the new work. This includes all pipe, valves, fittings, insulation, and all hangers including the top connection and any fastenings to building structural systems. Seal all openings, after removal of equipment, pipes, ducts, and other penetrations in roof, walls, floors, in an approved manner and in accordance with plans and specifications where specifically covered. Structural integrity of the building system shall be maintained. Reference shall also be made to the drawings and specifications of the other disciplines in the project for additional facilities to be demolished or handled.D.All valves including gate, globe, ball, butterfly and check, all pressure gages and thermometers with wells shall remain Government property and shall be removed and delivered to COTR and stored as directed. The Contractor shall remove all other material and equipment, devices and demolition debris under these plans and specifications. Such material shall be removed from Government property expeditiously and shall not be allowed to accumulate.E.Asbestos Insulation Removal: Conform to Section 02 82 11, TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT.3.6 CLEANING AND PAINTINGA.Prior to final inspection and acceptance of the plant and facilities for beneficial use by the Government, the plant facilities, equipment and systems shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted. Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.B.In addition, the following special conditions apply:Cleaning shall be thorough. Use solvents, cleaning materials and methods recommended by the manufacturers for the specific tasks. Remove all rust prior to painting and from surfaces to remain unpainted. Repair scratches, scuffs, and abrasions prior to applying prime and finish coats. Material And Equipment Not To Be Painted Includes:a.Motors, controllers, control switches, and safety switches.b.Control and interlock devices.c.Regulators.d.Pressure reducing valves.e.Control valves and thermostatic elements.f.Lubrication devices and grease fittings.g.Copper, brass, aluminum, stainless steel and bronze surfaces.h.Valve stems and rotating shafts.i.Pressure gauges and thermometers.j.Glass.k.Name plates.3.Final result shall be smooth, even-colored, even-textured factory finish on all items. Completely repaint the entire piece of equipment if necessary to achieve this.3.7 IDENTIFICATION SIGNSA.Provide laminated plastic signs, with engraved lettering not less than 5?mm (3/16-inch) high, designating functions, for all equipment, switches, motor controllers, relays, meters, control devices, including automatic control valves. Nomenclature and identification symbols shall correspond to that used in maintenance manual, and in diagrams specified elsewhere. Attach by chain, adhesive, or screws.B.Factory Built Equipment: Metal plate, securely attached, with name and address of manufacturer, serial number, model number, size, performance.C.Not Used.D.Not Used.E.Pipe Identification: Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.3.8 MOTOR AND DRIVE ALIGNMENT A.Belt Drive: Set driving and driven shafts parallel and align so that the corresponding grooves are in the same plane. B.Directconnect Drive: Securely mount motor in accurate alignment so that shafts are free from both angular and parallel misalignment when both motor and driven machine are operating at normal temperatures. 3.9 LUBRICATION A.Lubricate all devices requiring lubrication prior to initial operation. Field-check all devices for proper lubrication.B.Equip all devices with required lubrication fittings or devices. Provide a minimum of one liter (one quart) of oil and 0.5 kg (one pound) of grease of manufacturer's recommended grade and type for each different application; also provide 12 grease sticks for lubricated plug valves. Deliver all materials to COTR in unopened containers that are properly identified as to application.C.Provide a separate grease gun with attachments for applicable fittings for each type of grease applied.D.All lubrication points shall be accessible without disassembling equipment, except to remove access plates.3.10 STARTUP AND TEMPORARY OPERATION Start up equipment as described in equipment specifications. Verify that vibration is within specified tolerance prior to extended operation. Temporary use of equipment is specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, TEMPORARY USE OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. 3.11 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS A.Prior to the final inspection, perform required tests as specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, TESTS.B.Should evidence of malfunction in any tested system, or piece of equipment or component part thereof, occur during or as a result of tests, make proper corrections, repairs or replacements, and repeat tests at no additional cost to the Government. C.When completion of certain work or system occurs at a time when final control settings and adjustments cannot be properly made to make performance tests, then make performance tests for heating systems and for cooling systems respectively during first actual seasonal use of respective systems following completion of work. 3.12 DEMONSTRATIONS AND TESTS, TEMPORARY boiler plant EQUIPMENTA.Test prior to placing in service.B.Demonstrate to COTR the proper operation of all equipment, instruments, operating and safety controls, and devices.C.Demonstrate to COTR the proper operation of burners.1.Emissions within limits specified for new boilers on this project.2.Stable flame at all operating points with no pulsations.3.Smooth flame light off, with no delays, puffs or flashbacks.4.Turndown capability as specified.D.Develop full steam output capacity required.E.New Boilers Installed in Temporary Location:1.Perform all tests required by boiler specification.2.Perform complete retest after boiler is placed in its permanent location.3.13 INSTRUCTIONS TO VA PERSONNELProvide in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. E N D SECTION 23 05 11SECTION 23 05 12GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION EQUIPMENTPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION:This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of motors for HVAC and steam generation equipment. 1.2 RELATED WORK:A.Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General electrical requirements that are common to more than one Section of Division 26.B.Section 26 29 11, LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR STARTERS: Starters, control and protection for motors.C.Other sections specifying motor driven equipment in Division 23.1.3 SUBMITTALS:A.In accordance with Section, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS, submit the following: B.Shop Drawings: 1.Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2.Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, horsepower, RPM, enclosure, starting characteristics, torque characteristics, code letter, full load and locked rotor current, service factor, and lubrication method. C.Manuals: 1.Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance and operating manuals, including technical data sheets and application data. D.Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, unless otherwise noted, submit four copies of the following certification to the COTR: 1.Certification that the motors have been properly applied, installed, adjusted, lubricated, and tested. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:A.Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by designation only. B.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): MG 1-98Motors and Generators MG 2-01Safety Standard and Guide for Selection, Installation and Use of Electric Motors and Generators C.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-02National Electrical Code (NEC) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS:A.For alternating current, fractional and integral horsepower motors, NEMA Publications MG 1 and MG 2 shall apply. B.Voltage ratings shall be as follows: 1.Single phase: a.Motors connected to 120-volt systems: 115 volts. b.Motors connected to 208-volt systems: 200 volts. c.Motors connected to 240 volt or 480 volt systems: 230/460 volts, dual connection. C.Number of phases shall be as follows: All equipmentD.Horsepower ratings shall be adequate for operating the connected loads continuously in the prevailing ambient temperatures in areas where the motors are installed, without exceeding the NEMA standard temperature rises for the motor insulation. E.Motor designs, as indicated by the NEMA code letters, shall be coordinated with the connected loads to assure adequate starting and running torque. F.Motor Enclosures: 1.Shall be the NEMA types shown on the drawings for the motors. 2.Where the types of motor enclosures are not shown on the drawings, they shall be the NEMA types, which are most suitable for the environmental conditions where the motors are being installed. 3.Enclosures shall be primed and finish coated at the factory with manufacturer's prime coat and standard finish. G.Additional requirements for specific motors, as indicated in other sections, shall also apply. H.EnergyEfficient Motors (Motor Efficiencies): All permanently wired polyphase motors of 746 Watts or more shall meet the minimum full-load efficiencies as indicated in the following table, and as specified in this specification. Motors of 746 Watts or more with open, drip-proof or totally enclosed fan-cooled enclosures shall be NEMA premium efficiency type, unless otherwise indicated. Motors provided as an integral part of motor driven equipment are excluded from this requirement if a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency requirement is indicated for that equipment by the provisions of another section.Minimum EfficienciesOpen Drip-ProofMinimum EfficienciesTotally Enclosed Fan-CooledRatingkW (HP)1200 RPM1800 RPM3600 RPMRatingkW (HP)1200 RPM1800 RPM3600 RPM0.746 (1)82.5%85.5%77.0%0.746 (1)82.5%85.5%77.0%1.12 (1.5) 86.5%86.5%84.0%1.12 (1.5) 87.5%86.5%84.0%1.49 (2)87.5%86.5%85.5%1.49 (2)88.5%86.5%85.5%2.24 (3)88.5%89.5%85.5%2.24 (3)89.5%89.5%86.5%3.73 (5)89.5%89.5%86.5%3.73 (5)89.5%89.5%88.5%5.60 (7.5)90.2%91.0%88.5%5.60 (7.5)91.0%91.7%89.5%7.46 (10)91.7%91.7%89.5%7.46 (10)91.0%91.7%90.2%11.2 (15)91.7%93.0%90.2%11.2 (15)91.7%92.4%91.0%14.9 (20)92.4%93.0%91.0%14.9 (20)91.7%93.0%91.0%18.7 (25)93.0%93.6%91.7%18.7 (25)93.0%93.6%91.7%22.4 (30)93.6%94.1%91.7%22.4 (30)93.0%93.6%91.7%29.8 (40)94.1%94.1%92.4%29.8 (40)94.1%94.1%92.4%37.3 (50)94.1%94.5%93.0%37.3 (50)94.1%94.5%93.0%44.8 (60)94.5%95.0%93.6%44.8 (60)94.5%95.0%93.6%56.9 (75)94.5%95.0%93.6%56.9 (75)94.5%95.4%93.6%74.6 (100)95.0%95.4%93.6%74.6 (100)95.0%95.4%94.1%93.3 (125)95.0%95.4%94.1%93.3 (125)95.0%95.4%95.0%112 (150)95.4%95.8%94.1%112 (150)95.8%95.8%95.0%149.2 (200)95.4%95.8%95.0%149.2 (200)95.8%96.2%95.4%I.Minimum Power Factor at Full Load and Rated Voltage: 90 percent at 1200 RPM, 1800 RPM and 3600 RPM.J.Premium efficiency motors shall be used where energy cost/kW x (hours use/year) > 50.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION:Install motors in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, the NEC, NEMA, as shown on the drawings and/or as required by other sections of these specifications. 3.2 FIELD TESTS Megger all motors after installation, before start-up. All shall test free from grounds. E N D SECTION 23 05 12SECTION 23 05 41NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENTPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTIONNoise criteria, vibration tolerance and vibration isolation for HVAC and plumbing work. 1.2 RELATED WORKA.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division 23. B.Section 23 22 13, STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING: Requirements for flexible pipe connectors to reciprocating and rotating mechanical equipment.C.Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS: requirements for flexible duct connectors, sound attenuators and sound absorbing duct lining.D.SECTION 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC: requirements for sound and vibration tests. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA.Refer to article, QUALITY ASSURANCE in specification Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.B.Noise Criteria:1.Noise levels in all 8 octave bands due to equipment and duct systems shall not exceed following NC levels:Type Of RoomNC LEVELBathrooms and Toilet Rooms40Corridors(Public)40Kitchens50Offices, small private (2 or fewer occupants)352.For equipment which has no sound power ratings scheduled on the plans, the contractor shall select equipment such that the fore-going noise criteria, local ordinance noise levels, and OSHA requirements are not exceeded. Selection procedure shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, Chapter 7, Sound and Vibration.3.An allowance, not to exceed 5db, may be added to the measured value to compensate for the variation of the room attenuating effect between room test condition prior to occupancy and design condition after occupancy which may include the addition of sound absorbing material, such as, furniture. This allowance may not be taken after occupancy. The room attenuating effect is defined as the difference between sound power level emitted to room and sound pressure level in room.4.In absence of specified measurement requirements, measure equipment noise levels three feet from equipment and at an elevation of maximum noise generation.C.Allowable Vibration Tolerances for Rotating, Non-reciprocating Equipment: Not to exceed a self-excited vibration maximum velocity of 5 mm per second (0.20 inch per second) RMS, filter in, when measured with a vibration meter on bearing caps of machine in vertical, horizontal and axial directions or measured at equipment mounting feet if bearings are concealed. Measurements for internally isolated fans and motors may be made at the mounting feet.1.4 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with specification Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:1.Vibration isolators: a.Floor mountings b.Hangers c.Snubbers d.Thrust restraints 2.Bases.3.Acoustical enclosures.C.Isolator manufacturer shall furnish with submittal load calculations for selection of isolators, including supplemental bases, based on lowest operating speed of equipment supported. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE): 2005Fundamentals Handbook, Chapter 7, Sound and VibrationC.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A123/A123M-02Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel ProductsA307-04Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile StrengthD2240-05Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer HardnessD.Manufacturers Standardization (MSS):SP-58-02Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design and ManufactureE.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):29 CFR 1910.95Occupational Noise ExposurePART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 GENERAL RequirementsA.Type of isolator, base, and minimum static deflection shall be as required for each specific equipment application as recommended by isolator or equipment manufacturer but subject to minimum requirements indicated herein and in the schedule on the drawings.B.Elastometric Isolators shall comply with ASTM D2240 and be oil resistant neoprene with a maximum stiffness of 60 durometer and have a straight-line deflection curve.C.Exposure to weather: Isolators, including springs, exposed to weather shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Hot-dip zinc coating shall not be less than 609 grams per square meter (two ounces per square foot) by weight complying with ASTM A123.In addition provide limit stops to resist wind velocity. Comply with the design wind velocity of 75 mph.D.Uniform Loading: Select and locate isolators to produce uniform loading and deflection even when equipment weight is not evenly distributed. E.Color code isolators by type and size for easy identification of capacity. 2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A.Floor Mountings:1.Double Deflection Neoprene (Type N): Shall include neoprene covered steel support plated (top and bottom), friction pads, and necessary bolt holes.2.Spring Isolators (Type S): Shall be free-standing, laterally stable and include acoustical friction pads and leveling bolts. Isolators shall have a minimum ratio of spring diameter-to-operating spring height of 1.0 and an additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of rated deflection.3.Captive Spring Mount for Seismic Restraint (Type SS): a.Design mounts to resiliently resist seismic forces in all directions. Snubbing shall take place in all modes with adjustment to limit upward, downward, and horizontal travel to a maximum of 6 mm (1/4-inch) before contacting snubbers. Mountings shall have a minimum rating of one G coefficient of gravity as calculated and certified by a registered structural engineer.b.All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the rated deflection. Mountings shall have ports for spring inspection. Provide an all directional neoprene cushion collar around the equipment bolt.4.Spring Isolators with Vertical Limit Stops (Type SP): Similar to spring isolators noted above, except include a vertical limit stop to limit upward travel if weight is removed and also to reduce movement and spring extension due to wind loads. Provide clearance around restraining bolts to prevent mechanical short circuiting. 5.Pads (Type D), Washers (Type W), and Bushings (Type L): Pads shall be felt, cork, neoprene waffle, neoprene and cork sandwich, neoprene and fiberglass, neoprene and steel waffle, or reinforced duck and neoprene. Washers and bushings shall be reinforced duck and neoprene. Size pads for a maximum load of 345 kPa (50 pounds per square inch).6.Seismic Pad (Type DS): Pads shall be felt, cork neoprene waffle, neoprene and cork sandwich, neoprene and fiberglass, neoprene and steel waffle, or reinforced duck and neoprene, with steel top plate and drilled for an anchor bolt. Washers and bushings shall be reinforced duck and neoprene. Size pads for a maximum load of 345 kPa (50 pounds per square inch).B.Hangers: Shall be combination neoprene and springs unless otherwise noted and shall allow for expansion of pipe.bination Neoprene and Spring (Type H): Vibration hanger shall contain a spring and double deflection neoprene element in series. Spring shall have a diameter not less than 0.8 of compressed operating spring height. Spring shall have a minimum additional travel of 50 percent between design height and solid height. Spring shall permit a 15 degree angular misalignment without rubbing on hanger box.2.Spring Position Hanger (Type HP): Similar to combination neoprene and spring hanger except hanger shall hold piping at a fixed elevation during installation and include a secondary adjustment feature to transfer load to spring while maintaining same position.3.Neoprene (Type HN): Vibration hanger shall contain a double deflection type neoprene isolation element. Hanger rod shall be separated from contact with hanger bracket by a neoprene grommet.4.Spring (Type HS): Vibration hanger shall contain a coiled steel spring in series with a neoprene grommet. Spring shall have a diameter not less than 0.8 of compressed operating spring height. Spring shall have a minimum additional travel of 50 percent between design height and solid height. Spring shall permit a 15 degree angular misalignment without rubbing on hanger box.5.Hanger supports for piping 50 mm (2 inches) and larger shall have a pointer and scale deflection indicator.C.Snubbers: Each spring mounted base shall have a minimum of four all-directional or eight two directional (two per side) seismic snubbers that are double acting. Elastomeric materials shall be shock absorbent neoprene bridge quality bearing pads, maximum 60 durometer, replaceable and have a minimum thickness of 6 mm (1/4 inch). Air gap between hard and resilient material shall be not less than 3 mm (1/8 inch) nor more than 6 mm (1/4 inch). Restraints shall be capable of withstanding design load without permanent deformation.D.Thrust Restraints (Type THR): Restraints shall provide a spring element contained in a steel frame with neoprene pads at each end attachment. Restraints shall have factory preset thrust and be field adjustable to allow a maximum movement of 6 mm (1/4 inch) when the fan starts and stops. Restraint assemblies shall include rods, angle brackets and other hardware for field installation.2.4 BASES A.Rails (Type R): Design rails with isolator brackets to reduce mounting height of equipment and cradle machines having legs or bases that do not require a complete supplementary base. To assure adequate stiffness, height of members shall be a minimum of 1/12 of longest base dimension but not less than 100 mm (4 inches). Where rails are used with neoprene mounts for small fans or close coupled pumps, extend rails to compensate overhang of housing.B.Integral Structural Steel Base (Type B): Design base with isolator brackets to reduce mounting height of equipment which require a complete supplementary rigid base. To assure adequate stiffness, height of members shall be a minimum of 1/12 of longest base dimension, but not less than 100 mm (four inches).C.Inertia Base (Type I): Base shall be a reinforced concrete inertia base. Pour concrete into a welded steel channel frame, incorporating prelocated equipment anchor bolts and pipe sleeves. Level the concrete to provide a smooth uniform bearing surface for equipment mounting. Provide grout under uneven supports. Channel depth shall be a minimum of 1/12 of longest dimension of base but not less than 150 mm (six inches). Form shall include 13-mm (1/2-inch) reinforcing bars welded in place on minimum of 203 mm (eight inch) centers running both ways in a layer 40 mm (1-1/2 inches) above bottom. Use height saving brackets in all mounting locations. Weight of inertia base shall be equal to or greater than weight of equipment supported to provide a maximum peak-to-peak displacement of 2 mm (1/16 inch).D.Curb Mounted Isolation Base (Type CB): Fabricate from aluminum to fit on top of standard curb with overlap to allow water run-off and have wind and water seals which shall not interfere with spring action. Provide resilient snubbers with 6 mm (1/4 inch) clearance for wind resistance. Top and bottom bearing surfaces shall have sponge type weather seals. Integral spring isolators shall comply with Spring Isolator (Type S) requirements.2.5 SOUND ATTENUATING UNITS Refer to specification Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS.PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Vibration Isolation:1.No metal-to-metal contact will be permitted between fixed and floating parts.2.Connections to Equipment: Allow for deflections equal to or greater than equipment deflections. Electrical, drain, piping connections, and other items made to rotating or reciprocating equipment (pumps, compressors, etc.) which rests on vibration isolators, shall be isolated from building structure for first three hangers or supports.mon Foundation: Mount each electric motor on same foundation as driven machine. Hold driving motor and driven machine in positive rigid alignment with provision for adjusting motor alignment and belt tension. Bases shall be level throughout length and width. Provide shims to facilitate pipe connections, leveling, and bolting.4.Provide heat shields where elastomers are subject to temperatures over 38 degrees C (l00 degrees F).5.Extend bases for pipe elbow supports at discharge and suction connections at pumps. Pipe elbow supports shall not short circuit pump vibration to structure.6.Non-rotating equipment such as heat exchangers and convertors shall be mounted on isolation units having the same static deflection as the isolation hangers or support of the pipe connected to the equipment.B.Inspection and Adjustments: Check for vibration and noise transmission through connections, piping, ductwork, foundations, and walls. Adjust, repair, or replace isolators as required to reduce vibration and noise transmissions to specified levels.3.2 ADJUSTING A.Adjust vibration isolators after piping systems are filled and equipment is at operating weight.B.Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.C.Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4inch (6-mm) movement during start and stop.D.Adjust active height of spring isolators.E.Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's recommendations.F.Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.G.Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's recommendations to resist seismic forces. E N D SECTION 23 05 41SELECTION GUIDE FOR VIBRATION ISOLATORSEQUIPMENTON GRADE20FT FLOOR SPAN30FT FLOOR SPAN40FT FLOOR SPAN50FT FLOOR SPANBASE TYPEISOL TYPEMIN DEFLBASE TYPEISOL TYPEMIN DEFLBASE TYPEISOL TYPEMIN DEFLBASE TYPEISOL TYPEMIN DEFLBASE TYPEISOL TYPEMIN DEFLREFRIGERATION MACHINESABSORPTION---D------SP1.0---SP1.0---SP1.7---SP1.7PACKAGED HERMETIC---D------SP1.0---SP1.7---SP1.7RSP2.5OPEN CENTRIFUGALBD---BSP1.0---SP1.7BSP1.7BSP3.5RECIPROCATING:500 - 750 RPM ---D------SP1.7RSP1.7RSP2.5RSP3.5751 RPM & OVER---D------SP1.0------1.7RSP2.5RSP2.5AIR HANDLING UNIT PACKAGESFLOOR MOUNTED:UP THRU 5 HP---D------S1.0---S1.0---S1.0---S1.07-1/2 HP & OVER:UP TO 500 RPM---D---RS, THR1.7RS, THR1.7RS, THR1.7RS, THR1.7501 RPM & OVER---D------S, THR1.0---S, THR1.0RS, THR1.7RS, THR1.7IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL AND VANE AXIAL FANS, FLOOR MOUNTED: (APR 9)UP THRU 50 HP:UP TO 300 RPM---D---RS2.5RS2.5RS2.5RS3.5301 - 500 RPM---D---RS1.7RS1.7RS2.5RS2.5501 - & OVER---D------S1.0---S1.0RS1.7RS2.5NOTES:1.Edit the Table above to suit where isolator, other than those shown, are used, such as for seismic restraints and position limit stops.2.For suspended floors lighter than 100 mm (4 inch) thick concrete, select deflection requirements from next higher span.3.For separate chiller building on grade, pump isolators may be omitted.4.Direct bolt fire pumps to concrete base. Provide pads (D) for domestic water booster pump package.5.For projects in seismic areas, use only SS & DS type isolators and snubbers.6.For floor mounted in-line centrifugal blowers (ARR 1): use "B" type in lieu of "R" type base.7.Suspended: Use "H" isolators of same deflection as floor mounted.SECTION 23 05 93TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVACPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.Testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) systems. TAB includes the following: 1.Planning systematic TAB procedures. 2.Design Review Report.3.Systems Inspection report.4.Duct Air Leakage test report.5.Systems Readiness Report.6.Balancing air and water distribution systems; adjustment of total system to provide design performance; and testing performance of equipment and automatic controls. 7.Vibration and sound measurements. 8.Recording and reporting results. B.Definitions: 1.Basic TAB used in this Section: Chapter 37, "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing" of ASHRAE Handbook, "HVAC Applications". 2.TAB: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing; the process of checking and adjusting HVAC systems to meet design objectives. 3.AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. 4.NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. 5.Hydronic Systems: Includes glycolwater systems. 6.Air Systems: Includes all outside air, supply air, return air, exhaust air and relief air systems. 7.Flow rate tolerance: The allowable percentage variation, minus to plus, of actual flow rate from values (design) in the contract documents. 1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION: General Mechanical Requirements.B.Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT: Noise and Vibration Requirements.C.Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION: Piping and Equipment Insulation.D.Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS: Duct Leakage.E.Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC: Controls and Instrumentation Settings.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA.Refer to Articles, Quality Assurance and Submittals, in Section 23?05?11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION. B.Qualifications:1.TAB Agency: The TAB agency shall be a subcontractor of the General Contractor and shall report to and be paid by the General Contractor.2.The TAB agency shall be either a certified member of AABC or certified by the NEBB to perform TAB service for HVAC, water balancing and vibrations and sound testing of equipment. The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the agency loses subject certification during this period, the General Contractor shall immediately notify the COTR and submit another TAB firm for approval. Any agency that has been the subject of disciplinary action by either the AABC or the NEBB within the five years preceding Contract Award shall not be eligible to perform any work related to the TAB. All work performed in this Section and in other related Sections by the TAB agency shall be considered invalid if the TAB agency loses its certification prior to Contract completion, and the successor agency’s review shows unsatisfactory work performed by the predecessor agency.3.TAB Specialist: The TAB specialist shall be either a member of AABC or an experienced technician of the Agency certified by NEBB. The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the Specialist loses subject certification during this period, the General Contractor shall immediately notify the COTR and submit another TAB Specialist for approval. Any individual that has been the subject of disciplinary action by either the AABC or the NEBB within the five years preceding Contract Award shall not be eligible to perform any duties related to the HVAC systems, including TAB. All work specified in this Section and in other related Sections performed by the TAB specialist shall be considered invalid if the TAB Specialist loses its certification prior to Contract completion and must be performed by an approved successor.4.TAB Specialist shall be identified by the General Contractor within 60 days after the notice to proceed. The TAB specialist will be coordinating, scheduling and reporting all TAB work and related activities and will provide necessary information as required by the COTR. The responsibilities would specifically include:a.Shall directly supervise all TAB work.b.Shall sign the TAB reports that bear the seal of the TAB standard. The reports shall be accompanied by report forms and schematic drawings required by the TAB standard, AABC or NEBB. c.Would follow all TAB work through its satisfactory completion.d.Shall provide final markings of settings of all HVAC adjustment devices.e.Permanently mark location of duct test ports.5.All TAB technicians performing actual TAB work shall be experienced and must have done satisfactory work on a minimum of 3 projects comparable in size and complexity to this project. Qualifications must be certified by the TAB agency in writing.C.Test Equipment Criteria: The instrumentation shall meet the accuracy/calibration requirements established by AABC National Standards or by NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems and instrument manufacturer. Provide calibration history of the instruments to be used for test and balance purpose.D.Tab Criteria: 1.One or more of the applicable AABC, NEBB or SMACNA publications, supplemented by ASHRAE Handbook "HVAC Applications" Chapter 36, and requirements stated herein shall be the basis for planning, procedures, and reports. 2.Flow rate tolerance: Following tolerances are allowed. For tolerances not mentioned herein follow ASHRAE Handbook "HVAC Applications", Chapter 36, as a guideline. Air Filter resistance during tests, artificially imposed if necessary, shall be at least 90 percent of final values for pre-filters and after-filters. a.Air handling unit and all other fans, cubic meters/min (cubic feet per minute): Minus 0 percent to plus l0 percent. b.Minimum outside air: 0 percent to plus 10 percent. c.Individual room air outlets and inlets, and air flow rates not mentioned above: Minus 2 percent to plus l0 percent except if the air to a space is 100 CFM or less the tolerance would be 0 to plus 5 percent. 3.Systems shall be adjusted for energy efficient operation as described in PART 3. 4.Typical TAB procedures and results shall be demonstrated to the COTR for one air distribution system (including all fans, three terminal units, three rooms) and one hydronic system (pumps and three coils) as follows: a.When field TAB work begins. b.During each partial final inspection and the final inspection for the project if requested by VA. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Submit names and qualifications of TAB agency and TAB specialists within 60 days after the notice to proceed. Submit information on three recently completed projects and a list of proposed test equipment. C.For use by the COTR staff, submit one complete set of applicable AABC or NEBB publications that will be the basis of TAB work.D.Submit Following for Review and Approval: 1.Design Review Report // within 90 days for conventional design projects // and within 60 days for design-build projects // after the system layout on air and water side is completed by the Contractor.2.Systems inspection report on equipment and installation for conformance with design.3.Duct Air Leakage Test Report.4.Systems Readiness Report.5.Intermediate and Final TAB reports covering flow balance and adjustments, performance tests, vibration tests and sound tests.6.Include in final reports uncorrected installation deficiencies noted during TAB and applicable explanatory comments on test results that differ from design requirements. E.Prior to request for Final or Partial Final inspection, submit completed Test and Balance report for the area.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The following publications form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the reference thereto. In text the publications are referenced to by the acronym of the organization. B.American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE): 2003HVAC Applications ASHRAE Handbook, Chapter 37, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing and Chapter 47, Sound and Vibration ControlC.Associated Air Balance Council (AABC): 2002AABC National Standards for Total System BalanceD.National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB): 7th Edition 2005Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of Environmental Systems1st Edition 1994Procedural Standards for the Measurement and Assessment of Sound and Vibration2nd Edition 1999Procedural Standards for Building Systems CommissioningE.Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): 3rd Edition 2002HVAC SYSTEMSTesting, Adjusting and BalancingPART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLUGS Provide plastic plugs to seal holes drilled in ductwork for test purposes.2.2 INSULATION REPAIR MATERIAL See Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION. Provide for repair of insulation removed or damaged for TAB work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A.Refer to TAB Criteria in Article, Quality Assurance. B.Obtain applicable contract documents and copies of approved submittals for HVAC equipment and automatic control systems. 3.2 design review reportThe TAB Specialist shall review the Contract Plans and specifications and advise the COTR of any design deficiencies that would prevent the HVAC systems from effectively operating in accordance with the sequence of operation specified or prevent the effective and accurate TAB of the system. The TAB Specialist shall provide a report individually listing each deficiency and the corresponding proposed corrective action necessary for proper system operation.3.3 systems inspection reportA.Inspect equipment and installation for conformance with design. B.The inspection and report is to be done after air distribution equipment is on site and duct installation has begun, but well in advance of performance testing and balancing work. The purpose of the inspection is to identify and report deviations from design and ensure that systems will be ready for TAB at the appropriate time. C.Reports: Follow check list format developed by AABC, NEBB or SMACNA, supplemented by narrative comments, with emphasis on air handling units and fans. Check for conformance with submittals. Verify that diffuser and register sizes are correct. 3.4 duct air leakage test reportSee paragraphs "Duct leakage Tests and Repairs" in Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS for TAB agency’s role and responsibilities in witnessing, recording and reporting of deficiencies.3.5 system readiness reportA.Inspect each System to ensure that it is complete including installation and operation of controls.B.Verify that all items such as ductwork piping, ports, terminals, connectors, etc., that is required for TAB are installed. Provide a report to the COTR.3.6 tab reportsA.Submit an intermediate report for all of systems and equipment tested and balanced to establish satisfactory test results.B.The TAB contractor shall provide raw data immediately in writing to the COTR if there is a problem in achieving intended results before submitting a formal report.C.If over 20 percent of readings in the intermediate report fall outside the acceptable range, the TAB report shall be considered invalid and all contract TAB work shall be repeated and re-submitted for approval.D.Do not proceed with the remaining systems until intermediate report is approved by the COTR.3.7 TAB PROCEDURES A.Tab shall be performed in accordance with the requirement of the Standard under which TAB agency is certified by either AABC or NEBB.B.General: During TAB all related system components shall be in full operation. Fan and pump rotation, motor loads and equipment vibration shall be checked and corrected as necessary before proceeding with TAB. Set controls and/or block off parts of distribution systems to simulate design operation of variable volume air or water systems for test and balance work. Coordinate TAB procedures with any phased construction completion requirements for the project. Provide TAB reports for each phase of the project prior to partial final inspections of each phase of the project.Allow sufficient time in construction schedule for TAB and submission of all reports for an organized and timely correction of deficiencies.E.Air Balance and Equipment Test: Include air handling units, fans, room diffusers/outlets/inlets. 1.Artificially load air filters by partial blanking to produce air pressure drop of at least 90 percent of the design final pressure drop. 2.Adjust fan speeds to provide design air flow. Vbelt drives, including fixed pitch pulley requirements, are specified in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.3.Test and balance systems in all specified modes of operation, including variable volume, economizer, and fire emergency modes. Verify that dampers and other controls function properly. 4.Record final measurements for air handling equipment performance data sheets. F.Water Balance and Equipment Test: Include circulating pumps, convertors, coils, coolers and condensers: 1.Adjust flow rates for equipment. Set coils and evaporator to values on equipment submittals, if different from values on contract drawings. 2.Primarysecondary (variable volume) systems: Coordinate TAB with Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC. Balance systems at design water flow and then verify that variable flow controls function properly. 3.Record final measurements for hydronic equipment on performance data sheets. Include entering and leaving water temperatures for heating and cooling coils, and for convertors. Include entering and leaving air temperatures (DB/WB for cooling coils) for air handling units and reheat coils. Make air and water temperature measurements at the same time. 3.8 VIBRATION TESTING A.Furnish instruments and perform vibration measurements as specified in Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT. Field vibration balancing is specified in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION. Provide measurements for all rotating HVAC equipment of 373 watts (1/2 horsepower) and larger, including centrifugal/screw compressors, cooling towers, pumps, fans and motors. B.Record initial measurements for each unit of equipment on test forms and submit a report to the COTR. Where vibration readings exceed the allowable tolerance Contractor shall be directed to correct the problem. The TAB agency shall verify that the corrections are done and submit a final report to the COTR. 3.9 SOUND TESTING A.Perform and record required sound measurements in accordance with Paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE in Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT. 1.Take readings in rooms, approximately ten percent of all rooms. The COTR may designate the specific rooms to be tested. B.Take measurements with a calibrated sound level meter and octave band analyzer of the accuracy required by AABC or NEBB. C.Sound reference levels, formulas and coefficients shall be according to ASHRAE Handbook, "HVAC Applications", Chapter 46, SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL.D.Determine compliance with specifications as follows: 1.When sound pressure levels are specified, including the NC Criteria in Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT: a.Reduce the background noise as much as possible by shutting off unrelated audible equipment. b.Measure octave band sound pressure levels with specified equipment "off." c.Measure octave band sound pressure levels with specified equipment "on." d.Use the DIFFERENCE in corresponding readings to determine the sound pressure due to equipment. DIFFERENCE:012345 to 910 or MoreFACTOR:10743210Sound pressure level due to equipment equals sound pressure level with equipment "on" minus FACTOR. e.Plot octave bands of sound pressure level due to equipment for typical rooms on a graph which also shows noise criteria (NC) curves.2.When sound power levels are specified: a.Perform steps 1.a. thru 1.d., as above. b.For indoor equipment: Determine room attenuating effect, i.e., difference between sound power level and sound pressure level. Determined sound power level will be the sum of sound pressure level due to equipment plus the room attenuating effect. c.For outdoor equipment: Use directivity factor and distance from noise source to determine distance factor, i.e., difference between sound power level and sound pressure level. Measured sound power level will be the sum of sound pressure level due to equipment plus the distance factor. E.Where measured sound levels exceed specified level, the installing contractor or equipment manufacturer shall take remedial action approved by the COTR and the necessary sound tests shall be repeated.3.10 Marking of SettingsFollowing approval of Tab final Report, the setting of all HVAC adjustment devices including valves, splitters and dampers shall be permanently marked by the TAB Specialist so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Style and colors used for markings shall be coordinated with the COTR. 3.11 identification of test portsThe TAB Specialist shall permanently and legibly identify the location points of duct test ports. If the ductwork has exterior insulation, the identification shall be made on the exterior side of the insulation. All penetrations through ductwork and ductwork insulation shall be sealed to prevent air leaks and maintain integrity of vapor barrier. E N D SECTION 23 05 93SECTION 23 07 11HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATIONPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.Field applied insulation for thermal efficiency and condensation control for 1.HVAC piping, ductwork and equipment.2.Plumbing piping and equipment.4.Re-insulation of HVAC piping, ductwork and equipment, plumbing piping and equipment. B.Definitions 1.ASJ: All service jacket, white finish facing or jacket. 2.Air conditioned space: Space having air temperature and/or humidity controlled by mechanical equipment. 3.Cold: Equipment, ductwork or piping handling media at design temperature of 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) or below. 4.Concealed: Ductwork and piping above ceilings and in chases, interstitial space, and pipe spaces. 5.Exposed: Piping, ductwork, and equipment exposed to view in finished areas including mechanical, Boiler Plant and electrical equipment rooms or exposed to outdoor weather. Attics and crawl spaces where air handling units are located are considered to be mechanical rooms. Shafts, chases, interstitial spaces, are not considered finished areas.6.FSK: Foilscrimkraft facing. 7.Density: kg/m3 - kilograms per cubic meter (Pcf - pounds per cubic foot). 8.Runouts: Branch pipe connections up to 25-mm (one-inch) nominal size to fan coil units or reheat coils for terminal units.9.Thermal conductance: Heat flow rate through materials.a.Flat surface: Watt per square meter (BTU per hour per square foot). b.Pipe or Cylinder: Watt per square meter (BTU per hour per linear foot). 10.Thermal Conductivity (k): Watt per meter, per degree C (BTU per inch thickness, per hour, per square foot, per degree F temperature difference).11.LPS: Low pressure steam (103 kPa [15 psig] and below).12.LPR: Low pressure steam condensate gravity return.13.CW: Cold water.14.HW: Hot water.15.PVDC: Polyvinylidene chloride vapor retarder jacketing, white.16.GWS/GWR: Glycol water supply/return.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING: Mineral fiber and bond breaker behind sealant. B.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division 23. C.Section 22 05 23, GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING: Hot and cold water piping.D.Section 23 21 13, HYDRONIC PIPING and Section 23 22 13, STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING: Piping and equipment. E.Section 23 21 13, HYDRONIC PIPING: Glycol water piping. F.Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS: Ductwork, plenum and fittings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Refer to article QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.B.Criteria: ply with NFPA 90A, particularly paragraphs 4.3.3.1 through 4.3.3.6, 4.3.10.2.6, and 5.4.6.4, parts of which are quoted as follows:4.3.3.1 Pipe insulation and coverings, duct coverings, duct linings, vapor retarder facings, adhesives, fasteners, tapes, and supplementary materials added to air ducts, plenums, panels, and duct silencers used in duct systems, unless otherwise provided for in??4.3.3.1.2 or??4.3.3.1.3, shall have, in the form in which they are used, a maximum flame spread index of 25 without evidence of continued progressive combustion and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with??NFPA 255, Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.?4.3.3.1.1 Where these products are to be applied with adhesives, they shall be tested with such adhesives applied, or the adhesives used shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when in the final dry state. (See ?4.2.4.2.)?4.3.3.1.2 The flame spread and smoke developed index requirements of??4.3.3.1.1 shall not apply to air duct weatherproof coverings where they are located entirely outside of a building, do not penetrate a wall or roof, and do not create an exposure hazard.?4.3.3.1.3 Smoke detectors required by??6.4.4 shall not be required to meet flame spread index or smoke developed index requirements.?4.3.3.2 Closure systems for use with rigid and flexible air ducts tested in accordance with UL 181, Standard for Safety Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors, shall have been tested, listed, and used in accordance with the conditions of their listings, in accordance with one of the following:?(1)UL 181A, Standard for Safety Closure Systems for Use with Rigid Air Ducts and Air Connectors?(2)UL 181B, Standard for Safety Closure Systems for Use with Flexible Air Ducts and Air Connectors?4.3.3.3 Air duct, panel, and plenum coverings and linings, and pipe insulation and coverings shall not flame, glow, smolder, or smoke when tested in accordance with a similar test for pipe covering, ASTM C 411, Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature Thermal Insulation, at the temperature to which they are exposed in service.?4.3.3.3.1 In no case shall the test temperature be below 121°C (250°F).?4.3.3.4 Air duct coverings shall not extend through walls or floors that are required to be fire stopped or required to have a fire resistance rating, unless such coverings meet the requirements of?5.4.6.4.? HYPERLINK "javascript:parent.loadDoc('/nfpa0050-0099/0090a/codes-0122085',%20'',%20'codes-id00090a00304')" 4.3.3.5* Air duct linings shall be interrupted at fire dampers to prevent interference with the operation of devices.?4.3.3.6 Air duct coverings shall not be installed so as to conceal or prevent the use of any service opening.?4.3.10.2.6 Materials exposed to the airflow shall be noncombustible or limited combustible and have a maximum smoke developed index of 50 or comply with the following.?4.3.10.2.6.1 Electrical wires and cables and optical fiber cables shall be listed as noncombustible or limited combustible and have a maximum smoke developed index of 50 or shall be listed as having a maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average optical density of 0.15 or less, and a maximum flame spread distance of 1.5 m (5 ft) or less when tested in accordance with??NFPA 262, Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces.?4.3.10.2.6.2 Pneumatic tubing for control systems shall be listed as having a maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average optical density of 0.15 or less, and a maximum flame spread distance of 1.5 m (5 ft) or less when tested in accordance with UL 1820, Standard for Safety Fire Test of Pneumatic Tubing for Flame and Smoke Characteristics.?4.3.10.2.6.3 Nonferrous fire sprinkler piping shall be listed as having a maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average optical density of 0.15 or less, and a maximum flame spread distance of 1.5 m (5 ft) or less when tested in accordance with UL 1887, Standard for Safety Fire Test of Plastic Sprinkler Pipe for Visible Flame and Smoke Characteristics.?4.3.10.2.6.4 Optical-fiber and communication raceways shall be listed as having a maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average optical density of 0.15 or less, and a maximum flame spread distance of 1.5 m (5 ft) or less when tested in accordance with UL 2024, Standard for Safety Optical-Fiber Cable Raceway.?4.3.10.2.6.5 Loudspeakers and recessed lighting fixtures, including their assemblies and accessories, shall be permitted in the ceiling cavity plenum where listed as having a maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average optical density of 0.15 or less, and a peak heat release rate of 100 kW or less when tested in accordance with UL 2043, Standard for Safety Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces.?4.3.10.2.6.6 Supplementary materials for air distribution systems shall be permitted when complying with the provisions of??4.3.3.?4.3.10.2.6.7 Smoke detectors shall not be required to meet the provisions of this section.?5.4.6.4 Where air ducts pass through walls, floors, or partitions that are required to have a fire resistance rating and where fire dampers are not required, the opening in the construction around the air duct shall be as follows:?(1) ?????Not exceeding a 25.4 mm (1 in.) average clearance on all sides?(2) ?????Filled solid with an approved material capable of preventing the passage of flame and hot gases sufficient to ignite cotton waste when subjected to the time-temperature fire conditions required for fire barrier penetration as specified in?NFPA 251, Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building Construction and Materials?2.Test methods: ASTM E84, UL 723, or NFPA 255. 3.Specified k factors are at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F) mean temperature unless stated otherwise. Where optional thermal insulation material is used, select thickness to provide thermal conductance no greater than that for the specified material. For pipe, use insulation manufacturer's published heat flow tables. For domestic hot water supply and return, run out insulation and condensation control insulation, no thickness adjustment need be made. 4.All materials shall be compatible and suitable for service temperature, and shall not contribute to corrosion or otherwise attack surface to which applied in either the wet or dry state. C.Every package or standard container of insulation or accessories delivered to the job site for use must have a manufacturer's stamp or label giving the name of the manufacturer and description of the material. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Shop Drawings: 1.All information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications and ASTM, federal and military specifications.a.Insulation materials: Specify each type used and state surface burning characteristics. b.Insulation facings and jackets: Each type used. Make it clear that white finish will be furnished for exposed ductwork, casings and equipment. c.Insulation accessory materials: Each type used. d.Manufacturer's installation and fitting fabrication instructions for flexible unicellular insulation. e.Make reference to applicable specification paragraph numbers for coordination. C.Samples: 1.Each type of insulation: Minimum size 100 mm (4 inches) square for board/block/ blanket; 150 mm (6 inches) long, full diameter for round types. 2.Each type of facing and jacket: Minimum size 100 mm (4 inches square). 3.Each accessory material: Minimum 120 ML (4 ounce) liquid container or 120 gram (4 ounce) dry weight for adhesives / cement / mastic.1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALStore materials in clean and dry environment, pipe covering jackets shall be clean and unmarred. Place adhesives in original containers. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions as required by printed instructions of manufacturers of adhesives, mastics and finishing cements. 1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only. B.Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.): LP535E (2)-91Plastic Sheet (Sheeting): Plastic Strip; Poly (Vinyl Chloride) and Poly (Vinyl Chloride - Vinyl Acetate), Rigid.C.Military Specifications (Mil. Spec.): MILA3316C (2)-90Adhesives, FireResistant, Thermal InsulationMILA24179A (1)-87Adhesive, Flexible UnicellularPlasticThermal Insulation MILC19565C (1)-88Coating Compounds, Thermal Insulation, Fire-and Water-Resistant, Vapor-BarrierMILC20079H-87Cloth, Glass; Tape, Textile Glass; and Thread, Glass and Wire-Reinforced Glass D.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A16799Standard Specification for Stainless and HeatResisting ChromiumNickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip B20904Standard Specification for Aluminum and AluminumAlloy Sheet and Plate C411-97Standard test method for HotSurface Performance of HighTemperature Thermal Insulation C44900Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber HydraulicSetting Thermal Insulating and Finishing CementC53304Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation C53405Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular FormC547-06Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber pipe Insulation C55203Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal InsulationC553-02Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial ApplicationsC585-90Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System) R (1998)C612-04Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal InsulationC1126-04Standard Specification for Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation C1136-06Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal InsulationD166897a (2006)Standard Specification for Glass Fabrics (Woven and Treated) for Roofing and Waterproofing E84-06Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsE11905aStandard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials E13604Standard Test Methods for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 degrees C (1380 F)E.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 90A-09Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems96-04Standards for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations101-09Life Safety Code251-06Standard methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building Construction Materials255-06Standard Method of tests of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsF.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL):723UL Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials with Revision of 08/03G.Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry (MSS):SP58-2002Pipe Hangers and Supports Materials, Design, and ManufacturePART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MINERAL FIBER A.ASTM C612 (Board, Block), Class 1 or 2, k = 0.037 Watt per meter, per degree C (0.26), external insulation for temperatures up to 204 degrees C (400 degrees F).B.ASTM C553 (Blanket, Flexible) Type I, Class B-5, Density 32 kg/m3 (2 pcf), k = 0.04 (0.27), for use at temperatures up to 204 degrees C (400 degrees F)C.ASTM C547 (Pipe Fitting Insulation and Preformed Pipe Insulation), Class 1, k = 0.037 (0.26) for use at temperatures 230 degrees C (450 degrees F).2.2 Mineral wool or refractory ply with Standard ASTM C612, Class 3, 450 degrees C (850 degrees F).2.3 RIGID CELLULAR PHENOLIC FoamA.Preformed (molded) pipe insulation, ASTM C1126, type III, grade 1, k = 0.021(0.15), for temperatures up to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F) with vapor retarder and all service jacket with polyvinyl chloride premolded fitting covering.B.Equipment and Duct Insulation, ASTM C 1126, type II, grade 1, k = 0.021 (0.15), for temperatures up to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F) with rigid cellular phenolic insulation and covering, vapor retarder and all service jacket.2.4 CELLULAR GLASS closed-ply with Standard ASTM C177, C518, density 120 kg/m3 (7.5 pcf) nominal, k = 0.033 (0.29) at 0 degrees C (75 degrees F).B.Pipe insulation for temperatures up to 200 degrees C (400 degrees F).2.5 polyisocyanurate closed-cell rigidA.Preformed (fabricated) pipe insulation, ASTM C591, type IV, K=0.027(0.19), for use at temperatures up to 149 degree C (300 degree F) with factory applied PVDC or all service jacket vapor retarder with polyvinyl chloride premolded fitting covers.B.Equipment and duct insulation, ASTM C 591,type IV, K=0.027(0.19), for use at temperatures up to 149 degrees C (300 degrees F) with PVDC or all service jacket vapor retarder jacket.2.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR THERMALA.ASTM C177, C518, k = 0.039 Watt per meter, per degree C (0.27), at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F), flame spread not over 25, smoke developed not over 50, for temperatures from minus 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) to 93 degrees C (200 degrees F). No jacket required. 2.7 calcium silicateA.Preformed pipe Insulation: ASTM C533, Type I and Type II with indicator denoting asbestos-free material.B.Premolded Pipe Fitting Insulation: ASTM C533, Type I and Type II with indicator denoting asbestos-free material. C.Equipment Insulation: ASTM C533, Type I and Type IID.Characteristics:Insulation CharacteristicsITEMSTYPE ITYPE IITemperature, maximum degrees C (degrees F)649 (1200)927 (1700)Density (dry), Kg/m3 (lb/ ft3)232 (14.5)288 (18)Thermal conductivity:Min W/ m K (Btu in/h ft2 degrees F)@mean temperature of 93 degrees?C (200 degrees F)0.059(0.41)0.078 (0.540)Surface burning characteristics:Flame spread Index, Maximum00Smoke Density index, Maximum002.8 INSULATION FACINGS AND JACKETSA.Vapor Retarder, higher strength with low water permeance = 0.02 or less perm rating, Beach puncture 50 units for insulation facing on exposed ductwork, casings and equipment, and for pipe insulation jackets. Facings and jackets shall be all service type (ASJ) or PVDC Vapor Retarder jacketing. B.ASJ jacket shall be white kraft bonded to 0.025 mm (1 mil) thick aluminum foil, fiberglass reinforced, with pressure sensitive adhesive closure. Comply with ASTM C1136. Beach puncture 5 units, Suitable for painting without sizing. Jackets shall have minimum 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) lap on longitudinal joints and minimum 100 mm (4 inch) butt strip on end joints. Butt strip material shall be same as the jacket. Lap and butt strips shall be self-sealing type with factory-applied pressure sensitive adhesive.C.Vapor Retarder medium strength with low water vapor permeance of 0.02 or less perm rating), Beach puncture 25 units: FoilScrimKraft (FSK) or PVDC vapor retarder jacketing type for concealed ductwork and equipment. D.Glass Cloth Jackets: Presized, minimum 0.18 kg per square meter (7.8 ounces per square yard), 2000 kPa (300 psig) bursting strength with integral vapor retarder where required or specified. Weather proof if utilized for outside service.E.Factory composite materials may be used provided that they have been tested and certified by the manufacturer.F.Pipe fitting insulation covering (jackets): Fitting covering shall be premolded to match shape of fitting and shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conforming to Fed Spec L-P-335, composition A, Type II Grade GU, and Type III, minimum thickness 0.7 mm (0.03 inches). Provide color matching vapor retarder pressure sensitive tape.G.Aluminum Jacket-Piping systems and circular breeching and stacks: ASTM B209, 3003 alloy, H-14 temper, 0.6 mm (0.023 inch) minimum thickness with locking longitudinal joints. Jackets for elbows, tees and other fittings shall be factory-fabricated to match shape of fitting and of 0.6 mm (0.024) inch minimum thickness aluminum. Fittings shall be of same construction as straight run jackets but need not be of the same alloy. Factory-fabricated stainless steel bands shall be installed on all circumferential joints. Bands shall be 20 mm (0.75 inch) wide on 450 mm (18 inch) centers. System shall be weatherproof if utilized for outside service.H.Aluminum jacket-Rectangular breeching: ASTM B209, 3003 alloy, H-14 temper, 0.5 mm (0.020 inches) thick with 32 mm (1-1/4 inch) corrugations or 0.8 mm (0.032 inches) thick with no corrugations. System shall be weatherproof if used for outside service.2.9 pipe covering protection saddlesA.Cold pipe support: Premolded pipe insulation 180 degrees (half-shells) on bottom half of pipe at supports. Material shall be cellular glass or high density Polyisocyanurate insulation of the same thickness as adjacent insulation. Density of Polyisocyanurate insulation shall be a minimum of 48 kg/m3 (3.0 pcf).Nominal Pipe Size and Accessories Material (Insert Blocks)Nominal Pipe Size mm (inches)Insert Blocks mm (inches)Up through 125 (5)150 (6) long150 (6)150 (6) long200 (8), 250 (10), 300 (12)225 (9) longB.Warm or hot pipe supports: Premolded pipe insulation (180 degree half-shells) on bottom half of pipe at supports. Material shall be high density Polyisocyanurate (for temperatures up to 149 degrees C [300 degrees F]), cellular glass or calcium silicate. Insulation at supports shall have same thickness as adjacent insulation. Density of Polyisocyanurate insulation shall be a minimum of 48 kg/m3 (3.0 pcf).2.10adhesive, Mastic, CementA.Mil. Spec. MILA3316, Class 1: Jacket and lap adhesive and protective finish coating for insulation. B.Mil. Spec. MILA3316, Class 2: Adhesive for laps and for adhering insulation to metal surfaces. C.Mil. Spec. MILA24179, Type II Class 1: Adhesive for installing flexible unicellular insulation and for laps and general use. D.Mil. Spec. MILC19565, Type I: Protective finish for outdoor use. E.Mil. Spec. MILC19565, Type I or Type II: Vapor barrier compound for indoor use. F.ASTM C449: Mineral fiber hydraulicsetting thermal insulating and finishing cement. G.Other: Insulation manufacturers' published recommendations. 2.11 Mechanical FastenersA.Pins, anchors: Welded pins, or metal or nylon anchors with tincoated or fiber washer, or clips. Pin diameter shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. B.Staples: Outward clinching monel or stainless steel. C.Wire: 1.3 mm thick (18 gage) soft annealed galvanized or 1.9 mm (14 gage) copper clad steel or nickel copper alloy. D.Bands: 20 mm (3/4 inch) nominal width, brass, galvanized steel, aluminum or stainless steel.2.12 Reinforcement and Finishes A.Glass fabric, open weave: ASTM D1668, Type III (resin treated) and Type I (asphalt treated). B.Glass fiber fitting tape: Mil. Spec MILC20079, Type II, Class 1.C.Tape for Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: As recommended by the insulation manufacturer. D.Hexagonal wire netting: 25 mm (one inch) mesh, 0.85 mm thick (22 gage) galvanized steel. E.Corner beads: 50 mm (2 inch) by 50 mm (2 inch), 0.55 mm thick (26 gage) galvanized steel; or, 25 mm (1 inch) by 25 mm (1 inch), 0.47 mm thick (28 gage) aluminum angle adhered to 50 mm (2 inch) by 50 mm (2 inch) Kraft paper.F.PVC fitting cover: Fed. Spec LP535, Composition A, 1186 Type II, Grade GU, with Form B Mineral Fiber insert, for media temperature 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F). Below 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) and above 121 degrees C (250 degrees F). Provide double layer insert. Provide color matching vapor barrier pressure sensitive tape.2.13 Firestopping MaterialOther than pipe and duct insulation, refer to Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.2.14 flame and smokeUnless shown otherwise all assembled systems shall meet flame spread 25 and smoke developed 50 rating as developed under ASTM, NFPA and UL standards and specifications. See paragraph 1.3 "Quality Assurance".PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Required pressure tests of duct and piping joints and connections shall be completed and the work approved by the COTR for application of insulation. Surface shall be clean and dry with all foreign materials, such as dirt, oil, loose scale and rust removed. B.Except for specific exceptions, insulate entire specified equipment, piping (pipe, fittings, valves, accessories), and duct systems. Insulate each pipe and duct individually. Do not use scrap pieces of insulation where a full length section will fit. C.Insulation materials shall be installed in a first class manner with smooth and even surfaces, with jackets and facings drawn tight and smoothly cemented down at all laps. Insulation shall be continuous through all sleeves and openings, except at fire dampers (NFPA 90A). Vapor retarders shall be continuous and uninterrupted throughout systems with operating temperature 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) and below. Lap and seal vapor barrier over ends and exposed edges of insulation. Anchors, supports and other metal projections through insulation on cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed for a minimum length of 150 mm (6 inches). D.Install vapor stops at all insulation terminations on either side of valves, pumps and equipment and particularly in straight lengths of pipe insulation.E.Construct insulation on parts of equipment such as convertors and heat exchangers that must be opened periodically for maintenance or repair, so insulation can be removed and replaced without damage. Install insulation with bolted 1 mm thick (20 gage) galvanized steel or aluminum covers as complete units, or in sections, with all necessary supports, and split to coincide with flange/split of the equipment.F.Insulation on hot piping and equipment shall be terminated square at items not to be insulated, access openings and nameplates. Cover all exposed raw insulation with white sealer or jacket material. G.Protect all insulations outside of buildings with aluminum jacket using lock joint or other approved system for a continuous weather tight system. Access doors and other items requiring maintenance or access shall be removable and sealable.H.HVAC work not to be insulated: 1.Air handling units. 2.Exhaust air ducts and plenums, and ventilation exhaust air shafts. 3.Equipment: Expansion tanks, hot water pumps. 4.In hot piping: Unions, flexible connectors, control valves, PRVs, safety valves and discharge vent piping, vacuum breakers, thermostatic vent valves, steam traps 20 mm (3/4 inch) and smaller, exposed piping through floor for convectors and radiators. Insulate piping to within approximately 75 mm (3 inches) of uninsulated items. I.Plumbing work not to be insulated: 1.Piping and valves of fire protection system. 2.Chromium plated brass piping. 3.Water piping in contact with earth. 5.Small horizontal cold water branch runs in partitions to individual fixtures may be without insulation for maximum distance of 900 mm (3 feet). J.Apply insulation materials subject to the manufacturer's recommended temperature limits. Apply adhesives, mastic and coatings at the manufacturer's recommended minimum coverage.K.Elbows, flanges and other fittings shall be insulated with the same material as is used on the pipe straights. The elbow/ fitting insulation shall be field-fabricated, mitered or factory prefabricated to the necessary size and shape to fit on the elbow/ fitting. Use of polyurethane spray-foam to fill a PVC elbow jacket is prohibited on cold applications.L.Firestop Pipe and Duct insulation:1.Provide firestopping insulation at fire and smoke barriers through penetrations. Fire stopping insulation shall be UL listed as defines in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.2.Pipe and duct penetrations requiring fire stop insulation including, but not limited to the following:a.Pipe risers through floorsb.Pipe or duct chase walls and floorsc.Smoke partitionsd.Fire partitionsFreeze protection of above grade outdoor piping (over heat tracing tape): 20 mm (0.75) thick insulation, for all pipe sizes 75 mm(3 inches) and smaller and 25 mm(1inch) thick insulation for larger pipes. Provide metal jackets for all pipes. N.Provide metal jackets over insulation as follows:a.All piping and ducts exposed to outdoor weather.c.A 50 mm (2 inch) overlap is required at longitudinal and circumferential joints.3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATIONA.Mineral Fiber Board: 1.Faced board: Apply board on pins spaced not more than 300 mm (12 inches) on center each way, and not less than 75 mm (3 inches) from each edge of board. In addition to pins, apply insulation bonding adhesive to entire underside of horizontal metal surfaces. Butt insulation edges tightly and seal all joints with laps and butt strips. After applying speed clips cut pins off flush and apply vapor seal patches over clips.2.Plain board: a.Insulation shall be scored, beveled or mitered to provide tight joints and be secured to equipment with bands spaced 225 mm (9 inches) on center for irregular surfaces or with pins and clips on flat surfaces. Use corner beads to protect edges of insulation. b.For hot equipment: Stretch 25 mm (1 inch) mesh wire, with edges wire laced together, over insulation and finish with insulating and finishing cement applied in one coat, 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick, trowel led to a smooth finish. c.For cold equipment: Apply meshed glass fabric in a tack coat 1.5 to 1.7 square meter per liter (60 to 70 square feet per gallon) of vapor mastic and finish with mastic at 0.3 to 0.4 square meter per liter (12 to 15 square feet per gallon) over the entire fabric surface.3.Exposed, unlined ductwork and equipment in unfinished areas, mechanical and electrical equipment rooms and interstitial spacesa.40 mm (1-1/2 inch) thick insulation faced with ASJ (white all service jacket): Supply air duct and afterfilter housing.25 mm (1 inch) thick insulation faced with ASJ: Return air duct4.Hot equipment: 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) thick insulation faced with ASJ.a.Reheat coil casing and separation chambers on steam humidifiers located above ceilings.B.Flexible Mineral Fiber Blanket: 1.Adhere insulation to metal with 100 mm (4 inch) wide strips of insulation bonding adhesive at 200 mm (8 inches) on center all around duct. Additionally secure insulation to bottom of ducts exceeding 600 mm (24 inches) in width with pins welded or adhered on 450 mm (18 inch) centers. Secure washers on pins. Butt insulation edges and seal joints with laps and butt strips. Staples may be used to assist in securing insulation. Seal all vapor retarder penetrations with mastic. Sagging duct insulation will not be acceptable. Install firestop duct insulation where required.2.Supply air ductwork to be insulated includes main and branch ducts from AHU discharge to room supply outlets, and the bodies of ceiling outlets to prevent condensation. Insulate sound attenuator units, coil casings and damper frames. To prevent condensation insulate trapeze type supports and angle iron hangers for flat oval ducts that are in direct contact with metal duct. 3.Concealed supply air ductwork.a.Above ceilings at a roof level: 50 mm (2 inch) thick insulation faced with FSK.4.Concealed return air duct above ceilings at a roof level, unconditioned areas, and in chases with external wall or containing steam piping; 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) thick, insulation faced with FSK. Concealed return air ductwork in other locations need not be insulated.C.Molded Mineral Fiber Pipe and Tubing Covering: 1.Fit insulation to pipe or duct, aligning longitudinal joints. Seal longitudinal joint laps and circumferential butt strips by rubbing hard with a nylon sealing tool to assure a positive seal. Staples may be used to assist in securing insulation. Seal all vapor retarder penetrations on cold piping with a generous application of vapor barrier mastic. Provide inserts and install with metal insulation shields at outside pipe supports. Install freeze protection insulation over heating cable.2.Contractor's options for fitting, flange and valve insulation: a.Insulating and finishing cement for sizes less than 100 mm (4 inches) operating at surface temperature of 16 degrees C (61 degrees F) or more. b.Factory premolded, one piece PVC covers with mineral fiber, (Form B), inserts. Provide two insert layers for pipe temperatures below 4 degrees C (40 degrees F), or above 121 degrees C (250 degrees F). Secure first layer of insulation with twine. Seal seam edges with vapor barrier mastic and secure with fitting tape. c.Factory molded, ASTM C547 or field mitered sections, joined with adhesive or wired in place. For hot piping finish with a smoothing coat of finishing cement. For cold fittings, 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) or less, vapor seal with a layer of glass fitting tape imbedded between two 2 mm (1/16 inch) coats of vapor barrier mastic. d.Fitting tape shall extend over the adjacent pipe insulation and overlap on itself at least 50 mm (2 inches).3.Nominal thickness in millimeters and inches specified in table below, for piping above ground:Nominal Thickness of Molded Mineral Fiber InsulationNominal Pipe Size, millimeters (inches):25 (1) & below32- 75 (1-1/4- 3) 100-150 (4-6)200 (8) and abovea.122-177 degrees C (251-350 F) (MPS,)50 (2.0)65 (2.5)90 (3.5)90 (3.5)b.100-121 degrees C SR (212-250 degrees F) (Vent piping from PRV safety valves)25 (1.0)50 (2.0)50 (2.0)50 (2.0)c.38-99 degrees C (100-211 degrees F) (HS HR)25 (1.0)40 (1.5)50 (2.0)50 (2.0)1.Runouts to air terminal unit reheat coils 15 (0.5)---d.Domestic hot water supply and return15 (0.5)20(0.75)25 (1.0)40 (1.5)D.Rigid Cellular Phenolic Foam:1.Rigid closed cell phenolic insulation may be provided for piping, ductwork and equipment for temperatures up to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F).2.Note the NFPA 90A burning characteristics requirements of 25/50 in paragraph 1.3.B3.Provide secure attachment facilities such as welding pins.4.Apply insulation with joints tightly drawn together 5.Apply adhesives, coverings, neatly finished at fittings, and valves.6.Final installation shall be smooth, tight, neatly finished at all edges.7.Minimum thickness in millimeters (inches) specified in table below, for piping above ground:Nominal Thickness of Rigid Closed-Cell Phenolic Foam InsulationNominal Pipe Size millimeters (inches):25(1) & below32-75(1 1/4-3)100-150(4-6)200-300(8-12)350 (14) & above1.100-121 degrees C (212-250 degrees F), LPS.15 (0.5)25 (1)25 (1)----2.38-99 degrees C (100-211 degrees F), SR, HWHR,.15 (0.5)20 (0.75)25 (1)----a. Reheat Coils.15 (0.5)--------3.4-16 degrees C (40-60 degrees F), CHS, CHR.20 (0.75)20 (0.75)25 (1)40 (1.5)50 (2.0)4.Domestic hot water supply and return.15 (0.5)15 (0.5)20 (0.75)20 (0.75)--8.Condensation control insulation: Minimum 20 mm (0.75 inch) thick for all pipe sizes.a.HVAC: Cooling coil condensation piping to waste piping fixture or drain inlet. Omit insulation on plastic piping in mechanical rooms.b.Plumbing piping as follows:1)Body of roof and overflow drains horizontal runs and offsets (including elbows) of interior downspout piping in all areas above pipe basement.2)Waste piping from electric water coolers and icemakers to drainage system.3)Waste piping located above basement floor from ice making equipment and air handling units, from fixture (including trap) to main vertical waste pipe.4)Cold water piping.E.Cellular Glass Insulation: 1.Pipe and tubing, covering nominal thickness in millimeters and inches as tabulated below for chilled water and refrigerant piping.Nominal Thickness of Cellular Glass InsulationMillimeters (inches)Thru 38 (11/2)50- 150(2-6)200-300(8-12)over 350 (14)1.4-16 degrees C (40-60 degrees F) (CH and CHR within chiller room and pipe chase and underground)50 (2.0)80 (3.0)80 (3.0)100 (4.0)2.4-16 degrees C (40-60 degrees F) (CH and CHR outside chiller room)40 (1.5)50 (2.0)50 (2.0)65 (2.5)F.Polyisocyanurate Closed-Cell Rigid Insulation:1.Polyisocyanurate closed-cell rigid insulation (PIR) may be provided for piping, equipment and ductwork for temperature up to 149 degree C (300 degree F) provided insulation thickness requirement does not exceed 38 mm (1.5 inches).2.Install insulation, vapor retarder and jacketing per manufacturer’s recommendations. Particular attention should be paid to recommendations for joint staggering, adhesive application, external hanger design, expansion/contraction joint design and spacing and vapor retarder integrity.3.Install insulation with all joints tightly butted (except expansion) joints in hot applications).4.If insulation thickness exceeds 63 mm (2.5 inches), install as a double layer system with longitudinal (lap) and butt joint staggering as recommended by manufacturer.5.For cold applications, vapor retarder shall be installed in a continuous manner. No staples, rivets, screws or any other attachment device capable of penetrating the vapor retarder shall be used to attach the vapor retarder or jacketing. No wire ties capable of penetrating the vapor retarder shall be used to hold the insulation in place. Banding shall be used to attach PVC or metal jacketing. 6.Elbows, flanges and other fittings shall be insulated with the same material as is used on the pipe straights. The elbow/ fitting insulation shall be field-fabricated, mitered or factory prefabricated to the necessary size and shape to fit on the elbow/ fitting. Use of polyurethane spray-foam to fill PVC elbow jacket is prohibited on cold applications.7.For cold applications, the vapor retarder on elbows/fittings shall be either mastic-fabric-mastic or 2 mil thick PVDC vapor retarder adhesive tape.8.All PVC and metal jacketing shall be installed so as to naturally shed water. Joints shall point down and shall be sealed with either adhesive or caulking (except for periodic slip joints).10.Note the NFPA 90A burning characteristic requirements of 25/50 in paragraph 1.3B. Refer to paragraph 3.1 for items not to be insulated.Minimum thickness in millimeter (inches) specified in table below, for piping:Nominal Thickness of Polyisocyanurate Rigid InsulationNominal Pipe Size millimeters(inches):25(1)& below32-75(1 1/4-3)100-150(4-6)200-300(8-12)1.122-149 degree C(251-300 degree F) (MPS)40(1.5)------2.100-121 degrees C (211-250 degrees F), SR, LPS, 20 (0.75)40(1.5)40(1.5)40(1.50)3.38-99 degrees C (100-211 degrees F), HS, HR reheat coils20 (0.75)25(1.0)40(1.5)40(1.50)20 (0.75)------4.4-16 degrees C (40-60 degrees F), CHS, CHR, for relative humidity up to 80 percent or underground location25 (1.0025 (1.0)40 (1.5040(1.5)5.4-16 degrees C(40-60 degrees F) CH, CHR, GC and GCR for relative humidity 80 to 90 percent or higher40 (1.5040 (1.5)40 (1.5)40 (1.5)6. Domestic hot water supply and return15 (0.5)20 (0.74)25 (1.0)25(1.0)12.Condensation control insulation: Minimum 20 mm (0.75 inch) thick for all pipe sizes.a.HVAC: Cooling coil condensation piping to waste piping fixture or drain inlet. Omit insulation on plastic piping in mechanical rooms.b.Plumbing piping as follows:1)Body of roof and overflow drains and horizontal runs and offsets (including elbows) of interior downspout piping in all areas above pipe basement.2)Waste piping from electric water coolers to drainage system.3)Waste piping located above basement floor from ice making equipment and air handling units, from fixture (including trap) to main vertical waste pipe.4)Cold Water Piping.G.Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation: 1.Apply insulation and fabricate fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and finish with two coats of weather resistant finish as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. 2.Pipe and tubing insulation: a.Use proper size material. Do not stretch or strain insulation.b.To avoid undue compression of insulation, provide cork stoppers or wood inserts at supports as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Insulation shields are specified under Section 23?05?11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.c.Where possible, slip insulation over the pipe or tubing prior to connection, and seal the butt joints with adhesive. Where the slipon technique is not possible, slit the insulation and apply it to the pipe sealing the seam and joints with contact adhesive. Optional tape sealing, as recommended by the manufacturer, may be employed. Make changes from mineral fiber insulation in a straight run of pipe, not at a fitting. Seal joint with tape. 3.Apply sheet insulation to flat or large curved surfaces with 100 percent adhesive coverage. For fittings and large pipe, apply adhesive to seams only. 4.Pipe insulation: nominal thickness in millimeters (inches as specified in table below for piping above ground:Nominal Thickness of Flexible Elastomeric Cellular InsulationNominal Pipe Size millimeters (inches)25 (1) & below32-75 (1 1/4-3)100-150 (4-6)200 (8)1.4-16 degrees C ( 35-90 degrees F) (CHS, CHR,)25 (1.0)40 (1.5)--2.Domestic hot water supply and return15 (0.50)20 (0.75)25 (1.0)40 (1.50)5.Minimum 20 mm (0.75 inch) thick insulation for pneumatic control lines for a minimum distance of 6 m (20 feet) from discharge side of the refrigerated dryer.3.3 application – pipe, valves, strainers and fittings:A.Temperature range 120 to 230 degrees C (251 to 450 degrees F);1.Application; Steam service 110 kpa (16 psig nominal) and higher, high pressure condensate to trap assembly.2.Insulation and Jacket:a.Calcium silicate for piping from zero to 1800 mm (6 feet) above boiler room floor, feedwater heater mezzanine floor or access platform and any floors or platforms on which tanks or pumps are located.b.Mineral fiber for remaining locations.c.ASJ with PVC premolded fitting coverings.d.Aluminum jacket from zero to 1800 mm (6 feet) above floor on atomizing steam and condensate lines at boilers and burners.3.Thickness:Nominal Thickness Of Calcium Silicate InsulationPipe Diameter mm (in)Insulation Thickness mm (in)25 (1) and below 50 (2)32 to 80 (1 1/4 to 3) 63 (2-1/2)100 (4) and above 88 (3-1/2)B.Temperature range 100 to 121 degrees C (211 to 250 degrees F):1.Application: Steam service 103 kpa (15 psig) and below, trap assembly discharge piping, 2.Insulation and Jacket:a.Calcium silicate for piping from zero to 1800 mm (0 to 6 feet) above boiler room floor, feedwater heater mezzanine floor and access platform, and any floors or access platforms on which tanks or pumps are located.b.Mineral Fiber or rigid closed cell phenolic foam for remaining locations.c.ASJ with PVC premolded fitting coverings.d.Aluminum jacket from zero to 1800 mm (6 feet) above floor on condensate lines at boilers and burners.3.Thickness-calcium silicate and mineral fiber insulation:Nominal Thickness Of InsulationPipe Diameter mm (in)Insulation Thickness mm (in)25 (1) and below25 (1)32 to 80 (1-1/4 to 3)50 (2)100 (4) and above50 (2)4.Thickness-rigid closed-cell phenolic foam insulation:Nominal Thickness Of InsulationPipe Diameter mm (in)Insulation Thickness mm (in)25 (10 and below)19 (0.75)32 to 80 (1-1/4 to 30)25 (1)100 (4) and above25 (1)C.Temperature range 32 to 99 degrees C (90 to 211 degrees F):1.Application: Condensate return from convertors .2.Insulation Jacket:a.Calcium silicate for piping from zero to 1800 mm (six feet above boiler room floor, and any floor or access platform on which tanks or pumps are located.b.Mineral fiber or rigid closed-cell phenolic foam for remaining locations.c.ASJ with PVC premolded fitting coverings.3.Thickness-calcium silicate and mineral fiber insulation:Nominal Thickness Of InsulationPipe Diameter mm (in)Insulation Thickness mm (in)25 (1) and below25 (1)32 to 80 (1-1/4 to 3)38 (1-1/2)100 (40 and above50 (2)4.Thickness-rigid closed-cell phenolic foam insulation:Nominal Thickness Of InsulationPipe Diameter mm (in)Insulation Thickness mm (in)25 (1) and below19 (0.75)32 to 80 (1-1/4 to 3)19 (0.75)100 (4) and above25 (1)E.Installation:1.At pipe supports, weld pipe covering protection saddles to pipe, except where MS-SP58, type 3 pipe clamps are utilized.2.Insulation shall be firmly applied, joints butted tightly, mechanically fastened by stainless steel wires on 300 mm (12 inch) centers.3.At support points, fill and thoroughly pack space between pipe covering protective saddle bearing area.4.Terminate insulation and jacket hard and tight at anchor points.5.Terminate insulation at piping facilities not insulated with a 45 degree chamfered section of insulating and finishing cement covered with jacket.6.On calcium silicate, mineral fiber and rigid closed-cell phenolic foam systems, insulated flanged fittings, strainers and valves with sections of pipe insulation cut, fitted and arranged neatly and firmly wired in place. Fill all cracks, voids and coat outer surface with insulating cement. Install jacket. Provide similar construction on welded and threaded fittings on calcium silicate systems or use premolded fitting insulation.7.On mineral fiber systems, insulate welded and threaded fittings more than 50 mm (2 inches) in diameter with compressed blanket insulation (minimum 2/1) and finish with jacket or PVC cover.8.Insulate fittings 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller with mastic finishing material and cover with jacket.9.Insulate valve bonnet upto valve side of bonnet flange to permit bonnet flange removal without disturbing insulation.10.Install jacket smooth, tight and neatly finish all edges. Over wrap ASJ butt strips by 50 percent. Secure aluminum jacket with stainless steel bands 300 mm (12 inches) on center or aluminum screws on 200 mm (4 inch) centers.11.Do not insulate basket removal flanges on strainers.E N D SECTION 23 07 11 SECTION 23 09 23DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVACPART 1 – GENERAL1.1 DescriptionA.The control system(s) shall be as indicated on the project documents, point list, drawings and described in these specifications. This scope of work shall include a complete and working system that ties into and integrates with the existing Johnson Controls system, including all engineering, programming, controls and installation materials, installation labor, and start-up, training, final project documentation and warranty.C.The Controls Contractor’s work shall include all labor, materials, special tools, equipment, enclosures, power supplies, software, software licenses, Project specific software configurations and database entries, interfaces, wiring, tubing, installation, labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation, submittals, testing, verification, training services, permits and licenses, transportation, shipping, handling, administration, supervision, management, insurance, Warranty, specified services and items required by the Contract for the complete and fully functional Controls Systems.D.Following control devices and systems shall be used to provide the functional requirements of HVAC equipment and systems. 1.Direct Digital Control (DDC) of HVAC equipment and systems with electric or electronic positioning of valves and dampers.2.Humidifiers and similar units for control of room environment conditions may be equipped with integral controls furnished and installed by the equipment manufacturer or field mounted. Refer to equipment specifications and as indicated in project documents. E.Connect the new work to the existing ECC system or operator workstation manufactured by Johnson Controls located in Boiler Plant. The existing CPU/Monitor, printer, and other peripherals may be used to form a single operator workstation. New system including interface to existing systems and equipment shall operate and function as one complete system including one database of control point objects and global control logic capabilities. Facility operators shall have complete operations and control capability over all systems, new and existing including; monitoring, trending, graphing, scheduling, alarm management, global point sharing, global strategy deployment, graphical operations interface and custom reporting as specified. Modify the existing ECC, if necessary, to accommodate the additional control points.F.The control subcontractor shall supply as required, all necessary hardware equipment and software packages to interface between any existing and new system Network Area Controllers (NAC) as part of this contract. Number of area controllers required is dependent on the type and quantity of devices, hardware and software points provided. Network area controllers are same as remote controller units (RCU).G.The control systems shall be designed such that each mechanical system shall operate under stand-alone mode. Temperature Controls contractor shall provide controllers for each mechanical system. In the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of any other controller, the control system shall continue to operate independently. Failure of the ECC shall have no effect on the field controllers, including those involved with global strategies. H.The Top End of the NAC shall communicate using American Society of Heating and Refrigerating Engineers/American National Standards Institute (ASHRAE/ANSI) Standard 135(BACnet) protocol. The NAC shall reside on the BACnet/IP Ethernet (ISO 8802-3) local area network, and provide information via standard BACnet object types and application services. I.The intent of this specification is to provide a connection to the existing control system.1.Power wiring shall not be run in conduit with communications trunk wiring or signal or control wiring operating at 100 volts or less. 1.2 Related workA.Section 28 31 00, FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM.B.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.C.Section 21 13 13, WET PIPE FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS.D.Section 23 21 13, HYDRONIC PIPING and Section 23?22?13, STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING.E.Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS.F.Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.G.Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.H.Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.I.Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW).J.Section 26 27 26, WIRING DEVICES.1.3 definitionA.Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem; A prescribed set of well-defined rules or processes for the solution of a problem in a finite number of steps.B.ACU: Auxiliary Control Unit (ACU) used for controls of air handling units, reports to RCU. C.Analog: A continuously varying signal value (e.g., temperature, current, velocity etc.D.BACnet: Building Automation Control Network Protocol, ASHRAE Standard 135.E.Baud: It is a signal change in a communication link. One signal change can represent one or more bits of information depending on type of transmission scheme. Simple peripheral communication is normally one bit per Baud. (e.g., Baud rate = 78,000 Baud/sec is 78,000 bits/sec, if one signal change = 1 bit).F.Binary: A two-state system where a high signal level represents an "ON" condition and an "OFF" condition is represented by a low signal level.G.BMP or bmp: Suffix, computerized image file, used after the period in a DOS-based computer file to show that the file is an image stored as a series of pixels. H.Bus Topology: A network topology that physically interconnects workstations and network devices in parallel on a network segment.I.Control Unit (CU): Generic term for any controlling unit, stand-alone, microprocessor based, digital controller residing on secondary LAN or Primary LAN, used for local controls or global controls. In this specification, there are three types of control units are used; Unitary Control Unit (UCU), Auxiliary Control Unit (ACU), and Remote Control Unit (RCU).J.Deadband: A temperature range over which no heating or cooling is supplied, i.e., 22-25 degrees C (72-78 degrees F), as opposed to a single point change over or overlap).K.Diagnostic Program: A software test program, which is used to detect and report system or peripheral malfunctions and failures. Generally, this system is performed at the initial startup of the system.L.Direct Digital Control (DDC): Microprocessor based control including Analog/Digital conversion and program logic. A control loop or subsystem in which digital and analog information is received and processed by a microprocessor, and digital control signals are generated based on control algorithms and transmitted to field devices in order to achieve a set of predefined conditions.M.Distributed Control System: A system in which the processing of system data is decentralized and control decisions can and are made at the subsystem level. System operational programs and information are provided to the remote subsystems and status is reported back to the Engineering Control Center. Upon the loss of communication with the Engineering Control center, the subsystems shall be capable of operating in a stand-alone mode using the last best available data.N.Download: The electronic transfer of programs and data files from a central computer or operation workstation with secondary memory devices to remote computers in a network (distributed) system.O.DXF: An AutoCAD 2-D graphics file format. Many CAD systems import and export the DXF format for graphics interchange. P.Electrical Control: A control circuit that operates on line or low voltage and uses a mechanical means, such as a temperature sensitive bimetal or bellows, to perform control functions, such as actuating a switch or positioning a potentiometer.Q.Electronic Control: A control circuit that operates on low voltage and uses a solid-state components to amplify input signals and perform control functions, such as operating a relay or providing an output signal to position an actuator.R.Engineering Control Center (ECC): The centralized control point for the intelligent control network. The ECC comprises of personal computer and connected devices to form a single workstation. S.Ethernet: A trademark for a system for exchanging messages between computers on a local area network using coaxial, fiber optic, or twisted-pair cables.T.Firmware: Firmware is software programmed into read only memory (ROM) chips. Software may not be changed without physically altering the chip.U.FTT-10: Echelon Transmitter-Free Topology Transceiver.V.GIF: Abbreviation of Graphic interchange format. W.Graphic Program (GP): Program used to produce images of air handler systems, fans, chillers, pumps, and building spaces. These images can be animated and/or color-coded to indicate operation of the equipment.X.Graphic Sequence of Operation: It is a graphical representation of the sequence of operation, showing all inputs and output logical blocks.Y.I/O Unit: The section of a digital control system through which information is received and transmitted. I/O refers to analog input (AI, digital input (DI), analog output (AO) and digital output (DO). Analog signals are continuous and represent temperature, pressure, flow rate etc, whereas digital signals convert electronic signals to digital pulses (values), represent motor status, filter status, on-off equipment etc.Z.I/P: Internet Protocol-global network, connecting workstations and other host computers, servers etc. to share the information. AA.JPEG: A standardized image compression mechanism stands for Joint Photographic Experts Group, the original name of the committee that wrote the standard.BB.Local Area Network (LAN): A communication bus that interconnects operator workstation and digital controllers for peer-to-peer communications, sharing resources and exchanging .LonMark: An association comprising of suppliers and installers of LonTalk products. The Association provides guidelines for the implementation of the LonTalk protocol to ensure interoperability through Standard implementation.DD.LonTalk: An open standard protocol developed by the Echelon Corporation that uses a “Neuron Chip” for communication.EE.LonWorks: Network technology developed by the Echelon Corporation. work: A set of computers or other digital devices communicating with each other over a medium such as wire, coax, fiber optics cable etc.work Area Controller: Digital controller, supports a family of auxiliary control units and unitary control units, and communicates with peer-to-peer network for transmission of global data.work Repeater: A device that receives data packet from one network and rebroadcasts to another network. No routing information is added to the protocol.II.MS/TP: Master-slave/token-passing.JJ.Operating system (OS): Software, which controls the execution of computer application programs.KK.PCX: File type for an image file. When photographs are scanned onto a personal computer they can be saved as PCX files and viewed or changed by a special application program as Photo Shop.LL.Peripheral: Different components that make the control system function as one unit. Peripherals include monitor, printer, and I/O unit. MM.Peer-to-Peer: A networking architecture that treats all network stations as equal partners. NN.PICS: Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement.OO.UCU: Unitary Control Unit, digital controller, dedicated to a specific piece of equipment, such as VAV boxes, chillers, fan coil units, heat exchangers etc.1.4 quality assuranceA.Criteria: 1.The Controls and Instrumentation System Contractor shall be a primary equipment manufacturer-owned branch office that is regularly engaged in the engineering, programming, installation and service of total integrated Facility Management Systems of similar size, scope and complexity to the EEC specified in this Contract. Distributors, manufacturer’s representatives and wholesalers will not be acceptable. 2.Single Source Responsibility of subcontractor: The Contractor shall obtain hardware and software supplied under this Section and delegates the responsibility to a single source controls installation subcontractor. The controls subcontractor shall be responsible for the complete design, installation of the system. The controls subcontractor shall be in the business of design, installation and service of such building automation control systems similar in size and complexity.3.Equipment and Materials: Equipment and materials shall be cataloged products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production and installation of HVAC control systems. Products shall be manufacturer’s latest standard design and have been tested and proven in actual use.4.The controls subcontractor shall provide a list of no less than five similar projects which have building control systems as specified in this Section. These projects must be on-line and functional such that the Department of Veterans Affairs (VA) representative would observe the control systems in full operation.5.The controls subcontractor shall have (minimum of three years) experience in design and installation of building automation systems similar in performance to those specified in this Section. Provide evidence of experience by submitting resumes of the project manager, the local branch manager, project engineer, the application engineering staff, and the electronic technicians who would be involved with the supervision, the engineering, and the installation of the control systems. Training and experience of these personnel shall not be less than three years. Failure to disclose this information will be a ground for disqualification of the supplier.6.The controls subcontractor shall have in-place facility within 50 miles with technical staff, spare parts inventory for the next five (5) years, and necessary test and diagnostic equipment to support the control systems. 7.Provide a competent and experienced Project Manager employed by the Controls Contractor. The Project Manager shall be supported as necessary by other Contractor employees in order to provide professional engineering, technical and management service for the work. The Project Manager shall attend scheduled Project Meetings as required and shall be empowered to make technical, scheduling and related decisions on behalf of the Controls Contractor. B.Codes and Standards:1.All work shall conform to the applicable Codes and Standards.2.Electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC Regulation, Part 15, Governing Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Interference, and be so labeled. 3.Peer-to-peer controllers, unitary controllers shall conform to the requirements of UL 916, Category PAZX. 1.5 performanceA.The system shall conform to the following: 1.Object Command: The maximum time between the command of a binary object by the operator and the reaction by the device shall be (10) seconds. Analog objects shall start to adjust within (3) seconds.2.Object Scan: All changes of state and change of analog values shall be transmitted over the high-speed network such that any data used or displayed at a controller or work-station will be current, within the prior (10) seconds.3.Alarm Response Time: The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when it is annunciated at the workstation shall not exceed (10) seconds.4.Program Execution Frequency: Custom and standard applications shall be capable of running as often as once every (5) seconds. The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.5.Performance: Programmable Controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control loops at a selectable frequency from at least once every five (5) seconds. The controller shall scan and update the process value and output generated by this calculation at this same frequency.6.Multiple Alarm Annunciations: All workstations on the network shall receive alarms within (5) seconds of each other.7.Reporting Accuracy: Listed below are minimum acceptable reporting accuracies for all values reported by the specified system:Measured VariableReported AccuracySpace temperature ±0.5 degrees C (±1 degrees F)Ducted air temperature±1.0 degrees C [±2 degrees F]Outdoor air temperature±1.0 degrees C [±2 degrees F]Water temperature ±0.5 degrees C [±1 degrees F]Relative humidity ±2 percent RH Water flow ±5 percent of full scaleAir flow (terminal) ±10 percent of reading Air flow (measuring stations)±5 percent of readingAir pressure (ducts)±25 Pa [±0.1 "W.G.]Air pressure (space)±3 Pa [±0.001 "W.G.]Water pressure ±2 percent of full scale *Note 1Electrical Power5 percent of reading Note 1: for both absolute and differential pressure 1.6 WarrantyA.Labor and materials for control systems shall be warranted for a period as specified under Warranty in FAR clause 52.246-21.B.Control system failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no cost or reduction in service to the owner. The system includes all computer equipment, transmission equipment, and all sensors and control devices.C.Controls and Instrumentation subcontractor shall be responsible for temporary operations and maintenance of the control systems during the construction period until training of facility operators and acceptance of the project by VA.1.7 SUBMITTALSA.Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer’s literature and data for all components including the following:1.A wiring diagram for each type of input device and output device including DDC controllers, modems, repeaters, etc. Diagram shall show how the device is wired and powered, showing typical connections at the digital controllers and each power supply, as well as the device itself. Show for all field connected devices, including but not limited to, control relays, motor starters, electric or electronic actuators, and temperature pressure, flow and humidity sensors and transmitters.2.A diagram of each terminal strip, including digital controller terminal strips, terminal strip location, termination numbers and the associated point names.3.Control dampers and control valves schedule, including the size and pressure drop.4.Installation instructions for smoke dampers and combination smoke/fire dampers, if furnished.5.Catalog cut sheets of all equipment used. This includes, but is not limited to DDC controllers, panels, peripherals, airflow measuring stations and associated components, and auxiliary control devices such as sensors, actuators, and control dampers. When manufacturer’s cut sheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data specifically applicable to the project shall be highlighted. Each submitted piece of literature and drawings should clearly reference the specification and/or drawings that it supposed to represent.6.Sequence of operations for each HVAC system and the associated control diagrams. Equipment and control labels shall correspond to those shown on the drawings.7.Color prints of proposed graphics with a list of points for display. 8.Furnish PICS for each BACNET compliant device.C.Product Certificates: Compliance with Article, QUALITY ASSURANCE.D.As Built Control Drawings: 1.Furnish three (3) copies of as-built drawings for each control system. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion.2.Furnish one (1) stick set of applicable control system prints for each mechanical system for wall mounting. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion.3.Furnish one (1) CD-ROM in CAD DWG and/or .DXF format for the drawings noted in subparagraphs above. E.Operation and Maintenance (O/M) Manuals):1.Submit in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, in Specification Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.2.Include the following documentation:a.General description and specifications for all components, including logging on/off, alarm handling, producing trend reports, overriding computer control, and changing set points and other variables.b.Detailed illustrations of all the control systems specified for ease of maintenance and repair/replacement procedures, and complete calibration procedures.c.One copy of the final version of all software provided including operating systems, programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics software.plete troubleshooting procedures and guidelines for all systems.plete operating instructions for all systems.f.Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for all system components including a schedule of tasks for inspection, cleaning and calibration. Provide a list of recommended spare parts needed to minimize downtime.g.Licenses, guaranty, and other pertaining documents for all equipment and systems. h.Training Manuals: Submit the course outline and training material to the Owner for approval three (3) weeks prior to the training to VA facility personnel. These persons will be responsible for maintaining and the operation of the control systems, including programming. The Owner reserves the right to modify any or all of the course outline and training material.F.Submit Performance Report to COTR prior to final inspection.1.8 INSTRUCTIONSA.Instructions to VA operations personnel: Perform in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, in Specification Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, and as noted below. 1.First Phase: Formal instructions to the VA facilities personnel for a total of 16 hours, conducted sometime between the completed installation and prior to the performance test period of the control system, at a time mutually agreeable to the Contractor and the VA.2.Second Phase: This phase of training shall comprise of on the job training during start-up, checkout period, and performance test period. VA facilities personnel will work with the Contractor’s installation and test personnel on a daily basis during start-up and checkout period. During the performance test period, controls subcontractor will provide 8 hours of instructions to the VA facilities personnel.3.The O/M Manuals shall contain approved submittals as outlined in Article 1.7, SUBMITTALS. The Controls subcontractor will review the manual contents with VA facilities personnel during second phase of training.4.Training by independent or franchised dealers who are not direct employees of the controls supplier will not be acceptable.1.9 project CONDITIONS (Environmental Conditions of Operation)A.The ECC and peripheral devices and system support equipment shall be designed to operate in ambient condition of 20 to 35 degrees C (65 to 90 degrees F) at a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent non-condensing.B.The CUs and associated equipment used in controlled environment shall be mounted in NEMA 1 enclosures for operation at 0 to 50 degrees C (32 to 122 degrees F) at a relative humidity of 10 to 90 percent non-condensing.C.The CUs used outdoors shall be mounted in NEMA 4 waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at –40 to 65 degrees C (-40 to 150 degrees F).D.All electronic equipment shall operate properly with power fluctuations of plus 10 percent to minus 15 percent of nominal supply voltage.E.Sensors and controlling devices shall be designed to operate in the environment, which they are sensing or controlling. 1.10 applicable publicationsA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):Standard 135-04BACNET Building Automation and Control NetworksC.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):B16.18-01Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.B16.22-01Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.BPVC-CC-N-04Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code D.American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM):B32-04Standard Specification for Solder MetalB88-03Standard Specifications for Seamless Copper Water TubeB88M-05Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric)B280-03Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Field ServiceD2737-03Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic TubingE.Federal Communication Commission (FCC):Rules and Regulations Title 47 Chapter 1-2001 Part 15..Radio Frequency Devices.F.Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):802.3-05Information Technology-Telecommunications and Information Exchange between Systems-Local and Metropolitan Area Networks- Specific Requirements-Part 3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access method and Physical Layer SpecificationsG.Instrument Society of America (ISA):7.0.01-1996Quality Standard for Instrument AirH.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):70-2008National Electric Code90A-2009Standard for Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems I.Underwriter Laboratories Inc (UL):94-06Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts and Devices and Appliances294-05Access Control System Units 486A/486B-04-Wire Connectors 555S-03Standard for Smoke Dampers916-Rev 2-04Energy Management Equipment1076-05Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems PART 2 – PRODUCTS2.1 Controls System ArchitectureGeneral1.The Controls System shall utilize Metasys Extended Architecture. The Controls Systems shall consist of multiple Nodes and associated equipment connected by industry standard digital and communication network arrangements.2.The Operator Workstations, Servers and principal network computer equipment shall be standard products of recognized major manufacturers available through normal PC and computer vendor channels – not "Clones" assembled by a third-party subcontractor.3.Provide licenses for all software residing on and used by the Controls Systems and transfer these licenses to the Owner prior to completion.4.The networks shall, at minimum, comprise, as necessary, the following:work computer processing, data storage and communication equipment including Servers and digital data processors.b.Routers, bridges, switches, hubs, modems, interfaces and the like communication equipment.c.Active processing network area controllers connected to programmable field panels and controllers together with their power supplies and associated equipment.d.Addressable elements, sensors, transducers and end devices.e.Third-party equipment interfaces as required by the Contract Documents.f.Other components required for a complete and working Control Systems as specified.B.The Specifications for the individual elements and component subsystems shall be minimum requirements and shall be augmented as necessary by the Contractor to achieve both compliance with all applicable codes, standards and to meet all requirements of the Contract Documents.work Architecture1.The Controls Systems Application network shall utilize an open architecture capable of each and all of the following:a.Utilizing standard Ethernet communications and operate at a minimum speed of 10/100 Mb/sec.b.Connecting via BACNET with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135.2.The networks shall utilize only copper and optical fiber communication media as appropriate and shall comply with applicable codes, ordinances and regulations.3.All necessary telephone lines, ISDN lines and internet Service Provider services and connections will be provided by the owner.D.Third Party Interfaces:1.The Controls Systems shall include necessary hardware, equipment and software to allow data communications between the Controls Systems and building systems supplied by other trades.2.The other manufacturers and contractors supplying other associated systems and equipment will provide their necessary hardware, software and start-up at their cost and will cooperate fully with the Controls Contractor in a timely manner and at their cost to ensure complete functional integration.2.2 direct digital controllersA.(NAC) Network Area Controllers shall be stand-alone, multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time digital processor complete with all hardware, software, and communications interfaces, power supplies. The Controls System shall be designed and implemented entirely for use and operation on the Internet. NACs shall have access to data within the industry standard IT network to the Data Server and other NACs as needed to accomplish required global control strategies. 1.NACs shall provide both standalone and networked direct digital control of mechanical and electrical building system controllers as required by the Specifications. The primary NAC shall support a minimum of [5,000] field points together with all associated features, sequences, schedules, applications required for a fully functional distributed processing operation.2.NACs shall monitor and report communication status to the Controls Systems Application. The Controls Systems shall provide a system advisory upon communication failure and restoration.3.All NACs on the network shall be equipped with all software functionality necessary to operate the complete user interface, including graphics, via a Browser connected to the Node on the network or directly via a local port on the NAC.4.All NAC shall be provided with face mounted LED type annunciation to continually display its operational mode, power and communications.5.The controllers shall reside on the BACnet Ethernet (ISO 8802-3) local area network and provide Read (Initiate) and Write (Execute) services as defined in Clauses 15.5 and 15.8, respectively of ASHRAE Standard 135, to communicate BACnet objects. Objects supported shall include: Analog input, analog output, analog value, binary input, binary output, binary value, and device.6.Each NAC shall be provided with the necessary un-interruptible power facilities to ensure its continued normal operation during periods of line power outages of, at minimum, 1-minute duration. Normal functionality shall include all normal software processing, communication with powered field devices and network communications with other powered Controls Systems NAC, Data Servers and OWS. Each NAC shall report its communication status to the Application. The Application shall provide a system advisory upon communication failure and restoration. Each NAC shall retain program, control algorithms, and setpoint information in non-volatile memory in the event of a power failure, and shall return to normal operation upon restoration of power.7.Each NAC shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and program requirements, including the following:a.Device and network management.b.Data sharing.c.Alarm and event management including custom alarm messages for each level alarm for the points noted in the I/O Schedule.d.Energy management.e.Historical trend data for points specified.f.Maintenance report.g.Scheduling.h.Dial up and network communications.i.Manual override monitoring.8.Each NAC shall support firmware upgrades without the need to replace hardware and shall have a minimum of 15 percent spare capacity of secondary system controllers, point capacity and programming functions. 9.Each NAC shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis, and provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery condition; and upon failure shall assume the predetermined failure mode.10.Each NAC shall monitor the status of all overrides and inform the operator that automatic control has inhibited, and allow the operator to manually override automatic or centrally executed command.11.Provide the capability to generate and modify the Controls Systems Application software-based sequences, database elements, associated operational definition information and user-required revisions to same at any designated Workstation together with the means to download same to the associated System Controllers.12.In the event of loss of normal power, there shall be orderly shut down of the controllers to prevent the loss of database or software programming. When power is restored flash memory, battery backup or super capacitor will be automatically loaded into non-volatile flash memory and shall be incorporated for all programming data.B.Auxiliary Control Units (ACUs) shall be stand-alone, multi-tasking, multi-user, real time digital processor complete with all hardware, software and communication interfaces, power supplies, and input/output modular devices. 1.ACUs shall either reside on the existing Metasys Network.2.All ACUs shall be provided with LED type annunciation to continually display its operational mode, power and communications.3.Each ACU shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database including the following:a.Data sharing.b.Device and network management.c.Alarm and event management.d.Scheduling.e.Energy Management.4.Each ACU shall support firmware upgrades without the need to replace hardware and shall have a minimum of 15 percent spare capacity of I/O functions. The type of spares shall be in the same proportion as the implemented functions on the controller, but in no case there shall be less than one point of each implemented I/O type.5.Each ACU shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis, and provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery condition; and upon failure shall assume the predetermined failure mode.6.In the event of loss of normal power, there shall be orderly shut down of the controllers to prevent the loss of database or software programming. When power is restored flash memory, battery backup or super capacitor will be automatically loaded into non-volatile flash memory and shall be incorporated for all programming data. C.Unitary Control Units (UCUs) shall be microprocessor-based. They shall be capable of stand-alone operation, continuing to provide stable control functions if communication is lost with the rest of the system.1.Unitary Control Units shall either reside on the existing Metasys Network.2.Each UCU shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system, including data sharing.3.All UCUs shall be provided with LED type annunciation to continually display its operational mode, power and communications.4.In the event of loss of normal power, there shall be orderly shut down of the controllers to prevent the loss of database or software programming. When power is restored flash memory, battery backup or super capacitor will be automatically loaded into non-volatile flash memory and shall be incorporated for all programming data. D.Provide I/O module that connects sensors and actuators onto the field bus network for use by the direct digital controllers. I/O devices shall support the communication technology specified for each controller.1.Analog input shall allow the monitoring of low voltage (0-10 VDC), current (4-20 ma), or resistance signals (thermistor, RTD). Analog input shall be compatible with, and field configurable to commonly available sensing devices. Analog output shall provide a modulating signal for these control devices.2.Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of on/off signals from remote devices. Binary inputs shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 milliamps to be compatible with commonly available control devices. Binary outputs shall provide on/off operation, or a pulsed low voltage signal for pulse width modulation control. Outputs shall be selectable for either normally open or normally closed operation.3.Binary outputs on remote and auxiliary controllers shall have 3-position (on/off/auto) override switches and status lights. Analog outputs on remote and auxiliary controllers shall have status lights and a 2-position (auto/manual) switch and manually adjustable potentiometer for manual override.4.Each output point shall be provided with a light emitting diode (LED) to indicate status of outputs.munication Ports:1.NACs controllers in the DDC systems shall be connected in a system local area network using protocol defined by ASHRAE Standard 135, BACnet protocol. 2.The control supplier shall provide connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers necessary for inter-network communication. 3.Minimum baud rate between the peer-to-peer controllers in the system LAN shall be maintained at the rate of 10 Mbps. Minimum baud for the low level controllers between UCUs and ACUs, ACUs and NAC’s shall be maintained at the rate of 76 Kbps. 4.Provide RS-232 port with DB-9 or RJ-11 connector for communication with each controller that will allow direct connection of standard printers, operator terminals, modems, and portable laptop operator’s terminal. Controllers shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems, printers or terminals. 5.Database, such as points; status information, reports, system software, custom programs of any one controller shall be readable by any other controller on the network. F.Diagnostic Devices (DD):1.Provide a laptop computer capable of accessing all system data. This device may be connected to any point on the system network or may be connected directly to any digital controller for programming, set-up, and troubleshooting.a.48 X CD RW Drive. b.56K Internal Modem.c.32MB video memory graphics.d.Ethernet IP network card.e.Operating system compatible with PC Microsoft XP professional listed under Operator Workstation.G.Electric Outlet: Provide a single phase, 120 VAC electrical receptacles inside or within 2 meters (6 feet) of the NAC and ACU enclosures for use with test equipment.H.Spare Equipment:1.Provide spare digital controller (CU) boards and spare I/O boards as required. It shall be possible for trained hospital personnel to replace CU boards and load software via the Laptop computer or the ECC.2.Provide a minimum of one spare digital controller board of each type and associated parts including batteries to make at least one complete set of DDC control equipment spares.3.If I/O boards are separate from the CU boards, provide two spare I/O boards for each spare CU board provided above.2.3 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLER SOFTWAREA.The software programs specified in this section shall be commercially available, concurrent, multi-tasking operating system and support the use of software application that operates under DOS or Microsoft Windows.B.All points shall be identified by up to 30-character point name and 16-character point descriptor. The same names shall be used at the operator workstation.C.All control functions shall execute within the stand-alone control units via DDC algorithms. The VA shall be able to customize control strategies and sequences of operations defining the appropriate control loop algorithms and choosing the optimum loop parameters. D.All CU’s shall be capable of being programmed to utilize stored default values for assured fail-safe operation of critical processes. Default values shall be invoked upon sensor failure or, if the primary value is normally provided by the central or another CU, or by loss of bus communication. Individual application software packages shall be structured to assume a fail-safe condition upon loss of input sensors. Loss of an input sensor shall result in output of a sensor-failed message at the ECC workstation. Each ACU and RCU shall have capability for local readouts of all functions. The UCUs shall be read remotely.E.All DDC control loops shall be able to utilize any of the following control modes:1.Two position (on-off, slow-fast) control.2.Proportional control.3.Proportional plus integral (PI) control.4.Proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID) control. All PID programs shall automatically invoke integral wind up prevention routines whenever the controlled unit is off, under manual control of an automation system or time initiated program.5.Automatic tuning of control loops.F.System Security: Operator access shall be secured using individual password and operator’s name. Passwords shall restrict the operator to the level of object, applications, and system functions assigned to him. A minimum of six (6) levels of security for operator access shall be provided. G.Application Software: The CUs shall provide the following programs as a minimum for the purpose of optimizing energy consumption while maintaining comfortable environment for occupants. All application software shall reside and run in the system digital controllers. Editing of the application shall occur at the operator workstation or via a portable workstation, when it is necessary, to access directly the programmable unit.1.Economizer: An economizer program shall be provided for VAV systems. This program shall control the position of air handler relief, return, and outdoors dampers. If the outdoor air dry bulb temperature and humidity fall below changeover set point the energy control center will modulate the dampers to provide 100 percent outdoor air. The operator shall be able to override the economizer cycle and return to minimum outdoor air operation at any time. 2.Event Scheduling: Provide a comprehensive menu driven program to automatically start and stop designated points or a group of points according to a stored time. This program shall provide the capability to individually command a point or group of points. When points are assigned to one common load group it shall be possible to assign variable time advances/delays between each successive start or stop within that group. Scheduling shall be calendar based and advance schedules may be defined up to one year in advance. Advance schedule shall override the day-to-day schedule. The operator shall be able to define the following information: a.Time, day.mands such as on, off, auto.c.Time delays between successive commands.d.Manual overriding of each schedule.e.Allow operator intervention.3.Alarm Reporting: The operator shall be able to determine the action to be taken in the event of an alarm. Alarms shall be routed to the appropriate workstations based on time and events. An alarm shall be able to start programs, login the event, print and display the messages. The system shall allow the operator to prioritize the alarms to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator’s response to critical alarms. A minimum of six (6) priority levels of alarms shall be provided for each point.4.Remote Communications: The system shall have the ability to dial out in the event of an alarm to workstations and alpha-numeric pagers. The alarm message shall include the name of the calling location, the device that generated the alarm, and the alarm message itself. The operator shall be able to remotely access and operate the system using dial up communications. Remote access shall allow the operator to function the same as local access.5.Maintenance Management (PM): The program shall monitor equipment status and generate maintenance messages based upon the operators defined equipment run time, starts, and/or calendar date limits. A preventative maintenance alarm shall be printed indicating maintenance requirements based on pre-defined run time. Each preventive message shall include point description, limit criteria and preventative maintenance instruction assigned to that limit. A minimum of 480-character PM shall be provided for each component of units such as air handling units. 2.4 sensors (air, water and steam)A.Temperature and Humidity Sensors:1.Electronic Sensors: Provide all remote sensors as required for the systems. All sensors shall be vibration and corrosion resistant for wall, immersion, and/or duct mounting.a.Temperature Sensors: Thermistor type for terminal units and Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) with an integral transmitter type for all other sensors.1)Duct sensors shall be rigid or averaging type as shown on drawings. Averaging sensor shall be a minimum of 1 linear ft of sensing element for each sq ft of cooling coil face area.2)Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable well made of stainless steel, bronze or monel material. Pressure rating of well is to be consistent with the system pressure in which it is to be installed.3)Space sensors shall be equipped with set-point adjustment, override switch, display, and/or communication port as shown on the drawings. Match room thermostats, locking cover.4)Outdoor air temperature sensors shall have watertight inlet fittings and be shielded from direct sunlight.5)Room security sensors shall have stainless steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws.6)Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.7)Output Signal: 4-20 ma.b.Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensing element type.1)Duct and room sensors shall have a sensing range of 20 to 80 percent with accuracy of 2 to 5 percent RH, including hysteresis, linearity, and repeatability. 2)Outdoor humidity sensors shall be furnished with element guard and mounting plate and have a sensing range of 0 to 100 percent RH. 3)4-20 ma continuous output signal.c.Static Pressure Sensors: Non-directional, temperature compensated. 1)4-20 ma output signal.2)0 to 5 inches wg for duct static pressure range.3)0 to 0.25 inch wg for Building static pressure range.2.6 Control cablesAs specified in Division 26.2.7 THERMOSTATS AND HUMIDISTATSA.Room thermostats controlling heating and cooling devices shall have three modes of operation (heating - null or dead band - cooling). Thermostats for patient bedrooms shall have capability of being adjusted to eliminate null or dead band. Wall mounted thermostats shall have // polished or brushed aluminum finish, setpoint range and temperature display and external adjustment:1.Electronic Thermostats: Solid-state, microprocessor based, programmable to daily, weekend, and holiday schedules.a.Public Space Thermostat: Public space temperature sensor shall be a platinum sensor and shall have a visible means of set point adjustment, via slider adjustment. b.Patient Room Thermostats: Platinum sensor with set point adjustment and an indicator.c.Mental Health Patient Room Sensors: Electronic duct sensor as noted under Article 2.4. d.Battery replacement without program loss. B.Strap-on thermostats shall be enclosed in a dirt-and-moisture proof housing with fixed temperature switching point and single pole, double throw switch.C.Freezestats shall have a minimum of 300 mm (one linear foot) of sensing element for each 0.093 square meter (one square foot) of coil area. A freezing condition at any increment of 300 mm (one foot) anywhere along the sensing element shall be sufficient to operate the thermostatic element.2.8 SPECIAL CONTROLLERSC.Room Differential Pressure Controller: The differential pressure in isolation rooms shall be maintained by controlling the quantity of air exhausted from or supplied to the room. A sensor-controller shall measure and control the velocity of air flowing into or out of the room through a sampling tube installed in the wall separating the room from the adjacent space, and display the value on its monitor. The sensor controller shall meet the following as a minimum: 1.Operating range: -0.200000 to +0.20000 inches of water 2.Resolution: 5 percent of reading3.Accuracy: +/- 10 percent of reading +/- 0.00001 inches of water4.Analog output: 0-10 VDC or 4-20 ma 5.Operating temperature range: 32-120 degrees F2.9 FINAL CONTROL ELEMENTS AND OPERATORSA.Fail Safe Operation: Control valves and dampers shall provide "fail safe" operation in either the normally open or normally closed position as required for freeze, moisture, and smoke or fire protection.B.Spring Ranges: Range as required for system sequencing and to provide tight shut-off.C.Power Operated Control Dampers (other than VAV Boxes): Factory fabricated, balanced type dampers. All modulating dampers shall be opposed blade type and gasketed. Blades for two-position, duct-mounted dampers shall be parallel, airfoil (streamlined) type for minimum noise generation and pressure drop.1.Leakage: Except as specified in subparagraph 2 below, maximum leakage in closed position shall not exceed 7 L/S (15 CFMs) differential pressure for outside air and exhaust dampers and 200 L/S/ square meter (40 CFM/sq. ft.) at 50 mm (2 inches) differential pressure for other dampers.2.Frame shall be galvanized steel channel with seals as required to meet leakage criteria.3.Blades shall be galvanized steel or aluminum, 200 mm (8 inch) maximum width, with edges sealed as required. 4.Bearing shall be nylon, bronze sleeve or ball type.5.Hardware shall be zinc-plated steel. Connected rods and linkage shall be non-slip. Working parts of joints shall be brass, bronze, nylon or stainless steel.D.Operators shall be electric or pneumatic type operating at 140 kPa (20 psig) as required for proper operation.1.See drawings for required control operation.2.Metal parts shall be aluminum, mill finish galvanized steel, or zinc plated steel or stainless steel.3.Maximum air velocity and pressure drop through free area the dampers:a.Smoke damper in air handling unit; 210 meter per minute (700 fpm).b.Duct mounted damper; 600 meter per minute (2000 fpm). c.Maximum static pressure loss, 50 Pascal (0.20 inches water gage).E.Smoke Dampers: Dampers and operators are specified in Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS. Control of these dampers is specified under this Section.F.Control Valves: 1.Valves shall be rated for a minimum of 150 percent of system operating pressure at the valve location but not less than 900 kPa (125 psig).2.Valves 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller shall be bronze body with threaded or flare connections.3.Valves 60 mm (2 1/2 inches) and larger shall be bronze or iron body with flanged connections.4.Brass or bronze seats except for valves controlling media above 100 degrees C (210 degrees F), which shall have stainless steel seats.5.Flow characteristics:a.Three way valves shall have a linear relation or equal percentage relation of flow versus value position.b.Two-way valves position versus flow relation shall be linear for steam and equal percentage for water flow control.6.Maximum pressure drop:a.Two position steam control: 20 percent of inlet gauge pressure.b.Modulating Steam Control: 80 percent of inlet gauge pressure (acoustic velocity limitation).c.Modulating water flow control, greater of 3 meters (10 feet) of water or the pressure drop through the apparatus.d.Two position water valves shall be line size.G.Damper and Valve Operators and Relays:1.Electric damper operator shall provide full modulating control of dampers. A linkage and pushrod shall be furnished for mounting the actuator on the damper frame internally in the duct or externally in the duct or externally on the duct wall, or shall be furnished with a direct-coupled design.2.Electronic damper operators: VAV Box actuator shall be mounted on the damper axle or shall be of the air valve design, and shall provide complete modulating control of the damper. The motor shall have a closure torque of 35-inch pounds minimum with full torque applied at close off to attain minimum leakage.2.11 AIR FLOW CONTROLA.Airflow and static pressure shall be controlled via digital controller (CUs) with inputs from airflow control measuring stations and static pressure inputs as specified. Controller outputs shall be true analog output signals to pneumatic positioners or variable frequency drives. Pulse width modulation outputs are not acceptable. The CUs shall include the capability to control via simple proportional (P) control, proportional plus integral (PI), proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID), and on-off. The airflow control programs shall be factory-tested programs that are documented in the literature of the control manufacturer.B.Air Flow Measuring Station -- Pneumatic Type:1.Airflow measuring stations shall measure airflow by the pitot tube traverse method. Each unit shall consist of a network of static and total pressure sensors, factory positioned and connected in parallel, to produce an equalized velocity pressure. The measured velocity pressure converted to airflow (cfm) shall have accuracy within 2 percent of the full scale throughout the velocity range from 200 to 1,200 meter per minute (700 to 4,000 fpm).2.Airflow measuring stations shall consist of 16-gauge sheet metal casing, an aluminum air velocity treatment and air straightening section with an open face area not less than 97 percent and a total and static pressure sensing manifold made of copper. Each station shall contain noncombustible sensors which shall be incapable of producing toxic gases or fumes in the event of elevated duct temperatures. All interconnecting tubing shall be internal to the unit with the exception of one total pressure and one static pressure meter connection.3.Each air flow measuring station shall be installed to meet at least the manufacturer’s minimum installation conditions and shall not amplify the sound level within the duct. The maximum resistance to airflow shall not exceed 0.3 times the velocity head for the duct stations and 0.6 times the velocity head for the fan stations. The unit shall be suitable for continuous operation up to a temperature of 120 degrees C (250 degrees F).4.Differential pressure transducers shall measure and transmit pressure signals to the direct digital controller CU..C.Static Pressure Measuring Station:1.Static Pressure Control: a.Systems shall consist of one or more static pressure sensors and transmitters along with relays or auxiliary devices as required for a complete functional system. The span of the transmitter shall not exceed two times the design static pressure at the point of measurement. The output of the transmitter shall be true representation of the input pressure with plus or minus 25 Pascal (0.1 inch) W.G. of the true input pressure.1)Static pressure sensors shall have the same requirements as Airflow Measuring Devices except that total pressure sensors are optional, and only multiple static pressure sensors positioned on an equal area basis connected to a network of headers are required.2)For systems with multiple major trunk supply ducts, furnish a static pressure transmitter for each trunk duct. The transmitter signal representing the lowest static pressure shall be selected and this shall be the input signal to the CU.3)The CU shall receive the static pressure transmitter signal and CU shall provide a control output signal to the supply fan capacity control device. The control mode shall be proportional plus integral (PI) (automatic reset) and where required shall also include derivative mode.4)In systems with multiple static pressure transmitters, provide a switch located near the fan discharge to prevent excessive pressure during abnormal operating conditions.D.Constant Volume Control: 1.Systems shall consist of an air flow measuring station along with such relays and auxiliary devices as required to produce a complete functional system. The transmitter shall receive its air flow signal and static pressure signal from the flow measuring station and shall have a span not exceeding three times the design flow rate. The CU shall receive the transmitter signal and shall provide an output to the fan volume control device to maintain a constant flow rate. The CU shall provide proportional plus integral (PI) (automatic reset) control mode and where required also inverse derivative mode. Overall system accuracy shall be plus or minus the equivalent of 2 Pascal (0.008 inch) velocity pressure as measured by the flow station.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1INSTALLATIONA.General:1.Examine project plans for control devices and equipment locations; and report any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions to COTR for resolution before proceeding for installation.2.Not Used.3.Install equipment, piping, wiring /conduit parallel to or at right angles to building lines.4.Install all equipment and piping in readily accessible locations. Do not run tubing and conduit concealed under insulation or inside ducts.5.Mount control devices and conduit located on ducts and apparatus with external insulation on standoff support to avoid interference with insulation.6.Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.7.Run tubing and wire connecting devices on or in control cabinets parallel with the sides of the cabinet neatly racked to permit tracing. 8.Install equipment level and plum.B.Piping Installation:1.All piping associated with smoke control shall be hard drawn copper.2. Except for short apparatus connections, non-metallic tubing in all exposed locations, including mechanical rooms shall be protected from damage by installing the tubing in electric conduit or raceways. Provide protective grommet where tubing exits conduit.3.Non-metallic tubing exposed to outdoors shall be protected by a sleeve or larger tubing. 4.In concealed but accessible locations such as above lay-in ceilings, non-metallic tubing may be run without conduit or raceway.5.All tubing which is not run in conduit or raceway, both metallic and non-metallic, shall be neatly routed and securely fastened to building structure at not more than 36-IN. intervals. 6.Welding shall be performed in accordance with Section 23 21 13, HYDRONIC PIPING and Section 23?22?13, STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING.7.Label and identify control air piping in accordance with specification Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.C.Electrical Wiring Installation:1.Install conduits and wiring in accordance with Specification Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.2.Install signal and communication cables in accordance with Specification Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW).3.Install conduit and wiring between operator workstation(s), digital controllers, electrical panels, indicating devices, instrumentation, miscellaneous alarm points, thermostats, and relays as shown on the drawings or as required under this section. All wiring shall be installed in conduits, except for wiring above accessible ceilings, which may be plenum rated cable with no conduit. 4.Install all electrical work required for a fully functional system and not shown on electrical plans or required by electrical specifications. Where low voltage power is required, provide suitable transformers.5.Install all system components in accordance with local Building Code and National Electric Code.a.Splices: Splices in shielded and coaxial cables shall consist of terminations and the use of shielded cable couplers. Terminations shall be in accessible locations. Cables shall be harnessed with cable ties.b.Equipment: Fit all equipment contained in cabinets or panels with service loops, each loop being at least 300 mm (12 inches) long. Equipment for fiber optics system shall be rack mounted, as applicable, in ventilated, self-supporting, code gauge steel enclosure. Cables shall be supported for minimum sag.c.Cable Runs: Keep cable runs as short as possible. Allow extra length for connecting to the terminal board. Do not bend flexible coaxial cables in a radius less than ten times the cable outside diameter.d.Use vinyl tape, sleeves, or grommets to protect cables from vibration at points where they pass around sharp corners, through walls, panel cabinets, etc.6.Conceal cables, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduits and piping are exposed.7.Permanently label or code each point of all field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served. Color-coded cable with cable diagrams may be used to accomplish cable identification.8.Grounding: ground electrical systems per manufacturer’s written requirements for proper and safe operation.D.Install Sensors and Controls:1.Temperature Sensors:a.Install all sensors and instrumentation according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Temperature sensor locations shall be readily accessible, permitting quick replacement and servicing of them without special skills and tools.b.Calibrate sensors to accuracy specified, if not factory calibrated.c.Use of sensors shall be limited to its duty, e.g., duct sensor shall not be used in lieu of room sensor.d.Install room sensors permanently supported on wall frame. They shall be mounted at 1.5 meter (5.0 feet) above the finished floor. e.Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for the environment within which the sensor operates.f.Sensors used in mixing plenum shall be of the averaging of type. Averaging sensors shall be installed in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip.g.All pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells.h.All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their conduits or in the wall to stop air transmitted from other areas affecting sensor reading. i.Permanently mark terminal blocks for identification. Protect all circuits to avoid interruption of service due to short-circuiting or other conditions. Line-protect all wiring that comes from external sources to the site from lightning and static electricity.2.Pressure Sensors:a.Install duct static pressure sensor tips facing directly downstream of airflow. b.Install high-pressure side of the differential switch between the pump discharge and the check valve.c.Install snubbers and isolation valves on steam pressure sensing devices. 3.Actuators:a.Mount and link damper and valve actuators according to manufacturer’s written instructions.b.Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed position.c.Check operation of valve/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates valve smoothly in both open and closed position. 4.Flow Switches:a.Install flow switch according to manufacturer’s written instructions.b.Mount flow switch a minimum of 5 pipe diameters up stream and 5 pipe diameters downstream or 600 mm (2 feet) whichever is greater, from fittings and other obstructions.c.Assure correct flow direction and alignment.d.Mount in horizontal piping-flow switch on top of the pipe.E.Installation of Network:1.Ethernet:a.The network shall employ Ethernet LAN architecture, as defined by IEEE 802.3. The Network Interface shall be fully Internet Protocol (IP) compliant allowing connection to currently installed IEEE 802.3, Compliant Ethernet Networks.b.The network shall directly support connectivity to a variety of cabling types. As a minimum provide the following connectivity: 10 Base 2 (ThinNet RG-58 A/U Coaxial cabling with BNC connectors), 10 Base T (Twisted-Pair RJ-45 terminated UTP cabling).2.Third Party Interfaces: Contractor shall integrate real-time data from building systems by other trades and databases originating from other manufacturers as specified and required to make the system work as one system. F.Installation of Digital Controllers and Programming:1.Provide a separate digital control panel for each major piece of equipment, such as air handling unit, chiller, pumping unit etc. Points used for control loop reset such as outdoor air, outdoor humidity, or space temperature could be located on any of the remote control units.2.Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and trend logging. There shall be a minimum of 25 percent of available memory free for future use.3.System point names shall be modular in design, permitting easy operator interface without the use of a written point index.4.Provide software programming for the applications intended for the systems specified, and adhere to the strategy algorithms provided. 5.Provide graphics for each piece of equipment and floor plan in the building. This includes each chiller, cooling tower, air handling unit, fan, terminal unit, boiler, pumping unit etc. These graphics shall show all points dynamically as specified in the point list.3.2SYSTEM VALIDATION AND DEMONSTRATIONA.As part of final system acceptance, a System Demonstration is required (see below). Prior to start of this Demonstration, the contractor is to perform a complete Validation of all aspects of the Controls and Instrumentation System.B.Validation1.Prepare and submit for approval a Validation Test Plan including Test Procedures for the performance verification tests. Test Plan shall address all specified functions of the Engineering Control Center and all specified sequences of operation. Explain in detail actions and expected results used to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this specification. Explain the method for simulating the necessary conditions of operation used to demonstrate performance of the system. Test Plan shall include a Test Check List to be used by the Installer’s agent to check and initial that each test has been successfully completed. Deliver Test Plan documentation for the performance verification tests to the owner’s representative 30 days prior to start of performance verification tests. Provide draft copy of operation and maintenance manual with performance verification test.2.After approval of the Validation Test Plan, Installer shall carry out all tests and procedures therein. Installer shall completely check out, calibrate, and test all connected hardware and software to insure that system performs in accordance with approved specifications and sequences of operation submitted. Installer shall complete and submit Test Check List.C.Demonstration1.System operation and calibration to be demonstrated by the Installer in the presence of the Architect or Owner's representative on random samples of equipment as dictated by the Owner’s representative. Should random sampling indicate improper results, the owner reserves the right to subsequently witness complete calibration of the system at no addition cost to the owner.2.Demonstrate to authorities that all required safeties and life safety functions are fully functional and complete.3.Make accessible , personnel to provide necessary adjustments and corrections to systems as directed by balancing agency.4.The following witnessed demonstrations of field control equipment shall be included:a.Observe HVAC systems in shut down condition. Check dampers and valves for normal position.b.Test application software for its ability to communicate with digital controllers, operator workstation, and uploading and downloading of control programs.c.Demonstrate the software ability to edit the control program off-line.d.Demonstrate reporting of alarm conditions for each alarm and ensure that these alarms are received at the assigned location, including operator workstations.e.Demonstrate ability of software program to function for the intended applications-trend reports, change in status etc.f.Demonstrate via graphed trends to show the sequence of operation is executed in correct manner, and that the HVAC systems operate properly through the complete sequence of operation, e.g., seasonal change, occupied/unoccupied mode, and warm-up condition.g.Demonstrate hardware interlocks and safeties functions, and that the control systems perform the correct sequence of operation after power loss and resumption of power loss.h.Prepare and deliver to the VA graphed trends of all control loops to demonstrate that each control loop is stable and the set points are maintained. i.Demonstrate that each control loop responds to set point adjustment and stabilizes within one (1) minute. Control loop trend data shall be instantaneous and the time between data points shall not be greater than one (1) minute. E N D SECTION 23 09 23 SECTION 23 21 13HYDRONIC PIPINGPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.Water piping to connect HVAC equipment, including the following: 1.Chilled water, condenser water, heating hot water and drain piping. 2.Extension of domestic water makeup piping. 3.Glycolwater piping. 1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.B.Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.C.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division 23.D.Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, and BOILER PLANT INSULATION: Piping insulation.E.Section 23 23 00, REFRIGERANT PIPING: Refrigerant piping and refrigerants.F.Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC: Temperature and pressure sensors and valve operators.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION, which includes welding qualifications. B.Submit prior to welding of steel piping a certificate of Welder’s certification. The certificate shall be current and not more than one year old.C.For mechanical pressed sealed fittings, only tools of fitting manufacturer shall be used.D.Mechanical pressed fittings shall be installed by factory trained workers.E.All grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be the same manufacturer as the grooved components.1.All castings used for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, etc., shall be date stamped for quality assurance and traceability.1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Pipe and equipment supports. 2.Pipe and tubing, with specification, class or type, and schedule. 3.Pipe fittings, including miscellaneous adapters and special fittings. 4.Flanges, gaskets and bolting. 5.Grooved joint couplings and fittings. 6.Valves of all types. 7.Strainers. 8.Flexible connectors for water service. 9.Pipe alignment guides. 10.Expansion joints. 11.Expansion compensators. 12.All specified hydronic system components. 13.Water flow measuring devices. 14.Gages. 15.Thermometers and test wells. 16.Electric heat tracing systems. C. Manufacturer's certified data report, Form No. U1, for ASME pressure vessels: 1.Expansion tanks. D.Submit the welder’s qualifications in the form of a current (less than one year old) and formal certificate. E.Coordination Drawings: Refer to Article, SUBMITTALS of Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION. F.AsBuilt Piping Diagrams: Provide drawing as follows for chilled water, condenser water, and heating hot water system and other piping systems and equipment. 1.One wallmounted stick file with complete set of prints. Mount stick file in the chiller plant or control room along with control diagram stick file.2.One complete set of reproducible drawings. 3.One complete set of drawings in electronic Autocad and pdf format. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. American National Standards Institute, Inc.B.American Society of Mechanical Engineers/American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ASME/ANSI): B1.20.1-83(R2006)Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)B16.406Gray Iron Threaded FittingsB16.18-01Cast Copper Alloy Solder joint Pressure fittings B16.23-02Cast Copper Alloy Solder joint Drainage fittings B40.100-05Pressure Gauges and Gauge AttachmentsC.American National Standards Institute, Inc./Fluid Controls Institute (ANSI/FCI): 70-2-2006Control Valve Seat LeakageD.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):B16.1-98Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged FittingsB16.3-2006Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Class 150 and 300B16.42006Gray Iron Threaded Fittings: (Class 125 and 250) B16.5-2003Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS ? through NPS 24 Metric/Inch StandardB16.9-07Factory Made Wrought Butt Welding FittingsB16.11-05Forged Fittings, Socket Welding and ThreadedB16.18-01Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure FittingsB16.22-01Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.B16.2406Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged FittingsB16.3906Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe UnionsB16.42-06Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged FittingsB31.108Power PipingE.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A47/A47M-99 (2004)Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings A53/A53M-07Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless A106/A106M-08Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for HighTemperature ServiceA12604Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings A18303Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts A216/A216M-08Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High Temperature Service A234/A234M-07Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service A30707Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile StrengthA53684 (2004)Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings A615/A615M-08Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete ReinforcementA653/A 653M-08Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) By the Hot-Dip ProcessB3208Standard Specification for Solder Metal B6202Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings B8803Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube B209-07Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate C177-04 Standard Test Method for Steady State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus C478-09Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections C533-07Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation C552-07Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation D3350-08Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings MaterialsC591-08Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal InsulationD1784-08Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) CompoundD1785-06Poly (Vinyl Chloride0 (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120 D2241-05Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure Rated Pipe (SDR Series)F43906Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 F441/F441M-02Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80 F477-08Elastomeric Seals Gaskets) for Joining Plastic PipeF.American Water Works Association (AWWA): C110-08Ductile Iron and Grey Iron Fittings for WaterC203-02Coal Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipe Lines Enamel and Tape Hot AppliedG.American Welding Society (AWS): B2.1-02Standard Welding Procedure SpecificationH.Copper Development Association, Inc. (CDA): CDA A4015-06Copper Tube HandbookI.Expansion Joint Manufacturer’s Association, Inc. (EJMA):EMJA-2003Expansion Joint Manufacturer’s Association Standards, Ninth EditionJ.Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fitting Industry, Inc.: SP6702aButterfly Valves SP7006Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends SP7105Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded EndsSP8008Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves SP8502Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded EndsSP11096Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared EndsSP12500Gray Iron and Ductile Iron In-line, Spring Loaded, Center-Guided Check ValvesK.National Sanitation Foundation/American National Standards Institute, Inc. (NSF/ANSI): 14-06Plastic Piping System Components and Related Materials 50-2009aEquipment for Swimming Pools, Spas, Hot Tubs and other Recreational Water Facilities – Evaluation criteria for materials, components, products, equipment and systems for use at recreational water facilities 61-2008Drinking Water System Components – Health EffectsL.Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association: TEMA 9th Edition, 2007 1.6 Spare partsA.For mechanical pressed sealed fittings provide tools required for each pipe size used at the facility.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS, PIPE SLEEVES, AND WALL AND CEILING PLATES A.Provide in accordance with Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION. 2.2 PIPE AND TUBING A.GlycolWater : 1.Steel: ASTM A53 Grade B, seamless or ERW, Schedule 40.2.Copper water tube option: ASTM B88, Type K or L, hard drawn. B.Cooling Coil Condensate Drain Piping: 1.From air handling units: Copper water tube, ASTM B88, Type M, or schedule 40 PVC plastic piping. 2.From fan coil or other terminal units: Copper water tube, ASTM B88, Type L for runouts and Type M for mains. 2.3 FITTINGS FOR STEEL PIPE A.50 mm (2 inches) and Smaller: Screwed or welded joints. 1.Butt welding: ASME B16.9 with same wall thickness as connecting piping.2.Forged steel, socket welding or threaded: ASME B16.11. 3.Screwed: 150 pound malleable iron, ASME B16.3. 125 pound cast iron, ASME B16.4, may be used in lieu of malleable iron. Bushing reduction of a single pipe size, or use of close nipples, is not acceptable. 4.Unions: ASME B16.39. 5.Water hose connection adapter: Brass, pipe thread to 20 mm (3/4 inch) garden hose thread, with hose cap nut.B.Welded Branch and Tap Connections: Forged steel weldolets, or branchlets and threadolets may be used for branch connections up to one pipe size smaller than the main. Forged steel halfcouplings, ASME B16.11 may be used for drain, vent and gage connections. C.Grooved Mechanical Pipe Couplings and Fittings (Contractor’s Option): Grooved Mechanical Pipe Couplings and Fittings may be used, with cut or roll grooved pipe, in water service up to 110 degrees C (230 degrees F) in lieu of welded, screwed or flanged connections. All joints must be rigid type. 1.Grooved mechanical couplings: Malleable iron, ASTM A47 or ductile iron, ASTM A536, fabricated in two or more parts, securely held together by two or more trackhead, square, or ovalneck bolts, ASTM A449 and A183. 2.Gaskets: Rubber product recommended by the coupling manufacturer for the intended service. 3.Grooved end fittings: Malleable iron, ASTM A47; ductile iron, ASTM A536; or steel, ASTM A53 or A106, designed to accept grooved mechanical couplings. Tapin type branch connections are acceptable. 2.4 FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBING A.Joints: 1.Solder Joints: Joints shall be made up in accordance with recommended practices of the materials applied. Apply 95/5 tin and antimony on all copper piping.2.Contractor’s Option: Mechanical press sealed fittings, double pressed type, NSF 50/61 approved, with EPDM (ethylene propylene diene monomer) non-toxic synthetic rubber sealing elements for up 65 mm (2-1/2 inch) and below are optional for above ground water piping only. 3.Mechanically formed tee connection in water and drain piping: Form mechanically extracted collars in a continuous operation by drilling pilot hole and drawing out tube surface to form collar, having a height of not less than three times the thickness of tube wall. Adjustable collaring device shall insure proper tolerance and complete uniformity of the joint. Notch and dimple joining branch tube in a single process to provide free flow where the branch tube penetrates the fitting. B.Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24. C.Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.18 cast copper or ANSI/ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper.2.5 FITTINGS FOR PLASTIC PIPING A.Schedule 40, socket type for solvent welding. B.Schedule 40 PVC drain piping: Drainage pattern. C.Chemical feed piping for condenser water treatment: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC), Schedule 80, ASTM F439. 2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A.Provide where copper tubing and ferrous metal pipe are joined. B.50 mm (2 inches) and Smaller: Threaded dielectric union, ASME B16.39. C.65 mm (2 1/2 inches) and Larger: Flange union with dielectric gasket and bolt sleeves, ASME B16.42. D.Temperature Rating, 99 degrees C (210 degrees F). E.Contractor’s option: On pipe sizes 2” and smaller, screwed end brass ball valves // or dielectric nipples// may be used in lieu of dielectric unions.2.7 SCREWED JOINTS A.Pipe Thread: ANSI B1.20. B.Lubricant or Sealant: Oil and graphite or other compound approved for the intended service. 2.8 VALVES A.Asbestos packing is not acceptable. B.All valves of the same type shall be products of a single manufacturer. C.Provide chain operators for valves 150 mm (6 inches) and larger when the centerline is located 2400 mm (8 feet) or more above the floor or operating platform. D.Shut-Off Valves1.Ball Valves (Pipe sizes 2” and smaller): MSS-SP 110, screwed or solder connections, brass or bronze body with chrome-plated ball with full port and Teflon seat at 2760 kPa (400 psig) working pressure rating. Provide stem extension to allow operation without interfering with pipe insulation.E.Globe and Angle Valves 1.Globe Valvesa.50 mm (2 inches) and smaller: MSSSP 80, bronze, 1034 kPa (150 lb.) Globe valves shall be union bonnet with metal plug type disc. 2.Angle Valves: a.50 mm (2 inches) and smaller: MSSSP 80, bronze, 1034 kPa (150 lb.) Angle valves shall be union bonnet with metal plug type disc. F.Check Valves1.Swing Check Valves: a.50 mm (2 inches) and smaller: MSSSP 80, bronze, 1034 kPa (150 lb.), 45 degree swing disc. 2.NonSlam or Silent Check Valve: Spring loaded double disc swing check or internally guided flat disc lift type check for bubble tight shutoff. Provide where check valves are shown in chilled water and hot water piping. Check valves incorporating a balancing feature may be used. a.Body: MSS-SP 125 cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B, or steel, ASTM A216, Class WCB, or ductile iron, ASTM 536, flanged, grooved, or wafer type. b.Seat, disc and spring: 188 stainless steel, or bronze, ASTM B62. Seats may be elastomer material. G.Water Flow Balancing Valves: For flow regulation and shutoff. Valves shall be line size rather than reduced to control valve size.1. Ball or Globe style valve. 2.A dual purpose flow balancing valve and adjustable flow meter, with bronze or cast iron body, calibrated position pointer, valved pressure taps or quick disconnects with integral check valves and preformed polyurethane insulating enclosure. 3.Provide a readout kit including flow meter, readout probes, hoses, flow charts or calculator, and carrying case.H.Automatic Balancing Control Valves: Factory calibrated to maintain constant flow (plus or minus five percent) over system pressure fluctuations of at least 10 times the minimum required for control. Provide standard pressure taps and four sets of capacity charts. Valves shall be line size and be one of the following designs: 1.Gray iron (ASTM A126) or brass body rated 1205 kPa (175 psig) at 93 degrees C (200 degrees F), with stainless steel piston and spring. 2.Brass or ferrous body designed for 2067 kPa (300 psig) service at 121 degrees C (250 degrees F), with corrosion resistant, tamper proof, selfcleaning piston/spring assembly that is easily removable for inspection or replacement. bination assemblies containing ball type shutoff valves, unions, flow regulators, strainers with blowdown valves and pressure temperature ports shall be acceptable. 4.Provide a readout kit including flow meter, probes, hoses, flow charts and carrying case. I.Manual Radiator/Convector Valves: Brass, packless, with position indicator. 2.9 WATER FLOW MEASURING DEVICES A.Minimum overall accuracy plus or minus three percent over a range of 70 to 110 percent of design flow. Select devices for not less than 110 percent of design flow rate. B.Venturi Type: Bronze, steel, or cast iron with bronze throat, with valved pressure sensing taps upstream and at the throat. C.Wafer Type Circuit Sensor: Cast iron wafertype flow meter equipped with readout valves to facilitate the connecting of a differential pressure meter. Each readout valve shall be fitted with an integral check valve designed to minimize system fluid loss during the monitoring process. D.SelfAveraging Annular Sensor Type: Brass or stainless steel metering tube, shutoff valves and quickcoupling pressure connections. Metering tube shall be rotatable so all sensing ports may be pointed downstream when unit is not in use. E.Insertion Turbine Type Sensor: Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC. F.Flow Measuring Device Identification: 1.Metal tag attached by chain to the device. 2.Include meter or equipment number, manufacturer's name, meter model, flow rate factor and design flow rate in l/m (gpm). G.Portable Water Flow Indicating Meters: 1.Minimum 150 mm (6 inch) diameter dial, forged brass body, berylliumcopper bellows, designed for 1205 kPa (175 psig) working pressure at 121 degrees C (250 degrees F). 2.Bleed and equalizing valves. 3.Vent and drain hose and two 3000 mm (10 feet) lengths of hose with quick disconnect connections. 4.Factory fabricated carrying case with hose compartment and a bound set of capacity curves showing flow rate versus pressure differential. 5.Provide one portable meter for each range of differential pressure required for the installed flow devices.H.Permanently Mounted Water Flow Indicating Meters: Minimum 150 mm (6 inch) diameter, or 450 mm (18 inch) long scale, for 120 percent of design flow rate, direct reading in lps (gpm), with three valve manifold and two shutoff valves. 2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS FOR WATER SERVICE A.Flanged Spool Connector:1.Single arch or multiple arch type. Tube and cover shall be constructed of chlorobutyl elastomer with full faced integral flanges to provide a tight seal without gaskets. Connectors shall be internally reinforced with high strength synthetic fibers impregnated with rubber or synthetic compounds as recommended by connector manufacturer, and steel reinforcing rings.2.Working pressures and temperatures shall be as follows:a.Connector sizes 50 mm to 100 mm (2 inches to 4 inches), 1137 kPa (165psig) at 121 degrees C (250 degrees F).b.Connector sizes 125 mm to 300 mm (5 inches to 12 inches), 965 kPa (140 psig) at 121 degrees C (250 degrees F).3.Provide ductile iron retaining rings and control units.B.Mechanical Pipe Couplings:See other fittings specified under Part 2, PRODUCTS.2.11 EXPANSION JOINTS A.Factory built devices, inserted in the pipe lines, designed to absorb axial cyclical pipe movement which results from thermal expansion and contraction. This includes factory-built or field-fabricated guides located along the pipe lines to restrain lateral pipe motion and direct the axial pipe movement into the expansion joints.B.Manufacturing Quality Assurance: Conform to Expansion Joints Manufacturers Association Standards.C.Bellows Internally Pressurized Type: 1.Multiple corrugations of Type 304 or Type A240-321 stainless steel. 2.Internal stainless steel sleeve entire length of bellows. 3.External cast iron equalizing rings for services exceeding 340 kPa (50 psig). 4.Welded ends. 5.Design shall conform to standards of EJMA and ASME B31.1. 6.External tie rods designed to withstand pressure thrust force upon anchor failure if one or both anchors for the joint are at change in direction of pipeline.7.Integral external cover.D.Bellows Externally Pressurized Type:1.Multiple corrugations of Type 304 stainless steel. 2.Internal and external guide integral with joint. 3.Design for external pressurization of bellows to eliminate squirm.4.Welded ends. 5.Conform to the standards of EJMA and ASME B31.1. 6.Threaded connection at bottom, 25 mm (one inch) minimum, for drain or drip point.7.Integral external cover and internal sleeve.E.Expansion Compensators: 1.Corrugated bellows, externally pressurized, stainless steel or bronze. 2.Internal guides and antitorque devices. 3.Threaded ends. 4.External shroud. 5.Conform to standards of EJMA. F.Expansion Joint (Contractor’s Option): 2415 kPa (350 psig) maximum working pressure, steel pipe fitting consisting of telescoping body and slip-pipe sections, PTFE modified polyphenylene sulfide coated slide section, with grooved ends, suitable for axial end movement to 75 mm (3 inch).G.Expansion Joint Identification: Provide stamped brass or stainless steel nameplate on each expansion joint listing the manufacturer, the allowable movement, flow direction, design pressure and temperature, date of manufacture, and identifying the expansion joint by the identification number on the contract drawings.H.Guides: Provide factory-built guides along the pipe line to permit axial movement only and to restrain lateral and angular movement. Guides must be designed to withstand a minimum of 15 percent of the axial force which will be imposed on the expansion joints and anchors. Field-built guides may be used if detailed on the contract drawings.I.Supports: Provide saddle supports and frame or hangers for heat exchanger. Mounting height shall be adjusted to facilitate gravity return of steam condensate. Construct supports from steel, weld joints.2.12 HYDRONIC SYSTEM COMPONENTS A.Diaphragm Type PrePressurized Expansion Tank: ASME Pressure Vessel Code construction for 861 kPa (125 psig) working pressure, welded steel shell, rustproof coated, with a flexible elastomeric diaphragm suitable for a maximum operating temperature of 116 degrees C (240 degrees F). Provide Form No. U1. Tank shall be equipped with system connection, drain connection, standard air fill valve and be factory precharged to a minimum of 83 kPa (12 psig). B.Pressure Relief Valve: Bronze or iron body and bronze or stainless steel trim, with testing lever. Comply with ASME Code for Pressure Vessels, Section 8, and bear ASME stamp. C.Automatic Air Vent Valves (where shown): Cast iron or semisteel body, 1034 kPa (150 psig) working pressure, stainless steel float, valve, valve seat and mechanism, minimum 15 mm (1/2 inch) water connection and 6 mm (1/4 inch) air outlet. Air outlet shall be piped to the nearest floor drain. TREATMENT, Article 2.2, CHEMICAL TREATMENT FOR CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS.2.13 GAGES, PRESSURE AND COMPOUND A.ASME B40.100, Accuracy Grade 1A, (pressure, vacuum, or compound for air, oil or water), initial midscale accuracy 1 percent of scale (Qualify grade), metal or phenolic case, 115 mm (41/2 inches) in diameter, 6 mm (1/4 inch) NPT bottom connection, white dial with black graduations and pointer, clear glass or acrylic plastic window, suitable for board mounting. Provide red "set hand" to indicate normal working pressure. B.Provide brass lever handle union cock. Provide brass/bronze pressure snubber for gages in water service. C.Range of Gages: Provide range equal to at least 130 percent of normal operating range. 1.For condenser water suction (compound): Minus 100 kPa (30 inches Hg) to plus 700 kPa (100 psig).2.14 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PROVISIONS A.Pete's Plug: 6 mm (1/4 inch) MPT by 75 mm (3 inches) long, brass body and cap, with retained safety cap, nordel selfclosing valve cores, permanently installed in piping where shown, or in lieu of pressure gage test connections shown on the drawings.B.Provide one each of the following test items to the COTR: 1.6 mm (1/4 inch) FPT by 3 mm (1/8 inch) diameter stainless steel pressure gage adapter probe for extra long test plug. PETE'S 500 XL is an example. 2.90 mm (31/2 inch) diameter, one percent accuracy, compound gage, –—100 kPa (30 inches) Hg to 700 kPa (100 psig) range. 3.0 - 104 degrees C (220 degrees F) pocket thermometer onehalf degree accuracy, 25 mm (one inch) dial, 125 mm (5 inch) long stainless steel stem, plastic case. 2.15 THERMOMETERS A.Mercury or organic liquid filled type, red or blue column, clear plastic window, with 150 mm (6 inch) brass stem, straight, fixed or adjustable angle as required for each in reading. B. Case: Chrome plated brass or aluminum with enamel finish. C. Scale: Not less than 225 mm (9 inches), range as described below, two degree graduations. D.Separable Socket (Well): Brass, extension neck type to clear pipe insulation. E.Scale ranges:1.Chilled Water and Glycol-Water: 0-38 degrees C (32-100 degrees F).2.Hot Water and Glycol-Water: -1 – 116 degrees C (30-240 degrees F).2.16 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL Refer to Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION.PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A.The drawings show the general arrangement of pipe and equipment but do not show all required fittings and offsets that may be necessary to connect pipes to equipment, fan-coils, coils, radiators, etc., and to coordinate with other trades. Provide all necessary fittings, offsets and pipe runs based on field measurements and at no additional cost to the government. Coordinate with other trades for space available and relative location of HVAC equipment and accessories to be connected on ceiling grid. Pipe location on the drawings shall be altered by contractor where necessary to avoid interferences and clearance difficulties.B.Store materials to avoid excessive exposure to weather or foreign materials. Keep inside of piping relatively clean during installation and protect open ends when work is not in progress. C.Support piping securely. Refer to PART 3, Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION. Install heat exchangers at height sufficient to provide gravity flow of condensate to the flash tank and condensate pump. D.Install piping generally parallel to walls and column center lines, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Space piping, including insulation, to provide 25 mm (one inch) minimum clearance between adjacent piping or other surface. Unless shown otherwise, slope drain piping down in the direction of flow not less than 25 mm (one inch) in 12 m (40 feet). Provide eccentric reducers to keep bottom of sloped piping flat. E.Locate and orient valves to permit proper operation and access for maintenance of packing, seat and disc. Generally locate valve stems in overhead piping in horizontal position. Provide a union adjacent to one end of all threaded end valves. Control valves usually require reducers to connect to pipe sizes shown on the drawing. Install butterfly valves with the valve open as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent binding of the disc in the seat. F.Offset equipment connections to allow valving off for maintenance and repair with minimal removal of piping. Provide flexibility in equipment connections and branch line takeoffs with 3elbow swing joints where noted on the drawings. G.Tee water piping runouts or branches into the side of mains or other branches. Avoid bull-head tees, which are two return lines entering opposite ends of a tee and exiting out the common side. H.Provide manual or automatic air vent at all piping system high points and drain valves at all low points. Install piping to floor drains from all automatic air vents.I.Connect piping to equipment as shown on the drawings. Install components furnished by others such as: 1.Water treatment pot feeders and condenser water treatment systems. 2.Flow elements (orifice unions), control valve bodies, flow switches, pressure taps with valve, and wells for sensors. J.Thermometer Wells: In pipes 65 mm (21/2 inches) and smaller increase the pipe size to provide free area equal to the upstream pipe area. K.Firestopping: Fill openings around uninsulated piping penetrating floors or fire walls, with firestop material. For firestopping insulated piping refer to Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, and BOILER PLANT INSULATION. L.Where copper piping is connected to steel piping, provide dielectric connections.3.2 PIPE JOINTS A.Welded: Beveling, spacing and other details shall conform to ASME B31.1 and AWS B2.1. See Welder’s qualification requirements under "Quality Assurance" in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION. B.Screwed: Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20; joint compound shall be applied to male threads only and joints made up so no more than three threads show. Coat exposed threads on steel pipe with joint compound, or red lead paint for corrosion protection. C.Mechanical Joint: Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with joint manufacturer's specifications. Lubricate gasket exterior including lips, pipe ends and housing interiors to prevent pinching the gasket during installation. Lubricant shall be as recommended by coupling manufacturer.D.125 Pound Cast Iron Flange (Plain Face): Mating flange shall have raised face, if any, removed to avoid overstressing the cast iron flange. E.Solvent Welded Joints: As recommended by the manufacturer.3.3 EXPANSION JOINTS (BELLOWS AND SLIP TYPE) A.Anchors and Guides: Provide type, quantity and spacing as recommended by manufacturer of expansion joint and as shown. A professional engineer shall verify in writing that anchors and guides are properly designed for forces and moments which will be imposed. B.Cold Set: Provide setting of joint travel at installation as recommended by the manufacturer for the ambient temperature during the installation. C.Preparation for Service: Remove all apparatus provided to restrain joint during shipping or installation. Representative of manufacturer shall visit the site and verify that installation is proper. D.Access: Expansion joints must be located in readily accessible space. Locate joints to permit access without removing piping or other devices. Allow clear space to permit replacement of joints and to permit access to devices for inspection of all surfaces and for adding. 3.4 LEAK TESTING ABOVEGROUND PIPINGA.Inspect all joints and connections for leaks and workmanship and make corrections as necessary, to the satisfaction of the COTR. Tests may be either of those below, or a combination, as approved by the COTR. B.An operating test at design pressure, and for hot systems, design maximum temperature. C.A hydrostatic test at 1.5 times design pressure. For water systems the design maximum pressure would usually be the static head, or expansion tank maximum pressure, plus pump head. Factory tested equipment (convertors, exchangers, coils, etc.) need not be field tested. Isolate equipment where necessary to avoid excessive pressure on mechanical seals and safety devices. 3.5 FLUSHING AND CLEANING PIPING SYSTEMS A.Water Piping: Clean systems as recommended by the suppliers of chemicals specified in Section 23 25 00, HVAC WATER TREATMENT. 1.Initial flushing: Remove loose dirt, mill scale, metal chips, weld beads, rust, and like deleterious substances without damage to any system component. Provide temporary piping or hose to bypass coils, control valves, exchangers and other factory cleaned equipment unless acceptable means of protection are provided and subsequent inspection of hideout areas takes place. Isolate or protect clean system components, including pumps and pressure vessels, and remove any component which may be damaged. Open all valves, drains, vents and strainers at all system levels. Remove plugs, caps, spool pieces, and components to facilitate early debris discharge from system. Sectionalize system to obtain debris carrying velocity of 1.8 m/S (6 feet per second), if possible. Connect deadend supply and return headers as necessary. Flush bottoms of risers. Install temporary strainers where necessary to protect downstream equipment. Supply and remove flushing water and drainage by various type hose, temporary and permanent piping and Contractor's booster pumps. Flush until clean as approved by the COTR. 2.Cleaning: Using products supplied in Section 23 25 00, HVAC WATER TREATMENT, circulate systems at normal temperature to remove adherent organic soil, hydrocarbons, flux, pipe mill varnish, pipe joint compounds, iron oxide, and like deleterious substances not removed by flushing, without chemical or mechanical damage to any system component. Removal of tightly adherent mill scale is not required. Keep isolated equipment which is "clean" and where deadend debris accumulation cannot occur. Sectionalize system if possible, to circulate at velocities not less than 1.8 m/S (6 feet per second). Circulate each section for not less than four hours. Blowdown all strainers, or remove and clean as frequently as necessary. Drain and prepare for final flushing. 3.Final Flushing: Return systems to conditions required by initial flushing after all cleaning solution has been displaced by clean makeup. Flush all dead ends and isolated clean equipment. Gently operate all valves to dislodge any debris in valve body by throttling velocity. Flush for not less than one hour. 3.6 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TEST AND INSTRUCTION A.Refer to PART 3, Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION.B.Adjust red set hand on pressure gages to normal working pressure. E N D SECTION 23 21 13SECTION 23 21 23HYDRONIC PUMPSPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.Hydronic pumps for Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.B.Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.C.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION.D.Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING and EQUIPMENT.E.Section 23 21 13, HYDRONIC PIPING.F.Section 23 05 12, GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION EQUIPMENT.G.Section 26 29 11, LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR STARTERS.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Refer to Paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION.B.Design Criteria:1.Pumps design and manufacturer shall conform to Hydraulic Institute Standards.2.Pump sizes, capacities, pressures, operating characteristics and efficiency shall be as scheduled.3.Headcapacity curves shall slope up to maximum head at shutoff. Curves shall be relatively flat for closed systems. Select pumps near the midrange of the curve, so the design capacity falls to the left of the best efficiency point, to allow a cushion for the usual drift to the right in operation, without approaching the pump curve end point and possible cavitation and unstable operation. Select pumps for open systems so that required net positive suction head (NPSHR) does not exceed the net positive head available (NPSHA).4.Pump Driver: Furnish with pump. Size shall be nonoverloading at any point on the headcapacity curve, including in a parallel or series pumping installation with one pump in operation.5.Provide all pumps with motors, impellers, drive assemblies, bearings, coupling guard and other accessories specified. Statically and dynamically balance all rotating parts.6.Furnish each pump and motor with a nameplate giving the manufacturers name, serial number of pump, capacity in GPM and head in feet at design condition, horsepower, voltage, frequency, speed and full load current and motor efficiency.7.Test all pumps before shipment. The manufacturer shall certify all pump ratings.8.After completion of balancing, provide replacement of impellers or trim impellers to provide specified flow at actual pumping head, as installed.C.Allowable Vibration Tolerance for Pump Units: Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING and EQUIPMENT.1.4 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:1.Pumps and accessories.2.Motors and drives.3.Variable speed motor controllers.C.Manufacturer's installation, maintenance and operating instructions, in accordance with Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION. D.Characteristic Curves: Headcapacity, efficiencycapacity, brake horsepowercapacity, and NPSHRcapacity for each pump and for combined pumps in parallel or series service. Identify pump and show fluid pumped, specific gravity, pump speed and curves plotted from zero flow to maximum for the impeller being furnished and at least the maximum diameter impeller that can be used with the casing.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only:B.American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI):AISI 1045Cold Drawn Carbon Steel Bar, Type 1045AISI 416Type 416 Stainless SteelC.American National Standards Institute (ANSI):ANSI B15.1-00(R2008).......Safety Standard for Mechanical Power Transmission ApparatusANSI B16.105Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250 and 800D.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A48-03 (2008)Standard Specification for Gray Iron CastingsB622009Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal CastingsE.Maintenance and Operating Manuals in accordance with Section 01 00 00, General Requirements.1.6 DefinitionsA.Capacity: Liters per second (L/s) (Gallons per minute (GPM) of the fluid pumped.B.Head: Total dynamic head in kPa (feet) of the fluid pumped. C.Flat headcapacity curve: Where the shutoff head is less than 1.16 times the head at the best efficiency point.1.7 SPARE MATERIALSA.Furnish one spare seal and casing gasket for each pump to the COTR.PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS, BRONZE FITTEDA.General: 1.Provide pumps that will operate continuously without overheating bearings or motors at every condition of operation on the pump curve, or produce noise audible outside the room or space in which installed.2.Provide pumps of size, type and capacity as indicated, complete with electric motor and drive assembly, unless otherwise indicated. Design pump casings for the indicated working pressure and factory test at 1? times the designed pressure.3.Provide pumps of the same type, the product of a single manufacturer, with pump parts of the same size and type interchangeable.4.General Construction Requirementsa.Balance: Rotating parts, statically and dynamically.b.Construction: To permit servicing without breaking piping or motor connections.c.Pump Motors: Provide high efficiency motors, inverter duty for variable speed service. Refer to Section 23 05 12, GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMNTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION EQUIPMENT. Motors shall be Open Drip Proof and operate at 1750 rpm unless noted otherwise.d.Heating pumps shall be suitable for handling water to 225?F.e.Provide coupling guards that meet ANSI B15.1, Section 8 and OSHA requirements.f.Pump Connections: Flanged.g.Pump shall be factory tested.h.Performance: As scheduled on the Contract Drawings.5.Variable Speed Pumps:a.The pumps shall be the type shown on the drawings and specified herein flex coupled to an open dripproof motor.b.Variable Speed Motor Controllers: Refer to Section 26 29 11, LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR STARTERS and to Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION paragraph, Variable Speed Motor Controllers. Furnish controllers with pumps and motors.c.Pump operation and speed control shall be as shown on the drawings.B.InLine Type, Base Mounted End Suction or Double Suction Type:1.Casing and Bearing Housing: Closegrained cast iron, ASTM A48.2.Casing Wear Rings: Bronze.3.Suction and Discharge: Plain face flange, 850 kPa (125 psig), ANSI B16.1.4.Casing Vent: Manual brass cock at high point.5.Casing Drain and Gage Taps: 15 mm (1/2inch) plugged connections minimum size.6.Impeller: Bronze, ASTM B62, enclosed type, keyed to shaft.7.Shaft: Steel, AISI Type 1045 or stainless steel.8.Shaft Seal: Manufacturer's standard mechanical type to suit pressure and temperature and fluid pumped.9.Shaft Sleeve: Bronze or stainless steel.10.Motor: Furnish with pump. Refer to Section 23 05 12, GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION EQUIPMENT. 11.Provide line sized shut-off valve and suction strainer, maintain manufacturer recommended straight pipe length on pump suction (with blow down valve). Contractor option: Provide suction diffuser as follows:a.Body: Cast iron with steel inlet vanes and combination diffuserstrainerorifice cylinder with 5 mm (3/16inch) diameter openings for pump protection. Provide taps for strainer blowdown and gage connections.b.Provide adjustable foot support for suction piping.c.Strainer free area: Not less than five times the suction piping.d.Provide disposable startup strainer.PART 3 – EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Follow manufacturer's written instructions for pump mounting and startup. Access/Service space around pumps shall not be less than minimum space recommended by pumps manufacturer.B.Provide drains for bases and seals for base mounted pumps, piped to and discharging into floor drains.C.Coordinate location of thermometer and pressure gauges as per Section 23 21 13, HYDRONIC PIPING.3.2 STARTUPA.Verify that the piping system has been flushed, cleaned and filled.B.Lubricate pumps before start-up.C.Prime the pump, vent all air from the casing and verify that the rotation is correct. To avoid damage to mechanical seals, never start or run the pump in dry condition.D.Verify that correct size heaters-motor over-load devices are installed for each pump controller unit.E.Field modifications to the bearings and or impeller (including trimming) are not permitted. If the pump does not meet the specified vibration tolerance send the pump back to the manufacturer for a replacement pump. All modifications to the pump shall be performed at the factory.F.Ensure the disposable strainer is free of debris prior to testing and balancing of the hydronic system.G.After several days of operation, replace the disposable startup strainer with a regular strainer in the suction diffuser.E N D SECTION 23 21 23 SECTION 23 22 13STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPINGPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.Steam, condensate and vent piping inside buildings. 1.2 RELATED WORK General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division 23: Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION. Pumps: Section 23 22 23, STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS. Piping insulation: Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION. Water treatment for open and closed systems: Section 23 25 00, HVAC WATER TREATMENT. Heating Coils and Humidifiers SECTION 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASING. Heating coils: Section 23 82 16, AIR COILS. Temperature and pressure sensors and valve operators: Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION, which includes welding qualifications. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Pipe and equipment supports. 2.Pipe and tubing, with specification, class or type, and schedule. 3.Pipe fittings, including miscellaneous adapters and special fittings. 4.Flanges, gaskets and bolting. 5.Valves of all types. 6.Strainers. 7.Pipe alignment guides. 8.Expansion joints. 9.Expansion compensators. 10.Flexible ball joints: Catalog sheets, performance charts, schematic drawings, specifications and installation instructions. 11.All specified steam system components. 12.Gages. 13.Thermometers and test wells. C.Coordination Drawings: Refer to Article, SUBMITTALS of Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American Society of Mechanical Engineers/American National Standards Institute (ASME/ANSI):B1.20.1-83(R2006)Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)B16.42006Gray Iron Threaded FittingsC.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): B16.12005Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings B16.32006Malleable Iron Threaded FittingsB16.92007Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings B16.112005Forged Fittings, SocketWelding and Threaded B16.1491Ferrous Pipe Plugs, Bushings, and Locknuts with Pipe Threads B16.222001Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings B16.232002Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings B16.242006Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500 and 2500 B16.3998Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions, Classes 150, 250, and 300 B31.12007Power PipingB31.9-2008Building Services PipingB40.100-2005Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: SEC VIII D1-2001, Pressure Vessels, Division 1 D.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A4799Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings A532007Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless A1062008Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for HighTemperature ServiceA1262004Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings A1812006Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping A1832003Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts A2162008Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High Temperature Service A285-01Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low-and-Intermediate-Tensile StrengthA3072007Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile StrengthA516-2006Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate-and- Lower Temperature ServiceA53684(2004)e1Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings B322008Solder Metal B612008Steam or Valve Bronze Castings B622009Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings B882003Seamless Copper Water Tube F43906SocketType Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 F44102(2008)Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80 E.American Welding Society (AWS): A5.82004Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze WeldingB2.1-00Welding Procedure and Performance Qualifications F.Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fitting Industry, Inc.: SP6795Butterfly Valves SP7098Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends SP7197Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded EndsSP7299Ball Valves with Flanged or ButtWelding Ends for General Service SP7898Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends SP8097Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves SP8594Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded EndsG.Military Specifications (Mil. Spec.): MILS901D-1989Shock Tests, H.I. (High Impact) Shipboard Machinery, Equipment, and Systems H.National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NB): Relieving Capacities of Safety Valves and Relief Valves I.Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association: TEMA 18th Edition, 2000 PART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS, PIPE SLEEVES, AND WALL AND CEILING PLATES A.Provide in accordance with Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION. 2.2 PIPE AND TUBING A.Steam Piping: Steel, ASTM A53, Grade B, seamless or ERW; A106 Grade B, Seamless; Schedule 40.B.Steam Condensate and Pumped Condensate Piping: 1.Concealed above ceiling, in wall or chase: Copper water tube ASTM B88, Type K, hard drawn. 2.All other locations: Copper water tube ASTM B88, Type K, hard drawn; or steel, ASTM A53, Grade B, Seamless or ERW, or A106 Grade B Seamless, Schedule 80. C.Vent Piping: Steel, ASTM A53, Grade B, seamless or ERW; A106 Grade B, Seamless; Schedule 40, galvanized.2.3 FITTINGS FOR STEEL PIPE A.50 mm (2 inches) and Smaller: Screwed or welded.1.Butt welding: ASME B16.9 with same wall thickness as connecting piping.2.Forged steel, socket welding or threaded: ASME B16.11. 3.Screwed: 150 pound malleable iron, ASME B16.3. 125 pound cast iron, ASME B16.4, may be used in lieu of malleable iron, except for steam and steam condensate piping. Provide 300 pound malleable iron, ASME B16.3 for steam and steam condensate piping. Cast iron fittings or piping is not acceptable for steam and steam condensate piping. Bushing reduction of a single pipe size, or use of close nipples, is not acceptable. 4.Unions: ASME B16.39. 5.Steam line drip station and strainer quickcouple blowdown hose connection: Straight through, plug and socket, screw or cam locking type for 15 mm (1/2 inch) ID hose. No integral shutoff is required. 2.4 FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBING A.Solder Joint: 1.Joints shall be made up in accordance with recommended practices of the materials applied. Apply 95/5 tin and antimony on all copper piping.B.Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24. C.Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.18 cast copper or ANSI/ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper.2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A.Provide where copper tubing and ferrous metal pipe are joined. B.50 mm (2 inches) and Smaller: Threaded dielectric union, ASME B16.39. C.65 mm (2 1/2 inches) and Larger: Flange union with dielectric gasket and bolt sleeves, ASME B16.42. D.Temperature Rating, 121 degrees C (250 degrees F) for steam condensate and as required for steam service. E.Contractor’s option: On pipe sizes 2” and smaller, screwed end brass gate valves or dielectric nipples may be used in lieu of dielectric unions.2.6 SCREWED JOINTS A.Pipe Thread: ANSI B1.20. B.Lubricant or Sealant: Oil and graphite or other compound approved for the intended service. 2.7 VALVES A.Asbestos packing is not acceptable. B.All valves of the same type shall be products of a single manufacturer. C.Shut-Off Valves1.Gate Valves: a.50 mm (2 inches) and smaller: MSSSP80, Bronze, 1034 kPa (150 lb.), wedge disc, rising stem, union bonnet. D.Globe and Angle Valves: 1.Globe Valves:a.50 mm (2 inches) and smaller: MSSSP 80, bronze, 1034 kPa (150 lb.) Globe valves shall be union bonnet with metal plug type disc. 2.Angle Valvesa.50 mm (2 inches) and smaller: MSSSP 80, bronze, 1034 kPa (150 lb.) Angle valves shall be union bonnet with metal plug type disc. F.Swing Check Valves1.50 mm (2 inches) and smaller: MSSSP 80, bronze, 1034 kPa (150 psig), 45 degree swing disc. G.Manual Radiator/Convector Valves: Brass, packless, with position indicator. 2.8 STRAINERS A.Basket or Y Type. Tee type is acceptable for gravity flow and pumped steam condensate service. B.High Pressure Steam: Rated 1034 kPa (150 psig) saturated steam. 1.50 mm (2 inches) and smaller: Iron, ASTM A116 Grade B, or bronze, ASTM B62 body with screwed connections (250 psig). C.All Other Services: Rated 861 kPa (125 psig) saturated steam. 1.50 mm (2 inches) and smaller: Cast iron or bronze. D.Screens: Bronze, monel metal or 188 stainless steel, free area not less than 21/2 times pipe area, with perforations as follows: 1.75 mm (3 inches) and smaller: 20 mesh for steam and 1.1 mm (0.045 inch) diameter perforations for liquids. 2.9 PIPE ALIGNMENTA.Guides: Provide factory-built guides along the pipe line to permit axial movement only and to restrain lateral and angular movement. Guides must be designed to withstand a minimum of 15 percent of the axial force which will be imposed on the expansion joints and anchors. Field-built guides may be used if detailed on the contract drawings.2.10 STEAM SYSTEM COMPONENTS A.Safety Valves and Accessories: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII. Capacities shall be certified by National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors, maximum accumulation 10 percent. Provide lifting lever. Provide drip pan elbow where shown. B.Steam PRV for Individual Equipment: Cast iron or bronze body, screwed or flanged ends, rated 861 kPa (125 psig) working pressure. Single-seated, diaphragm operated, spring loaded, adjustable range, all parts renewable. C.Steam Trap: Each type of trap shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Provide trap sets at all low points and at 61 m (200 feet) intervals on the horizontal main lines. 1.Floats and linkages shall provide sufficient force to open trap valve over full operating pressure range available to the system. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, traps shall be sized for capacities indicated at minimum pressure drop as follows: a.For equipment with modulating control valve: 1.7 kPa (1/4 psig), based on a condensate leg of 300 mm (12 inches) at the trap inlet and gravity flow to the receiver. b.For main line drip trap sets and other trap sets at steam pressure: Up to 70 percent of design differential pressure. Condensate may be lifted to the return line. 2.Trap bodies: Bronze, cast iron, or semisteel, constructed to permit ease of removal and servicing working parts without disturbing connecting piping. For systems without relief valve traps shall be 5.Mechanism: Brass, stainless steel or corrosion resistant alloy. rated for the pressure upstream of the PRV supplying the system. 3.Balanced pressure thermostatic elements: Phosphor bronze, stainless steel or monel metal. 4.Valves and seats: Suitable hardened corrosion resistant alloy. 6.Floats: Stainless steel. 7.Inverted bucket traps: Provide bi-metallic thermostatic element for rapid release of non-condensables. D.Steam Humidifiers: 1.Steam separator type that discharges steam into the air stream through a steam jacketed distribution manifold or dispersion tube. Humidifiers shall be complete with Ytype steam supply strainer; modulating, normally closed steam control valve; normally closed condensate temperature switch; and manufacturer's standard steam trap. 2.Steam separator: Stainless steel or cast iron. 3.Distribution manifold: Stainless steel, composed of dispersion pipe and surrounding steam jacket, manifold shall span the width of duct or air handler, and shall be multiple manifold type under any of the following conditions:Duct section height exceeds 900 mm (36 inches). Duct air velocity exceeds 5.1 m/s (1000 feet per minute).b.If within 900 mm (3 feet) upstream of fan, damper or pre-filter. d.If within 3000 mm (10 feet) upstream of after-filter.2.11 GAGES, PRESSURE AND COMPOUND A.ASME B40.1, Accuracy Grade 1A, (pressure, vacuum, or compound), initial midscale accuracy 1 percent of scale (Qualify grade), metal or phenolic case, 115 mm (41/2 inches) in diameter, 6 mm (1/4 inch) NPT bottom connection, white dial with black graduations and pointer, clear glass or acrylic plastic window, suitable for board mounting. Provide red "set hand" to indicate normal working pressure. B.Provide brass, lever handle union cock. Provide brass/bronze pressure snubber for gages in water service. Provide brass pigtail syphon for steam gages. C.Range of Gages: For services not listed provide range equal to at least 130 percent of normal operating range: Low pressure steam and steam condensate to 103 kPa(15 psig)0 to 207 kPa (30 psig).Medium pressure steam and steam condensate nominal 413 kPa (60 psig)0 to 689 kPa (100 psig). High pressure steam and steam condensate nominal 620 kPa to 861 kPa (90 to 125 psig)0 to 1378 kPa (200 psig). Pumped condensate, steam condensate, gravity or vacuum (30” HG to 30 psig)0 to 415 kPa (60 psig)2.12 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PROVISIONS A.Provide one each of the following test items to the COTR: 1.6 mm (1/4 inch) FPT by 3 mm (1/8 inch) diameter stainless steel pressure gage adapter probe for extra long test plug. PETE'S 500 XL is an example. 2.90 mm (31/2 inch) diameter, one percent accuracy, compound gage, 762 mm (30 inches) Hg to 689 kPa (100 psig) range. 3.0 - 104 degrees C (32-220 degrees F) pocket thermometer onehalf degree accuracy, 25 mm (one inch) dial, 125 mm (5 inch) long stainless steel stem, plastic case. 2.13 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL A.Refer to Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A.The drawings show the general arrangement of pipe and equipment but do not show all required fittings and offsets that may be necessary to connect pipes to equipment, fan-coils, coils, radiators, etc., and to coordinate with other trades. Provide all necessary fittings, offsets and pipe runs based on field measurements and at no additional cost to the government. Coordinate with other trades for space available and relative location of HVAC equipment and accessories to be connected on ceiling grid. Pipe location on the drawings shall be altered by contractor where necessary to avoid interferences and clearance difficulties.B.Store materials to avoid excessive exposure to weather or foreign materials. Keep inside of piping relatively clean during installation and protect open ends when work is not in progress. C.Support piping securely. Refer to PART 3, Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION. D.Install piping generally parallel to walls and column center lines, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Space piping, including insulation, to provide 25 mm (one inch) minimum clearance between adjacent piping or other surface. Unless shown otherwise, slope steam, condensate and drain piping down in the direction of flow not less than 25 mm (one inch) in 12 m (40 feet). Provide eccentric reducers to keep bottom of sloped piping flat. E.Locate and orient valves to permit proper operation and access for maintenance of packing, seat and disc. Generally locate valve stems in overhead piping in horizontal position. Provide a union adjacent to one end of all threaded end valves. Control valves usually require reducers to connect to pipe sizes shown on the drawing. Install butterfly valves with the valve open as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent binding of the disc in the seat. F.Offset equipment connections to allow valving off for maintenance and repair with minimal removal of piping. Provide flexibility in equipment connections and branch line takeoffs with 3elbow swing joints where noted on the drawings. G.Tee water piping runouts or branches into the side of mains or other branches. Avoid bull-head tees, which are two return lines entering opposite ends of a tee and exiting out the common side. H.Connect piping to equipment as shown on the drawings. Install components furnished by others such as: 1.Flow elements (orifice unions), control valve bodies, flow switches, pressure taps with valve, and wells for sensors. I.Firestopping: Fill openings around uninsulated piping penetrating floors or fire walls, with firestop material. For firestopping insulated piping refer to Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, and BOILER PLANT INSULATION. J.Where copper piping is connected to steel piping, provide dielectric connections.K.Pipe vents to the exterior. Where a combined vent is provided, the cross sectional area of the combined vent shall be equal to sum of individual vent areas. Slope vent piping one inch in 40 feet (0.25 percent) in direction of flow. Provide a drip trap elbow on relief valve outlets if the vent rises to prevent backpressure. Terminate vent minimum 0.3 M (12 inches) above the roof or through the wall minimum 2.5 M (8 feet) above grade with down turned elbow.3.2 PIPE JOINTS A.Welded: Beveling, spacing and other details shall conform to ASME B31.1 and AWS B2.1. See Welder’s qualification requirements under "Quality Assurance" in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION. B.Screwed: Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20; joint compound shall be applied to male threads only and joints made up so no more than three threads show. Coat exposed threads on steel pipe with joint compound, or red lead paint for corrosion protection. C.125 Pound Cast Iron Flange (Plain Face): Mating flange shall have raised face, if any, removed to avoid overstressing the cast iron flange.3.3 STEAM TRAP PIPING A.Install to permit gravity flow to the trap. Provide gravity flow (avoid lifting condensate) from the trap where modulating control valves are used. Support traps weighing over 11 kg (25 pounds) independently of connecting piping.3.4 LEAK TESTING A.Inspect all joints and connections for leaks and workmanship and make corrections as necessary, to the satisfaction of the COTR in accordance with the specified requirements. Testing shall be performed in accordance with the specification requirements. B.An operating test at design pressure, and for hot systems, design maximum temperature. C.A hydrostatic test at 1.5 times design pressure. For water systems the design maximum pressure would usually be the static head, or expansion tank maximum pressure, plus pump head. Factory tested equipment (convertors, exchangers, coils, etc.) need not be field tested. Avoid excessive pressure on mechanical seals and safety devices. 3.5 FLUSHING AND CLEANING PIPING SYSTEMS A.Steam, Condensate and Vent Piping: No flushing or chemical cleaning required. Accomplish cleaning by pulling all strainer screens and cleaning all scale/dirt legs during startup operation. 3.6 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TEST AND INSTRUCTION A.Refer to PART 3, Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION.B.Adjust red set hand on pressure gages to normal working pressure.E N D SECTION 23 22 13 SECTION 23 22 23STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPSPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.Steam condensate pumps for Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.B.Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.C.Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS.//D.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION.E.Section 23 05 41, NOISE and VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING and EQUIPMENT.F.Section 23 22 13, STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING.G.Section 23 05 12, GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION EQUIPMENT.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Refer to Paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION.B.Design Criteria:1.Pumps design and manufacturer shall conform to Hydraulic Institute Standards.2.Pump sizes, capacities, pressures, operating characteristics and efficiency shall be as scheduled.3.Select pumps so that required net positive suction head (NPSHR) does not exceed the net positive head available (NPSHA).4.Pump Driver: Furnish with pump. Size shall be nonoverloading at any point on the headcapacity curve including one pump operation in a parallel or series pumping installation.5.Provide all pumps with motors, impellers, drive assemblies, bearings, coupling guard and other accessories specified. Statically and dynamically balance all rotating parts.6.Furnish each pump and motor with a nameplate giving the manufacturers name, serial number of pump, capacity in GPM and head in feet at design condition, horsepower, voltage, frequency, speed and full load current and motor efficiency.7.Test all pumps before shipment. The manufacturer shall certify all pump ratings.8.After completion of balancing, provide replacement of impellers or trim impellers to provide specified flow at actual pumping head, as installed.9.Furnish one spare seal and casing gasket for each pump to the COTR.C.Allowable Vibration Tolerance for Pump Units: Section 23 05 41, NOISE and VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.1.4 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:1.Pumps and accessories.2.Motors and drives.C.Manufacturer's installation, maintenance and operating instructions, in accordance with Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION. D.Characteristic Curves: Headcapacity, efficiencycapacity, brake horsepowercapacity, and NPSHRcapacity for each pump. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only:B.American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI):AISI 1045Cold Drawn Carbon Steel Bar, Type 1045AISI 416Type 416 Stainless SteelC.American National Standards Institute (ANSI):ANSI B15.1-00(R2008)....Safety Standard for Mechanical Power Transmission ApparatusANSI B16.105Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250 and 800D.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A48-03(2008)Standard Specification for Gray Iron CastingsB6209Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal CastingsE.Maintenance and Operating Manuals in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.1.6 DefinitionsA.Capacity: Liters per second (L/s) (Gallons per minute (GPM)) of the fluid pumped.B.Head: Total dynamic head in kPa (feet) of the fluid pumped. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDENSATE PUMP, PADMOUNTEDA.General: Factory assembled unit consisting of vented receiver tank, motordriven pumps, interconnecting piping and wiring, motor controls (including starters, if necessary) and accessories, designed to receive, store, and pump steam condensate.B.Receiver Tank: Cast iron with threaded openings for connection of piping and accessories and facilities for mounting float switches. Receivers for simplex pumps shall include all facilities for future mounting of additional pump and controls.Furnish seals for condensate pump with a minimum temperature rating of 121 degrees C (250 degrees F).D.Centrifugal Pumps: Bronze fitted with mechanical shaft seals.1.Designed to allow removal of rotating elements without disturbing connecting piping or pump casing mounting.2.Shafts: Stainless steel, AISI Type 416 or alloy steel with bronze shaft sleeves.3.Bearings: Regreaseable ball or roller type.4.Casing wearing rings: Bronze.E.Motors: Refer to Section 23 05 12, GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION EQUIPMENT.F.Pump Operation:1.Float Switches: NEMA 1, mounted on receiver tank, to start and stop pumps in response to changes in the water level in the receiver and adjustable to permit the controlled water levels to be changed. Floats and connecting rods shall be copper, bronze or stainless steel.2.Alternator: Provide for duplex units to automatically start the second pump when the first pump fails in keeping the receiver water level from rising and to alternate the order of starting the pumps. For units 0.25 kW (1/3 horsepower) and smaller, the alternator may be the mechanical type for use in lieu of float switches.G.Control Cabinet for 3 Phase (0.37 kW (1/2 hp) and larger) Units: NEMA 1, UL approved, factory wired, enclosing all controls, with indicating lights, manual switches and resets mounted on the outside of the panel. Attach cabinet to the pump set with rigid steel framework, unless remote mounting is noted on the pump schedule.1.Motor starters: Magnetic contact types with circuit breakers or combination fusible disconnect switches. Provide low voltage control circuits (120 volt maximum) and "handoffautomatic" (H-O-A) switches for each pump.2.Indicating lights for each pump: Green to show that power is on, red to show that the pump is running.H.Electric Wiring: Suitable for 93 degrees C (200 degrees F) service; enclosed in liquidtight flexible metal conduit where located outside of control cabinet.I.Receiver Accessories:1.Thermometer: 34-216 degrees C (100 420 degrees F), mounted below minimum water level.2.Water level gage glass: Brass with gage cocks which automatically stop the flow of water when the glass is broken. Provide drain on the lower gage cock and protection rods for the glass.2.2 CONDENSATE PUMP, SUMP TYPEA.General: Factory assembled unit consisting of motordriven pump(s) mounted on a horizontal cover plate bolted to a vented sumptype receiver, interconnecting wiring and piping, motor controls and accessories, designed to receive, store, and pump steam condensate.B.Receiver Tank: Vertical, cylindrical, cast iron sides and bottom, designed for service underground or below the floor. Inlet connection shall be located nine inches below the cover plate. Provide floor mounting gasket.C.Receiver Cover Plate: Heavy gage steel designed to support weight of pumps, motors, and accessories and support foot traffic with no deflection. Provide for mounting of pumps, motor and accessories by bolting to the cover. Provide threaded openings for piping connections and a bolted inspection plate for viewing interior of receiver. All bolted connections to cover plate, and between cover plate and receiver, shall be gasketed so that no vapor will escape into the room.D.Furnish seals for condensate pump with a minimum temperature rating of 121 degrees C (250 degrees F).E.Pumps: Centrifugal type, vertical extended shaft, bronze fitted, flexiblecoupled, designed for submerged operation. 1.Shaft: Stainless steel, AISI Type 416.2.Shaft bearings: Bronze, water lubricated.3.Shaft seal at cover plate: Packed type with bronze packing gland.4.Thrust bearings: Regreaseable ball type located above the cover plate.5.Discharge pipes: Terminate above the cover plate.6.Pumpmotor mounting: Bolted to brackets bolted to the cover plate. Removal of one pump shall not affect operation of the second pump.F.Motors: Refer to Section 23 05 12, GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION EQUIPMENT. G.Pump Operation:1.Float Switches: NEMA 1, mounted on receiver tank, to start and stop pumps in response to changes in the water level in the receiver, and adjustable to permit the controlled water levels to be changed. Floats and connecting rods shall be copper, bronze or stainless steel.2.Alternator: Provide for duplex units to automatically start the second pump when the first pump fails in keeping the receiver water level from rising and to alternate the order of starting the pumps. For units 0.25 kW (1/3 horsepower) and smaller, the alternator may be the mechanical type for use in lieu of float switches.H.Electric Wiring: Suitable for 93 degrees C (200 degrees F) service; enclosed in liquidtight flexible metal conduit where located outside of control cabinet.DESIGNER NOTE: Vacuum return systems are mostly not used for the VA Facilities. Use this section only where renovation or replacement of the pumps is required in the existing facilities.2.3 VACUUM PUMP, HEATINGA.General: Factory assembled unit consisting of water storage and air separating facilities, duplex water pumps, duplex air pumps, motors, controls and accessories, designed to receive, store, and pump the steam condensate from a vacuum return system. The unit shall also produce the required vacuum.B.Receiver Tank: Cast iron or galvanized steel and shall include water storage and air separation chambers.C.Water and Air Pumps: Centrifugal type, bronze fitted, with mechanical shaft seals.1.Performance: Rating based on condensate at 71 degrees c (160 degrees F) and 20 kPa (51/2 inches of mercury vacuum). Perform test in accordance with factory instructions.2.Design pump to allow removal of rotating elements without disturbing connecting piping or pump casing mounting.3.Shafts: Stainless steel.4.Bearings: Greaselubricated ball or roller type.5.Casing Wear Rings: Bronze.D.Motors: Refer to Section 23 05 12, GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION EQUIPMENT.E.Air and Water Pump Operation:1.Adjustable float switches: Mounted on receiver tank, to start and stop water pumps in response to changes in the water level in the receiver. Floats and connecting rods shall be copper, stainless steel, or bronze.2.Adjustable vacuum switches: Mounted on receiver tank, to start and stop air pumps in response to vacuum requirements of the heating system.3.Alternators of water pumps and for air pumps: To alternate the sequence of starting the pumps and to automatically start the second air or water pump when the first pump fails to meet the air or water demand.F.Control Cabinet for 3 Phase (0.37 kW (1/2 Hp) and Larger) Units: NEMA 1, UL approved, factory wired, enclosing all controls, with indicating lights, manual switches and resets mounted on the outside of the panel. Attach cabinet to the pump set with rigid steel framework, unless remote mounting is noted on the pump schedule.1.Motor starters: Magnetic contactor types with circuit breakers or combination fusible disconnect switches. Provide low voltage control circuits (120 volt maximum) and "handoffautomatic" (H-O-A) switches for each pump.2.Indicating lights for each pump: Red to show that the pump is running, green to show pump is off.G.Electric Wiring: Suitable for 93 degrees C (200 degrees F) service; enclosed in liquid tight flexible metal conduit where located outside of control cabinet.H.Accessories Required:1.Thermometer: Mounted on receiver below minimum water level.2.Water level gage: Mounted on each compartment of receiver. Provide gage cocks which automatically stop the flow of water when the glass is broken. Provide gage glass protection rods and a drain on the lower gage cock.3.A compound gage. Refer to Section 23 22 13, STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING.4.Temperature limit switch: To automatically admit cooling water to the air separation chamber when air separation water temperature exceeds the manufacturer's recommended limit.5.Automatic water makeup control to the air separation changes: Float switch and solenoid valve. Provide manual bypass valve.6.Muffler: When required to prevent the air vent sound from exceeding 90 db on the A scale at a distance of 2 m (6 feet) from the unit. 7.Vacuum breaker: Minimum adjustment range 20 to 50 kPa (5 to 15 inches of mercury), to protect the pump unit from excessive vacuum.SPEC WRITER NOTE: Pressure powered condensate pumps shall be considered if pressure greater than 483 kPa (70 psig) is available.2.4 Pressure powered condensate pumpA.Pressure-Powered Pump Packages:1.Pump packages shall be furnished and installed as a packaged assembly of the types, sizes, capacities, and characteristics as shown on the drawings. Pump package shall be rated for 185 degrees C (365 degrees F), maximum condensate temperatures.2.Pump package(s) shall come completely piped and mounted on a steel skid including (1) receiver/reservoir, two positive displacement pressure-powered pumps as scheduled, interconnecting piping and valves, and all accessories as hereafter specified below:a.The receiver shall be of a steel elevated design, warranted for 1 year against defects in material and workmanship. Receiver shall be 150 PSIG ASME labeled and coded. Receiver shall be sized for the required condensate storage volume and flash steam capacity. Receiver shall be horizontally mounted and have openings of the appropriate size and number including: (2) inlets, (1) vent opening, (1) NPT drain with pipe plug, (1) NPT anode opening with anode, and gauge glass openings with gauge glass set consisting of (2) brass isolation valves and guard rods, and red-line tubular glass. Replaceable magnesium anode, which retards the corrosive action of most waters and adds to the service life of the tanks, shall be furnished with each receiver for corrosion protection.b.Pressure-powered pumps shall be non-electric as shown on the drawings. Units shall be constructed of 1034 kPa (150 psig) ASME labeled and coded fabricated steel body, shall be float operated, and contain a condensate inlet baffle. Each unit shall have (1) inlet check valve, (1) outlet check valve, and gauge glass set with isolation valves.c.The float operating mechanism shall have all moving components constructed of stainless steel and be of a snap acting design with no external seals or packing. The float mechanism shall contain a reinforced stainless steel float, (2) 300 series stainless steel open coil design springs, and spring calibration pins. d.Pressure-powered pumps shall be of a non-cavitating design capable of operation on systems up to the maximum working pressure of the tank rating using steam, compressed air, or other compatible inert gas as the supply (motive) pressure. Units shall be capable of operating at temperatures up to 365 F when pumping from a ‘closed’ system using a compatible motive gas. Balance and fine tune motive pressure to be 138 kPa (20 psig) higher than the static backpressure.e.Package shall include interconnecting piping between receiver/reservoir and the positive displacement pressure-powered pump(s). Interconnecting suction (fill) line shall be provided to each unit and each suction (fill) line shall include a gate valve for isolation.f.Manufacturer shall provide the following for field installation on each pressure-powered pump: 1)Cycle counter2)Removable insulation jacket3)Pressure gauge4)Drain pipingg.Provide the following components for each pump:1)Motive pressure reducing valve2)Safety relief valve(s)3)Motive pressure inlet strainer4)Pressure gauge with pigtail, as required5)Motive pressure drip trap(s)6)Motive pressure line check valve(s)3.The package shall be factory tested as a complete unit using steam as the motive pressure. The pump manufacturer shall furnish appropriate assembly and parts drawings, and installation and operation manuals. The package shall be shipped completely assembled, or with connection match marks if package must be shipped as sub-assemblies.B.Removable Insulation Jacket:1.The insulation jacket should be of sewn construction with Velcro fasteners and have openings for inlet, outlet, drain, and gauge glass.2.Materials:a.Liner and jacket shall be silicone impregnated heavy duty glass fiber rated for a maximum temperature of 260 degrees C (500 degrees F).b.Insulation shall be 25 mm (1 inch) minimum thickness, Type E needled glass fiber mat rated for a maximum temperature of 650 degrees C (1200 F).c.Jacket shall be sewn with Nomex thread with a UV inhibitor.PART 3 – EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Follow manufacturer's written instructions for pump mounting and startup. Access/Service space around pumps shall not be less than minimum space recommended by pumps manufacturer.B.Permanently support inline pumps by the connecting piping only, not from the casing or the motor eye bolt.C.Sequence of installation for basemounted pumps:1.Level and shim the unit base and grout to the concrete pad.2.Shim the driver and realign the pump and driver. Correct axial, angular or parallel misalignment of the shafts.3.Connect properly aligned and independently supported piping.4.Recheck alignment.D.Padmounted Condensate Pump // or Vacuum Pump //: Level, shim, bolt, and grout the unit base onto the concrete pad.E.Sump Type Condensate Pump: Apply two coats of asphalt or bituminous compound on the exterior of the receiver tank, and mount level and flush in the floor with waterproofing gaskets and grouting to prevent ground water from entering the building from around the receiver.F.Coordinate location of thermometer and pressure gauges as per Section 23 22 13, STEAM and CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING.3.2 STARTUPA.Verify that the piping system has been flushed, cleaned and filled.B.Lubricate pumps before start-up.C.Prime the pump, vent all air from the casing and verify that the rotation is correct. To avoid damage to mechanical seals, never start or run the pump in dry condition.D.Verify that correct size heaters-motor over-load devices are installed for each pump controller unit.E.Field modifications to the bearings and or impeller (including trimming) are not permitted. If the pump does not meet the specified vibration tolerance send the pump back to the manufacturer for a replacement pump. All modifications to the pump shall be performed at the factory.E N D SECTION 23 22 23 SECTION 23?23?00REFRIGERANT PIPINGPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.Field refrigerant piping for direct expansion HVAC systems. B.Refrigerant piping shall be sized, selected, and designed either by the equipment manufacturer or in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s published instructions. The schematic piping diagram shall show all accessories such as, stop valves, level indicators, liquid receivers, oil separator, gauges, thermostatic expansion valves, solenoid valves, moisture separators and driers to make a complete installation. C.Definitions: 1.Refrigerating system: Combination of interconnected refrigerantcontaining parts constituting one closed refrigeration circuit in which a refrigerant is circulated for the purpose of extracting heat. a.Low side means the parts of a refrigerating system subjected to evaporator pressure. b.High side means the parts of a refrigerating system subjected to condenser pressure. 2.Brazed joint: A gastight joint obtained by the joining of metal parts with alloys which melt at temperatures higher than 449 degrees C (840 degrees F) but less than the melting temperatures of the joined parts. 1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division 23. B.Section 23?07?11, HVAC, PLUMBING, and BOILER PLANT INSULATION: Requirements for piping insulation. C.Section 23?21?13, HYDRONIC PIPING: Requirements for water and drain piping and valves. D. Section 23 81 00 DECENTRALIZEDF UNITARY HVAC EQUIPMENT.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Refer to specification Section 23?05?11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION. ply with ASHRAE Standard 15, Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. The application of this Code is intended to assure the safe design, construction, installation, operation, and inspection of every refrigerating system employing a fluid which normally is vaporized and liquefied in its refrigerating cycle. ply with ASME?B31.5: Refrigerant Piping and Heat Transfer Components.D.Products shall comply with UL 207 "Refrigerant–Containing Components and Accessories, "Nonelectrical"; or UL 429 "Electrical Operated Valves."1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with specification Section 01?33?23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.B.Shop Drawings: plete information for components noted, including valves and refrigerant piping accessories, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications for components noted below: a.Tubing and fittings b.Valves c.Strainers d.Moistureliquid indicators e.Filterdriers f.Flexible metal hose g.Liquidsuction interchanges h.Oil separators (when specified) i.Gages j.Pipe and equipment supports k.Refrigerant and oil l.Soldering and brazing materials2.Layout of refrigerant piping and accessories, including flow capacities, valves locations, and oil traps slopes of horizontal runs, floor/wall penetrations, and equipment connection details.C.Certification: Copies of certificates for welding procedure, performance qualification record and list of welders' names and symbols.D.Design Manual: Furnish two copies of design manual of refrigerant valves and accessories. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.Air Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (ARI/AHRI): 495-1999 (R2002)Standard for Refrigerant Liquid Receivers730-2005Flow Capacity Rating of Suction-Line Filters and Suction-Line Filter-Driers750-2007Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves7602007Performance Rating of Solenoid Valves for Use with Volatile Refrigerants C.American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): ANSI/ASHRAE 152007Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems (ANSI)ANSI/ASHRAE 172008Method of Testing Capacity of Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves (ANSI)63.1-95 (RA 01)Method of Testing Liquid Line Refrigerant Driers (ANSI)D.American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ASME (ANSI)A13.1-2007Scheme for Identification of Piping SystemsZ535.1-2006Safety Color CodeE.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):ANSI/ASME B16.222001 (R2005) Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings (ANSI)ANSI/ASME B16.242006Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500 and 2500 (ANSI)ANSI/ASME B31.5-2006Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components (ANSI)ANSI/ASME B40.100-2005Pressure Gauges and Gauge AttachmentsANSI/ASME B40.200-2008Thermometers, Direct Reading and Remote ReadingF.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)A126-04Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe FittingsB3208Standard Specification for Solder Metal B8803Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube B88M-05Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric) B28008Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service G.American Welding Society, Inc. (AWS):Brazing HandbookA5.8/A5.8M04Standard Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze WeldingH.Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.)Fed. Spec. GGI.Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.):U.L.207-2009Standard for Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, NonelectricalU.L.429-99 (Rev.2006)Standard for Electrically Operated ValvesPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 piping AND FITTINGS A.Refrigerant Piping: For piping up to 100 mm (4 inch) use Copper refrigerant tube, ASTM B280, cleaned, dehydrated and sealed, marked ACR on hard temper straight lengths. Coils shall be tagged ASTM B280 by the manufacturer. For piping over 100 mm (4 inch) use A53 Black SML steel.B.Water and Drain Piping: Copper water tube, ASTM B88M, Type B or C (ASTM B88, Type M or L). Optional drain piping material: Schedule 80 flame retardant Polypropylene plastic. C.Fittings, Valves and Accessories: 1.Copper fittings: Wrought copper fittings, ASME?B16.22. a.Brazed Joints, refrigerant tubing: Cadmium free, AWS A5.8/A5.8M, 45 percent silver brazing alloy, Class BAg-5. b.Solder Joints, water and drain: 955 tinantimony, ASTM B32 (95TA). 2.Steel fittings: ASTM wrought steel fittings. a.Refrigerant piping – Welded Joints. 3.Flanges and flanged fittings: ASME?B16.24. 4.Refrigeration Valves: a.Stop Valves: Brass or bronze alloy, packless, or packed type with gas tight cap, frost proof, back seating.b.Pressure Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; UL listed. Forged brass with nonferrous, corrosion resistant internal working parts of high strength, cast iron bodies conforming to ASTM A126, Grade B. Set valves in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15. c.Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL?429, UL-listed, two-position, direct acting or pilot-operated, moisture and vaporproof type of corrosion resisting materials, designed for intended service, and solder-end connections. Fitted with suitable NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location and normally closed holding coil. d.Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750. Brass body with stainless-steel or non-corrosive non ferrous internal parts, diaphragm and spring-loaded (direct-operated) type with sensing bulb and distributor having side connection for hot-gas bypass and external equalizer. Size and operating characteristics as recommended by manufacturer of evaporator and factory set for superheat requirements. Solder-end connections. Testing and rating in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 17. e.Check Valves: Brass or bronze alloy with swing or lift type, with tight closing resilient seals for silent operation; designed for low pressure drop, and with solder-end connections. Direction of flow shall be legibly and permanently indicated on the valve body.5.Strainers: Designed to permit removing screen without removing strainer from piping system, and provided with screens 80 to 100 mesh in liquid lines DN?25 (NPS?1) and smaller, 60 mesh in liquid lines larger than DN?25 (NPS?1), and 40 mesh in suction lines. Provide strainers in liquid line serving each thermostatic expansion valve, and in suction line serving each refrigerant compressor not equipped with integral strainer. 6.Refrigerant Moisture/Liquid Indicators: Doubleported type having heavy sight glasses sealed into forged bronze body and incorporating means of indicating refrigerant charge and moisture indication. Provide screwed brass seal caps. 7.Refrigerant FilterDryers: UL listed, angle or inline type, as shown on drawings. Conform to ARI Standard 730 and ASHRAE Standard 63.1. Heavy gage steel shell protected with corrosion-resistant paint; perforated baffle plates to prevent desiccant bypass. Size as recommended by manufacturer for service and capacity of system with connection not less than the line size in which installed. Filter driers with replaceable filters shall be furnished with one spare element of each type and size. 8.Flexible Metal Hose: Seamless bronze corrugated hose, covered with bronze wire braid, with standard copper tube ends. Provide in suction and discharge piping of each compressor. 9.Water Piping Valves and Accessories: Refer to specification Section 23?21?13, HYDRONIC PIPING.2.2 GAGES A.Temperature Gages: Comply with ASME?B40.200. Industrialduty type and in required temperature range for service in which installed. Gages shall have Celsius scale in 1-degree (Fahrenheit scale in 2-degree) graduations and with black number on a white face. The pointer shall be adjustable. Rigid stem type temperature gages shall be provided in thermal wells located within 1525 mm (5 feet) of the finished floor. Universal adjustable angle type or remote element type temperature gages shall be provided in thermal wells located 1525 to 2135 mm (5 to 7 feet) above the finished floor. Remote element type temperature gages shall be provided in thermal wells located 2135 mm (7 feet) above the finished floor.B.Vacuum and Pressure Gages: Comply with ASME B40.100 and provide with throttling type needle valve or a pulsation dampener and shut-off valve. Gage shall be a minimum of 90 mm (3-1/2 inches) in diameter with a range from 0 kPa (0 psig) to approximately 1.5 times the maximum system working pressure. Each gage range shall be selected so that at normal operating pressure, the needle is within the middle-third of the range.1.Suction: 101 kPa (30 inches Hg) vacuum to 1723 kPa (gage) (250 psig). 2.Discharge: 0 to 3445 kPa (gage) (0 to 500 psig). 2.3 THERMOMETERS AND WELLS A.Refer to specification Section 23?21?13, HYDRONIC PIPING. 2.4 PIPE SUPPORTS A.Refer to specification Section 23?05?11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION. 2.5 REFRIGERANTs AND OIL A.Provide EPA approved refrigerant and oil for proper system operation. 2.6 PIPE INSULATION FOR DX HVAC SYSTEMSRefer to specification Section 23?07?11, HVAC, PLUMBING, and BOILER PLANT INSULATION. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install refrigerant piping and refrigerant containing parts in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15 and ASME?B31.51.Install piping as short as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbow and fittings.2.Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers to allow for service and inspection. Space piping, including insulation, to provide 25 mm (1 inch) minimum clearance between adjacent piping or other surface. Use pipe sleeves through walls, floors, and ceilings, sized to permit installation of pipes with full thickness insulation. 3.Locate and orient valves to permit proper operation and access for maintenance of packing, seat and disc. Generally locate valve stems in overhead piping in horizontal position. Provide a union adjacent to one end of all threaded end valves. Control valves usually require reducers to connect to pipe sizes shown on the drawing. 4.Use copper tubing in protective conduit when installed below ground. 5.Install hangers and supports per ASME B31.5 and the refrigerant piping manufacturer's recommendations.B.Joint Construction:1.Brazed Joints: Comply with AWS "Brazing Handbook" and with filler materials complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.a.Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper tubing.b.Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.c.Swab fittings and valves with manufacturer's recommended cleaning fluid to remove oil and other compounds prior to installation. d.Pass nitrogen gas through the pipe or tubing to prevent oxidation as each joint is brazed. Cap the system with a reusable plug after each brazing operation to retain the nitrogen and prevent entrance of air and moisture. C.Protect refrigerant system during construction against entrance of foreign matter, dirt and moisture; have open ends of piping and connections to compressors, condensers, evaporators and other equipment tightly capped until assembly.D.Pipe relief valve discharge to outdoors for systems containing more than 45 kg (100 lbs) of refrigerant. E.Firestopping: Fill openings around uninsulated piping penetrating floors or fire walls, with firestop material. For firestopping insulated piping refer to Section 23?07?11, HVAC, PLUMBING, and BOILER PLANT INSULATION.3.2 PIPE AND TUBING INSULATION A.Refer to specification Section 23?05?11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION. B.Apply two coats of weatherresistant finish as recommended by the manufacturer to insulation exposed to outdoor weather. 3.3 Signs and identification A.Each refrigerating system erected on the premises shall be provided with an easily legible permanent sign securely attached and easily accessible, indicating thereon the name and address of the installer, the kind and total number of pounds of refrigerant required in the system for normal operations, and the field test pressure applied. B.Systems containing more than 50 kg (110 lb) of refrigerant shall be provided with durable signs, in accordance with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI Z535.1, having letters not less than 13 mm (1/2 inch) in height designating:1.Valves and switches for controlling refrigerant flow, the ventilation and the refrigerant compressor(s).2.Signs on all exposed high pressure and low pressure piping installed outside the machinery room, with name of the refrigerant and the letters "HP" or "LP."3.4 Field quality controlPrior to initial operation examine and inspect piping system for conformance to plans and specifications and ASME?B31.5. Correct equipment, material, or work rejected because of defects or nonconformance with plans and specifications, and ANSI codes for pressure piping.A.After completion of piping installation and prior to initial operation, conduct test on piping system according to ASME B31.5. Furnish materials and equipment required for tests. Perform tests in the presence of COTR. If the test fails, correct defects and perform the test again until it is satisfactorily done and all joints are proved tight.1.Every refrigerant-containing parts of the system that is erected on the premises, except compressors, condensers, evaporators, safety devices, pressure gages, control mechanisms and systems that are factory tested, shall be tested and proved tight after complete installation, and before operation.2.The high and low side of each system shall be tested and proved tight at not less than the lower of the design pressure or the setting of the pressurerelief device protecting the high or low side of the system, respectively, except systems erected on the premises using non-toxic and non-flammable Group A1 refrigerants with copper tubing not exceeding DN?18 (NPS 5/8). This may be tested by means of the refrigerant charged into the system at the saturated vapor pressure of the refrigerant at 20 degrees C (68 degrees F) minimum. B.Test Medium: A suitable dry gas such as nitrogen or shall be used for pressure testing. The means used to build up test pressure shall have either a pressurelimiting device or pressure-reducing device with a pressure-relief device and a gage on the outlet side. The pressure relief device shall be set above the test pressure but low enough to prevent permanent deformation of the system components. 3.5 system test and charging A.System Test and Charging: As recommended by the equipment manufacturer or as follows: 1.Connect a drum of refrigerant to charging connection and introduce enough refrigerant into system to raise the pressure to 70 kPa (10 psi) gage. Close valves and disconnect refrigerant drum. Test system for leaks with halide test torch or other approved method suitable for the test gas used. Repair all leaking joints and retest. 2.Connect a drum of dry nitrogen to charging valve and bring test pressure to design pressure for low side and for high side. Test entire system again for leaks. 3.Evacuate the entire refrigerant system by the triplicate evacuation method with a vacuum pump equipped with an electronic gage reading in mPa (microns). Pull the system down to 665 mPa (500 microns) 665 mPa (2245.6 inches of mercury at 60 degrees F) and hold for four hours then break the vacuum with dry nitrogen (or refrigerant). Repeat the evacuation two more times breaking the third vacuum with the refrigeration to be charged and charge with the proper volume of refrigerant. E N D SECTION 23 23 00SECTION 23 25 00HVAC WATER TREATMENTPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.This section specifies cleaning and treatment of circulating HVAC water systems, including the following. 1.Cleaning compounds. 2.Glycolwater heat transfer systems. 1.2 RELATED WORK A.Test requirements and instructions on use of equipment/system: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.B.General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division 23: Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION. C.Piping and valves: Section 23 21 13, HYDRONIC PIPING and Section 23?22?13, STEAM and CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Refer to paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION. B.Technical Services: Provide the services of an experienced water treatment chemical engineer or technical representative to direct flushing, cleaning, pre-treatment, training, debugging, and acceptance testing operations; direct and perform chemical limit control during construction period and monitor systems for a period of 12 months after acceptance, including not less than 6 service calls and written status reports. Emergency calls are not included. C.Chemicals: Chemicals shall be non-toxic approved by local authorities and meeting applicable EPA requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES. B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data including: 1.Cleaning compounds and recommended procedures for their use. 2.Glycolwater system materials, equipment, and installation. C.Water analysis verification. D.Materials Safety Data Sheet for all proposed chemical compounds, based on U.S. Department of Labor Form No. L5B0054. E.Maintenance and operating instructions in accordance with Section 01?00?00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publication listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-2008National Electric Code (NEC) C.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): F441/F441M-02 (2008)Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANING COMPOUNDS A.Alkaline phosphate or non-phosphate detergent/surfactant/specific to remove organic soil, hydrocarbons, flux, pipe mill varnish, pipe compounds, iron oxide, and like deleterious substances, with or without inhibitor, suitable for system wetted metals without deleterious effects. B.All chemicals to be acceptable for discharge to sanitary sewer.C.Refer to Section 23 21 13, HYDRONIC PIPING and Section 23?22?13, STEAM and CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING, PART 3, for flushing and cleaning procedures. 2.2 GLYCOLWATER SYSTEM A.Propylene glycol shall be inhibited with 1.75 percent dipotassium phosphate. Do not use automotive antifreeze because the inhibitors used are not needed and can cause sludge precipitate that interferes with heat transfer. B.Provide required amount of glycol to obtain the percent by volume for glycol-water systems as follows and to provide one-half tank reserve supply: 25 percent for hydronic system.C.Pot Feeder Makeup Unit: By pass type for chemical treatment, schedule 3.5 mm (10 gauge) heads, 20 mm (3/4inch) system connections and large neck opening for chemical addition. Feeders shall be 19 Liters (5 gallon) minimum size. 2.3 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS IDENTIFICATION Refer to Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Delivery and Storage: Deliver all chemicals in manufacturer's sealed shipping containers. Store in designated space and protect from deleterious exposure and hazardous spills. B.Install equipment furnished by the chemical treatment supplier and charge systems according to the manufacturer's instructions and as directed by the Technical Representative. C.Refer to Section 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING for chemical treatment piping, installed as follows:1.Provide a by-pass line around water meters and bleed off piping assembly. Provide ball valves to allow for bypassing, isolation, and servicing of components.2.Bleed off water piping with bleed off piping assembly shall be piped from pressure side of circulating water piping to a convenient drain. Bleed off connection to main circulating water piping shall be upstream of chemical injection nozzles.Provide piping for the flow assembly piping to the main control panel and accessories.a.The inlet piping shall connect to the discharge side of the circulating water pump.b.The outlet piping shall connect to the water piping serving the cooling tower downstream of the heat source. c.Provide inlet Y-strainer and ball valves to isolate and service main control panel and accessories.4.Install injection nozzles with corporation stops in the water piping serving the cooling tower downstream of the heat source. 5.Provide piping for corrosion monitor rack per manufacturer’s installation instructions. Provide ball valves to isolate and service rack.6.Provide installation supervision, start-up and operating instruction by manufacturer's technical representative.D.Before adding cleaning chemical to the closed system, all air handling coils and fan coil units should be isolated by closing the inlet and outlet valves and opening the bypass valves. This is done to prevent dirt and solids from lodging the coils.E.Do not valve in or operate system pumps until after system has been cleaned.F.After chemical cleaning is satisfactorily completed, open the inlet and outlet valves to each coil and close the by-pass valves. Also, clean all strainers. G.Perform tests and report results in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. H.After cleaning is complete, and water PH is acceptable to manufacturer of water treatment chemical, add manufacturer-recommended amount of chemicals to systems.I.Instruct VA personnel in system maintenance and operation in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. E N D SECTION 23 25 00SECTION 23 31 00HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGSPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.Ductwork and accessories for HVAC including the following: 1.Supply air, return air, outside air, exhaust. B.Definitions: 1.SMACNA Standards as used in this specification means the HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. 2.Seal or Sealing: Use of liquid or mastic sealant, with or without compatible tape overlay, or gasketing of flanged joints, to keep air leakage at duct joints, seams and connections to an acceptable minimum. 3.Duct Pressure Classification: SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. 4.Exposed Duct: Exposed to view in a finished room, // exposed to weather. //1.2 RELATED WORK A.Fire Stopping Material: Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. B.Outdoor and Exhaust Louvers: Section 08 90 00, LOUVERS and VENTS. C.General Mechanical Requirements: Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION. D.Noise Level Requirements: Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING and EQUIPMENT. E.Duct Insulation: Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, and BOILER PLANT INSULATIONF.Plumbing Connections: Section 22 11 00, FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION G.Duct Mounted Coils: Section 23 82 16, AIR COILS.H.Return Air and Exhaust Air Fans: Section 23 34 00, HVAC FANS. I.Air Filters and Filters' Efficiencies: Section 23 40 00, HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES. J.Duct Mounted Instrumentation: Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC. K.Testing and Balancing of Air Flows: Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, and BALANCING FOR HVAC.L.Smoke Detectors: Section 28 31 00, FIRE DETECTION and ALARM. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Refer to article, QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION. B.Fire Safety Code: Comply with NFPA 90A. C.Duct System Construction and Installation: Referenced SMACNA Standards are the minimum acceptable quality.D.Duct Sealing, Air Leakage Criteria, and Air Leakage Tests: Ducts shall be sealed as per duct sealing requirements of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual for duct pressure classes shown on the drawings.E.Duct accessories exposed to the air stream, such as dampers of all types (except smoke dampers) and access openings, shall be of the same material as the duct or provide at least the same level of corrosion resistance. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES. B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Rectangular ducts: a.Schedules of duct systems, materials and selected SMACNA construction alternatives for joints, sealing, gage and reinforcement. b.Duct liner. c.Sealants and gaskets. d.Access doors. 2.Round and flat oval duct construction details: a.Manufacturer's details for duct fittings. b.Duct liner. c.Sealants and gaskets. d.Access sections. e.Installation instructions. 3.Volume dampers, back draft dampers. 4.Upper hanger attachments. 5.Fire dampers, fire doors, and smoke dampers with installation instructions.6.Sound attenuators, including pressure drop and acoustic performance. 7.Flexible ducts and clamps, with manufacturer's installation instructions. 8.Flexible connections. 9.Instrument test fittings. 10.Details and design analysis of alternate or optional duct systems. 11COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION. C.Coordination Drawings: Refer to article, SUBMITTALS, in Section 23 05 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):ASCE7-05Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures C.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A16799(2009)Standard Specification for Stainless and HeatResisting ChromiumNickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip A653-09Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, ZincCoated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip processA1011-09aStandard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot rolled, Carbon, structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High StrengthB20907Standard Specification for Aluminum and AluminumAlloy Sheet and PlateC1071-05e1Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material)E84-09aStandard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsD.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 90A-09Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 96-08Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking OperationsE.Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): 2nd Edition – 2005HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible 1st Edition - 1985HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual 6th Edition – 2003Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards F.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 18108FactoryMade Air Ducts and Air Connectors 55506 Standard for Fire Dampers 555S06 Standard for Smoke DampersPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCT MATERIALS AND SEALANTS A.General: Except for systems specified otherwise, construct ducts, casings, and accessories of galvanized sheet steel, ASTM A653, coating G90; or, aluminum sheet, ASTM B209, alloy 1100, 3003 or 5052.B.Specified Corrosion Resistant Systems: Stainless steel sheet, ASTM A167, Class 302 or 304, Condition A (annealed) Finish No. 4 for exposed ducts and Finish No. 2B for concealed duct or ducts located in mechanical rooms.C.Joint Sealing: Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, paragraph S1.9. 1.Sealant: Elastomeric compound, gun or brush grade, maximum 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed (dry state) compounded specifically for sealing ductwork as recommended by the manufacturer. Generally provide liquid sealant, with or without compatible tape, for low clearance slip joints and heavy, permanently elastic, mastic type where clearances are larger. Oil base caulking and glazing compounds are not acceptable because they do not retain elasticity and bond. 2.Tape: Use only tape specifically designated by the sealant manufacturer and apply only over wet sealant. Pressure sensitive tape shall not be used on bare metal or on dry sealant. 3.Gaskets in Flanged Joints: Soft neoprene. E.Approved factory made joints may be used. 2.2 DUCT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION A.Regardless of the pressure classifications outlined in the SMACNA Standards, fabricate and seal the ductwork in accordance with the following pressure classifications: B.Duct Pressure Classification: 0 to 50 mm (2 inch)> 50 mm to 75 mm (2 inch to 3 inch)> 75 mm to 100 mm (3 inch to 4 inch)Show pressure classifications on the floor plans. C.Seal Class: All ductwork shall receive Class A SealD.Operating Room/Cystoscopy Room Supply Air: All supply air ductwork on the downstream side of the terminal final HEPA filter serving an operating room or cystoscopy room shall be fabricated from welded stainless steel, including all components of the air distribution system up to and including the supply air outlet. E.Provide a welded stainless steel duct section for housing the duct-mounted terminal humidifiers. Ductwork shall be at least 3 feet long on the upstream side and 6 feet long on the downstream side. Slope the ductwork against the direction of airflow and provide drain connections.F.Duct for Negative Pressure Up to 750 Pa (3 inch W.G.) 1.Round Duct: Galvanized steel, spiral lock seam construction with standard slip joints. 2.Rectangular Duct: Galvanized steel, minimum 1.0 mm (20 gage), Pittsburgh lock seam, companion angle joints 32 mm by 3.2 mm (11/4 by 1/8 inch) minimum at not more than 2.4 m (8 feet) spacing. Approved pre-manufactured joints are acceptable in lieu of companion angles. G.Round and Flat Oval Ducts: Furnish duct and fittings made by the same manufacturer to insure good fit of slip joints. When submitted and approved in advance, round and flat oval duct, with size converted on the basis of equal pressure drop, may be furnished in lieu of rectangular duct design shown on the drawings. 1.Elbows: Diameters 80 through 200 mm (3 through 8 inches) shall be two sections die stamped, all others shall be gored construction, maximum 18 degree angle, with all seams continuously welded or standing seam. Coat galvanized areas of fittings damaged by welding with corrosion resistant aluminum paint or galvanized repair compound.2.Provide bell mouth, conical tees or taps, laterals, reducers, and other low loss fittings as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. 3.Ribbed Duct Option: Lighter gage round/oval duct and fittings may be furnished provided certified tests indicating that the rigidity and performance is equivalent to SMACNA standard gage ducts are submitted. a.Ducts: Manufacturer's published standard gage, G90 coating, spiral lock seam construction with an intermediate standing rib.b.Fittings: May be manufacturer's standard as shown in published catalogs, fabricated by spot welding and bonding with neoprene base cement or machine formed seam in lieu of continuous welded seams. 4.Provide flat side reinforcement of oval ducts as recommended by the manufacturer and SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standard S3.13. Because of high pressure loss, do not use internal tierod reinforcement unless approved by the COTR. H.Casings and Plenums: Construct in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Section 6, including curbs, access doors, pipe penetrations, eliminators and drain pans. Access doors shall be hollow metal, insulated, with latches and door pulls, 500 mm (20 inches) wide by 1200 - 1350 mm (48 54 inches) high. Provide view port in the doors where shown. Provide drain for outside air louver plenum. Outside air plenum shall have exterior insulation. Drain piping shall be routed to the nearest floor drain.I.Volume Dampers: Single blade or opposed blade, multilouver type as detailed in SMACNA Standards. Refer to SMACNA Detail Figure 2-12 for Single Blade and Figure 2.13 for Multi-blade Volume Dampers. J.Duct Hangers and Supports: Refer to SMACNA Standards Section IV. Avoid use of trapeze hangers for round duct. 2.3 DUCT ACCESS DOORS, PANELS AND SECTIONS A.Provide access doors, sized and located for maintenance work, upstream, in the following locations: 1.Each duct mounted coil and humidifier. 2.Each fire damper (for link service), smoke damper and automatic control damper.3.Each duct mounted smoke detector. 4.For cleaning operating room supply air duct and kitchen hood exhaust duct, locate access doors at 6 m (20 feet) intervals and at each change in duct direction. B.Openings shall be as large as feasible in small ducts, 300 mm by 300 mm (12 inch by 12 inch) minimum where possible. Access sections in insulated ducts shall be doublewall, insulated. Transparent shatterproof covers are preferred for uninsulated ducts. 1.For rectangular ducts: Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Figure 212). 2.For round and flat oval duct: Refer to SMACNA HVAC duct Construction Standards (Figure 2-11). 2.4 FIRE DAMPERS A.Galvanized steel, interlocking blade type, UL listing and label, 11/2 hour rating, 70 degrees C (160 degrees F) fusible line, 100 percent free opening with no part of the blade stack or damper frame in the air stream. B.Fire dampers in wet air exhaust shall be of stainless steel construction, all others may be galvanized steel.C.Minimum requirements for fire dampers: 1.The damper frame may be of design and length as to function as the mounting sleeve, thus eliminating the need for a separate sleeve, as allowed by UL 555. Otherwise provide sleeves and mounting angles, minimum 1.9 mm (14 gage), required to provide installation equivalent to the damper manufacturer's UL test installation. 2.Submit manufacturer's installation instructions conforming to UL rating test. 2.5 SMOKE DAMPERSA.Maximum air velocity, through free area of open damper, and pressure loss: Low pressure and medium pressure duct (supply, return, exhaust, outside air): 450 m/min (1500 fpm). Maximum static pressure loss: 32 Pa (0.13 inch W.G.).B.Maximum air leakage, closed damper: 0.32 cubic meters /min/square meter (4.0 CFM per square foot) at 750 Pa (3 inch W.G.) differential pressure.C.Minimum requirements for dampers:1.Shall comply with requirements of Table 6-1 of UL 555S, except for the Fire Endurance and Hose Stream Test.2.Frame: Galvanized steel channel with side, top and bottom stops or seals.3.Blades: Galvanized steel, parallel type preferably, 300 mm (12 inch) maximum width, edges sealed with neoprene, rubber or felt, if required to meet minimum leakage. Airfoil (streamlined) type for minimum noise generation and pressure drop are preferred for duct mounted dampers.4.Shafts: Galvanized steel.5.Bearings: Nylon, bronze sleeve or ball type.6.Hardware: Zinc plated.7.Operation: Automatic open/close. No smoke damper that requires manual reset or link replacement after actuation is acceptable. See drawings for required control operation.D.Motor operator (actuator): Provide pneumatic or electric as required by the automatic control system, externally mounted on stand-offs to allow complete insulation coverage.2.6 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE bination fire and smoke dampers: Multiblade type units meeting all requirements of both fire dampers and smoke dampers shall be used where shown and may be used at the Contractor's option where applicable.2.7 FIRE DOORS A.Galvanized steel, interlocking blade type, UL listing and label, 71 degrees C (160 degrees F) fusible link, 3 hour rating and approved for openings in Class A fire walls with rating up to 4 hours, 100 percent free opening with no part of the blade stack or damper frame in the air stream. 2.8 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT A.General: Factory fabricated, complying with NFPA 90A for connectors not passing through floors of buildings. Flexible ducts shall not penetrate any fire or smoke barrier which is required to have a fire resistance rating of one hour or more. Flexible duct length shall not exceed 1.5 m (5 feet). Provide insulated acoustical air duct connectors in supply air duct systems and elsewhere as shown. B.Flexible ducts shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., complying with UL 181. Ducts larger than 200 mm (8 inches) in diameter shall be Class 1. Ducts 200 mm (8 inches) in diameter and smaller may be Class 1 or Class 2. C.Insulated Flexible Air Duct: Factory made including mineral fiber insulation with maximum C factor of 0.25 at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F) mean temperature, encased with a low permeability moisture barrier outer jacket, having a puncture resistance of not less than 50 Beach Units. Acoustic insertion loss shall not be less than 3 dB per 300 mm (foot) of straight duct, at 500 Hz, based on 150 mm (6 inch) duct, of 750 m/min (2500 fpm). D.Application Criteria: 1.Temperature range: -18 to 93 degrees C (0 to 200 degrees F) internal. 2.Maximum working velocity: 1200 m/min (4000 feet per minute). 3.Minimum working pressure, inches of water gage: 2500 Pa (10 inches) positive, 500 Pa (2 inches) negative. E.Duct Clamps: 100 percent nylon strap, 80 kg (175 pounds) minimum loop tensile strength manufactured for this purpose or stainless steel strap with cadmium plated worm gear tightening device. Apply clamps with sealant and as approved for UL 181, Class 1 installation. 2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A.Where duct connections are made to fans and air handling units, install a noncombustible flexible connection of 822 g (29 ounce) neoprene coated fiberglass fabric approximately 150 mm (6 inches) wide. For connections exposed to sun and weather provide hypalon coating in lieu of neoprene. Burning characteristics shall conform to NFPA 90A. Securely fasten flexible connections to round ducts with stainless steel or zinccoated iron draw bands with worm gear fastener. For rectangular connections, crimp fabric to sheet metal and fasten sheet metal to ducts by screws 50 mm (2 inches) on center. Fabric shall not be stressed other than by air pressure. Allow at least 25 mm (one inch) slack to insure that no vibration is transmitted. 2.10 SOUND ATTENUATING UNITS A.Casing, not less than 1.0 mm (20 gage) galvanized sheet steel, or 1.3 mm (18 gage) aluminum fitted with suitable flanges to make clean airtight connections to ductwork. Soundabsorbent material faced with glass fiber cloth and covered with not less than 0,6 mm (24 gage) or heavier galvanized perforated sheet steel, or 0.85 mm (22 gage) or heavier perforated aluminum. Perforations shall not exceed 4 mm (5/32inch) diameter, approximately 25 percent free area. Sound absorbent material shall be long glass fiber acoustic blanket meeting requirements of NFPA 90A. B.Entire unit shall be completely air tight and free of vibration and buckling at internal static pressures up to 2000 Pa (8 inches W.G.) at operating velocities. C.Pressure drop through each unit: Not to exceed indicated value at design air quantities indicated. D.Submit complete independent laboratory test data showing pressure drop and acoustical performance. E.Cap open ends of attenuators at factory with plastic, heavy duty paper, cardboard, or other appropriate material to prevent entrance of dirt, water, or any other foreign matter to inside of attenuator. Caps shall not be removed until attenuator is installed in duct system. 2.11 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALA.Refer to Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. 2.12 DUCT MOUNTEDThermometer (air) A.Stem Type Thermometers: ASTM E1, 7 inch scale, red appearing mercury, lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish and clear glass or polycarbonate window, brass stem, 2 percent of scale accuracy to ASTM E77 scale calibrated in degrees Fahrenheit. B.Thermometer Supports:1.Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as required, and with cap and chain.2.Flange: 3 inch outside diameter reversible flange, designed to fasten to sheet metal air ducts, with brass perforated stem.2.13 DUCT MOUNTEDTEmperature sensor (AIR) A.Refer to Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC. 2.14 INSTRUMENT TEST FITTINGS A.Manufactured type with a minimum 50 mm (two inch) length for insulated duct, and a minimum 25 mm (one inch) length for duct not insulated. Test hole shall have a flat gasket for rectangular ducts and a concave gasket for round ducts at the base, and a screw cap to prevent air leakage. B.Provide instrument test holes at each duct or casing mounted temperature sensor or transmitter, and at entering and leaving side of each heating coil, cooling coil, and heat recovery unit. 2.15 AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVES (AFCV) A.Refer to Section 23 82 00, AIR TERMINAL UNITS / CONVECTION HEATING and COOLING UNITS. 2.16 ELECTROSTATIC SHIELDING A.At the point of penetration of shielded rooms ducts shall be made electrically discontinuous by means of a flexible, nonconductive connection outside shielded room. B.Metallic duct portion inside shielded room shall be electrically bonded to shielding. part 3 - execution3.1 INSTALLATION ply with provisions of Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION, particularly regarding coordination with other trades and work in existing buildings. B.Fabricate and install ductwork and accessories in accordance with referenced SMACNA Standards: 1.Drawings show the general layout of ductwork and accessories but do not show all required fittings and offsets that may be necessary to connect ducts to equipment, boxes, diffusers, grilles, etc., and to coordinate with other trades. Fabricate ductwork based on field measurements. Provide all necessary fittings and offsets at no additional cost to the government. Coordinate with other trades for space available and relative location of HVAC equipment and accessories on ceiling grid. Duct sizes on the drawings are inside dimensions which shall be altered by Contractor to other dimensions with the same air handling characteristics where necessary to avoid interferences and clearance difficulties. 2.Provide duct transitions, offsets and connections to dampers, coils, and other equipment in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Section II. Provide streamliner, when an obstruction cannot be avoided and must be taken in by a duct. Repair galvanized areas with galvanizing repair compound. 3.Provide bolted construction and tierod reinforcement in accordance with SMACNA Standards. 4.Construct casings, eliminators, and pipe penetrations in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Chapter 6. Design casing access doors to swing against air pressure so that pressure helps to maintain a tight seal. C.Install duct hangers and supports in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Chapter 4. D.Install fire dampers, smoke dampers and combination fire/smoke dampers in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to conform to the installation used for the rating test. Install fire dampers, smoke dampers and combination fire/smoke dampers at locations indicated and where ducts penetrate fire rated and/or smoke rated walls, shafts and where required by the COTR. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges per UL and NFPA. Demonstrate resetting of fire dampers and operation of smoke dampers to the COTR.E.Seal openings around duct penetrations of floors and fire rated partitions with fire stop material as required by NFPA 90A. F.Flexible duct installation: Refer to SMACNA Standards, Chapter 3. Ducts shall be continuous, single pieces not over 1.5 m (5 feet) long (NFPA 90A), as straight and short as feasible, adequately supported. Centerline radius of bends shall be not less than two duct diameters. Make connections with clamps as recommended by SMACNA. Clamp per SMACNA with one clamp on the core duct and one on the insulation jacket. Flexible ducts shall not penetrate floors, or any chase or partition designated as a fire or smoke barrier, including corridor partitions fire rated one hour or two hour. Support ducts SMACNA Standards. G.Where diffusers, registers and grilles cannot be installed to avoid seeing inside the duct, paint the inside of the duct with flat black paint to reduce visibility. H.Control Damper Installation: 1.Provide necessary blankoff plates required to install dampers that are smaller than duct size. Provide necessary transitions required to install dampers larger than duct size. 2.Assemble multiple sections dampers with required interconnecting linkage and extend required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper motors. 3.Provide necessary sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate stratification and provide air volumes specified. Locate baffles by experimentation, and affix and seal permanently in place, only after stratification problem has been eliminated. 4.Install all damper control/adjustment devices on stand-offs to allow complete coverage of insulation.I.Air Flow Measuring Devices (AFMD): Install units with minimum straight run distances, upstream and downstream as recommended by the manufacturer. J.Protection and Cleaning: Adequately protect equipment and materials against physical damage. Place equipment in first class operating condition, or return to source of supply for repair or replacement, as determined by COTR. Protect equipment and ducts during construction against entry of foreign matter to the inside and clean both inside and outside before operation and painting. When new ducts are connected to existing ductwork, clean both new and existing ductwork by mopping and vacuum cleaning inside and outside before operation. 3.2 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS AND REPAIR A.Ductwork leakage testing shall be performed by the Testing and Balancing Contractor directly contracted by the General Contractor and independent of the Sheet Metal Contractor.B.Ductwork leakage testing shall be performed for the entire air distribution system (including all supply, return, exhaust and relief ductwork), section by section, including fans, coils and filter sections. Based upon satisfactory initial duct leakage test results, the scope of the testing may be reduced by the COTR on ductwork constructed to the 500 Pa (2" WG) duct pressure classification. In no case shall the leakage testing of ductwork constructed above the 500 Pa (2" WG) duct pressure classification or ductwork located in shafts or other inaccessible areas be eliminated. C.Test procedure, apparatus and report shall conform to SMACNA Leakage Test manual. The maximum leakage rate allowed is 4 percent of the design air flow rate.D.All ductwork shall be leak tested first before enclosed in a shaft or covered in other inaccessible areas.E.All tests shall be performed in the presence of the COTR and the Test and Balance agency. The Test and Balance agency shall measure and record duct leakage and report to the COTR and identify leakage source with excessive leakage.F.If any portion of the duct system tested fails to meet the permissible leakage level, the Contractor shall rectify sealing of ductwork to bring it into compliance and shall retest it until acceptable leakage is demonstrated to the COTR.G.All tests and necessary repairs shall be completed prior to insulation or concealment of ductwork.H.Make sure all openings used for testing flow and temperatures by TAB Contractor are sealed properly.3.3 testing, adjusting and balancing (tab)A.Refer to Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, and BALANCING FOR HVAC.3.4 operating and performance testsA.Refer to Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION E N D SECTION 23 31 00SECTION 23 34 00HVAC FANSPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.Fans for heating, ventilating and air conditioning.B.Product Definitions: AMCA Publication 99, Standard l66.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.B.Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.C.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.D.Section 23 05 12, GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION EQUIPMENT.E.Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.F.Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.G.Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC.H. Section 23 82 16, AIR COILS.I.Section 26 29 11, LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR STARTERS.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Refer to paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.B.Fans and power ventilators shall be listed in the current edition of AMCA 26l, and shall bear the AMCA performance seal.C.Operating Limits for Centrifugal Fans: AMCA 99 (Class I, II, and III). D.Fans and power ventilators shall comply with the following standards:l.Testing and Rating: AMCA 2l0.2.Sound Rating: AMCA 300.E.Vibration Tolerance for Fans and Power Ventilators: Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.F.Performance Criteria:l.The fan schedule shall show the design air volume and static pressure. Select the fan motor HP by increasing the fan BHP by 10 percent to account for the drive losses and field conditions. 2.Select the fan operating point as follows:Forward Curve and Axial Flow Fans: Right hand side of peak pressure pointAir Foil, Backward Inclined, or Tubular: At or near the peak static efficiencyG.Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard screen on fan inlet and discharge where exposed to operating and maintenance personnel.H.Corrosion Protection:1.Except for fans in fume hood exhaust service, all steel shall be millgalvanized, or phosphatized and coated with minimum two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers paint and paint system shall meet the minimum specifications of: ASTM D1735 water fog; ASTM B117 salt spray; ASTM D3359 adhesion; and ASTM G152 and G153 for carbon arc light apparatus for exposure of non-metallic material. 2.Fans for general purpose fume hoods, or chemical hoods, and radioisotope hoods shall be constructed of materials compatible with the chemicals being transported in the air through the fan.?I.Spark resistant construction: If flammable gas, vapor or combustible dust is present in concentrations above 20% of the Lower Explosive Limit (LEL), the fan construction shall be as recommended by AMCA's Classification for Spark Resistant Construction. Drive set shall be comprised of non-static belts for use in an explosive.1.4 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01?33?23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.B.Manufacturers Literature and Data:l.Fan sections, motors and drives.2.Centrifugal fans, motors, drives, accessories and coatings.a.Inline centrifugal fans.b.Tubular Centrifugal Fans.c.Utility fans and vent sets.3.Prefabricated roof curbs.C.Certified Sound power levels for each fan.D.Motor ratings types, electrical characteristics and accessories.E.Roof curbs.F.Belt guards.G.Maintenance and Operating manuals in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.H.Certified fan performance curves for each fan showing cubic feet per minute (CFM) versus static pressure, efficiency, and horsepower for design point of operation. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA):9986Standards Handbook2l006Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating26l-09Directory of Products Licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal Published Annually 30008Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of FansC.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):B11707aStandard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) ApparatusD173508Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings Using Water Fog ApparatusD335908Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape TestG152-06Standard Practice for Operating Open Flame Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Non-Metallic MaterialsG153-04Standard Practice for Operating Enclosed Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Non-Metallic MaterialsD.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):NFPA 9608Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking OperationsE.National Sanitation Foundation (NSF):3707Air Curtains for Entrance Ways in Food and Food Service EstablishmentsF.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):181-2005Factory Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors1.6 extra materialsA.Provide one additional set of belts for all belt-driven fans.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 FAN SECTION (Cabinet Fan)Not Used. 2.2 CENTRIFUGAL FANSA.Standards and Performance Criteria: Refer to Paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE. Record factory vibration test results on the fan or furnish to the Contractor.B.Fan arrangement, unless noted or approved otherwise:l.DWDl fans: Arrangement 3.2.SWSl fans: Arrangement l, 3, 9 or l0.C.Construction: Wheel diameters and outlet areas shall be in accordance with AMCA standards.l.Housing: Low carbon steel, arc welded throughout, braced and supported by structural channel or angle iron to prevent vibration or pulsation, flanged outlet, inlet fully streamlined. Provide lifting clips, and casing drain. Provide manufacturer's standard access door. Provide 12.5 mm (1/2 inches) wire mesh screens for fan inlets without duct connections.2.Wheel: Steel plate with die formed blades welded or riveted in place, factory balanced statically and dynamically.3.Shaft: Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of the first critical speed at the top of the speed range of the fans class. 4.Bearings: Heavy duty ball or roller type sized to produce a Bl0 life of not less than 50,000 hours, and an average fatigue life of 200,000 hours. Extend filled lubrication tubes for interior bearings or ducted units to outside of housing.5.Belts: Oil resistant, non-sparking and non-static. 6.Belt Drives: Factory installed with final alignment belt adjustment made after installation.7.Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 15HP, fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 15HP. Select pulleys so that pitch adjustment is at the middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions.8.Motor, adjustable motor base, drive and guard: Furnish from factory with fan. Refer to Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION for specifications. Provide protective sheet metal enclosure for fans located outdoors.9.Furnish variable speed fan motor controllers where shown on the drawings. Refer to Section, MOTOR STARTERS. Refer to Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION for controller/motor combination requirements.2.3 CENTRIFUGAL CEILING FANS (Small Cabinet Fan)A.Standards and Performance Criteria: Refer to Paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE.B.Steel housing, baked enamel finish, direct connected fan assembly, attached grille. Provide gravity back draft assembly, aluminum wall cap and bird or insect screenC.Acoustical Lining: 12.5 mm (1/2 inch) thick mineral fiber, dark finish. Comply with UL 181 for erosion. D.Motor: Shaded pole or permanent split capacitor, sleeve bearings, supported by steel brackets in combination with rubber isolators. E.Ceiling Grille, (Where indicated): White plastic egg crate design, 80 percent free area.F. Control: Provide solid state speed control (located at unit) for final air balancing.PART 3 EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Install fan, motor and drive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B.Align fan and motor sheaves to allow belts to run true and straight.C.Bolt equipment to curbs with galvanized lag bolts.D.Install vibration control devices as shown on drawings and specified in Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.3.2 PREOPERATION MAINTENANCE A.Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts and other moving parts with manufacturer recommended lubricants.B.Rotate impeller by hand and check for shifting during shipment and check all bolts, collars, and other parts for tightness.C.Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust.3.3 STARTUP AND INSTRUCTIONSA.Verify operation of motor, drive system and fan wheel according to the drawings and specifications.B.Check vibration and correct as necessary for air balance work.C.After air balancing is complete and permanent sheaves are in place perform necessary field mechanical balancing to meet vibration tolerance in Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.E N D SECTION 23 34 00 SECTION 23 37 00AIR OUTLETS AND INLETSPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Roof CurbsB. Air Outlets and Inlets: Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Outdoor and Exhaust Louvers: Section 08 90 00, LOUVERS AND VENTS. B.General Mechanical Requirements: Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION. C.Noise Level Requirements: Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT. D.Testing and Balancing of Air Flows: Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Refer to article, QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION. B.Fire Safety Code: Comply with NFPA 90A. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES. B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Air intake. 2.Diffusers, registers, and accessories. C.Coordination Drawings: Refer to article, SUBMITTALS, in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.Air Diffusion Council Test Code: 1062 GRD-84Certification, Rating, and Test Manual 4th Edition C.American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):ASCE7-05Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures D.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A16799 (2004)Standard Specification for Stainless and HeatResisting ChromiumNickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip B20907Standard Specification for Aluminum and AluminumAlloy Sheet and PlateE.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 90A-09Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems F.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 18108UL Standard for Safety FactoryMade Air Ducts and ConnectorsPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTSRefer to Section 21 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION, Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING, and Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION. 2.2 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS A.Materials: 1.Steel or aluminum. Provide manufacturer's standard gasket. 2.Exposed Fastenings: The same material as the respective inlet or outlet. Fasteners for aluminum may be stainless steel. 3.Contractor shall review all ceiling drawings and details and provide all ceiling mounted devices with appropriate dimensions and trim for the specific locations.B.Performance Test Data: In accordance with Air Diffusion Council Code 1062GRD. Refer to Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT for NC criteria. C.Air Supply Outlets: 1.Duct Slot diffuser/plenum: a.Diffuser: Frame and support bars shall be constructed of heavy gauge extruded aluminum. Form slots or use adjustable pattern controllers, to provide stable, horizontal air flow pattern over a wide range of operating conditions.b.Galvanized steel boot lined with 13 mm (1/2 inch) thick fiberglass conforming to NFPA 90A and complying with UL 181 for erosion. The internal lining shall be factory-fabricated, anti-microbial, and non-friable. c.Provide inlet connection diameter equal to duct diameter shown on drawings or provide transition coupling if necessary. Inlet duct and plenum size shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.d.Maximum pressure drop at design flow rate: 37 Pa(0.15 inch W.G.) D.Return and Exhaust Registers and Grilles: Provide opposed blade damper without removable key operator for registers. 1.Finish: Offwhite baked enamel for ceiling mounted units. Wall units shall have a prime coat for field painting, or shall be extruded aluminum with manufacturer's standard aluminum finish. 2.Standard Type: Fixed horizontal face bars set at 30 to 45 degrees, approximately 30 mm (11/4 inch) margin. a.Heavy extruded aluminum frame shall have countersunk screw mounting. Unless otherwise indicated, register blades and frame shall have factory applied white finish. b.Grille shall be suitable for duct or surface mounting as indicated on drawings. All necessary appurtenances shall be provided to allow for mounting. part 3 - execution3.1 INSTALLATION ply with provisions of Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION, particularly regarding coordination with other trades and work in existing buildings. B.Protection and Cleaning: Protect equipment and materials against physical damage. Place equipment in first class operating condition, or return to source of supply for repair or replacement, as determined by COTR. Protect equipment during construction against entry of foreign matter to the inside and clean both inside and outside before operation and painting. 3.2 testing, adjusting and balancing (tab)Refer to Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.3.3 operating and performance testsRefer to Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATIONE N D SECTION 23 37 00 SECTION 23 40 00HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICESPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.Air filters for heating, ventilating and air conditioning. B.Definitions: Refer to ASHRAE Standard 52.2 for definitions of face velocity, net effective filtering area, media velocity, initial resistance (pressure drop), MERV (Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value), PSE (Particle Size Efficiency), particle size ranges for each MERV number, dust holding capacity and explanation of electrostatic media based filtration products versus mechanical filtration products. Refer to ASHRAE Standard 52.2 Appendix J for definition of MERV-A.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division 23. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Air Filter Performance Report for Extended Surface Filters: 1.Submit a test report for each Grade of filter being offered. The report shall not be more than three (3) years old and prepared by using test equipment, method and duct section as specified by ASHRAE Standard 52.2 for type filter under test and acceptable to COTR, indicating that filters comply with the requirements of this specification. Filters utilizing partial or complete synthetic media will be tested in compliance with pre-conditioning steps as stated in Appendix J. All testing is to be conducted on filters with a nominal 24 inch by 24 inch face dimension. Test for 150 m/min (500 fpm) will be accepted for lower velocity rated filters provided the test report of an independent testing laboratory complies with all the requirements of this specification.ernment Option: The Government at its option may take one of the filters for each different type submitted and run an independent test to determine if the filter meets the requirements of this specification. When the filter meets the requirements, the Government will pay for the test. When the filter does not meet the specification requirements, the manufacturer will be required to pay for the test and replace the filters with filters that will perform as required by the specifications. 3.Guarantee Performance: The manufacturer shall supply ASHRAE 52.2 test reports on each filter type submitted. Any filter supplied will be required to maintain the minimum efficiency shown on the ASHRAE Standard 52.2 report throughout the time the filter is in service. Within the first 6-12 weeks of service a filter may be pulled out of service and sent to an independent laboratory for ASHRAE Standard 52.2 testing for initial efficiency only. If this filter fails to meet the minimum level of efficiency shown in the previously submitted reports, the filter manufacturer/distributor shall take back all filters and refund the owner all monies paid for the filters, cost of installation, cost of freight and cost of testing.B.Filter Warranty for Extended Surface Filters: Guarantee the filters against leakage, blowouts, and other deficiencies during their normal useful life, up to the time that the filter reaches the final pressure drop. Defective filters shall be replaced at no cost to the Government. ply with UL Standard 900 for flame test. D.Nameplates: Each filter shall bear a label or name plate indicating manufacturer's name, filter size, rated efficiency, UL classification, and file number. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Extended surface filters. 2.Holding frames. Identify locations. 3.Side access housings. Identify locations, verify insulated doors. 4.Magnehelic gages. C.Air Filter performance reports. D.Suppliers warranty.E.Field test results for HEPA filters as per paragraph 2.3.E.3.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only. B.American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE): 52.2-2007...............Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size, including Appendix J C.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):NQA-1-2008Quality Assurance Requirements for Nuclear Facilities ApplicationsD.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 900;Revision 15 July 2009Test Performance of Air Filter UnitsPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REPLACEMENT FILTER ELEMENTS TO BE FURNISHED A.To allow temporary use of HVAC systems for testing and in accordance with Paragraph, TEMPORARY USE OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, provide one complete set of spare filters to the COTR.B.The COTR will direct whether these additional filters will either be installed as replacements for dirty units or turned over to VA for future use as replacements.2.2 EXTENDED SURFACE AIR FILTERS A.Use factory assembled air filters of the extended surface type with supported or nonsupported cartridges for removal of particulate matter in air conditioning, heating and ventilating systems. Filter units shall be of the extended surface type fabricated for disposal when the contaminant load limit is reached as indicated by maximum (final) pressure drop.B.Filter Classification: UL listed and approved conforming to UL Standard 900.C.HVAC Filter TypesHVAC Filter TypesTable 2.2CMERV Value ASHRAE 52.2MERV-A Value ASHRAE 62.2 Appendix JApplicationParticle SizeThickness /Type88-APre-Filter3 to 10 Microns50 mm (2-inch) Throwaway1111-AAfter-Filter1 to 3 Microns150 mm (6-inch) or 300 mm (12-inch) Rigid CartridgeD.HEPA Filters2.3 Filter Housings/Support FramesA.Side Servicing Housings (HVAC Grade)1.Filter housing shall be two-stage filter system consisting of 16-gauge galvanized steel enclosure, aluminum filter mounting track, universal filter holding frame, insulated dual-access doors, static pressure tap, filter gaskets and seals. In-line housing depth shall not exceed 21”. Sizes shall be as noted on enclosed drawings or other supporting materials.2.Construction: The housing shall be constructed of 16-gauge galvanized steel with pre-drilled standing flanges to facilitate attachment to other system components. Corner posts of Z-channel construction shall ensure dimensional adherence. //Where installed outdoors, the housing shall be weatherproof and suitable for rooftop/outdoor installation.// The housing shall incorporate the capability of two stages of filtration without modification to the housing. A filter track, of aluminum construction shall be an integral component of housing construction. The track shall accommodate a 2” deep prefilter, a 6” or 12” deep rigid final filter, or a pocket filter with header. Insulated dual access doors, swing-open type, shall include high-memory sponge neoprene gasket to facilitate a door-to-filter seal. Each door shall be equipped with adjustable and replaceable positive sealing UV-resistant star-style knobs and replaceable door hinges. A universal holding frame constructed of 18-gauge galvanized steel, equipped with centering dimples, multiple fastener lances, and polyurethane filter sealing gasket, shall be included to facilitate installation of high-efficiency filters. The housing shall include a pneumatic fitting to allow the installation of a static pressure gauge to evaluate pressure drop across a single filter or any combination of installed filters.3.Performance: Leakage at rated airflow, upstream to downstream of filter, holding frame, and slide mechanism shall be less than 1% at 3.0” w.g. Leakage in to or out of the housing shall be less than one half of 1% at 3.0” w.g. Accuracy of pneumatic pressure fitting, when to evaluate a single-stage, or multiple filter stages, shall be accurate within ± 3% at 0.6” w.g. 4.Manufacturer shall provide evidence of facility certification to ISO 9001:2000.B.Side-Access Housing (HEPA Grade)1.Filter housing shall be two-stage filter system consisting of 14-gauge galvanized steel enclosure, spring-loaded crank-type sealing assembly for gasket seal type final filters, insulated dual-access doors with gasketing and positive sealing doorknobs. In-line housing depth shall not exceed 25”. Sizes shall be as noted on enclosed drawings or other supporting materials.2.Construction: The housing shall be constructed of 14-gauge galvanized steel with mating flanges to facilitate attachment to other system components. All pressure boundaries shall be of all welded construction. The housing shall be weatherproof and suitable for rooftop/outdoor installation. A prefilter track to accommodate nominal 2” deep prefilters, shall be an integral component of the housing. The housing shall incorporate a spring-loaded crank-type final filter sealing mechanism. The mechanism shall be geared to exert 700 pounds of pressure against each filter. The clamping frame shall have a continuous flat surface seal to compress all four downstream gasketed surfaces of the downstream seal filter. The final filter locking mechanism shall include a 3/4” socket adapter to facilitate opening or closing the mechanism. Insulated dual access doors shall include high-memory sponge neoprene gasket to facilitate a door-to-filter seal. Each door shall be equipped with adjustable and replaceable UV-resistant positive sealing knobs. The access doors shall be both hinged for swing open operation or designed to be completely removable. The housing shall include static pressure ports (1/8” NPT male) to facilitate pressure drop measurements across prefilter, final filter, or combination thereof. 3.Performance: Manufacturer shall provide evidence of facility certification to ISO 9001:2008.2. 41 InstrumentationA.Magnehelic Differential Pressure Filter Gages: Nominal 100 mm (four inch) diameter, zero to 500 Pa (zero to two inch water gage), three inch for HEPA) range, //except for MERV 17 HEPA Final Filters, where the range shall be zero to 750 Pa (zero to three inch water gage)// Gauges shall be flush-mounted in aluminum panel board, complete with static tips, copper or aluminum tubing, and accessory items to provide zero adjustment. B.DDC static (differential) air pressure measuring station. Refer to Specification Section 23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVACC.Provide one DDC sensor across each extended surface filter. Provide Petcocks for each gauge or sensor. D.Provide one common filter gauge for two-stage filter banks with isolation valves to allow differential pressure measurement. 2.5 HVAC Equipment Factory filtersA.Manufacturer standard filters within fabricated packaged equipment should be specified with the equipment and should adhere to industry standard. B.Cleanable filters are not permitted.C.Automatic Roll Type filters are not permitted.PART 3 – EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install supports, filters and gages in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Label clearly with words "Contaminated Air" on exhaust ducts leading to the HEPA filter housing.3.2 STARTUP AND TEMPORARY USE A.Clean and vacuum air handling units and plenums prior to starting air handling systems. B.Install or deliver replacement filter units as directed by the COTR. E N D SECTION 23 40 00 SECTION 23 72 00AIR-to-air ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENTPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This Section specifies air-to-air plate heat exchangers.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 01?00?00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Requirements for pre-test of equipment. B.Section 13?05?41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS: Seismic requirements for non-structural equipment. /C.Section 23?05?11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division?23. D.Section 23?21?23, HYDRONIC PUMPS: Requirements for pumping equipment.E.Section 23?07?11, HVAC and BOILER PLANT INSULATION: Requirements for piping insulation. F.Section 23?21?13, HYDRONIC PIPING: Requirements for piping for expansion tanks.G.Section 23?82?16, AIR COILS: Requirements for runaround system coils.H.Section 23?31?00, HVAC DUCTS and CASINGS: Requirements for sheet metal ducts and fittings.I.Section 23?40?00, HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES: Requirements for filters used before heat recovery coils.J.Section 23?09?23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC: Requirements for controls and instrumentation.K.Section 23?05?93, TESTING, ADJUSTING and BALANCING FOR HVAC: Requirements for testing, adjusting and balancing of HVAC system. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Refer to paragraph, GUARANTEE in specification Section 00?72?00, GENERAL CONDITIONS.B.Refer to specification Section 01?00?00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS for performance tests and instructions to VA personnel.C.Refer to paragraph QUALITY ASSURANCE in specification Section 23?05?11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC.D.Performance Criteria: Heat recovery equipment shall be provided by a manufacturer who has been manufacturing such equipment and the equipment has a good track record for at least 3 years. E.Performance Test: In accordance with PART 3. 1.4 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01?33?23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Plate Heat Exchanger C.Certificate: Submit, simultaneously with shop drawings, an evidence of satisfactory service of the equipment on three similar installations. D.Submit type, size, arrangement and performance details. Present application ratings in the form of tables, charts or curves. E.Provide installation, operating and maintenance instructions, in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, in Section 01?00?00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. pleted System Readiness Checklists and completed by the contractor, signed by a qualified technician and dated on the date of completion.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.Air Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI)AHRI 1060-2005Performance Rating of Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation EquipmentC.American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): 1510Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems (ANSI)52.1-92Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter52.2-07Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size84-08Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat/Energy Exchangers D.American Society for Testing and materials (ASTM)D635-10Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal PositionE84-10Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsE.American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)ASCE 7-10Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other StructuresF.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL)1812-2009Standard for Ducted Heat Recovery Ventilators1815-2009Standard for Nonducted Heat Recovery VentilatorsPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 AIRTOAIR PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER ply with UL Standards 1812. B.Plates: Corrugated 0.53 mm (0.021 inch)// diamond embossed aluminum//stainless steel//polypropylene copolymer (high density plastic)// enthalpic // spacing as recommended by the manufacturer. C.Bedding: Thermosetting reinforced resin. Provide plate sealoff and passage separation at top, bottom and center divider. The resins shall be selfextinguishing type in accordance with ASTM D635. D.Casing and End Strips: Casing of 1.6 mm (16 gage) galvanized steel, except casings for corrosive air streams shall be stainless steel. End strips of the same material as exchanger plates. Ends of unit exchanger plates shall be sealed with high temperature silicon sealant prior to installation of end strip for corrosive air streams provide welded end strips to avoid cross contaminations. E.Casings shall have integral flanges for flanged duct connections and shall have lifting holes or lugs. F.Drain Pan: Same material as unit casing. Drain-pan surface shall be covered with molded ABS, and shall have drain connections on exhaust and supply side. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.G.Accessories: Furnish where indicated on the drawings. 1.Face and Bypass Dampers: Manufacturer's standard, complete with operators, with factory-installed controls to operate face-and-bypass dampers during summer and winter.H.Extended-Surface, Disposable Panel Filters: MERV 7, 2-inch throw-away type. Refer to Section 23 40 00 HVAC Air Cleaning Devices.2.2 AIR fILTERSAir Filters: Disposable air filters, with a MERV rating of 7, shall be provided standard on all air entering sides of air-to-air heat exchangers, and as indicated on the drawings. Comply with requirements in specification Section 23?40?00, HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions for handling and installation, and setting up of ductwork for makeup and exhaust air steamers for maximum efficiency.B.Seal ductwork tightly to avoid air leakage.C.Install units with adequate spacing and access for cleaning and maintenance of heat recovery coils as well as filters.D.Brace heat recovery equipment installed in projects in the Seismic area according to specification Section 13?05?41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS.3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA.Operational Test: Perform tests as per manufacturer’s written instructions for proper and safe operation of the heat recovery system.1.After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.2.Adjust seals and purge.3.Test and adjust controls and safeties.B.Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.C.Set initial temperature and humidity set points. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.D.Prepare test and inspection reports to the COTR in accordance with specification Section 01?00?00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.3.3 INSTRUCTIONS Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for four hours to instruct VA personnel in operation and maintenance of heat recovery equipment.3.4 STARTup and testing A.The COTR will observe startup and contractor testing of selected equipment. Coordinate the startup and contractor testing schedules with the COTR. Provide a minimum of 7 days prior notice.3.5 demonstration and training A.Provide services of manufacturer’s technical representative for four hours to instruct VA personnel in operation and maintenance of units. E N D SECTION 23 72 00SECTION 23?81?00DECENTRALIZED UNITARY HVAC EQUIPMENTPART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.This section specifies self-contained split-systems, , air conditioners.B.Definitions: 1.Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER): (Btu hour/Watt) is equal to the measured cooling capacity of the unit by its electrical input.2.Unitary (ARI): A Unitary Air Conditioner consists of one or more factory-made assemblies which normally include an evaporator or cooling coil, a compressor and condenser combination, and may include a heating function as well. Where such equipment is provided in more than one assembly the separated assemblies are to be designed to be used together and the requirements of rating are based upon use of matched assemblies.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 23?05?11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division?23. B.Section 23?05?41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT: Requirements for different types of vibration isolators and noise ratings in the occupied areas. C.Section 23?07?11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION: Requirements for piping insulation.D.Section 23?23?00, REFRIGERANT PIPING: Requirements for refrigerant pipes and fittings. E.Not Used.F.Section 23?40?00, HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES: Requirements for air filtration. G.Section 23?05?93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC: Requirements for testing and adjusting air balance. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Refer to specification Section 23?05?11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION. B.Safety Standards: ASHRAE Standard 15, Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with specification Section 01?33?23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES B.Manufacturer’s literature and data: 1.Sufficient information, including capacities, pressure drops and piping connections clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications for units noted below: a.Unitary air conditioners: 1)Self-contained units 2)Split- system air-cooled condensing unit 2.Unit Dimensions required clearances, operating weights accessories and start-up instructions.3.Electrical requirements, wiring diagrams, interlocking and control wiring showing factory installed and portions to be field installed.4.Mounting and flashing of the roof curb to the roofing structure with coordinating requirements for the roof membrane system.B.Certification: Submit proof of specified ARI Certification. C.Performance Rating: Submit catalog selection data showing equipment ratings and compliance with required sensible-to-heat-ratio, energy efficiency ratio (EER), and coefficient of performance (COP). D.Operating and Maintenance Manual: Submit three copies of Operating and Maintenance manual to COTR three weeks prior to final inspection. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.): A-A-50502-90 Air conditioner (Unitary Heat Pump) Air to Air (3000-300,000 Btu)C.Military Specifications (Mil. Specs.): MIL-PRF-26915D-06Primer Coating, for Steel SurfacesD.Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI): 210/240-06Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment 270-95Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment310/380-04Standard for Packaged Terminal Air-Conditioners and Heat Pumps (CSA-C744-04)340/360-04Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment 520-04Positive Displacement Condensing Units E.Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA): 210-99Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating (ANSI)410-96Recommended Safety Practices for Users and Installers of Industrial and Commercial FansF.American National Standards Institute (ANSI): S12.51-02Acoustics - Determination of Sound Power Levels of Noise Sources Using Sound Pressure - Precision Method for Reverberation Rooms (same as ISO 3741:1999)G.American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):2004 HandbookHVAC Systems and Equipment15-04Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems (ANSI)H.American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):B117-03Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) ApparatusI.National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): MG 1-06Motors and Generators (ANSI)ICS 1-00 (R2005)Industrial Controls and Systems: General RequirementsJ.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:90A-02Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UNITARY AIR CONDITIONERS A.Applicable ARI Standards: 1.Cooling Capacity 39.6 kW (135,000 Btu/h) and More: ARI 340/ 360. 2.Cooling Capacity Less Than 39.6 kW (135,000 Btu/h): ARI 210/240. Units shall be listed in the ARI Directory of Certified Unitary Air-Conditioners. B.Performance Rating: Cooling capacity of units shall meet the sensible heat and total heat requirements shown in the contract documents. In selecting unit size, make true allowance for "sensible to total heat ratio" to satisfy required sensible cooling capacity.C.Machinery Guards: Provide guards as shown in AMCA 410 for belts, chains, couplings, pulleys, sheaves, shafts, gears and other moving parts regardless of height above the floor. Drive guards may be excluded where motors and drives are inside factory fabricated casings.D.Corrosion Prevention: Unless specified otherwise, equipment fabricated from ferrous metals that do not have a zinc coating or a duplex coating of zinc and paint shall be treated for prevention of rust with a factory coating or paint system that will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors shall be tested for 500 hours. The salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B117 using a 20 percent sodium chloride solution. Immediately after completion of the test, the coating shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling or cracking, no loss of adhesion, and the specimen shall show no signs of rust beyond 3 mm (1/8-inch) on both sides from the scratch mark.2.2SELF-CONTAINED AIR CONDITIONERSA.Description: Factory assembled and wired consisting of the following:1.Cabinet.pressor.3.Evaporator fan.4.Evaporator coil,5.Integral water-cooled condenser.6. Steam heating coil.7.Air filters.8.Controls.9.Full charge of refrigerant and oil.B.Cabinet Frame and Panels: Structural-steel frame with galvanized-steel panels with baked-enamel finish in color selected by Architect, and with access doors or panels.1.Insulation: Minimum 25-mm (1-inch) thick, duct liner on cabinet interior and control panel.2.Drain Pan: Galvanized steel with corrosion-resistant coating complying with ASHRAE 62.1-2004.3.Isolation: Spring isolators for mounting under base of unit, with minimum static deflection of 25 mm (1 inch).4.Discharge Plenum: Cabinet extension with duct openings for supply air.5.Corrosion-Resistant Treatment: Phenolic coating on unit interior and exterior.6.Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.C.Evaporator Fan: Galvanized steel, double-width, double-inlet, airfoil centrifugal fan; statically and dynamically balanced. Direct drive, with fan mounted on permanently lubricated bearings and having cast-iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed. Motor sheaves shall be variable and adjustable pitch selected so required rpm are obtained when set at middle position. Fan and motor shall be resiliently mounted with ratings as recommended by the manufacturer with a minimum of one and one-half times nameplate rating of motor. Bearings shall be grease lubricated with grease lines extended to exterior of unit. Variable-air volume units shall have inlet guide vanes with electric modulating actuator; linkage; and adjustable, static-pressure controller responding to a static-pressure sensor and variable-frequency motor controller.D.Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Section 23?05?12, GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION EQUIPMENT and shall be multi-speed, PSC type open dripproofE.Isolation: Mount fan and motor on common sub-base and mount assembly on spring isolators with minimum static deflection of 25 mm (1 inch) unless otherwise indicated.pressor Hermetically sealed, reciprocating , 3600 rpm maximum, and resiliently mounted with positive lubrication and internal motor protection.G.Evaporator Coil: Direct-Expansion Coil: Seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins:1.Corrosion-Resistant Treatment: Phenolic coating applied with multiple dips and baked.H.Refrigerant Circuits: A separate circuit for each compressor, with externally equalized thermal-expansion valve with // adjustable superheat //, filter-dryer, sight glass, high-pressure relief valve, and charging valves.I.Water-Cooled Condenser: Copper tubes in steel shell with removable heads, for 2760-kPa (400-psig) waterside working pressure.1.ASME Compliance: For units larger than 15 tons fabricate and label water-cooled condensers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section?VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division?1.2.Water-Flow Switch:.J.Refrigerant Line Kits: Annealed-copper suction and liquid lines that are factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; insulated suction line; flared fittings at evaporator end, no fitting at condenser end; and service valves for both suction and liquid lines.K.Terminate suction and liquid refrigerant piping with service valves within unit.L.Low Ambient Control: Cycle fans to permit operation down to 7 deg?C (45 deg?F). M.Coil Guard: Painted galvanized steel with louvered grilles.N.Corrosion-Resistant Treatment: Phenolic coating applied in multiple dips and baked.O.Heating Coil:1. Steam Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 2.5 mm (0.1 inch); leak tested to 2070 kPa (300 psig) underwater; and having a two-position control valve.P.Air Filters:1.Permanent Filters: 25 mm (1 inch) thick, cleanable panel filters.2.Disposable Filters: 50 mm (2 inch) thick, glass-fiber, pleated panel filters.3.Filter Efficiency: MERV rating of 6 or higher according to ASHRAE 52.2.4.Air-Pressure Switch: Indicates dirty filters.Q.Controls:1.Control Package: Factory wired, including contactor, high- and low-pressure cutouts, internal-winding thermostat for compressor, control-circuit transformer, and noncycling reset relay.2.Time-Delay Relay: Five-minute delay to prevent compressor cycling.3.Adjustable Thermostat: Unit mounted to control the supply fan, compressor, condenser; and steam coil valve.4.System Selector Switch: Off-heat-auto-cool .5.Fan Control Switch: Auto-on.6.Time Clock: Cycle unit on and off.7.Microprocessor Control Panel: Control unit functions, including refrigeration and safety controls, supply-fan motor speed, compressors, air-cooled condenser, cooling tower pump, modulating hot-water coil valve, modulating, steam coil valve and multi-step, electric-resistant heating coil. Time-of-day control shall cycle unit on and off Night-heat and morning warm-up cycle.8.Panel-mounted control switch shall operate unit in remote or local control mode, or to stop or reset.9.Panel-mounted indication of the operating status system diagnostics and safety alarms, supply-air temperature set point, zone heating-temperature set point, supply-air pressure set point, economizer minimum position set point, supply-air pressure, and high-limit set point. Time-of-day control shall cycle unit on and off and night-heat and morning warm-up cycle.2.3 Split-System Air cooled condensing unitA.Description: Factory assembled and tested, outdoor-mounted unit, an air-water- cooled remote condensing unit, and field-installed refrigeration piping. Unit shall include a steam heating coil. 1. Steam Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 2.5 mm (0.1 inch); leak tested to 2070 kPa (300 psig) underwater; and having a two-position control valve.B.Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:1.Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Service valves, fittings, and gage ports shall be brass and located outside of the casing.pressor: Hermetically sealed scroll with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.3.Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset, high-pressure switch and automatic-reset, low-pressure switch.4.Refrigerant: R-410A unless otherwise indicated.5.Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI?210/240, and with liquid subcooler.6.Heat Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature-air cut-off thermostat.7.Fan: Aluminum, propeller type, directly connected to motor.8.Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.9.Low Ambient Kit: Permit operation down to 7 deg?C (45 deg?F).10.Mounting Base: Polyethylene.11.Minimum Energy Efficiency: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA?90.1-2004, "Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."C.Water-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:1.Casing: Steel, with baked-enamel finish in color selected by Architect, removable panels for access to controls, and mounting holes in base. Service valves, fittings, and gage ports shall be brass and located on outside of casing.pressor: Hermetically sealed reciprocating with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.3.Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and automatic-reset low-pressure switch.4.Refrigerant: R-410A unless otherwise indicated.5.Heat Exchanger: Copper tubes in copper tube or in steel shell, with water-temperature-actuated, water-regulating valve.6.Minimum Energy Efficiency: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA?90.1-2004, "Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."PART 3 EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Install wind and seismic restraints according to manufacturer's written instructions.[??Wind and seismically restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails are specified in Section 23?05?41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.B.Install units level and plumb maintaining manufacturer’s recommended clearances and tolerances.C.Install water-cooled units with thermometer and pressure gage at the water supply and return connection.D.Install vibration spring isolators under base of self contained unit, with minimum static deflection of 25 mm (1 inch) unless otherwise indicated. Refer to Section 23?05?41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENTE.Install ground-mounting, compressor-condenser components on 100 mm (4-inch) thick, reinforced concrete base; 100 mm (4 inches) larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 03?30?00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.F.Install ground-mounting, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting base.G.Install seismic restraints.H.Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum static deflection of 25 mm (1 inch) unless otherwise indicated. Refer to Section 23?05?41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.I.Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit.J.Install wall sleeves in finished wall assembly and weatherproof. Install and anchor wall sleeves to withstand, without damage seismic forces as required by code.3.2 CONNECTIONSA.Verify condensate drainage requirements.B.Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest roof drain or area drain.C.Install piping adjacent to units to allow service and maintenance.D.Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements. Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.E.Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb. Cut roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under entire roof curb.F. Connect supply ducts to units with flexible duct connectors specified in Section 23?31?00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS.G. Install normal-weight, 20.7-MPa (3000-psi), compressive strength (28-day) concrete mix inside roof curb, 100 mm (4 inches) thick. H.Ground equipment and install power wiring, switches, and controls for self contained and split systems.I.Connect refrigerant piping to coils with shutoff valves on the suction and liquid lines at the coil and a union or flange at each connection at the coil and condenser.J.Install ducts to the units with flexible duct connections.K.Connect piping with shutoff duty valves on the supply and return side of the coil and unions at all connections and with a throttling valve on the return piping near the coil.L.Connect piping with shutoff duty valves on the supply and return side of the water cooled condenser and unions at all connections and with a throttling valve on the return piping near the condenserM.Connect piping with shutoff duty valves and unions on the steam supply and condensate side of the steam coil. On the condensate line near the coil provide a strainer, trap and shutoff valve.3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA.Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.B.Tests and Inspections: After installing units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.3.7 InSTRUCTIONSProvide services of manufacturer’s technical representative for four hours to instruct VA personnel in operation and maintenance of units.E N D SECTION 23 81 00SECTION 23 81 43AIR-SOURCE UNITARY Heat pumpsPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This Section specifies electrically operated air-source unitary heat pumps.B.Definitions: 1.Coefficient of Performance (COP) - Cooling: The ratio of the rate of heat removed to the rate of energy input in consistent units, for a complete refrigerating system or some specific portion of that system under designated operating conditions.2.Coefficient of Performance (COP) - Heating: The ratio of the rate of heat delivered to the rate of energy input is consistent units for a complete heat pump system, including the compressor and, if applicable, auxiliary heat under designated operating conditions.3.Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER): The ratio of net cooling capacity is Btu/h to total rate of electricity input in watts under designated operating conditions.4.Heating Seasonal Performance Factor (HSPF) - Total heating output of heat pump during its normal annual usage period for heating in Btu/h divided by total electric energy input in watts during the same period.5.Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER) - Total cooling output of an air conditioner during its normal annual usage period for cooling in Btu/h divided by total electric energy input in watts during the same period.6.Air-Source Unitary Heat Pump: One or more factory made assemblies that normally include an indoor conditioning coil, compressor(s) and an outdoor refrigerant-to-air coil. These units provide both heating and cooling functions.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Section 01?00?00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: For pre-test requirements.B.Section 23?05?11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division?23.C.Section 23?23?00, REFRIGERANT PIPING: Requirements for field refrigerant piping.D.Section 23?31?00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS: Requirements for sheet metal ductwork.E.Section 23?09?23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC: Requirements for controls and instrumentation.F.Section 23?05?93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC: Requirements for testing, adjusting and balancing of HVAC system.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:A.Refer to specification Section 23?05?11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ply with ASHRAE Standard 15, Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.ply with ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2010, Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings for cooling and heating performance requirements when tested in accordance with AHRI 240 and UL 1995.D.Heating Performance shall conform to ASHRAE requirements when tested in accordance with AHRI 240 and UL 1995.1.4 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with specification Section 01?33?23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer’s Literature and Data.1.Air-Source Unitary Heat pump:a.Split systemC.Certification: Submit, simultaneously with shop drawings, a proof of certification that this product has been certified by AHRI. D.Performance Rating: Submit catalog selection data showing equipment ratings and compliance with required cooling and heating capacities EER and COP values as applicable.pleted System Readiness Checklists and completed by the contractor, signed by a qualified technician and dated on the date of completion.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.Federal Specification (Fed. Spec.):A-A-50502-90Air-conditioner (UNITARY HEAT PUMP), AIR TO AIR (3000 TO 300,000 BTUH)C.Air-Conditioning Heating and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) Standards:AHRI-DCPPDirectory of Certified Product Performance - Applied Directory of Certified Products210/240-08Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment270-08Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment310/380-04Standard for Packaged Terminal Air-Conditioners and Heat Pumps (CSA-C744-04)340/360-07Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump EquipmentD.Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA):210-07Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating (ANSI)410-96Recommended Safety Practices for Users and Installers of Industrial and Commercial FansE.American National Standards Institute (ANSI):S12.51-02 (R2007)Acoustics - Determination of Sound Power Levels of Noise Sources Using Sound Pressure - Precision Method for Reverberation Rooms (same as ISO 3741:1999)F.American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers Inc (ASHRAE):15-10Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems (ANSI)62.1-10Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (ANSI)90.1-07Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings2008 HandbookHVAC Systems and Equipment G.American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):B117-09Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) ApparatusH.National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA):MG 1-09 (R2010)Motors and Generators (ANSI)ICS 1-00 (R2005)Industrial Controls and Systems: General RequirementsI.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):90A-09Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating SystemsJ.Underwriters Laboratory (UL):1995-05Heating and Cooling EquipmentPART II- PRODUCTS2.1 UNITARY HEAT PUMPS, AIR TO AIRA.Units shall comply with Fed Spec A-A-50502, Type II, (Split System) having remote outdoor section separate from indoor Section.1.Unitary heat pumps shall bear the United States Environmental Protection Agency, Energy Star label and shall have a minimum Heating Season Performance Factor (HSPF) of 8.2 (Type II – Split System), and a minimum Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER) of 14.5 (Type II – Split System).B.Applicable AHRI Standards: Units shall be listed in the corresponding ARI Directory of Certified products shown in paragraph, APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:1.Air Source Unitary heat pumps with capacity less than 19 KW (65,000 Btu/hr), Comply with AHRI 210/240.2.Air Source heat pump with capacity above 19KW (above 65,000 Btu/hr, Comply with AHRI 340/360.C.Casing: Unit shall be constructed of zinc coated, 14-gage minimum. Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized, and finished with a weather-resistant baked enamel finish. Unit surfaces shall be tested 500 hours in a salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B117. Cabinet panels shall have lifting handles and shall be water- and air-tight seal. All exposed vertical, top covers and base pan shall be insulated with 25-mm (1-inch) matt-faced, fire-resistant, odorless, glass fiber material. Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2010. The base of the unit shall have provisions for forklift and crane lifting.D.Filters: One inch, MERV 7, throwaway filter shall be standard on all units below 19kW (6 Tons). Filter rack can be converted to two inch capability. Two inch, MERV 8, throwaway filters shall be factory supplied on all units above 19 kW (6 Tons).pressors: Compressors shall be direct-drive, hermetic scroll type with centrifugal type oil pumps. Motor shall be suction gas-cooled. Internal overloads and crankcase heaters shall be utilized with all compressors.F.Refrigerant Circuit: A minimum of two circuits is required. Each refrigerant circuit shall have independent fixed orifice or thermostatic expansion devices, service pressure ports, and refrigerant line filter driers factory installed as standard. An area shall be provided for replacement suction line driers.G.Evaporator and Condenser Coils: Internally finned, DN?10 (NPS?3/8) copper tubes mechanically bonded to a configured aluminum plate fin shall be standard. The evaporated coil and condenser coil shall be leak tested at the factory to 1378 kPa (200 psig) and pressure tested to 2756 kPa (400 psig). All dual compressor units shall have intermingled evaporator coils. Sloped condensate drain pans shall be provided.H.Outdoor fans: Direct driven, statically and dynamically balanced, draw-through in the vertical discharge position. The fan motors shall be permanently lubricated and shall have built-in thermal overload protection.I.Indoor Fan: 1.Forward-Curved, Centrifugal Fan: Provide V-belt driven with adjustable motor sheaves adjustable idler-arm assembly for quick-adjustment of fan belts and motor sheaves. Motors shall be thermally protected. Provide oversized motors for high static application. Motors shall meet the U.S. Energy Policy Act of 2005 (EPACT).J.Defrost Controls: A time initiated, temperature terminated defrost system shall ship with a setting of 70-minute cycle, with a choice of 50- or 90-minute cycle. Timed override limits defrost cycle to 10 minutes shall be available on units from 35- to 70-kW (10 to 20 tons). Adaptive demand defrost shall be provided on units below 35 kW (10 Tons).K.Unit Electrical1.Provide single point unit power connection.2.Unit control box shall be located within the unit and shall contain controls for compressor, reversing valve and fan motor operation and shall have a 50 VA 24-volt control circuit transformer and a terminal block for low voltage field wiring connections. 3.Safety Controls - High pressure, low temperature, and low pressure safety switches shall be wired through a latching lockout circuit to hold the conditioner off until it is reset electrically be interrupting the power supply to the conditioner. All safety switches shall be normally closed, opening upon fault detection. L.Operating Controls1.Provide unit with factory supplied DDC control system. 2.Low voltage, adjustable room thermostat to control heating and cooling in sequence with delay between stages, compressor and supply fan to maintain temperature setting. Include system selector switch/(off-heat-auto-cool) and fan control switch (auto-on). 3.Unit DDC Controller:a.Unit controller shall include input, output and self-contained programming as needed for complete control of unit.b.Unit controller shall be BAC net compliant and utilize BAC net operating protocol.c.Control system shall seamlessly interface with temperature control system as specified in Section 23 09 23, DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC without requiring gateways or any other interface devices.d.All program sequences shall be stored on board in EEPROM. No batteries shall be needed to retain logic program. All program sequences shall be execut4ed by controller 10 times per second and shall be capable of multiple PID loops for control of multiple devices. Programming of logic controller shall be completely modifiable in the field over installed BACnet LANs.e.Temperature Control System Interface: Points shall be available from the unit controller for service access and display and/or control.f.Space Temperature Sensor: The wall mounted sensor shall include occupied and unoccupied setpoint control, pushbutton unoccupied override, space temperature offset and space temperature indication. Refer to Section 23 09 23, DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC for additional requirements.2.2 CORROSION PROTECTIONA.Remote Outdoor Condenser Coils:1.Epoxy Immersion Coating – Electrically Deposited: The multi-stage corrosion-resistant coating application comprises of cleaning (heated alkaline immersion bath) and reverse-osmosis immersion rinse prior to the start of the coating process. The coating thickness shall be maintained between 0.6-mil and 1.2-mil. Before the coils are subjected to high-temperature oven cure, they are treated to permeate immersion rinse and spray. Where the coils are subject to UV exposure, UV protection spray treatment comprising of UV-resistant urethane mastic topcoat shall be applied. Provide complete coating process traceability for each coil and minimum five years of limited warranty. The coating process shall be such that uniform coating thickness is maintained at the fin edges. The quality control shall be maintained by ensuring compliance to the applicable ASTM Standards for the following:a.Salt Spray Resistance (Minimum 6,000 Hours)b.Humidity Resistance (Minimum 1,000 Hours)c.Water Immersion (Minimum 260 Hours) d.Cross-Hatch Adhesion (Minimum 4B-5B Rating)e.Impact Resistance (Up to 160 Inch/Pound) B.Exposed Outdoor Cabinet:1.Casing Surfaces (Exterior and Interior): All exposed and accessible metal surfaces shall be protected with a water-reducible acrylic with stainless steel pigment spray-applied over the manufacturer’s standard finish. The spray coating thickness shall be 2-4 mils and provide minimum salt-spray resistance of 1,000 hours (ASTM B117) AND 500 hours UV resistance (ASTM D4587).part 3- execution3.1 installationA.Install heat pumps according to manufacturers printed instructions.B.Install electrical and control devices furnished by the manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. All electrical work shall comply with Division?26 Sections.C.Ductwork: Comply with requirements in Section 23?31?00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS.D.Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 23?23?00, REFRIGERANT PIPING.3.2 Startup and testing: A.Perform startup checks according to manufacturer’s written instructions.B.Test controls and demonstrate its compliance with project requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and retest the equipment to the satisfaction of the COTR.C.Furnish test reports to the Senior COTR in accordance with specification Section 01?00?00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.3.3 instructionsProvide services of manufacturer’s technical representative for four hours to instruct VA personnel in operation and maintenance of heat pumps.3.4 STARTup and testing A.The COTR will observe startup and contractor testing of selected equipment. Coordinate the startup and contractor testing schedules with the COTR. Provide a minimum of 7 days prior notice.3.5 demonstration and training A.Provide services of manufacturer’s technical representative for four hours to instruct VA personnel in operation and maintenance of units.E N D SECTION 23 81 43SECTION 23 81 46WATER-SOURCE UNITARY Heat pumpsPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies the following configurations of electrically operated “Water-Source Unitary Heat Pumps"1.Water source unitary heat pumps smaller than 21 KW (6 Tons.B.Definitions: 1.Coefficient of Performance (COP) - Cooling: The ratio of the rate of the heat removed to the rate of energy input in consistent units, for a complete refrigerating system or some specific portion of that system under designated operating conditions.2.Coefficient of Performance (COP) - Heating: The ratio of the rate of heat delivered to the rate of energy input is consistent units for a complete heat pump system, including the compressor and, if applicable, auxiliary heat under designated operating conditions.3.Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER): The ratio of net cooling capacity in Btu/h to total rate of electricity input in watts under designated operating conditions.4.Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER): The ratio of net cooling capacity in Btu/h to total rate of electricity input in watts over a typical cooling season.5.Heating Season Performance Factor (HSPF): The ratio of the net heating capacity in Btu/h to total rate of electricity input in watts over a typical heating season.6.Energy-Star Ratings: Energy-Star is a government-backed labeling program that helps people and organizations save money and reduce greenhouse gas emissions by identifying factories, office equipment, home appliances and electronics that have superior energy efficiency.7.Unitary Water-Cooled Heat Pump: One or more factory made assemblies that normally include an indoor conditioning coil, compressor(s) and an outdoor refrigerant-to-water heat exchanger. These units provide both heating and cooling functions.8.FEMP: Federal Energy Management Program 9.Extended Range Heat Pumps (Ground-Source/Ground-Coupled): Heat pumps designed to use with extended operating range of entering water temperature from -1 C (30 F) to 49 C (120 F)1.2 RELATED WORKA.Section 01?00?00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: For pre-test requirements.B.Section 13?05?41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS: Seismic requirements for non-structural equipment.C.Section 23?05?11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division?23.D.Section 23?23?00, REFRIGERANT PIPING: Requirements for field refrigerant piping.E.Section 23?21?13, HYDRONIC PIPING and Section 23?22?13, STEAM and CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING: Requirements for piping for split systems and expansion tanks.F.Section 23?31?00, HVAC DUCTS and CASINGS: Requirements for sheet metal ductwork.G.Section 23?09?23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC: Requirements for controls and instrumentation.H.Section 23?05?93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, and BALANCING FOR HVAC: Requirements for testing, adjusting and balancing of HVAC system.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:A.Refer to specification Section 23?05?11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC.ply with ASHRAE Standard 15, Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.ply with ASHRAE 90.1-2010.1.4 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with specification Section 01?33?23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer’s Literature and Data.1.Water Source Unitary Heat Pumps:a.Less than 21 KW (6 Tons)C.Certification: Submit, simultaneously with shop drawings, a proof of certification that this product has been certified by AHRI. D.Performance Rating: Submit catalog selection data showing equipment ratings and compliance with required cooling and heating capacities EER and COP values as applicable.pleted System Readiness Checklists and completed by the contractor, signed by a qualified technician and dated on the date of completion.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.Federal Specification (Fed. Spec.):A-A-50502-90Air-conditioner (UNITARY HEAT PUMP), AIR TO AIR (3000 TO 300,000 BTUH)C.Air-Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) Standards:AHRI-DCPPDirectory of Certified Product Performance - Applied Directory of Certified Products 210/240-08Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment270-08Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment310/380-04Standard for Packaged Terminal Air-Conditioners and Heat Pumps (CSA-C744-04)320-98Water-Source Heat Pumps325-98Ground Water-Source Heat Pumps330-98Ground Source Closed-Loop Heat Pumps340/360-07Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump EquipmentD.Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA):210-07Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating (ANSI)410-96Recommended Safety Practices for Users and Installers of Industrial and Commercial FansE.American National Standards Institute (ANSI):S12.51-02 (R2007)Acoustics - Determination of Sound Power Levels of Noise Sources Using Sound Pressure - Precision Method for Reverberation Rooms (same as ISO 3741:1999)F.American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers Inc (ASHRAE):15-10Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems (ANSI)62.1-10Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (ANSI)90.1-10Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings2008 HandbookHVAC Systems and Equipment G.American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):B117-09Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) ApparatusH.National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA):MG 1-09 (R2010)Motors and Generators (ANSI)ICS 1-00 (R2005)Industrial Controls and Systems: General RequirementsI.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):90A-09Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating SystemsJ.Underwriters Laboratory (UL):1995-05Heating and Cooling EquipmentPART 2- PRODUCTS2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPSA.System Characteristics of a Ground Source Closed-Loop System: The system consists of multiple units connected to a 2-pipe, closed-loop hydronic system with continuous water circulation. The temperature of the water loop shall be maintained between approximately -1 and 49 degrees C (30-120 degrees F) by means of heat addition or heat rejection into the ground loop.B.Applicable AHRI Standards: Units shall be listed in the corresponding AHRI Directory of certified Products shown in paragraph APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS.C.The water-source heat pumps are available in different configurations, such as, console type, horizontal or vertical stacked type), roof-top, and unit ventilator type. Refer to DESIGNER NOTE 2 above to edit and make changes as required. D.Corrosion Protection:1.Remote Outdoor Condenser Coils:Epoxy Immersion Coating – Electrically Deposited: The multi-stage corrosion-resistant coating application comprises of cleaning (heated alkaline immersion bath) and reverse-osmosis immersion rinse prior to the start of the coating process. The coating thickness shall be maintained between 0.6-mil and 1.2-mil. Before the coils are subjected to high-temperature oven cure, they are treated to permeate immersion rinse and spray. Where the coils are subject to UV exposure, UV protection spray treatment comprising of UV-resistant urethane mastic topcoat shall be applied. Provide complete coating process traceability for each coil and minimum five years of limited warranty. The coating process shall be such that uniform coating thickness is maintained at the fin edges. The quality control shall be maintained by ensuring compliance to the applicable ASTM Standards for the following:Salt Spray Resistance (Minimum 6,000 Hours)Humidity Resistance (Minimum 1,000 Hours)Water Immersion (Minimum 260 Hours) Cross-Hatch Adhesion (Minimum 4B-5B Rating)e.Impact Resistance (Up to 160 Inch/Pound) 2.Exposed Outdoor Cabinet: Casing Surfaces (Exterior and Interior): All exposed and accessible metal surfaces shall be protected with a water-reducible acrylic with stainless steel pigment spray-applied over the manufacturer’s standard finish. The spray coating thickness shall be 2-4 mils and provide minimum salt-spray resistance of 1,000 hours (ASTM B117) AND 500 hours UV resistance (ASTM D4587)2.2 Water Source Unitary Heat Pump (WSHP) less than 21 kw (6 tons)A.Description: Packaged water-source heat pump with temperature controls; and shall be factory assembled, tested, and rated according to AHRI-ISO-13256-1. Unit shall be floor mounted console type with inlet and outlet duct connections. Comply with AHRI 320.B.Cabinet: Manufacturer’s standard galvanized steel for ducted models. Units shall have access panels, and ducted models shall have flanged duct connections. Cabinet shall be factory insulated with fiber glass duct liner, minimum 13 mm (1/2-inch) thick and complying with UL 181. Units shall have knockouts for electrical, piping, and condensate drain connections.C.Fan: 1.Housed Centrifugal Fan Direct driven, centrifugal, with permanently lubricated multi-speed motor resiliently mounted in fan inlet. pressor: Hermetic, rotary compressor installed on vibration isolators; with a slide-out chassis and housed in an acoustically treated enclosure. Unit shall have factory-installed safeties, anti-recycle timer, high-pressure cutout, low-pressure cutout or loss-of-charge switch, internal thermal-overload protection, and freeze stat to stop compressor if water-loop temperature in refrigerant-to-water heat exchanger falls below 2 deg?C (35 deg?F). Condensate overflow switch shall stop compressor with high condensate level in condensate drain pan. Compressor lockout circuit shall be capable of being reset at either remote thermostat or circuit breaker.E.Refrigerant Piping Materials: ASTM?B?743 copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints.F.Pipe Insulation: Refrigerant minimum 10-mm (3/8-inch) thick, flexible elastomeric insulation on piping exposed to airflow through the unit. Maximum 25/50 flame-spread/smoke-development indexes according to ASTM?E?84. G.Refrigerant Metering Device: Furnish with thermal expansion valve to allow specified operation with entering-water temperatures from minus 4 to plus 52 deg?C (25 to 125 deg?F). H.Condensate Drainage: Plastic or stainless-steel drain pan with condensate drain piping projecting through unit cabinet and complying with ASHRAE 62.1-2010.I.Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2010.J.Sound Attenuation Package: Minimum 1-mm (0.06-inch) thick compressor enclosure and front panel. Minimum 2-mm (0.12-inch) thick foam gasket around the compressor and perimeter of end panel, sound attenuating blanket over compressor and hot-gas muffler.K.General Motor Requirements: Comply with requirements in Section 23?05?12, GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC and STEAM GENERATION EQUIPMENT. Motor shall be multispeed, permanently lubricated.M.Water-to-Refrigerant Heat Exchanger: 1.Coaxial heat exchangers with cupronickel water tube with enhanced heat-transfer surfaces inside a steel shell; both shell and tube shall be leak tested to 3102 kPa (450 psig) on refrigerant side and 2758 kPa (400 psig) on water side. Heat exchanger shall be factory mounted in unit on resilient rubber vibration isolators. N.Water-Side Economizer: Copper tube and aluminum fin coil with three-way valve and entering-water temperature sensor and controller. Valve diverts water to water-side economizer coil ahead of refrigerant-to-water heat exchanger when entering-water temperature falls to 13 deg?C (55 deg?F).O.Refrigerant-to-Air Coils: Copper tubes with aluminum fins, leak tested to 3102 kPa (450 psig).P.Refrigerant Circuit Components: Sealed refrigerant circuit charged with // R-407C // R-410A // refrigerant1.Filter-Dryer: Factory installed to clean and dehydrate the refrigerant circuit.2.Charging Connections: Service fittings on suction and liquid for charging and testing.3.Reversing Valve: Pilot-operated sliding-type valve designed to be fail-safe in heating position with replaceable magnetic coil.4.Refrigerant Metering: Extended temperature range device or a bi-directional thermal expansion valve.Q.Hot-Gas Reheat: Reheat valve shall be a pilot-operated, sliding-type valve with replaceable magnetic coil to divert refrigerant hot gas to reheat coil when remote humidistat calls for dehumidification.R.Hot-Gas Bypass: Include constant pressure expansion valve, solenoid valve, and controls to maintain continuous refrigeration system operation at 10 percent of full load on lead compressor.S.Filters: Disposable, pleated type, 25 mm (1 inch) thick and with a minimum of 90 percent arrestance according to ASHRAE?52.1 and a MERV rating of 7 according to ASHRAE?52.2.TComply with requirements in Section 23?09?23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC for control equipment and sequence of operation.U.Controls:1.Basic Unit Controls:a.Low- and high-voltage protection.b.Overcurrent protection for compressor and fan motor.c.Random time delay, three to ten seconds, start on power up.d.Time delay override for servicing.e.Control voltage transformer.2.Thermostat: Wall-mounted thermostat heat-cool-off switch, fan on-auto switch, manual changeover, exposed, temperature set point, Deg F indication.3.Terminal Controller:a.Scheduled operation for occupied and unoccupied periods on 7-day clock with minimum 4 programmable periods per day, one- hour unoccupied period override period Remote control panel to contain programmable timer and LED for fault condition.pressor-disable relay shall stop compressor operation for demand limiting or switch to unoccupied operation.c.Unit shall automatic restart after five minutes if fault clears and lockout after three attempts to restart following fault.d.Indicate fault for service technician Return-air temperature high-limit (firestat).e.Stop unit on high temperature.f.Backup for volatile memory.g.Differential pressure switch shall indicate fan status.h.Fan failure alarm.i.Differential pressure switch shall indicate filter status.j.Dirty filter alarm.ply with requirements in Section 23?09?23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC for BAS interface requirements. Interface relay for scheduled operation. Interface relay shall provide indication of fault at central workstation. Interface shall be BAC-net for central BAS workstation for the following functions. Set-point adjustment for set points identified in this Section start/stop and operating status of heat-pump unit Data inquiry shall include supply air, room air temperature and humidity, and entering-water temperature. Occupied and unoccupied schedulesV.Electrical Connection: Control box with single electrical connection factory installed and tested // with fused disconnect.part 3- execution3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Floor-Mounted Units: Support on neoprene pads with minimum 3.17-mm (0.125-inch) static deflection. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases.B.Install wall-mounting thermostats, humidistats, and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls or as required in Section 23?09?23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC.3.2 CONNECTIONSA.Connect supply and return hydronic piping to heat pump with //unions and shutoff valves//hose kits//.B.Connect heat-pump condensate drain pan to indirect waste connection with condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against the pressure of fan. Install cleanouts in piping at changes of direction.C.Connect supply- and return-air ducts to water-source heat pumps with flexible duct connectors. Comply with requirements in Section 23?31?00, HVAC DUCTS and CASINGS.D.Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted.E.Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA.Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:1.Test the heat pump units for the performance compliance after the installation is complete and electrical circuitry is energized. 2.Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.3.Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm motor rotation and unit operation.4.Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.B.Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.3.4 INSTRUCTIONSA.Provide services of manufacturer’s technical representative for four hours to instruct VA personnel in operation and maintenance of heat pumps.3.5 STARTup and testing A.The COTR will observe startup and contractor testing of selected equipment. Coordinate the startup and contractor testing schedules with the COTR. Provide a minimum of 7 days prior notice.3.6 demonstration and training A.Provide services of manufacturer’s technical representative for four hours to instruct VA personnel in operation and maintenance of units.E N D SECTION 23 81 46SECTION 23 82 00CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITSPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION Unit heaters1.2 RELATED WORKA.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division 23.B.Section 23 05 41, NOISE and VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING and EQUIPMENT: Noise requirements.C.Section 23 21 13, HYDRONIC PIPING: Heating hot water and chilled water piping.D.Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS and CASINGS: Ducts and flexible connectors.E.Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC: Valve operators.F.Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, and BALANCING FOR HVAC: Flow rates adjusting and balancing.G.Section 23 82 16, AIR COILS: Additional coil requirements.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE Refer to Paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.FanCoil units. 2.Unit heaters. C.Certificates: pliance with paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE. pliance with specified standards. D.Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit in accordance with paragraph, INSTRUCTIONS, in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American National Standards Institute / Air Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute (ANSI/AHRI): 44008Performance Rating of Room Fan Coils National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):90A-09Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems70-11National Electrical Code C.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 18108Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors 199505Heating and Cooling Equipment 1.6 GUARANTY In accordance with FAR clause 52.246-21 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIT HEATERS A.General: Horizontal discharge type for electric heating medium, as indicated. B.Casing: Steel sheet, phosphatized to resist rust and finished in baked enamel. Provide hanger supports. C.Fan: Propeller type, direct driven by manufacturer's standard electric motor. Provide resilient mounting. Provide fan guard for horizontal discharge units. D.Discharge Air Control: Horizontal discharge: Horizontal, adjustable louvers. E.Electric Units: UL listed, factory wired to terminal strips for field connection of power and control wiring. 1.Heating elements: Nickel chromium alloy resistance wire embedded in a magnesium oxide insulating refractory and sealed in corrosion resisting metallic sheath with fins. Three phase heaters shall have balanced phases.2.Thermal cutout: Manual reset type, which disconnects elements, and motor in the event normal operating temperatures are exceeded. 3.Magnetic contactor: Factory installed with low voltage relay for remote pilot duty thermostat operation. F.Controls: Provide field installed unit mounted return air thermostats to control the unit fan. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Work shall be installed as shown and according to the manufacturer’s diagrams and recommendations.B.Handle and install units in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C.Support units rigidly so they remain stationary at all times. Crossbracing or other means of stiffening shall be provided as necessary. Method of support shall be such that distortion and malfunction of units cannot occur.D.Install fiberglass blanket insulation with a minimum R value of 8 above hydronic radiant panels.3.2 OPERATIONAL TEST Refer to Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC.3.3 demonstration and training A.Provide services of manufacturer’s technical representative for four hours to instruct VA personnel in operation and maintenance of units.E N D SECTION 23 82 00SECTION 23 82 16AIR COILSPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONHeating and cooling coils for air handling unit and duct applications.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Refer to paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE, Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.B.Unless specifically exempted by these specifications, heating and cooling coils shall be tested, rated, and certified in accordance with ARI Standard 4l0 and shall bear the ARI certification label.1.4 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data for Heating and Cooling Coils: Submit type, size, arrangements and performance details. Present application ratings in the form of tables, charts or curves.C.Provide installation, operating and maintenance instructions.D.Certification Compliance: Evidence of listing in current ARI Directory of Certified Applied Air Conditioning Products.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI):Directory of Certified Applied Air Conditioning ProductsARI 4l002Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling Air-Heating Coils.C.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):B75/75M-02Seamless Copper Tube (Metric)D.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):70-05National Electric CodeE.National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA):250-03Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum)F.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):199601Electric Duct HeatersPART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 HEATING AND COOLING COILSA.Conform to ASTM B75 and ARI 410.B.Tubes: Minimum 16 mm (0.625 inch) tube diameter; Seamless copper tubing.C.Fins: 0.1397 mm (0.0055 inch) aluminum or 0.1143 mm (0.0045 inch) copper mechanically bonded or soldered or helically wound around tubing. Provide copper fins for sprayed coil applications and reheat coils for Operating Rooms.D.Headers: Copper, welded steel or cast iron. Provide seamless copper tubing or resistance welded steel tube for volatile refrigerant coils.E."U" Bends, Where Used: Machine die-formed, silver brazed to tube ends.F.Coil Casing: 1.6 mm (l6 gage) galvanized steel with tube supports at 1200 mm (48 inch) maximum spacing. Construct casing to eliminate air bypass and moisture carryover. Provide duct connection flanges.G.Pressures kPa (PSIG):PressureSteam CoilRefrigerant CoilTest1725 (250)2070 (300)Working520 (75)1725 (250)H.Protection: Unless protected by the coil casing, provide cardboard, plywood, or plastic material at the factory to protect tube and finned surfaces during shipping and construction activities.I.Vents and Drain: Coils that are not vented or drainable by the piping system shall have capped vent/drain connections extended through coil casing.2.2 INTEGRAL FACE AND BYPASS TYPE STEAM COILA.Exempt from ARI Test and Certification.B.Conform to ASTM B75 and ARI 410.C.Minimum 16 mm (5/8-inch) steam tube installed in concentrically 25 mm (one-inch) OD diameter tube.D.Casing: 1.9 mm (l4 gage) galvanized steel with corrosion resistant paint.E.Tubes and Bypasses: Vertical or horizontal.F.Dampers: Interlocking opposed blades to completely isolate coil from air flow when unit is in bypass position; 1.6 mm (l6 gage) steel, coated with factory applied corrosion resistant baked enamel finish. Provide damper linkage and // pneumatic operator(s) // electric operators//.23 WATER COILS, INCLUDING GLYCOLWATERA.Drainable Type (SelfDraining, SelfVenting); manufacturer standard:l.Cooling, all types.2.Heating or preheat.3.Runaround energy recovery. ARI certification of capacity adjustment is waived. See Section 23 72 00, AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT.B.Cleanable Tube Type; manufacturer standard:l.Well water applications.PART 3 EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Follow coil manufacturer's instructions for handling, cleaning, installation and piping connections.b fins, if damaged. Eliminate air bypass or leakage at coil sections.E N D SECTION 23 82 16SECTION 23 84 00HUMIDITY CONTROL EQUIPMENTPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTIONThis section specifies dehumidifier units for stand-alone units use for dehumidifying air.1.2 related workA.Section 01?00?00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Requirements for pre-test of equipment.C.Section 23?05?11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division?23.D.Section 23?23?00, REFRIGERANT PIPING: Requirements for field refrigerant piping. E.Section 23?21?13, HYDRONIC PIPING: Requirements for field hot water piping.F.Section 23?22?13, STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING: Requirements for field steam and condensate piping. G.Section 23?82?16, AIR COILS: Requirements for runaround system coils. H.Section 23?31?00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS: Requirements for sheet metal ducts and fittings. I.Section 23?40?00, HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES: Requirements for filters including efficiency. J.Section 23?09?23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC: Requirements for controls and instrumentation. K.Section 23?05?93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC: Requirements for testing, adjusting and balancing of HVAC system. L.Section 23?05?12, GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION EQUIPMENT: Requirements for HVAC motors. M.Section 26?29?11, LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR STARTERS: Requirements for motor starters. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA.Refer to the GENERAL CONDITIONS.B.Refer to specification Section 01?00?00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS for performance tests and instructions to VA personnel.C.Refer to paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE, in specification Section 23?05?11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC.D.Unit(s) shall be provided by a manufacturer who has been manufacturing desiccant dehumidifiers and have been in satisfactory service for at least three (3) years.1.4 submittalsA.Submit in accordance with specification Section 01?33?23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer’s Literature and Data:1.Technical data on design operating inlet and outlet conditions, air flows with diagram showing air volumes and conditions throughout the system, dehumidification capacity, filtration and fan motor and electrical power data.2.A general arrangement diagram with overall dimensions showing all major components with overall dimensions, utility and duct work connections, bolting arrangement, operating weight and required service and equipment removal clearances.3.Control diagrams for stand alone use for dehumidifying air.C.Shop drawings shall indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, and field connection details.D.Submit fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted and sound power levels for both fan outlet and casing radiation at rated capacity.E.Submit unit control system documentation required for interface with BACnet protocol DDC control system. Submit BACnet compliant Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for all controllers.F.Submit electrical requirements for power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring, clearly indicating factoryinstalled and fieldinstalled wiring.G.Certificate: Evidence of satisfactory performance on three similar installations.H.Provide installation, operating and maintenance instructions, in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, in specification Section 01?00?00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.I.Performance test report: In accordance with PART 3.1.5 applicable publicationsA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.Air-conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI)410-01Forced–Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating CoilsC.Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA):99-10Standards Handbook210-07Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating (ANSI)301-06Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating (ANSI)D.American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)52.2-07METHOD OF TESTING General Ventilation Air Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size (ANSI)62.1-10Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (ANSI)E.American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA)9-1990 (R2008)Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings (ANSI)F.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)90A-09Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems70-0511National Electrical Code1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCEA.Fan Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal.B.Sound Ratings: AMCA 301; tested to AMCA 300 and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal.C.Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.D.Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in accordance with AHRI 410.E.Product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of pool dehumidification equipment who issues complete catalog data on total product.1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA.Accept products on site in factory-fabricated protective containers, with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage.B.Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures and finish.ply with manufacturer’s rigging and installation instructions.1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONSDo not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, fan has been test run, all piping is connected and energized and all wiring complete and tested.1.9 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTSA.Provide one additional set of fan belts and disposable panel filters for each unit.part 2 – products2.1 dehumidifier unitsA.General: Units shall be complete, factory assembled, and tested; and of sizes, arrangements, capacities, and performance as scheduled and as specified in the schedules shown in the drawings; and for indoor installation stand alone use for dehumidifying air.1.Unit(s) shall be capable and designed for year-round, 24-hours-a-day operation; and requiring only connections of ducts, utilities, and remote sensors, controllers, and monitors.3.Unit(s) shall include active regeneration system for control of dehumidification processes.B.Casing:1.Double-wall construction hinged access doors thick thermal insulation fill, stainless steel fasteners, knockouts for electrical and piping connections through the side of the unit, condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs. 2.The unit housing the internal partitions shall be constructed of minimum 18 gage galvanized steel or aluminum pre-insulated double wall panels with a minimum of 50-mm (2-inch) thermal insulation. The base shall be all welded, structural steel or formed 14-gage, galvanized steel. Units shall have cross supports for each major component and base channels and lifting eyes to facilitate rigging. The units shall be of water and air tight construction over all with interior air tight construction between various sections of the units. Adjoining panels shall be sealed with a silicon compound or heavy duty compression type gaskets. Leakage rate shall not exceed 2 percent at a pressure of 746 Pa (3.0 inches water gage).3.All non-pre-insulated exterior panels shall be insulated with minimum 25-mm (1-inch) vinyl- or foil-faced fiberglass insulation without exposed edges, and secured by permanent mechanical fasteners.4.All exterior panels shall be // embossed aluminum cabinet panels. 5.All internal air-processing and air-treatment components shall be removable through removable access panels without dismantling plenums or ductwork.6.Access panels shall be provided with resilient gaskets and quick-release hardware.7.Access doors for filters and control adjustment shall have corrosion-resistant, continuous hinge or heavy-duty, multiple hinges.8.Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2007.C.Dehumidifier: Dehumidifier shall rotary type, designed for continuous operation, and arranged to provide a counter flow of process and reactivation air streams with full-face pressure seals or low-friction contact seals on both sides to prevent cross leakage for external static pressure of up to 622 Pa (2.5 inches w.g.)D.Heat Exchanger:1.The heat exchanger shall be constructed of non-hygroscopic material with corrosion protection, described above for the coils and surfaces thermal wheel to prevent the transfer of water vapor or an air-to-air heat pipe with copper tubes and aluminum fins, fabricated with capillary wick structure charged with ozone friendly refrigerant to be used in the process and reactivation air steams. Refrigerant shall comply with ASHRAE 15, Group 1. For thermal wheel, supply and cooling air streams shall be counter flow and the component provided with full face contact seals on both sides to prevent leakage. The heat transfer effectiveness of the heat exchanger shall be minimum 80 percent with a maximum air pressure loss of 125 Pa (0.50 inch w.g.)2.Electric motor shall be fractional-horsepower with close-coupled speed reducer and a belt drive with belt tensioning system for the thermal wheel.E.Controls and Wiring: Factory-installed microprocessor type to control and monitor unit and communicate to central-control processor, and shall operate dehumidification units and maintain humidity and temperature set points. The controller shall be connected to the building DDC control system via an open protocol BACnet interface. 1.The unit shall have a factory wired and unit mounted central, electrical control panel with a single power supply connection. All internal wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Unit shall have a non-fused main power disconnect and control components required for automatic operation based on signals from space mounted humidity and temperature controls. Control panel shall have terminals for remote control devices.2.Controls shall be capable of shutting down the dehumidifier when humidity loads are reduced and the process shall be reversed when there is an increase in humidity loads. 3.Reactivation energy shall be automatically reduced at lower than design humidity loads.4.Carbon dioxide sensor mounted in return air shall operate minimum outdoor-air damper position.5.Discharge-air, outdoor-air, conditioned-space, control set-point-temperature, and outdoor-air enthalpy shall be displayed with a LCD in control panel.6.Filter pressure drop and alarm shall be displayed by an LCD in control panel.7.Airflow, fans, system, unit operation, and operating mode status shall be displayed in control panel. F.Fan Section:Housed Centrifugal Fans 1.Supply fan shall be centrifugal, galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, and shall be belt driven with adjustable sheaves and self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball bearings with extended grease fittings easily accessible inside the casing for process and reactivation air as scheduled. 2.Fans shall be AMCA class II construction, double-width, and double-inlet centrifugal forward cured or backward inclined or plug type, factory dynamically balanced and rated in accordance with AMCA standard 210.3.Fan sized for greater than 3000 CFM shall be belt driven. Belts shall be sized for 150 percent of fan motor HP.4.Fans shall be vibration isolated internally or externally.5.Connections at fan discharge shall have flexible duct connectors. //6.Fan motor and Drive: Motors shall be nominal 1750 RPM. Motor for reactivation fan may be direct-drive 3500 RPM. Motors shall be NEMA MG 1 Design B with open drip-proof housing and a minimum service factor of 1.15 complying with requirements in specification Section 23?05?11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC.7.General: Fans shall be Class II (minimum) construction with single inlet, aluminum wheel and stamped air-foil aluminum blades. The fan wheel shall be mounted on the directly-driven motor shaft in AMCA Arrangement 4.G.Filter Section: Pleated, disposable pre-filters in return-air mixing plenums. Filters shall be 50 mm (2 inches) thick, installed in filter rack, with a minimum efficiency report value (MERV) of 7 according to ASHRAE 52.2 and 90 percent average arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1H.Post Cooling Coil Section: Comply with requirements in Section 23?82?16, AIR COILS.I.Evaporative Cooler: Factory-assembled and wired unit with intake grilles, bituminous-coated sump, and individually removable,150-mm 6-inch glass-fiber pads with UL 900 (Class II) saturants 300-mm 12-inch glass-fiber pads with UL 900 (Class II) saturants.1.Water Circulation system: Sump pump with strainer, water distribution troughs at top of cooler pads, float-operated makeup valve, and drain connections.2.Automatic Drain System: Two-way normal open drain valve, three-way, float-operated makeup water valve, and ambient thermostat.ply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2007.J.Refrigeration Package: Comply with ASHRAE?15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."1.Energy Efficiency: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA?90.1-2010, "Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."2.Refrigerant Coils: Copper tubes with mechanically bonded aluminum fins; factory fabricated and tested according to ASHRAE?33 and AHRI?410; with multiple refrigerant circuits, seamless-copper headers with brazed connections, and // galvanized-steel frame. Coil and fins shall have a polyester coating. Coils shall have a minimum 300-psig (2070-kPa) working-pressure rating and be factory tested to 450 psig (3105 kPa), and to 300 psig (2070 kPa) while underwater.pressors: scroll compressors with integral vibration isolators and crankcase heaters that de-energize during compressor operation; with thermal-expansion valves, filter-dryers, sight glasses, compressor service valves, and liquid- and suction-line service valves.4.Number of Refrigerant Circuits: Two for compressor capacities more than 7-1/2 tons.5.Refrigerant: R-407C..6.Capacity Control: Hot-gas bypass valve and piping on one compressor.K.Safety Devices:1.Low-Pressure Cutout: Manual reset after three auto-reset failures.2.High-Pressure Cutout: Manual reset.pressor Motor Overload Protection: Manual reset.4.Antirecycling Timing Device: Prevent compressor restart for five minutes after shutdown.5.Adjustable, Low-Ambient, Head-Pressure Control: Designed to operate at temperatures as low as 0 deg?F (minus 18 deg?C) by cycling condenser fans and controlling speed of last fan of each circuit.6.Oil-Pressure Switch: Designed to shut down compressors on low oil pressure.L.Condenser Fans: Propeller-type fans directly driven by motors with permanently lubricated bearings and internal thermal-overload protection.M.Drain Pan and Connection: Stainless steel and complying with ASHRAE?62.1-2007.N.Remote-control panel shall contain controls and indicator lights consisting of the following:1.On-off fan switch.2.Minimum outdoor-air damper potentiometer position LCD.3.Supply-fan operating indicator light.4.Mechanical cooling malfunction indicator light.5.Clogged filter indicator light.R.Electrical Convenience Outlet: 120-V ac fused, duplex straight-blade receptacles separately fused and located inside dehumidification unit casing.PART 3 – EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Follow equipment manufacturer’s written instructions for handling and installation of equipment.B.Adjust seals and purge of rotating wheels as recommended by the manufacturer.C.Verify correct settings and installation of controls.D.Install vibration-control devices.1.Units with Internally Isolated Fans: Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases.2.Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural-steel support frame using threaded steel rods and spring hangers.3.2CONNECTIONSA.Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.B.Connect piping to dehumidification units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.C.Connect condensate drain pans using minimum DN?32 NPS?1-1/4copper tubing. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan, and install clean out at changes in direction.D.Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 23?23?00, REFRIGERANT PIPING. Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.E.Ground equipment according to Section 26?05?26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.F.Connect wiring according to Section 26?05?21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW).G.Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL?486A and UL?486B.3.3STARTUP SERVICE A.Perform the following final checks before startup:1.Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.2.Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connection to piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.3.Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.4.Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify free fan wheel rotation and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.5.Verify lubrication of bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts.6.Install clean filters.7.Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected duct systems are in fully open position.B.Perform the following starting procedures for dehumidification units:1.Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to indicated rpm. Replace malfunctioning motors, bearings, and fan wheels.2.Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.3.Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan performance.plete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.D.Startup Report: Report findings during startup. Identify startup steps, corrective measures taken, and final results.3.4ADJUSTINGA.Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.B.Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.3.5CLEANINGA.Clean dehumidification units internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheels, cabinets, and coils' entering-air face.B.After completing system installation, testing, and startup service of dehumidification units, clean filter housings and install new filters.3.6INSTRUCTIONSProvide services of manufacturer’s technical representative for eight hours to instruct VA personnel in operation and maintenance of desiccant dehumidifiers. 3.7 demonstration and training A.Provide services of manufacturer’s technical representative for four hours to instruct VA personnel in operation and maintenance of units.E N D SECTION 23 84 00SECTION 26 05 11REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONSPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section applies to all sections of Division 26.B.Furnish and install electrical wiring, systems, equipment and accessories in accordance with the specifications and drawings. Capacities and ratings of motors, transformers, cable, panelboards, and other items and arrangements for the specified items are shown on drawings.C.Wiring ampacities specified or shown on the drawings are based on copper conductors, with the conduit and raceways accordingly sized. Aluminum conductors are prohibited.1.2 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTSA.References to the International Building Code (IBC), National Electrical Code (NEC), Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) are minimum installation requirement standards.B.Drawings and other specification sections shall govern in those instances where requirements are greater than those specified in the above standards.1.3 TEST STANDARDSA.All materials and equipment shall be listed, labeled or certified by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., standards where test standards have been established. Equipment and materials which are not covered by UL Standards will be accepted provided equipment and material is listed, labeled, certified or otherwise determined to meet safety requirements of a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Equipment of a class which no nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe, will be considered if inspected or tested in accordance with national industrial standards, such as NEMA, or ANSI. Evidence of compliance shall include certified test reports and definitive shop drawings.B.Definitions:1.Listed; Equipment, materials, or services included in a list published by an organization that is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction and concerned with evaluation of products or services, that maintains periodic inspection of production or listed equipment or materials or periodic evaluation of services, and whose listing states that the equipment, material, or services either meets appropriate designated standards or has been tested and found suitable for a specified purpose.2.Labeled; Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label, symbol, or other identifying mark of an organization that is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction and concerned with product evaluation, that maintains periodic inspection of production of labeled equipment or materials, and by whose labeling the manufacturer indicates compliance with appropriate standards or performance in a specified manner.3.Certified; equipment or product which:a.Has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet nationally recognized standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner.b.Production of equipment or product is periodically inspected by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.c.Bears a label, tag, or other record of certification.4.Nationally recognized testing laboratory; laboratory which is approved, in accordance with OSHA regulations, by the Secretary of Labor.1.4 QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES) A.Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and presently produce, as one of the manufacturer's principal products, the equipment and material specified for this project, and shall have manufactured the item for at least three years.B.Product Qualification:1.Manufacturer's product shall have been in satisfactory operation, on three installations of similar size and type as this project, for approximately three years.2.The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a list of installations where the products have been in operation before approval.C.Service Qualifications: There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or trained by the manufacturer which will render satisfactory service to this installation within eight hours of receipt of notification that service is needed. Submit name and address of service organizations.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSApplicable publications listed in all Sections of Division are the latest issue, unless otherwise noted.1.6 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTSA.Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, for which replacement parts shall be available.B.When more than one unit of the same class or type of equipment is required, such units shall be the product of a single manufacturer.C.Equipment Assemblies and Components:ponents of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer.2.Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which include components made by others, shall assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit.ponents shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the intended service.4.Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer.D.Factory wiring shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on all wiring diagrams.E.When Factory Testing Is Specified:1.The Government shall have the option of witnessing factory tests. The contractor shall notify the VA through the COTR a minimum of 15 working days prior to the manufacturers making the factory tests.2.Four copies of certified test reports containing all test data shall be furnished to the COTR prior to final inspection and not more than 90 days after completion of the tests.3.When equipment fails to meet factory test and re-inspection is required, the contractor shall be liable for all additional expenses, including expenses of the Government.1.7 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTSWhere variations from the contract requirements are requested in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS and Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, the connecting work and related components shall include, but not be limited to additions or changes to branch circuits, circuit protective devices, conduits, wire, feeders, controls, panels and installation methods.1.8 EQUIPMENT PROTECTIONA.Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical damage, vermin, dirt, corrosive substances, fumes, moisture, cold and rain.1.Store equipment indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Equipment shall include but not be limited to panelboards, transformers, , motor controllers, enclosures, controllers, circuit protective devices, cables, wire, light fixtures, electronic equipment, and accessories.2.During installation, equipment shall be protected against entry of foreign matter; and be vacuum-cleaned both inside and outside before testing and operating. Compressed air shall not be used to clean equipment. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside equipment.3.Damaged equipment shall be, as determined by the COTR, placed in first class operating condition or be returned to the source of supply for repair or replacement.4.Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable heavy kraft paper, sheet vinyl or equal.5.Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be refinished with the same quality of paint and workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are not obvious.1.9 WORK PERFORMANCEA.All electrical work must comply with the requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC), NFPA 70B, NFPA 70E, OSHA Part 1910 subpart J, OSHA Part 1910 subpart S and OSHA Part 1910 subpart K in addition to other references required by contract.B.Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibility of the contractor.C.Electrical work shall be accomplished with all affected circuits or equipment de-energized. When an electrical outage cannot be accomplished in this manner for the required work, the following requirements are mandatory:1.Electricians must use full protective equipment (i.e., certified and tested insulating material to cover exposed energized electrical components, certified and tested insulated tools, etc.) while working on energized systems in accordance with NFPA 70E.2.Electricians must wear personal protective equipment while working on energized systems in accordance with NFPA 70E.3.Before initiating any work, a job specific work plan must be developed by the contractor with a peer review conducted and documented by the COTR and Medical Center staff. The work plan must include procedures to be used on and near the live electrical equipment, barriers to be installed, safety equipment to be used and exit pathways.4.Work on energized circuits or equipment cannot begin until prior written approval is obtained from the COTR.D.For work on existing stations, arrange, phase and perform work to assure electrical service for other buildings at all times. Refer to Article OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS under Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.E.New work shall be installed and connected to existing work neatly, safely and professionally. Disturbed or damaged work shall be replaced or repaired to its prior conditions, as required by Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.F.Coordinate location of equipment and conduit with other trades to minimize interferences.1.10 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTSA.Equipment location shall be as close as practical to locations shown on the drawings.B.Working spaces shall not be less than specified in the NEC for all voltages specified.C.Inaccessible Equipment:1.Where the Government determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, the equipment shall be removed and reinstalled as directed at no additional cost to the Government.2."Conveniently accessible" is defined as being capable of being reached quickly for operation, maintenance, or inspections without the use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as, but not limited to, motors, pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping, ductwork, conduit and raceways.1.11 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATIONA.In addition to the requirements of the NEC, install an identification sign which clearly indicates information required for use and maintenance of items such as panelboards, cabinets, motor controllers (starters), safety switches, separately enclosed circuit breakers, individual breakers and motor control assemblies, control devices and other significant equipment.B.Nameplates for Normal Power System equipment shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core with engraved lettering. Nameplates for Essential Electrical System (EES) equipment, as defined in the NEC, shall be laminated red phenolic resin with a white core with engraved lettering. Lettering shall be a minimum of 1/2 inch [12mm] high. Nameplates shall indicate equipment designation, rated bus amperage, voltage, number of phases, number of wires, and type of EES power branch as applicable. Secure nameplates with screws.1.12 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B.The Government's approval shall be obtained for all equipment and material before delivery to the job site. Delivery, storage or installation of equipment or material which has not had prior approval will not be permitted at the job site.C.All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings and other data necessary for the Government to ascertain that the proposed equipment and materials comply with specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall be legible and clearly identify equipment being submitted.D.Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies which consist of more than one item or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole. Partial submittals will not be considered for approval.1.Mark the submittals, "SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION__________________".2.Submittals shall be marked to show specification reference including the section and paragraph numbers.3.Submit each section separately.E.The submittals shall include the following:rmation that confirms compliance with contract requirements. Include the manufacturer's name, model or catalog numbers, catalog information, technical data sheets, shop drawings, pictures, nameplate data and test reports as required.2.Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams for communication and signal systems, control systems and equipment assemblies. All terminal points and wiring shall be identified on wiring diagrams.3.Parts list which shall include those replacement parts recommended by the equipment manufacturer.F.Manuals: Submit in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.1.Maintenance and Operation Manuals: Submit as required for systems and equipment specified in the technical sections. Furnish four copies, bound in hardback binders, (manufacturer's standard binders) or an approved equivalent. Furnish one complete manual as specified in the technical section but in no case later than prior to performance of systems or equipment test, and furnish the remaining manuals prior to contract completion.2.Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words "MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUAL," the name and location of the system, equipment, building, name of Contractor, and contract number. Include in the manual the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing the system or equipment and the local representatives for the system or equipment.3.Provide a "Table of Contents" and assemble the manual to conform to the table of contents, with tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.4.The manuals shall include:a.Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of the equipment.b.A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown.c.Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.d.Installation instructions.e.Safety precautions for operation and maintenance.f.Diagrams and illustrations.g.Periodic maintenance and testing procedures and frequencies, including replacement parts numbers and replacement frequencies.h.Performance data.i.Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of supply, recommended spare parts, and name of servicing organization.j.List of factory approved or qualified permanent servicing organizations for equipment repair and periodic testing and maintenance, including addresses and factory certification qualifications.G.Approvals will be based on complete submission of manuals together with shop drawings.H.After approval and prior to installation, furnish the COTR with one sample of each of the following:1.A 300 mm (12 inch) length of each type and size of wire and cable along with the tag from the coils of reels from which the samples were taken. 2.Each type of conduit coupling, bushing and termination fitting. 3.Conduit hangers, clamps and supports. 4.Duct sealing compound. 5.Each type of receptacle, toggle switch, occupancy sensor, outlet box, manual motor starter, device wall plate, engraved nameplate, wire and cable splicing and terminating material, and branch circuit single pole molded case circuit breaker.1.13 SINGULAR NUMBER Where any device or part of equipment is referred to in these specifications in the singular number (e.g., "the switch"), this reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation as shown on the drawings.1.14 Acceptance Checks and TestsThe contractor shall furnish the instruments, materials and labor for field tests.1.15 TRAININGA.Training shall be provided in accordance with Article 1.25, INSTRUCTIONS, of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.B.Training shall be provided for the particular equipment or system as required in each associated specification.C.A training schedule shall be developed and submitted by the contractor and approved by the COTR at least 30 days prior to the planned training.E N D SECTION 26 05 11SECTION 26 05 21LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)PART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONThis section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of the low voltage power and lighting wiring.1.2 RELATED WORKSealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of time rated construction: Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.General electrical requirements that are common to more than one section in Division 26: Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.Conduits for cables and wiring: Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents: Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.In accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, furnish the following:1.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Showing each cable type and rating.2.Certificates: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver to the COTR four copies of the certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and has been properly installed.1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are reference in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society of Testing Material (ASTM):D2301-04Standard Specification for Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape C.Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):A-A-59544-00Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation)D.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):70-05National Electrical Code (NEC)E.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):44-02Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables83-03Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables467-01Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment486A-01Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors486C-02Splicing Wire Connectors486D-02Insulated Wire Connector Systems for Underground Use or in Damp or Wet Locations486E-00Equipment Wiring Terminals for Use with Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors493-01Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch Circuit Cable514B-02Fittings for Cable and Conduit1479-03Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire StopsPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CABLE AND WIRE (POWER AND LIGHTING)A.Cable and Wire shall be in accordance with Fed. Spec. A-A-59544, except as hereinafter specified.B.Single Conductor:1.Shall be annealed copper.2.Shall be stranded for sizes No. 8 AWG and larger, solid for sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller.3.Shall be minimum size No. 12 AWG, except where smaller sizes are allowed herein.C.Insulation: THW, XHHW, or dual rated THHN-THWN shall be in accordance with UL 44, and 83.D.Color Code:1.Secondary service, feeder and branch circuit conductors shall be color coded as follows:208/120 voltPhase480/277 voltBlackABrownRedBOrangeBlueCYellowWhiteNeutralGray ** or white with colored (other than green) tracer.a.The lighting circuit “switch legs” and 3-way switch “traveling wires” shall have color coding unique and distinct (i.e. pink and purple) from the color coding indicated above. The unique color codes shall be solid and in accordance with the NEC. Field coordinate for a final color coding with the COTR .2.Use solid color compound or solid color coating for No. 12 AWG and No. 10 AWG branch circuit conductors and neutral sizes.3.Phase conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be color-coded using one of the following methods:a.Solid color compound or solid color coating.b.Stripes, bands, or hash marks of color specified above.c.Color as specified using 19 mm (3/4 inch) wide tape. Apply tape in half overlapping turns for a minimum of 75 mm (three inches) for terminal points, and in junction boxes, pull boxes and troughs, Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Where cable markings are covered by tape, apply tags to cable stating size and insulation type.4.For modifications and additions to existing wiring systems, color coding shall conform to the existing wiring system.5.Color code for isolated power system wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC.2.2 SPLICES AND JOINTSA.In accordance with UL 486A, C, D, E and NEC.B.Branch circuits (No. 10 AWG and smaller):1.Connectors: Solderless, screwon, reusable pressure cable type, 600 volt, 105 degree C with integral insulation, approved for copper and aluminum conductors.2.The integral insulator shall have a skirt to completely cover the stripped wires.3.The number, size, and combination of conductors, as listed on the manufacturers packaging shall be strictly complied with.C.Feeder Circuits:1.Connectors shall be indent, hex screw, or bolt clamptype of high conductivity and corrosionresistant material.2.Field installed compression connectors for cable sizes 250 kcmil and larger shall have not less than two clamping elements or compression indents per wire.3.Insulate splices and joints with materials approved for the particular use, location, voltage, and temperature. Insulate with not less than that of the conductor level that is being joined.4.Plastic electrical insulating tape: ASTM D2304 shall apply, flame retardant, cold and weather resistant.2.3 CONTROL WIRING A.Unless otherwise specified in other sections of these specifications, control wiring shall be as specified for power and lighting wiring, except the minimum size shall be not less than No. 14 AWG.B.Control wiring shall be large enough so that the voltage drop under inrush conditions does not adversely affect operation of the controls.2.4 WIRE LUBRICATING COMPOUNDA.Suitable for the wire insulation and conduit it is used with, and shall not harden or become adhesive.B.Shall not be used on wire for isolated type electrical power systems.2.5 FIREPROOFING TAPEA.The tape shall consist of a flexible, conformable fabric of organic composition coated one side with flameretardant elastomer.B.The tape shall be selfextinguishing and shall not support combustion. It shall be arc-proof and fireproof.C.The tape shall not deteriorate when subjected to water, gases, salt water, sewage, or fungus and be resistant to sunlight and ultraviolet light.D.The finished application shall withstand a 200-ampere arc for not less than 30 seconds.E.Securing tape: Glass cloth electrical tape not less than 0.18 mm (7?mils) thick, and 19 mm (3/4 inch) wide.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAl A.Install in accordance with the NEC, and as specified.B.Install all wiring in raceway systems, except where direct burial or HCF Type MC cables are used.C.Splice cables and wires only in outlet boxes, junction boxes,and pull boxes.D.Wires of different systems (i.e. 120V, 277V) shall not be installed in the same conduit or junction box system.E.Install cable supports for all vertical feeders in accordance with the NEC. Provide split wedge type which firmly clamps each individual cable and tightens due to cable weight.F.For panelboards, cabinets, wireways, switches, and equipment assemblies, neatly form, train, and tie the cables in individual circuits.G.Wire Pulling:1.Provide installation equipment that will prevent the cutting or abrasion of insulation during pulling of cables.2.Use ropes made of nonmetallic material for pulling feeders.3.Attach pulling lines for feeders by means of either woven basket grips or pulling eyes attached directly to the conductors, as approved by the COTR.4.Pull in multiple cables together in a single conduit.H.No more than (3) single-phase branch circuits shall be installed in any one conduit.I.The wires shall be derated in accordance with NEC Article 310. Neutral wires, under conditions defined by the NEC, shall be considered current-carrying conductors.3.2 SPLICE INSTALLATIONA.Splices and terminations shall be mechanically and electrically secure. B.Where the Government determines that unsatisfactory splices or terminations have been installed, remove the devices and install approved devices at no additional cost to the Government.3.3 CONTROL AND SIGNAL WIRING INSTALLATIONA.Unless otherwise specified in other sections, install wiring and connect to equipment/devices to perform the required functions as shown and specified. B.Except where otherwise required, install a separate power supply circuit for each system so that malfunctions in any system will not affect other systems.C.Where separate power supply circuits are not shown, connect the systems to the nearest panelboards of suitable voltages, which are intended to supply such systems and have suitable spare circuit breakers or space for installation.D.Install a red warning indicator on the handle of the branch circuit breaker for the power supply circuit for each system to prevent accidental deenergizing of the systems.E.System voltages shall be 120 volts or lower where shown on the drawings or as required by the NEC.3.4 CONTROL AND SIGNAL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATIONA.Install a permanent wire marker on each wire at each termination.B.Identifying numbers and letters on the wire markers shall correspond to those on the wiring diagrams used for installing the systems.C.Wire markers shall retain their markings after cleaning.3.5 FEEDER IDENTIFICATIONIn each interior pulbox and junction box, install metal tags on each circuit cables and wires to clearly designate their circuit identification and voltage.3.6 exisitng wiringUnless specifically indicated on the plans, existing wiring shall not be reused for the new installation. Only wiring that conforms to the specifications and applicable codes may be reused. If existing wiring does not meet these requirements, existing wiring may not be reused and new wires shall be installed.3.7 FIELD TESTINGA.Feeders and branch circuits shall have their insulation tested after installation and before connection to utilization devices such as fixtures, motors, or appliances.B.Tests shall be performed by megger and conductors shall test free from shortcircuits and grounds.C.Test conductor phasetophase and phasetoground.D.The Contractor shall furnish the instruments, materials, and labor for these tests.E N D SECTION 26 05 21SECTION 26 05 26GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies general grounding and bonding requirements of electrical equipment operations and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents. B.“Grounding electrode system” refers to all electrodes required by NEC, as well as including made, supplementary, lightning protection system grounding electrodes.The terms “connect” and “bond” are used interchangeably in this specification and have the same meaning.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one section of Division 26. B.Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Low Voltage power and lighting wiring.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS. B.Shop Drawings: 1.Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.2.Include the location of system grounding electrode connections and the routing of aboveground and underground grounding electrode conductors. C.Test Reports: Provide certified test reports of ground resistance. D.Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the COTR:1.Certification that the materials and installation is in accordance with the drawings and specifications.2.Certification, by the Contractor, that the complete installation has been properly installed and tested. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSPublications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. A.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):B1-2001Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper WireB8-2004Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or SoftB.Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):81-1983IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground SystemC.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 702005National Electrical Code (NEC) 992005Health Care FacilitiesD.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 442005 ThermosetInsulated Wires and Cables832003 ThermoplasticInsulated Wires and Cables4672004 Grounding and Bonding Equipment 486A-486B-2003 Wire Connectors PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS A.Equipment grounding conductors shall be UL 83 insulated stranded copper, except that sizes 6 mm? (10 AWG) and smaller shall be solid copper. Insulation color shall be continuous green for all equipment grounding conductors, except that wire sizes 25 mm? (4 AWG) and larger shall be permitted to be identified per NEC.B.Bonding conductors shall be ASTM B8 bare stranded copper, except that sizes 6 mm? (10 AWG) and smaller shall be ASTM B1 solid bare copper wire. C.Electrical System Grounding: Conductor sizes shall not be less than what is shown on the drawings and not less than required by the NEC, whichever is greater. 2.2 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTSComponents shall meet or exceed UL 467 and be clearly marked with the manufacturer, catalog number, and permitted conductor size(s).2.3 ground connectionsA.Above Grade:1.Bonding Jumpers: compression type connectors, using zinc-plated fasteners and external tooth lockwashers.2.Ground Busbars: Two-hole compression type lugs using tin-plated copper or copper alloy bolts and nuts.3.Rack and Cabinet Ground Bars: one-hole compression-type lugs using zinc-plated or copper alloy fasteners.2.4 equipment rack and cabinet ground barsProvide solid copper ground bars designed for mounting on the framework of open or cabinet-enclosed equipment racks with minimum dimensions of 4 mm thick by 19 mm wide (3/8 inch x ? inch).2.5 ground terminal blocksAt any equipment mounting location (e.g. backboards and hinged cover enclosures) where rack-type ground bars cannot be mounted, provide screw lug-type terminal blocks.2.6 splice case ground accessoriesSplice case grounding and bonding accessories shall be supplied by the splice case manufacturer when available. Otherwise, use 16 mm? (6 AWG) insulated ground wire with shield bonding connectors.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A.Ground in accordance with the NEC, as shown on drawings, and as hereinafter specified. B.System Grounding: 1.Secondary service neutrals: Ground at the supply side of the secondary disconnecting means and at the related transformers. 2.Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from the service entrance): Ground the secondary neutral. 3.Isolation transformers and isolated power systems shall not be system grounded. C.Equipment Grounding: Metallic structures (including ductwork and building steel), enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits shall be bonded and grounded. 3.2 INACCESSIBLE GROUNDING CONNECTIONSMake grounding connections, which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible (except connections for which periodic testing access is required) by exothermic weld.3.3 SECONDARY EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITS A.Main Bonding Jumper: Bond the secondary service neutral to the ground bus in the service equipment. B.Metallic Piping, Building Steel, and Supplemental Electrode(s): 1.Provide a grounding electrode conductor sized per NEC between the service equipment ground bus and all metallic water and gas pipe systems, building steel, and supplemental or made electrodes. Jumper insulating joints in the metallic piping. All connections to electrodes shall be made with fittings that conform to UL 467.2.Provide a supplemental ground electrode and bond to the grounding electrode system. C.Service Disconnect (Separate Individual Enclosure): Provide a ground bar bolted to the enclosure with lugs for connecting the various grounding conductors.D.Switchgear, Switchboards, Unit Substations: 1.Connect the various feeder equipment grounding conductors to the ground bus in the enclosure with suitable pressure connectors. 2.For service entrance equipment, connect the grounding electrode conductor to the ground bus. 3.Connect metallic conduits, which terminate without mechanical connection to the housing, by grounding bushings and grounding conductor to the equipment ground bus.E.Transformers: 1.Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from service equipment): Ground the secondary neutral at the transformer. Provide a grounding electrode conductor from the transformer to the nearest component of the grounding electrode system. F.Conduit Systems:1.Ground all metallic conduit systems. All metallic conduit systems shall contain an equipment grounding conductor. 2.Nonmetallic conduit systems shall contain an equipment grounding conductor, except that non-metallic feeder conduits which carry a grounded conductor from exterior transformers to interior or building-mounted service entrance equipment need not contain an equipment grounding conductor.3.Conduit containing only a grounding conductor, and which is provided for mechanical protection of the conductor, shall be bonded to that conductor at the entrance and exit from the conduit. G.Feeders and Branch Circuits: Install equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and power and lighting branch circuits. H.Boxes, Cabinets, Enclosures, and Panelboards: 1.Bond the equipment grounding conductor to each pullbox, junction box, outlet box, device box, cabinets, and other enclosures through which the conductor passes (except for special grounding systems for intensive care units and other critical units shown). 2.Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for equipment grounding conductor termination. 3.Provide ground bars in panelboards, bolted to the housing, with sufficient lugs to terminate the equipment grounding conductors. I.Motors and Starters: Provide lugs in motor terminal box and starter housing or motor control center compartment to terminate equipment grounding conductors. J.Receptacles shall not be grounded through their mounting screws. Ground with a jumper from the receptacle green ground terminal to the device box ground screw and the branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. K.Ground lighting fixtures to the equipment grounding conductor of the wiring system when the green ground is provided; otherwise, ground the fixtures through the conduit systems. Fixtures connected with flexible conduit shall have a green ground wire included with the power wires from the fixture through the flexible conduit to the first outlet box. L.Fixed electrical appliances and equipment shall be provided with a ground lug for termination of the equipment grounding conductor. M.Panelboard Bonding: The equipment grounding terminal buses of the normal and essential branch circuit panelboards serving the same individual patient vicinity shall be bonded together with an insulated continuous copper conductor not less than 16 mm? (10 AWG). These conductors shall be installed in rigid metal conduit. 3.4 corrosion inhibitorsWhen making ground and ground bonding connections, apply a corrosion inhibitor to all contact surfaces. Use corrosion inhibitor appropriate for protecting a connection between the metals used.3.5 CONDUCTIVE PIPING A.Bond all conductive piping systems, interior and exterior, to the building to the grounding electrode system. Bonding connections shall be made as close as practical to the equipment ground bus. B.In operating rooms and at intensive care and coronary care type beds, bond the gases and suction piping, at the outlets, directly to the room or patient ground bus. 3.6 electrical room groundingBuilding Earth Ground Busbars: Provide ground busbar hardware at eachelectrical room and connect to pigtail extensions of the building grounding ring.3.7 wireway groundingA.Ground and Bond Metallic Wireway Systems as follows:Bond the metallic structures of wireway to provide 100 percent electrical continuity throughout the wireway system by connecting a 16 mm? (6 AWG) bonding jumper at all intermediate metallic enclosures and across all section junctions.Install insulated 16 mm? (6 AWG) bonding jumpers between the wireway system bonded as required in paragraph 1 above, and the closest building ground at each end and approximately every 16 meters (50 feet).Use insulated 16 mm? (6 AWG) bonding jumpers to ground or bond metallic wireway at each end at all intermediate metallic enclosures and cross all section junctions.Use insulated 16 mm? (6 AWG) bonding jumpers to ground cable tray to column-mounted building ground plates (pads) at each end and approximately every 15 meters.3.8 ground resistance A.Grounding system resistance to ground shall not exceed 5 ohms. Make necessary modifications or additions to the grounding electrode system for compliance without additional cost to the Government. Final tests shall assure that this requirement is met.B.Resistance of the grounding electrode system shall be measured using a four-terminal fall-of-potential method as defined in IEEE 81. Ground resistance measurements shall be made before the electrical distribution system is energized and shall be made in normally dry conditions not less than 48 hours after the last rainfall. Resistance measurements of separate grounding electrode systems shall be made before the systems are bonded together below grade. The combined resistance of separate systems may be used to meet the required resistance, but the specified number of electrodes must still be provided.C.Services at power company interface points shall comply with the power company ground resistance requirements. D.Below-grade connections shall be visually inspected by the COTR prior to backfilling. The Contractor shall notify the COTR 24 hours before the connections are ready for inspection.E N D SECTION 26 05 26SECTION 26 05 33RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of conduit, fittings, and boxes to form complete, coordinated, grounded raceway systems. Raceways are required for all wiring unless shown or specified otherwise.B.Definitions: The term conduit, as used in this specification, shall mean any or all of the raceway types specified.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Mounting board for telephone closets: Section 06 10 00, ROUGH CARPENTRY.B.Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of fire rated construction: Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.C.Fabrications for the deflection of water away from the building envelope at penetrations: Section 07 60 00, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.D.Sealing around conduit penetrations through the building envelope to prevent moisture migration into the building: Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.E.Identification and painting of conduit and other devices: Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.F.General electrical requirements and items that is common to more than one section of Division 26: Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.G.Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents: Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.1.3 SUBMITTALSIn accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, furnish the following:A.Shop Drawings:1.Size and location of main feeders; 2.Size and location of panels and pull boxes3.Layout of required conduit penetrations through structural elements.4.The specific item proposed and its area of application shall be identified on the catalog cuts.B.Certification: Prior to final inspection, deliver to the COTR four copies of the certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and has been properly installed.1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):70-05National Electrical Code (NEC)C.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):1-03Flexible Metal Conduit 5-01Surface Metal Raceway and Fittings6-03Rigid Metal Conduit50-03Enclosures for Electrical Equipment360-03Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit467-01Grounding and Bonding Equipment514A-01Metallic Outlet Boxes514B-02Fittings for Cable and Conduit797-03Electrical Metallic Tubing1242-00Intermediate Metal ConduitD.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):FB1-03Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing and CablePART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALA.Conduit Size: In accordance with the NEC, but not less than 20 mm (3/4?inch) unless otherwise shown. Where permitted by the NEC, 20 mm (3/4 inch) flexible conduit may be used for tap connections to recessed lighting fixtures.B.Conduit: 1.Rigid galvanized steel: Shall Conform to UL 6, ANSI C80.1.2.Rigid aluminum: Shall Conform to UL 6A, ANSI C80.5. 3.Rigid intermediate steel conduit (IMC): Shall Conform to UL 1242, ANSI C80.6.4.Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Shall Conform to UL 797, ANSI C80.3. Maximum size not to exceed 105 mm (4?inch) and shall be permitted only with cable rated 600 volts or less.5.Flexible galvanized steel conduit: Shall Conform to UL 1.6.Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit: Shall Conform to UL 360.7.Surface metal raceway: Shall Conform to UL 5.C.Conduit Fittings: 1.Rigid steel and IMC conduit fittings: a.Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA FB1.a.Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows: Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable. Integral retractable type IMC couplings are also acceptable.b.Locknuts: Bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of an enclosure.c.Bushings: Metallic insulating type, consisting of an insulating insert molded or locked into the metallic body of the fitting. Bushings made entirely of metal or nonmetallic material are not permitted.d.Erickson (uniontype) and set screw type couplings: Approved for use in concrete are permitted for use to complete a conduit run where conduit is installed in concrete. Use set screws of case hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in conduit wall for positive ground. Tightening of set screws with pliers is prohibited.2.Rigid aluminum conduit fittings:a.Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows: Malleable iron, steel or aluminum alloy materials; Zinc or cadmium plate iron or steel fittings. Aluminum fittings containing more than 0.4 percent copper are prohibited.b.Locknuts and bushings: As specified for rigid steel and IMC conduit.c.Set screw fittings: Not permitted for use with aluminum conduit.3.Electrical metallic tubing fittings: a.Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA FB1.b.Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.c.Couplings and connectors: Concrete tight and rain tight, with connectors having insulated throats. Use gland and ring compression type couplings and connectors for conduit sizes 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller. Use set screw type couplings with four set screws each for conduit sizes over 50 mm (2 inches). Use set screws of case-hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in wall of conduit for positive grounding.d.Indent type connectors or couplings are prohibited.e.Die-cast or pressure-cast zinc-alloy fittings or fittings made of "pot metal" are prohibited.4.Flexible steel conduit fittings:a.Conform to UL 514B. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.b.Clamp type, with insulated throat.5.Liquidtight flexible metal conduit fittings:a.Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA FB1.b.Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.c.Fittings must incorporate a threaded grounding cone, a steel or plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Connectors shall have insulated throats.6.Surface metal raceway fittings: As recommended by the raceway manufacturer.7.Expansion and deflection couplings:a.Conform to UL 467 and UL 514B.b.Accommodate, 19 mm (0.75 inch) deflection, expansion, or contraction in any direction, and allow 30 degree angular deflections.c.Include internal flexible metal braid sized to guarantee conduit ground continuity and fault currents in accordance with UL 467, and the NEC code tables for ground conductors.d.Jacket: Flexible, corrosionresistant, watertight, moisture and heat resistant molded rubber material with stainless steel jacket clamps.D.Conduit Supports:1.Parts and hardware: Zinccoat or provide equivalent corrosion protection.2.Individual Conduit Hangers: Designed for the purpose, having a preassembled closure bolt and nut, and provisions for receiving a hanger rod.3.Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers: Not less than 38 mm by 38 mm (11/2 by 11/2 inch), 12 gage steel, cold formed, lipped channels; with not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch) diameter steel hanger rods.4.Solid Masonry and Concrete Anchors: Selfdrilling expansion shields, or machine bolt expansion.E.Outlet, Junction, and Pull Boxes:1.UL-50 and UL-514A.2.Cast metal where required by the NEC or shown, and equipped with rustproof boxes.3.Sheet metal boxes: Galvanized steel, except where otherwise shown.4.Flush mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with raised covers so that front face of raised cover is flush with the wall. Surface mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with surface style flat or raised covers.Wireways: Equip with hinged covers, except where removable covers are shown.PART 3 EXECUTION3.1 PENETRATIONSA.Cutting or Holes:1.Locate holes in advance where they are proposed in the structural sections such as ribs or beams. Obtain the approval of the COTR prior to drilling through structural sections.2.Cut holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures with a diamond core drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or manual hammer type drills are not allowed, except where permitted by the COTR as required by limited working space.B.Fire Stop: Where conduits, wireways, and other electrical raceways pass through fire partitions, fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases as specified in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING, with rock wool fiber or silicone foam sealant only. Completely fill and seal clearances between raceways and openings with the fire stop material.C.Waterproofing: At floor, exterior wall, and roof conduit penetrations, completely seal clearances around the conduit and make watertight as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERALA.In accordance with UL, NEC, as shown, and as hereinafter specified.B.Essential (Emergency) raceway systems shall be entirely independent of other raceway systems, except where specifically "accepted" by NEC Article 517.C.Install conduit as follows:1.In complete runs before pulling in cables or wires.2.Flattened, dented, or deformed conduit is not permitted. Remove and replace the damaged conduits with new undamaged material.3.Assure conduit installation does not encroach into the ceiling height head room, walkways, or doorways.4.Cut square with a hacksaw, ream, remove burrs, and draw up tight.5.Mechanically and electrically continuous.6.Independently support conduit at 8’0” on center. Do not use other supports i.e., (suspended ceilings, suspended ceiling supporting members, lighting fixtures, conduits, mechanical piping, or mechanical ducts).7.Support within 300 mm (1 foot) of changes of direction, and within 300 mm (1 foot) of each enclosure to which connected.8.Close ends of empty conduit with plugs or caps at the roughin stage to prevent entry of debris, until wires are pulled in.9.Conduit installations under fume and vent hoods are prohibited.10.Secure conduits to cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes and outlet boxes with bonding type locknuts. For rigid and IMC conduit installations, provide a locknut on the inside of the enclosure, made up wrench tight. Do not make conduit connections to junction box covers.11.Flashing of penetrations of the roof membrane is specified in Section 07 60 00, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.12.Do not use aluminum conduits in wet locations.13.Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein, all conduits shall be installed concealed within finished walls, floors and ceilings. D.Conduit Bends:1.Make bends with standard conduit bending machines.2.Conduit hickey may be used for slight offsets, and for straightening stubbed out conduits.3.Bending of conduits with a pipe tee or vise is prohibited.E.Layout and Homeruns:1.Install conduit with wiring, including homeruns, as shown.2.Deviations: Make only where necessary to avoid interferences and only after drawings showing the proposed deviations have been submitted approved by the COTR.3.3 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION A.In Concrete:1.Conduit: Rigid steel, IMC or EMT. Do not install EMT in concrete slabs that are in contact with soil, gravel or vapor barriers.2.Align and run conduit in direct lines.3.Install conduit through concrete beams only when the following occurs:a.Where shown on the structural drawings.b.As approved by the COTR prior to construction, and after submittal of drawing showing location, size, and position of each penetration.4.Installation of conduit in concrete that is less than 75 mm (3 inches) thick is prohibited.a.Conduit outside diameter larger than 1/3 of the slab thickness is prohibited.b.Space between conduits in slabs: Approximately six conduit diameters apart, except one conduit diameter at conduit crossings. c.Install conduits approximately in the center of the slab so that there will be a minimum of 19 mm (3/4 inch) of concrete around the conduits.5.Make couplings and connections watertight. Use thread compounds that are UL approved conductive type to insure low resistance ground continuity through the conduits. Tightening set screws with pliers is prohibited.B.Furred or Suspended Ceilings and in Walls:1.Conduit for conductors above 600 volts:a.Rigid steel or rigid aluminum.b.Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other types in the same system is prohibited.2.Conduit for conductors 600 volts and below:a.Rigid steel, IMC, rigid aluminum, or EMT. Different type conduits mixed indiscriminately in the same system is prohibited.3.Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.4.Connect recessed lighting fixtures to conduit runs with maximum 1800 mm (six feet) of flexible metal conduit extending from a junction box to the fixture.5.Tightening set screws with pliers is prohibited.3.4 EXPOSED WORK INSTALLATIONA.Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, exposed conduit is only permitted in mechanical and electrical rooms.B.Conduit for Conductors 600 volts and below:1.Rigid steel, IMC, rigid aluminum, or EMT. Different type of conduits mixed indiscriminately in the system is prohibited.C.Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.D.Install horizontal runs close to the ceiling or beams and secure with conduit straps.E.Support horizontal or vertical runs at not over 2400 mm (eight foot) intervals.F.Surface metal raceways: Use only where shown.G.Painting:1.Paint exposed conduit as specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.2.Paint all conduits containing cables rated over 600 volts safety orange. Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING for preparation, paint type, and exact color. In addition, paint legends, using 50 mm (two inch) high black numerals and letters, showing the cable voltage rating. Provide legends where conduits pass through walls and floors and at maximum 6000 mm (20 foot) intervals in between.3.5 WET OR DAMP LOCATIONSA.Unless otherwise shown, use conduits of rigid steel or IMC.B.Provide sealing fittings, to prevent passage of water vapor, where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, i.e., (refrigerated spaces, constant temperature rooms, air conditioned spaces building exterior walls, roofs) or similar spaces.C.Unless otherwise shown, use rigid steel or IMC conduit within 1500 mm (5 feet) of the exterior and below concrete building slabs in contact with soil, gravel, or vapor barriers. Conduit shall include an outer factory coating of .5 mm (20 mil) bonded PVC or field coat with asphaltum before installation. After installation, completely coat damaged areas of coating.3.6 MOTORS AND VIBRATING EQUIPMENTA.Use flexible metal conduit for connections to motors and other electrical equipment subject to movement, vibration, misalignment, cramped quarters, or noise transmission. B.Provide liquidtight flexible metal conduit for installation in exterior locations, moisture or humidity laden atmosphere, corrosive atmosphere, water or spray washdown operations, inside (air stream) of HVAC units, and locations subject to seepage or dripping of oil, grease or water. Provide a green ground wire with flexible metal conduit.3.7 EXPANSION JOINTSA.Conduits 75 mm (3 inches) and larger, that are secured to the building structure on opposite sides of a building expansion joint, require expansion and deflection couplings. Install the couplings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.B.Provide conduits smaller than 75 mm (3 inches) with junction boxes on both sides of the expansion joint. Connect conduits to junction boxes with sufficient slack of flexible conduit to produce 125 mm (5 inch) vertical drop midway between the ends. Flexible conduit shall have a copper green ground bonding jumper installed. In lieu of this flexible conduit, expansion and deflection couplings as specified above for 375 mm (15 inches) and larger conduits are acceptable.C.Install expansion and deflection couplings where shown.3.8 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, INSTALLATION A.Safe working load shall not exceed 1/4 of proof test load of fastening devices.B.Use pipe straps or individual conduit hangers for supporting individual conduits. Maximum distance between supports is 2.5 m (8 foot) on center.C.Support multiple conduit runs with trapeze hangers. Use trapeze hangers that are designed to support a load equal to or greater than the sum of the weights of the conduits, wires, hanger itself, and 90 kg (200 pounds). Attach each conduit with Ubolts or other approved fasteners.D.Support conduit independently of junction boxes, pull boxes, fixtures, suspended ceiling Tbars, angle supports, and similar items.E.Fasteners and Supports in Solid Masonry and Concrete:1.New Construction: Use steel or malleable iron concrete inserts set in place prior to placing the concrete.2.Existing Construction:a.Steel expansion anchors not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) bolt size and not less than 28 mm (11/8 inch) embedment.b.Power set fasteners not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) diameter with depth of penetration not less than 75 mm (3 inches).c.Use vibration and shock resistant anchors and fasteners for attaching to concrete ceilings.F.Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts are permitted. G.Bolts supported only by plaster or gypsum wallboard are not acceptable.H.Metal Structures: Use machine screw fasteners or other devices specifically designed and approved for the application.I.Attachment by wood plugs, rawl plug, plastic, lead or soft metal anchors, or wood blocking and bolts supported only by plaster is prohibited.J.Chain, wire, or perforated strap shall not be used to support or fasten conduit.K.Spring steel type supports or fasteners are prohibited for all uses except: Horizontal and vertical supports/fasteners within walls.L.Vertical Supports: Vertical conduit runs shall have riser clamps and supports in accordance with the NEC and as shown. Provide supports for cable and wire with fittings that include internal wedges and retaining collars.3.9 BOX INSTALLATION A.Boxes for Concealed Conduits:1.Flush mounted.2.Provide raised covers for boxes to suit the wall or ceiling, construction and finish.B.In addition to boxes shown, install additional boxes where needed to prevent damage to cables and wires during pulling in operations. C.Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused openings. Use threaded plugs for cast metal boxes and snapin metal covers for sheet metal boxes.D.Outlet boxes in the same wall mounted backtoback are prohibited. A minimum 600 mm (24 inch), center-to-center lateral spacing shall be maintained between boxes.) E.Minimum size of outlet boxes for ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacles is 100 mm (4 inches) square by 55 mm (21/8 inches) deep, with device covers for the wall material and thickness involved.F.Stencil or install phenolic nameplates on covers of the boxes identified on riser diagrams; for example "SIGFA JB No. 1". G.On all Branch Circuit junction box covers, identify the circuits with black marker.E N D SECTION 26 05 33 SECTION 26 09 23LIGHTING CONTROLSPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTIONThis section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of the lighting controls. 1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 26. B.Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wiring. C.Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents. D.Section 26 27 26, WIRING DEVICES: Wiring devices used for control of the lighting systems.1.3 qualITY ASSURANCERefer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS, in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.1.4 SUBMITTALSA.In accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS, submit the following: B.Product Data: For each type of lighting control, submit the following information.1.Manufacturer’s catalog data.2.Wiring schematic and connection diagram.3.Installation details.C.Manuals: Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings companion copies of complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets, and information for ordering replacement parts. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the final updated maintenance and operating manuals, including any changes, to the COTR.D.Certifications: 1.Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following certifications to the COTR: a.Certification by the Contractor that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by designation only.B.Green Seal (GS):GC-12Occupancy SensorsC.Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA):IESNA LM-48Guide for Calibration of Photoelectric Control DevicesD.National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)C136.10American National Standard for Roadway Lighting Equipment-Locking-Type Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacles - Physical and Electrical Interchangeability and TestingICS-1Standard for Industrial Control and Systems General RequirementsICS-2..................Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contractors, and Overload Relays Rated Not More than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC: Part 8 - Disconnect Devices for Use in Industrial Control EquipmentICS-6Standard for Industrial Controls and Systems EnclosuresE.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 20Standard for General-Use Snap Switches773Standard for Plug-In Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting773ANonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control98Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches917.....................Clock Operated SwitchesPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 outdoor photoelectric switches A.Thermal type photo controller with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA tungsten or 1000 VA inductive, complying with UL?773A.1.Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 5FC on ; 3-15FC off.2.Time Delay: 15-second minimum.3.Mounting: stem-and-swivel type with accessories as required.4. Temperature operating range: -40OF to 158OF.5. Housing construction: high impact polycarbonate. 6. components: dual temperature compensating bi-metal blades, snap action contact blades, chemically treated/polymer encapsulated cadmium sulfide photocell, silver alloy contacts and composite resistor.2.2 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORSA.Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a power supply and relay unit, suitable for the environmental conditions in which installed.1.Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied; with a 1 to 15 minute adjustable time delay for turning lights off.2.Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.3.Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20A ballast load at 120V and 277V, for 13A tungsten at 120V, and for 1 hp at 120V.4.Mounting:a.Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.b.Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.5.Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of the sensor.6.Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.7.Manual/automatic selector switch.8.Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; keep lighting off when selected lighting level is present.9.Faceplate for Wall-Switch Replacement Type: Refer to wall plate material and color requirements for toggle switches, as specified in Section 26 27 26, WIRING DEVICES.B.Dual-technology Type: Ceiling mounting; combination PIR and ultrasonic detection methods, field-selectable.1.Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.2.Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.3.Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.4.Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL?773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack.5.Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V?ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V?ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V?ac. Sensor has 24-V?dc, 150-mA, Class?2 power source, as defined by NFPA?70.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A.Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the drawings or specified.B.Aim outdoor photocell switch according to manufacturer's recommendations. Set adjustable window slide for 1 footcandle photocell turn-on.C.Aiming for wall-mounted and ceiling-mounted motion sensor switches shall be per manufacturer’s recommendations. D.Set occupancy sensor "on" duration to 15 minutes.3.2 Acceptance Checks and TestsA.Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.B.Upon completion of installation, conduct an operating test to show that equipment operates in accordance with requirements of this section. D.Test occupancy sensors for proper operation. Observe for light control over entire area being covered.3.3 Follow-Up VerificationUpon completion of acceptance checks and tests, the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that the lighting control devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function.E N D SECTION 26 09 23SECTION 26 24 16PANELBOARDSPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTIONThis section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of panelboards.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Section 09 91 00, PAINTING: Identification and painting of panelboards.B.Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one Section of Division 26.C.Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits and outlet boxes. D.Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wiring. E.Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.B.Shop Drawings:1.Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2.Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, wiring diagrams accessories and weights of equipment. Complete nameplate data including manufacturer’s name and catalog number.Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the COTR:1.Certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications has been properly installed, and that the loads are balanced.1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSPublications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.A.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): PB1-2006Panelboards AB-1-2002Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures B.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-2005 National Electrical Code (NEC)70E-2004Standard for Electrical Life Safety in the WorkplaceC.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 50-2003Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 67-2003Panel boards489-2006Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker EnclosuresPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS A.Panelboards shall be in accordance with UL, NEMA, NEC, and as shown on the drawings. B.Panelboards shall be standard manufactured products. All components of the panelboards shall be the product and assembly of the same manufacturer. All similar units of all panelboards to be of the same manufacturer. All panelboards shall be hinged “door in door” type with: 1.Interior hinged door with hand operated latch or latches as required to provide access to circuit breaker operating handles only, not to energized ports.2.Outer hinged door shall be securely mounted to the panelboard box with factory bolts, screws, clips or other fasteners requiring a tool for entry, hand operated latches are not acceptable.3.Push inner and outer doors shall open left to right.All panelboards shall be completely factory assembled with molded case circuit breakers. Include one-piece removable, inner dead front cover independent of the panelboard cover.E.Panelboards shall have main breaker or main lugs, bus size, voltage, phase, top or bottom feed, and flush or surface mounting as scheduled on the drawings.F.Panelboards shall conform to NEMA PB-1, NEMA AB-1 and UL 67 and have the following features:Non-reduced size copper bus bars, complete with current ratings as shown on the panel schedules connection straps bolted together and rigidly supported on molded insulators.Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the “distributed phase” or “phase sequence” type. Single-phase, three-wire panelboard busing shall be such that when any two adjacent single-pole breakers are connected to opposite phases, two-pole breakers can be installed in any location. Three-phase, four-wire busing shall be such that when any three adjacent single-pole breakers are individually connected to each of the three different phases, two-or three-pole breakers can be installed at any location. Current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated. Mains ratings shall be as shown.Mechanical lugs furnished with panelboards shall be cast, stamped or machined metal alloys of sizes suitable for the conductors indicated to be connected thereto.Neutral bus shall be 200%rated, mounted on insulated supports. Grounding bus bar equipped with screws or lugs for the connection of grounding wires. 6.Buses braced for the available short circuit current, but not less than 22,000 amperes symmetrical for 120/208 volt and 120/240 volt panelboards, and 14,000 amperes symmetrical for 277/480-volt panelboards.7.Branch circuit panels shall have buses fabricated for bolt-on type circuit breakers.8.Protective devices shall be designed so that they can be easily replaced.9.Where designated on panel schedule "spaces", include all necessary bussing, device support and connections. Provide blank cover for each space. 10.In two section panelboards, the main bus in each section shall be full size. The first section shall be furnished with subfeed lugs on the line side of main lugs only, or through-feed lugs for main breaker type panels, and with cable connections to the second section. Panelboard sections with tapped bus or crossover bus are not acceptable.11.Series rated panelboards are not permitted.2.2 cabinets and trimsA.Cabinets:1.Provide galvanized steel cabinets to house panelboards. 2.Cabinet enclosure shall not have ventilating openings.3.Cabinets for panelboards may be of one-piece formed steel or of formed sheet steel with end and side panels welded, riveted, or bolted as required.2.3 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR PANELBOARDS A.Breakers shall be UL 489 listed and labeled, in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as specified. B.Circuit breakers in panelboards shall be bolt on type on phase bus bar or branch circuit bar.1.Molded case circuit breakers for lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards shall have minimum interrupting rating as indicated but not less than: a.120/208 Volt Panelboard: 22,000 amperes symmetrical.b.120/240 Volt Panelboard: 22,000 amperes symmetrical.c.277/480 Volt Panelboard: 14,000 amperes symmetrical.Molded case circuit breakers shall have automatic, trip free, nonadjustable, inverse time, and instantaneous magnetic trips for 100-ampere frame or less. Magnetic trip shall be adjustable from 3X to 10X for breakers with 600 ampere frames and higher. Factory setting shall be HI, unless otherwise noted.C.Breaker features shall be as follows:1.A rugged, integral housing of molded insulating material. 2.Silver alloy contacts.3.Arc quenchers and phase barriers for each pole.4.Quickmake, quickbreak, operating mechanisms.5.A trip element for each pole, thermal magnetic type with long time delay and instantaneous characteristics, a common trip bar for all poles and a single operator.6.Electrically and mechanically trip free.7.An operating handle which indicates ON, TRIPPED, and OFF positions.a.Line connections shall be bolted.b.Interrupting rating shall not be less than the maximum short circuit current available at the line terminalsas indicated on the drawings 8.An overload on one pole of a multipole breaker shall automatically cause all the poles of the breaker to open.9.Shunt trips shall be provided where indicated 10.For circuit breakers being added to existing panelboards, coordinate the breaker type with existing panelboards. Modify the panel directory. 2.4 SEPARATELY ENCLOSED MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A.Where separately enclosed molded case circuit breakers are shown on the drawings, provide circuit breakers in accordance with the applicable requirements of those specified for panelboards.B.Enclosures are to be of the NEMA types shown on the drawings. Where the types are not shown, they are to be the NEMA type most suitable for the environmental conditions where the breakers are being installed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Installation shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions, the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as specified. B.Locate panelboards so that the present and future conduits can be conveniently connected. Coordinate the sizes of cabinets with designated closet space. C.In accordance with Section 09 91 00, PAINTING, paint the panelboard system voltage, and feeder sizes as shown on the riser diagram in 1 inch block lettering on the inside cover of the cabinet door. Paint the words "LIFE SAFETY BRANCH", "CRITICAL BRANCH", or "EQUIPMENT SYSTEM" as applicable and the panel designation in one inch block letters on the outside of the cabinet doors. D.Install a typewritten schedule of circuits in each panelboard after being submitted to and approved by the COTR. Schedules, after approval, shall be typed on the panel directory cards and installed in the appropriate panelboards, incorporating all applicable contract changes pertaining to that schedule. Include the room numbers and items served on the cards. E.Mount the panelboard fully aligned and such that the maximum height of the top circuit breaker above finished floor shall not exceed 1980 mm (78 inches). For panelboards that are too high, mount panelboard so that the bottom of the cabinets will not be less than 150 mm (6 inches) above the finished floor. F.For panelboards located in areas accessible to the public, paint the exposed surfaces of the trims, doors, and boxes with finishes to match surrounding surfaces after the panelboards have been installed.G.Directory-card information shall be typewritten to indicate outlets, lights, devices, and equipment controlled and final room numbers served by each circuit and shall be mounted in holders behind protective covering.H.Where new panels are to be installed in existing backboxes, backboxes shall have rust and scale removed from inside. Paint inside of backboxes with rust preventive paint before the new panel interior is installed. Provide new trim and doors for these panels. Covers shall fit tight to the box with no gaps between the cover and the box. I.Provide ARC flash identification per NFPA 70E.E N D SECTION 26 24 16SECTION 26 27 26WIRING DEVICESPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTIONThis section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of wiring devices.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General electrical requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 26.B.Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits and outlets boxes. C.Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wiring.D.Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents.1.3 qualITY ASSURANCERefer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS, in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.1.4 SUBMITTALSA.In accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS, submit the following:B.Shop Drawings:1.Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.2.Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, construction materials, grade and termination information.C.Manuals: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver four copies of the following to the COTR: Technical data sheets and information for ordering replacement units.D.Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the COTR: Certification by the Contractor that the devices comply with the drawings and specifications, and have been properly installed, aligned, and tested.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.B.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):70National Electrical Code (NEC)C.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):WD 1General Color Requirements for Wiring DevicesWD 6 Wiring Devices – Dimensional RequirementsD.Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL):5Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings20General-Use Snap Switches231Power Outlets467Grounding and Bonding Equipment498Attachment Plugs and Receptacles943Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters PART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 RECEPTACLESA.General: All receptacles shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and conform to NEMA WD 6. 1.Mounting straps shall be plated steel, with break-off plaster ears and shall include a self-grounding feature. Terminal screws shall be brass, brass plated or a copper alloy metal.2.Receptacles shall have provisions for back wiring with separate metal clamp type terminals (four min.) and side wiring from four captively held binding screws.B.Duplex Receptacles: Hospital-grade, single phase, 20 ampere, 120 volts, 2pole, 3wire, and conform to the NEMA 520R configuration in NEMA WD 6. The duplex type shall have breakoff feature for two-circuit operation. The ungrounded pole of each receptacle shall be provided with a separate terminal. 1.Bodies shall be ivory in color. 2.Switched duplex receptacles shall be wired so that only the top receptacle is switched. The remaining receptacle shall be unswitched.3.Duplex Receptacles on Emergency Circuit:a.In rooms without emergency powered general lighting, the emergency receptacles shall be of the selfilluminated type.4.Ground Fault Interrupter Duplex Receptacles: Shall be an integral unit, hospital-grade, suitable for mounting in a standard outlet box.a.Ground fault interrupter shall be consist of a differential current transformer, solid state sensing circuitry and a circuit interrupter switch. Device shall have nominal sensitivity to ground leakage current of five milliamperes and shall function to interrupt the current supply for any value of ground leakage current above five milliamperes (+ or – 1 milliamp) on the load side of the device. Device shall have a minimum nominal tripping time of 1/30th of a second.b.Ground Fault Interrupter Duplex Receptacles (not hospital-grade) shall be the same as ground fault interrupter hospital-grade receptacles except for the “hospital-grade” listing.5.Safety Type Duplex Receptacles:a.Bodies shall be gray in color.1)Shall permit current to flow only while a standard plug is in the proper position in the receptacle.2)Screws exposed while the wall plates are in place shall be the tamperproof type.6.Duplex Receptacles (not hospital grade): Shall be the same as hospital grade duplex receptacles except for the "hospital grade" listing and as follows.a.Bodies shall be brown phenolic compound supported by a plated steel mounting strap having plaster ears.C.Receptacles; 20, 30 and 50 ampere, 250 volts: Shall be complete with appropriate cord grip plug. Devices shall meet UL 231.D.Weatherproof Receptacles: Shall consist of a duplex receptacle, mounted in box with a gasketed, weatherproof, cast metal cover plate and cap over each receptacle opening. The cap shall be permanently attached to the cover plate by a spring-hinged flap. The weatherproof integrity shall not be affected when heavy duty specification or hospital grade attachment plug caps are inserted. Cover plates on outlet boxes mounted flush in the wall shall be gasketed to the wall in a watertight manner. 2.2 TOGGLE SWITCHESA.Toggle Switches: Shall be totally enclosed tumbler type with bodies of phenolic compound. Toggle handles shall be ivory in color unless otherwise specified. The rocker type switch is not acceptable and will not be approved.1.Switches installed in hazardous areas shall be explosion proof type in accordance with the NEC and as shown on the drawings. 2.Shall be single unit toggle, butt contact, quiet AC type, heavyduty general-purpose use with an integral self grounding mounting strap with break-off plasters ears and provisions for back wiring with separate metal wiring clamps and side wiring with captively held binding screws.3.Ratings:a.120 volt circuits: 20 amperes at 120-277 volts AC.b.277 volt circuits: 20 amperes at 120-277 volts AC.2.3 WALL PLATESA.Wall plates for switches and receptacles shall be type 302 stainless steel. Oversize plates are not acceptable. B.Standard NEMA design, so that products of different manufacturers will be interchangeable. Dimensions for openings in wall plates shall be accordance with NEMA WD 6.C.For receptacles or switches mounted adjacent to each other, wall plates shall be common for each group of receptacles or switches.D.In psychiatric areas, wall plates shall be 302 stainless steel, have tamperproof screws and beveled edges.E.Wall plates for data, telephone or other communication outlets shall be as specified in the associated specification.F.Duplex Receptacles on Emergency Circuit:1.Bodies shall be red in color. Wall plates shall be red with the word "EMERGENCY" engraved in 6 mm, (1/4 inch) white letters.PART 3 EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC and as shown as on the drawings.B.Ground terminal of each receptacle shall be bonded to the outlet box with an approved green bonding jumper, and also connected to the green equipment grounding conductor.C.Outlet boxes for light switches shall be mounted on the strike side of doors. D.Provide barriers in multi-gang outlet boxes to separate systems of different voltages, Normal Power and Emergency Power systems, and in compliance with the NEC.E.Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring installations, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other work. Coordinate the electrical work with the work of other trades to ensure that wiring device flush outlets are positioned with box openings aligned with the face of the surrounding finish material. Pay special attention to installations in cabinet work, and in connection with laboratory equipment.F.Exact field locations of floors, walls, partitions, doors, windows, and equipment may vary from locations shown on the drawings. Prior to locating sleeves, boxes and chases for roughing-in of conduit and equipment, the Contractor shall coordinate exact field location of the above items with other trades. In addition, check for exact direction of door swings so that local switches are properly located on the strike side. G.Install wall switches 48 inches [1200mm] above floor, OFF position down.H.Install convenience receptacles 18 inches [450mm] above floor, and 6 inches [152mm] above counter backsplash or workbenches. Install specific-use receptacles at heights shown on the drawings.I.Label device plates with a permanent adhesive label listing panel and circuit feeding the wiring device.J.Test wiring devices for damaged conductors, high circuit resistance, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems using a portable receptacle tester. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new, and retest as specified above.K.Test GFCI devices for tripping values specified in UL?1436 and UL?943.E N D SECTION 26 27 26SECTION 26 29 11MOTOR STARTERSPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTIONAll motor starters and variable speed motor controllers, including installation and connection (whether furnished with the equipment specified in other Divisions or otherwise), shall meet these specifications.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Other sections which specify motor driven equipmentC.Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one Section of Division 26.D.Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.1.3 qualITY ASSURANCERefer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS, in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.1.4 SUBMITTALSSubmit in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS:A.Shop Drawings: 1.Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2.Include electrical ratings, dimensions, weights, mounting details, materials, running over current protection, size of enclosure, over current protection, wiring diagrams, starting characteristics, interlocking and accessories. B.Manuals: 1.Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance and operating manuals, including technical data sheets, wiring diagrams and information for ordering replacement parts. a.Wiring diagrams shall have their terminals identified to facilitate installation, maintenance and operation. b.Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and interconnections between the items of equipment. c.Elementary schematic diagrams shall be provided for clarity of operation.2.Two weeks prior to the project final inspection, submit four copies of the final updated maintenance and operating manual to the COTR.C.Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, unless otherwise noted, submit four copies of the following certifications to the COTR: 1.Certification that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested. 2.Certification by the manufacturer that medium voltage motor controller(s) conforms to the requirements of the drawings and specifications. This certification must be furnished to the COTR prior to shipping the controller(s) to the job site. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.B.Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):519Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power SystemsC37.90.1Standard Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Protective Relays and Relay SystemsC.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): ICS 1Industrial Control and Systems General RequirementsICS 1.1Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State ControlICS 2Industrial Control and Systems, Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts DC ICS 6Industrial Control and Systems EnclosuresICS 7Industrial Control and Systems Adjustable-Speed DrivesICS 7.1Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Operation of Adjustable-Speed Drive SystemsD.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70National Electrical Code (NEC) E.Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 508Industrial Control EquipmentPART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 MOTOR STARTERS, GENERALA.Shall be in accordance with the requirements of the IEEE, NEC, NEMA (ICS 1, ICS 1.1, ICS 2, ICS 6, ICS 7 and ICS 7.1) and UL.B.Shall have the following features: 1.Separately enclosed unless part of another assembly.2.Circuit breakers and safety switches within the motor controller enclosures shall have external operating handles with lockopen padlocking provisions and shall indicate the ON and OFF positions.3.Motor control circuits: a.Shall operate at not more than 120 volts. b.Shall be grounded except as follows: 1)Where isolated control circuits are shown. 2)Where manufacturers of equipment assemblies recommend that the control circuits be isolated. c.Incorporate a separate, heavy duty, control transformer within each motor controller enclosure to provide the control voltage for each motor operating over 120 volts. d.Incorporate over current protection for both primary and secondary windings of the control power transformers in accordance with the NEC.4.Overload current protective devices: b.Overload relay (solid state type. a.One for each pole. b.Manual reset on the door of each motor controller enclosure. c.Correctly sized for the associated motor's rated full load current.d.Check every motor controller after installation and verify that correct sizes of protective devices have been installed. e.Deliver four copies of a summarized list to the COTR, which indicates and adequately identifies every motor controller installed. Include the catalog numbers for the correct sizes of protective devices for the motor controllers.5.HandOffAutomatic (HOA) switch is required unless specifically stated on the drawings as not required for a particular starter. H-O-A switch is required for manual motor starters. 6.Incorporate into each control circuit a 120volt, solid state time delay relay (ON delay), minimum adjustable range from 0.3 to 10 minutes, with transient protection. Time delay relay is not required where HOA switch is not required. 7.Unless noted otherwise, equip with not less than two normally open and two normally closed auxiliary contacts. Provide green run pilot lights and H-O-A control devices as indicated, operable at front of enclosure without opening enclosure. Push buttons, selector switches, pilot lights, etc., shall be interchangeable.8.Enclosures:a.Shall be the NEMA types shown on the drawings for the motor controllers and shall be the NEMA types which are the most suitable for the environmental conditions where the motor controllers are being installed.b.Doors mechanically interlocked to prevent opening unless the breaker or switch within the enclosure is open. Provision for padlock must be provided.c.Enclosures shall be primed and finish coated at the factory with the manufacturer’s prime coat and standard finish.C.Motor controllers incorporated with equipment assemblies shall also be designed for the specific requirements of the assemblies. D.Additional requirements for specific motor controllers, as indicated in other sections, shall also apply.E.Provide a disconnecting means or safety switch near and within sight of each motor. Provide all wiring and conduit required to facilitate a complete installation.2.2 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERSA.Shall be in accordance with applicable requirements of 2.1 above.B.Manual motor starters. 1.Starters shall be general-purpose Class A, manually operated type with full voltage controller for induction motors, rated in horsepower.2.Units shall include overload protection, red pilot light, NO, NC auxiliary contacts and toggle operator. C.Fractional horsepower manual motor starters.1.Starters shall be general-purpose Class A, manually operated with full voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors. 2.Units shall include thermal overload protection,H-O-A switch, red pilot light and toggle operator.D.Motor starting switches. 1.Switches shall be general-purpose Class A, manually operated type with full voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors.2.Units shall include thermal overload protection, red pilot light , NO and NC auxiliary contacts and toggle operator. 2.3 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERSA.Shall be in accordance with applicable requirements of 2.1 above.B.Starters shall be general-purpose, Class A magnetic controllers for induction motors rated in horsepower. Minimum size 0.C.Where combination motor starters are used, combine starter with protective or disconnect device in a common enclosure. D.Provide phase loss protection for each starter, with contacts to de-energize the starter upon loss of any phase.E.Unless otherwise indicated, provide full voltage non-reversing across-the-line mechanisms for motors less than 75 HP, closed by coil action and opened by gravity. For motors 75 HP and larger, provide reduced voltage starters. Equip starters with 120V AC coils and individual control transformer unless otherwise noted. Locate "reset" button to be accessible without opening the enclosure. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Install motor control equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, the NEC, NEMA and as shown on the drawings.B.Furnish and install heater elements in motor starters and to match the installed motor characteristics. Submit a list of all motors listing motor nameplate rating and heater element installed.C.Motor Data: Provide neatly-typed label inside each motor starter enclosure door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, voltage/phase rating and heater element installed.D.Connect hand-off auto selector switches so that automatic control only is by-passed in "manual" position and any safety controls are not by-passed.E.Install manual motor starters in flush enclosures in finished areas.F.Examine control diagrams indicated before ordering motor controllers. Should conflicting data exist in specifications, drawings and diagrams, request corrected data prior to placing orders.3.2 ADJUSTINGA.Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.B.Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays.C.Adjust trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust at six times the motor nameplate full-load ampere ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cooldown between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify COTR before increasing settings.3.3 Acceptance Checks and Tests A.Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests:1.Visual and Mechanical pare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings.b.Inspect physical, electrical, and mechanical condition.c.Inspect contactors.d.Clean motor starters and variable speed motor controllers.e.Verify overload element ratings are correct for their applications.f.If motor-running protection is provided by fuses, verify correct fuse rating.g.Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.2. Variable speed motor controllers:a.Final programming and connections to variable speed motor controllers shall be by a factory-trained technician. Set all programmable functions of the variable speed motor controllers to meet the requirements and conditions of use.b.Test all control and safety features of the variable frequency drive.3.4 FOLLOW-UP VERIFICATIONUpon completion of acceptance checks, settings, and tests, the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that the motor starters and variable speed motor controllers are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended functions. 3.5 SPARE PARTSTwo weeks prior to the final inspection, provide one complete set of spare fuses (including heater elements) for each starter/controller installed on this project.E N D SECTION 26 29 11SECTION 26 29 21DISCONNECT SWITCHESPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONThis section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of low voltage disconnect switches. 1.2 RELATED WORK A.General electrical requirements and items that is common to more than one section of Division 26: Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS. B.Conduits for cables and wiring: Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.C.Cables and wiring: Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW.D.Motor rated toggle switches: Section 26 29 11, LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR STARTERS. E.Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground faults: Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. 1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.B.Shop Drawings:1.Include sufficient information, clearly presented to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2.Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, enclosure types, fuse type and class. 3.Show the specific switch and fuse proposed for each specific piece of equipment or circuit. C.Manuals: 1.Provide complete maintenance and operating manuals for disconnect switches, including technical data sheets, wiring diagrams, and information for ordering replacement parts. Deliver four copies to the COTR two weeks prior to final inspection. 2.Identify terminals on wiring diagrams to facilitate maintenance and operation.3.Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring and any interlocking.D.Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver to the COTR four copies of the certification that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): KS l-01Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum) C.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-05National Electrical Code (NEC) D.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 98-98Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches 198C-89HighInterrupting-Capacity Fuses, Current Limiting Types 198E-94Class R Fuses 977-99Fused Power-Circuit Devices PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW VOLTAGE FUSIBLE SWITCHES RATED 600 AMPERES AND LESS A.Shall be quick-make, quick-break type in accordance with UL 98, NEMA KS 1 and NEC.B.Shall have a minimum duty rating, NEMA classification General Duty (GD) for 240 volts.C.Shall be horsepower rated. D.Shall have the following features: 1.Switch mechanism shall be the quick-make, quick-break type.2.Copper blades, visible in the OFF position.3.An arc chute for each pole. 4.External operating handle shall indicate ON and OFF position and shall have lockopen padlocking provisions. 5.Mechanical interlock shall permit opening of the door only when the switch is in the OFF position, defeatable by a special tool to permit inspection.6.Fuse holders for the sizes and types of fuses specified.7.Solid neutral for each switch being installed in a circuit which includes a neutral conductor. 8.Ground Lugs: One for each ground conductor. 9.Enclosures:a.Shall be the NEMA types shown on the drawings for the switches.b.Where the types of switch enclosures are not shown, they shall be the NEMA types which are most suitable for the environmental conditions where the switches are being installed. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, all outdoor switches shall be NEMA 3R. c.Shall be finished with manufacturer’s standard gray baked enamel paint over pretreated steel (for the type of enclosure required).2.2 LOW VOLTAGE UNFUSED SWITCHES RATED 600 AMPERES AND LESSShall be the same as Low Voltage Fusible Switches Rated 600 Amperes and Less, but no fuses.2.3 MOTOR RATED TOGGLE SWITCHESRefer to Section 26 29 11, LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR STARTERS for motor rated toggle switches.2.4 IDENTIFICATION SIGNSA.Install nameplate identification signs on each disconnect switch to identify the equipment controlled.B.Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core, with engraved lettering, a minimum of 6 mm (1/4-inch) high. Secure nameplates with screws.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install disconnect switches in accordance with the NEC and as shown on the drawings.B.Fusible disconnect switches shall be furnished complete with fuses.3.2 SPARE PARTS Two weeks prior to the final inspection, furnish one complete set of spare fuses for each fusible disconnect switch installed on the project. Deliver the spare fuses to the COTR. E N D SECTION 26 29 21SECTION 26 51 00INTERIOR LIGHTINGPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION:This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of the interior lighting systems. 1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 26. B.Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wiring. C.Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents. D.Section 26 27 26, WIRING DEVICES: Wiring devices used for control of the lighting systems.1.3 qualITY ASSURANCERefer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS, in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.1.4 SUBMITTALSA.In accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS, submit the following: B.Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture (luminaire) designated on the LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE, arranged in order of fixture designation, submit the following information.1.Material and construction details include information on housing, optics system and lens/diffuser. 2.Physical dimensions and description.3.Wiring schematic and connection diagram.4.Installation details.5.Energy efficiency data.6.Photometric data based on laboratory tests complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements, testing and calculation guides.7.Lamp data including lumen output (initial and mean), color rendition index (CRI), rated life (hours) and color temperature (degrees Kelvin).8.Ballast data including ballast type, starting method, ambient temperature, ballast factor, sound rating, system watts and total harmonic distortion (THD).C.Manuals: Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings companion copies of complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets, and information for ordering replacement parts. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the final updated maintenance and operating manuals, including any changes, to the COTR.D.Certifications: 1.Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following certifications to the COTR: a.Certification by the Contractor that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by designation only. B.Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):C62.41-91Guide on the Surge Environment in Low Voltage (1000V and less) AC Power CircuitsC.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70National Electrical Code (NEC)101Life Safety Code D.National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):C82.1-97Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications C82.2-02Method of Measurement of Fluorescent Lamp BallastsC82.11-02High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp BallastsE.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 496-96Edison-Base Lampholders542-99Lampholders, Starters, and Starter Holders for Fluorescent Lamps924-95Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment935-01Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts1598-00Luminaires1574-04.................Standard for Track Lighting Systems2108-04.................Standard for Low-Voltage Lighting Systems8750-08.................Light Emitting Diode (LED) Light Sources for Use in Lighting ProductsF.Federal Communications Commission (FCC):Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 47, Part 18PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERSA.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Luminaire Schedule.2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES (LUMINAIRES)A.Shall be in accordance with NFPA 70 and UL 1598, as shown on drawings, and as specified.B.Sheet Metal: 1.Shall be formed to prevent warping and sagging. Housing, trim and lens frame shall be true, straight (unless intentionally curved) and parallel to each other as designed. 2.Wireways and fittings shall be free of burrs and sharp edges and shall accommodate internal and branch circuit wiring without damage to the wiring. 3.When installed, any exposed fixture housing surface, trim frame, door frame and lens frame shall be free of light leaks; lens doors shall close in a light tight manner. 4.Hinged door closure frames shall operate smoothly without binding when the fixture is in the installed position, latches shall function easily by finger action without the use of tools. C.Ballasts shall be serviceable while the fixture is in its normally installed position, and shall not be mounted to removable reflectors or wireway covers unless so specified. D.Lamp Sockets: 1.Fluorescent: Lampholder contacts shall be the biting edge type or phosphorous-bronze with silver flash contact surface type and shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 542. Lamp holders for bipin lamps shall be of the telescoping compression type, or of the single slot entry type requiring a one-quarter turn of the lamp after insertion. 2.High Intensity Discharge (H.I.D.): Shall have porcelain enclosures.E.Recessed fixtures mounted in an insulated ceiling shall be listed for use in insulated ceilings. F.Mechanical Safety: Lighting fixture closures (lens doors, trim frame, hinged housings, etc.) shall be retained in a secure manner by captive screws, chains, captive hinges or fasteners such that they cannot be accidentally dislodged during normal operation or routine maintenance. G.Metal Finishes: 1.The manufacturer shall apply standard finish (unless otherwise specified) over a corrosion resistant primer, after cleaning to free the metal surfaces of rust, grease, dirt and other deposits. Edges of prefinished sheet metal exposed during forming, stamping or shearing processes shall be finished in a similar corrosion resistant manner to match the adjacent surface(s). Fixture finish shall be free of stains or evidence of rusting, blistering, or flaking, and shall be applied after fabrication. 2.Interior light reflecting finishes shall be white with not less than 85 percent reflectances, except where otherwise shown on the drawing. 3.Exterior finishes shall be as shown on the drawings. H.Lighting fixtures shall have a specific means for grounding metallic wireways and housings to an equipment grounding conductor. I.Light Transmitting Components for Fluorescent Fixtures: 1.Shall be 100 percent virgin acrylic. 2.Flat lens panels shall have not less than 1/8 inch [3.2mm] of average thickness. The average thickness shall be determined by adding the maximum thickness to the minimum unpenetrated thickness and dividing the sum by 2. 3.Unless otherwise specified, lenses, diffusers and louvers shall be retained firmly in a metal frame by clips or clamping ring in such a manner as to allow expansion and contraction of the lens without distortion or cracking. pact fluorescent fixtures shall be manufactured specifically for compact fluorescent lamps with ballast integral to the fixture. Assemblies designed to retrofit incandescent fixtures are prohibited except when specifically indicated for renovation of existing fixtures (not the lamp). Fixtures shall be designed for lamps as specified.2.3 ballasTSA.Linear Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: 120 Volts electronic programmed-start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated; including the following features:1.Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit (T5 lamps only).2.Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.3.Sound Rating: Class A.4.Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: 10 percent or less.5.Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.6.Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.7.Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.8.Ballast Factor: 0.87 or higher unless otherwise indicated.9.Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.10.Interference: Comply with 47 CFT 18, Ch.1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment.11.To facilitate multilevel lamp switching, lamps within fixture shall be wired with the outermost lamp at both sides of the fixture on the same ballast, the next inward pair on another ballast and so on to the innermost lamp (or pair of lamps). Within a given room, each switch shall uniformly control the same corresponding lamp (or lamp pairs) in all fixture units that are being controlled. 12.Where threelamp fixtures are indicated, unless switching arrangements dictate otherwise, utilize a common twolamp ballast to operate the center lamp in pairs of adjacent units that are mounted in a continuous row. The ballast fixture and slavelamp fixture shall be factory wired with leads or plug devices to facilitate this circuiting. Individually mounted fixtures and the odd fixture in a row shall utilize a singlelamp ballast for operation of the center lamp. 13.Dimming ballasts shall be as per above, except dimmable from 100% to 5 % of rated lamp lumens.pact Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Multi-voltage (120 – 277V), electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL?935 and with ANSI?C?82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated; including the following features:1.Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.2.Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.3.Sound Rating: Class?A.4.Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: 10 percent or less.5.Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE?C62.41.1 and IEEE?C62.41.2, Category?A or better.6.Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.7.Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.8.Ballast Factor: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated.9.Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.10.Interference: Comply with 47?CFR?18, Ch.?1, Subpart?C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment.11.Dimming ballasts shall be as per above, except dimmable from 100% to 5 % of rated lamp lumens.2.4 LED DRIVERSA.Description: Electronic solid state type. Comply with the following:1.Ten-year operational life while operating at maximum case temperature and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity. 2.Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges up to 15,000 3.Electrolytic capacitors to operate at least 20 degrees C below the capacitor’s maximum temperature rating when the driver is under fully-loaded conditions and under maximum case temperature.4.Maximum inrush current of 2 amperes for 120V and 277V drivers.5.Withstand up to a 4,000 volt surge without impairment of performance as defined by ANSI C62.41 Category A.6.Manufactured in a facility that employ ESD reduction practices in compliance with ANSI/ESD S20.20.7.Inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient.8.No visible change in light output with a variation of plus/minus 10 percent line voltage input.9.Total Harmonic Distortion less than 20 percent and meet ANSI C82.11 maximum allowable THD requirements.10.Drivers to track evenly across:a.Multiple fixtures. b.All light levels.11.Constant current drivers must provide models to:a.Support from 200mA to 2.1Amps (in 10mA steps) to ensure a compatible driver existsb.Support LED arrays up to 40W12.Constant voltage drivers must provide models to:a.Support from 10Volts to 40Volts (in 0.5V steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists b.Support LED arrays up to 40W13.Configuration tool must be available to optimize the following for LED fixtures:a.Light levelb.Efficacyc.Thermal performance14.Driver must be capable of operating from a supply voltage of 120 through 277VAC at 60Hz for 3-wire models.15.Provide integral fault protection to prevent driver failure in the event of an input mis-wire.2.5 EMERGENCY LIGHTING plete, self-contained unit with batteries, battery charger, one or more local or remote lamp heads with lamps, under-voltage relay, and test switch. Comply with UL 924.1.Enclosure: Shall be impact-resistant thermoplastic which will protect components from dust, moisture, and oxidizing fumes from the battery. Enclosure shall be suitable for the environmental conditions in which installed.2.Lamp Heads: Horizontally and vertically adjustable, mounted on the face of the unit, except where otherwise indicated.3.Lamps: Shall be sealed-beam MR-16 halogen, rated not less than 12watts at the specified DC voltage.4.Battery: Shall be maintenance-free nickel-cadmium. Minimum normal life shall be 10years.5.Battery Charger: Dry-type full-wave rectifier with charging rates to maintain the battery in fully-charged condition during normal operation, and to automatically recharge the battery within 12 hours following a 1-1/2 hour continuous discharge.6.Integral Self-Test: Automatically initiates test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing LED.2.6 lampsA.Linear and U-shaped T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps:1.Rapid start fluorescent lamps shall comply with ANSI C78.1; and instant-start lamps shall comply with ANSI C78.3.2.Chromacity of fluorescent lamps shall comply with ANSI C78.376.3.Except as indicated below, lamps shall be low-mercury energy saving type, have a color temperature between 3500 and 4100K, a Color Rendering Index (CRI) of greater than 70, average rated life of 20,000 hours, and be suitable for use with dimming ballasts, unless otherwise indicated. Low mercury lamps shall have passed the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leachate Procedure (TCLP) for mercury by using the lamp sample preparation procedure described in NEMA LL b.Other areas as indicated on the drawings. pact Fluorescent Lamps: 1.T4, CRI?80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and suitable for use with dimming ballasts, unless otherwise indicated.C.Long Twin-Tube Fluorescent Lamps:1.T5, CRI?80 (minimum), color temperature between 3500 and 4100K, 20,000 hours average rated life.2.7 exit light fixturesA.Exit light fixtures shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA 101 and UL 924.B.Housing and Canopy:1.Shall be made of die-cast aluminum.2.Optional steel housing shall be a minimum 20 gauge thick or equivalent strength aluminum.3.Steel housing shall have baked enamel over corrosion resistant, matte black or ivory white primer.C.Door frame shall be cast or extruded aluminum, and hinged with latch.D.Finish shall be satin or fine-grain brushed aluminum.E.There shall be no radioactive material used in the fixtures.F.Fixtures:1.Maximum fixture wattage shall be 1 watt or less.2. Inscription panels shall be cast or stamped aluminum a minimum of 0.090 inch [2.25mm] thick, stenciled with 6 inch [150mm] high letters, baked with red color stable plastic or fiberglass. Lamps shall be luminous Light Emitting Diodes (LED) mounted in center of letters on red color stable plastic or fiberglass. The LED shall be rated minimum 25 years life. 3.Double-Faced Fixtures: Provide double-faced fixtures where required or as shown on drawings. 4.Directional Arrows: Provide directional arrows as part of the inscription panel where required or as shown on drawings. Directional arrows shall be the "chevron-type" of similar size and width as the letters and meet the requirements of NFPA 101.G.Voltages: Refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the drawings or specified. B.Align, mount and level the lighting fixtures uniformly. C.Lighting Fixture Supports: 1.Shall provide support for all of the fixtures. Supports may be anchored to channels of the ceiling construction, to the structural slab or to structural members within a partition, or above a suspended ceiling. 2.Shall maintain the fixture positions after cleaning and relamping. 3.Shall support the lighting fixtures without causing the ceiling or partition to deflect. 4.Hardware for recessed fluorescent fixtures: a.Where the suspended ceiling system is supported at the four corners of the fixture opening, hardware devices shall clamp the fixture to the ceiling system structural members, or plaster frame at not less than four points in such a manner as to resist spreading of the support members and safely lock the fixture into the ceiling system. b.Where the suspended ceiling system is not supported at the four corners of the fixture opening, hardware devices shall independently support the fixture from the building structure at four points. 5.Hardware for surface mounting fluorescent fixtures to suspended ceilings:a.In addition to being secured to any required outlet box, fixtures shall be bolted to a grid ceiling system at four points spaced near the corners of each fixture. The bolts shall be not less than 1/4 inch [6mm] secured to channel members attached to and spanning the tops of the ceiling structural grid members. Nonturning studs may be attached to the ceiling structural grid members or spanning channels by special clips designed for the purpose, provided they lock into place and require simple tools for removal. b.In addition to being secured to any required outlet box, fixtures shall be bolted to ceiling structural members at four points spaced near the corners of each fixture. Prepositioned 1/4 inch [6mm] studs or threaded plaster inserts secured to ceiling structural members shall be used to bolt the fixtures to the ceiling. In lieu of the above, 1/4 inch [6mm] toggle bolts may be used on new or existing ceiling provided the plaster and lath can safely support the fixtures without sagging or cracking.// 6.Surface mounted lighting fixtures: a.Fixtures shall be bolted against the ceiling independent of the outlet box at four points spaced near the corners of each unit. The bolts (or studclips) shall be minimum 1/420 [6mm] bolt, secured to main ceiling runners and/or secured to cross runners. Nonturning studs may be attached to the main ceiling runners and cross runners with special nonfriction clip devices designed for the purpose, provided they bolt through the runner, or are also secured to the building structure by 12 gauge safety hangers. Studs or bolts securing fixtures weighing in excess of 56 pounds [25kg] shall be supported directly from the building structure. b.Where ceiling cross runners are installed for support of lighting fixtures they must have a carrying capacity equal to that of the main ceiling runners and be rigidly secured to the main runners. c.Fixtures less than 15 pounds [6.8kg] in weight and occupying less than two square feet [600mm x 600mm] of ceiling area may, (when designed for the purpose) be supported directly from the outlet box when all the following conditions are met. 1)Screws attaching the fixture to the outlet box pass through round holes (not keyhole slots) in the fixture body. 2)The outlet box is attached to a main ceiling runner (or cross runner) with approved hardware. 3)The outlet box is supported vertically from the building structure.d.Fixtures mounted in open construction shall be secured directly to the building structure with approved bolting and clamping devices. 7.Single or double pendantmounted lighting fixtures: a.Each stem shall be supported by an approved outlet box, mounted swivel joint and canopy which holds the stem captive and provides spring load (or approved equivalent) dampening of fixture oscillations. Outlet box shall be supported vertically from the building structure. 8.Outlet boxes for support of lighting fixtures (where permitted) shall be secured directly to the building structure with approved devices or supported vertically in a hung ceiling from the building structure with a nine gauge wire hanger, and be secured by an approved device to a main ceiling runner or cross runner to prevent any horizontal movement relative to the ceiling. E.Furnish and install the specified lamps for all lighting fixtures installed and all existing lighting fixtures reinstalled under this project.F.Coordinate between the electrical and ceiling trades to ascertain that approved lighting fixtures are furnished in the proper sizes and installed with the proper devices (hangers, clips, trim frames, flanges), to match the ceiling system being installed.G.Bond lighting fixtures and metal accessories to the grounding system as specified in Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.H.Exercise electronic dimming ballasts over full range of dimming capability by operating the control devices(s) in the presence of the COTR. Observe for visually detectable flicker over full dimming range.I.Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Government. Burn-in period to be 40 hours minimum, unless a lesser period is specifically recommended by lamp manufacturer. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage. Replace any lamps and ballasts which fail during burn-in.J.At completion of project, relamp/reballast fixtures which have failed lamps/ballasts. Clean fixtures, lenses, diffusers and louvers that have accumulated dust/dirt/fingerprints during construction. Replace damaged lenses, diffusers and louvers with new.E N D SECTION 26 51 00SECTION 27 05 11REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONSPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This Section, Requirements for Communications Installations, applies to all sections of Division 27.B.Furnish and install communications cabling, systems, equipment, and accessories in accordance with the specifications and drawings. Capacities and ratings of transformers, cable, and other items and arrangements for the specified items are shown on drawings.1.2 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTSA.References to industry and trade association standards and codes are minimum installation requirement standards.B.Drawings and other specification sections shall govern in those instances where requirements are greater than those specified in the above standards.1.3 QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES) A.Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and presently produce, as one of the manufacturer's principal products, the equipment and material specified for this project, and shall have manufactured the item for at least three years.B.Product Qualification:1.Manufacturer's product shall have been in satisfactory operation, on three installations of similar size and type as this project, for approximately three years.2.The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a list of installations where the products have been in operation before approval.C.Service Qualifications: There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or trained by the manufacturer which will render satisfactory service to this installation within eight hours of receipt of notification that service is needed. Submit name and address of service organizations.1.4 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTSA.Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, for which replacement parts shall be available.B.When more than one unit of the same class of equipment is required, such units shall be the product of a single manufacturer.C.Equipment Assemblies and Components:ponents of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer.2.Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which include components made by others, shall assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit.ponents shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the intended service.4.Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer.D.Factory wiring shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on all wiring diagrams.E.When Factory Testing Is Specified:1.The Government shall have the option of witnessing factory tests. The contractor shall notify the VA through the COTR a minimum of 15 working days prior to the manufacturers making the factory tests.2.Four copies of certified test reports containing all test data shall be furnished to the COTR prior to final inspection and not more than 90 days after completion of the tests.3.When equipment fails to meet factory test and re-inspection is required, the contractor shall be liable for all additional expenses, including expenses of the Government.1.5 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTSWhere variations from the contract requirements are requested in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS and Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, the connecting work and related components shall include, but not be limited to additions or changes to branch circuits, circuit protective devices, conduits, wire, feeders, controls, panels and installation methods.1.6 EQUIPMENT PROTECTIONA.Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical damage, dirt, moisture, cold and rain:1.During installation, enclosures, equipment, controls, controllers, circuit protective devices, and other like items, shall be protected against entry of foreign matter; and be vacuum cleaned both inside and outside before testing and operating and repainting if required.2.Damaged equipment shall be, as determined by the COTR, placed in first class operating condition or be returned to the source of supply for repair or replacement.3.Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable heavy kraft paper, sheet vinyl or equal.4.Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be refinished with the same quality of paint and workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are not obvious.1.7 WORK PERFORMANCEA.Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibility of the contractor.B.For work on existing stations, arrange, phase and perform work to assure communications service for other buildings at all times. Refer to Article OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS under Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.C.New work shall be installed and connected to existing work neatly and carefully. Disturbed or damaged work shall be replaced or repaired to its prior conditions, as required by Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.D.Coordinate location of equipment and pathways with other trades to minimize interferences. See the GENERAL CONDITIONS.1.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS A.Equipment location shall be as close as practical to locations shown on the drawings.B.Inaccessible Equipment:1.Where the Government determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, the equipment shall be removed and reinstalled as directed at no additional cost to the Government.2."Conveniently accessible" is defined as being capable of being reached without the use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as, but not limited to, motors, pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping, ductwork, conduit and raceways.1.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATIONA.Install an identification sign which clearly indicates information required for use and maintenance of equipment.B.Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core with engraved lettering, a minimum of 6 mm (1/4 inch) high. Secure nameplates with screws. Nameplates that are furnished by manufacturer as a standard catalog item, or where other method of identification is herein specified, are exceptions.1.10 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B.The Government's approval shall be obtained for all equipment and material before delivery to the job site. Delivery, storage, or installation of equipment or material which has not had prior approval will not be permitted at the job site.C.All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings, and other data necessary for the Government to ascertain that the proposed equipment and materials comply with specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall be legible and clearly identify equipment being submitted.D.Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies which consist of more than one item or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole. Partial submittals will not be considered for approval.1.Mark the submittals, "SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION__________________".2.Submittals shall be marked to show specification reference including the section and paragraph numbers.3.Submit each section separately.E.The submittals shall include the following:rmation that confirms compliance with contract requirements. Include the manufacturer's name, model or catalog numbers, catalog information, technical data sheets, shop drawings, pictures, nameplate data and test reports as required.2.Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams for communication and signal systems, control system and equipment assemblies. All terminal points and wiring shall be identified on wiring diagrams.3.Parts list which shall include those replacement parts recommended by the equipment manufacturer, quantity of parts, current price and availability of each part.F.Manuals: Submit in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.1.Maintenance and Operation Manuals: Submit as required for systems and equipment specified in the technical sections. Furnish four copies, bound in hardback binders, (manufacturer's standard binders) or an approved equivalent. Furnish one complete manual as specified in the technical section but in no case later than prior to performance of systems or equipment test, and furnish the remaining manuals prior to contract completion.2.Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words "MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUAL," the name and location of the system, equipment, building, name of Contractor, and contract number. Include in the manual the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing the system or equipment and the local representatives for the system or equipment.3.Provide a "Table of Contents" and assemble the manual to conform to the table of contents, with tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.4.The manuals shall include:a.Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of the equipment.b.A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown.c.Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.d.Installation and maintenance instructions.e.Safety precautions.f.Diagrams and illustrations.g.Testing methods.h.Performance data.i.Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of supply, recommended spare parts, and name of servicing organization.j.Appendix; list qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the equipment, including addresses and certified qualifications.G.Approvals will be based on complete submission of manuals together with shop drawings.H.After approval and prior to installation, furnish the COTR with one sample of each of the following:1.A 300 mm (12 inch) length of each type and size of wire and cable along with the tag from the coils of reels from which the samples were taken. 2.Each type of conduit and pathway coupling, bushing and termination fitting. 3.Raceway and pathway hangers, clamps and supports. 4.Duct sealing compound. I.In addition to the requirement of SUBMITTALS, the VA reserves the right to request the manufacturer to arrange for a VA representative to see typical active systems in operation, when there has been no prior experience with the manufacturer or the type of equipment being submitted.1.11 SINGULAR NUMBER Where any device or part of equipment is referred to in these specifications in the singular number (e.g., "the switch"), this reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation as shown on the drawings.1.12 TRAININGA.Training shall be provided in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.B.Training shall be provided for the particular equipment or system as required in each associated specification.C.A training schedule shall be developed and submitted by the contractor and approved by the COTR at least 30 days prior to the planned training.E N D SECTITON 27 05 11SECTION 27 05 26GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies general grounding and bonding requirements of telecommunication installations for equipment operations. B.“Grounding electrode system” refers to all electrodes required by NEC, as well as including made, supplementary, telecommunications system grounding electrodes.The terms “connect” and “bond” are used interchangeably in this specification and have the same meaning.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 27 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS: General electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one section of Division 27. 1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 27 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS. B.Shop Drawings: 1.Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.2.Include the location of system grounding electrode connections and the routing of aboveground and underground grounding electrode conductors. C.Test Reports: Provide certified test reports of ground resistance. D.Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the COTR:1.Certification that the materials and installation is in accordance with the drawings and specifications.2.Certification, by the Contractor, that the complete installation has been properly installed and tested. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSPublications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. A.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):B1-2001Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper WireB8-2004Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or SoftB.Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):81-1983IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground SystemC.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 702005National Electrical Code (NEC) Telecommunications Industry Association, (TIA)J-STO-607-A-2002Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for TelecommunicationsE. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 442005 ThermosetInsulated Wires and Cables832003 ThermoplasticInsulated Wires and Cables4672004 Grounding and Bonding Equipment 486A-486B-2003 Wire Connectors PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS A.Equipment grounding conductors shall be UL 83 insulated stranded copper, except that sizes 6 mm? (10 AWG) and smaller shall be solid copper. Insulation color shall be continuous green for all equipment grounding conductors, except that wire sizes 25 mm? (4 AWG) and larger shall be permitted to be identified per NEC.B.Bonding conductors shall be ASTM B8 bare stranded copper, except that sizes 6 mm? (10 AWG) and smaller shall be ASTM B1 solid bare copper wire. 2.3 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTSComponents shall meet or exceed UL 467 and be clearly marked with the manufacturer, catalog number, and permitted conductor size(s).2.4 Telecommunication system ground busbaRsProvide solid copper busbar, pre-drilled from two-hole lug connections with a minimum thickness of 6 mm (1/4 inch) for wall and backboard mounting using standard insulators sized as follows:1.Room Signal Grounding: 300 mm x 100 mm (12 inches x 4 inch).2.Master Signal Ground: 600 mm x 100 mm (24 inches x 4 inch).2.5 ground connectionsA.Above Grade:1.Bonding Jumpers: compression type connectors, using zinc-plated fasteners and external tooth lockwashers.2.Ground Busbars: Two-hole compression type lugs using tin-plated copper or copper alloy bolts and nuts.3.Rack and Cabinet Ground Bars: one-hole compression-type lugs using zinc-plated or copper alloy fasteners.Cable Shields: Make ground connections to multipair communications cables with metallic shields using shield bonding connectors with screw stud connection.2.6 equipment rack and cabinet ground barsProvide solid copper ground bars designed for mounting on the framework of open or cabinet-enclosed equipment racks with minimum dimensions of 4 mm thick by 19 mm wide (3/8 inch x ? inch).2.7 ground terminal blocksAt any equipment mounting location (e.g. backboards and hinged cover enclosures) where rack-type ground bars cannot be mounted, provide screw lug-type terminal blocks.2.8 splice case ground accessoriesSplice case grounding and bonding accessories shall be supplied by the splice case manufacturer when available. Otherwise, use 16 mm? (6 AWG) insulated ground wire with shield bonding connectors.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A.Ground in accordance with the NEC, as shown on drawings, and as hereinafter specified. B.System Grounding: 1.Secondary service neutrals: Ground at the supply side of the secondary disconnecting means and at the related transformers. 2.Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from the service entrance): Ground the secondary neutral. 3.Isolation transformers and isolated power systems shall not be system grounded. C.Equipment Grounding: Metallic structures (including ductwork and building steel), enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits shall be bonded and grounded. 3.2 INACCESSIBLE GROUNDING CONNECTIONSMake grounding connections, which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible (except connections for which periodic testing access is required) by exothermic weld.3.3 SECONDARY EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITS A.Main Bonding Jumper: Bond the secondary service neutral to the ground bus in the service equipment. B.Metallic Piping, Building Steel, and Supplemental Electrode(s): 1.Provide a grounding electrode conductor sized per NEC between the service equipment ground bus and all metallic water and gas pipe systems, building steel, and supplemental or made electrodes. Jumper insulating joints in the metallic piping. All connections to electrodes shall be made with fittings that conform to UL 467.2.Provide a supplemental ground electrode and bond to the grounding electrode system. F.Conduit Systems:1.Ground all metallic conduit systems. All metallic conduit systems shall contain an equipment grounding conductor. 2.Nonmetallic conduit systems shall contain an equipment grounding conductor, except that non-metallic feeder conduits which carry a grounded conductor from exterior transformers to interior or building-mounted service entrance equipment need not contain an equipment grounding conductor.3.Conduit containing only a grounding conductor, and which is provided for mechanical protection of the conductor, shall be bonded to that conductor at the entrance and exit from the conduit. G.Feeders and Branch Circuits: Install equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and power and lighting branch circuits. H.Boxes, Cabinets, Enclosures, and Panelboards: 1.Bond the equipment grounding conductor to each pullbox, junction box, outlet box, device box, cabinets, and other enclosures through which the conductor passes (except for special grounding systems for intensive care units and other critical units shown). 2.Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for equipment grounding conductor termination. 3.Provide ground bars in panelboards, bolted to the housing, with sufficient lugs to terminate the equipment grounding conductors. J.Receptacles shall not be grounded through their mounting screws. Ground with a jumper from the receptacle green ground terminal to the device box ground screw and the branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. 3.4 corrosion inhibitorsWhen making ground and ground bonding connections, apply a corrosion inhibitor to all contact surfaces. Use corrosion inhibitor appropriate for protecting a connection between the metals used.3.5 CONDUCTIVE PIPING A.Bond all conductive piping systems, interior and exterior, to the building to the grounding electrode system. Bonding connections shall be made as close as practical to the equipment ground bus. B.In operating rooms and at intensive care and coronary care type beds, bond the gases and suction piping, at the outlets, directly to the room or patient ground bus. 3.6 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMBond telecommunications system grounding equipment to the electrical grounding electrode system.Furnish and install all wire and hardware required to properly ground, bond and connect communications raceway, cable tray, metallic cable shields, and equipment to a ground source.Ground bonding jumpers shall be continuous with no splices. Use the shortest length of bonding jumper possible.Provide ground paths that are permanent and continuous with a resistance of 1 ohm or less from raceway, cable tray, and equipment connections to the building grounding electrode. The resistance across individual bonding connections shall be 10 milli ohms or less. COTRAbove-Grade Grounding Connections: When making bolted or screwed connections to attach bonding jumpers, remove paint to expose the entire contact surface by grinding where necessary; thoroughly clean all connector, plate and other contact surfaces; and apply an appropriate corrosion inhibitor to all surfaces before joining.Bonding Jumpers:Use insulated ground wire of the size and type shown on the Drawings or use a minimum of 16 mm? (6 AWG) insulated copper wire.Assemble bonding jumpers using insulated ground wire terminated with compression connectors.Use compression connectors of proper size for conductors specified. Use connector manufacturer’s compression tool.H.Bonding Jumper Fasteners:1.Conduit: Fasten bonding jumpers using screw lugs on grounding bushings or conduit strut clamps, or the clamp pads on push-type conduit fasteners. When screw lug connection to a conduit strut clamp is not possible, fasten the plain end of a bonding jumper wire by slipping the plain end under the conduit strut clamp pad; tighten the clamp screw firmly. Where appropriate, use zinc-plated external tooth lockwashers.2.Wireway and Cable Tray: Fasten bonding jumpers using zinc-plated bolts, external tooth lockwashers, and nuts. Install protective cover, e.g., zinc-plated acorn nuts on any bolts extending into wireway or cable tray to prevent cable damage.3.Ground Plates and Busbars: Fasten bonding jumpers using two-hole compression lugs. Use tin-plated copper or copper alloy bolts, external tooth lockwashers, and nuts.4.Unistrut and Raised Floor Stringers: Fasten bonding jumpers using zinc-plated, self-drill screws and external tooth lockwashers.3.7 Communication room groundingA.Telecommunications Ground Busbars:1.Provide communications room telecommunications ground busbar hardware at 950 mm (18 inches) at locations indicated on the Drawings.2.Connect the telecommunications room ground busbars to other room grounding busbars as indicated on the Grounding Riser diagram.B.Telephone-Type Cable Rack Systems: aluminum pan installed on telephone-type cable rack serves as the primary ground conductor within the communications room. Make ground connections by installing the following bonding jumpers:Install a 16 mm? (6 AWG) bonding between the telecommunications ground busbar and the nearest access to the aluminum pan installed on the cable rack.Use 16 mm? (6 AWG) bonding jumpers across aluminum pan junctions.C.Self-Supporting and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment Rack Ground Bars:When ground bars are provided at the rear of lineup of bolted together equipment racks, bond the copper ground bars together using solid copper splice plates supplied by the ground bar manufacturer.Bond together nonadjacent ground bars on equipment racks and cabinets with 16 mm? (6 AWG) insulated copper wire bonding jumpers attached at each end with compression-type connectors and mounting bolts.Provide a 16 mm? (6 AWG) bonding jumper between the rack and/or cabinet ground busbar and the aluminum pan of an overhead cable tray or the raised floor stringer as appropriate.D.Backboards: Provide a screw lug-type terminal block or drilled and tapped copper strip near the top of backboards used for communications cross-connect systems. Connect backboard ground terminals to the aluminum pan in the telephone-type cable tray using an insulated 16 mm? (16 AWG) bonding jumper.E.Other Communication Room Ground Systems: Ground all metallic conduit, wireways, and other metallic equipment located away from equipment racks or cabinets to the cable tray pan or the telecommunications ground busbar, whichever is closer, using insulated 16 mm? (6 AWG) ground wire bonding jumpers.3.8 COMMUNICATIONS cable groundingA.Bond all metallic cable sheaths in multipair communications cables together at each splicing and/or terminating location to provide 100 percent metallic sheath continuity throughout the communications distribution system.1.At terminal points, install a cable shield bonding connector provide a screw stud connection for ground wire. Use a bonding jumper to connect the cable shield connector to an appropriate ground source like the rack or cabinet ground bar. 2.Bond all metallic cable shields together within splice closures using cable shield bonding connectors or the splice case grounding and bonding accessories provided by the splice case manufacturer. When an external ground connection is provided as part of splice closure, connect to an approved ground source and all other metallic components and equipment at that location.3.9 communciations raceway grounding Conduit: Use insulated 16 mm? (6 AWG) bonding jumpers to ground metallic conduit at each end and to bond at all intermediate metallic enclosures.Wireway: use insulated 16 mm? (6 AWG) bonding jumpers to ground or bond metallic wireway at each end at all intermediate metallic enclosures and across all section junctions.3.10 ground resistance A.Grounding system resistance to ground shall not exceed 5 ohms. Make necessary modifications or additions to the grounding electrode system for compliance without additional cost to the Government. Final tests shall assure that this requirement is met.B.Resistance of the grounding electrode system shall be measured using a four-terminal fall-of-potential method as defined in IEEE 81. Ground resistance measurements shall be made before the electrical distribution system is energized and shall be made in normally dry conditions not less than 48 hours after the last rainfall. Resistance measurements of separate grounding electrode systems shall be made before the systems are bonded together below grade. The combined resistance of separate systems may be used to meet the required resistance, but the specified number of electrodes must still be provided.C.Services at power company interface points shall comply with the power company ground resistance requirements. E N D SECTION 27 05 26SECTION 27 05 33RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of conduit, fittings, and boxes to form complete, coordinated, raceway systems. Raceways are required for all communications cabling unless shown or specified otherwise.B.Definitions: The term conduit, as used in this specification, shall mean any or all of the raceway types specified.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of fire rated construction: Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.B.Identification and painting of conduit and other devices: Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.C.General electrical requirements and items that is common to more than one section of Division 27: Section 27 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS.D.Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents: Section 27 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.1.3 SUBMITTALSIn accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, furnish the following:A.Shop Drawings:1.Size and location of panels and pull boxes2.Layout of required conduit penetrations through structural elements.3.The specific item proposed and its area of application shall be identified on the catalog cuts.B.Certification: Prior to final inspection, deliver to the COTRCOTR four copies of the certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and has been properly installed.1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):70-05National Electrical Code (NEC)C.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):1-03Flexible Metal Conduit 5-01Surface Metal Raceway and Fittings6-03Rigid Metal Conduit50-03Enclosures for Electrical Equipment360-03Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit467-01Grounding and Bonding Equipment514A-01Metallic Outlet Boxes514B-02Fittings for Cable and Conduit797-03Electrical Metallic Tubing1242-00Intermediate Metal ConduitD.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):FB1-03Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing and CablePART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALA.Conduit Size: In accordance with the NEC, but not less than 13 mm (1/2?inch) unless otherwise shown. Where permitted by the NEC, 13 mm (1/2 inch) flexible conduit may be used for tap connections to recessed lighting fixtures.B.Conduit: 1.Rigid galvanized steel: Shall Conform to UL 6, ANSI C80.1.2.Rigid aluminum: Shall Conform to UL 6A, ANSI C80.5. 3.Rigid intermediate steel conduit (IMC): Shall Conform to UL 1242, ANSI C80.6.4.Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Shall Conform to UL 797, ANSI C80.3. Maximum size not to exceed 105 mm (4?inch) and shall be permitted only with cable rated 600 volts or less.5.Flexible galvanized steel conduit: Shall Conform to UL 1.6.Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit: Shall Conform to UL 360.8.Surface metal raceway: Shall Conform to UL 5.C.Conduit Fittings: 1.Rigid steel and IMC conduit fittings: a.Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA FB1.a.Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows: Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable. Integral retractable type IMC couplings are also acceptable.b.Locknuts: Bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of an enclosure.c.Bushings: Metallic insulating type, consisting of an insulating insert molded or locked into the metallic body of the fitting. Bushings made entirely of metal or nonmetallic material are not permitted.d.Erickson (uniontype) and set screw type couplings: Approved for use in concrete are permitted for use to complete a conduit run where conduit is installed in concrete. Use set screws of case hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in conduit wall for positive ground. Tightening of set screws with pliers is prohibited.e.Sealing fittings: Threaded cast iron type. Use continuous drain type sealing fittings to prevent passage of water vapor. In concealed work, install fittings in flush steel boxes with blank cover plates having the same finishes as that of other electrical plates in the room.2.Rigid aluminum conduit fittings:a.Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows: Malleable iron, steel or aluminum alloy materials; Zinc or cadmium plate iron or steel fittings. Aluminum fittings containing more than 0.4 percent copper are prohibited.b.Locknuts and bushings: As specified for rigid steel and IMC conduit.c.Set screw fittings: Not permitted for use with aluminum conduit.3.Electrical metallic tubing fittings: a.Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA FB1.b.Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.c.Couplings and connectors: Concrete tight and rain tight, with connectors having insulated throats. Use gland and ring compression type couplings and connectors for conduit sizes 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller. Use set screw type couplings with four set screws each for conduit sizes over 50 mm (2 inches). Use set screws of case-hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in wall of conduit for positive grounding.d.Indent type connectors or couplings are prohibited.e.Die-cast or pressure-cast zinc-alloy fittings or fittings made of "pot metal" are prohibited.4.Flexible steel conduit fittings:a.Conform to UL 514B. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.b.Clamp type, with insulated throat.5.Liquidtight flexible metal conduit fittings:a.Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA FB1.b.Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.c.Fittings must incorporate a threaded grounding cone, a steel or plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Connectors shall have insulated throats.6.Surface metal raceway fittings: As recommended by the raceway manufacturer.7.Expansion and deflection couplings:a.Conform to UL 467 and UL 514B.b.Accommodate, 19 mm (0.75 inch) deflection, expansion, or contraction in any direction, and allow 30 degree angular deflections.c.Include internal flexible metal braid sized to guarantee conduit ground continuity and fault currents in accordance with UL 467, and the NEC code tables for ground conductors.d.Jacket: Flexible, corrosionresistant, watertight, moisture and heat resistant molded rubber material with stainless steel jacket clamps.D.Conduit Supports:1.Parts and hardware: Zinccoat or provide equivalent corrosion protection.2.Individual Conduit Hangers: Designed for the purpose, having a preassembled closure bolt and nut, and provisions for receiving a hanger rod.3.Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers: Not less than 38 mm by 38 mm (11/2 by 11/2 inch), 12 gage steel, cold formed, lipped channels; with not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch) diameter steel hanger rods.4.Solid Masonry and Concrete Anchors: Selfdrilling expansion shields, or machine bolt expansion.E.Outlet, Junction, and Pull Boxes:1.UL-50 and UL-514A.2.Cast metal where required by the NEC or shown, and equipped with rustproof boxes.3.Sheet metal boxes: Galvanized steel, except where otherwise shown.4.Flush mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with raised covers so that front face of raised cover is flush with the wall. Surface mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with surface style flat or raised covers.Wireways: Equip with hinged covers, except where removable covers are shown.PART 3 EXECUTION3.1 PENETRATIONSA.Cutting or Holes:1.Locate holes in advance where they are proposed in the structural sections such as ribs or beams. Obtain the approval of the COTR prior to drilling through structural sections.2.Cut holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures with a diamond core drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or manual hammer type drills are not allowed, except where permitted by the COTR as required by limited working space.B.Fire Stop: Where conduits, wireways, and other communications raceways pass through fire partitions, fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases as specified in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING, with rock wool fiber or silicone foam sealant only. Completely fill and seal clearances between raceways and openings with the fire stop material.3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERALA.Install conduit as follows:1.In complete runs before pulling in cables or wires.2.Flattened, dented, or deformed conduit is not permitted. Remove and replace the damaged conduits with new undamaged material.3.Assure conduit installation does not encroach into the ceiling height head room, walkways, or doorways.4.Cut square with a hacksaw, ream, remove burrs, and draw up tight.5.Mechanically continuous.6.Independently support conduit at 8’0” on center. Do not use other supports i.e., (suspended ceilings, suspended ceiling supporting members, lighting fixtures, conduits, mechanical piping, or mechanical ducts).7.Support within 300 mm (1 foot) of changes of direction, and within 300 mm (1 foot) of each enclosure to which connected.8.Close ends of empty conduit with plugs or caps at the roughin stage to prevent entry of debris, until wires are pulled in.9.Conduit installations under fume and vent hoods are prohibited.10.Secure conduits to cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes and outlet boxes with bonding type locknuts. For rigid and IMC conduit installations, provide a locknut on the inside of the enclosure, made up wrench tight. Do not make conduit connections to junction box covers.11.Flashing of penetrations of the roof membrane is specified in Section 07 60 00, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.12.Do not use aluminum conduits in wet locations.13.Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein, all conduits shall be installed concealed within finished walls, floors and ceilings. B.Conduit Bends:1.Make bends with standard conduit bending machines.2.Conduit hickey may be used for slight offsets, and for straightening stubbed out conduits.3.Bending of conduits with a pipe tee or vise is prohibited.C.Layout and Homeruns:2.Deviations: Make only where necessary to avoid interferences and only after drawings showing the proposed deviations have been submitted approved by the COTR .3.3 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION A.In Concrete:1.Conduit: Rigid steel, IMC or EMT. Do not install EMT in concrete slabs that are in contact with soil, gravel or vapor barriers.2.Align and run conduit in direct lines.3.Install conduit through concrete beams only when the following occurs:a.Where shown on the structural drawings.b.As approved by the COTR prior to construction, and after submittal of drawing showing location, size, and position of each penetration.4.Installation of conduit in concrete that is less than 75 mm (3 inches) thick is prohibited.a.Conduit outside diameter larger than 1/3 of the slab thickness is prohibited.b.Space between conduits in slabs: Approximately six conduit diameters apart, except one conduit diameter at conduit crossings. c.Install conduits approximately in the center of the slab so that there will be a minimum of 19 mm (3/4 inch) of concrete around the conduits.5.Make couplings and connections watertight. Use thread compounds that are UL approved conductive type to insure low resistance ground continuity through the conduits. Tightening set screws with pliers is prohibited.B.Furred or Suspended Ceilings and in Walls:1.Conduit for conductors above 600 volts:a.Rigid steel or rigid aluminum.b.Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other types in the same system is prohibited.2.Conduit for conductors 600 volts and below:a.Rigid steel, IMC, rigid aluminum, or EMT. Different type conduits mixed indiscriminately in the same system is prohibited.3.Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.4.Connect recessed lighting fixtures to conduit runs with maximum 1800 mm (six feet) of flexible metal conduit extending from a junction box to the fixture.5.Tightening set screws with pliers is prohibited.3.4 EXPOSED WORK INSTALLATIONA.Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, exposed conduit is only permitted in mechanical and electrical rooms.B.Conduit for Conductors 600 volts and below:1.Rigid steel, IMC, rigid aluminum, or EMT. Different type of conduits mixed indiscriminately in the system is prohibited.C.Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.D.Install horizontal runs close to the ceiling or beams and secure with conduit straps.E.Support horizontal or vertical runs at not over 2400 mm (eight foot) intervals.F.Surface metal raceways: Use only where shown.G.Painting:1.Paint exposed conduit as specified in Section09 91 00, PAINTING.2.Paint all conduits containing cables rated over 600 volts safety orange. Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING for preparation, paint type, and exact color. In addition, paint legends, using 50 mm (two inch) high black numerals and letters, showing the cable voltage rating. Provide legends where conduits pass through walls and floors and at maximum 6000 mm (20 foot) intervals in between.3.5 EXPANSION JOINTSA.Conduits 75 mm (3 inches) and larger, that are secured to the building structure on opposite sides of a building expansion joint, require expansion and deflection couplings. Install the couplings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.B.Provide conduits smaller than 75 mm (3 inches) with junction boxes on both sides of the expansion joint. Connect conduits to junction boxes with sufficient slack of flexible conduit to produce 125 mm (5 inch) vertical drop midway between the ends. Flexible conduit shall have a copper green ground bonding jumper installed. In lieu of this flexible conduit, expansion and deflection couplings as specified above for 375 mm (15 inches) and larger conduits are acceptable.C.Install expansion and deflection couplings where shown.3.6 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, INSTALLATION A.Safe working load shall not exceed 1/4 of proof test load of fastening devices.B.Use pipe straps or individual conduit hangers for supporting individual conduits. Maximum distance between supports is 2.5 m (8 foot) on center.C.Support multiple conduit runs with trapeze hangers. Use trapeze hangers that are designed to support a load equal to or greater than the sum of the weights of the conduits, wires, hanger itself, and 90 kg (200 pounds). Attach each conduit with Ubolts or other approved fasteners.D.Support conduit independently of junction boxes, pull boxes, fixtures, suspended ceiling Tbars, angle supports, and similar items.E.Fasteners and Supports in Solid Masonry and Concrete:1.New Construction: Use steel or malleable iron concrete inserts set in place prior to placing the concrete.2.Existing Construction:a.Steel expansion anchors not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) bolt size and not less than 28 mm (11/8 inch) embedment.b.Power set fasteners not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) diameter with depth of penetration not less than 75 mm (3 inches).c.Use vibration and shock resistant anchors and fasteners for attaching to concrete ceilings.F.Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts are permitted. G.Bolts supported only by plaster or gypsum wallboard are not acceptable.H.Metal Structures: Use machine screw fasteners or other devices specifically designed and approved for the application.I.Attachment by wood plugs, rawl plug, plastic, lead or soft metal anchors, or wood blocking and bolts supported only by plaster is prohibited.J.Chain, wire, or perforated strap shall not be used to support or fasten conduit.K.Spring steel type supports or fasteners are prohibited for all uses except: Horizontal and vertical supports/fasteners within walls.L.Vertical Supports: Vertical conduit runs shall have riser clamps and supports in accordance with the NEC and as shown. Provide supports for cable and wire with fittings that include internal wedges and retaining collars.3.7 BOX INSTALLATION A.Boxes for Concealed Conduits:1.Flush mounted.2.Provide raised covers for boxes to suit the wall or ceiling, construction and finish.B.In addition to boxes shown, install additional boxes where needed to prevent damage to cables and wires during pulling in operations. C.Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused openings. Use threaded plugs for cast metal boxes and snapin metal covers for sheet metal boxes.D.Stencil or install phenolic nameplates on covers of the boxes identified on riser diagrams; for example "SIGFA JB No. 1". 3.11 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CONDUITA.Install the communication raceway system as shown on drawings.B.Minimum conduit size of 19 mm (3/4 inch), but not less than the size shown on the drawings.C.All conduit ends shall be equipped with insulated bushings.D.All 100 mm (four inch) conduits within buildings shall include pull boxes after every two 90 degree bends. Size boxes per the NEC.E.Vertical conduits/sleeves through closets floors shall terminate not less than 75 mm (3 inches) below the floor and not less than 75 mm (3 inches) below the ceiling of the floor below.F.Terminate conduit runs to/from a backboard in a closet or interstitial space at the top or bottom of the backboard. Conduits shall enter communication closets next to the wall and be flush with the backboard.G.Were drilling is necessary for vertical conduits, locate holes so as not to affect structural sections such as ribs or beams.H.All empty conduits located in communication closets or on backboards shall be sealed with a standard nonhardening duct seal compound to prevent the entrance of moisture and gases and to meet fire resistance requirements.I.Conduit runs shall contain no more than four quarter turns (90 degree bends) between pull boxes/backboards. Minimum radius of communication conduit bends shall be as follows (special long radius):Sizes of ConduitTrade SizeRadius of Conduit Bendsmm, Inches3/4150 (6)1230 (9)1-1/4350 (14)1-1/2430 (17)2525 (21)2-1/2635 (25)3775 (31)3-1/2900 (36)41125 (45)J.Furnish and install 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick fire retardant plywood specified in Section 06 10 00, ROUGH CARPENTRY on the wall of communication closets where shown on drawings . Mount the plywood with the bottom edge 300 mm (one foot) above the finished floor.K.Furnish and pull wire in all empty conduits. (Sleeves through floor are exceptions).E N D SECTION 27 05 33SECTION 28 31 00FIRE DETECTION AND ALARMPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTION. A.This section of the specifications includes the furnishing, installation, and connection of the fire alarm equipment to form a complete coordinated system ready for operation. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, control units, fire safety control devices, power supplies, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified. The fire alarm system shall not be combined with other systems such as building automation, energy management, security, etc.B.Fire alarm systems shall comply with requirements of the most recent VA FIRE PROTECTION DESIGN MANUAL and NFPA 72 unless variations to NFPA 72 are specifically identified within these contract documents by the following notation: "variation". The design, system layout, document submittal preparation, and supervision of installation and testing shall be provided by a technician that is certified NICET level III or a registered fire protection engineer. The NICET certified technician shall be on site for the supervision and testing of the system. Factory engineers from the equipment manufacturer, thoroughly familiar and knowledgeable with all equipment utilized, shall provide additional technical support at the site as required by the COTRor his authorized representative. Installers shall have a minimum of 2 years experience installing fire alarm systems.C.Fire alarm signals: Building shall have a general evacuation fire alarm signal in accordance with ASA S3.41 to notify all occupants in the respective building to evacuate.D.Alarm signals (by device), supervisory signals (by device) and system trouble signals (by device not reporting) shall be distinctly transmitted to the main fire alarm system control unit located in the fire department.E.The main fire alarm control unit shall automatically transmit alarm signals to a listed central station using a digital alarm communicator transmitter in accordance with NFPA 72.1.2 SCOPEA.A fully addressable fire alarm system as an extension of an existing EST-3 addressable fire alarm system shall be designed and installed in accordance with the specifications and drawings. Device location and wiring runs shown on the drawings are for reference only unless specifically dimensioned. Actual locations shall be in accordance with NFPA 72 and this specification.B.All existing fire alarm equipment, wiring, devices and sub-systems that are not shown to be reused shall be removed. All existing fire alarm conduit not reused shall be removed.C.Existing fire alarm bells, chimes, door holders, 120VAC duct smoke detectors, valve tamper switches and waterflow/pressure switches may be reused only as specifically indicated on the drawings and provided the equipment:1.Meets this specification section2.Is UL listed or FM approved3.Is compatible with new equipment being installed4.Is verified as operable through contractor testing and inspection5.Is warranted as new by the contractor.D.Existing 120 VAC duct smoke detectors, waterflow/pressure switches, and valve tamper switches if reused by the Contractor shall be equipped with an addressable interface device compatible with the new equipment being installed.E.Existing reused equipment shall be covered as new equipment under the Warranty specified herein.F.Basic Performance:1.Alarm and trouble signals from each building fire alarm control panel shall be digitally encoded by UL listed electronic devices onto a multiplexed communication system.2.Response time between alarm initiation (contact closure) and recording at the main fire alarm control unit (appearance on alphanumeric read out) shall not exceed 5 seconds.3.The signaling line circuits (SLC) between building fire alarm control units shall be wired Style 7 in accordance with NFPA 72. Isolation shall be provided so that no more than one building can be lost due to a short circuit fault.4.Initiating device circuits (IDC) shall be wired Style C in accordance with NFPA 72.5.Signaling line circuits (SLC) within buildings shall be wired Style 4 in accordance with NFPA 72. Individual signaling line circuits shall be limited to covering 22,500 square feet (2,090 square meters) of floor space or 3 floors whichever is less.6.Notification appliance circuits (NAC) shall be wired Style Y in accordance with NFPA 72.1.3 RELATED WORKA. Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.Requirements for procedures for submittals. B.Section 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING. Requirements for fire proofing wall penetrations. C.Section 21 13 13 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS. Requirements for sprinkler systems.1.4 SUBMITTALSA.General: Submit 5 copies in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, and Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.B.Drawings:1.Prepare drawings using AutoCAD Release 14 software and include all contractors information. Layering shall be by VA criteria as provided by the Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR). Bid drawing files on AutoCAD will be provided to the Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The contractor shall be responsible for verifying all critical dimensions shown on the drawings provided by VA.2.Floor plans: Provide locations of all devices (with device number at each addressable device corresponding to control unit programming), appliances, panels, equipment, junction/terminal cabinets/boxes, risers, electrical power connections, individual circuits and raceway routing, system zoning; number, size, and type of raceways and conductors in each raceway; conduit fill calculations with cross section area percent fill for each type and size of conductor and raceway. Only those devices connected and incorporated into the final system shall be on these floor plans. Do not show any removed devices on the floor plans. Show all interfaces for all fire safety functions.3.Riser diagrams: Provide, for the entire system, the number, size and type of riser raceways and conductors in each riser raceway and number of each type device per floor and zone. Show door holder interface, elevator control interface, HVAC shutdown interface, fire extinguishing system interface, and all other fire safety interfaces. Show wiring Styles on the riser diagram for all circuits. Provide diagrams both on a per building and campus wide basis.4.Detailed wiring diagrams: Provide for control panels, modules, power supplies, electrical power connections, auxiliary relays and annunciators showing termination identifications, size and type conductors, circuit boards, LED lamps, indicators, adjustable controls, switches, ribbon connectors, wiring harnesses, terminal strips and connectors, spare zones/circuits. Diagrams shall be drawn to a scale sufficient to show spatial relationships between components, enclosures and equipment configuration.5.Two weeks prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall deliver to the COTR 3 sets of as-built drawings and one set of the as-built drawing computer files (using AutoCAD 2007 or later). Asbuilt drawings (floor plans) shall show all new and/or existing conduit used for the fire alarm system.C.Manuals:1.Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets for all items used in the system, power requirements, device wiring diagrams, dimensions, and information for ordering replacement parts.a.Wiring diagrams shall have their terminals identified to facilitate installation, operation, expansion and maintenance.b.Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnections between the items of equipment.c.Include complete listing of all software used and installation and operation instructions including the input/output matrix chart.d.Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the information required to properly operate, inspect, test and maintain the equipment and system. Provide all manufacturer's installation limitations including but not limited to circuit length limitations.plete listing of all digitized voice messages.f.Provide standby battery calculations under normal operating and alarm modes. Battery calculations shall include the magnets for holding the doors open for one minute.g.Include information indicating who will provide emergency service and perform post contract maintenance.h.Provide a replacement parts list with current prices. Include a list of recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for testing and maintenance purposes.i.A computerized preventive maintenance schedule for all equipment. The schedule shall be provided on disk in a computer format acceptable to the VAMC and shall describe the protocol for preventive maintenance of all equipment. The schedule shall include the required times for systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of all equipment. A print out of the schedule shall also be provided in the manual. Provide the disk in a pocket within the manual.j.Furnish manuals in 3 ring loose-leaf binder or manufacturer's standard binder.k.A print out for all devices proposed on each signaling line circuit with spare capacity indicated.2.Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver 4 copies of the final updated maintenance and operating manual to the COTR.a.The manual shall be updated to include any information necessitated by the maintenance and operating manual approval.plete "As installed" wiring and schematic diagrams shall be included that shows all items of equipment and their interconnecting wiring. Show all final terminal identifications.plete listing of all programming information, including all control events per device including an updated input/output matrix.d.Certificate of Installation as required by NFPA 72 for each building. The certificate shall identify any variations from the National Fire Alarm Code.e.Certificate from equipment manufacturer assuring compliance with all manufacturers installation requirements and satisfactory system operation.D.Certifications:1.Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit the technician's NICET level III fire alarm certification as well as certification from the control unit manufacturer that the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized representative of the major equipment manufacturer. Include in the certification the names and addresses of the proposed supervisor of installation and the proposed performer of contract maintenance. Also include the name and title of the manufacturer’s representative who makes the certification.2.Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from either the control unit manufacturer or the manufacturer of each component (e.g., smoke detector) that the components being furnished are compatible with the control unit.3.Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major equipment manufacturer that the wiring and connection diagrams meet this specification, UL and NFPA 72 requirements.1.5 WarrantyAll work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the entire installation by the Contracting Officer.1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in text by the basic designation only and the latest editions of these publications shall be applicable.B.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):NFPA 13 ................Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2010 editionNFPA 14 ................ Standard for the Installation of Standpipes and Hose Systems, 2010 editionNFPA 20 ................ Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection, 2010 editionNFPA 70National Electrical Code (NEC), 2010 editionNFPA 72National Fire Alarm Code, 2010 editionNFPA 90AStandard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, 2009 editionNFPA 101Life Safety Code, 2009 editionC.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Fire Protection Equipment Directory D.Factory Mutual Research Corp (FM): Approval Guide, 2007-2011E.American National Standards Institute (ANSI):S3.41Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal, 1990 edition, reaffirmed 2008F.International Code Council, International Building Code (IBC), 2009 edition PART 2– PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS, GENERALA.Existing equipment may be reused only where indicated on the drawings. All addressable equipment and components shall be new and the manufacturer's current model. All equipment shall be tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or Factory Mutual Research Corporation for use as part of a fire alarm system. The authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall certify that the installation complies with all manufacturer’s requirements and that satisfactory total system operation has been achieved.2.2 CONDUIT, BOXES, AND WIREA.Conduit shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS and as follows:1.All new conduit shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 70.2.Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area.3.All new conduit shall be 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum.B.Wire:1.Wiring shall be in accordance with NEC article 760, Section 26 05 21 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES, and as recommended by the manufacturer of the addressable fire alarm system to extend an existing addressable system. All wires shall be color coded. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG for initiating device circuits and 14 AWG for notification device circuits.2.Addressable circuits and wiring used for the multiplex communication loop shall be twisted and shielded unless specifically accepted by the fire alarm equipment manufacturer in writing. 3.Any fire alarm system wiring that extends outside of a building shall have additional power surge protection to protect equipment from physical damage and false signals due to lightning, voltage and current induced transients. Protection devices shall be shown on the submittal drawings and shall be UL listed or in accordance with written manufacturer's requirements.C.Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes, and Cabinets:1.Shall be galvanized steel in accordance with UL requirements.2.All boxes shall be sized and installed in accordance with NFPA 70.3.covers shall be repainted red in accordance with Section 09 91 00, PAINTING and shall be identified with white markings as "FA" for junction boxes and as "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM" for cabinets and terminal boxes. Lettering shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch (19 mm) high.4.Terminal boxes and cabinets shall have a volume 50 percent greater than required by the NFPA 70. Minimum sized wire shall be considered as 14 AWG for calculation purposes.5.Terminal boxes and cabinets shall have identified pressure type terminal strips and shall be located at the base of each riser. Terminal strips shall be labeled as specified or as approved by the COTR.2.3 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNITA.General:1.A fully addressable fire alarm system used as an extension of an existing fire alarm system shall be provided with a fire alarm control unit and shall operate as a supervised zoned fire alarm system. The addressable fire alarm control unit shall be interfaced with the existing non-addressable fire alarm control unit such that an alarm signal on one unit shall cause an alarm signal on the other unit. The addressable fire alarm control unit shall be located in the same room or space as the existing fire alarm control unit.2.Each power source shall be supervised from the other source for loss of power.3.All circuits shall be monitored for integrity.4.Visually and audibly annunciate any trouble condition including, but not limited to main power failure, grounds and system wiring derangement.B.Enclosure:1.The control unit shall be housed in a cabinet suitable for both recessed and surface mounting. Cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rustresistant prime coat, and manufacturer's standard finish.2.Cabinet shall contain all necessary relays, terminals, lamps, and legend plates to provide control for the system.D.Power Supply:1.The control unit shall derive its normal power from a 120 volt, 60 Hz dedicated supply connected to the emergency power system. Standby power shall be provided by a 24 volt DC battery as hereinafter specified. The normal power shall be transformed, rectified, coordinated, and interfaced with the standby battery and charger.2.The door holder power shall be arranged so that momentary or sustained loss of main operating power shall not cause the release of any door.3.Power supply for new smoke detectors shall be taken from the addressable fire alarm control unit.4.Provide protectors to protect the fire alarm equipment from damage due to lightning or voltage and current transients.5.Provide new separate and direct ground lines to the outside to protect the equipment from unwanted grounds.E.Circuit Supervision: Each alarm initiating device circuit, signaling line circuit, and notification appliance circuit, shall be supervised against the occurrence of a break or ground fault condition in the field wiring. These conditions shall cause a trouble signal to sound in the control unit until manually silenced by an off switch.F.Supervisory Devices: All sprinkler system valves, standpipe control valves, post indicator valves (PIV), and main gate valves shall be supervised for offnormal position. Closing a valve shall sound a supervisory signal at the control unit until silenced by an off switch. The specific location of all closed valves shall be identified at the control unit. Valve operation shall not cause an alarm signal. Low air pressure switches and duct detectors shall be monitored as supervisory signals. The power supply to the elevator shunt trip breaker shall be monitored by the fire alarm system as a supervisory signal.G.Trouble signals:1.Arrange the trouble signals for automatic reset (nonlatching).2.System trouble switch off and on lamps shall be visible through the control unit door.H.Function Switches: Provide the following switches in addition to any other switches required for the system:1.Remote Alarm Transmission By-pass Switch: Shall prevent transmission of all signals to the main fire alarm control unit when in the "off" position. A system trouble signal shall be energized when switch is in the off position.2.Alarm Off Switch: Shall disconnect power to alarm notification circuits on the local building alarm system. A system trouble signal shall be activated when switch is in the off position. 3.Trouble Silence Switch: Shall silence the trouble signal whenever the trouble silence switch is operated. This switch shall not reset the trouble signal.4.Reset Switch: Shall reset the system after an alarm, provided the initiating device has been reset. The system shall lock in alarm until reset.5.Lamp Test Switch: A test switch or other approved convenient means shall be provided to test the indicator lamps.6.Drill Switch: Shall activate all notification devices without tripping the remote alarm transmitter. This switch is required only for general evacuation systems specified herein.7.Door Holder By-Pass Switch: Shall prevent doors from releasing during fire alarm tests. A system trouble alarm shall be energized when switch is in the abnormal position.8.Elevator recall By-Pass Switch: Shall prevent the elevators from recalling upon operation of any of the devices installed to perform that function. A system trouble alarm shall be energized when the switch is in the abnormal position.9.HVAC/Smoke Damper By-Pass: Provide a means to disable HVAC fans from shutting down and/or smoke dampers from closing upon operation of an initiating device designed to interconnect with these devices.I.Remote Transmissions:1.Provide capability and equipment for transmission of alarm, supervisory and trouble signals to the main fire alarm control unit.2.Transmitters shall be compatible with the systems and equipment they are connected to such as timing, operation and other required features.J.Remote Control Capability: Each building fire alarm control unit shall be installed and programmed so that each must be reset locally after an alarm, before the main fire alarm control unit can be reset. After the local building fire alarm control unit has been reset, then the all system acknowledge, reset, silence or disabling functions can be operated by the main fire alarm control unitK.System Expansion: Design the control units and enclosures so that the system can be expanded in the future (to include the addition of 20 percent more alarm initiating, alarm notification and door holder circuits) without disruption or replacement of the existing control unit and secondary power supply.2.4 STANDBY POWER SUPPLYA.Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS):1.The UPS system shall be comprised of a static inverter, a precision battery float charger, and sealed maintenance free batteries.2.Under normal operating conditions, the load shall be filtered through a ferroresonant transformer.3.When normal AC power fails, the inverter shall supply AC power to the transformer from the battery source. There shall be no break in output of the system during transfer of the system from normal to battery supply or back to normal.4.Batteries shall be sealed, gel cell type.5.UPS system shall be sized to operate the central processor, CRT, printer, and all other directly connected equipment for 5 minutes upon a normal AC power failure.B.Batteries:1.Battery shall be of the sealed, maintenance free type, 24-volt nominal.2.Battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than 24 hours plus 5 minutes of alarm to an end voltage of 1.14 volts per cell, upon a normal AC power failure.3.Battery racks shall be steel with an alkaliresistant finish. Batteries shall be secured in seismic areas 2B, 3, or 4 as defined by the Uniform Building Code.C.Battery Charger:1.Shall be completely automatic, with constant potential charger maintaining the battery fully charged under all service conditions. Charger shall operate from a 120volt, 60 hertz emergency power source. 2.Shall be rated for fully charging a completely discharged battery within 48 hours while simultaneously supplying any loads connected to the battery. 3.Shall have protection to prevent discharge through the charger.4.Shall have protection for overloads and short circuits on both AC and DC sides.5.A trouble condition shall actuate the fire alarm trouble signal.6.Charger shall have automatic AC line voltage regulation, automatic current-limiting features, and adjustable voltage controls.2.5 ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCESA.Strobes:1.Xenon flash tube type minimum 15 candela in toilet rooms and 75 candela in all other areas with a flash rate of 1 HZ. Strobes shall be synchronized where required by the National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72).2.Backplate shall be red with 1/2 inch (13 mm) permanent red letters. Lettering to read "Fire", be oriented on the wall or ceiling properly, and be visible from all viewing directions.3.Each strobe circuit shall have a minimum of 20 percent spare capacity.4.Strobes may be combined with the audible notification appliances specified herein.B.Horns:1.Shall be electric, utilizing solid state electronic technology operating on a nominal 24 VDC.2.Shall be a minimum nominal rating of 80 dBA at 10 feet (3,000 mm).3.Mount on removable adapter plates on conduit boxes.4.Horns located outdoors shall be of weatherproof type with metal housing and protective grille.5.Each horn circuit shall have a minimum of 20 percent spare capacity.2.6 ALARM INITIATING DEVICESA.Manual Fire Alarm Stations:1.Shall be non-breakglass, address reporting type.2.Station front shall be constructed of a durable material such as cast or extruded metal or high impact plastic. Stations shall be semiflush type.3.Stations shall be of single action pull down type with suitable operating instructions provided on front in raised or depressed letters, and clearly labeled "FIRE".4.Operating handles shall be constructed of a durable material. On operation, the lever shall lock in alarm position and remain so until reset. A key shall be required to gain front access for resetting, or conducting tests and drills.5.Unless otherwise specified, all exposed parts shall be red in color and have a smooth, hard, durable finish.B.Smoke Detectors:1.Smoke detectors shall be photoelectric type and UL listed for use with the fire alarm control unit being furnished.2.Smoke detectors shall be addressable type complying with applicable UL Standards for system type detectors. Smoke detectors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 72.3.Detectors shall have an indication lamp to denote an alarm condition. Provide remote indicator lamps and identification plates where detectors are concealed from view. Locate the remote indicator lamps and identification plates flush mounted on walls so they can be observed from a normal standing position.4.All spot type and duct type detectors installed shall be of the photoelectric type.5.Photoelectric detectors shall be factory calibrated and readily field adjustable. The sensitivity of any photoelectric detector shall be factory set at 3.0 plus or minus 0.25 percent obscuration per foot.6.Detectors shall provide a visual trouble indication if they drift out of sensitivity range or fail internal diagnostics. Detectors shall also provide visual indication of sensitivity level upon testing. Detectors, along with the fire alarm control units shall be UL listed for testing the sensitivity of the detectors.C.Heat Detectors:1.Heat detectors shall be of the addressable restorable rate compensated fixedtemperature spot type. 2.Detectors shall have a minimum smooth ceiling rating of 2,500 square feet (230 square meters).3.Ordinary temperature (135 degrees F (57 degrees C)) heat detectors shall be utilized in // elevator shafts and // elevator mechanical rooms. Intermediate temperature rated (200 degrees F (93 degrees C)) heat detectors shall be utilized in all other areas.4.Provide a remote indicator lamp, key test station and identification nameplate (e.g. “Heat Detector - Elevator P- ?) for each elevator group. Locate key test station in plain view on elevator machine room wall.D.Water Flow and Pressure Switches:1.Wet pipe water flow switches and dry pipe alarm pressure switches for sprinkler systems shall be connected to the fire alarm system by way of an address reporting interface device.2.All new water flow switches shall be of a single manufacturer and series and nonaccumulative retard type. FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES and Section 21 13 13, WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS for new switches added. Connect all switches shown on the approved shop drawings.3.All new switches shall have an alarm transmission delay time that is conveniently adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds. Initial settings shall be 30-45 seconds. Timing shall be recorded and documented during testing.E.Extinguishing System Connections:1.Kitchen Range Hood and Duct Suppression Systems:a.Each suppression system shall be equipped with a micro-switch connected to the building fire alarm control unit. Discharge of a suppression system shall automatically send a alarm signal to the building fire detection and alarm system for annunciation.b.Operation of this suppression system shall also automatically shut off all sources of fuel and heat to all equipment requiring protection under the same hood.2.Each gaseous suppression system shall be monitored for system alarm and system trouble conditions via addressable interface devices.2.7 SUPERVISORY DEVICESA.Duct Smoke Detectors:1.Duct smoke detectors shall be provided and connected by way of an address reporting interface device. Detectors shall be provided with an approved duct housing mounted exterior to the duct, and shall have perforated sampling tubes extending across the full width of the duct (wall to wall). Detector placement shall be such that there is uniform airflow in the cross section of the duct.2.Interlocking with fans shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 90A and as specified hereinafter under Part 3.2, "TYPICAL OPERATION". 3.Provide remote indicator lamps, key test stations and identification nameplates (e.g. "DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR AHU-X") for all duct detectors. Locate key test stations in plain view on walls or ceilings so that they can be observed and operated from a normal standing position.B.Sprinkler and Standpipe System Supervisory Switches:1.Each sprinkler system water supply control valve, riser valve or zone control valve, and each standpipe system riser control valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch. Standpipe hose valves, and test and drain valves shall not be equipped with supervisory switches.2.PIV (post indicator valve) or main gate valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch.3.Valve supervisory switches shall be connected to the fire alarm system by way of address reporting interface device. See Section 21 13 13, WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS for new switches to be added. Connect tamper switches for all control valves shown on the approved shop drawings. 4.The mechanism shall be contained in a weatherproof diecast aluminum housing that shall provide a 3/4 inch (19 mm) tapped conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary facilities for attachment to the valves.5.The entire installed assembly shall be tamperproof and arranged to cause a switch operation if the housing cover is removed or if the unit is removed from its mounting.2.8 ADDRESS REPORTING INTERFACE DEVICEA.Shall have unique addresses that reports directly to the addressable fire alarm panel.B.Shall be configurable to monitor normally open or normally closed devices for both alarm and trouble conditions.C.Shall have terminal designations clearly differentiating between the circuit to which they are reporting from and the device that they are monitoring.D.Shall be UL listed for fire alarm use and compatibility with the panel to which they are connected.E.Shall be mounted in weatherproof housings if mounted exterior to a building.2.9 UTILITY LOCKS AND KEYS:A.All key operated test switches, control units, annunciator panels and lockable cabinets shall be provided with a single standardized utility lock and key.B.Key-operated manual fire alarm stations shall have a single standardized lock and key separate from the control equipment.C.All keys shall be delivered to the COTR.2.10 SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTSA.Provide spare and replacement parts as follows:1.Manual pull stations - 53.Heat detectors - 2 of each type4.Fire alarm strobes - 56.Smoke detectors - 207.Duct smoke detectors with all appurtenances - 18.Sprinkler system water flow switch - 1 of each size9.Sprinkler system water pressure switch - 1 of each type10.Sprinkler valve tamper switch - 1 of each type11.Control equipment utility locksets - 512.Control equipment keys - 2515.Monitor modules - 316.Control modules - 317.Fire alarm SLC cable (same as installed) – 500 feet (152 m)C.Spare and replacement parts shall be in original packaging and submitted to the COTR.D.Furnish and install a storage cabinet of sufficient size and suitable for storing spare equipment. Doors shall include a pad locking device. Padlock to be provided by the VA. Location of cabinet to be determined by the COTR.E.Provide to the VA, all hardware, software, programming tools, license and documentation necessary to permanently modify the fire alarm system on site. The minimum level of modification includes addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system description, system operation, and digitized evacuation and instructional messages.2.11 INSTRUCTION CHART:Provide a typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame with a backplate. Install the frame in a conspicuous location observable from each control unit where operations are performed. The card shall show those steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is received under all conditions, normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble. Provide an additional copy with the binder for the input output matrix for the sequence of operation. The instructions shall be approved by the COTR before being posted.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATION:A.Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, 72, 90A, and 101 as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer. Fire alarm wiring shall be installed in conduit. All conduit and wire shall be installed in accordance with, Section 26 05 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS, Section 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEAMS, Section 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS, and all penetrations of smoke and fire barriers shall be protected as required by Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.B.All conduits, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas.C.All new and reused exposed conduits shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 91 00, PAINTING to match surrounding finished areas and red in unfinished areas. D.All existing accessible fire alarm conduit not reused shall be removed.E.Existing devices that are reused shall be properly mounted and installed. Where devices are installed on existing shallow backboxes, extension rings of the same material, color and texture of the new fire alarm devices shall be used. Mounting surfaces shall be cut and patched in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Restoration, and be repainted in accordance with Section 09 91 00, PAINTING as necessary to match existing.F.All fire detection and alarm system devices, control units and remote annunciators shall be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas. Exact locations are to be approved by the COTR.H.Strobes shall be flush wall mounted with the bottom of the unit located 80 inches (2,000 mm) above the floor or 6 inches (150 mm) below ceiling, whichever is lower. Locate and mount to maintain a minimum 36 inches (900 mm) clearance from side obstructions.I.Manual pull stations shall be installed not less than 42 inches (1,050 mm) or more than 48 inches (1,200 mm) from finished floor to bottom of device and within 60 inches (1,500 mm) of a stairway or an exit door.J.Where possible, locate water flow and pressure switches a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) from a fitting that changes the direction of the flow and a minimum of 36 inches (900 mm) from a valve.K.Mount valve tamper switches so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve and adjust to operate within 2 revolutions toward the closed position of the valve control, or when the stem has moved no more than 1/5 of the distance from its normal position.L.Connect flow and tamper switches installed under Section 21 13 13, WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS.M.Connect combination closer-holders installed under Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE. 3.2 TYPICAL OPERATIONA.Activation of any manual pull station, water flow or pressure switch, heat detector, kitchen hood suppression system, gaseous suppression system, or smoke detector shall cause the following operations to occur:1.For sprinkler protected buildings, flash strobes continuously only in the zone of alarm. For buildings without sprinkler protection throughout, flash strobes continuously only on the floor of alarm.2.Continuously sound a temporal pattern general alarm and flash all strobes in the building in alarm until reset at the local fire alarm control unit in Building.3.Release only the magnetic door holders in the smoke zone on the floor from which alarm was initiated after the alert signal.4.Transmit a separate alarm signal, via the main fire alarm control unit to the fire department.5.Unlock the electrically locked exit doors within the zone of alarm.B.Heat detectors in elevator machine rooms shall, in addition to the above functions, disconnect all power to all elevators served by that machine room after a time delay. The time delay shall be programmed within the fire alarm system programming and be equal to the time it takes for the car to travel from the highest to the lowest level, plus 10 seconds.C.Smoke detectors in the remaining elevator lobbies, elevator machine room, or top of hoistway shall, in addition to the above functions, return all elevators in the bank to the primary floor.D.Operation of a smoke detector at a corridor door used for automatic closing shall also release only the magnetic door holders on that floor in that smoke zone . F.Operation of duct smoke detectors shall cause a system supervisory condition and shut down the ventilation system and close the associated smoke dampers as appropriate.E.Operation of any sprinkler or standpipe system valve supervisory switch, high/low air pressure switch, or fire pump alarm switch shall cause a system supervisory condition.F.Alarm verification shall not be used for smoke detectors installed for the purpose of early warning.3.3 TESTSA.Provide the service of a NICET level III, competent, factorytrained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. Make all adjustments and tests in the presence of the COTR.B.When the systems have been completed and prior to the scheduling of the final inspection, furnish testing equipment and perform the following tests in the presence of the COTR. When any defects are detected, make repairs or install replacement components, and repeat the tests until such time that the complete fire alarm systems meets all contract requirements. After the system has passed the initial test and been approved by the COTR, the contractor may request a final inspection.1.Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.2.Test the insulation on all installed cable and wiring by standard methods as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. 3.Run water through all flow switches. Check time delay on water flow switches. Submit a report listing all water flow switch operations and their retard time in seconds.4.Open each alarm initiating and notification circuit to see if trouble signal actuates.5.Ground each alarm initiation and notification circuit and verify response of trouble signals.3.4 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCEA.Prior to final acceptance a minimum 30 day "burnin" period shall be provided. The purpose shall be to allow equipment to stabilize and potential installation and software problems and equipment malfunctions to be identified and corrected. During this diagnostic period, all system operations and malfunctions shall be recorded. Final acceptance will be made upon successful completion of the "burnin" period and where the last 14 days is without a system or equipment malfunction.B.At the final inspection a factory trained representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall repeat the tests in Article 3.3 TESTS and those required by NFPA 72. In addition the representative shall demonstrate that the systems function properly in every respect. The demonstration shall be made in the presence of a VA representative.3.5 INSTRUCTIONA.The manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide instruction and training to the VA as follows:1.Six 1-hour sessions to engineering staff, security police and central attendant personnel for simple operation of the system. Two sessions at the start of installation, 2 sessions at the completion of installation and 2 sessions 3 months after the completion of installation.2.Four 2hour sessions to engineering staff for detailed operation of the system. Two sessions at the completion of installation and 2 sessions 3 months after the completion of installation.3.Three 8-hour sessions to electrical technicians for maintaining, programming, modifying, and repairing the system at the completion of installation and one 8-hour refresher session 3 months after the completion of installation.B.The Contractor and/or the Systems Manufacturer's representative shall provide a typewritten "Sequence of Operation" including a trouble shooting guide of the entire system for submittal to the VA. The sequence of operation will be shown for each input in the system in a matrix format and provided in a loose leaf binder. When reading the sequence of operation, the reader will be able to quickly and easily determine what output will occur upon activation of any input in the system. The INPUT/OUTPUT matrix format shall be as shown in Appendix A to NFPA 72.C.Furnish the services of a competent instructor for instructing personnel in the programming requirements necessary for system expansion. Such programming shall include addition or deletion of devices, zones, indicating circuits and printer/display text.E N D SECTION 28 31 00 ................
................
In order to avoid copyright disputes, this page is only a partial summary.
To fulfill the demand for quickly locating and searching documents.
It is intelligent file search solution for home and business.
Related searches
- 10 isindex type image src 1 onerror ngmv 9811 example of epic story
- 1 or 3 2 0 5 374 374 168 1 1 default username and password
- 1 or 3 2 0 5 711 711 168 1 1 default username and password
- 1 or 3 2 0 5 693 693 168 1 1 default username and password
- 1 or 3 2 0 5 593 593 or 2dvchrbu 168 1 1 default username and password
- 1 or 3 2 0 5 910 910 168 1 1 default username and password
- 1 or 3 2 0 5 364 364 168 1 1 admin username and password
- 192 1 or 3 2 0 5 33 33 1 1 default username and password
- 1 or 3 2 0 5 633 633 168 1 1 admin username and password
- 192 1 or 3 2 0 5 735 735 1 1 default username and password
- 1 or 3 2 0 5 948 948 168 1 1 admin username and password
- 192 1 or 3 2 0 5 372 372 1 1 default username and password